Portuguese conversation-grammar

m inLmMMM^

■^ i 3 5'"' "-^ "'

,<! Vm./ /•„( '-..-i'

»1#

4iJ:

i|: fl i:? |||t:i

CORNELL

UNIVERSITY

LIBRARY

Gift of the
CHARLES M. TAYLOR ESTATE

The original of tliis book is in
tine Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026577472

METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER.

PORTUGUESE
CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR

BY

LOUISE JY,

TEACHER OP THE PORTUGUHSB LANGUAGE AT THE COLONIAL INSTITUTE AND THE
SUPERIOR COMMERCIAL SCHOOL IN HAMBURG.

LONDON.

DAVID NUTT, 67—59 Long Acre, W. C. DULAU & CO., 37 Soho Square, W.

SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON & CO., 100 Soutliwaik Stieet, S.E.

NEW YORK: BRENTANO'S, Fifth Avenue and 27th Street.

DYESEN & PFEIPFER (CHEISTERN'S), 16 West 38rd Street.

THE INTERNATIONAL NEWS COMPANY, 83 and 85 Duane Street.

G. E. STECHERT & CO., 161—155 West 25th Street.

E. STEIGER & CO., 25 Park Place.

BOSTON: RITTER & FLEBBE, formerly C. A.KCEHLEE & CO., 120 Boylston Str.

THE SCHOENHOP BOOK CO., 128 Tremont Street.

HEIDELBERG.

JULIUS GEOOS.
1912.

The Gaspey -Otto-SaQer Method has become my sole property by
right of purchase. These books are continually revised. All rights,
especially those of adaptation and translation into any language, are
reserved. Imitations and copies are forbidden by law. Any informatiou
as to infringement of my rights always thankfully received.

London, Paris, Rome, St. Petersburgh, Heidelberg. J'uHus Groos,

S^^'^^d

Preface.

This Portuguese Grammar is an adaptation of my
"Neue Portugiesische Konversations-Grammatik," issued
in 1910 by the same publisher, Julius Groos, of Heidel-
berg, who, in consideration of the extremely favourable
reception that work met with in German-speaking and
Portuguese -speaking countries, commissioned me to
compile a Portuguese Grammar for English use. This
work I undertook the more readily, as the close rela-
tionship existing between Great Britain and her Portu-
guese ally, the increasing commercial intercourse between
the two nations, and the evergrowing needs of tourists,
demand further means of linguistic correspondence.

In this Grammar, as well as in that employed as
a model, I have tried to overcome one of the greatest
difficulties of the Portuguese language — i.e., the pro-
nunciation — by adopting the phonetical system of the
Association phonetiqiie internationale. It was carefully
applied to the Portuguese language by Sr. Goncjalves
Viana, who also kindly revised the chapter on Pro-
nunciation in this grammar.

As for the orthography — the difficulty of which is
next in importance to the phonetical one, as hitherto
the Portuguese have apparently considered this as a
problem to be solved individually — I have employed
that given in the "N6vo DiccionArio da Lingua portu-
gu6sa," by Candido de FigueirSdo, member of the Aca-
demy of Sciences in Lisbon, which tends to simplify
the writing and to facilitate the pronunciation of Por-
tuguese.

IV Preface.

In compiling the Exercises I have felt the desira-
bility of furnishing objective material— so far as this
is compatible with the grammatical Rules to be worked
out — in the form of imaginative pictures. Further, I
have aimed at making the student acquainted not only
with the language, but with the countries where Por-
tuguese is spoken — vi^., Portugal and Brazil — by giving
a geographical, historical, and cultural view of them.

Wishing to make use, so far as is possible, of
original Portuguese in the Reading Exercises, and this
of the purest and most popular kind, I was fortunate
enough to fall in with what proved to be a real mine
of legitimate linguistic gold, both in subject and in the
form in which it is presented. The student will notice
that the greater part of the Reading lessons is taken
from Trindade Coelho, a modern Portuguese writer
who is acknowledged to be the most accomplished in
popular language, whose literary excellence has been
recognised, and whose tragic destiny has called forth
expression of sympathetic sorrow wherever he has been
known. I have profited by this great pedagogue's
three "Livros de Leitura," described as "wonderful
reading-books for public instruction" by Dr. Carolina
Michaelis de Vasconcellos, the learned woman, respected
by all Romanists, hitherto holding a professorship in
the University of Lisbon.

These three books have been appreciatively referred
to by the Portuguese school-inspector, Senhor Brito
Moreno, in the Givilisagao Popular, a highly respected
pedagogical review, as "the very best of their kind to be
found in Portugal, as they combine an extreme clearness
with a lively and characteristic performance, uniting an
amiable simplicity to an honest conviction"^ and, we
may perhaps be allowed to add, a sincere devotion for
the subject to the utmost consideration for the reader.

Preface. V

I am gratified at finding that Portuguese and Bra-
zilian critics declare my selection of reading material
to be the most meritorious feature of my "Neue Por-
tugiesische Konversations-Grammatik" (which contains
substantially the same exercises as the present work),
while German critics highly appreciate the advantage
of being introduced through this medium to the Por-
tuguese countries and customs as to a home worthy of
our fullest sympathy and esteem.

I beg to express here my sincerest thanks to Mr.
W. G. Priest, of London, for his assistance in revising
the English portion of the work. Should any student
of Portuguese, in using this Grammar, meet with errors
or defects, I shall be grateful if he or she will com-
municate with me, in order that I may be able to
rectify the same in future editions.

Pinneberg (Holstein), October 1911.

Louise Ey.

VI

Eemarks on the Kecent Reform of
Portuguese Orthography.

While this Grammar was in course of preparation
— when, in fact, nearly the whole of the work had been
printed — the Portuguese Government officially adopted
the Reform of Orthography recommended by a Com-
mission of members of the Academia das Sciencias. In
order, however, to avoid, the confusion that would re-
sult from the universal application of so drastic an
alteration in spelling, its operation is for the present
limited to the "Diario do Governo" and official docu-
ments, the schools being accorded a period of three
years in which to accustom themselves to the change.

It has, therefore, not been considered advisable to
alter the orthography of this Grammar, more particularly
as all Portuguese literature is, of course, still written
in the style of spelling hitherto employed. At the
same time, it is obviously desirable that students of
the Portuguese language should acquaint themselves
with and prepare for the new method; accordingly, in
the Vocabulary at the end of the book, the letters ex-
cluded by the Reform have been indicated by paren-
theses, which system especially tends to establish a
concordance between the orthography and the phonetical
rendering.

The principal alterations are: the avoidance of
doubled consonants where only one is pronounced [hi,
ff, gg, II, mm, nn, pp, W— now &, f, g, I, etc.); the
omission of the li in its combinations of th or ch (= h,
this sound being substituted by c or qu, e.g., patriarca,
quimica), also its omission from the interior of words

Remark on the Recent Reform of Portuguese Orthography. YII

(e.g., proibir, coerente), even in those which conserve
the initial Ti — justified by etymology — when compounded
with a prefix. Thus the new orthography will be : haver,
hoje, homem, honra, but: ontem, desumano, desonra, etc.
Instead of ph, f will be written : fotografo.

It is obvious, of course, that the doubled ss and rr
cannot be reduced to single s and r, as the pronun-
ciation would thereby be altered. Also the mm and nn
are conserved when the first m or n is nasal (e.g., em-
moldurar, ennervar).

For the accentuation, we have to distinguish., as
hitherto, by a graphical accent the tonical vowel of
those words which for want of some characteristic mark
might be confounded; e.g., sede, sede; gosto, m., gosto, v.
Also those words ending by the generally atonic syllable
-em, -ens are marked by a ' when this syllable is
tonical; e.g., contem contains (cf. contem they count),
porem however (cf. porem of por), armasem, armazens
magazine(s).

As the Reform admits —though it does not pres-
cribe — the vowels e and o to be written e and 6 wherever
they have the close pronunciation, it has been thought
convenient for the student, to accentuate them where
any doubt might arise, it being understood that the
tonical endings -oso and -or are always -oso and -or,
the latter presenting the following exceptions^: major,
suor, onelhor, peor, maior, menor, where the o is pro-
nounced 0, similar to the English a in "all."

These being the chief alterations, the remainder,
of a slighter nature, will be presented in a future
edition.

^ In sdror the ending -or is also or, but it is not tonical.

L. E.

vm

Index.

First Part.

Pronunciation. ^^s®-

§ 1. The Sounds of the Portuguese .... 1

§ 2. Types 1

§ 3. Auxiliary Signs of the Portuguese Alphabet 2

§ 4. Stress and Duration 3

§ 5. Vowels 3

§ 6. Diphthongs 6

§ 7. Nasal Vowels and Diphthongs .... 8

§ 8. Triphthongs 8

§ 9. Consonants 9

§ 10. Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters . 11
§ 11. Summary of the Phonetic Signs in their

Relation to the Port. Alphabet ... 12

§ 12. Accentuation ... 13

§ 13. Syllabication . . U

§ 14. Homonyms 15

§ 15. Homographs 16

§ 16. Abbreviations 17

§ 17. Punctuation 18

1st Lesson. The Gender of the Noun and the Article 20 — 24

Na Escola.

2nd » The Plural of Substantives .... 24—30

3ra » The Address 30—36

4th » The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective 36—40

5tli » The Auxiliary Verb estar 40 — 46

Lisboa.

Qfh » The Auxiliary Verb haver .... 46 — 52

Os verbos auxiliares.

7th s Employment and Concord of Tenses . 52—59

Index. IX

Page,
gth Lesson. Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs . . 59 — 64
Quintal e drvores.
Jardim e flores.
hordrio.

gth » The Partitive Article 64—68

Befeigoes.
lOtt" » The Complements and the most Frequent

Prepositions 68—72

Numa loja.
11*11 » The Attributive Adjective in Gender and

Number 72—78

A visita.
12tii » The Position of the Attributive Ad-
jective 78-83

A hahitagao.
IStii » Comparison of the Adjective .... 83—88

A trovoada.
14th » The Absolute Comparative and Super-
lative 88—93

Portugal.
15tli » The Numerals: I. Cardinal Numbers . 93—99

A ligdo d' arithmitica.
IBtli !> The Numerals: 11. Ordinal Numbers . 99—106

syatema decimal ou mitrico.
17tli » The Numerals: III. Multiplicative Num-
bers 106—111

Prohlemas de muUiplicaeao.
18tl» » Regular Verbs: First Conjugation.

A. Simple Tenses 111—120

Ao deitar-se e levantar-se.
igtli » Regular Verbs: First Conjugation. B. Com-
pound Tenses 120—128

linho.

The Tower of Belem.
20*11 » Pronominal or Reflective Verbs . . .128-137
Alimentagao. Solicitagao d'um emprego.
The Foot and the Sand. The Egg
and the Nut.
21st ,) Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations . 137—146

The Studious Pupil and the Lazy.

X Index.

Page.
22^1 Lesson. Phonetical and Orthographical Peculia-
rities of Otherwise Regular Verbs . . 146 — 154
algodao. As pelles.
The Seamstress. The Tailor.
23rd „ Exercises on the Full Verbs .... 154—160

As batatas. As frutas; a lavra; a
sementeira; a grade; a monda
Conselhos duma mde etc.
vaqueiro.
24*11 s On the Pronouns: Personal Pronouns . 161^168

espinheiro maldoso. cao e a
vacca. The Faithful Dogs.
25th » On the Pronouns: Demonstrative and

Possessive Pronouns 168 — 174

A vlbora e a cobra. mocko.
26tb » On the Pronouns: Interrogative and Re-
lative Pronouns 174 — 181

Wum album.
27tli - On the Pronouns: Indefinite Pronouns 182—186

lido e a raposa. The Nut.

28tii » The Irregular Verbs 186—194

cdbrito e o lobo.
29th » The Irregular Verbs (continued) . . . 195—201

Annuncios. Building.
30th „ The Irregular Verbs of the Third Con-
jugation 201—209

Carta. Bequerimentos.
31=^' ' Impersonal and Defective Verbs . . . 209—216

Muu tempo. Anniincios. Correio.
32nd ,, Verbs with a Double Participle . . . 216 — 221

33rd ,) The Adverbs 221 228

Os Pessegos. Soneto.

34th » The Conjunctions 228 236

A andorinha.

35* i> Interjections 236 239

No theatro. Na rua.

Index. XI

Second Part.
First DMslon: Flection.

Page,
1st Lesson. The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns 240—246

Gaule, troneo ou haste.
2iia » The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns

(continued) 246—255

Voges d'animaes.
B^3. » The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns:

Compound Nouns 255 — 261

A Lusitdnia.
4tli » Formation of the Plural of the Nouns . 261—266

Nuvens.
5tli J Formation of the Plural of the Nouns

(continued) 266—270

Tomada de Santarem.
6tli » Use of the Article 271—278

Portugal continental e insular.
7th ,> Use of the Article (continued) . . . 278—284

Portugal ultramarino.
8tli i> Omission of the Article 284—291

Joao I.

Second Division: Syntax.

gth Lesson. Congruence 291—296

Joao I (continued).
lOth » Intransitive and Transitive Verbs. Com-

plements without Preposition . . . 296—301
Tomada de Santarem.
lltli » The Complement preceded by de and a 301—307

A preposigao i-det.
12tli » Eemarks on the Prepositions . . . 308—318

A emigragao portuguesa.
13th , Prepositions (continued): How to Ex-

press Certain English Prepositions . 313—320
automdvel.
14th s Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts

of Speech; Possessive Pronouns . . 321 — 324
Carta ao Sr. G. P.

XII Index.

Page.
15tli Lesson. Syntactic Peculiarities of Personal Pro-
nouns 324 — 328

Trecho de v-Guerreiro e Mongei>.
16"! » Syntactic Peculiarities of Personal Pro-
nouns (continued) 328 — 332

Dia no campo.
A Cigarra e a formiga.
ITth » Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative,

Relative and Indefinite Pronouns . . 382 — 336
The Whistle.

trahalho physico e mental.
18'1> » Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and

Participles ... • 336—341

terremoto de Lisboa.
19th „ The Gerund and the Periphrastical Con-
jugation ... 341 — 346

BrasU.

20tii » Tenses of the Indicative 346—354

Extract from Pwtuguese History.

21st „ The Subjunctive Mood 354—360

Passeio & Bivieira portuguesa.
22na ,, The Subjunctive Mood (continued) . . 360-364

Dom Jodo de Castro.
23r<i I. The Subjunctive Mood: Future Tense . 364—368

Consiglieri Pedroso e o accordo luso-
hrasileiro.
24tii „ The Infinitive: I. General Use . . . 368 — 371

Eodrigues de Freitas.
2Stii » II. Use of the Personal and the Im-

personal Forms of the Infinitive.

III. The Independent Infinitive . . 372 374

rato. Uao e a lebre.
26tii » IV. The Dependent Infinitive (without

preposition) 374_37q

On Education of Children.
A 'iignorancia'^ do povo portugues.
27tti » IV. The Dependent Infinitive (with pre-
ceding de) 879—382

Letter to a Friend.
A respiragdo.

Index. Xni

Page.
28tii Lesson. IV. The Dependent Infinitive (with pre-
ceding a) . ■ 382—388

Women as SUkworni-breeders.
A Mulher portuguha como serici-
cultora.

29th , Construction 888-390

Preparation of Olive-oil.

Supplement 391—405

English-Portuguese Vocabulary 406—420

Portuguese-English Vocahulary 421—457

— ^-

XIV

Errata.

Page 5, Bemark II, instead of border, read: bordar.
» 8, 1. 7 from below, instead of pvu, read : pvu.

» 11, 1. 3 from above, instead of [u^'tivjius] , read: [us'bvjiuj] .
» 17, § 16 is to be added: V'iS<^= Vossa Senhoria.
» 40, 1. 6tii, instead of Coimbra is, read: Coimbra was.
» 61, 1. 3rd from belo-w, inst. of tanto, read: tanta.
» 63, Falavras, inst. of irraki'etii, read: irrfky'etu.
» 66, Palawas, inst. of levantar to get up, etc.
a mesa to rise, etc.
read: levantar a mesa to rise etc.
» 98, 1. 3^3 from the end of the Exercise, inst. of As Por-
tugal . . ■ has, read : As Portugal had.
» 98, 1. Btli of 39, inst. of so many hundreds, read : so many

tens, the next so many hundreds.
» 98, 1. 15tii of 39, inst. of § 106, read § 105.
» 110, 1. 5th of 43, inst. of Twice five times five, read: Twice

the fivefold of five.
» 110, 1. 7*1' of 43, inst. of men where, read: men were.
» 185, title of 48, inst. of Alimentago, read: Alimentagao.
From the page 226 until the end of the 1st part the exercises

87 — 95 are to have the numbers of 92 — 100.
Page 290, 1. 8, inst. of saltisfying, read: satisfying.
» 290, N" 22, title, inst. of Jao, read: Joao.
» 353, 1. 3ra, inst. of 1583, read: 1383.

-<^e>-

First Part.

Pronunciation.

§ 1. The Sounds of the Portuguese.

The Portuguese orthography corresponds only im-
perfectly to the pronunciation. And there are signs
(as the til, the cedilla, the accents) and sounds (as the
nasal vowels, the Ih, the nh), which do not exist in the
English language. To give an idea of the Portuguese
pronunciation next to accuracy, we have had to recur to
a phonetic transcription and adopted that of the Asso-
ciation phonetique internationale. In order to be easily
distinguished from the remaining text, the phonetic
signs are invariably put in parenthesis. Each of these
signs represents always the same sound, and each sound
is always given by the same figure. If you want to
acquire the most possible correctness in speaking the
Portuguese idiom, please to pay a careful attention to
the phonetics. Whenever you have an opportunity, let
the sounds be pronounced to you by a native of Lisbon,
the pronunciation of the Portuguese capital being the
one adopted for this grammar.

Be careful also in distinguishing voiced sounds
from dumb ones, in vowels as well as in consonants.

§ 2. Types.

The Portuguese letters are equal to the English,
but their denomination is different for the most part.
The vowels and also some of the consonants have
several different values. In the alphabetic list here-
after we give their alphabetic value which mostly cor-
responds to their names:

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 1

2 Pronunciation.

Character. Name. Character. Name.

a a (like a in bar) p pe (as in pay)

h be (as in lay) q ke (llke the first syllable

i . '" , -^ in leali)

C

^ { • \ 1^ kail)

Se [1> S in say) ^. (er)re (as in ere or re .

rf de ( » in day) followed by a con-

T ) • ' \ sonant)

e e ^ai » atr) g (es)se (ute in English)

f (ef)fe (as in English) ^ ^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^

q ge (as in gentle, but of tailor)

without the initial d) ^ ^ jj^g ^g)

/, agd (dumb) ^ ^^ ^^^ i„ ,,i„)

i_ (ee m deep) .^ ^^ dobrado

^' ii (as in js'ff, but without (the English m>

■; '^^ *°*"^.' * , ^ chis (= shisb, like

K J£a (the a as in Oar) \^

I (el)le (as in English) . *f)- .

> ' I ,..„,, vN V 1 greeo (as m English)

m (em)me (as in English) ^ ^6 8"^

>„„\„„ , , Ze (as in English).

)i (en)ne ( • » ■ )

6 (like ow in law)

Bemark. The letter 7c is to be found in very few Por-
tuguese words, as kysto cyst; else (as also w) only in foreign
words.

§ 3. Auxiliary Signs of the Portuguese Alphabet.

1. The accents, which mark not only the tonical
accentuation, but also the colouring of a vowel, are
well to be distinguished from the French accents.

(a) The acute accent (') may be put upon any
vowel, conferring to it, besides the tonical accen-
tuation, an open, ringing sound: md, si, alii, fara,
lialu'i.

(b) The circumflex C^) gives to the (tonical) vowel
a dim and closed sound : chamdmos, sede, corte (cf. :
chamdmos, sede, corte).

(c) The grave accent (') is not obligatory. Where-
ever it is to be found (upon a, e or o), it denotes
the open sound of an unaccented syllable (pddeiro,
fregues, patetice, sbmente).

2. The cedilla (>,) is placed under the letter c (g)^
to which it gives the articulation of s before the vowels
a, 0, u, where else the c would be pronounced like h:
loiiqa, moQO, agude (cf.: louca, moca, acudir).

stress and Duration. — Vowels. 3

3. The til (~) is a sign peculiar only to the Castilian
and the Portuguese languages. But being in the former
employed upon a consonant (a), it is found in the latter
only upon vowels and diphthongs, conferring nasality
to them: la, mde, pao, pde (poij, mui. On the u it ia
to be met with only in (the equally antiquated) mui
and muito (actually written only muito) ; it has altogether
disappeared from upon the i, being supplied by follow-
ing n or m: insua for tsua, sim for si etc.

4. The apostrophe (') indicates that some vowel (e
or a, rarely an o) has been dropped: d'elle (de elle);
Sant' Anna (Santa Anna); Nun' Alvares (Nuno Alva/res).
Formerly also the m of com was sometimes dropped.
(N.B. — Actually the contraction of the elided words end-
ing in e is preferred to the apostrophe: delle, duma,
nesse, etc.)

5. The hyphen (-) unites two words to one idea:
agua-ardente brandy, mal-afortunado unhappy, bem-casado
well married, recem-chegado new-comer. N.B. — These
words may be written in one [aguardente, etc.).

Bemark. As for the (') employed in this grammar for
the prosodical accent, see § 4.

§ 4. Stress and Duration.

In the phonetics we indicate the prosodical accent
by an acute (') placed lefore the tonical syllable.

The vowels are of a middle length when having
the tonical accent; they are shorter before the accented
syllable and shorter still after it.

§ 5. Vowels.

A has three chief sounds:

1. [a,] an open sound resembling the English far,
father, but with the throat less open and the tongue
less down: md [ma.], chave ['favdj, caso ['hazuj.

2. [a] a sound like the English a followed by tv:
awe, saw. In Portuguese it is always followed by i or
u of the same syllable: md [mai], mau [mau].

3. [v] a -close sound like a in hag or about. It is
tonical only before a nasal consonant: pan(n)o ['pvnu].

4 Pronunciation.

lama ['hmv], maiiha [ 'mvjin] and in para ['p'er'e] and
cada [livdv] ; otherwise generally unaccented; ex.: Jima
['limv], JEuropa feu 'ropv], bafcr [b's 'terj.

Memark. The e in the tonical diphthong ei, and when
followed by a prepalatal sound (x, ch, j, Ih, nh) has the same
sound: fecJw f'fefu], lei [Ivi], igreja [i'grn^v], espelho [tf-
'pvlm], tenho [tvjiu] ; it is equally indicated by [v].

M in accented syllables has two different sounds:

1. [e] an open sound like ai in air or a in hare,
often indicated by an accent, as fe [fe] faith, se [se]
cathedral; preh, prelo ['prelu] printing-press, sede, sede
[sedd] seat.

2. [e] a close sound (like ea in the EngUsh words
great, break); this sound may be indicated by the circum-
flex, as aldea [ai'deej, rede f'rred'gj, s&de [' se&d] ; comer
[Jcii'merJ, perder [par'derj.

3. [yj it is found short in unaccented open syllables
and before r in an unaccented syllable, if not final:
resoar, designar, perdido, like the e in matter; but in
ether ['tttr], cadaver [las 'Saver], pi. cadaveres [Jcv-
'Savdrdf] the e is quite distinct, similar to very, but
more open. It is nearly inaudible between voiceless
consonants (repetir [rrap(9)'tirj) and at the end of a
word, as lofe [lotgj, molde ['moidd], parte [' purtd] ; while
at the beginning of a word it sounds like a short i
(= ce, phonetically i), as edade [i 'dads], emenda [i 'mendvj,
eleger [ih'ger]; and still shorter [i] in the terminal
syllable es (fazes ['fazif], deveres [di'verif]) and before
cli (^ sli) and the initial st, sq, sp: espago [tf'pasuj,
estranlio ['if'trejm], esquadra fif'JcwaffryJ, fechar [ff/arj.

Remark. When in the middle of a word the e is fol-
lowed by a or o, it is pronounced also like a short i : theatre
[ti'atru], deante [di'vnta], peor [pf'or], thedlogo [tt'olttgu],
theoria [iiu'rivj. Also the conjunction e and is pronounced i,
when followed by a word beginning with a vowel.

4. see A, Remark.
I [i, i] sounds:

1. when long, like the English ee in been: riso
f'rrizu], estima ['if'tini'e], sentir [sen'tir] ;

2. short, it corresponds to the English i in gin,
gild: hilro ['biirrul, viu f'viuj, mrgula ['virgulv].

Vowels. 5

3. Before another vowel and not having the tonical
accent, it is very short and sounds nearly like the
English y: ocio ['osiu] (but: macio [me'siu]), inercia
[i'nersiv] (but: vertia [vsr'ti'B]), rdio f'rraiuj (but:
.s«m fsv'ivj); meia f'mmvj.

N.B. — In those words containing two or more i-syl-
lables the last of which is stressed, only this one is pro-
nounced i (=-- ee) while the preceding are pronounced
like voiceless e [o] : dividido [dsvd' cfi&u] ; selicula [sa-
'likulvj, divino [dd'vinu]. — This rule has various
exceptions.

O in accented syllables has two different sounds:

1 . [o] (6, o) : an open sound like the o in nor, God,
short. When tonical it is a little longer and more
ringing than in unaccented syllables: cor fkorj, avb
['e'vo], for a [fore]; adoptar ['b do' tar].

2. [o] (6, 0, ou): a close sound as in lode, stone:
cor [kor], avo [v'vo], lobo f'lotiu], grou [gro]; solfar
[sot' fur], colma^a [koi'mas'B].

'Remark I. In northern Portugal the diphthong ou is
pronouneed o-u, so that there is a diiferenoe between ouqo
I'ousu] I hear, and osso ['osuj bone, while these words are
similar in Lisbon as well as in Brazil.

Bemark II. Before an I of the same accented or unac-
cented syllable, the o is generally close : solto f'soitu], cSlga
['koigv] ; voltear [voUi'ar] (exc: volta [vaitv], volte ['voUaJ
etc.). In open syllables and before r or s of the same syl-
lable, the unaccented o is pronounced u (= oo): barco f'barku],
moroso [mu 'rozu], border [bur 'dar], costura [kuftur'e].

Remark HI. The definite article of the masculine
gender o, pi. os, always being unaccented, is pronounced u
(=r 00 is foot), us [uf]; same pronunciation as for the con-
tractions of the article: dos, nos [duf, nuf], etc. N.B.: nos
('= em os) is not to be confounded with the objective pronoun
nos (us), which corresponds to the subjective pronoun nds
[nojj we (cf. also v6s [vof] you and vos [vufj to you, you).

U.

1. [u] (u, u) sounds like oo in root, when ac-
cented: tu [tu], luva ['liive].

6 Pronunciation.

2. (u, o) : It sounds like oo in foot when unaccented :
do [duj, disputar [d^fpu'tarj, lodo ['locfuj.

N.B. — Nearly every unaccented o, if not nasal, is
pronounced u (cf. 0, Remark II.).

Remark. The u after a q and before a or o, is pro-
nounced like the English w: qual [kvai]. It is the same
when at the end of a word, and after a voiceless consonant
the u meets with an o or a: vdcuo ['vakwuj. The u after
a g and before an e or i is mute. (Exc. : arguir [vrgu 'irj and
derived words, unguento [ugu'entuj, sanguento, etc., and some
others.) See also § 10, end.

§ 6. Diphthongs.

A. Falling Diphthongs.

Such diphthongs where the weight rests more upon
the first vowel than upon the second, are called falling
diphthongs. Their second vowel is either i or u.

1. Feeble /-sound.

at (ai)^; Ex.: pa,} (pai or pae) father, like pie.

el (ei); » rrtij (reis) Portuguese copper-coins;

like a in rare, ai in fair.

VI (ai, ei); » rrvif (reis) kings; a sound between

fair and way; almost identical
with the a of the diphthongised
a in late of the South of Eng-
land.

oi (6i, oi, oe); » mif (roes) lists; like oi in moist,
roisterer.

at (oi, oi): » bo} (boi) ox; same sound but with

a close 0.
» otru (oiro or ouro)^ gold ; same sound
but with a close o.

u} (ui); » fu} (fui) I was, I went; like in ruin.

^ Here and in other places hereafter the phonetic sounds
are put in the first place, while the ortographical examples are
put in parenthesis.

' The diphthong oi, not being terminal, may — but for few
exceptions — be supplied by ou (cf. § 5, 0, Remark I.). In northern
Portugal the ow-sound is preferred, while the south pronounces
oi or 0.

a sound between
pouch andpaMse,
similar to the
German Haus

Diphthongs.

2. Feeble M-sound.

cm (au or ao); Ex.: pau (pau)

stick
» mau (mau
or mao)
bad

m (eu or eo); » seu (ceu or ceo) sky, the £ like

ai in a«V (cf. § 5, E 1).

ew (eu, eu or eo^; » breu (breu) tar, same sound

with a close e (cf. § 5, E 2).

iu (ill or io); » viu (viu) he saw, in accor-

dance with the pronuncia-
tion of the simple vowels.

or ou (ou); » do(u)ru (Douro)^ Douro, river

in Portugal.

B. Rising Diphthongs.

1. Feeble i-sonnd.

Such diphthongs where the weight rests upon the
second vowel, are called rising.
ia, (ia or ea); Ex.: dt'^nu (diario) diary 1 ^f 8 5 i 3

vt'affu (veado) hart | 'g^^^ '„^ j
u (ie or ie); » dYdv (dieta) diet I

p (io); » m'l'oluf (miolos) brains |

'10 (io) ; » ml 'olu (miolo) crumbs I cf. § 5, o

III (iu or eu); » mi'ucfu (miudo or meudo) ( and m.
small )

2. Feeble w-sonud.

Ma (Ma or oa); Ex.: mu'ar (muar) mule- . . in compound
words.

» su'ar (suar) to sweat.

» suar (soar) to sound.
ua (ua); » dual (dual) dual.

UE (ue or oe); ii su'eto (sueto) hohday.

» mu 'iSn (moeda) coin.
ue (ue or oe): » ru'er (roer) to gnaw.

» pu'erm (po'ema) poem.

' Nowadays written and pronounced only Douro (not Doiro).
Nor can the diphthong ou be supplied by oi in the following words :
ou or, ousar dare, ousadia, ousado; outorgar, ouvir, ouvido, outuhro,
ouco, eouve, mouco, louco, and their derivatives, and never in a
verbal form — e.g. — comprou.

'- Pronunciation.

ui (ui or oi); Ex.: fu'ijtu (fuiuJio) woodpecker.
» mu'ijiu (moinho) mill.

§ 7. Nasal Vowels and Diphthongs.

The nasal sound of a vowel is either indicated by
the til (s. § 3, 3) or by placing m or u behind it. The
nasality of the vowel, especially when making part of
a diphthong, is not attainable without considerable
practice. It is not so pure and ringing as in French,
but rather squeezed. We shall try to approach the
sound by means of exainples, as much as possible.

1. S (-a, an-, am-), vn before d or t, ^m before 6
or p, is "the nasalised v (see § 5, 3), almost alike to that
of pang: 'Irind, 'santo, lampada.

2. e (en-, em-), en before d or t, em before h and
p, alike to that in length: 'tenro, 'lento, bem'posto, 'sendo,
I'm' bora.

3. I {i)u, in; em-, en- as unaccented initial sounds):
alike to that in ring: fim, fins, findo, limpo.

4. 5 (om, on) alike to that in song, wron.g: som,
onga.

5. u (um, iin), alike to the German jung: um, atum.

6. Nasal diphthongs with terminal feeble i or u.

VI (ai, de, em) ; Ex. : mv} (mai or mS,e) 1 like the a in

mother > pang, followed

» hvi (bem) well J by an i.
01 (oi, de); » po}(p3i or poe) j ^j^^ ^^^ ^ -^

-. , r- ^ - - ?- , ,u song, followed

oiei (oenij; » poi^i (poem) they I v,

put J

til (ui); » mui (mid, mui) very (see § 3, 3)

VII (do, am); » pvu (pao) bread

» 'Jcomprvu (compram) they buy.

§ 8. Triphthongs.

There are in Portuguese numerous triphthongs
which consist of a falling diphthong with preceding
feeble i or u. These latter vowels are never nasal,
even in nasal triphthongs.

Consonants. 9

Ex.: leais fh'atfj, plural of leal [li'afj true; fieis
[ft'dfj, plural of fiel faithful; fieis [fi'i^ffj from fiar to
spin; miau [mjauj the mewing of the cat; poeira [pit-
'ezrej dust; ledo [li'vu] lion, leoes [U'o}/] lions.

§ 9. Consonants.

1. Those Portuguese consonants which in their
denomination and pronunciation differ from the English,
have already been mentioned (§ 2). F, k, m, n, p, t, v,
IV are generally pronounced as in English.

2. As for the voiced consonants, they are very
carefully to be distinguished from the voiceless. Espe-
cially the 6 and the d which, standing between vowels
or between a vowel and an r, or being doubled, are
very soft (as, e.g., those letters in the English words
nob, lad), the 6 approaching the v, and the c^ the voiced
English th in though; we indicate these letters so: 6, ff.
Ex.: reboar [rrgtu'ar, nearly like rrdvu'ar]; aibade
[v'tafy], addigdo [■eH's'eu]. The b is mute when ter-
minal: Jacob [313 'Ico].

3. The same as for the g, which sounds like the g
in give before a, 0, u and consonants; and like g [fj
in gentle (but without the initial d) before e, i, y (or
rather like the in azure): the terminal g [g] is soft
as in English (hug). If the g is to keep its g(ive)-so\xn^
before e, i, y, a dumb u is put between the two letters
(cf. § 5, TJ, Remark). Ex.: garfo ['garfu] fork, gume
['gumd] blade, gUria ['glorin] glory, Gog [gog] ; gelo
f'geluj ice, gi2 [gifj chalk; guerra fgerrej war; guiar
[gj'arj to guide.

4. The j has the pronunciation of the g before e,
i, y (the in asure or the .v in pleasure) and is equally
represented by [gj : jd [ga,] already, jejum [3d' 311]
fasting, joelho [gw'efi/u,] knee.

5. The initial I sounds like the English; when ter-
minal, it corresponds to the Engli^h^- falar [fv'lar]
to speak; mal [mai] bad. '^"'^

6. I united to a following h (Ih) forms a sound
which corresponds to the Castilian II and may be com-
pared to the I and y in the combined English words
will you, — e.g.: filho. It is figured by [fi].

10 Pronunciation.

7. A similar union forms the h with the n (nh)
figured by [ji] and pronounced like the Castilian n
in nino or the French gn in ligne: linha ['lijiv] line,
manha [mv'jiv] morning.^

8. As for the r, it must not be confounded with
the English vocal r (in far, further). Good Portuguese
speakers trill all r's, whether initial, medial, or terminal.
Only there is a difference in the energy employed with
the strongly rolled initial or doubled r and the weaker
r that is found after a consonant (not being *, n or s)
between vowels or at the end of a syllable. We re-
present the former by rr and the latter by r. Ex.:
preto ['pretiij black; bravo f'bravu] brave; caro f'karuj
dear; flor [florj flower; perto f'pertuj near; rei frretj
king; carro f'kurruj carriage; bilro f'biirruj bobbin;
honra ['orr'e] honour; Israel [igrre'el].

N.B. — In some words the initial r is followed by a
mute h: rheuma ['rreumv] xh.&\xvo.B.iisxn; Rlieno ['rrenu]
Rhine.

9. S is pronounced like English s in such, silver,
[s] 1. at the beginning of a word and when

doubled. Ex.: servir [sar'vir] to serve; massa ['mas'e].

2. after a consonant and before a vowel. Ex.:
cansar [Wsur], arsenal [vrsg'nai], observar [obsar'var].
Exc: obsequio and derivatives, where it sounds soft:
[oba 'zehtuj.

[e] like s in the English words loose, rose, when
between two vowels: luso ['luzu] , rosa ['rrosv].
Exc: after a prefix: resentir [rrgsen'tir, presdgio [prs-
'sagiu].

[g] before a voiced consonant: rasgo ['rraggu],
lesmo ['lesmv].

[f] At the end of a word before a pause, and be-
fore the consonants p, t, c, q, it sounds like English sh :
esperar [tfpa'rar], estd [if'taj, escapa [}f"ka,pv], esquerdo
[i/ker&u].

1 In some words, as anhelo, inhibir, inhalar, inherente, in-
Ji6spito inhdbil, enharmdnieo, and others, where the n is part of a
prefix nh is pronounced like n; the h is mute.

Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters. 11

Bemark. The terminal [f] is changed into [e] when followed
by a vowel; Ex.: as aves [vz'wif]; and it' followed by a
voiced consonant, it is changed into [g] : os banhos fug 'bejiusj,
as rosas [vg 'rrozvf].

10. X has various sounds. It is pronounced:

(a) [f] (= sJi) at the beginning of a word: xadres
[f^'Sref], xarope ffe'ropaj; generally in the middle of
the words: feixe ['f^ffij ; sexto f'seiftu] ;

(b) [ksj (= English x) in some words fixo f'fiJcsuJ,
sexo ['seksu] ;

(c) [s] in some words as auxilio fan 'sihuj, proximo
[' prostmu] ;

(d) [z] in some words as : exame [i 'syms], exercicio
fizgr'sismj ;

(e) [kfj (very rare): borax ['horehf]:

(f) The prefix ex . ., when followed by a consonant,
is pronounced either [ffj or f^'i/J: expor [('B)}fporJ, ex-
pensas f('B)ffpesvf].

11. .^ is pronounced like [sj in English zeal at
the beginning or in the middle of a word: selo f'zeluj;
faser [fis'zer] ; and like [f] at the end of a word: pes
[pef], juiz [gu'ifj (cf. 9, Remark).

Bemark. In Brazil the terminal s and z are pronounced s.

§ 10. Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters.

1. The Ih, nh and rh have already been mentioned
in § 9.

2. The h is still found in union with t (th), where it
is mute (iheatro [U 'a,tru]), and with p (ph), where it
forms the sound f: apht(h)as ['aftv] thrush, photographo
[fo 'togrefuj.

3. Fh is mute before th: pMhisica ['tizik'e].

4. With the c (ch) it forms two sounds:

(a) [/]: chave f'favdj, encher [I'fer], chilro [fiirru].

(b) [IcJ in words of Greek origin: chronica fhromk^J,
mdchina f'ma.Jcin'Bj, monarcha [mu nurlce] .

5. The c is found compound also to t and a second
c, (ct, cc), where it is often mute : actual fatu 'aij, ac-

12

Pronunciation.

cento ['e'sentu]; pacto ['paktu], friccao [frik'seiij. It is
also mute after an initial s (sc): sceptro f'setriij, sciencia
fsfestvj.

. 6. The p is often mute before s and t (ps,pt): psalmo
f'saimuj, adoptar [vSo'tar], prompto [prontu] ; ph is
mute before th: phthisica [ fisfhi'J (cf. 3).

Bemark. The vowels e and o, even when unaccented,
are open before the mute consonants c and p : director [dire-
tor], excepgao [(v)ifss'sSuJ ; while a is open before ct and pt
and in a few words before cc: activo [a,'tivu], aptidao [apti-
'dguj; accao [a'sSu], fracgdo [fra(k)'svuj.

7. Doubled consonants are generally pronounced like
one (cf § 9, 2, S and 9): apparelho [ape'rv/iuj, matto
f'matu], pe)ina fpenvj, commissao [Tiuml'sBu], fallar
[fe 'lar]. Yet when, of two m'& or «'s, one belongs to a
prefix, it is pronounced with a nasal sound : emmalhar
[imv'ficirj; ennorelar [inu'vdlar].

N.B. — m is mute before n: gymnasia [gi'nazm], con-
demnar [liondd' nar] , somno ['sonuj.

8. As for the gu and qu see § 5, u. Remark and
§ 9, 3. In qu the u is mute before e or i: queda
fJce&vJ^ quinMo [M'/iSuJ. Exc: frequents [frd'hiventd],
tranquillo [trv'lttvilu] and derivatives, and also in some
scientific words. Before a and o it is sometimes mute:
quator^c [kvtorsd], qiiotizar [Jcuti'sar or hw'uti' zur] .

§ 11. Summary of the Phonetic Signs in their
Relation to the Portuguese Alphabet.

a, a, V
h, b
d, &
£, e, 3
f
9^ 9

i, I, i
Ic '

A

m
n

see § 5
^> § 9
^> § 9
■" § 5
> § 9
g(a)> g(u), g(r),
etc. (see § 9)
see § 5
§ 9
§ 9.^
§ 9
m, mm
n, nn

Jl

: nh

0,

see § 5

p

P> PP

r

-r-, -r

)•)•

r-, rh-, -rr-

s

S-, -ss-, (-)sc-, c(e),

c(i), 9, -X

ks

-X-, -cs-

z

Z-, -S-, -X-

3

g(e), g(i); .], -s, -z

f

X-, ch- ; -s, -z

i

t-, -tt-, th-; -ct, -pt-

H

see § 5

Accentuation. 13

V : V-, -V- N.B. 1:

Jew : qu(a); qu(e), qu(i) -r signifies terminal r,

(rare) -r- » medial sound,

e, e, I, r- » initial » .
0, M : see § 7 N.B. 2: A letter in pa-

/ : after a vowel, stret- renthesis indicates that the

ches it one preceding has the pro-

' : before a syllable, nunciation of the phoneti-
means the toni- cal sign only in this corn-
eal accent. bination.

§ 12. Accentuation.

1. Words of two or more syllables, ending by
a, e, 0, have the stress generally on the penultimate
syllable: lama, 'vinte, cas'tello, anted' pado.

N.B. — Another vowel (i, u ov o), preceding those
vowels, does not form a diphthong, and is to be con-
sidered an independent syllable: 'lia, harmo'nia, 'crua,
'tua, ma'goa, 'hroa.

2. Words ending in a consonant, a nasal vowel
or diphthong, or in i or u, generally bear the stress
on the last syllable; so, for instance, all the infinitives
(cha'mar, vender, influ'ir); pa'pel, nacio'nal, ir'ma, ir-
'mao, ale'm&o, java'li, ba'hu. Principal exc. : the ad-
jectives ending in -vel (a'mavel, indefi'nivel) and some
in -il Cfacil).

N.B. — The s forming the plural of the nouns and
adjectives, or the termination of a verb, does not affect
the accentuation ('mesa, 'mesas; 'alto, 'altos; sa'bias),
even when by the flection the last syllable is changed
into two: ta'ful, pi. ta'fues, in'gles, in'gleses; difficil,
difficeis.

3. Words with stress on the ante-penultimate syl-
lable are rarer and generally marked by a graphic ac-
cent: nitido, fotografo, comprdvamos; they are called
esdruxulas [%s 'SrufvlvfJ.

4. A word consisting of many syllables frequentlj^
has a secondary stress (marked thus: ^) on a syllable
preceding the tonical, yet never upon one following
it. To this group belong (a) the adverbs formed of the

14 Pronunciation.

adjectives by adding the termination -mente [altlva mente
haughtily) ; (b) the diminutives and augmentatives with
the intercalated letter -s-: cadeira'zinha small chair,
from cadeira; Tibmemsa' rrao big man (from 'homem). In
such words it is the originally accented syllable which
has the secondary accent.

5. Atonic pronouns of only one syllable are added
to the verbs, melting together with them: sahe-lo (or
sabel-o), vcr-nos, dar-lhe.

§ 13. Syllabication.

1. Any vowel, whether accented or unaccented,
even nasal, may terminate a syllable.

2. Of the consonants, only the following ones may
do so: I, m, n, r, s, 2. More rarely and only in scienti-
fic terms: p, c, h, b, g.

(Even here we meet words separated thus : corru-pfao, aprom-
ptar, au-gmentar, te-chnica, pra-gmatica, etc.)

3. Ih, nh must not be separated. They are found
only in the middle of a word and belong always to
the following vowel: mi-nha, ve-lho. An only apparent
exception form words from the Greek, as phil-harmonica,
and from the Latin, as in-hibir, an-helar, in-hospito, in-
habil, etc., where in- is a prefix (see p. 10, fopt-note).

4. Not to be separated are the diphthongs and the
nasal syllables am, an, em, en, im, in, om, on, um, un.
Vowels not forming diphthongs may be separated : ma-
gu-a-do.

5. A syllable may begin by one of the following
groups of consonants: pr-, br-, fr-, vr-, tr-, dr-, cr-,
gr-, cl-, gl-, pi-, hi-, fl- [r or I with another preceding
consonant), and sc- (this only in foreign words).

N.B.— There may also be read syllabications hke:
corru-pgdo, pra-gmatica, aprom-ptar,e\e. (see 2), but as they
contradict the rules 1 and 5, given by the most learned
Portuguese phonetician, Mr. Gon^alves Viana, they are
not to be imitated.

6. The consonantal combinations of st-, sp-, sph-,
spl-, spr- and sc- are found only in scientific or in
foreign words: sparadrapo, sphinx or sphince (pop.:

Homonyms.

15

esphinge); splenica, stylita, sciencia. (In genuine Portu-
guese or nationalised words they are always preceded
by e, spoken like a fugitive i, which with the following
s forms a syllable: espargo ['tf pa-rgu] , estado, estilo, es-
casso, esplendor, espraiar) These groups cannot be se-
parated.

7. As for the consonantal gemination, the con-
sonants are distributed on two syllables: fer-renho, in-
nato, im-maculadOj ap-parente, as-sistir, pel-les, ah-bade,
at-testar, dif-ficuldade.

§ 14. Homonyms.

Hornophonos [o'mofimuf].

There are a number of homonymical words in

Portuguese — that is, words of equal sound and different

orthography.

Here some examples:

accento ['e'sentu] accent

apregar feprg'sarj to ap-
praise

area [' uria] area

atestar [vtif'tarj to fill up
to the top

hucho f'bufuj craw, maw

caga ['kas^J hunting, game

cegar [sd'gar] to blind, to
dazzle

cella ['SSI's] cell

celleiro [solwu] granary

cem [se] hundred

cerrar [sd'rrar] to shut

chamma f'/emv] flame

concebo [Ico'setuJ I under-
stand, I conceive

concelho [Tco's^du] council

condega [kdn'des^J willow-
basket

eonsigo [Jco'siguJ I obtain

descripgao [difkri'svuj de-
scription

douto f'dotuj learned

assento seat
apressar to hurry

aria air
attestar to attest

buxo box-tree
cassa muslin
segar to mow

sella saddle
selleiro saddler
sem without
serrar to saw
chama he calls, call
com sebo with tallow

conselho counsel
condessa countess

conisigo with(in) himself
discrigao discretion

dou-to I give it you

16

Pronunciation.

ega ['esvj bier, cenotaph

hera feirnj ivy

maga ['masi^J mace

pago ['pasu] palace

pello ['peluj hair

pena ['pen's] punishment,
pain

perdigao [prdi 'sen] perdi-
tion

perfeito [pr'f'situl perfect

rugo ['rrusu] gvey

seio f'sviu] bosom

valle [vai] valley

essa that (one)
era was
massa paste
passo step
pelo = por 0.
penna pen

predicgao prediction

prefeito prefect
russo Russian
sei-o I know it
vale post-office order.

§ 15. Homographs.

Momographos [o 'mografuf].

A. Examples of Homographs with the same sound,
but different meaning.

a vista ['v'tfta] view, sight vista {pp. f. of ver to see)

dado ['dadu] die
o <;onto ["kontu] story
a conta f'Jcontv] bill
'I ram f'Jcarv] face
a ferida [fd'riidv] wound

a conqulsta [kd'Uftv] con-
quest
a saTiida [sv'i-.Sv] issue

a alta ['aitii] Y&ismg; halt
« halm, ["baip] decrease;

furlough; lower part of

the town (of Lisbon)
a aherta [v'tertv] opening,

gap
aceito [v's'Bitu] I accept
preciso [pra'siizu] I want
como f'komu] I cat
entre ['entrd] imper. of

entrar to enter

dado given

conto I count

conta he (she) counts

cao-a (adj. f.) dear

ferida (pp. f. of ferir)

wounded
conquista (pp. f. of con-
• querir) conquered
sahida (pp. f. of sahir)

gone out
alta (adj. f.) high
haixa (adj. f.) low

aherta (pp. f.) open

aceito accepted
preciso wanted
como as, like
entre between, among.

Abbreviations.

17

B. Examples of Homographs with Different
Pronunciation and Meaning.

da [da,:] give(s)

regia [rn 'ji»7 imp. of reger

to reign
seria [ss'ri^] cond. of ser

to be
governo [gu'vernuj govern-
ment
publico f'publiku] public
contrario ('kon'trarmj con-
trary
analise [e'naUggJ analysis
domino fdomin'oj domino
continuo [hOn'tinuu] con-
tinual
concerto ['Jco'sertuJ concert
gosto ['goftuj taste
Jiistoria [if'tonv] history

presente [prd'zentd] present

da [dv] = de a of the
regia ['rreigw] adj. f. king-
ly, royal
seria ['seiriv] adj. f. serious

governo [gu'vernu] I govern

publico [pu'tiliku] I publish
contrario [kontre 'riuj I con-
tradict
analise fvn'e'li-sgj ! analysal
domino [du'miinu] I lord
continuo [honti 'nuu] I con-
tinue
concerto [ho'sertu] I mend
gosto [goftu] I like
historia fiftu'rivj he writes

history
presente [pra 'sentaj he
foresees.

§ 16. Abbreviations.

Abreviaturas [■B^raviv'turv/J.

ya j^^a __ Yossa Excel-
lencia Your
Excellence,
you

= Vossa Merce
Your mercy,
you

= Fosse(abbr. of
F° M^)

= senhor Mister,
Mr.

= senhora Mis-
tress, Mrs.

= Dom, Donna

= Santa

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.

ya J^e.

ye

sr.
sr"

D., D«

8'"

S'o, S. = Santo, Sao
Saint

dicf^° = dignissimo

most worthy

Ul""', iW^°' = illustrissimo,
-a most il-
lustrious

ex"'", ex""^ = excellentissi-
mo, -a most
excellent

Dr. = Doutor Doctor

P. E. F. ^por especial
favor by es-
pecial fa-
vour

2

(addressing an
inclosed letter)

18

Pronunciation.

S. E. C. = sua ex""" casa, gr^", gr'^"

(addressing a letter) Jjgre

m*° = muito much,

very p. ex.

_jjj(e -= -mente (see

§ 12, 4) V. g.

aW = attentoiespect-

ful(ly) a s.

ven'"', v°'' = venerador

venerator i. e

^^do —. criado servant

adm"^ = admirador ad- j>"

mirer

= grata, gratis-
simo thank-
ful

= por exemplo
for instance

= verbigratiaior
instance

:= a saber name-
ly, viz.

= isto e that is
(to say)

= para for, to.

§ 17. Punctuation.

Fonctuafdo [pdntm'seuj.

1. The signs of punctuation are the same as in
English; they are called as follows:

[()

aspas or virgula do-
brada notes of quo-
tation ;

parenthese, -sis paren-
thesis ;
hyphen or risca de uniao
hyphen;
* asterisco asterisk.
' apostrophe apostrophe.

. panto (final) full stop;

, virgula comma;

; panto e virgula semicolon;

: dais pantos colon;

? panto de interrogagcto note
of interrogation;

! panto de admiragao note
of exclamation;

— • risca or travessao dash

. . . reticencias points of
suspension or reti-
cence ;

2. On the whole, the rules of punctuation do not
differ from the English. Before the conjunctions e-
(and) and ou (or), the comma is generally not em-
ployed; also not before a relative sentence. On the=
other hand, elucidating adjectives and, frequently, ad-
verbs are separated by commas from their noun's or
verbs. When e or ou do not only add a particle but
introduce an independent phrase, they are also pre-
ceded by a comma.

Punctuation. 19

Examples of Fortugruese Punctuation:

Com bom veuto, a canSa cacilheira atrayessa o Tejo mais de-
presBa do que os vapores.

Para o sen 8er7i9o, ou para a rebocar em calma, a fragata
tetn uma lancha que leva a reboque.

catraio e a mais pequena das embarca9oe8 que fazem ser-
vifo no Tejo, e emprega-se ordinariamente no trausporte de passa-
geiros, e ds vezes na pesca ao candeio. — bote-fragata 6 uma
fragata pequena, que em geral transporta carga mais leve.

Onde honver pesedas, o pardal presume logo, como o rato,
que ha comida, e 4 ahi que elle est^ bem, para comer sem grande
trabalbo.

A cobra, por^m, e inoffensiva . . .

A este respeito, contem-se coieas muito interessantes . . .

(Trindade Coelho.)

Eu, porem, observei-lhe que, sendo ess' outro artigo, na ver-
dade, notavel, elle, a men juizo, estava inoomplexo, e, insufficiente,
nao esgotava o assumpto. (Bruno.)

-))i~

2*

20

First Lesson. Ligao primeira.

The Gender of the Noun and the Article.

genero dos substantivos e o artigo.

§ 18. There are only two genders in Portuguese:
the masculine and the feminine; there is no neuter.
Those nouns which designate beings of mascuhne sex
(e.g., homem man, cavallo horse), are naturally also of
the masculine gender; while those which indicate beings
of feminine sex (e.g., mulher woman, egua mare), are
naturally of feminine gender. Neuter nouns are con-
ventionally ranged either amidst the masculine or the
feminine ones. Examples: mesa table, feminine; pais
country, pardal sparrow, masculine.

§ 19. The Portuguese language distinguishes the
gender, not only by the pronoun, but by the very
article; by:

(a) the definite article (o the^ for the masculine
singular; a the^ for the feminine singular), when there
is a definite person or thing spoken of amidst others
of the same kind;

(b) the indefinite article (urn a(n) for the mascu-
hne, mna a(n) for the feminine), when we speak of an
indefinite person or thing among others of the same
kind (see 2°'^ Lesson). Ex.: o homem the man; urn
homem a man ; a mulher the woman ; uma mulher a
woman.

jRemarh. Before rei king there was generally used the
definite article el (of Spanish origin), when a reigning Por-
tuguese King was spoken of: El-Mei Bom Mamiel II.

§ 20. To signify the mascuhne sex (and gender)
and the feminine, the Portuguese language has various
ways:

^ The definite article the is consequently employed for the
two genders and even for the two numhers: o os, a as.

The Gender of the Noun and the Article.

21

(a) a different word (for persons nearly always):
homem, mulher; frade monk, freira nun; cavallo, egua;
touro bull, boi ox, vacca cow.

(b) a different termination — e.g., pombo, pomba
pigeon; mestre, mestra teacher; leitor, leitora reader.

§ 21. In the latter case the feminine^ is obtained
by the following rules:

1. Those nouns ending in -o (not being the second
vowel of a diphthong) change the -o into -a, ex. : fUho,
filha child (= son and daughter); tio uncle tia aunt;
pombo, pomba.

Excep. — diacono deacon, fern.: diaconisa deaconess.

2. Those ending in -So change the -So into -6a:
leao lion, leoa lioness, abegOo head manservant, abegoa
head maid-servant.

The chief exceptions to this rule are: barao baron,
baronesa; ddadao citizen, cidada; irmao brother, irmd;
ladrdo thief, ladra; suUao sultan, sultana; valentdo boaster,
valentona.

3. Those ending in -or (or) and -es {eg) add an a
for the feminine: senhor sir, senhora; leitor reader, leitora;
lavrador peasant, lavradora; ingles English, inglesa.

The chief exceptions are: actor actor, actriz; em-
baixador ambassador, embaixatriz; imperador emperor,
imperatriz; prior prior, prior esa.

Words. PalaTras.

Isto ['iftuP this(nexttothe

esse, essa

speaker)

aqudle.

that (one)

isso ['isuj that (next to the

aquella

accosted)

ed [ka], aqui

here (next to the

aquillo [v'hilu] that (next to a

[aUJ

speaker)

third person)

aid [vi]

there (next to

este[eft3], esta' this (one)

the accosted)

^ Also of the adjectives.

2 Isto, isso, aquillo are pronouns and consequently employed
independently (e.g. — Que e isto? Isto i uma penna What is this?
This is a pen), while este, esse, aquelle are adjectives and employed
only with a noun clearly expressed or imagined Cesta penna e
aquella. — There is the same difference between este, esse, aquelle,
as between isto, isso, aquillo.

22

Lesson 1.

ali [<e'lij, Id [la,],
acoldfvku'laj
e A7>

estd [tf'taj

eis [slfj'^
eis aqui

[vizv 'kij
eis ahi [vyzs'i],

ali or acdld
que [kd, before

a Towel ki]
que e [ki'ej ?
quern i [kvi's]?
onde i [ondi-

'eJ?
onde estd

[dndi:f'taj
onde fica

fond^'fikej ?
tern [teij
pae or pai

[upat]
mestre

[u 'meftn]
professor

[u ''prufi-

'sor]

a mestra
a professora

lioro [u 'livruj
tecto [u'tetu]

there (next to a
third person)

is (mostly an-
swering to
what? or
who?)

is (mostly an-
swering to
where?)

here is, this is

there is

which, what (a)

what is?
who is?

where is?

has (he, she, it)
the father

the teacher

the (female)
teacher or
governess
the book
the ceiling

chao [u'fSu]
banco [u'bskuj
gis [u'sif]
o muro

[u'muru]
tinteiro

[utm 'IvfruJ
quadra preto

[u 'kwatru-

pretuj
lapis [u'lapif]
mappa

[u'mapvj
caderno

[tike 'dernuj
menino

[uma 'ninuj
alumno [uv-

'lunuj
lugar [ulu-

'garj
a mdi or mde

[v 'mvij
o rei [u'rrei],

El-rei [el-

a rainha

[v 'rrviye]
a escola

[vi['koh]
a penna

[v 'penvj
a tinta [v 'tintv]
a cadeira [vke-

'd'virsj
a caneta [vkv-

'netvj

the ground
the bench
the chalk
the wall

the inkstand

the blackboard

the lead-pencil
the map

the copy-book

the boy

the pupil,

school-boy
the place

the mother

the king

the queen

the school

the pen

the ink
the chair

the penholder

^ E, estd e fica mean is, but they are very clearly to be
distinguished: E marks a quality inherent to a person or an object
(ex.: pae e um homem, i bom [good]), or the place of a person
or thing that it cannot or not easily be removed from (ex.: a es-
cola i aqui). Estd marks a passing or casual quality (ex. : o pae
estd doente [ill]); or the staying of somebody or something on a
spot that he (or it) can be easily removed from (ex.: o livro estd
na mesa ; a mesa estd na aula. Fica is employed to designate the
place appointed to something (rarely to somebody), ex.: o porta
fica perto (near) da janella. Sometimes you may doubt whether
to employ fica or estd or even estd or e ; there are cases where you
may indifferently employ the one or the other. (See 5^'^ Lesson.)

^ Eis aqui or simply eis; also aqui i or (less correctly)
estd (cf. ')■

The Gender of the Noun and the Article. 23

a parede [spe-

the wall

aporta[v'portvJ

the door

reffa]

a janella [vge-

the window

a cidade fesi-

the town

'nslsj

'&a.dd]

a aula [v'aulej

the school-

a lousa fe'lozvj

the slate

room, the

a rua [rrwe]

the street

class

a esponja [-etf-

the sponge

a escola /»«/-

the school

'posij ^

■kolv]

a mesa [ mezv]

the tahle

sim, nao

yes, no

•a menina

the girl

e, ou

and, or

a alumna

the sohool-girl,

tambem [tvni-

too, also.

the pupil

'bvi]

€»i [vi, tj in, on, at, contracted with the following article or de-
monstrative pronoun into no, na, n'um, n'uma, n'isto, n'isso,
n'este, etc. (or num, nisto, etc.).

de [da] of, from, contracted with the following article or demon-
strative pronoun into do, da, d'um, d'uma, d'isto, d'isso, d'este,
etc. (or dum, deste, etc.), is equivalent to our genitive form.

« [v] at, to, contr. with the following def. article or aquelle into
ao, a, aquelle, dquella, etc., is equivalent to our dative.

1. Exercicio. Leitnra e versa o.

Na escola.
Aqui 6^ a escola. Onde fica^ {or €) a aula? Eis aqui^ a
aula. Onde esta^ o professor? professor esta na cadeira.
Onde e (or fica) o lugar do alumno ? lugar do alumno ou
da alumna 6 (or fica) ali no banco. Quem tem o giz? mestre
tern o giz e a esponja. Que e isto? Isso 6^ o quadro preto. Que
4 isso? Isto 6 mappa. E que e aquillo? Aquillo 6 o tecto.

2. Exercise.

Where is the window? The window is in the wall.
Has the reader the book ? The book is on the table. There
is a lead-pencil on the ground. Where is the copy-book of
the school-boy? The copy-book is on the chair of the teacher.
Who is that man ? That man is the head man-servant of the
baron. Has the daughter of the baroness a governess? Yes,
and the friend of the girl has also a governess. Where is
the inkstand? The inkstand is on the table. The pen-
holder too is on the table. Who is there? The father of
the boy is there. Who is at (a) the door of the school-room?
The pupil of the teacher is at the door. Is here the place
of the boy? Yes, here on the bench.

ConTersation. ConrersaQao.

Quem 6 esse menino? E (He is) um alumno da aula.

E quem 6 o professor d'esta E um cidadao d'esta cidade.
aula?

> See note » of p. 22.
2 See note ^ of p. 22.

24 Lesson 2.

Que rua e esta? Esta 6 a rua do Abe.

Onde e (or fica) a eacola? A escola 6 (or fica) aqui.

Tern menino um lapiz? Sim, eis um lapiz e uma ca-

neta.

(0 professor apontara para os objectos de que fala ou pegarfi,
nelles, emquanto dirigir as seguintes ou semelhantes perguntas ao
alumno) :

P. Que 6 isto? E. Isso e a m6sa. Isso 6 o giz. Isso 6 o

quadro preto, etc.
F. Que 6 isso? B. Isto 6 o livro. Isto e a penna. Isto

6 a cangta, etc.
P. Que e aquillo? B. Aquillo 6 o tecto, a porta, a janella,
o mappa, a parede, etc.
(Tbe same exercise to be continued for all objects already
mentioned.)

Second Lesson. Licjao segunda.

The Plural of Substantives.^

A formagdo do plural nos substantivos.

§ 22. All nouns ending in a vowel or diphthong
(except -So) or in -n form the plural by adding -s, thus:
banco the bench os bancos the benches

a janella the window as janellas the windows

pae (or pat) the father os paes the fathers, the parents

a mde (or mai) the mother as maes the mothers
dia' the day os dias the days

q irma [vir'mvj the sister as irmas the sisters

dolmen [' udoimen] the harrow os dolmens the barrows.

§ 23. Nouns ending in -m change this letter into
-n before taking the -s of the plural:
homem [u'omvi] the man os homens the men
ojardim [ujvr'di] the garden os jardins the gardens
som [u'soj the sound os sons the sounds

um [u] a, one uns some, any.

§ 24. Nouns terminating in -ao distinguish two
chief classes:

^ The rules given for the formatiou of the plural of the
noun are applied also to the adjective.

^ Those words ending in a are generally of the feminine
gender, but there are exceptions— e.g., dia, gramma, monareha
dilemma, patriarcha, clima (climate), drama, thema, and others
derived from the Greek.

The Plural of Substantives.

25

(a) those where this termination is not accented
take simply an s:

orfao or orphao ['orfiu] os orfaos the orphans

the orphan
a bengao['bes^uJ^ the blessing as bengaos the blessings.

(b) those where this termination is accented may
be divided into three subdivisions:

(a) such as change -ao into -aos (rare)
(P) » » » -ao » -aes (rarer still)
(t) » » » -ao » -5es.
(a) To the first class belong the following sub-
stantives :

irmao the brother

OS irmaos the brothers, the

brethren
OS cidadaos the citizens
OS chrisiaos the Christians

OS cortesaos the courtiers

OS villaos the peasants, villains

OS chaos the gi-ounds
as maos the hands.

cidadao the citizen

christao [krif'ivu] the
Christian

eortesao [kurtd'svu] the cour-
tier

villdo fvi'lvu] the peasant,
villain

chao f/vuj the ground

a mao [mvu] the hand

(P) To the second class belong the following:
cm [Mu] the dog os cues [hvij] the dogs

o poo [p'su] the bread, the os piies [pnij] the loaves

loaf
alemao [vlg'mvu] the Ger-
man
capitao [Itvpi'tvu] the cap-
tain
escrivao fifkri'vnu] the clerk
of the court

OS alemaes fvh'm'stfj the Ger-
mans

OS capitaes [kvpi'tnif] the
captains

OS escrivaes [ifkri'vvif] the
clerks of the court.

(t) Most substantives ending in -s,o (among these
all abstract nouns ending in -ao) form their plural by
changing -do in -oes, as:
coragao [Icurv'sSuJthe heart,

OS coragdes [kurv'soifj
lido the lion, os liSes
cangdo the song, os cangdes
meldo the melon, os meloes

aldedo the peasant, os aldeoes^
a acgdo the action, as acgdes
a divisuo the division, as di-

visSes
a ligao the lesson, as ligdes.

* hengao may also be accented on its termination.

^ aldeao [aid} 'vu] may form the plural in aldeaos or aldeoes.

26

Lesson 2.

§ 25. Nouns (and adjectives) ending in -r or -s or
-z add -es in tiie plural, as:
mar [max] the sea, os a pas ^ fpafj peace,

mares [m^rifj
mis fm^fj the month, meses
rapag [rre'pafj the boy,

rapaees
o portugues [purtu'gwJJ the

Portuguese, Portugueses

N.B. — Many words may be written with an -s or a
-e, as : mes or mez, lapis (pencil) or lapis, ingles or ingles,
etc.; but nowadays the -s is preferred to the -z.

§ 26. Words (nouns and adjectives) ending in ac-
cented -al, -ol, -ul, change the letter -I into -es:

animal [vni'matj the ani- os animaes [vni'maifj

[paeif]
a flor fflor] flower, floras
a mulher [mu 'Her] woman,

mulheres women.
superior [supdri'or] superior

(sub. and adj.).

OS soes ['soif]
OS tafues [iv'fuiJJ
geraes fga'raif]
[v 'zwifj.

azues

mal
sol [sot] the sun
taful [tv'ful] the gambler
geral /ja 'ral] general
azul [v'zui] blue

Exception. — mal the evil; o consul ['Wsut] the consul;
a cal [kai] form their plural by adding -es: os males, os con-
sules, as calcs. real [rri'ai] the ree (unit of the Por-
tuguese coin), forms the plural os reis [nz'rrEjJ].

§ 27. Nouns ending in -el or unaccented -il change
these letters into -eis. N.B. — If the termination -el
— which is always pronounced [eij — is accented, -eis is
pronounced [itfj; if not accented, it is [eifj.
papel [pv'pel] the paper papeis [pv'peij]

tonnel [tu 'netj the barrel
tunnel ['luneij the tunnel
agradavel [vgre'davei] agree-
able
reptil ['rreptil] reptile
fdcil I'fasii] easy
difjficil [dg'fisii] difficult
iextil ['tvtftii] textile

tonneis [iu'neifj
tunnels ['tunvij],
agradavcis [vgrv 'davvij]

reptis^

fdceis ['fasv}j]

difficeis [ds fisnif]

texteis^-

^ Textil (with the accent on the first syllable) has the scien-
tifical plural-form: texteif:, and the popular form: textis. Reptil
(scientifioal form ['rrcptii], popular form: frrep'tii]) forms the
plural iar^tis [mp'Uf], instead of replis ['rreptif], as would be
correct.

The Plural of Substantives. 27

Exception.— mel honey, forms meles; o fel gall, bill,
has DO plural.

§ 28. Nouns (and adjectives) ending in accented
-il change the letter -I into -s, as:

funil [fu'niij the fannel funis [fu'nifj

burril [bu'rrii] the chisel burris
civil [ss'vii] civil (adj.) civis.'^

§ 29. Nouns ending in -s preceded by an un-
accented vowel or falling diphthong, do not change in
the plural: o(s) alferes [ai'ferif] lieutenant(s) ; o{s) lapis
['lupif] pencil(s); simples simple.

Exception. — o cdlis ['kahf] cnp, calyx, glass, pi. calls or
calices; deus ['deu/J god, deuses [deuzfj].

§ 30. Some substantives are only used in the
plural, as:

as ealgas ['kalsvf] the trousers os generos ['genaruj] the vie-
as ceroulas [s9 'rolvfj the dra- tuals

wers as fontes ['fonUj] the temples

as tenazes [ta'nas'tj] the tongs as castas [hoftvf] the back

OS arredores [arra'donj] the os dculos ['okuluf] the spec-
environs tacles.

Rule. — As already mentioned, the adjective follows
the same rules as the noun, as for the feminine and
plural forms; so it agrees with the word qualified by it,
in gender and number, as:

homem e alto the man is tall
a torre e alta the spire is high
as torres .sao altas the spires are high.

§ 31. Present Tense (Fresente) of ter to have.

Eu tenho [eu'tvyo] I have tenho (eu)? have I?

tu tens [tu'tvif] thou hast tens (tu)? hast thou?

elle tern [eb'tei] he has tern (elle)? has he?

ella tern [elv'tvi] she has tem (ella)? has she?

nos temos [nof'temuj] we temos (nds) ? have we ?

have

v6s tendes fvof'tend}/] you tendes (v6s)? have you?

have

dies teem [elif'tviei] they teem(elles)?h3,Yeth6j? (masc.)

(masc.) have

ellas teem [elvftviei] they teem (ellas) ? have they (fern.).

(fern.) have

28

Lesson 2.

Eu nao tenho I have not, etc.
Nao tenho eu? have I not? etc.

Rule. — The negative nUo is put before the verb.

Bemarh. — The conjunctive personal pronoun may be
omitted. Yet it must be employed: 1. when it has the em-
phasis— e.g., eu (e que) tenho; 2. to avoid a misunderstand-
ing; 3. when necessary to the harmony of the phrase. — In
the interrogative form it is put after the verb, but may also
stand before it.

N.B.— As for you have, etc., see the following
lesson.

Palavras.

Men, minha my

I'meu, mijiv]
seu, sua ['seu, his, her, its,

suv] your

dois,duas['do}f, two

'duef]
quanta [kwvntu] , how much?

quanta ?
quantos, quantas how many ?
tres [tref] three

quatrof'hwatru] four
cinco ['stku] five
pe, [u'ps] the foot
dedo [uffeffu] the finger, the

toe
obrago [u'tirasuj the arm
estes, estas these

esses, essas those

aquelles, aquellas those (of. p. 21,

footnote
each
no, not

')

are

cada fjcsffej
nao fneuj
sao [svu] \

estcw [tf'tvuj J
algum [ai'guj
(Uguma [al-

qumel
alguns fai-g«fj} '°'^^' ^"y
algumas [ai-

guvrvfj I

ha [a] there is, there

are
vdho [vsliu, old, aged

vsliu]

sogro ['sogruj the father-in-
law

a sogra ['sogn] the mother-in-
law

a cdthedra

fkataffrvj
principe

['prlsfpgj
a princesa

[prl'sezv]
a leitv/ra [Ivi-

'turnj
a versdo [mr-

'seuj
herdeiro [ir-

'ffniruj
a herdeira

[ir 'ffvyrv]
fidalgo

[fi '(Jiaigu]
a fidalga

[fi 'Oatgv]
avo fv 'voj

a av6 [e'voj

cdo [kvu]

the lecturing-

desk
the prince

the princess

the reading

exercise
translation,

version
the heir

the heiress

the gentleman

the gentlewo-
man, the lady

the grand-
father

the grand-
mother

the dog

the bitch

a cadella [hv-

'(Tslv]
rapaz
a rapariga

[rrvpv 'riffe]
tambem [tvm-

'bnj

Rule. — The possessive adjectives are generally pre-
ceded by the article, if the noun is not a title of re-

the boy

the girl, the

young wo man
also.

The Plural of Substantives. 29

lationship, in -which case the article is generally
omitted. The article is dropped also at addressing per-
sons. Ex. : meu lapis, a sua penna; but meu pae,
sua mae; my good friend!

3. Exercicio. Leitnra e rersao.

Meu pal tern dois filhos e duas filhas. Seu sogro e urn
faomem velho, sua sogra 6 uma mulher velha. Na aula ha
uma cathedra, dois bancos, duas janellas e uma mesa. Na mfisa
ha uma esponja, tres canetas e quatro lapis. Os meus cadernos
estao tambem na m6sa. Tenho [um] av6 e [uma] avo.
mestre 6 portugu6s. frances 6 um valeutao. principe 6
o filho do rei e da rainha. fidalgo 6 o herdeiro do seu amigo.
Onde esta o cao do ingles? Esta ali no chao.

4. Exercise.

Translation.
I have two hands. Each hand has five fingers. We
have also two feet, and each foot has also five toes. These
are my copy-books and my pens. Is this your lead-pencil?
No, it is not*; it is the pencil of my father. My mother's
father-in-law (= The father-in-law of my mother) is my
grandfather, and her mother-in-law is my grandmother.
These girls and those boys are pupils of my master. Have
you any brothers? Tes, I have three brothers ; they are
in the garden. The princes are the sons of the king and
the queen. Those men are aged. They are German captains.
The English, the Portuguese, and the Germans are Christians.
There are four dogs in the street. Have we a map in the
school-room? Yes, there is a map on the wall.

ConTersa<2ao.
Tem menino uma lousa? Sim, tenho uma loasa e dois

cadernos.
Ha uma esponja? Nao ha esponja nesta aula.

Quantos alumnos ha aqui? Ha cinco alnmnos e tr€s

alumnas.
Quantos ha em cada banco? Ha um em cada banco.
Onde esta o menino Carlos Esta na rua.

(Charles)?
Onde fica a porta? A porta fica acola.

Ha tinta no tinteiro? Ha^, sim, senhor.

Que tens tu ahi? Eu tenho alguns meloes.

1 The impersonal it is is rendered by ^ without a pronoun.

' The Portuguese generally answers by employing the same
verb as in the question; if the latter contains a compound form,
he generally employs in the answer only the auxiliary verb. Ex.:
Tem tido sorte? Have you had good luck? Tenho Tes, I have.

30 Lesson 3.

Isto 6 uma mesa. Isto 6 um banco. Isso 6 a porta
da aula. Isso 6 o caderno do menino. Aquillo 6 a
cathedra do professor. A cadeira tern quatro p6s,
elle esta no chao. papal esta na mesa. Ha cinco
rapazes na classe. Cada rapaz tem dois lapis.

professor (apontando o objecto): Que e isto?, isso?,
aquillo?

alumno (apontando o objecto) : Isto 6 o meu caderno,
a minha penna; isso 6 o seu livro; aquillo 6 o
lapis do menino Carlos, etc.

professor: Onde est^ o banco? Onde fiea a porta, a
janella? etc. Que tem o menino?, a cadeira?, a
mesa?, etc. Que temos n6s?, etc.

(The same exercise to be continued for all objects and forms
already mentioned.)

Third Lesson. LIqEo terceira.

The Address. tratamento [treiv'mentu].

The Terb ter to have.

§ 32. The English address "you" is given in
Portuguese by different expressions:

(a) Mostly it is not expressed at all: Tem tempo?
Have you time? Ndo tens lugar? Have you no place?
Esta doente? Are you ill? Pode dizer-me . . .? Can
you tell me . . . ?

(b) You is rendered by the state or title of the
person addressed: senhor diz-me You tell me. A
senhora quer sentar-se? Will you sit down? Qual e a
opinido do senhor Boutor? Doctor, what is your opinion?
sr. Conde (count) deseja passar? Do you wish to pass
sir? pae (a mde) que diz? What do you say, father
(mother)? Que manda o senhor patrao (principal)? What
do you command? meu amigo nao vd Id don't (you)
go there, my friend! vizinho (o menino) como esta?
Neighbour (my boy), are you well? A prima quando
vae? When shall you go, my cousin?

(c) You may be rendered by the name of a person :
Carlos jd foi ? Charles, did you already go there?

The Address. 31

Nao disse a Maria? Mary, didn't you say? It is to
be considered, that with gentlemen the family name
(sometimes also the Christian name) is employed directly
after senhor, while with ladies only the Christian name
is used, but preceded by senhor a Dona (D"). sr.
(Antonio) Correa d'Oliveira escreveu um novo poema ? Have
you written a new poem, Mr. d'Oliveira? Tern (uma)
creada a sr"' D" Maria? Have you a maid-servant, Mrs.
(or Miss) Mary? Upon country people or person of low
condition, the title Dona is not bestowed.

Remar'k. — In addressing somebody, the Portuguese general-
ly summons him by an introductory «<}.'» (oh!).

(d) You must be rendered by Vossa Excellencia
(V"- E"') [vosBtfsd'lensi'B] in speaking to persons of rank,
especially to ladies and to strangers. This form may
be abbreviated ioVossencia [vy'sesf^J.

N.B.— In Brazil these forms (d) are not usual; they
are substituted by:

(e) Vossa Merce (¥"■ Me) [vos^s mdr'se]. Your
grace, a title given in Portugal to lower people, maid-
servants, etc. This form may be abbreviated to:

(f) Vosse (V^) [vo'se], used for men-servants,
etc.; in familiar conversation it is also used among
gentlemen.

(g) In commercial correspondence there is still the
now antiquated « Vossa Senhoriai> [vose siyu'riv], your
honour, to be found (abr. : F" Sr°).

BemarJcs. 1. With all these addresses above mentioned
the verb is to be employed in the third person— e.g., 7" Ex'^
tern or e . . ., F"* Ex'^^ teem or sao ; 2. as already said, you
need not employ the address at every verb. If on the one hand
it would not be polite to dispense with it, a too frequent em-
ployment iwould be heavy. 3. The pronoun *tu» is used only
in familiar treatment and may be altogether avoided by
foreigners. 4. The pronoun *v6s», if not taken in the plural
(and even here it is better to substitute it by the third
person), is antiquated and only used in pathos, at prayers,
and in solemn allocution, for instance, to the king.

32 Lesson 3.

§ 33. The verb ter to have.^

Present participle (participio presente): tendo having.
Past participle (participio passado) tido: ['tidu] had.

Indicative (Indicativo).

Present Tense (Presente).

(See 2°'! Lesson.)

Imperfect Tense (Preterito imperfeito).

Eu tinha f'tijie] I had nds tinhamos ['ttpvmuj] we

tu tinhas you had (thou hadst) had

elle, ella tinha he, she, it, had v6s tinheis ['ti]imfj you had

elles tinham ['tijiSuJ they had.

Perfect Tense (Preterito perfeito).

Eu tive I'tiva] I have got, I nds iivemos [ti'wmuj] we have

had got

tu tiveste [ti'vefls] you have v6s tivestes [ti'veftaf] jovihare

got got ^

die, ella teve f'teva] he, she, elles, ellas tiveram [ti vervuj

it has got they have got.

Present Perfect (Preterito composto).
Eu tenho tido I have had
tu tens tido you have had, etc.

Pluperfect (Mais-gue-perfeitq).
Eu tinha tido I had had
tu tinhas tido you had had, etc.

Future (Future).
Eu terei [td'rvi] I shall have nds teremos we shall have

. , , / thou wilt \ , v6s tereis you will have

tu teras ^ ^^^ ^j^ j nave ^^j^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^jj^

elle, ella ierd he, she, it will have,
have

1 We hesitated to give so early, in this lesson, the whole verb
ter, successively followed by the other auxiliary verbs ser, estar,
haver; but as these verbs cannot be dispensed with to form, even
the simplest phrase, and as experience taught us that a summary
arrangement impresses more easily and lastingly, we resolved to do
so. Yet the student is not supposed to learn at once all the verbal
forms, so as to master them, as, indeed, these verbs with their
resemblances and differences constitute one of the greatest diffi-
culties of the Portuguese language for the foreigner. But he is ear-
nestly requested not to put -these lessons aside before having at-
tained an absolute understanding of the meaning and employment
of the auxiliary verbs.

The Address. 3S

Future Perfect (Futuro perfeitoj.
Eu terei tido I shall have had.

Conditional (Condicional).

Eu teria [tg 'riv] I should elle, ella teria he, she, it would

have have

. , . / thou wouldst \ , nds teriamos we should have

tu tenas ^ ^^^ ^^^j^ | Jiave ^^^ ^^^^-^ ^^^ ^^^^j^ ^^^^

elles teriam thej would have.

Conditional Perfect (Condicional perfeito).
Eu teria tido I should have had.

Subjunctive (Conjunctivo)}
Presents.
Eu tenha I have nos tenhdmos we have

tu tenhas you have v6s tenhais you have

elle tenha he have elles tenham they have.

Imperfeito.
(Se) eu tivesse [ti'vess] (if) (Se)n6stivessemos[ti'ves9muf]

I had (if) we had

(Se) tu tivesses (if) you had (Se) v6s tivesseis (if) you had

» elle tivesse (if) he had » elles tivessem (if) they had.

Futuro.
eu tiver [ti'ver] if (or when) I am to have or: if
tu tiveres (or when) I shall have, etc.

die tiver

nds tiver mos [ti'vermuj]
v6s tiverdes
elles tiverem.

Personal Infinitive. Infinit(iv)o pessoal.

s

53
o

(Para) eu ter

that 1 may

have,

to have (I)

» tu teres

» you »

5>

» » (you)

■» elle ter

» he »

»

» » (he)

» nds termos

» we »

»

» » (etc.)

» v6s terdes

» yon »

»

» »

» elles terem

» they »

»

» »

Imperative (Imperativo).

Tern (tu); tende (v6s) ; tenha nao tenhas (tu); nao tenhais;
(T^) have nao tenha(m) (V^<''>) do not

have.

' The Subjunctive Moods in Lessons 3—7 may be only read,
over here, while well learned later on.

Portuguese ConTersation- Grammar. 8

34

Lesson 3.

Remark. Ter que or ter de indicates necessity:

Tenho de Id ir I mnst go there.

Tens que fazer a tua obrigagao you must do your duty.

In the same manner are conjugated the compound;
Terbs, as :

cibster-se to abstain, to for-
bear
ater to stick to
conter to contain
deter to detain

entreter to entertain
manter to maintain
obter to obtain
reter to retain
suster to sustain.

Palarras.

A drvore

f'arvursj
a drvore fru-

ctifera [fru-

'tifare]
a fructa [ 'frutis]

o fruetof'frutuj

andado [in- \

'dafu] \

ido ['iffu] )
ir [ir]

a saude [sv 'ud'sj
voltar [vot'tar]
a carta ["kartv]
a noticia [nu-

'tisfv]
o trabalko [trv-

'bafiu]
por inuito tempo

[pur multu

'tempuj
fiear [fi'karj
a casa ['kazej
em casa
a ordem ['ordv}]
nenhum [m 'jiii]
assucar

[v 'sukarj
o leite [leit3j
o quel jo ["kvigu]
a manteiga

[mvn'tvygvj
o ovo ['ovu, pi.

'omJJ

the tree

the fruit-tree

the fruit

(eatable)
the fruit (in

general)

gone

to go
the health
to return
the letter
the news

the work,
trouble
for a long time

to stay
the honee
at home
the order
none
the sugar

the milk
the cheese
the butter

the egg

chd [fa]
opudim [pu'ffi]
pastel [pvf'tei]
a batata [bv-

'tats]
a pimento [pi-

'mentv]
o sal [sal]
vinho ['vi/iuj
pdo [peu]
a came [karna]
a volataria

[mdete 'risj
a caga ['kasv]
a agita ['agwv]
a dgua ardente

[vr 'dentd]
o palo ['patu]
o capo ['hjpu]
o dinheiro [di-

jivtru]
o chocolate

[fuku'latd]
quando [ktovn-

du] (algum

dia)
predsar [prasi-

'zar]
jantar [gyn-

'tar]
o caldo ['kaidu]
o arroz [e rrof]
a cerveja [sar-

the tea
the pudding
the pie
the potato

the pepper

the salt
the wine
the bread
the meat
the poultry

the game
the water
the brandy

the duck
the glass
the money

the chocolate

whenever

a gaveta [gv-
'vetej

to want

the dinner

the broth
the rice
the beer

the drawer.

The Address. 35

Rule. — The nouns of material, taken in a partitive
and indefinite sense, are, as in English, used without
the article or a preposition: Tenho j)ao I have (some)
bread. But: Tenho um pouco de pao I have a little
bread.

5. Exercicio. Leitnra e rersao.

meuino, que tern na mao? Tenho uma can6ta. Nao
tem tambem um lapis ? Nao tenho. sr. vizinho tern um
cao? Tenho dois caes. Nao tinha meu Amigo (um) jardim
com algumas floras? Tinha, sim, senhor, e ainda tenho. Se
tivesse arvores fructiferas, tambem teria fructa. Tem a menina
andado a escola nestes dias? Nao tenho ido, tenho andado
{or estado) doente. Quando tiver saiide, terei muito gosto em
voltar a aula. Teve V'. Ex", uma carta da sua amiga? Tive
hontem. Tenho tido noti'cias d'ella (from her) em cada m6s.
Temos tido muito trabalho, para termos uma creada. Agora
teem ? Temos, 'mas nao a (her) teremos por muito tempo.
Nao tendo ordem para la ires, terds de (to) ficar em casa.

6. Exercise.

Have you some fruit, my friend? I have none. She
has the sugar. They have the milk. We had the cheese.
You had the butter. I shall have eggs. He will have tea.
We shall have a pudding. You will have a pie. They had
no potatoes. He has had pepper and salt. Had yon some
wine ? Will you have butter and cheese ? I shall have bread
and meat. The boy has soup and meat. I shall have no
poultry, but I shall have game. Your horse will have bread
and brandy. Shall you have a duck? My daughter would
have a glass of milk. If you had money, you would have
chocolate. Whenever we are to have money, we shall have
everything we want (iudo quanta precisarmos).

ConTersa<;ao.

Que temos nos nesta mesa? Temos uma penna, tinta e

papel.
Terao os rapazes pao e leite? Nao, elles terao pao e agua.
Nao teve V^- queijo esta Nao, eu tive manteiga.

manha ?
Nao terei eu came de boi e Nao, tu teras um pastel e

vinho para o meu jantar? cerveja.

Onde tem a sua penna e a Tenho-as (them) na minha

canSta? gav6ta.

Nao teve ainda caldo com Ainda nao (not yet), mas eu

arroz? tive um copo de leite.

3*

86 Lesson 4.

Teria o meu amigo escripto Teria, sim, senhor. Mas ha
uma carta, se tivesse tido muito que nao tenho tido

tempo ? tempo.

(Oral exercises to be done on the subject, as indicated in the

preceding lessons.)

Fourth Lesson. Ligao quarta.

The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective.

verho auxiliar sSv e o adjedivo.

§ 34. The verb ser to be.

Participio imperfeito: sendo f'sendu].
Participio perfeito: sido ['sicfuj.

Indicativo.
Presente.
Eu sou [sou] I am nos somos ['somuf] we are

tu es [ef] thou art | vos sois ['soff] you are

(elle, ella) e he, > you are (elles, ellas) sdo [svu] they
she, it is J (you) are.

Imperfeito.
Eu era ['erv] I was n6s eramos we were

tu eras thou wast | vds ereis you were

(elle, ella) era he > you were elles, ellas eram they (you)
she, was | were.

Preterito perfeito.

Eu fui^ /TW I ^^^ 0*" ^^'^^ ^'^^ fomos ['fomuf]

been, etc. vos fostes [ foftif]

tu foste ['fojtg] ' elles, ellas fdram f'foreuj.

elle, ella foi [foi]

Preterito perfeito composto.
Eu tenho sido ['sidu] I have been
tu tens sido you have been, etc.

Mais-gue-perfeito.
Eu tinha sido I had been, etc.

1 As fui is also the preterito of ir to go, it means also I
went (fui-me I went away); it is the same for tenses derived from
the preterito (fosse, fdr, fora); see § 44 and 45.

The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective.

37

Futuro imperfeito.
Eu serei [sa'rvi] I shall be nds seremos [sg'remufj we

tu seras [sg'rafj you will be
(elle, ella) serd [s9'ra] he,
she, it, you will be, etc.

shall be
v6s sereis [sd'rvif] you will be
elles, ellas ser do [s9'rvu] they

will be.

Futuro perfeito.
Eu terei side I shall have been, etc.
Gondicional imperfeito.
Eu seria [ss'riv] I should be, nds seriamos [sd'rivmuj]
tu serias etc. vds serieis [ss'rwij]

elle, ella seria elles, ellas seriam.

Gondicional perfeito.
Eu teria sido I should have been, etc.

Subjunctive.
Presente.
Eu seja ['svge] I be, etc. nds sejdmos [sd'gvmuj]

tu sejas
elle, ella seja

Eu fdsse^ ['fosd]
tu fdsses [fosij]
elle, ella fosse

vds sejais [sd'^aij]
elles, ellas sejam.
Imperfeito.
I were, etc. nds fdssemos ['fosamuj]
vds fdsseis
elles, ellas fdssem.

Futuro.

■§

Eu for^

a

tu fdres

>

elle, ella for

I am or happen to be

j_i

nds formos

t

or if I shall be.

o

vds fdrdes

s

^

elles ellas fdrem

C4-I

Infinitivo pessoal.

-§

Eu ser

H

-,

tu seres

J3
-4^

lj .

elle ser

"F " ,

I may be or to be (ly

'^^-+3

^-^

nds sermos

T} CD

you, etc.), etc.

2

vds serdes

o

^

elles, ellas serem -^

Imperativo.
Se (tu); seja (VK); s&de (vds) be. — nao sejas (tu);
ndo seja (Vi); nao sejaes (vds) do not be.

1 See note of the preceding page.

38

Lesson 4.

§ 35. The Portuguese adjective follows, as already-
mentioned, the same rules of inflexion as the substan-
tive with which it consequently agrees in gender and
number. It is the same as for the demonstrative, pos-
sessive, and indefinite adjectives, and the ordinal numbers,
which are all considered adjectives. Also the cardinal
numbers um and dois have a diSerent form for the
feminine (cf. 2°"^ Lesson): este livro, esta penna; men
pae, minha ime; alguni papel, alguma tinta; o primeiro
(first) aliimno, a primeira alumna; dois hancos, duas
mesas, etc.

§ 36. There are adjectives, denominated uniforms,
which have only one form for both genders. This class
embraces those ending by -e, -I, -ar, -az, -is, -os, -im,
-ea and -o, and those ending by -s in syllable not accen-
tuated. Ex.: dace, grande, leal, amdvel, fdcil, gentil,
singular, capas, feliz, veloz, ruim, femea, so, simples.

Exceptions:— esfe, esse, aquelle, mestre (chief— e.g., muro
mestre), which have the feminine: esta, essa, aquella, mestra.

§ 37. The place of the Portuguese qualifying ad-
jective is for the most part after the noun as for those
denoting colour, form, dimension, nationality, religion;
while the demonstrative, possessive, and indefinite ad-
jectives precede the noun.

Palavras.

Velho ['viiiuj

old

alto [aitu] high, tall

novo f'novuj

young, new

grande ['grinds] great, grand,

ruim [rru'i,

]

large, big

'rruTj

bad

sempre [semprs] always, ever

mau [mmi], adv.

caminho [hv- the way

mat [mat]

'mijm]

bom, boa [bo,

good, kind

a invenQoo [we- the invention

boe]

'sen]

doente [du'ent^J

ill, sick

telegrapho the telegraph

rico ['rrikuj

rich

[ta 'legrvfuj

applicado fepli

diligent

Paldcio de the Crystal

'kafu]

Crystal [crif- Palace

preguigoso

lazy

'tal]

[prsqi'sozu]

edificio [yffs- the edifice

hello rtduj

beautiful, fine

'fis'iu]

cedo f'seduj

early, soon

poeta [pu'etvj the poet

tarde ['turd's]

late

opoema[pu'emv] the poem

melhor [mi'Hor]

better, best

colhido [ku- gathered,

duravel [du-

durable, lasting

Tiiffa] plucked

'rsivet]

madurecido ripe

euro ["karu]

dear

[muffura 'siffu]

The Auxiliary V-erb ser and the Adjective.

39

a criania f'kri- the child

pequeno [py-

little, small

'vse]

'kenuj

a fasenda ffv- the stuff, cloth

grosso ['grosu]

thick, big

'zendvj

marmelo [mei-

the quince

pannof'pvnuj the cloth

'mcluj

signal [si' not] the sign, maik

situado [situ-

situated

« duvida the doubt

'affu]

[is '&uvi&v]

universidade

the"university

nao tern duvida is does not

[univarsi-

matter

'6a,63]

airado [ai'ra^u] airy

pdu [pauj

the wood, stick

eomprado [Mm- bought

a madeira [me-

the wood

'pra&u]

'de}rej

bastante [bvf- enough, adv.

de madeira or

of wood,

'tentgj rather

de pdu

wooden

negociante the merchant

a infancia

tbe childhood

[nagugi'-enta]

p'fvsiv]

oZgwirto the room

a manha

the morning

['lewartuj

[vmv 'jivj

muito very, much

&manha

to-morrow

\Sr ['muintuj

[amv 'ji%]

ideia [i'&etv] the idea

escovado [}fku-

brushed.

bonito [bu'nituj pretty

'vaffuj

7. Exercicio. Leitura e versao.

Eu sou velho. Ta es muito novo. EUe 6 um homem
ruim. Ella 6 uma mulher nova. Essa penna 6 boa. Aquelle
menino 6 doente. Nos nao somos ricos. Vos sois applicados.
Elles sao preguigosos. Ellas sao bellas. Eu era teu amigo.
Nos ja nao eramos crian9as. Era isso um bom conselho?
Nao, foi mal pensado. Eu fui tarda duma hora. Postes vos
(foste tu, foi Y^.) mais cedo? Nao 6 Y^. Ex*, de opiniao que
jd seja tarde? Se fosse mais cedo, seria melhor. Se as fructas
ja fdrem colhidas, 6 signal de ja terem madurecido. Isto que
sera? Sera um vestido para a menina. Nao teria sido melhor
escolber uma fazenda que fosse mais duravel? Se nao f6r
duravel, nao tern duvida; o panno nao foi caro. Tudo quanto
tenho eomprado a esse negociante, tem sido bom. A nossa
casa era muito alta e tinha quartos bastante grandes e airados.

8. Exercise.

Translation.

You are a tall man. The rooms are very large. He is
[a] Portuguese. Those are big horses. It was a grand idea.
She was a pretty little girl. He has always been a good boy.
If it be late, you will not find (nao encontrard) the way. The
telegraph is a grand invention. Be kind to the boy ! Be good,
and I will give you the fine fruit. If the stick were not so thick,

40 Lesson 5.

it would not be bad. If I were you, I should be diligent.
The Crystal Palace is a grand edifice. Camdes was a great
Portuguese poet. His best poem is "Os Lusiadas." He is an
heir. Is this an apple? No, it is a quince. We are no bad
boys. The dog of my cousin is good and useful. Coimbra
is the only university in Portugal. It is situated on the
Mondego.

Conversacjao.

Nao 6 elle um bonito rapaz? Nao e tao bonito como (o)

Carlos.
E V^. tao velho como eu? Nao sou tao velho como V'.

Ex".
Sao estas mesas de madeira? Sim, ellas sao de madeira.
Foste bond6so para com (to) Fui muito bondoso para com

o velho homem? elle.

Esta Y^- E*^- doente? Tenho sido doente desde

crianga (from childhood).
O tempo ^manha serd bom ou Serd bom tempo kmanha.

mau?
Estao escovados os vestidos? Estao; foram escovados pela

manha (this morning).

(0 professor dir^, apontando pare o objecto, e o alumno
repetird :)

quadro preto 6 largo, a tinta 6 preta, o banco 6
alto. papel 6 branco, o giz tambem 6 branco, o
tecto 6 branco tambem. Assim o papel, o giz e o
tecto sao brancos. Este mata-borrao e amarello, esse
6 vermelho, aquelle ^ azul. — Como 6 o quadro
preto, o banco, a porta? Que cor tern a tinta, o
papel? etc.

Fifth Lesson. LiQao quinta.

The Auxiliary Verb estar.
DiflFerence between ser and estar.

verho auxUiar BStar. Differenga entre ser
e estar.

§ 38. The verb estar to be (to stand, to lie to
dwell, etc.).

The Auxiliary Verb estar. 41

Participio imperfeito : estando [■if'tenduj.
Participio perfeito: estado [iftiulu].

Indicativo.
Presente.
JEu estou fif'tou] I am nds estamos (iftamuj] we are

tuestas fff'taf] thou 1 v6s estaes [iftaif] you are

art I elles, ellas estam [y'tvu] they

(elle, ella) estd [ifta] ^"'^ ^'"^ (you) are.

he, she, it is j

Imperfeito.

JEu estava [tf'tavs] I was, etc. nds estavamos [if'tavvmul]
tu estavas v6s estaveis [iJ'tavviQ

(elle, ella) estava elles, ellas estavam.

Preterito perfeito.
EsHve [if'tivdj I was or I have estivemos Mti'vemuj]

[ijti'v

been, etc. estivesies [tfti'veftafj

stiveste Mti'v
esteve [tf'teva]

estiveste Mti'vsftd] estiveram Mtivsriu].

'■fti '

Preterite perfeito composto.
Tenho estado I have been, etc.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Tinha estado I had been, etc.

Futuro imperfeito.
Estarei I shall be, etc. estaremos

estards estareis

estard estarao.

Fvturo perfeito.
Terei estado I shall have been, etc.
Gondicional im,perfeito.
Estaria I should be, etc. estariamos

estarias estarieis

estaria estariam.

Subjunctivo.
Presente.
Esteja [tftv^v] I be, etc. estejdmos [tfti'gvmuf]

estejas estejaes [^jti'saij]

esteja estejam [ij'ivgvu] .

Imperfeito.
Estivesse ['ijti 'vesd] I were, etc. estivessemos
estivesses estivesseis

estivesse estivessem.

42

Lesson 5.

Futuro.

'8

60

vT

Estiver [ifti 'ver]

IS

estiveres
estiver
estivermos
estiverdes

>

o
a

"5

u
o

I am or happen to be
or
if I shall be.

estiverem

Infinitivo pessoal.

Estar

-§

estares
estar

'5' «

I may be

estarmos
estardes

'p a)
3

or
to be (I, you, etc.).

estarem

_e

Imperative.

Estd (tu); esteja (Y^.) be, estae (vds); nao estejas (tu);
ndo esteja (Y^.); I'^uo estejaes (vds) do not be.

§ 39. Difference between ser and estar.

A. Ser expresses:

1. Existence in a general meaning, and is therefore
called "Verbo substantive." Ex.: Eu respiro, pais sou
I breathe, consequently I am (existing).

2. A permanent state of existence, an essential and
lasting condition, which may be expressed by substan-
tive or adjective attribute or an infinitive. Ex.: A
terra e uma esphera the earth is a sphere. Sou felis I
am happy. E urn lento morrer it is a slow dying.
Meu primo e soldado my cousin is a soldier. A rosa
e uma flor, e vermelha the rose is a flower, it is red.

3. Followed by the past participle of a transitive
verb, ser is employed to form the passive voice.
N.B. — The past participle is submitted to inflection like
an adjective: Elles foram censurados, they were blamed.

4. Ser de means to belong to ; ex. : de quem e esta
casa? To whom does this house belong? E de meu pae
it is my father's. Estes livros sao do professor these
books belong to the master.

1 De before the Infinitivo pessoal corresponds to the English
of with the gerund preceded by a possessive adjective: A certeza
de estarmos salvos the certainty of our being safe.

The Auxiliary Verb eslar. 43

B. On the contrary, estar is used:

1. If the attribute appears merely accidental or
temporary. Ex. : A rosa estd murcha the rose is faded.
JElle estd feliz he is (just now) happy. Estamos ricos
we are rich — vis., we have at this moment and casually
some means, Estou doente, estou mal de saude I am
ill, I am in bad health. {Eu sou doente would mean
that I have bad health.) Estou horn (de saude) I am
well; sou horn I am good. Estd hem it is all right, he
(she) is well, you are well; estd mal it is bad, or he
(she) is ill, you are ill.

2. If a dwelling is to be expressed in any place
that can be left or the object can be removed from:
A criada estd na cozinha the servant is in the kitchen.
But: Onde e a cozinha? Where is the kitchen?

Bemark. — Here it may as well be said: onde fica a
cozinha? because the place of the kitchen has been appointed
from the beginning (cf. 1^' Lesson, Remark 2°^). Also : A
boca flea debaixo do nariz the mouth is underneath the nose.

3. While ser with the past participle of the verb
forms the passive voice, estar with the same indicates
the state or condition, as: negocio estd feito the
business is done, finished. A casa estd construida the
house is built. Cf. : A casa e construida the house is
building. Elle estd preso he is a prisoner. Foi preso
he has been imprisoned. A conta estd paga the bill is
paid. (Cf. : e pago de contado to be paid in cash.
Somos pagos aos meses we are paid monthly.)

4. Very often estar with another verb (in the In-
finitive or with the Present Participle) is employed as an
equivalent for to be with the Present Participle: Estou
a escrever, estou escrevendo I am writing. Estamos col-
leccionando (or a colleccionar) estampilhas ha dois annos
we have been collecting stamps these two years. Estar
a ferver to boil, to be boiling. Such a paraphrase is
called: conjugagdo periphrastica periphrastical conju-
gation.

5. There is a certain number of adjectives that
are generally used with estar, such as : attento attentive,
contente content; satisfeito satisfied; cansado tired; ean-
gado angry — e.g., estamos attentos, satisfeitos, zangados.

44

Lesson 5.

§ 40. The verbs of the first coDJugation (in -ar)
form the participles in -ando and -ado; those of the
second (in -er) in -endo and -ido; those of the third
(in -if) in -indo and -ido.

PaLiTras.

Situado. sito

situated

fOrto f'tortuj

crooked.

a foz [fof]

tortuous

a embocadura

the mouth

estreilo />/-

narrow, tight

[imhuke-

(of a river)

'tmttu]

'iTurn]

seu, sua

his, her, your

hem conhecido

well known

its, their

[hekuDa'siffu]

inteiro [in-

entire, whole

apraia f'praiej

beach, (sea)-

'teiruj

shore

bairro

quarter of a

halnear [bahn-

bathing- . . .

[u 't>a,irru]

town

'arj, adj.

destruir

to destroy

popuiOso [pupu-

populous

[dijlru 'irj

lozuj

marquez

the marquis

a travessa [tre-

cross-path

[mvr'kef]

'vesej

ministro

the minister

ingreme

steep

[nid 'nijtru]

f'igrsmg]

a catdstrofe

the catastrophe

empedrado

paved

[kv 'taftrufgj

[imjjg'&rad'u]

mandou [man-

ordered

terreno [ts-

the ground

■do]

'rrenu]

(rejedificar

to (re)bni]d

montanhoso

mountainous

I(rr3)i03fl-

[inuntE'gozu]

■karj

a calQoda

paved (or steep)

direito [di-

straight

[hai'satfe]

street

'rvUuJ

a escada [if-

stairs

regular [rragu-

regular

'kacrej

'lar]

a ribeira [rri-

terrace on the

atravessar

to cross

'beirBj

bank of a

1 [etrsV3 'sar]

river

! cruzar [kru-

to intersect

que [Tcs], rel. pr.

which, who

' 'zarj

antes ['sntyf]

before

] entao [tn'teu]

then

de

reinar frrvi-

to reign

norte f'nortsj

the north

'nar]

conduzem f'kon-

lead

sicca I'sokuJ

the sock, socle

'duziij

1 u. merlalha [no-

the medallion

a Baixa

the lower part

1 'd'aHv]

[e 'baifsj

of the town

bronze ['brozaj the bronze

(of Lisbon)

1 representar

to represent

a Alta ['aite]

the higher part

1 [rreprazen'tar]

of the town

'. a cidade fsi-

the town

(of Lisbon)

j 'cTacTaJ

terremoto

the earthquake

a collina fku-

the hill

[terra 'tnotuj

i 'linvj

a maioria

the majority

[ apragaf'prassj the square.

fmeju'riej

market-place

The Auxiliary Verb estar.

45

sete [sets] seven

leal [IfaiJ

} faithful

como fkomu] as

fiel [fVsl]

depois [di'poif] after

peixe ['pe'ifij the fish

hrnitem ['onti}] yesterday

passeio [pv-

the walk

ante-hontem the day before

'SBtuJ

[vnti — ] yesterday

concluir

to conclude

a noite ['noytaj the night

[hohlu 'irj

Jiontem a iwite last night

estudo /?/-

the study

theatro the theatre

'tuduj

[ti 'atruj

a estada [if-

the abode

concerto the concert

'tate]

[ko'sertuj

ingrato

ungrateful.

possivel [po- possible

[I'grsttu]

'sivsij

9. Exercicio. Leitura e Tersao.

Lisboa.
A cidade de Lisboa esta situada na foz do rio Tejo.
Ella foi edifieada em sete coUinas. E grande e populosa. As
suas ruas, pra9as e travessas sao empedrados. Como o terreno
6 muito montanhoso, ha muitas cal9adas e escadas que con-
duzem da Baixa para a Alta. Antes do terremoto do anno
de 1755 (mil sete centos e cincoenta e cinco), as ruas na sua
maioria eram tortas e estreitas. Bairros inteiros foram destrui-
dos pelo terremoto. Foi o marquez de Pombal que, sendo
ministro do rei Dom Jose I (Primeiro), depois d'esta catastrofe
mandou reedificar a capital em bairros regulares que sao atra-
vassados e cruzados por ruas direitas e largas. Na Pra5a do
Commercio esta um monumento do rei Dom Jose I que entao
estava reinando. No socco deste monumento ha uma medalha
de bronze, representando o marquez.

10. Exercise.

Translation.
Yesterday I was^ at church. Were you at the theatre
yesterday? No, sir, I was at the theatre the day before
yesterday; last night I was at the concert. Where is Charles?
He will be at his uncle's (em casa de seu tio). It is possible
that he has been Ul. This hat is too large to be beautiful.
It would have been easy for Charles always to be faithful
to his master. We hare always been very attentive. Are
you satisfied? He was angry while (emquanto) he was writing
that letter. The water is boiling. The fish is boiled. Our
walk has been beautiful. My sister had already been in
London.

' A fact belonging to the past is commonly given by the
Preterite perfeito — e.g., in the above sentence by estive.

46 Lesson 6.

ConrersaQao.

meu nome 6 Pulano^. Qual meu nome 6 Sicrano^.

e o seu? —
Eu sou alemao, mas estive Eu sou portngues e tenho
por muito tempo em Per- estado naAlemanhahacinco

tugal. E o senhor? — annos para ca ('^Aese 5«/ears^.

Tem sempre side alumno Nao, senhor, estive primeiro
d'esta escola? (first) u\im mtern&to (board-

ing-house) de Berlim. —
Que. tempo estara ainda aqui? Estarei at6 estiverem con-

cluidos OS meus estudos.
Esta satisfeito com a sua Estou, sim, senhor. Eu seria
estada aqui? um ingrato, se nao o

estivesse; pois e muito bo-
nito aqui.
Sempre tem estado com saiide Nem (not) sempre; mas agora
emquanto cd esta? estou bem e dou-me bem

(agree) com o clima.

Sixth Lesson. Lipao sexta.

The Auxiliary "Verb haver to have, to be
(left), to take place, to get, to obtain, etc.

§ 41. As for to be, there are also for to have
two corresponding verbs in Portuguese : ter (see 3'^ Lesson)
and haver. The latter, less common in the meaning
to have than the former, is especially employed

1. As a true auxiliary verb to form the simple
Future (Indicative) and Conditional tenses of any verb,,
whereby it drops the h(av) and hangs its personal
endings on the Infinitive of the verb (see §§ 33
34, 38).

2. as an independent verb in its meaning to be
[existing or at hand)— e.g., ha there is, there are (cf.
1 ^*. Lesson). While so employed, it is impersonal and
consequently used only in the third person singular
and without a pronoun:

1 The Portuguese indicates by Fulano (and in the 2iia place
Sicrano) a person (or persons) unknown or not to be named or, aa
meant here, a name to be substituted by the right one.

The Auxiliary Verb haver. 47

3. To form the compound Future (Indicative) and
Conditional tenses: eii hei or havia de comprdr I shall
(should) buy. Here it may be used with the pronoun
and must be followed by de. (Modern writers join
this preposition to the verb by a hyphen: Jiei-de
comprar).

4. In the meaning of to obtain : Elle houve o per-
dSo do rei he obtained the King's pardon. Havendo o
premio da nossa cancdra obtaining the reward of our toil.

§ 42. Saver.

Participio presente: havendo.
Participio perfeito : havido.

Indicativo.
Presente.
JEu hei [eij I have nds h(av)emos [(vv)emuf] we

tu has [afj you have have

elle ha [aj he has v6s h(av)eis [(vvhifj you have

ha there is elles hao [vu] they have.

Imperfeito.
Eu havia [v'viv] I had nds haviamos [v'vivmuj] we

tu havias you had had

elle havia he had vds havieis [■e'vivifj you had

havia there was elles haviam they had.

Preterito perfeito.
Houve^ ['ova] I had houvemos [o'vemufj we had •

houveste [o'vsftg] you had houvestes [o'vefHfJ you had

houve he had, there was houveram [o'vervu] they had.

Preterito perfeito composto.
Tern havido there has been.

Mai^-que-perfeito.
Tinha havido there had been.

Future imperfeito.
Haverei I shall have, etc. haveremos we shall have, etc.

haverds havereis

haverd (there will be or is haverdo.
to be)

1 As this verb, with the exception of the Present and Im-
perfect, is rarely employed personally, we leave the pronoun aside
and also the uncommon forms in the following tenses.

48

Lesson 6.

Future perfeiio.
Terd havido there will be had, etc.
Condicional imperfeito.
Haveria there would be,

Gondicional perfeito.
Teria havido there would have been.

Subjunctivo.
Presente.

(Haja ['agu] that I have, etc.
hajas
haja that there be
& hajamos [n'^muj] that we have
hajaes [e'gaif] that you have
hajam that they have.

Imperfeito.
Houvesse [o'vesa] if I had ( houvessemos [o'vesdmuf]

houvesses if you had ^ < houvesseis [o'vesstj]

houvesse if there were \ kouvessem

Futuro.
houver [o'verj if or whenever I shall have
houveres

houver if or whenever there will be
houvermos
houverdes
houver em.

Imperative.
Saja let there be. (All other imperative forms are
unusual.)

Infinito pessoal.
Haver, haveres, haver, havermos, haverdes, haverem
(that) I, you, he, etc., may have.

In the same manner is conjugated the compound
verb rehaver to have or get back; but this verb is only
used in forms which have the -v- (rehavendo, rehavido,
rehavia, rehouve, etc.)

s

\

§ 43. There are still other (compound) forms,
such as: tenha havido, tivesse Jiavido, ter (and tendo)
havido, which we do not write at large, as they are

The Auxiliary Verb haver. 49

€asily formed by themselves and rarely employed. The
same is to be said for the other auxiliary verbs, already
mentioned. The omitted tenses may easily be sub-
stituted.

§ 44. Yet there is still a tense quite peculiar
to the Portuguese language, which we have not yet
spoken of, because we wanted to mention it apart: it is
the Simple Pluperfect (mais-que-perfeito simples). It is
formed from the 2°*^ person sing, of the Perfect by
hanging the ending -ste into -ra (Jiouveste: houvera;
■civeste; tivena; foste: for a; estiveste: estivera):

fora, estivera
foras, estiveras
fora, estivira
foramos, estiveramos

=3 foreis, esHvireis

r0

•73

J3

thouvSra, tivera

Jiouveras, tiveras

houvera, tivera

houveramos, tiveramos

houvereis, tivereis

houveram, tiveram ^ foram, estiviram

§ 45. The student may at the same time be
conscious that from the same person (2""^ pers. sing,
perf.) there are formed two other tenses : 1^^. the Im-
perfect of the Subjunctive, by changing the ending
'Ste into -sse, and 2^^. the future of the same mood,
by changing -ste into -r (cf. the auxiliary verbs already
mentioned). This derivation is the same in any regular
•or irregular verb.

§ 46. As for the employment of the Compound
Future and Conditional tenses, there is some Kttle
-difference with the simple tense. Hei-de fazer expresses
not only that something will be done by me, but that
I intend or am willing to do it. que elle havia-de
fazer corresponds to: what he ought to do. Nos Jia-
viamos-de ser mais economicos we ought to be more
economical. Nos seriamos mais economicos we should
be more economical.

§ 47. Haver-de, to be obliged to, may also be
nsed in other forms than Present and Imperfect tenses:
Houve-de ser cortes he had to be polite. Se nao houvesse-
de considerar isso if that were not to be considered. Se
'houver(mos)-de luctar com difficuldadas if there are diffi-
culties to be fought with, or if we are obliged to fight
against difficulties. Hade haver tempo para tudo there
must be time for everj'thing.

Portuguese Conversatlon-Granimar. 4

50

Lesson 6.

§ 48. In some tenses the Z^'^ person sing, oi haver
indicates a time past and corresponds to these . . .,
since or ago: ha (haria, haverd, liaveria) quhise (15}
dias a fortnight since or ago; haverd mitito tempo it
will be long since. Ha tres horas que estamos esperando
or a espera we have been waiting these three hours.

§ 49. Ha (houve, haverd, etc.) quern, followed by
a verb in the S'"^ person and in the Indicative or Sub-
junctive mood, means there is a person or there are
persons who . . . — e.g., Ha qucm dig (or diga) = it is
said, somebody says.

Que ha? = what is the matter? Ndo ha nada there
is nothing the matter.

§ 50. Haver por hem means to think proper. It
is scarcely used but by or of the King or the govern-
ment. Haver por mal is rarely used and means: to
take in ill part.

§ 51. The reader will already have noticed that
in the Imperative mood the second person sing, when
employed affirmatively is derived from the same person
of the Present tense Indicative by losing the s; and
from the Present Subjunctive, when employed nega-
tively; — e.g., estd! nao estejas!

Yet there are still for the auxiliary verbs some
little irregularities to be noticed: 1. tens becomes after
losing the s: tern, because a verbal' form is not al-
lowed to end in n; 2. es is changed into se; 3. the
Imperative of haver is not used in the 2°"^ pers. sing',

jRemarJc. Addressing a plurality of persons, the Imper-
rative form is the 3"^'^ person plur. pres. subj. : tenham, sejam^
estejam (hajam not to be used). There is indeed an Impera-
tive of the 2"^ person plur., but it is antiquated and rarely
used by modern writers. The reader will find it in th*
general conjugation-table.

PalaTras.

Traduzir to render

[trvffu'zir]
outro(s) 1anto(s) as much (as

many)
ultimo ['uitimuj last
o uso ['uzuj the use, the

employment
a differenga the difference
[difd'resv]

hem [bvi]
pouco(s)

['poku]
uma vez [vef]
outra vez
ds vezes [ag-

'veziJJ
fazer [fv'zer]

well (very)
little (few)

once

another time
sometimes

to make, to,
do

The Auxiliary Verb haver.

51

a

f'UgweJ
a distingao

[diftl'svu]
fazer distingao

a paciencia [pv-

aprender

[vpren'derj
depressa [da-

'prssv]
a semana [s9-

'mvnvj
sabemos
conjugar

fkogu'garj
a interrupgao

[Uarrup'svuJ
um dia santo
as ferias

[■ferivfj
a doefiQa

[du'ssvj
eedo f'setuj
veneer [ve'serj
vencido

the language

distinction

to distinguish,

discern
the patience

to learn

a cor&gem ]

fhu'rug^i] I
dninio I

['vnimuj J
applieado

[spU'kaffu]
em haixo

[ibaffu]
o erro ['emtj

the courage

diligent

downstairs

the mistake,

error
the money

quickly o dinheiro

[di ' jvevrii]
the week a Inglaterra England

[Uv 'tsrruj
we know ■ passear to walk

to conjugate fpvsf'arj

ir a casa to go home

the interrup- em casa at home

tion (is diias (horas) at 2 o'clock

a saint's day jd [ga,] already

the holidays so [so] \ ,

imico J ■'

the illness a grammatica the grammar

[grv'matikn]
soon desde [dezOd] from

to overcome o prmdpio the beginning.

p. p. of veneer [pri'sip}uj

11. Exercicio. Leitura e vei'sao.

Os verlos auxiliares.

Em portugues ha dois verbos auxiliares para traduzir o
verbo ingles to have, e outros tantos, para traduzir to lie. Os
primeiros sao ter e haver; os liltimos ser e estar. No nso
d'elles (in their use) ha alguma differen^a. As Tszes essa diffe-
ren9a e bem pouca, outras vezes nao ha nenhnma. Ha quern
considera uma das maiores difficuldades da lingua portugufisa
o fazer distingao dos verbos ser e estar. Se nao houvesse
maior difficuldade, ou se essa fdsse a linica, o estndo da lingua
nao seria difficil. Mas haja paciencia, que havemos-de aprender
portuguSs bem depressa. Ha poucas semanas que o (it) esta-
mos estudando e ja sabemos conjugar os verbos auxiliares.
Estes verbos, sendo os mais (most) irregulares, sao os mais
difficeis. Nao havendo interrup5oes, como ja as houve com
dias santos e ferias, e se nao houver doenijas, cedo hao-de ser
vencidas as primeiras difficuldades. Tenham pois animo e
sejam applicados.

12. Exercicio.
Translation.

There is a man downstairs. There are two men down-
stairs. There is to be a saint's day this week. There must

4*

52 Lesson 7.

be some mistake. There being no one there, I went (see
§ 36, note) away. Is there much money in England? Yes,
there is (transl. : there is, yes, sir). "Will there be a concert
to-night? No, there has been a concert last night. What's
the matter? There's nothing the matter. I have been walk-
ing these two hours. I must go home. We all (todos) intend
to go home (see § 46), we must (see p. 34, Kemark) be at
home at two o'clock. Is it long since you have been learning
Portuguese? No, it is only a few weeks. And there has
been some interruption by holidays. Have you had a gram-
mar? Now we have, but we had not from the beginning.

Coiivcrsa<jiio.

Que tem o alemiio? alemao tem uma casa na

rua d'El-rei.
Ha ali grandes casas? Ha, sim, senhor; e a d'elle

(his) e uma das maiores.
Houveterremoto em Portugal? Houve, mas ja ha alguns

mezes.
Tem havido terremotos mais Tem. (that) do anno 1755
vezes ? (mil sete centos e cincoenta

e cinco) foi o maior.
Nao foi o criado comprar Nao havia peixe no mercado;
peixe no mercado ? como o tempo estiv6ra mau,

nao tinha havido quem fosse

(see p. 36, footnote) pesoar

(to fish).

Seventh Lesson. Li(,'ao setima.

Employment and Concord of Tenses.

Emprego e concordancia de tempos.

§ 52. As we have seen, there are two forms of
the Infinitive: the irapersonal one corresponds in its
employment to the Enghsh form; the personal Infini-
tive is a peculiarity of the Portuguese language and
characteristic as for the personal terminations added to
the simple form. It is employed after a preposition.
(N.B.— In the regular verbs it "is consonant to the Sub-
junctive Future.) Ex.:

Fuse diligencia para seres lorn.
Take pains to be good.

Employment and Concord of Tenses. 53

Instead of Passei sem ser visto, you may say:
Passei sem me verem I passed without being seen (lit. :

without their seeing me).
Depois de (nos) estarmos sentados, conversdmos.
After having sat down, we talked.

§ 53. While the Present has only one tense, the
Past is divided into two, or — taking also the Pluperfect
— into three simple tenses:

A. The Preterito imperfeito is used:

(a) In descriptions of character, opinion, state, man-
ners and customs, representing an action as often re-
peated; it embraces a space of time or a state akeady
existing and still continuing as for the time spoken of:
elle tinha uma casa; o homeni era pohre; liavia ruido
(noise); Jiavia reuniao todos os saiiados, an assembly
took place every Saturday. Passdvamos o verao no campo
we used to pass the summer in the country.

(b) If two actions are represented as being per-
formed at, or as lasting, the same time, as:

Chovia emquanto eu passeava.

It was raining while I took a walk.

(As for an action being interrupted by another,
see B, (c)).

(c) The Imperfect is used for all actions that do
not immediately belong to the relation, but are added
by the speaker in order to express accessory circum-
stances or his own meaning, as:

Elles foram a utn sitio que ficava muiio longe.
They went to a place that was very far off.
A lebre, como corria muito, fiou-se nas pernas.
The hare, being a good runner, trusted to its legs.

BemarJc. As in English, the Imperfect may often be
substituted by the iirst Participle — e.g., A lebre, sendo horn
corredor . . .

B. The Preterito perfeito or definido is used to ex-
press actions following one another. It is the historical
tense, being peculiarly appropriated to the narrative
style and therefore used:

54 Lesson 7.

(a) To mark a (point of) time positively fixed, en-
tirely elapsed relatively to the present or the time
spoken of:

coo foi morto the dog was killed.

Na batalha de Aljuharrota os Portugueses venceram os

castelhanos.
In the battle of Aljubarrota the Portugaese vanquished

the Castilians.

(b) To mark the beginning of an action or a state :

Eli tive (uma) carta I got a letter.
Elle teve medo he became frightened.
Houve gritaria there was a clamour.

(e) If one action is interrupted by another, the
Imperfect denotes the action tliat was going on when
the other began ; the latter requiring the Prefer ito per-
feito, as:

Emquanto havia trovoada, elle entrou em casa.

Whilst there was a thunderstorm, he entered the house.

(d) Very often the Preterito is employed when in
Enghsh the compound Perfect is used, as:

Jd jantou? Have you already dined (or had dinner)?
Tive uma chicara de chd I have had a cup of tea.
Comprdmos cafe we have bought coffee.

The compound Perfect is, indeed, always rendered
by the simple Preterite, and not by the compound,
when the action of the verb is altogether finished in
the past and has nothing to do with the present time.

Compare: Comprdmos ussucar we have bought sugar,
and: Temos sempre comprado assucar ao ne-
gociante, nosso visinho.

C. Another tense peculiar to tire Portuguese is
the Simple Pluperfect (Mais-que-perfeito simples) already
spoken of in § 44. There is no difficulty whatever in
its use. It may anywhere be substituted by the com-
pound form; yet, as the Portuguese likes to employ
simple forms, the student will do well in equally prac-
tising the simple Mais-que-perfeito.

§ 54. The first participle or gerund (Participio
imperfeito or gerundio) does not essentially differ in its

Employment and Concord of Tenses. 55

use from the English ; it is used to express some reason
or cause, condition or manner. Yet it must not be
■employed after certain prepositions which in English
require the gerund, while in Portuguese the Infinitive
or the Past Participle is used (cf. § 52, examples).

§ 55. The Future of the Subjunctive Mood, also
a form connected solely with the Portuguese language,
is used to express some uncertain future event. It is
nearly exclusively employed after the conjunctions se
if, quando when, emquanto while, as long as. Ex.:

Quando tivermos dinheiro, compraremos essa casa.
When we shall have money, we shall buy that house.
8e estiver em casa, a porta estard aherta.
If he is (or be) at home, the door will be open.
Emquanto nao fizerem diligencia, nuo serao succedidos.
As long as they do not take pains, they will not
succeed.

§ 56. The Conditional is employed as in English.
Examples :

Se tivesse dinheiro, compraria (or comprava) essa casa.
If I had money, I should buy that house.
Ainda que fosse rico, nao a compraria (or nao a com-
prava).
Even if I were rich, I should not buy it.

Se nao tivesse sido tao tarde, o Jiomem nao teria (or nao

tinha) estado em casa.
If it had not been so late, the man would not have

been at home.

So we employ in the subordinate sentence the
Imperfect (or Pluperfect) of the Conjunctive, and in the
principal sentence the first (or second) Conditional.
Instead of the Conditional the Portuguese prefers to
employ the Imperfect (and Pluperfect) of the Indicative
<see Ex.).

§ 57. The Subjunctive^ being the mood of un-
certainty, it is used:

(a) After those verbs expressing a will, desire, hope,
command, expectation, aspiration, merit. (N.B. — The

> The rules on the subjunctive mood need be only read over
here and can be learned thoroughly later on.

56 Lesson 7.

subordinate sentence is introduced by the conjunc-
tion que^):

Quero (mando, desejo, espero) que sejam modestos.
I want (order, desire, trust) you to be modest.
Merecia que fosse attendido.
He would deserve to be attended to.

(b) After the verbs expressing thought, speech,
beUef, employed in the negative or interrogative, and
the subordinate sentence containing an uncertainty,:

Eu nao digo que seja assim.

I do not say that it is so.

Julga que elle tenha compreliendido ?

Do you think he will have understood?

(c) After verbs expressing some emotion (joy, fear,
fright, etc.):

Receio que nao esteja em casa.
I tear he will not be at home.
Estimei que tivesse vindo.
I was glad he had come.

(d) After duvidar to doubt, ter diivida to have some
doubts, negar to deny, impedir, estorvar to hinder,
ignorar to ignore, because of the negation or uncer-
tainty already included in the verb:

Duvido que tenhas chegado a tempo.
I doubt that you have arrived in time.
Nao tenhas duvida que eu seja teu amigo.
Don't have any doubt that I am your friend.
pae ignordra que o filho estivesse doente.
The father did not know that his son was ill.

§ 58. With respect to the concordance, it is to
be noticed that, as in English, to a main time (Pre-
sents, Preterite [perfeito e composto], and Futuro imperf.
indie.) in a principal sentence corresponds a main time
in the accessory clause; while to a secondary time in

' This conjunction may not be omitted so easily as in English;
there are only a few verbs which dispense with it — e.g., Pedir
to ask, beg: pefO (que) esteja ds duas horas I beg you will be
there at 2 o'clock; esperar to hope: esperamos (que) sejam pon-
tuaes we hope you (or they) will be punctual.

Employment and Concord of Tenses.

57

the principal sentence corresponds a secondary time in
the accessory clause, as:

Mando que escreva I order him to write.

Julgdra que tivesse escripto I thought he had written.

PalaTras.

A empresa

the enterprise

atraso

the delay

[I'prezvJ

/b 'trazuj

dar [da.r]

to give

reldgio

the watch

deu fdeuj

(3rd pers. pret.

[rd'los^u]

of dar) gave

adiantado

fast, advanced

lucro f'lulcruj

the gain

[y&ivn 'taOu]

dez [def]

ten

ouiaf ['osvj

hark!

acaionista

the shareholder

a noticia

the news

[a,s}u 'niftej

[nu 'tisjv]

pensar [pe'sarj

to think

triste f'trtftgj

sad

a posiQao

the position

escrever

to write

[puzi 'seu]

ftfkra 'verj

parecer

to seem

outra vez

another time.

[pvn'ser]

once more

realisar

to realise

prazer

the pleasure

[rieU'zar]

[pry 'zerj

melhorar

to ameliorate

a bondade

the kindness.

[mifiu'ra.r]

[bon 'das'}]

goodness

u amhisao

the ambition

qiie horas sac?

what o'clock is

[imhi'svu]

it?

ensinar [isi'iiar] to teach

e uma hora

it is one o'clock

morar [mu'rarj

to dwell, live

i hora e meia

it is half past

curioso

curious

one

[kuri'ozu]

sao duas

it is two

a regiao

the region

(horas)

o'clock

[rdgi'vu]

sao horas

it is time

temporal

the storm

dar horas

to strike

[tempu 'raij

estar enganado

to he mistaken

durar fdu'rarj

to last

pgy 'naffu]

eausarfkau'zarj

to cause

ahorrecido

tedious, bored

damno

fdnnuj
estrago

[vburr3 'siffu]

the damage

a quietagao
[Icietv'svu]

the quiescence

[}f'traguj

remidio

the remedy

estar a espera

to expect, to

[r3 'mE&}u]

[ifpsris]

wait

gasto ['gaftu]

worn

acahar [vTcv'iar]

to finish, ter-

caso f'Jcazu]

the case

minate

tardar

to be long

enorme

enormous

levar [hvar]

to take along

[■>,' norma]

or away

acaliar

to appraise

descanQO

the rest

[vveli'ar]

[dif'kvsuj

combdio

the train

se Deus quizer

God willing.

["kom'hoiu]

[ki'zsr]

58 Lesson 7.

13. Exercicio. Leitura e Tersao.

Esfca empresa tern dado bom lucre; deu dez por cento
aos accionistas no anno passado. Temos pensado nauito na
sua posi9ao que no primeiro memento nos parecia (Imp. of
parecer) impossivel a realisar, mas que cedo havemos-de me-
Ihorar. Ha muito tempo que tem sido a minha ambi(jao saber
bem a lingua portuguesa. Se tivesse quern m'a (it to me) en-
sinasse, havia-de estudar essa bella lingua. Desde que cd
moro (1^' pers. pres. of morar) sempre tenho tide bons vizinhos.
E curioso seres tu que tenha essa ideia. Na nossa regiao,

temporal, que tem durado uns poucos de (several) dias, estd
causando enorme damno. Estamos a espera que elle acabe
para avaliarmos o estrago que tiver feito. Ja chegou o com-
boio? Ainda nao; tera atraso; jd sao seis horas no meu relo-
gio. Talvez esteja adiantado o seu relogio. Nao esta. Ou(ja!
Estao a dar as seis.

14. Exercise.

Translation.

What have you there? It is a letter. Is it for me
(mim)^ No, it is not. It is for your neighbour who is there
at the door. Was there no letter for me? If there had been,

1 should have given it you*. It is a long time that I have not
had any news from my friend. I am very sad. If there be
no letter to-morrow, I shall write (comp. Future) again. It
is long since we had the pleasure of seeing (Infinitive)
you (a V"~ Ex"). Have the kindness to tell me (de
me dizer) what o'clock it is. It is two o'clock. No, I am
mistaken, it is half past one. It is time for me to go home.

Conversa<jao.

Onde e (or fica) a sua caaa ? E (or fica) ali na rua vizinha.

Ha muito tempo que mora Tenho la morado ha quatro

n'ella? ou cinco annos.

Onde esteve V"- Ex^- no anno Estive n'uma praia balnear.

passado?

Houve la muito movimento? Nao houve; se houvesse, nao

teria Id ido.

Mas nao havendo movimento, Nao 6. A quietagao 6 e sempre

sera (or ha-de sfir) aborre- tem sido o melhor remedio

cido? para os nervos gastos.

' The complementary pronouns follow here immediately the
pronoun siibject: eu Ih'a teria dado.

Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.

59

i^icando conkecido aquella
praia, nao tardera que haja
(or nao tardera haver) mais
gente.

Va. jjj-a. teye bom resultado
da sua estada ali?

Pode ser (it may be) que as-
situ seja; nesse case nao
hei-de la ir outra vez.

Tive. E este anno hei-de le-
var a minha familia, para
todos nos havermos bom
descanQo, se Deus quizer.

Eighth Lesson. Licjao oitava.

Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.

Palavras.

O quintal

[wkm 'taij
o arbuito

[uer'buftuj
■0 carvalho

fuker 'vsduj
•a faia [v 'fats]
a tilia [v 'tiliej
o6lmo[w'olmu]\
c olmeiro >

[uoi'mvyru] J
« salgueiro

[usaV gvpru]
o platano

[u 'plaivnu]
derriharam-no

[dsrri-

'barvunuj
■amattaf'B 'matvj
o grupo

fu'grupuj
a drvore fructl-

fera [fru-
tifgraj
« cerejeira

[vssr; 'ge'irv]
sahoroso

fsebu'rozu]

the garden

the shrub, bush

the oak-tree

the beeoh-tree
the linden

the elm-tree

the willow

the plane-tree

knocked it
down

the wood
the group

the fruit-tree

the cherry-tree
savoury

a amendoeira

[vmendu'virej
florescia

fflurff'sivj
a neve [e 'nevaj
crestar fkriftarj
erestou-lhe

[krif'toUd]
castanheiro

ukvftv'yvyru]
a eastanha

[skvf'tvyej
Todos OS Hantos

f'toffuzuf-

the almond-tree

bloomed,

flourished
the snpw, frost
to blast
blasted it

the chestnut-
tree
the chestnut

All Saints

niagusto
[mv 'guftu]

assado [v'sa&oj
comer [ku'mer]
gostar [guf'tar]
o damasco

[uffa'mafku]
a tAmara

[is 'tvmvre]
a nespera

[v 'nefpsnj

embers to roast
chestnuts in:
the feast of
chestnuts on
All Saints

roasted

to eat

to like

the apricot

the date
the medlar.

15. Exercicio.

Quintal e drvores.
Temos um quintal ao p6 da casa. No quintal ha muitos
grupos de arbustos e algumas drvores velhas e altas: carva-
ihos, faias, tilias e 6lmo3. Perto do rio atras do nosso quintal

60

Lesson 8.

ha salgueiros. Tambem havia um platano muito alto, mas
OS ventos derribaram-no. Al^m das arvores de matta ha.
arvores fructiferas. Esta cerejeira teve muita flor e tera muita.
fructa saborosa. Aquella amendoeira tambem teria muitas
amgndoas, mas quando florescia, a neve crestoa-lhe as fibres.

castanheiro junto a porta da rua ha de dar bellas castanhas
que havemos de comer no dia de Todos os Santos, depois de
as termos assado no magusto. Os meninos gostam de oerejas?
Grostamos, mas mais ainda de damascos, de tamaras e de n6s-
peras. Tivemos grande quantidade de nfisperas no anno passado.

16. Exercise.

In which street is your house ? Have you not a garden
near your house? Yes (see L. 2, note), a large and beauti-
ful garden with many flowers and trees. What tree is that
behind the wall ? That is an elm-tree. i\nd all these trees
are fruit-trees. We shall have very much fruit this year>
Last year we had veiy little. The trees had many leaves^
but few fruits. There you have also very fine roses. Yes,

1 like roses very much; also my mother likes them much.

Palavras.

jardim

[ser'dij
vir [virj
entre [eiitrjj
o vizinho

[ims'ziyu]
a cancella

[kv 'seh'J
abre [abrsf
a rua [rruv]
meio [mvvu]

alegrete

[ueW greU]
a esp^cie

[eif'pEStaJ
o cravo

fu'kravuj
a cor [ekorj
hranco ['brikuj
encarnado

[inksr 'na&uj
amarello

fame 'rsluj
(de) cor de rosa

[korda 'rozv]

the flower-
garden
to come
come in
the neighbour

the trellis-gate

opens

the street, way

the middle,

midst ; means
the flower-bed

the sort, kind,

species
the pink

the colour

white

pink

yellow

M margarida

[nmargv 'riffs]
amor-perfeito

[un 'morpsr-

'fsituj (pi.

amores-per-

feitoa)
lilaz [uli 'laj]
a diihlia

[v'ffaltvj
goivo [u goyvu]
roxo ['rrofiij
eheira [fvirv]
o jasmim

[ussg'ml]
ardma

[uv'roma]
girasol

[u^im 'sol]
aUcengalli'sesvJ
offerecer

[ofsra 'serj
offerecel-as-ia

[of 3rd 'se

lisziy]
nao so [nm so] not only

the daisy
the pansy

the lilac
the dahlia

the gillyflower
violet
smells
the jasmin

the aroma,

smell
the sunflower

the permission
to offer

I should offer
them

Exercises on the Auxiliary. Verbs.

61

mas [m-efj but

•colher [ku'lier] to pick
o que quizer wliat(ever)

[ukaki'zsr] you like

{quizer = Fut. will, desire)

oonj. oiquerer
faga favor devir please to come

[fasvfis 'vorda-

'vir]
prefirofpra'firuj I prefer

a_uva fv'uvej the grape
a pera [v 'pen] the pear
a magd [vmv 'sv] the apple
melao the melon

[uma'lvu]
ramalhete the nosegay

[urrewe' fleti]
nem . . . nem[nv}] neither . . . nor
a ehuva the rain.

[v 'fuvv]

17. Exercicio.

Jardim e flares.

Tenha a bondade de vir para o meu jardim. Entre por
■esta cancella que abre para a rua do meio. Ao longo da rua
lia alegrfites com floras de toda a esp6cie: craves de varias
•c6res: brancos, encarnados, amarellos, cor de rosa; dahlias,
margaridas e amores-perfeitos. Estamos no verao. Na prima-
Tera estavam em flor o lilaz e os goivos, que sao d'uma cor
roxa e cheiram muito bem. Tambem o branco jasmim tern
um bello aroma. V^- Ex^- gosta de girasoes ? Talvez ja haja
urn em flor. Ainda nao ha, nao. Mas quando houver {supply
um), ha de me dar liceii9a de Ih'o offerecer. Ja nao temos
rosas bellas; se tivessemos, offerecSl-as-ia. Hei de fazer para
termos flores tddo o anno.

18. Exercise.

(a) Oh, what nice flowers you have in your garden! If
I had some white roses, I should give them to my mother. —
I have great pleasure in offering you not only white roses,
but all kinds of other flowers. Have the goodness to pick
whatever you like. Do you like the aroma of the jasmin?
I do, but I prefer that of the pinks. I shall have a very
fine nosegay of white roses, red pinks and violet pansies.
Please to come when(ever) you like to pick flowers and fruits.
In autumn we shall have much fruit: grapes, pears, apples,
melons, and others.

(b) Mother, I have got a beautiful nosegay to offer you!
— Oh, the fine flowers! How much (g'Mawto) I like them! —
Look {olha) at these gillyflowers, how nice they are 1 And they
•smell so good {bem). We had no daisies nor dahlias in our
garden; our neighbour had {. . .6 que [as] tinha. N.B. — ^ que
marks an emphasis). We also should have (some), if there
had not been so much {tanto) rain. If we are to have (or
If there be) fruit in autumn, we shall pick apples, pears,
.and grapes.

62

Lesson 8.

PalaTi-as.

hordrio the time-table

fuo 'rarfuj
aligaode leitura the reading-

[iBi'tureJ lesson

a ligao de gram- the lesson of

mdtica grammar

[gm 'matiksj
a ligao d'aritJi- the lesson of

metica arithmetic

[dBrita' mstihej
a ligao de dou- the lesson of

tritia [do- doctrine

'trine]
a ligao de

desenho

[ds'zvyu]
a calligraphia

fkBligre 'fivj
OS lavores

fle'vortf]
a ligao de coisas the intuitive
lesson

the drawing-
lesson

the caligraphy

the needle-
work

dar ligao

a tosse ['tasa]
problema

[pru 'blemvj
algarismo

[aigv 'ri^muj
numero

['numaru]
Jioje [ogi]

to give or to

say a lesson
the cough
the problem

the cipher,

number
the number

to-day

a lingua ['ligwsj the tongue
hontem f'dntv}] yesterday
ao todo [to:dii] in all
fazer
tOdo, tuda
tddos, todas
que [lc3, before
a vowel Tii]
(do)que

to do

all

which, that,

who
than

each, every
the week

cada ['hedii]
a semana

[Bsa'mena]
a matilid the morning

feme 'yv]
a tarde [tarda] the afternoon
a noite [e 'no}ta] the night

dia santo
um dia feriado

[far} 'a&u]
as ferias

[■fsnvf]

the saint's daj-
a holiday

the holidays,
vacation
um diadesemana\
um dia Mil >a working-day

/ 'util] )

tanto [tvntu], so much, so

tanta, tantos, many

iantas
quanto[lcwvntu] , how much, how

quanta, quan- many?

tos, quantas
tanto(s) quan- as much (as

to(s) many).

19. Exercicio verbal.

Conjugate: a) Eu tive (tenho tido, tivera) uma liQao d&-
leitura (desenho etc.)

b) que (quantas) liQoes terei (teras etc.) hoje ? etc^

c) hei de ter uma ligao de . . ., duas ligoes de-

. . . etc.

d) teria (tido) mais tempo, se nao tivesse (tido)-

tantas liQoes.

e) se tiver tempo, hei de fazer o meu thema.

(desenho etc.).

20. Exercicio.
hordrio.
Quantas ligoes tivestes (or tiveram) hSje? Tivemos uma.
liijao de doutrina, ontra d'arithm6tica e duas de desenho t

Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.

63

quatro ao todo. ' Haviamos de ter cineo, mas o professor de
calligraphia tinha tosse e nao veio (did or had not come).
As segundas e quintas feiras sempre tenho nma li9ao de gram-
matica francesa : as ter9as e sextas [feiras] ^ uma de lingua in-
glesa, 8 as quartas e aos sdbbados uma liQao d'alemao. A
5ta fa (quinta feira) 6 meio feriada, os domingos e dias santos
sao dias feriados. As li9oes sao das oito horas de manha at6
ao meio dia e das duas ate ds quatro horas da tarde nos dias
uteis. Se tivessemos mais tr6s li^oes nas quintas, teriamos
seis liQoes em cada dia. menino gosta da li9ao de coisas?
Gosto mais do que dos problemas ; nao tenho memoria para
OS algarismos e os mimeros grandes. E a menina, de que
ligao gosta mais? A de que mais gosto, minha senhora, 6
a li9ao de lavores, que temos todos os dias das duas para
as tres.

PalaTras.

Guilherme

William

a groselha the currant

[gi 'Hermd]

[gru'zvfiv]

Joao [gu'vu]

John

geralmente generally

Helena [fUwe]

Ellen

[Sdrai'ments]

America

America

prequieoso lazy

[e'merikv]

[pragi'sozu]

dinheiro

the money

mais [maffj more

[di 'jivyru]

diligente diligent,

pecego

the peach

[ddli'senta] industrious

['pesdgu]

irrequieto restless

estar falto

to be short of

[irraki'etu]

[fattu] de

erro [erruj the mistake

morango

the strawberry

thema ['temv] the task

[mu'rvgu]

hem que [hv-tka] though (conj.)

a uva de norte

gooseberry

nenhum [n} 'jiiij none, no (at all)

[norta]

contente glad, satisfied.
[hon'tentd]

21. Exercise.

William is my friend. I am William's friend (the friend
of W.). Here is John's brother. Where is my sister Ellen?
She is in the kitchen. I had a cousin who went (see p. 36,
note) to America. Was he still a boy? Yes, he was very
young. The children had (= got) flowers and fruits. Had
you not money enough to buy some peaches? No (I had
not), I was short of money. Are there still strawberries
[left]-'? There are no more (Jd ncio ha), but we shall have
gooseberries and currants. The boys would have had a holi-
day if they had not been so lazy. Little girls generally are

1 The words in [] are not to be translated or may be dis-
pensed with, while those in () are to be employed in Portuguese.

64 Lesson 9.

more diligent than little boys. These are so restless. You
have had four mistakes iu your task, though it was very
easy. When you happen to have no mistake at all, you will
have a nice (and) new book. I shall be glad if you be more
industrious for the future. And you, my boy, will be more
tappy.

professor poder^, contiauar estes exercicios, ate que os
alumnos tenham adquirido uma certa facilidade no emprego dos
verbos auxiliares em todos as suas formas.

Conversa^ao.

A que horas comeQam as aulas? (As sete, oito, nove,

dez.)
Que li^oes ha de manha? (de tarde?)
Quantas li^oes de . . . teem os meninos durante a

semana?
Tiveram bom professor? (Answer: Tivemos, sim, senhor.)
Ha outras li^oes e outros professores todos os dias?
Quantos dias ha na semana, e quaes (pi. of qual which)

sao os sous nomes?
Quantos dias liteis ha n'esta semana, visto haver (as

there is to be) um dia santo?

Ninth Lesson. Li^o nona.

The Partitive Article.

§ 59. To indicate an indefinite quantity or an
indefinite part of a whole, the Portuguese expression
is about the same as the English : bread is pao, cheese
is queijo; I have taken tea eti tomei chd; give me water
de-me dgua.

N.B.— The pleonastical some, used in English, is
only translated when you wish to indicate the quan-
tity referred to as little, or if followed by the plural:
Do you want some bread? Quer pao? Have you got
some money? Tern algum dinheiro? I was some
moments late cheguei tarde de alguns momentos.

§ 60. However, the quantity being determined by
a noun expressing measure, weight, or number, or by a
substantive adverb, the name of the substance is pre-
ceded hj de: um pedago de pao a piece of bread; uma

The Partitive Article. 65

pouca de dgua a small quantity of water; uma garrafa
de vinho a bottle of wine; um tanto de leite a certain
quantity of milk.

Here also the employment is the same as in English.

§ 61. If the word which denotes quantity has
not the form of a substantive, the substance is not
preceded by de (again the same as in English): Tern
muito vinho he has much wine ; temos tanto leite que . . .
we have so much milk that . . . ; ha pouca fructa there
is little fruit; tem havido iastantes batatas there have
been a good deal of potatoes.

§ 62. (a) Nouns and Adverbs of Quantity with de.

Um metro de fasenda a meter of stuff.

Um arratel ['s'rridEi) de assucar [v'sukar].

A pound of sugar.

Dois arrdteis de farinha two pounds of meal.

Um par de hotas a pair of boots.

Tres leguas ['legwvg] de distancia three miles' distance.

Um quarteirdo de ovos 25 eggs.

(Um) certo numero de cartas a certain number of letters.

Um grupo de pessoas a group of people.

(Uma) grande quantidade darame.

A great quantity of brass-wire,

Um pouca de paciencia a little patience.

Um nada de esperanga a want of hope.

(b) Pronouns and Adverbs of Quantity without de.

Algum tempo some time.

Muito ar much air.

Mais dgua more water.

Menos caminho less (= a nearer) way.

Pouca distancia little distance.

Sastante trabalho work enough, rather much trouble.

Qwanto dinheiro? how much money?

Quantas pessoas? how many persons?

Demasiado vinho or vinho demais too much wine.

Poucas toalhas (too) few tablecloths.

Muitas colheres (too) many spoons.

§ 63. The partitive genitive with de or d' is also
used in terms equivalent to adjectives denoting the
material of which a thing is made or its origin or
purpose, as;

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 6

66

Lesson 9.

Um vestido de s&da a silk dress.

Um chapeu de palha a straw-hat or bonnet.

TJma camisa de linko a linen shirt or chemise.

Um falo de la a woollen suit of clothes.

kite de vacca the cow's milk.

A sola de jantar the dining-room.

§ 64. Present Tense of a Yerb of the First
Conjugation (ending: -ar).

Eu acabo [v'kaiu] I finish

tu acabas you finish

elle, ella, V'. acaba he, she finishes, you finish.

nos acabamos we finish

vos acabaes you finish

elles, ellas, F''». acabam, they (or you) finish.

Participles :

Pres.: acabando finishing.
Past.: acabado finished.

Palavras.

A refeigdo

[rrsfei'sva]
chamar ffe 'mar]
o almdgo

[ai'mnsuj
a ceia [sv}v]
vamos ['vymufj
f altar [fal'tur]
a comida

[ku'miO'eJ
o 'jantar

[ugmi 'tar]
jantar
a sola de jantar

[v 'sulvffagvn-

'tar]
u, hora de almo-

gar [v'onsffy-

ahnu 'sar]
faQa favor (de)

['fasvfv 'vor-

(de)]
(se) faz [faf]

favor
a cliicara

[s 'fikere]
lei'e fu'lvHa]
gueria [karinj

the refection,

meal, repast
to call
the breakfast

the supper
let us go I
to want
the food

the dinner

to dine

the dining-room

the breakfast-
hour

please (to)

if you please

the cup

the milk
should like

a manteiqa

fyrnvn 'tvygs]
a vontade

[vvon'taffaj
(is sets (horas)

[aj' sv}' soTJif]
uma fatia de

pao
tomar [tu'mar]
cortar [kur'tar]
copo [u'kopu]
gosta de

I'goJfBda]
vinho de mesa

fu 'vipu&a-

'inesvj
levantar

[hven 'tar]

a talhada
[Hv 'flad'-e]

a came [vkarns]

presunto
[icprs 'zuntu]

nove [iwva]

dez [def]

the butter

the appetite

at six (o'clock)

a slice of bread

to take
to cut
the glass
likes

table-wine

to get up, to
raise, to lift

to rise from th&

table
the slice

the meat
the ham

nine

ten

The Partitive Article. C7

opratofu'pratiij the plate, dish
a travessa the dish

a sohremesa the dessert

[esobra 'mesv]
a sopa [e'sopej the soup
a colher the spoon

[vhu'Hsr]
did [u'fit] the tea

a faca [v'fahv] the knife
agora [v'gorv] now
dar [darj, irr. to give
da fdaj ] . ,

de [dej I S'^«-'

me [md] me

a sede fse&s] the thirst.

22. Exercicio verbal.

Please to conjugate the present tenses and participles
of the verbs: chamar, jantar, gostar, levantar, cortar. — After
some practice you may add a complement and employ a noun
instead of the pronoun of the 2i^^ person. You may also prac-
tise the interrogative and negative forms.

23. Exercicio.

MefeicSes.
Chamam para o alm69o. Vamos para a sala de jantar.
Sao dez horas. E a hora de almo5ar. Ja aqui estao os
paes*, OS tios^ e os primes^, faltam ainda os avos'- Mama,
faz favor de me dar uma chicara de leite com um pouco de
assucar? Tambem queria uma fatia de pao e manteiga.
Tenho muita vontade, ja a tinha ao levantar-me. tio gosta
do nosso vinho? E vinho de mfisa. D6-me tim ovo^ e uma
talhada de presunto, se faz favor. Quantas pessoas ha a mfisa
de jantar? Nove; nao sao muitas. primo Jaime nao tern
prato de sobremesa, nem colher de cha. Tern faca a menina
Benriqueta? Agora tern, mas nao tinha.

24. Exercise.

When is your dinner-hour? At six [o'clock]. Is (the)
mother already in the dining-room? Yes (she is), but (the)
father and (the) brother Henry are not yet. The soup-plates
(plates of soup) stand (= are) on the table; also dessert-
dishes, coffee-cups and tea-spoons. There is broth (= soup
of meat), a big slice of meat, and potatoes. I should like
also [some] bread and some cheese and some fruits. Give
me a glass of wine and a small quantity of water, if you
please; I am thirsty (== I have thirst). We rise from the table.

Querendo dar mais prdtica aos ahimnos, o professor poderii
fazel-o, reunindo-os como para um alm690, um jantar ou uma ceia,
e fazendo-os pedir e affradecer comestfveis.

' Os paes = the parents (pae e m&e) ; os tios = tio e tia ;
OS primos = primo e prima; os avos = avo e avo.

^ avo, ovo, porto, olho and other words which in the singular
have [o], change it into [o]'m the plural(see 2ii<l Part, Lesson 5,§ 18).

68 Lesson 10.

Examples:— Estamos a mesa. Ha uma toalha branoa na
mesa. Em cima da toallia estao pratos. Nas travessas ha oomida.
Tomamos a comida das travessas, poudo-a (putting itj nos nossos
pratos. Os pratos estao eoi frente (iti front) das pessoas. As tra-
vessas estao no meio da mesa. Ellas sao ovaes. Os pratos sao
redondos. A mesa e quadrada. Tomamos cliS, n'uma cliicara e
vinlio n'um copo.

Pregmitas: Onde estamos? Que lia na mesa? Onde eatd a
toallia? Onde estao os pratos? Que ha nas travessas? Onde
est^ a comida? Para cade tomamos a comida? Que ha em frente
de cada pessoa? Que ha no meio da mesa? Onde estao as tra-
vessas? Como sao ellas? etc. etc.

Tentli Lesson. Ligao decima.

The Complements and the Most Prectuent
Prepositions.

§ 65. The Portuguese does not speak of a declen-
sion of nouns. He merely distinguishes subject (su-
jeito) and object or complement (complcmento) ; and as
for the latter, a complemento diredo which corresponds
to the English accusative, and a complemento indirecto
which corresponds to the English dative or genitive.
The latter may also be called the restrictive complement,
as it indicates indeed a restriction in the meaning.

§ 66. The object (accusative) is in the form
equal to the subject (nominative). The conipl. indir.
(dative) is introduced by the preposition a, which is
contracted with the definite article into ao, a, aos, as
and with aquelle, etc., into dqueUe(s), dqueUa(s), while
the compl. restrictivo (genitive) is introduced by the pre-
position de, contracted with the article, demonstrative
pronoun, etc., into do(s), da(s), dum(a), duns, deste, etc.
(see First Lesson).

§ 67. The prepositions are always followed by the
accusative — that is: by the noun in its unaltered form.
There is no form like the Saxon genitive.

§ 68. Prepositions. Preposi^oes.
a [v] to, at, in, within, diem de [v'lvidd] beyond
towards, against, till, on, besides

upon, with, by, for, after, ante [vnta] before, in presence
according to. of (local)

The Complements and the Most Frequent Prepositions. 69

antes de [vnigg de] before

(temporal)
ao lado de 1 , , ,,

[vu'Udu6s]\ by, by the side
ao pe de { °f' "^o^^ by,

fnu'pcd9] ) "^^^"^
ao longo de [vii logudd] along
apesar de [vpa'zardd] in spite

of, notwithstanding
ap6s [v'poj] after, behind
ate [v'te:] until
atrds de [v 'tra^da] behind (s.

tras)
atraves de [vtrv'vsgda] through
com [ko] with, at, after, upon,

in
conformed [ho'formd] accord-
ing to
contra I'kontn;] against
de [da] of, from, for, by
debaixo de [da 'baifu da] under,

beneath (s. sob)
' ahaixo de [e'taifu da] below,

beneath, under
depots de [dapoijda] after
desde [degdaj since
dianie (de) [divnia (da)] before

§ 69. Examples exemplos [i'sempluf].
Ante perigo before (the) danger.
Perante Deus, o tribunal, a minha consciencia.
Before God, the tribunal my conscience.
Antes da sua chegada before his arrival.
Diante (d)a casa before the house.
Na mesa (up)on the table, na parcde on the wall, no
< ^ ar in the air.
A mesa at table.

Sabre a mesa upon or above the table.
Debaixo do banco under the bench.
Sob panto de vista under the point of view.
Para os pobres ior the poor.

^ Conforme is naed only of something very sure, undoubted,
while segundo is used also of something doubtful.

^ em is contracted with the following article or pronoun
into wo, rta, nelle, neste, etc. (see 1st Lesson); par is contracted
with the following article into pelo, pela, pelos, pelas.

durante [durSnta] during
em^[§i, ijin, into, to, on, upon,

during
em f rente de [t'frentada] in

front of, opposite to
entre f'entre] between, among
excepto [(v)if'SEtu] except,

save
fdra [farv] except, save, besides
fora de out of, without
junto a ['guntuv] joined to,

adjacent to
para ['pvrvj for, towards, to,

in order to
para com towards
por meio [mnu] de, mediante

[medySnta] by means of
perante [pa'rSntaJ before
par^ [pur] for, by, through
segimdo^ [sa'gundu] according

to
sob [sutja] under
sem [svi] without
sdbre ['saira] on, above
trds or trds de [trag(da)J

behind.

70

Lesson 10.

Para comer (in order) to eat.

Para o sul towards south.

OUiar para alguem to look at or after somebody.

Ir pela rua to go through the street.

Trocar por prata to change for silver.

Por engano by mistake.

Feito pelo pintor N. made by the painter K.

Excepto visinho except the neighbour.

Alem do visinlio besides the neighbour.

Fora de casa out of the house.

Conforme o prcceito, us leis.

According to the precepts, the laws.

Segundo a lei, urn boaio.

According to the law, a rumour.

Junto a esta carta joined to this letter.

Estar an lado, ao pe do alguem.

To be (sitting, standing, etc.) at the side of somebody.

Estar com alguem to be with somebody.

Bondoso para com alguem kind to somebody.

Encostar-se contra a parede to lean against the wali.

Atrds de or trds (de) a casa behind the house.

I'alavras.

Comprar

[kijm 'pmrj
a coisafu koizuj
ainiffo, -a, adj.

a loja [e'hgu]
a Hterccriria

[cm.vsjv 'rie]
cai.reirn

[ukay 'J'uiruJ
u mostrador

fiimuftrv' dor]
xi'irio I'variu]
OS r/cneros

fu'g:cn9riifj
a(s) passa(s)

[>i(p2Msvff)J
chocolate

[ufiiku'latjj
me [iimJ
OS daces

[uj;'&os}fJ
as conservcis

[liflcO'servvfJ

to buy

the thing
befriended,

kind
the shop
the retail shop

the clerk

the counter

various
the goods,
victuals
the raisin(s)

the chocolate

me

the sweetmeats

the preserves

a laranja

[vlv 'rvgv]
a nos [v'nof]
a avela [ava'lvj

diz [dif]
ver [vcr]
figo [u'fuju]
damasco

[uife'mafkuj
a caixa fv 'kayjn]
a amendoa

fa, 'menduvj
o vidrofu'viffni]
a lata [vlutej
pau [tqiauj de

chocolate
cesto [u'scftu]
niais [tnayfj
a conta [vkontvj
lojista

[ulti'^iftt!]
charuto

[tiJ-B 'rutuj

the orange

the nut, walnut
the hazeLnut,

filbert
says
to see
the fig
the apricot

the chest
the almond

the glass, pane
the tin box
the cake of
chocolate
tho basket
but

the bill
the shopkeeper

the cigar

The Complements and the Most Frequent Prepositions. 71

perto de

near to

a entrada

the entry

« rua [v'rrwe]

the street

[mn'tra&v]

a jjraga

the square

tiinnel

the tunnel

[e'prasvj

fu'twuij

■estagao central

central rail-

monte

the mountain

do caminho

way-station

[u'montd]

de ferro

comprimento

the length

f}ftv'svu ien-

[ukomprt-

'traliiilo! 'mipu-

'mgntuj

03 'fsrruj

kildmetro

the kilometre

o portao

the portal,

[hi 'lomatruj

[pur'tw]

porch

aluguel

the hire, rent

•em forma de

in the shape of

[uvlu'get]

ferradiira

a horseshoe

wna casa de

a house to be

p'formv-

aluguel or

let, a tene-

Odfdrrie 'Owe]

d'aluguer

ment house

■a escada [i">/-

the ' staircase,

uma casa minha

a house of my

'ka&vj

stairs

own

elevador

the elevator,

desejar

to desire, wish

[ufhire'tfor]

lift

[dazf'garj

■eonduz [konduf] leads |

mostrar

to show

a plataforma

the passengers'

[mvftrar]

fvplvtv 'formvj

platform

andar

to go

(dos viajantes)

[en 'darj

nos [nuf]

us

pagar

to pay

subimos

we ascend.

[/jV gar]

[su'timuf]

mount, go up

morar \

o caes fukujfj 1
« gare (French) j

the railway
platform,
quay

[mu'rarj
viver [vi'ver] J
apresentar

dwell, to live
to offer.

•estende-se

extends,

[vprdzen'tar]

present.

[tf'tenddsa]

stretches

25. Le

itura.

Numc

( loja.

Desejo comprar algumas coisas para pessoas amigas e da
minha familia. Entro u'uma loja. E uma mercearia. Falo
com caixeiro que esta atrds do mostrador. Elle mostra-me
varies g^neros: chocolate, doces, conservas, laranjas, nozes,
avelas, 6 diz: «Vi- Ex*- deseja T6r mais? Ainda tenho mui-
tas caixas de passas, de figos e damascos seccos; grande nu-
mero de latas de conserva, mnitos cestos de laranjas, diizias
de garrafas de vinho doce, saccos cheios de nozes e de amen-
doas.» Compro alguns pans de chocolate, uns vidros com
doces, duas garrafas de vinho do Porto e mais coisas. Pago
a conta do lojista e apresento a um amigo o vinho e uma
caixa de charutos: d tia um arratel de chocolate; a meu
prime uma lata de conservas, e umas laranjas de Setiibal a
minha irma.

72 Lesson 11.

25a. Exercise.

The Bocio.
We live in Lisbon in the Avenida da Liberdade. Near
to this street there i? the Eocio, a large square. On this
square is a monument of Peter the Fourth and the Theatre.
Opposite to the theatre Dona Maria is the central railway
station Rocio. We enter by a porch in the shape of a horse-
shoe. By the side of the stairs there is an elevator. By
means of this elevator we ascend the upper passengers' plat-
form. The railway platform is behind the passengers' plat-
form and extends up to the entry of a tunnel which leads
us through the mountain. This tannel has a length of some
kilometres.

ConTersaQao.
Onde mora(m) V^W- Exists). . . . o(s) seu(s) amigo(s)? . . . a(s)

senhora(s) Teixeira?
Mora(m) n'uma casa de alugael ou n'uma casa sua?
A quern da V. o seu lapiz? . . a sua penna? . . . os sens

livros ?
Onde compra o seu papel ? . . . os sens charutos ?
Onde 6 o theatro Dona Maria?
For meio de qu6 subimos a plataforma superior da

estaQao do Rocio ?
Oade e o elevador?

caes da esta9ao do caminho de ferro, onde ^?
Como se chama a esta9ao?
Que outra eoisa tern o mesmo nome?
Que ha n'uma [loja de] mercearia ?
Que deseja comprar?
A quem deseja apresentar o que compra?

Eleventh Lesson. LIqEo decima primeira.

The Attributive Adjective in Gender and
Number.

§ 70. The Portuguese adjective is, like its sub-
stantive, variable in gender and number (cf. Lessons 2
and 3). There are 2 classes of adjectives:

1. The qualifying or attributive adjective (adjedivo
qualificafivo or attributivo), which attributes to the sub-
stantive any quality, thus representing the adjective in
its proper meaning: a grande torre, o homem alto, a
mesa e redonda.

The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 73

2. The determinative adjective, which renders its
substantive prominent among and distinguishes it from
others — e.g., esta casa, aquelle livro, cada alumno, minha
irma, etc. These latter will be treated among the pro-
nouns (see L. 24).

§ 71. The attributive adjective divides, according
to the form, into two classes of adjectives (Please to
repeat the rules given in §§ 38 — 40):

(a) The adjectivos uniformes — i.e., those with only-
one form for both sexes or genders and consequently
invariable. They consist of

1. Those ending in -e, -I, -ar, -a^, -is, -oz, -im,
-ea and -o, and also by -s in a syllable not accentuated
(cf. § 36).

2. Commum, common also has only one form for
both genders; and so have the Latin comparatives in
-or: anterior id., former; posterior id., latter; superior
id., upper; inferior id., lower; maior greater; menor
smaller, minor; melhor better; peor worse; etc. As for
the plural, they follow the rule of the words ending
by -r: superiores, etc.

(b) The adjectivos hiformes — i.e., those which have
two forms and consequently a special termination for
the feminine gender. To these belong all adjectives end-
ing by any other but the above mentioned termination,
namely :

1. Those ending by -o not accentuated and pre-
ceded by i, M or a consonant: frio, mtUuo, justo, bon-
doso.

2. Those ending by -u preceded by a consonant:
nu, cru.

3. Those ending by -ao, -eu f-eo), -or (-or), -es (-es),
-oni, -urn: sao, hehreu, tutor, ingles, bom, nenhum.

§ 72. Examples,
A. Adjectivos Uniformes.

Singular. Plural.

Leve [hvg] light (of weight) Those ending by a vowel

verde ['verdg] green take an s:

differente [difs'rentd] id. leves, verdes, di/ferentes

74

Lesson 11.

leal {If'ai] faithful, loyal

amdvel [v 'mavtlj amiable,

lovely
legivel [IfjlvdJ legible
fdcil I'fasii] easy
gentil [gen til] gentle
aeul [v'gul] blue
singular [slgu'lar] id.

capaz [kv'pafj capable

felis [fa'lif] happy
mloe [vd'hf] quick
fuim frru'ij bad, naughty
s6 [so] only, alone
femea f'femiv] female
simples ['simphjj simple

leaes or leais (al becomes aes

or ais)
amdveis {el becomes eis)

legiveis (el becomes eis)
facets (il not accented: eis)
gentis {il accented: is)
agues {ul becomes ues)
singidares (adj. ending by -r

take es)
capaees (adj. ending by az take

es)
felines (adj. ending by intake es)
velozes (adj.endingby oa^takees)
ruins {m changes into ns)
SOS (those in 6 add s)
femeas (those in ea add s)
simples (s remains unaltered).

B. Adjectivos Biformes.

Singular. Plural.

Masculine.
Quieto [hi'etu]
frio [friuj

Feminine,
guieta quiet
fria cold

Masculine,
qidetos
frios

formdso (s. S 74) formdsa beautiful formdsos
nu fnu] niia naked, bare nus

sao [sSuJ sit healthy, sound, saos

wholesome
christao [krif'tvu] chrisla Christian christdos
alemuo [vh'mnu] alemu German alemdes

aldedo [al'diSu]
comildo

[Jcumi 'iSu]
beirdo [hvi'nu]

hehreu [I'treu]
judeu [gu'deuj
animador

[vmrnh' 'dor]
portugues

torto [tortu]
(s. § 74)

aided rustic, rural aldedes
comilona glutto- comiWes

nous, greedy
heiroa or heird beiroes

of the Beira
hebrea Hebrew hebreus
judia Jewish judeus

animadora

encouraging
portuguesa

Portuguese
torta crooked, tortos

tortuous

Feminine,
quietas
frias
formdsas
nuas
sds

cliristus
alemds
aldeds'
comilonas

beirdas or

beirds
hebreas
judias
animadores animadoras

Portugueses portuguesas

tortus.

§ 73. The feminine form of these adjectives is
obtained as follows:

The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 75

(a) Those ending by unaccented -o change -o into
~a: hranco, branca.

(b) Those ending bj'- -ti, preceded by a consonant,
add -a: cru, crua raw, unripe.

(c) Those ending in -ao lose the -o: vao, va (or
■ivan) vain.

N.B. — The adjectivos augmentativos^ form their fe-
minine in -ona : comildo, comilona. — Beirdo (native of
the province of Beira) forms heiroa or heira.

(d) Those ending in -eo (eu) change this diphthong
into -ea [vi-e] : liebreu, liebrea.

Exceptions. — Judeu, judia; sandeu, sandia foolish.

(e) Those ending in -or add -a: abrasador, -a
burning.

Exceptions. — Incolor colourless ; bicolor (tricolor) of two
(three) colours; multic(ol)or of many colours; semsabor tasteless,
insipid, which are uniforme.

(f) Those ending in -es (-eg) add -a: frances,
francesa.

Exceptions. — Cortes courteous, polite; descortes un^olite;
■sois low, vile, which are uniform.

§ 74. Those adjectives which in their last syl-
lable but one have close o change this sound into
open in the feminine (as well as in the plural) form.
To these belong: ^

1. All adjectives ending in -oso (or -oso) — e.g., for-
■moso [fur'mozu], formosa [furmozn] ; formosos [fur-
^mozuf], formosas [fur mozi^f] .

2. The adjectives cMco hatched, brood(ing); grosso
big; morno tepid; novo new, young; porco dirty; torto
crooked; fem.: grossa ['grosn], ['mornv], etc.

3. The past participle oi par to put, and compound
words — e.g., posto ['poftu], posta ['poftv], disposto, -a;
exposto, -a.

' Augtnentativos are those adjectives (and substantives) wbicli
change their ending into or add the syllable -ao, sometimes pre-
•ceded by some intercalary letter or letters, thus expressing high
degrees of a quality (in substantives an augmentation of shape,
weight, etc.) — e.g., maganao (from magano malicious, knavish [per-
son]); espertalh&o (from esperto brisk) cunning [fellow].

76

Lesson 11.

Preliminary JRemark. By adding the syllable -mente to
the feminine form of the qualifying adjective, we form the
adverb ; — e.g., antigo, antigamente formerly. Comprehende-se
facllmente it is easily to be understood. N.B.— Sometimes we
may employ the adjective form instead of the adverbial, espe-
cially if accompanied by ser: £ facil de compreJiender. Elle
foi direito (instead of diveitamente) para casa he went directly
home. (More particulars will be found under Adverbs^)

Pala

vras.

Avisitafva'zita] the visit

a pelle [pd]

the skin

jiassar hem

to be in good

revestir

to vest, cover

(mal)

(bad) health

[rravff'tir]

conw passou?

how do you do?

particularmente particularly

como tern pas-

fpertj-kular-

sado ?

'mentd]

oxald [ofu'la] !

would to God !

calQado

shoes, boots,

a importancia

the importance

[kai'sa&'uj

footgear

['impur 'tesivj

amnllecido ^

softened

receitar

to prescribe,

[nmidd si&u]

[rrasvt 'tar]

order

servem ['ssrvvj]

serve

deoe f'divdj

must

tirar de [tirar

to tear off

a conseguencia

the con-

dsj

[kusj 'kwesiej

sequence

a beterraba

red beet, beet-

apesar de

in spite of

[lata 'rraSi?7

root

[vpa'zcxrdaj

raspar

to scrape,

plena fplenuj

full

[rrvf'pai-J

shave

diligente

diligent

a raiz [rrv'}/]

the root

fdali'gentaj

carnudo

fleshy, pulpous

estiidioso

studious

[Icvr'nuffuJ

[yftulfi 'ozuj

encarnado

red

assiduo

assiduous

[iker'naffu.]

[b 'siffwu]

mel [mel]

honey

premiado

rewarded

vinagre

vinegar

[prsmt'adu]

[vt 'nagra]

a alegria

the joy, merri-

azedo [n'zcOu]

sour

[nh'grie]

ment

amarqo

bitter

illustrado

illustrated,

[v 'marguj

[jluf'traffu]

instructed

xarope

syrup

qiiadrupede

quadruped

[fv'ropD]

[kiov 'ffrupa&Bj

vestiidrio

clothing.

a vitella

the calf

viftu'ariuj

clothes.

[v% 'tele J

26. L

eitura.

A V

isiia.

Bens dia?

, minha senhora

! Como esta V

1. Ex^?

Bons dias

, sr. doutor! E

3tou boa, obrigada ! E o doutor.

The ending -ido is that of the past participle of the 2n<5
and Srd conjugations, the 2n(l conj. having the infinitive in -er and
the 3i<J in -ii:

The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 77

como tem passado? — Nao estou muito bom; tenho estado
Kpr andado) constipado ha algum tempo. — Oxala que nao
«eja nada de importancia! Quern, como o doutor, tem de re-
<!eitar saiide aos outros, nao deve estar nem ser doente. —
Hei de fazer para estar bom depressa. E uma consequencia
do tempo ruim. Apesar de estarmos ern pleno^verao, os dias
esiao frios e chuvosos como emnovembro. — E verdade, tem
sido um verao pouco agradavel. Onde esta o filho de V»-
Hx^- ? — Esta na aula. — E um menino muito intelligente.
— Diligente e assiduo 6 o que elle e. Poi premiado por ter
sido o melhor alumno durante o anno passado. — Tera sido
nma grande alegria para V*- Ex^- — E foi. Nao estaria {or
nao havia de estar) satisfeita, se nao fosse assim. Tendo sido
■estudioso em rapaz, sera illustrado quando for homem.

27. Exercicio oral e per escripto.

First repeat the rules of Lesson 2.
What is the plural of alto, mdu, orfao, sao, alemuo,
■castellao, aldeao, comum, portugues, simples, brutal, ami, fdcil,
Jidbil, cruel, civil, ruim, irmdo, hondoso, torto, menor, maior,
superior, encantador ?

What is the feminine of the same adjectives?
What is the plural of the feminine form?

Join the uniform and biform adjectives to substantives
of different gender and number; — e.g., um pensamento chris-
tao, uma obra christa; missiondrios christaos; igrejas chris-
ids, etc.

28. Translation.

The quadrupeds are covered with skins. The skins of
■some animals serve particularly to make shoes and boots.
The skin, after being torn off the animal, is softened and
scraped.— The beetroot is a plant with (de) [a]^ very thick
and fleshy root of white or red colour. Out of the white
beetroot sugar is made.— [The] Sugar, [the] honey and
Jthe] syrup are sweet; [the] vinegar is sour, and [the] beer
is bitter.

Conversaijao.

De que sao revestidos os (animaes) quadnipedes?
Para que 6 que nos servem as pelles dos bois, das vac-

cas, das vitellas?
Como se prepara a pelle, depois de tirada do animal?
De que plant a, produzida na Europa, se faz assucar?

• The worcls in [] are not to be translated.

78 Lesson 12.

Que parte da beterraba e que serve para fazer assucar ?

Como 6 a raiz da beterraba?

Que qualidade tern o assucar? o mel? o xarope?

Conheceis fructos que tambem sao doces?

Que qualidade tein o vinagre? a cerveja? o sal?

Qual e gosto das coisas que sao nem ddces, nam azfi-

das ou salgados ou amargos?
Nomeie um liquldo que da sua natureza 6 insipido!

Twelfth Lesson. Ligao decima segunda.

The Position of the Attributive Adjective.

§ 75. The position of the adjective is greatly-
influenced by; 1. its greater or lesser importance (if
accented or unaccented), 2. its category, and 3. the-
harmony of the phrase.

§ 76. The following rules should be noted:

1. The unaccented adjective, which, being rather
ornamental than discriminative, forms a natural in-
herent characteristic, precedes its noun : um bom livro ;■
mau tempo ; a branca neve the white snow ; o doce mel ;
a negra sorte the dark destiny. (Here bom and man
are unaccented ; branca and doce do not discriminate ;
negra is employed ornamentally and figuratively). Cf.:
■um livro bom, tempo mau, papel branco, fructa doce,
cupa negra. Cf. :

A interessante crianca — uma conferencia interessante,

Um, simples aperto de tnao a simple pressing of the-
hand; uma ]}hrase simples; um vestido simples.

Um grande homem a great man.

um homem grande a tall man.

EemarJc. — To tbis group belong also those adjectives-
employed in mere formal addresses, as in writing letters, etc-
— e.g., lUustrissimo Senhor, Excellentissima SenJwra; de
ya. jij^a. attento servidor, respeitoso admirador, etc.; yet in
these finishing formulas they may also follow, especially if
several are employed to accompany the same noun; — e.g., ad-
mirador respeitoso e gratissimo (abbr.: adm°^'- resp. "■ e graP^"-)^

2. The accented adjective, which, being rather
discriminative than ornamental, forms a mere accidental
characteristic, follows its noun. To this group belong:

The Position of the Attributive Adjective. 79

(a) Adjectives denoting nationality, religion, dignity,
employment, material — -e.g. :

A Uteratura espanJiola the Spanish literature.

um pintor neerlandes a Dutch painter

a igreja catholica the Catholic church

a guarda municipal the town militia

governador civil the (Lord) Mayor

gado lanifero (or lanigero) wool-bearing animals

dgua mineral mineral water

a indiistria mineira the mining (industry).

(b) Adjectives denoting qualities perceptible by the
senses — e.g., colour, shape, size, taste, smell, etc. — -e.g. :

JJma sola comprida a long hall
uma janella ogival a pointed or arched window
uma faca aguda a pointed knife
um vestido castanho a brown dress
uma herva aromdtica an aromatic herb
uma amendoa amarga a bitter almond,
(but: uma amarga decepgdo, because here the adjective
is employed figuratively).

(c) The verbal adjectives or participles — e.g.:

Uma janella pintada a painted window
a rainha reinante the queen-regent.

(d) Adjectives accompanied by an adverb or an
adverbial phrase, such as muito very, pouco little,
hastante enough, demais or deniasiado too, tdo so, etc.

Uma carta muito extensa a very long letter

uma tarefa pouco agraddvel a rather disagreeable task

uma porta demasiado estreita too narrow a door

um aluguel relativamente barato a hiring of relative

cheapness
um Iwmem digno de fe a man worthy of belief.

3. Many adjectives may precede or follow the noun,
this being often without any importance, but still
oftener denoting difference.
Um bom homem a good- um liomem lorn an honest

natured man man

um pobre homem a poor man um homem pobre an indigent

(to be lamented, unhappy) man

certa noticia a certain news uma noticia certa exact tidings
um bello homem an excellent um homem bello a handsome

man man

so Lesson 12.

meu caro amigo my dear unia viagem cara an expensive

friend journey

vma alta personagem a high um tecto alio a high roof

personage
um franco riso a frank a entrada franca free entry

laughter
uma leoe duvida a slight doubt um fardo leve a light burden
meii prdprio proceder [pru- uma maneira prdpria an ap-

Sdder] my own behaviour propriate manner

« prdprio amdr real love o amdr prdprio self-love.

§ 77. If a noun is accompanied by several ad-
jectives, the harmony of the phrase decides the po-
sition of the adjective, yet without contradicting the
rules above. Cf. : um hello dia — um dia hello e (and I)
soalheiro (or: lun hello dia soalheiro, as a fine day gene-
rally is a sunny day; uma grande batalha sanguinolenta
a great and bloody battle ; but : uma hatalha sanguino-
lenta e victoriosa, as in English ; os tenues ramos floridos
or OS ramos tenues e floridos the thin, blooming twigs, etc.
§ 78. Though as a rule short adjectives precede
the noun, there are also those which always follow
it— e.g. : frio, secco, gordo, quente, ameno, etc.

§ 79. An adjective qualifying two substantives
must be plural:

Paulo e Carlos estuo crescidos.
Paul and Charles have grown, are tall.
Minha irma e minha prima sao appUcadas.
My sister and my cousin are diligent.

If the nouns (or pronouns) are of different genders,
the adjective is put in the plural masculine, provided
the nouns denote persons or living beings — e.g.:

Homens e mulheres estavam satisfeitos.

Men and women were satisfied.

If, on the contrary, things are spoken of, the gender
of the last substantive prevails — e.g.:

Cantos e anecdotas bonitas,— whereas:
Anecdotas e cantos bonitos.

§ 80. To a noun in the plural are added several
adjectives in the singular, if each adjective would be ac-
companied, when alone, by the noun in the singular:

As linguas inglesa e partuguesa.

The English and Portuguese languages.

The Position of the Attributive Adjective.

81

Palayras.

A habitoQao
[sbitB 'svuj

habitar
alicerce

[•Ell'sETSd]

a parede

[pe' red's]
pavimento

[pvm 'mentuj
sobrado

[su'braduj
asseiitar
cresce [krsf'ss]
seguro [sg'gw-uj
easco ['kafku]
geral [gd'ral]
geralmente, em

geral
tijolo [Wgolu]

the dwelling
(-place), habi-
tation

to dwell, live

the foundation,
basis

the wall

the pavement

the floor

to rest, settle

grows up

safe

the skull

general

generally

the (burnt)
brick

addbo [s'ffobu] the sun-dried
brick, adobe
' the clay
baked

barro [ubarru]
cozido

[Icu'ziduJ
cru [TcruJ
a madeira

me'dvvrvj
madevro

[mi> 'ff^tru]

raw

the wood

the block

a trave ['trava]
a viga ['vige]

a lenha ['IvpeJ
lenho ['Ivyu]
aparar

[vpe 'rarj
o machado

fmv'fa&uj
a face [fvsa]
quadrado

[kwv 'frafu]

[rr£ 'tvgulu]
telhado

[tv'da&u]
a telha ['tvHv]
assente [v 'sentgj

a ripa ['rripnj
zinco ['zikuj
a lousa ['lozv]
tornar [tur 'nar]
demasiado

[damvz'i'a.ffu,]
guente [Knta]
inclinado

[ikh'nad'u]
a faeilidade

[fvsah'd'ad'aj
a chuva [fuvv]

the beam, joist
the little beam

or joist
the wood
the block
to cut, clip

the axe

the side
the square,

quadrangle
the rectangle

the roof

the tile
sitting; firm,

solid
the lath
the zinc
the slate
to make

too (much)

hot

inclined

the facility

the rain.

29. Leitura.

A haUtagdo.
Os homens habitam em casas. Ema casa tern alicerce,
parades, pavimentos ou sobrados, e telhado. alicerce
6 a raiz d'onde a casa cresce. Sem bom alicerce nao ha casa
segura. As paredes sao o casco da casa; geralmente sac feitas
de pedra, mas ha par6des feitas de tijSlos e tambem de
adobes. Os tijolos sao de barro muito bem cozido. Os adobes
sao tambem de barro^ mas cm. Ha barro vermelho e barro
brance. Os pavimentos ou sobrados sao em geral de madeira.
Os sobrados assentam sobre vigas que sao madeiros mais ou
menos grosses; e as vigas assentam sobre as traves, que sao
lenhos grosses e compridos, aparados a machado, com quatro
faces regulares em rectangulo. telhado 6 geralmente for-
mado de telhas assentes sobre ripas. Ha telhados feites de
zinco, e tambem os ha feites de lousa. Mas o zinco e a

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 6

82 Lesson 12.

lousa tornam as casas demasiado quentes no veiao. Os te-
Ihados sao inclinados para deixarem correr com facilidade a
agua das cliuvas.

(Trindade Coelho: ptimeiro Livro de Leitura.)

30. Exercicio oral on por escripto.

The verbs of the present tense of No. 29 to be changed :
1. into the preterito imperfeito, 2. into the futuro, 3. into the
presente do conjunctivo, 4. into the pret. imperf. do con-
junctiva.

N.B.— Cresce(r) forms 1. crescia, 2. crescera, 3. cresija.
4. crescesse; assentar forms 1. assentavam, 2. assentarao;
o. assentem, 4. assentassem ; tornar forms like assentar. —
In the Subjunctive begin each sentence by que.

Ex. : Os homens habitavam em casas. Uma casa tinha
alicerce . . .
Os homens habitarao em casas. Uma casa tera

alicerce . . .
Nao ha quem duvide que os homens habitem em

casas; que uma casa tenha alicerces . . .
Nao havia quem duvidasse que os homens habi-
tassem . . . etc.

31. Tema.

(The) Portuguese literature is very interesting, but little
known. The prevailing religion in Portugal is the Catholic.
In the Museum "das Janellas Verdes" in Lisbon are pictures
of Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Dutch^ and German artists.
On (the) Portuguese soil are to be found many springs of
mineral water. In Germany there are besides the national
wines also French and Portuguese wines and good German
beer. Men and women are small in that country. The books
and letters on the table were open. The Spanish and Italian
languages are very melodious. Cervantes was a great Spa-
nish poet, and Raphael a celebrated Italian painter.

Conversa^ao.

Se fosse rico, estaria mais contente ou feliz?

Quando eras novo; em que coU^gio estavas?

Teremos de continnar a marcha apesar de estarmos
cansados ?

Teve Va- Ex*- a visita d'uns parentes affastados (dis-
tant) antes de ir ao campo?

meu amigo (you) falar-lhe-ha, se ella estiver em sua
casa?

Comparison of the Adjective. 83

No case que nao esteja, dara o meu recado?
E este o caminho para a proxima cidade?
Esteja V"- Ex^- descansado (easy), que este 6 o caminho
certo (right).

Exercise: Conjugate the phrases of the conversation by
changing persons, numbers and genders, as well as
the interrogative form into the negative or positive,
or negative-interrogative form.

TMrteentli Lesson. Li^ao decima terceira.

Comparison of the Adjective.

§ 81. The comparison of Portuguese adjectives is
analogous to the compound form of the English. As
for the Comparative, we distinguish 1. that of a higher
degree (comparativo de superioridade) and 2. that of a
lower degree (comparativo de inferioridade). The former
is formed by putting the adverb mais (more) before
the adjective, the latter by employing the word menos
(less) — e.g. :

Positivo. Compar. de sup. Gompar. de inferior,

bello, -a beautiful^ mais bello, mais menos bello, menos

bella more beau- bella less beauti-

tiful fill

N.B. — There is no comparison equivalent to the
simple or Anglo-Saxon form of English comparison —
e.g.: alto high; mais alto higher; Superlativo o mais
alto the highest.

§ 82. The Superlative too has two forms; we
distinguish :

1. the relative Superlative (superlativo relativo or ex-
clusivo). This compares several objects and denotes that a
certain quality exists in one of them in the highest
(or lowest) degree relatively to others of the same kind ;
excluding these from this same degree. It is formed by
the words o mais and o menos (of. § 81 N.B.), the more
and the most;

1 In the comparison the adjective is subject to the same
rules concerning gender and number as in the positive form.

84

Lesson 13.

2. the absolute Superlative (superlativo absolido or
simples) which denotes simply that an object possesses a
quality in a very high degree. It does not compare
nor select, but attributes in an absolute manner some
quality in a very high degree. It corresponds to the
Enghsh most preceded by the indefinite article, or to
the adverbs very, extraordinary, extremely, etc.

The absolute or simple superlative is formed by
the ending -isslmo added to the adjective (see the follow-
ing Lesson).

§ 83. There are some adjectives which, besides
their regular comparison, have an irregular Latin one,
as well as an absolute superlative.

Positivo. Coniparativo.

alto high

bom good

mau bad,
evil

grande
great

pequeno
little,
small

mais alto, su-
perior 'higher

mais bom (rare),
melhor better

mais mau, peor
worse

mais grande
(rare), maior
greater

mats pequeno
more little,
menor smaller

Superlativo
relativo or
exclusivo.

mais alto, o su-
premo, summo
the highest

mais bom (rare),
melhor better

mais mau, o peor
the worst

mais grande
(rare), o maior,
mdximo the
greatest

mais pequeno
the most little,
menor, o mi-
nimothe smallest

Superlativo ahso-

luto or simples

superlativo.

(o or urn) altissi-
mo, supremo,
smnmo very-
high, (a) most
high.

(o or um) dptimo
the best.

(o or um) pessi-
mo very bad.

(o or um) maxi-
mo very great.

(o or um) mini-
mo very little,
very small.

Please to notice that alto in its proper meaning,
mau in its meaning evil, and pequeno in its meaning
little, have a regular comparison; cf. : a arvore mais
alta: a mais alia or a suprema confianga; o summo
pontifice (pope); o solo mais mau; a medida peor; o pe-
da CO mais pequeno; a menor duvida.

Oomparison of the Adjective. 85

As an outer characteristic of the Latin absolute
Superlative you may notice that it can be employed
not only with the definite, but (and mostly) also with
the indefinite article — e.g. : a hora suprema; umaprova su-
prema (or uma suprema or summa prova) de amor (N.B.
summo, -a always precedes the substantive.

§ 84. "Much" before a comparative is hem or
muito, which latter is also employed in the form of the
absolute Superlative: muito or muitissimo inelhor; hem
mats alto, hem maior. These two adverbs, before a
Positive, are translated by "very" or "most": bem or
muito simples = very or most simple.

§ 85. "Little" before a comparative is pouco,
equally employed in the superlative form: (muito) pouco
melhor.

N.B. — The adverbs mais and menos, employed in
the comparison, are themselves comparatives (of muito
and pouco).

§ 86. "Than" after a comparative is translated
by que or do que. By que (or do que), if the 2""^ degree
of a comparison is employed without a verb ; only by
do que if it contains a verb— e.g. :

A torre e mais alta que (or do que) uma casa.
A torre e mais alta do que nds pensamos.

§ 87. "As . . as" before an adjective in a com-
parison (comparativo d'igualdade) is translated by (tao)
. como — e.g.:

A casa e (tao) alta como uma torre.

§ 88. "So (much . . .) that" in a comparativo d'igual-
dade is translated:

1. by tao . . . que which immediately precedes the
adjective: Tao adversa nos foi a sorte, que ... so ad-
verse was Destiny to us, that . . .

2. by tanto que, which is employed separated from
its adjective: Tanto nos foi adversa a sorte que . . .

§ 89. "All the more (so), as," "the (more) ... the
(more)" in a comparative is translated by tanto (mais);
quanto (or que)" — e.g.:

86

Lesson 13.

A nossa surjpresa foi tanto maior, tanto mais agraddvel,
qua/nto (or que) estavamos longe de esperdl-a.

Our surprise was so much the greater, all the more
agreeable, as we were very far from expecting it.

Quanta mais, melhor the more, the better.

Quanta mais tern, (tanto) mais quer.

The more he has, the more he wants.

Bemark. — Sometimes a Portuguese adjective has the form
of a Comparative without there being a comparison:

Uma casa par mais modesta que seja, ha de ser Umpa.
However modest be a house, it must be clean.
Par menos lisangeiro que fosse a nosso acolhimento . . .
Although our reception was little flattering . . .

Palavras.

A trovoada

[truvu'aOv]
perigo

[pa'riQu]
perigoso

[p3ry'gozu]
a gente [gentaj
conductor

[hondu'torj
a electricidade

[iUtrsSi' ffaffi]
a atmosphera

[stviuffcrej
a pessoa

[pd'sov]
portanto

[pur'tvntu]
a probabilidade

[prubvidli-

'ffaOd]
produzir

[prudu'zir]
a descarga

fdi/'kargyj
eUctrico

[i'letriku]
isolado [isu-

'laduj
raio [rraiuj

cae [ka/i]
2)rdximo (de)
['prosimu]

the thunder-
storm

the danger,
peril

dangerous

people

the conductor

the electricity

the atmo-
sphere, air
the person

consequently

the probability

to produce

the discharge

electrical

isolated

the flash of
lightning
falls
next, near (to)

eis ahi [vizn'ij

porque

[pur' que}
a cruz [Tcruf]
coUocado

[kulu'leadu]
hem como

[be'komu]
ponto ['pontu]
elevado

[ilg'vaffu]
terminam

[tar'minvuj
objeto

[oba 'getuj
metal [mg'taij
de preferencia

[daprafa-

'rensi'e]
atacado

[vtv'kacfu]
local [lu'kaij
compartimento

[hompvrti-

'mentuj
afastado \

[vfvf'ta&u] I
distante |

[dif'ivnts] ]
a diamine

[fvnn 'nsj
a altura[al'ture]

that is (the

reason)
why

the cross
put

as well as

the point
elevated, high

terminate

the object

the metal
with predi-
lection

affected

the locality
the room

distant

the chimney
the height

Comparison of the Adjective.

87

qiier diser that is (to say)

[Jcsrdi'serJ
por exemplo for instance

[purV zemplu]
pelo menos at least

[p9lu 'menufj
ainda que (subj.) though, even

[e'mdv h»]
de inais a mats all the more

[damais- so, moreover

B 'mxif]

aguentar

[sgwen'tar]
pois que

[po^f'kd]
ficar enxarcado \

to suffer, bear

[tpBr'ha&u]
ficar molhado

[nm'fia.ffu]
fato [fatu]
attreito

[is 'trntuj

to become wet
or drenched

the clothing
affected bv

32. Leitura.
A trovoada.

E perigoso estarmos no meio de muita gente durante
lima trovoada, porque sendo cada pessoa um conductor da
electricidade da terra para a atmosphera, quanto maior for o
numero das pessoas, tanto maior sera o niimero de condu-
ctores 6 portanto a probabilidade de se produzir a descarga
eldctrica. As arvores isoladas, os edificios altos etc. sao peri-
gosos quando ha trovoadas, pois o raio cae primeiro no que
e mais alto, por ser o que Ihe fica mais proximo. Eis ahi por
que as cruzes altas collocadas sobre as egrejas, bem como o
pontb mais elevado das torres — prinoipalmente quando estas
terminam em algam objecto de metal mais ou menos agudo
— sao de preferencia atacados pelo raio. Dentro das casas,
melhor local para se estar (for people to stay) durante uma
trovoada e o meio das salas, dos quartos ou dos comparti-
mentos, pois quanto mais afastado se estiver das parades ou
das chamines, menor sera o perigo.

(Trindade Goelho: Pao Nosso.)

33. Tenia.

In the field, the best place during a thunderstorm is the
one, where we are the most separate,^ [from] and never so near ^
[to] (de) a tree that the distance of it be less than its height. That
is [to say,] if, for instance, a tree has^ a height often meters,
we must be distant from it by at least ten meters. Even
if we have* to bear the rain and become^ drenched, all the
more so as (pois que de mais a mais) (the) wot clothing is
[a] better conductor than the dry [one]. (The) women are
less affected by the flash of lightning, than (the) men.

> See § 81 footnote,
junotive. ^ Infinitive.

see § 88, 1. ' Gerund. * Sub-

8S Lesson 14.

CouTersaijao.

Qual e o logar I °^^^^ ^^S^"^? \ '^^^^^'^^^ ^""'^ *'^°"
° \ menos perigoso / voada:

(1) dentro das casas?

(2) no campo?

Onde e perigoso estarmos emqtianto ha trovoada?

Porque (por qne razao)?

raio, onde cae de preferencia?

Porque ?

Quando sera manor o perigo de sermos ataeados pelo

raio?
Quaes (sao) as pessoas menos attreitas ao raio?

Fourteenth Lesson. Ligao decima quarta.

The Absolute Comparative and Superlative.

§ 90. As already mentioned (§ 82, 2), there is
beside the relative Superlative an absolute one, and also
an absolute comparative form of a certain number of
adjectives. This comparativo dbsoluto is of Latin origin
and has the accented ending -dr. They are the folio-
wing:

Comx>arativo. Siiperlativo.

anterior [vntm'or] former, anterior —

posterior [puftdri' or] latter, hinder, —

posterior
citerior [sitdri'or] hithermost —

ulterior [ultgri'or] ulterior ultimo ['uUimu]

exterior [(B)^ft9ri'orJ outer, exterior, extremo [if'trenntj

external

interior [intart'or] inner, inside, in- hitimo flntimu]

terior

superior [supdri'or] higher, superior supremo [su'jiremu],

summo ['sumu]

inferior [in fori' or] lower, inferior infimo ['inflmu].

§ 91. Employed in a relative sense — i.e., when
comparing several objects these adjectives are followed
b}' the preposition a (to)e — .g. :

A descoberta da America e anterior d da India.

The discovery of America is anterior to that of India.

The Absolute Comparative and Superlative. 89

§ 92. The Superlatives corresponding to the ab-
solute Comparatives are employed in an absolute sense
as well as in a relative — e.g.:

A desGoberta do Brasil e ulterior d das costas da Africa,
e a da India e a ultima (rel. sup.) das descobertas.

Nos ultimas (abs. sup.) seculos as Portugueses nao figeram
descobertas de maior valia (= importance).

IRemarh. — Some of these Comparatives and Superlatives
are also employed as substantives, as in English.

§ 93. Most usual is the pure absolute Superlative,
which, without comparing, denotes a very high degree of
a quality. It is formed by adding the ending -issimo to
the root of the adjective, and subject to the same
inflection— v.g.: aUissimo, -a (from alto) very high; for-
mosissimo, -a (from formoso) most beautiful ; extensissimo,
-a extremely vast.

§ 94. According to the ending of the adjective or
its root, a certain number of them undergo a slight
change in the formation of the superlative absolute :

(a) The adjectives ending in -co change this ter-
mination into -quissime: brance, braiiquissime. (Exc. :
parce, parsimonious, parcissime).

(b) Those ending in -go change it into -guissime,
largo, larguissime. (Exc: amige, befriended, amicissimo;
anfige, ancient, antiquissimo.)

(c) Those ending in -b change this letter into c;
felis, felicissimo.

(d) Those ending in -do (-an) and -lu change this
termination into ■(a)nissimo: sdo, sanissiiiio ; bom, bonis-
simo; commum, commtmissime.

(e) Those in -vel form -bilissimo : agradavel, agrada-
hilissime.

(f) Those in -r and -s form -issimo: particular, par-
tlcidar issimo, pertugues, pertuguesissime.

(g) Those ending in -fice change this termination
into -fkentissimo : magnifice, magnificentissime.

(h) The following adjectives form the absolute
Superlative by adding -illimo: fdcil, easy, facillime;
difficil, difficult, difficillimo; humilde, humble, humillime;
semelhante, similar, similimo.

90 Lesson 14.

(i) The following adjectives form the superlative
in -errimo:

acre sharp, acerrimo.

dspero rough, asperrimo

cetebre famous, celeberrimo

integro righteous, integerrimo

livre free, liherrimo

misero miserable, miserrimo

pohre poor, pauperrimo

salubre wholesome, salutary, saluberrimo.

(k) The following adjectives have an irregular
Superlative, derived from the Latin form:

cruel cruel, crudelissimo (beside cruelissimo)

doce sweet, mild, dulcissimo

fiel true, faithful, fidelissimo

frio cold, frigidissimo

geral general, generalissimo

nobre noble, nobilissimo

sdbio wise, learned, sapientissimo

sagrado sacred, holy, sacratissimo

simples simple, simplicissimo.
Note.— YoM must not without any farther consideration
form an absolute Superlative of any adjective. There are a
good many of them that do not admit the addition of -issimo.
If not sure, it will be better to design a high degree of some
quality by employing muito, bem, summamente, etc. — e.g.,
muito meigo, bem cartes, altamente lisongeiro, summamente
enfadonho (most tedious).

§ 95. Present Tense of a regular Verb of the
second Conjugation (in er):

dever, must, ought, to be obliged to, to owe.

(For the present tense of the first Conjug. see § 64.)

Eu devo feu 'devu] I must, am obliged, owe.

tu deves [tu 'devifj ^ you must, are obliged, owe.

elle, ella, F"- deve f'dcva] he, she, you must, etc.

nds devemos [de'vemuf] we must, etc.

vds deveis [da'vvif] you must, etc.

elles, ellas, F"*- Ex<^'- devem ['dew}] they, you must, etc.

Part.pres.: devendo. Part, passado : devido.

* The verbs which in their last syllable but one have un-
accented short e [gj change this vowel, when accented into close
e [ej, if the last syllable contains o or a; and into open e [c], if
the last syllable has an •;.

The Absolute Comparative and Superlative.

91

Si, Exercise.

Conjugate by word of mouth and in writing the Present
and the Compound Perfect (preterito indefinido composto) of
1. parecer^ [pvrd'ser] to seem, 2. enternecer^ [intdrns' ser]
to affect, move; 3. estender [tftm'der] to extend.

Palavras.

A regiao

a extensdo

[CB)}ften' sSu]
a inveja [t'vegej
eneanto

[I'kentu]
capricha/r

[kiepri'fa,r]

em . . .
aecumular

[vkumu 'larj
enlevar [Ug'var]
amar [v'mar]
a maravilha

[mvry 'vifh]
raro ['rraruj
a joia /j3»»7
lembrar

[lem'brar]
a concha ['hofv]
a saphira

[sB 'firaj
de dia

engastar-se

[igvf'tarsa]
semelhar alguem

[sdWi'fi'ar]
taholeiro

[tviu'lvyru]
a esmeralda

[tgm3'raMv]

the region

the extension

the envy
enchantment,

charm
to make a fancy

of .. .

to heap

to rejoice
to love
the wonder

rare

the jewel
to remember

the shell
the sapphire

during day-
time
to be enchased

to resemble
somebody
the flower-bed

emerald

to wind,

meandre
to incrust

[s9rpent}'arj
encrustar

[thruf'tar]
a crista fkrifte J
espectaculo

[ifpe'takulo]
beijar [hn'jar] to kiss

the crest
the spectacle

perfume

[pdr'fuma]
a myriade

[mf'rivffa]
embalsamar

[mibaisv'mar]
a eiwosta

[I'koftv]
prddigo

['proffigu]
por toda a parte
tudo [tu&u]
perpetiu)

['P3r' pettim]
esplender

[ifplm der]
o riso ['rrigu]
a campina

[Mm' pine]
a cldusula

['KlauzulvJ
exequivel

[izi'hwivsi]
subtil [subs' til]
tenaz [ta'naj]

o magistrado
[nvesif'tradu]

a lei [Is}]

a calamidade
[kvlvmi'ffaffa]

ingreme
['igrdmd]

com respeito a

a vista

a residencia

[r9z'i' densyv]
chao, eha

[fvu, fv]
atroz [v'trjf]

the perfume

the myriad

to embalm

the slope

prodigal

everywhere
everything
perpetual

to beam,
sparkle
the smile
the field, plain

the clause

practicable

subtile
tough,

tenacious
the magistracy

the law
the calamity

steep

with respect to,
concerning

the view

the dwelling-
place

plain

atrocious, cruel

'■ c before o and a = g.

92 Lesson 14.

audae [au'Sfa./] audacious : porem ['pu' ri}] \ i.oweyer

feroz [prof] wild, savage no entretaiito I

particular particular , o diadema the diadem.

[pm-tiku'Ur] , [din'ffemn]

35. Exercise.

Change the following adjectives, giving them the form of
the absolute Superlative. Inimigo acre. Pessoa affavel. Sabor
agradavel. Mao amiga. Costumes antigos. Inverno aspero.
Crime atroz. Homem audaz. Boa alma. Papel branco. Su-
jeito capaz. Autores c^lebres. Campinas chas. Delicto com-
mcim. Dor cruel. Questao difficil. Palavras doces. Hora
feliz. Tigre feroz. Servo fiel. CJausulas exequiveis. Li(jao
facil. Feia ingratidao. Voz fraca. Agua fria. Phrase hu-
milde. Magistrado integro. Lei justa. Vista linda. Vontade
livre. Bspeetaculo magnifico. Mas novas. Misero estado.
AcQao nobre. Casos particulares. Gente pobre. Termos pro-
prios. Calculo provavel. Conselho prudente. Diadema rico.
Verdade sagrada. Sitio salubre. Ares saos. Estilo simples.
Coisa subtil. Substancia tenaz. Terrivel calamidade. Triste
situaQao. Despesa litil. Vacs cuidados.

36. Leitura.

Portugal.

Portugal 6 uma das mais lindas regioes do mundo. Pe-
queno em extensao, de nenhum outro deve ter inveja este pais
de encantos. A natureza parece ter caprichado em accumular
nelle bellezas de toda a ordem, que enlevam os olhos e en-
ternecem a alma. Portugal, minha patria bem-amada, es
uma pequenina^ maravilha e uma rara joia! Debaixo do teu
ceu quasi sempre azul, que lembra uma concba de saphira,
onde de dia se engasta um formosissimo sol e de noite as mais
bellas estrgllas, os teus campos semelham um taboleiro de
esmeralda, que os rios, serpenteando em todas as direc^oes,
encrustam de fios de prata. Montes verdes, cobertos d'arvores
ate as cristas, nao os tem mais pittorescos o mundo todo; —
e beijados por um clima dulcissimo, que o perfume de my-
riades de flores embalsamam na primavera, os teus valles, as
tuas encostas, os teus campos sao no estio prodigos de fru-
ctos, — e por toda a parte, e em tudo, parece esplender, per-
p^tuo, o riso da natureza. (Trindade Coelho: Pao Nasso.)

37. Tema.

I got (= had) a most amiable letter from the very
learned professor. The airs of this region must be extremely

1 Diminutive of pequena small: a dear little . .

The Numerals. 93

whoiesome. Not only are the airs, but also the water is most
salutary. The climate of the northern countries of Europe is very
cold and rough, while that of the southern countries is extraor-
dinarily mild. The Avenida da Liberdade in Lisbon is a very
large and beautiful street with quite modern houses and
healthy habitations. In the quarter (of the) Mouraria, how-
ever, the streets are very strait and steep, showing extre-
mely poor and miserable little houses. That quarter is very
old; it is [originates] of the times of the Moors, and conse-
quently anterior to the Portuguese monarchy. Though it be
inferior as a dwelling-place, for its views, it is superior to
any other quarter.

ConversaQao.

Que diz escriptor Trindade Coelho de Portugal ? (see 36).

Em que parece a natureza ter caprichado?

Que e que lembra o ceu de Portugal?

Que semelham os campos?

Como sac os montes?

Como e cUma?

Como sao OS valles, as encostas, os campos?

Onde parece esplender, perpetuo, o riso da natureza?

Fifteenth Lesson. Li^ao decima quinta.

The Numerals.

Adjectives e Substantives numeraes.

§ 96. There are to be distinguished three classes
of numbers:

1. Cardinal Numbers (niimeros cardinaes);

2. Ordinal Numbers (niimeros ordinaes) and

3. Multiplicative Numbers (mimeros multiplicativos).

I. Cardinal Numbers. JVumeros cardinaes.

Zero ['0eru] oito [oitu] 8

um, uma 1 nove [novd] 9

dois (dous), fern, duas 2 dez [def] 10

tres 3 onee [de9] 11

quatro 4 doze fdoea] 12

cinco 5 treee [trezej 13

seis 6 quatorze [kv'torzd] 14

sete 7 quinee [Mza] 15

94

Lesson 16.

dezaseis [dBgu'svif] or dezeseis

16
deeasete [[daev' SEtd] or desesete

17
dezoito [dd'zoitu, da'eottu] 18
desanove [daze' nova] or deze-

nove 19
vinte [vintp] 20
vifde e um [vinti'ffj 21
vinte e dous 22
wnfe e tres 23
i^m^e e quatro 24
wmie e cmco 25
OTwie e seis 26
vinte e sete 27
»iwte e oito /t)«w<i 'oi^w, «;i« 'toitu]

28
wwfe e wow 29
trinta [trintv] 30
trinia e um 31
iriwia e oito [trzntvioituj 38
quarenta [hwe'rentv] 40

§ 97. Observation.
1. Z7m and (iois have a
Tenho um naris

cincoenta [siku'entv] 50

sessenta [sa'sente] 60

setenta [sa'tentv] 70

oitenta foftentej 80

noventa [nu'vdnivj 90

cew, cewto /se?, sentu] 100

cewto e Mm 101

dueentos 200

treeentos 300

quatrocentos 400

quinhentos [ki'yentuf] 500

seiscewtos 600

setecentos 700

oitooentos 800

novecentos 900

mi? 1000

»wi? e Mm 1001

(ioMS mi? 2000

cem miZ 100,000

Mm mi?Mo /mi '/iewy 1,000,000

£?ois mi?A5es 2,000,000.

Mm Mlliao a milliard.

feminine form: uma and
e wma 6oca, dois olhos e

is also inflected like an
g. : quatrocentos soldados,

dnas — e.g.:
duas macs.

2. Oento in the plural
adjective: -centos, -centas — e,
sriscentas bcdas.

Bemarh. — A hundred, one hundred, if not followed by
another number (but mil or milhao), is rendered by cem
(without Mm.'): a hundred men cem homens^; but: cento e
um Jiomens 101 men; cem mil reis; cem milhoes de metres
cwhicos. — Cento is also employed as a substantive — e.g.;

Quanto custa o cento d'estes 6vos? Um cento custa dois
mil reis, mas duzentos custom tres mil oitoeentos.
So employed, cento must be preceded by the article and,
if followed by another substantive, joined to this by de.

3. Mil is never preceded by um.^ It must be
employed to render the English expressions: eleven

^ Cem, mil— as, indeed, any other number, marking a plura-
lity — may be preceded by uns, umas, which means some or about:
Tins cem homens, umas cem mulheres = some (or about) a hundred
men, women.

Ji

The Numerals. 95

hundred, twelve hundred, etc. mil e ceni, mil dujsen-
tos, etc.

4. The expression "in the year" is rendered by
no anno de or simply by em: In the year nineteen-
hundred and eleven = no anno de (or em) mil nove
centos e onze.

5. The number one being preceded by another, the
substantive follows in the plural form, as in English:
Mil e uma noites 1001 nights.

6. The units may be joined to the tenths by the
conjunction e or by a hyphen: trinta e oito or trinta-
oito, vinte-um, etc.

7. The days of the month (except "the first," o
primeiro) are expressed by cardinal numbers, preceded
by 0, a, em or no dia: the 25"* of May em (or no dia)
vinte e cinco de maio; the 7*^^ of August em (or no dia)
sete de agosto.

Nasceu a desdito de junho.

He was born on the 18*'' of June.

In official writings the plural is usually employed :
Acs vinte e quatro dias de desembro.
On the 24*^ of Decembre.

Note. — The names of the months are Janeiro, fevereiro,
margo, abril, maio, junho, jultio, agosto, setembro, outubro,
novenibro, dezembro. They are written with a small letter.

Trinta dias tern novembro,

Abril, junho e setembro;

Vinte- oito terd um,

E OS outros mais: trinta e um.

The date of a letter is either given as in English,
as: Lisbon, the 4*^^ of February, 1911, Lisboa 4 de
fevereiro de 1911 or: Lisboa, em (or a) 4 de fevereiro
de 1911. "What day of the month is it?" = A quantos
estamos de mes? It is the 2'^'* of November: estamos a
dais de novembro.

8. The age of a person is generally expressed by
ter . . . annos and fazer\ . . annos, as: How old are you?
= quantos annos tem? (or less familiar: Que idade tern?
Que idade e a sua? Qual € a sua idade?) I am 56
years old = Tenho 56 annos.

96 Lesson 15.

Quando fas (or vae'^ fazer^) annos?

"When is (or will be) your birthday?

(Literally: when do you make (or when are you going

to make) years?)
Fago (or vou fazer) annos em guinze de marco.
My birthday is on the fifteenth of March.
Quantos annos fae (or vae faeer)?
How old will you be?
Faco (farei or vou fazer) doze annos.
I shall be 12 years old.

No meu dia d' annos or no dia dos mens (vinte) annos . . .
On my birthday, on my twentieth birthday.
Minha irma vae fazer dezdito annos no mes que vem.
My sister will be eighteen years old next month.

N.B.— ilfJwAa irma terd 18 annos would be: my sister
is aiout IS years old.

Elle casou (promoveu, morreu) aos 25 annos de (sua)

idade.
He married (was promoted, died) in his 25'i' year.

§ 98. The multiplication is expressed by ves, vezes
(times)— e.g.:

Quatro vezes cinco (sao) vinte.
Four times five are twenty.

Some (or about) 30, 40, etc. is: uns trinta, quarenta,
or trinta (quarenta) e tantos.

§ 99. Present Tense of a regular Terb of the
third Conjugation [ia. iri) dividir [ddvg&ir^] to divide.

Bivido [dd'vidu] I divide dividimos [d»e9'dimuf] we di-

divides [dd 'viddf] you divide vide

divide [dd'vUg] he, she di- dividis [dsvd'dif] you divide
vides, you divide dividem [da 'vidvij they divide.

Part. pres. : dividindo [dava'dtnduj.

Part, perf.: dividido [ddvd'diduj.

Exercise: Write and practise the Present Tense and the
Participles of the following verbs:

diminuir [damtnu'ir] to diminish

repartir [rrapvr'tirj to distribute, divide, part.

cumprir [Jcum'prirJ to fulfil

reunir [rrsunirj to unite, join.

Ex. : Diminuo, reparto, cumpro, reuno, etc.
1 3<3 pers. of ir to go. — ^ to do, make. — ^ see p. 5, Jf.B.

The Numerals.

97

A aritlvmitica
[mt'mstike]

as 4 opera^des\
d'arith- |

PalaTras.

as 4 operaQoes (

funda-

mentaes
soinmar

[su 'mar]
muUiplicar

[muU9pli'lcar]
a addigao

[adi 'svu]
a subtracgdo \

[esuistra- |

'svuj {,

a diminuigdo

[e&aminui-

'svu]
a muUiplica-

Qcio [vmuita-

plikv'siu]
a divisao

[vffmzvu]
problema

[iiprxi'Vlenn]

arithmetic

tlie first four
rules of
arithmetic

to sum (up)
to multiply
the addition

the subtraction

the multiplica-
tion

the division

the (arithmeti-
cal) problem

the entry

the sum,

addition
and, plus (lat.)
equal to

proof

the totality
in the whole
the rest
the minuend

a parcella

[vpvr'sdsj
a sommafsomv]

mats [mstif]
ignal a

[i'gwalv]
a prova

[v' prove]
total [utu'tai]
ao total

resto [u 'rr^ftw]
nimero addi-

two [vdatitm]
numero sub- the subtrahend

tractivo

[subntra'tivu]
e assim em and so on

seguida
o sy sterna the system of

[sif'temv] de numeration

numeragao
valor the value

povoado populous

eenso the census

augmentar to increase.

[aumen 'tar]

38. Leitura.
A ligao d'arithmetica.

As quatro opera^oes fundamentaes da arithmetica sac as
seguintes: — sommar, diminuir, multiplicar e repartir, — ou
addi9ao, subtracQao , multiplica9ao e divisao. — Exemplo de
uma somma: tenho seis (6) maQas e dao-me mais quatro (4):
com quantas ina9as fico? Resolve-se pela somma: 6 mais 4,
dez (10). Fico com 10 ma9as, — 6 chama-se uma parcella;
4 e outra parcella; 10 6 a somma ou total. Outre exemplo:
vamos reunir os numeros sate centos e trinta e seis (736) e
quatro centos e vinte-um (421) n'um so numero: a somma 6
mil cento e cinquenta-sete (1157); isto e: 736 mais 421 6
igual a 1157. Bste ultimo numero e formado de 4 algaris-
mos, dos quaes o ultimo^ 7, indiea as unidades, que formam
a primeira columna; o penultimo, 5, a classe das dezenas ou
a segunda columna; o antepenultimo, 1, a das centenas ou
terceira columna; e o primeiro a dos milhares que vem a ser
a quarta columna. — Agora vamos fazer uma subtrac9ao,
tirando do numero oito mil quatro centos e sessenta-oito (8468)

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 7

98 Lesson 15.

numero cinco mil trezentos e vinte-um (5321). primeiro
numero 6 o additive, o segondo o subtractivo, e o resto e
tres mil cento e quarenta-sete (3147). Para fazer a conta
dizemos assim : de 8 tirando 1 fieam 7 ; de 6 tirando 2 ficam 4 ;
de 4 tirando 3 fica 1 etc. Podemos tambem operar dizendo
assim: 1 para 8, 7 ; 2 para 6, 4; 3 para 4, 1; 5 para 8, 3.

(Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.)

39. Exercise.

We have ten fingers on our two hands and ten toes
on our two feet; we may (= podemos) therefore say that
ten is a natural number for numeration, and, as every one
knows, ten is the number on which our system of numeration
is based. Ten thousand plus one thousand plus one hundred
plus ten plus one, is written 11,111, that is: eleven thou-
sand one hundred and eleven. The first number on the right
signifies so many units, the next to the left so many hun-
dreds, the next so many thousands, and so on, the value
of each place increasing tenfold (see § 106), as we go from
right to left. Thus 200,000 + 40,000 + 5000 -f 700 -f 90 + 8
is two hundred and forty-five thousand seven hundred and
ninety-three, 245,793.

At the census of 1905 the population of the ten most
populous towns of the world was the following: 1. (see § 106)
London, with 4,715,000; 2. New York with 3,476,000;
3. Paris with 2,764,000; Berlin with 2,040,000; 5. Vienna
with 1,870,000; 6. Tokio with 1,820,000; 7. Chicago with
1,699,000; 8. Philadelphia with 1,294,000; 9. St. Petersburg
with 1,265,000; 10. Constantinople with 1,125,000 inhabi-
tants. — As Portugal at the census of the year 1900 has
5,423,132 inhabitants, that whole country has only about
708,000 more than the capital of England.

ConrersaQao com um menino.

menino em que dia e m6s ^390 annos em 25 de maio.

faz annos? —
Entao ainda nao fez annos Nao fiz ainda, hei de fazSl-

n'este anno? os no proximo mSs.

Seu irmao ja tem 16 annos Ja, sim, minha senhora; ia
feitos? OS fez ha quinze dias, em

18 de mar90.
Quantos annos tem (a) sua Tera 21 annos ; naseeu em
prima Dona Virginia? 1889. E verdade (indeed)

vae fazer 22 no mez que
vem.

The Numbers.

99

Ha quantos annos o menino
ja vae a escola?

Quantos alumnos ha na sua

classe ?
Nao ha classe, em que o nii-

mero dos alumnos chega a

cam?
A que hora comeijam as aulas ?

Entrei (I entered) no primeiro
de abril do anno passado,
logo (so) ha pouco mais de
um anno que ando (/ go)
na escola.

Haverd 50 e tantos.

Nao ha, nao, minha senhora;
maximo 6 de 60; somos
ao todo 519 em toda a esoola.

No verao come9am as 7, e no
inverno as 8.

Sixteenth Lesson. Li(?ao decima sexta.

The Numbers.

II. Ordinal Numbers. Wumeros ordinaes.

§ 100. The ordinal numbers are formed out of
the cardinal numbers and considered adjectives — i.e.,
they are subject to the same inflection (feminine and
plural form): primeiro, -a, -os, -as. Their formation
from the units is altogether irregular; there are besides
also some modifications preceding the termination -esimo
added to the number beyond vinte, as will be seen
by the following.

The ordinal numbers are generally put before the
noun; they are:

primeiro [prim'ewu] the 1^*
segundo [ss'gundu] the 2°'^
terceiro [tdr'swu] the Z^^
quarto [hwartu] the 4**1
quinto [Mntu] the 5'^
sexto [sviflu] the &'^
setimo ['setimuj the 7^'^
oitam [oi'tavuj the 8*-^
none I'nonu] the S"*
dScimo f'dMimu] the lO*'^
undecimo or dScimo primeiro,

ongeno [5'zenuJ the ll'i^
duodecimo [duu'destmu] or

decimo segtmdo the 12*^
decimo terceiro the 13*

decimo quarto the U^^
decimo quinto the 15*1^
decimo sexto the 1&^^
decimo setimo the 17*11
ddcimo oitavo the 18'^
decimo nono the 19'^
vigesimo [vi'gezimu, vige-

sinrn] the 20"^
vigesimo primeiro the 21=^
trigesimo [tri 'geeimu, gcsimu]

the 30«ii
quadragesimo [kuvdrv — ]

the 40ti>
quinquagesimo [hwikwv — /

the 50tb

100 Lesson 16.

sexagesimo (ssksv —] the o quadrigentesimo the ^00

60*11 Q qmngentSsimo [kwigent — _/
septuagesimo [ssptuv —] the the 500*ii

70"» sexcentisimo [sefsen'tszimu]
octogesimo [oMu —] the SOti* the eOOtJ^

nonagesimo [none — ] the o septmgentSsimo the 700*

90"» octmgenUsimo the 800ti»

centesimo [sen'teeimu, sen- o nonigentesimo the QOO'i^

'tesimuj the 100*1^ o milUsimo the lOOO'i^

centesimo primeiro the 101 '>* o miHiow^simo the 1,000,000*''

ducentesimo the 200*^ o pewMWimo the last but one

trecentesimo the 300*^ o ultimo the last.

§ 101. Use of the Numbers.

1. To distinguish monarchs of the same name,
ordinal numbers are used as for the units, like in
Enghsh, but without the article — e.g.: Eduardo Seti/nio;
JDom Manuel Segundo, Dom Pedro Quarto. With the
tens the cardinal numbers are generally employed : Luis
Quators:e; but Henrique Trigesimo segundo de Beuss.

2. To catalogue books, chapters, etc., cardinal as
well as ordinal numbers may be employed ; in this latter
case they generally follow the noun: Tomo segundo or
dois; capitulo vigesimo terceiro or vinte-ires; pagina de-
cima oitava or dezoito.

3. Fractions (fracgdes) are mostly expressed by
a . . . parte — e.g. : a terga, quarta, quinta parte; as quatro
decimas (partes), etc. They may, however, also be ex-
pressed by the substantivated ordinal numbers — e.g.:

meio, meia (without the V* um quarto

article) '/t tres setimos

(a) metade '/lo sete decimos

'/a um tergo ^/s tres oitavos.

Partly is em parte; for the most part = pela maior part.

Examples.

Half a meter of cloth meio metro de panno.

Half a bottle of wine meia garrafa de vinho.

I got half of the money recebi (a) metade do dinheiro.

6^/2 metres of linen seis meiros e meio de panno de

linho.
2V2 yards of silk duas varas e meia de sida.

The Numbers. 101

4. Fractions smaller than a tenth are sometimes
formed by adding -avo to the cardinal numbers, as :
^/ii urn onsavo (better: um undecimo, uma tmdecima
parte or uma decima primeira parte ; ^/so tres cinquentavos.

5. The decimal numbers (mimeros decimaes) are:
'/lo um decimo Viooo um millesimo

Vioo um cerdesimo '/loooo um decimo-millesimo

etc.
or uma decima, eentesima, millesima parte, etc.

§ 102. Division of Measures and Weights.

o metro ['mstru] the metre

decimetro [dg'simatru] the decimetre

centimetro [sen'timatru] the centimetre

millimetro [ma'limatruj the millimetre

decdmMro [dg'kamatru] the decametre

hectometro [ek'tomatru] the hectometre

a medida linear [msMv lim'ar] the lineal measure

a medida de superficie a superficial measure

a medida de volume the cubic measure

a medida de capacidade [kvpvsi'dadaj the measure of

capacity
a medida de peso [pesu] the measure of weight.
gramma ['grvm's] the gram
hilo(gramma) [kilu'grvmvj the kilogram
decigramma [desfgrvmvj the decigram
centigramma [sentt grvmie] the centigram
decagramme the decagram
hectogramma the hectogram
metro quadrado the square metre
metro cubico the cubic metre
litro I'litru] the liter
decUitro [dpg'litruj the deciliter
hectolitro [skto'lUru] the hectoliter
a tonelada [tuna'Uda] (= 13^/2 quintaes) the tun
qumtal [Mn'tai] the Portuguese quintal (of 58^/4 kilos)
quintal metrico two hundredweights.

§ 103. Division of Time.

Names of the Days.

JDomingo [du'migu] Sunday quinta feira Thursday

segtmda feira [fnrv] Monday sexta feira Friday

terga feira Tuesday sabbado ['sabvdu] Saturday.
quarta feira Wednesday-

102 Lesson 16.

§ 104. Observations.

1. On Monday, on Tuesday, etc. is na se
(feira), etc. or only segmida fe/ra, etc.; feira is often
omitted. You may also write with a hyphen : segunda-
felra, terga-feira, etc.

2. The names of the days are written with a small
letter.

3. For the dates see § 97, 7.

4. The hours of the day are expressed by the
cardinal numbers:

What o'clock is it? Que horas sua?

It is one o'clock, half past one e uma hora, e hora e

meia.

It is two o'clock sao duas horas.

It is half past three sao tres (horas) e meia.

It is a quarter past 4 sao quatro (horas) e (urn) quarto.

At what o'clock a que hora(s) ?

At 7, 8, 9 (o'clock) ds sete, oito, nave (horas).

T, . , , c / sao cinco menos um qua/rto.

It IS a quarter past 5 | . ^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^ as cinco.

It is noon i meio-dia, sao as doze da noite.

It is midnight e meia noite, sao as doze do dia.

About noon pelo meio dia.

About one o'clock pela uma hora.

About 2 o'clock pelas duas horas.

The train starts at ten minutes to 7 o comboio sae ds

7 menos 10.
It is striking ten o'clock dao or esiao a dar dee horas.
Has it already struck eleven? Jd deram as onze?
It will strike immediately . . . vdo dar agora (doze horas).
It has just struck eight acabam de dar as oito.

5. Indicating a day-time by a certain hour, the
Portuguese says: da manha, da tarde, da noite — e.g.:
a,s des da manha, da noite; ds quatro da tarde, at ten
o'clock in the morning, at night; at four in the
afternoon. If the day-time is not precisely indicated,
he says de manha, de tarde, etc., or pela manha, pela
tarde, etc., in the morning, in the afternoon: Irei de
tarde, I shall go in the afternoon.

6. The expressions: a quarter of a year, half a
year, etc., should be rendered by three months, six
months, etc., as: tres meses, seis ineses (or meio anno)

J i

The Numbers.

103

nove nieses, etc. A week : uma semana or oito dias. A
fortnight, quince dias.

§ 105. The numeral adverb is expressed by the
corresponding ordinal.

Pirst(ly) is primeiro or prlmeiramente or em primeiro

lugar.
Secondly is segundo or segundamente or em segundo

lugar.
Thirdly is terceiro or ierceiramente or em terceiro lugar.

Palayras.

A parte inteira

the whole

u. linha f'lipej

the line

a parte deci-

fractional

avaliar

to value

mal

number,

[•Bvnlt'ar]

a dizima
['dizimv]

decimal

conjuncto

the totality

fraction

[ko 'junto]

a operagao

a ajuda

the help

decimal

the decimal

fv'su&vj

a operagao

operation

a porgao

the portion

de dizima

[pur 'svuj

ao contrario de

to the con-

seccos fsekufj

dried fruit

trary of

feijdo

the bean

consistir de, em

to consist of,

ffe}'svu]

in

a balanga

the wages

separar

to separate

[be'lvnsvj

a virgida

the comma

anno bissexto

the leap-year

['virgulvj

[bt'sviftuj

a casa

the partition.

intercalado

intercalary

class

[intirleB 'lacTuJ

cada urn

each (one)

seculo

the century

a letra

the type

['sskulu]

systema

the metrical

a era ['erv]

the Christian

metrico [sif-

system

christao

era

' terns 'mstrikUj

J

solsticio

the solstice

meridiano

the meridian

[aotf'tisfu]

[mdrd&fiinu]

a equindxio

the equinox

terrestre

terrestrial

[iki 'noks}uJ

[tsr 'rsftrd]

bastar

to be sufficient

cjlobo [gldbu]

the globe

a p)rimavera

Spring

terrestre

[primn 'vervj

indiear

to indicate

verao

[mdikarj

[vd'riu]

Summer

guadrante

the c^uadrant

estio [}J"tiu] ,

[ktev'^'rvnta]

outomno

Autumn

derivar

to derive

[o 'tonuj

medir

to measure

inverno

Winter

a saber

namely

[t'vernuj

a extensdo

the extension

a Pascoa

Eastern

{%flen 'sitij

['pafkuvj

104 Lesson 16.

Pentecostes Whitsuntide j arranjar to arrange,

fpentyi-jftifj i procure

dia do amw New Year's Day I emmalar to embale

novo or do \ a mala ['male] the box

anno horn ! a gula ['gw] the_ luggage-

darasboasfestas to send the j ticket

(pelo anno greetings of vou [oou] I go, am going

novo, pela the season vd [va] go!

Pdscoa, 2)elo \ ate logo ]

Natal) j [ete'logu] J till presently.

o Natal fiw'taij Christmas j ate jd [sa] I

levar to take

40. Leitura.

sijsteiaa decimal ou melrico.

Ac contrario do niimero inteiro, o qual tern so uma parte,
o numero decimal consiste sempre de duas partes, separadas
per uma virgula. A parte que fica a esquerda da virgula,
chama-se parte inteira; a que fica a direita da Ti'rgula,
chama-se parte decimal e tambem dizima: e cada uma das
suas letras representa uma casa. A parte inteira indica uni-
dades; a parte decimal indica frac9oes ou partes da unidade.
primeiro algarismo d'uma parte decimal indica d(5cimas, o
segundo indica centesimas ; o terceiro, se o tiver, indicara
mill^simas ; o quarto decimas mill6simas. — systfima metrieo
tern per unidade o metro. metro e uma medida. Esta
medida 6 igual a d^cima million^sima parte do quarto (ou
quadrante) do meridiano terrestre. Do metro derivam todas
as medidas, a saber: 1. as medidas lineares, com que medi-
mos comprimento ou extensao das coisas: das linhas por
exemplo; — 2. as medidas de superficie, com que avaliamos
no seu conjuncto as coisas que teem ao mesmo tempo com-
primento e largura, como um campo; — 3. as medidas de
volume, com que avaliamos no seu conjuncto as coisas que
teem ao mesmo tempo comprimento, largura e altura, como
e, por exemplo, uma sala, ou uma por^ao de lenha ou de ma-
deira de comprimento igual ; — 4. as medidas de capacidade,
com que medimos liquidos : por exemplo, vinho ou azeite ; e
seccos, como p. ex. trigo ou feijao; — 5. e finalmente, as
medidas de peso, com as quaes avaliamos, com ajuda de uma
balan9a, o peso das coisas.

(Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.)

41, Thema.

Hie Year and its Divisions.

The first day of a year is New Year's Day. The
year is divided into 4 seasons (Spring, Summer, Autumn and

The Numbers.

105

Winter) 12 months, (January, February, March, April, May,
June, July, August, September, October, November, and De-
cember), 52 weeks, and 365 days. A leap-year has one day
more (== a mats) — namely, 366 days. The intercalary day
is the 29'^ day of the 2°"^ month, which is denominated Fe-
bruary. (The) September was formerly the seventh, October
the eighth, November the ninth, and December the tenth
month of the year ; actually (= to-day) these months are the
ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth. The week-days are for the
most part (pela sua maior parte) indicated by "feira" — i.e.,
fair, whereas the Sunday, as the day of the first fair, is not
indicated as such (= eomo tal), but as the day of the
Lord {domingo being derived from Bominus the Lord). The
week has 7 days, and the day has 24 hours; every hour
counts 60 minutes and every minute as many seconds. In
the year take place two equinoxes: on the 21^* of March and
the 2S^^ of September, and two solstices : on the 22°^ of June,

2 days before Saint John's, and on the 22"^ of Dezember,

3 days before Christmas. On Christmas, New Year's Day, and
Easter we send greetings of the season to our friends. The
31st of December is the last day of the year. A hundred
years form a century. We live in the twentieth century
of the Christian era.

ConTsrsaQao.

No Hotel.

A que horas deseja V"- Ex"-

ser acordado?
E almoQo a que horas o

deseja ?
ya. g^a.. j^ yae partir no com-

boio das nove e dez?

Levara doze minutos quando

muito.
E a bagagem — V*- Ex«- le-

va-a no earro?

Sim, senhor. Vou ja despa-
cha-las e entregSr-lhe a guia.
ya. Ex"- manda mais al-
guma coisa?

As ordens de "V^- Ex''^- ; ate logo!

V^- chame-me as sete e meia.

Tres quartos de hora mais
tarde, as oito e um quarto.

Vou. V^- arrange-me um trem ;
quantos minutos leva ate a
estaQao ?

Entao basta que o carro ca
esteja as nove menos cinco.

Nao, senhor. Ja esta tudo
emmalado; as malas podem
ir jd para a esta^ao. senhor
leve-as para baixo!

Quando trouxer (fut. conj.
of trazer) a guia, traga
(imper. of trazer) tambem
uma chicara de cba!

Va com Deus! ate j4!

106 Lesson 17.

Seventeenth Lesson. Li(jao decima setima.

Numbers (Continued).

III. Multiplicative Numbers.

§ 106. The mnltiplicatives (mtineros muUipUca-
ticos) are:

Simples simple o dobro (de) \ ^Q^i^jg tj^g

duplo, -a \ ^ i^j duplo (de) f

dohrado, -a i o triplicado, triplice, pop- o
triple threefold tresdobro, the triple

quadruplo, -a fourfold (o) sextuplo, septuplo, dctuplo,
qtiintuplo, -a fivefold dicuplo, centuplo (the) 6, 7,

inteiro the whole 8, 10, 100 fold

multiplu manifold.

All the other multiplicatives are not used; they
are generally periphrased (as, indeed, also most of the
mentioned may be) by the numbers of repetition (m-
meros iferativos); uma vez, dims vezes, etc. — e.g. -'^X^^
^ 4, duas veses dots sdo quatro. EUe (• cent vezes mais
rico do que ru, he is a hundred times richer than I.

§ 107. The most important collective Numbers

(immeros collcdivos) are:

Um par a pair, a couple (um par de luvas; um par de

magus)
um casal de rolos a brace of doves
uma dusia a dozen
meia dmia half a dozen
diisia 6 meia one dozen and a half
uma groza or dose dugias a gross
ttma quinsena fifteen
una vintena a score

uma trintena, quarantena some thirty, forty
uma sessentena threescore, sixty
um quarteirao twenty-five
uma centena, um cento a (or some) hundred
um milhar, um milheiro a (or some) thousand.

' Vae, present of ir = to go: vou, vaes, vae, vdmos, ides, vdo.

^ Faser to do, make, is irregular: Pres.. faQO, fazes, faz

etc. ; Pret. : fiz, fizeste, fez, fizemos, fizesfes, fizeram. Part. : feito.

The Numbers. 107

§ 108. The Augmentatives and Diminutives.

Augmentativos [atimentv'tivu/J e diminutivos

[dgminu 'tkmfj.

As the ending -issimo modifies the adjective, other
terminations, pecuHar only to the Portuguese langu-
age, modify the original meaning of substantives: cer-
tain terminations add to the noun the idea of some-
thing unusually big (or clumsy or grotesque), they
augment some quality already prominent, while others
add the notion of littleness, daintiness; they diminish a
quality already existing. It is easily understood that
the former convey an idea of antipathy, while the
latter indicate one of sympathy or pity.

§ 109. To form the Augmentati'vos, we add to the
noun the syllable -Oo (fem.: -o-na), sometimes modified
also according to the ending of the substantive. To
form the Diminutivos, we employ the ending -inho, -inha
or -ito, -ita. Those derivations which intercalate a -^-,
generally denote only size without any secondary
meaning— e.g.: cadeirazinha = a little chair, while
cadeirinha means a sedan(-chair).

The employment of both the augmentative and
the diminutive modifications takes place only in familiar
intei'course, and may be avoided by a foreigner. Here
we bring them to the student's notice to enable him
to understand those words and for the sake of com-
pleteness.

1. Augmentativos (termination -ao).
garrafdo [gyrrnyvu] the great bottle (of a gar-

rafa)
um bofetao [hufa'tvu] a heavy slab (of a bofetada)
palavrao [pvlv'vrvu] a long and difficult (also: an

ugly) word (of palavra)
casacao [hvsn'Mu] great-coat (of casaco)
papeJcio [pvpg'lvu] thick paper, pasteboard (of

papel)
papao [pv'pguj bugbear (of papar devour or papas

pap)
Iwmensarrdo [omvj&v'rreii] the great (or important)

man
mocetao [musg'lvu] 1 big fellow (of wofo young man)
rapagao [rrvpv'geu] f great boy (of rapaz the boy).

108 Lesson 17.

6. Dlmiiiutivos (termination -(z)inho, -(^)ito, etc.).
Masculine. Feminine-

liomensinho the little man A mulherzinha the little wo-
man
a mulherinha the intriguing
woman
filhinho the little son a filhinha the little daughter

rapazito, o rapaginho the a rapariguita, a raparigiiinha

little boy the little maid

caoeinho the little dog a cadelUnha the little bitch

pohrezinho the little poor a probrezinha the poor (or
person or beggar beggar) maid.

coitadinho, -a poor darling!

Familiar language also adds to certain adjectives
and even to adverbs the diminutive endings. E boni-
tinlia she is rather pretty; estd melhorsinlia she feels a
little better; uma casa pequenina quite a small house;
elle estd granclinho he is rather tall (for his age); ella e
boasinha she is a dear little thing.

§ 110. Examples from Portuguese Authors.

Velho tao velhinho nenhum outro havia . . .
Para eumprir cam annos Ibe faltava um dia,
Ha noventa e quatro que 6ra ja pastor^,
Zagalzinho^ alegre, desde tenra infancia.
Ja de surraosito^ cheio a tiracol* —

Branqueadinho" a neve" e doiradinbo' a sol.

Guia jumentinho* uma velhinha errante . .

A molheirinha' atras, o jumentito adiante!

Descalcinha'^'' e pobre . .

Pobres de pobres (^= the poorest of the poor) sao pobresinhos . . .

Alvas ermidinhas^' sob azues magaados^^ . .

Ao filhinho a noite nao Ihe causa raedo . . .

Uma igrejasinha que 6 como um pombal^' . .

Nao se esquece da vaquinha'^* loira'^

Que se poz de joelhos ante a mangedoira^*.

Quando nas palhinhas'' dormitava''^ Deus".

' Herdsman. ^ shepherd. ^ bread-bag. * a tiracol in
bandoleer-belt. ^ branqueado whitewashed. '^ by the snow.
' doirado ftilded— i.e.. made brown. * ojumento ass. ' moleira
the miller's wife. '° desealga barefooted. •' ermida hermitage.
'2 magoado = bruised ; here violetblue. '' doTe-house. " vacca
cow. '^ bright yellow, fair. " manger, crib. " palha straw.
'* slumber. " Deus for Jesus.

The Numbers.

109

Palayras.

multiplicando the multi-

tirar [tirar]

to subtract

fmultBpli-

plicand

ultimo

the last

'kSnduJ

[uttimuj

feito [fyUu]

executed, made,

penuUimo

the last but

done

[upg'nuUimo]

one

mvMplieador

multiplier

antepenuttimo

the antepenult

[muttdplihv-

[uvntspd-

dor]

'nuttimu]

OS factores

the factors,

primeiro

first

[uffa.'to'nf]

submultiples

[pri'mvtru]

producto geral the total (sum)

primeiro

firstly

producto par-

the quota

saber ['sister]

to know

cial [upru-

seguinte

following

'&utu pw-

[ssgintd]

'stai]

praticamente

practically

a unidade

the unit

['pratikv-

[euni&a.d'aj

'mentej

a dezena

the ten

dar urn trago

to draw a line

[vfazhve]

['trdsuj

a conta [sTconte] the account;

por baixo

underneath

bill

[pur haixu]

a centena

figure marking

chegar [ffgar]

to arrive, reach.

[vsen'tenvj

the hundreds

to mount to

milhar

figure marking

apwrar

to make clean,

[umi'fia,r]

the thousands

[epu'rar]

to obtain

a columna

the column

a virgula

the comma

[isku'lune]

['virgule]

a taboada

the multiplica-

a potencia

the power

[ntviu'affvj

tion-table

[pu'tes}vj

ddo-me [dvumsj they give me,

numerador

the numerator

I am given

denotninador

the denomina-

resolver

to resolve

tor

[rrsgolver]

resto

the remainder

vamos ['vemufj

we go; here:

valente

brave

we are going

ao par

at par

to . . ., we

principe

the Crown

shall

herdeiro

Prince.

fazer [fvzer]

to make

42. Problemas de multiplica^ao.

Para saber multiplicar 6 preeiso saber primeiro a ta-
boada. Eis aqui um exemplo de multiplica^ao : dao-me de-
zeseis ma^as por dia durante quatro dias: quantas ma^as me
dao ao todo? Este problfima resolve-se pela multiplica9ao.
multiplicando 16 6 multiplicado pelo multiplicador 4.
producto e egual a sessenta e quatro. Vejamos (Let us see)
agora como e practicamente feita a multiplica9ao seguinte:
Trezentos e vinte e oito a multiplicar por quarenta e cinco.
Collocam-se os dois factores (nome commum do multipli-

110 Lesson 17.

cando e do multiplicadoi-) um debaixo do outre, e, tendo dado
um tra^o por baixo, dizemos assim : cinco vezes oito, quarenta.
Sscrevemos o ultimo algarismo, zero, e vao quatro (tr.: we
carry four); cinco vezes dois, dez, e quatro, quatorze; escre-
vemos quatro e vae um (= we carry one); cinco vezes tr6s,
quinze, e um, dezeseis. Apuramos assim o primeiro producto
parcial, e mil seiscentos e quarenta. Depois de apurado da
m6sma maneira o segundo producto parcial, de trezentos e
vinte e oito por quatro, sommamos ambos para obterraos o
producto geral que vem a ser : quatorze mil seteeentos e ses-
senta.

Uma fraeijao e uma certa parte d'nm todo. Ha frac-
Qoes decimaes das quaes so se escrevem (= are written) os
numeradores, sendo o denominador dez ou alguma potencia
de dez — e frac96es vulgares. Emquantoque as primeiras
sao escritas n'uma linha.com a parte inteira, separadas d'ella
apenas por uma virgula, as ultimas expressam-se em (se)
escrevendo tanto o numerador como o denominador {transl.
both num. and den.), com um tra9o entre elles ^/a = dois
ter90s; ^is ^ cinco decimo oitavos. Um dia 6 uma vig^sima
oitava, vig^sima nona, trig^sima ou trig6sima primeira parte
de um mez. Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.

43. Exercise.

How little does one half of the world know how the
other half lives! How many more apples have 1 than you,
if I have '/12 of a dozen, and you the remainder? 6 is three
times the fourth part of 8 ; because the fourth part of 8 is 2,
and 6 is 3 times 2. Twice five times five is half a hundred.
When I was young, I thought that five hundred years ago (the)
men where twice as strong, and twice as wise, and much
braver, and a thousand times happier than now. Portuguese
money is also subject to the decimal system : a hundred reis
form a tostoon, ten tostoons make up mil reis, and a thou-
sand times mil reis — i.e., a million of reis — is a conto. An
English pound is worth about four thousand five hundred reis
when the exchange is at par. Twenty reis are a vintem and
225 reis correspond to a shilling, while a tostoon corresponds
nearly to sixpence. The deposed king of Portugal, Manuel II.,
ascended to the throne on the 1^'- of February, 1908, the day
on which his father, king Charles I., and his elder brother,
the Crown Prince, were shot.

Conversa^ao.

Quaes sao as quatro operaQoes fundamentaes ?

De quantos algarismos 6 formado o numero de 17.580?

Kegular Verbs. Ill

Qaal 6 a primeira colamna, e que classe de numeros

contem ?
Quaes sao as mais classes?
Onde SB escrevem as frac^oes decimaes e como?
Como se escrevem as fraC9oes vulgares?
Porque se chamam as primeiras «decimaes» ?
Como se chamam os trds numeros que prefazem uma sub-

trac9ao?
Como se chamam os tr§s numeros que prefazem uma mul-

tiplica 9ao ?
Em que anno subin ao throno o rei D. Manuel de

Portugal ?
Em que anno subiu ao throno a rainha Victoria de

Inglaterra ?
Quando morreu ella?
Quantos annos reinou o rei Bduardo?
Em que anno e mez morreu?
Quern i que reina na Alemanha?

Que e que se entende por augmentativos e diminutives ?
Como sao formados?
Qual e systSma de medidos, contos e pesos, de que

as na(}oes do continente se servem ?
Donde se tirou a norma para o systfima m6trico?

Eighteentli Lesson. Li(?ao decima oitava.

Regular Verbs. Verbos regulares.

§ 111. By the termination of the infinitive mood
we distinguish three different forms of conjugation- — viz.:

The 1^* conj. with the infinitive ending in -ar, as:
comprar to buy.

The 2"'^ conj. with the infinitive ending in -er, as:
vender to sell.

The 3'^conj. with the infinitive ending in -h\ as:
partir to depart.

N.B. — These terminations have always the tonical
accent.

§ 112. That part of the verb before these termi-
nations is the root, w^hich in regular verbs remains
unaltered. Those termination letters which characterise
the different persons and tenses, are added to the root.

112

Lesson 18.

§ 113. We distinguish:

1. Forms where the root has the tonical accent; and

2. Forms where the termiuation has the tonical
accent.

Every verb has 11 of the former — viz.:
Pres. ind. : singular and 3'^"^ pers. of the plural (4)
Pres. subj.: „ „ „ „ „ ,, „ (4)

Imperative: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ (3).

All other forms have their tonical accent on the
termination — e.g., compro, but comprdmos.
§ 114. We distinguish further:

1. Primary tenses (raizes da formagao dos tempos):

(a) The infinitive (infinitivo or infinito).

(b) The present indie: 1^* pers. sing, and 2"'' per-

sons sing, and plur.

(c) The preterite (preterito perfeito) : 2"-^ pers. sing.

2. Derived tenses (tempos derivados), which com-
prehend all the rest and are formed as follows:

(A) From the Infinitive: 1. Present, 2. Imperfect,
3. Perfect, 4. Future indie, 5. Conditional, 6. The
two participles.

The terminations are added partly to the stem,
partly to the infinitive.

Indicativo.

Infinito:

1. Pres.

Oomprar:
vender :

compr-o
vend-o

partir:

part-o

2. Fret. imp.

compr-ava

vend-ia

part-ia

3. Pret. perf.

compr-ei

vend-i

part-i

4. Futuro.

comprar-ei

vender-ei

parti/r-ei

5. Condicional.

comprar-ia (or compr-aria)
vender-ia (or vend-eria)
partir-ia ("or part-iria)

6. Part. imp.

compr-ando

vend-endo

part-indo

7. Part. perf.

compr-ado

vend-ido

part.ido.

(B) From the Present Indie. 1^* pers. sing.: The
Pres. Subj. by changing the ending -o into -e in the
1=' conj. and -a in the 2°'^ and S'''^ conj. ; and from the
2°^ persons sing, and plur.: the corresponding persons
of the Imperative by dropping the -s.

Kegul

ar Verbs.

Pres. incl.

1. Pres. conj.

Pres. ind.

Gompr-o:

compr-e

tu compras:
v6s compraes:

vend-o:

vend-a

tu vendes:
vos vendeis:

part-o:

part-a

tu partes:
vos partis:

in

2. Imperativo.

compra (tu)
comprae (v6s)
vende (tu)
vendei (vds)
parte (tu)
parti (vds).

Note.— The 3''<i person sing, and the 1^' and S"^*! persons
plur. of the imperative are equal to the same of the subjunc-
tive present, except that the subiect, if employed, gene-
rally follows the verb — e.g. : compre, venda, parta F" Ex'^, o
senhor, etc. Yet it may also preoeed: V^ compre, venda,
parta! The negative form of the imperative takes also the
subjunctive mood — e.g.: Ndo compres, nao compreis! Don't
buy ! Nao vendas, nok> vendues ! Nao partus, nao partaes !
Nao partdmos, nao vendam V^^ or F^s nao vendam !

(C) From the Preterito perfeito, 2°"^ pers. sing,
(cf. § 48), by changing the termination -ste into -ra,
-sse or -r, we form the

compraste:
vendeste:
p artiste:

1. Pret. mais-que-
perf.

comprd-ra

vende-ra

parti-ra

2. Pret. im%
conj.

compra-sse

vende-sse

parti-sse

3. Fut. imp.
conj.

compra-r

vende-r

parti-r.

§ 114. First Conjugation. Inflnitivo: Comprar
to buy,

A. Simple Tenses.

Inflnitivo pessoal.
Para eu comprar to buy (I) para nds comprarmos to buy

(we)
para tu comprares to buy para vds comprardes to buy

(you) (you)

para elle comprar to buy (he) para elles comprarem to buy

(they).

Indicativo.
Presente.
Eu compro I buy, etc. nds comprdmos we buy, etc.

tu compras vds compraes

elle compra elles compram.

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 5

114 Lesson 18. \

Imperfeito.
Comprava I bought, etc. compravamos we bought, etc.

compravas compraveis

comprava compravani.

PrHerito perfeito (definido).
Comprei I bought, etc. comprdinos we bought, etc.

compra^fe eomprastes

comprou compraraw.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Comprdra I had bought, etc. comprdraiiios we had bought,
comprd/ras comprdreis [etc.

comprdra comprdram.

Futuro.
Comprarei I shall buy, etc. compraremos we shall buy,
comprards comprareis [etc.

comprard comprardo.

Condicional.
Gmnpraria I should buy, etc. comprariatnos we should buy,
comprarias comprarieis [etc.

compraria comprariam.

Imperativo.
Oompra! buy (thou) ! compremos let us buy !

Compre V. Ex°- (o Senhor)! comprae buy (ye)!

buy! (sing.) comprem (V^^ Ex"'^)! buy!

(plur.)

Imperativo negativo.
Nao compres (tu) ! Nao compremos (nds) !

.Vdo compre (Yi)! Nao compreis (vos)!

Nao comprem (V^^)!

Conjuuctivo or Subjunetivo.

Presente.

Que eu compre that I buy, etc. que nds compremos that we

que tu compres que v6s compreis [buy, etc.

que elle compre que elles comprem.

Imperfeito.
Se eu comprasae If I bought, etc.
SB tu comprasses
se elle comprasae
se nos comprdsaemos
se v6s comprasaeia
se elles comprasaem.

Regular Verbs.

115

F'uturo.
Se eu comprar If I shall (or am to) buy, etc.
se tu comprares
se die comprar
se nds comprarmos
se v6s comprardes
se elles convprarem.

Participio.

Passado.

Oomprado bought.

Gerundio.
Presente. Comprando buying.

§ 115. Difference between Imperfeito and Pre
terito perfeito (cf. § 53).^
The Imperfeito is employed:

1. If two actions are repre-
sented as being performed
at or as lasting the same
time (see Ex. 1).

2. If one action is interrupted
by another, the Imperfeito
denotes the action that was
going on when the other
began, while the latter re-
quires the Preterito perfeito.

3. In descriptions of character,
opinion, state, manners, and
customs, as well as repre-
senting an action as often
repeated (see Ex. 3 and cf.
§ 120, A 3).

4. The Imperfeito is used for
all actions that do not im-
mediately belong to the re-
lation, but are added as ac-
cessory circumstances or the
own meaning of the speaker.

The Preterito perfeito is
employed :

1. To mark a time positively
fixed, entirely elapsed, an
action quite accomplished.

2. To express actions following
one another, interrupting
others. It is the historical
tense, being peculiarly ap-
propriate to the narrative
style.

3. While the Imperfeito des-
cribes, the Preterito perf.
narrates (cf. 2); it represents
an action as performed only
once.

4. The Preterito denotes a
changement in the state of
things; some action mark-
ing a jjro^ress of the events.

' As these rules, already giren for the most part in § 53,
are very important, we repeat them here, completing them by
adding others.

8*

116 Lesson 18.

5. It marks an indefinite or 5. The Preterito marks a de-
illimited duration. finite and limited duration;

one without any reference
to another action or state.

6. It is employed in a hypo-
thetical clause (instead of
the Conditional).

7. It is used in indirect
speech.

Bemark.— The Preterito perfeito is one of the most im-
portant, while most usual, tenses in the Portuguese language.
It is very often employed instead of the English Perfect (e.g.,
for "I have bought" eu comprei of. § 53, B, d). More details
for the use of these tenses are given in the nineteenth lesson.

Examples.

1. Emquanto o cortejo passava pelas ruas, os sinos

tocavam.
Whilst the procession passed through the streets,
the bells were ringing.

2. Eu estudava a ligao, quando tu chegaste.

I was studying my lesson when you arrived.

3. Quando estava na praia, tomava banhos todos os

dias.
When I was at the seaside, I took baths every

day.
Eu fui a praia, mas nao tomei hanho.
I went to the beach, but did not take a bath.

Elle falava muito alto ] he spoke very loud (as a

( habit)
Elle falou muito alto i he spoke very loud (on a

) certain occasion).

4. Ghovia or estava a chover it was raining.
Ghoveu, principiou a chover, o tempo tornou-se chu-

voso.
It began to rain, the weather became rainy.
.5. Eramos amigos we were friends (and are so still).
Fomos amigos we were friends (but now no longer).

6. Eu voltava (instead of: voltaria), se me mandassem

chamar.
I should go back if I were sent for.

7. Elle disse-me que nao pensava em partir.

He told me that he did not think of departing.

Regular Verba.

117

§ 116. Regular Yerbs of the First Conjugation.

Ahotoar to button

abreviar [vbravur] to shorten

acabar to finish

accordar to awake

achar Marl \ i. n 3
,'- ■' ^ / to find
encontrar j

admirar [vdamfrar] to admire

alisar to smooth

apanhar [vpvyar]- to catch

assentar-se to sit down

atirar com to fling

avistar [vviftarj to perceive

banhar to bathe

cacarejar to cackle

calgar to put on (shoes, gloves)

caminhar [Jcvmipar] to go,

stride, walk
cantar [Mntar] to sing, crow
cansar to tire
ehamar [femar] to call, to be

called
collocar to put
corar [ho'rar] to bleach,

redden
deitar to lay down
deitar-se to lie down
deixar [dvifar] to leave oflF,

let, forbear
deleitar [ddeitar] to delight
deseansar to rest
doirar fdot'rarj to gild
encadernar [thnddrnar] to

bind (booJcs)
enfiar to thread; to put on
enxugar to dry (p. p.: enxuto)
escovar to brush
escutar to listen to
esfregar to rub
espantar [ijpvntar] to frighten
estacar ftJtvTcar] to stop
esticar [iftikarj \ ^^ ^^^^^^^
esmar [ijlwarj \
falar [fvlar] to speak
iiar to spin
freqilentar to attend •

gastar [gvfiar] to expend, use,

consume
gorgeiar [gurgiarj to warble
ignorar [ignurar] to ignore
illustrar to illustrate
imitar to imitate
langar to throw
Zawar to wash
levantar-se flavvntarsp] to rise,

get up
levar [hvar] to take (away)
li/mpar [Ixmpar] to clean
livrar [livrar] to free
louvar [lovar] to praise
mawdaj" [mStidur] to send, to

order
mandar ehamar to send for
mudar (de) to change
Mada*- to swim
olhar to see
passar to pass, go

f ^«'' '"^ \ to take

pendurar to hang

pensar fpesarj to think

pewfear to comb

praticar [pratikar] to practise

precisar to want

pnwcipiar [prtsipi 'ar] to begin

^rocwrar [prukurvr] to look

for
projectar [prugdarj to intend,

to have in view
quebrar-se [Tcd'irarsg] to be

broken
receiar to fear
recreiar [rr9krviar] to refresh,

delight
remsar [rrdkuzar] to refuse
regrar [rrggar] to water
re^a?' to pray
salvar [saivar] to save
sanar [svnar] to cure, heal
sarar [svrar] to heal
SMJar to soil

118

Lesson 18.

tirar to take oflf, draw out

viajar to travel

tomar [tumarj

to take

virar to turn

tratar to treat, deal (with),

voar fvuarj to

fly

strive

voUar [voUar]

to return.

Palavras.

ruido

the noise

a bwboleta

the butterfly

[rru'iOu]

[burbu'letn]

cabide

the rack

banco

the bench

[ke 'M&a]

gorgeio

the warbling

casaeo

the coat

[gur'^eiu]

Pee 'zakuj

ouvido

the hearing,

eollete

the waistcoat

[o 'viduj

ear

[ku'leUj

iavatirio

the washing-

OS calgoes

the breeches

flvm'toriiij

stand

fkai 'soifj

K toalha

the towel

as ceroulas

the drawers,

[tu'afiv]

[s9 'rohfj

pants

n6 [m]

the knot

a camisola

the vest

estabelecimento the swimming-

[kvmi' zolv]

de natagao

school

as chinellas

the slippers

natatorio

the bathing-

[fi 'nrlvf]

place

colarinho

the collar

mestre de

the teacher of

[kulv'rijnu]

natagdo

swimming

a gravata

the cravat

poe

put, he puts

[gre 'vate]

em seguida

toucador

the dressing-

[m 'gidvj

then, after
that.

[tokv 'ffor]

table

entao [m'tvu]

cuidadoso

careful

depots

a esteira

the mat

fda'poifj

[if'tvire]

43. L

situra.

Ao deitar-se e levantar-se.

Agora, Jose, deixa de regar as tuas floras! Sao oito
horas e tempo para acabares. Has de ir (to go) deitar-te. A
Maria ja te chamou, ella deseja levar-te a cama. Anda depressa,
mas sem ruido, para nao acordares teus irmaozinhos. Tira
o teu fato, mas nao atires com as tuas coisas para o chao!
Olha aquelle cabide: pendura ali o teu casaquinho, o collets
e as cal9oes. E nas costas desta cadeira deitaras a tua camisa,
as ceroulas e as meias. Colloca as tuas botas ou sapatos
fora da porta para que o criado as limpe antes de tu te levan-
tares. As tuas chinellas, essas ficam bem ao p6 da cama.
Poe o teu colarinho e a gravata em cima do toucador ! Assim
encontraras tudo no seu lugar, sem que precises procural-o
amanha de manha. Ja lavaste as maos? Bem, deita-te, reza
e dorme!

Regular Verbs. 119

Depois de ter bem passado a noite, Jose 6 accordado
pelo criado que o chama: «0 menino, accords! Levante-se!
Seu papa ja o esta esperando no jardim! Ja sao sate horas!
E e verdade: o gallo canta, as galliuhas cacarejam e os pas-
saros gorgeiam, deleitando os ouvidos. Jos(5 esfrega os olhos,
estica as pernas e salta da cama. EUe miida de camisa, cal^a
as meias, as ceroulas e os cal^oes, enfia as chinellas e depois
lava-se bem com uma esponja ao lavatorio. Elle nsa de
muita agua fria e gasta bastante sabao. Elle gosta at6 to-
mar banho de manha, mas receia que leve muito tempo, por-
qvie seu pae esta a espera d'elle. Esfregando-se bem com
uma toalha, enxuga a cara e o peito; entao pega numa es-
cova para escovar os dentes, e com um pente alisa o cabello.
Depois de penteado enfia o collete e a jaqueta, abotoa o
colarinho e ata um lindo no na sua gravafca. Afinal tira as
chinellas e calQa os sapatos que o criado ja limpou e collocou
fora da porta do quarto. Agora esta prompto para passar
para baixo e almo^ar com o pae que em seguida o acompanha
a escola. Pois o Jos6zinho freqiienta uma escola de meniuos
onde trata de aprender quanto um menino precisa saber.
Mas logo que as aulas acabam, elle toma o seu fato de banho
e caminha para o estabelecimento de nata9ao, onde ha um
grande natatorio para os meninos nadarem debaixo da inspec^ao
d'um mestre de nata9ao.

44. Exercise.

(a) Read and write the first part of 43, changing the
2°'3 person of the Imperative into the 3'^'^— e.g. : Agora, Jose,
deixe de regar as suas flores !

(b) Read and write the 2°<5 part (from : Depois de ter . . .),
changing the Present Tense (1) into the Past Tenses and (2)
into the Future.

45. Thema.

Our little brother went to bed. He took off his things
and hung them (-as) for the most part on a rack behind the bed-
room door. But his shirt, vest, and pants were carefully put on
a chair near the bed, while the slippers and stockings remained
on the mat by the bedside. Before he lay down, he took a glass
of milk and a slice of bread and butter, for he had had no supper.
He had passed the afternoon in the garden, watering his flowers
and catching butterflies. When he was tired, he sat down on a
bench to rest, and delighted his (= the) ears by listening to the
warbling of the birds. Then he thought that it would be time
to finish and go to bed. In that moment his (= the) mother
sent for him, ordering the maid-servant to take him [tr. that she

120 Lesson 19.

took him) to bed. As by working in the garden he had soiled
(imp. subj.) his clothes and boots, the man-servant will have to
clean these, while the maid-servant will brush those. When little
Joe awakes (fut. subj.) to-morrow morning, he will find his
things clean and prepared.

Conversa^ao.

A que horas ha-de o nosso irmaozinho ir para cama ?

Quem leva para la, ajudando-lhe a despir (undress) ?

Que mais tera a criada que (to) fazer ?

Como passou o Jose a tarde ?

Que fez (did) elle quando estava cansado ?

Que (e que) tomou antes de se deitar?

Onde collocou as suas coisas? (1) a jaqueta? (2) as cerou-

las? (3) as meias? (4) o collarinho?
Para que preeisa elle de collocar tudo bem no seu lugar?
Que fara, depois de deitado e antes de adormecer (to fall

asleep) ?
A que horas ha de levantar-se ?
Como se prepara para almoQar com seu pae?
Para onde o acompanha depois o pae?
Que faz o Jos6zinho na escola ?
E que faz depois de acabadas as aulas?
Que ha no estabelecimento de nataijao?
Como nadam ali os meninos?
Os meninos gostam de nadar e de tomar banho?
Que fazem depois de ter tornado banho?
Que parte de dia 6 a melhor para tomar banho ?
Ha entre os meninos algum que seja bom nadador ?
Porque nao se recommenda ficar muito tempo na agua?

Nineteenth Lesson. Ligao decima noua.

Regular Verbs.

B. Compound Tenses with ter (Active Voice),
and ser (Passive Voice).

§ 117. As the compound tenses do not offer any
difficulty, as soon as we know the auxiliary verbs, we
gave their forms in the conjugation of those verbs
(of. L. .3 — 6). The compound tenses of the auxiliary
verbs and of the active voice of the transitive verbs are
formed by aid of the verb ter, joined to their past parti-

Eegular Verbs. 121

cipie, while the passive voice is formed by the verb
ser, joined to the past participle. Haver is scarcely used
in compound tenses, but for the compound future and
conditional, where it is joined to the following infinitive
by de and, in contrast to the simple future or condi-
tional, expresses a necessity or intention.

Hei-de comprar I shall (I intend) to buy.

sol ha-de derreier a neve the sun will (= must) melt
the snow.

§ 118. Note.— The intransitive verbs follow on
the whole the same rules as in Enghsh. Their com-
pound tenses are formed by ter; yet, if you want to
express a state, the result of an action, you employ
estar — e.g. : o comboio estd chegado; a arvore estd cahida;
a casa estd voltada para o sitl (lies towards the south);
a industria estd decaJiida, etc.

§ 119. Ter coinprado to have bought.

Indicativo.

Preterito composto.
Eu tenho comprado I have bought, etc.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Eu tinha comprado I had bought, etc.

Future composto.

Hei Cor tenho) de comprar j Lust'' OT^I^intend to buy.
terei de comprar I shall have to buy.

Futuro anterior.
Terei comprado I shall -have bought.

Cotidicional imperfeito .

Havia (or teria) \ 1 should have or I ought to buy,
de comprar \ I should have been obliged to buy.

Condicional passado.
Teria comprado I should have bought.

Gon/junctivo passado.
Que eu tenha comprado that I have bought.

122 Lesson 19.

Mais-qiie-perfeilo.
Se eu tivesse comprado if I had bought.

Futuro anterior.
Quando eu tiver comprado when I shall have bought.

Infinitivo e Participios.
Passado.
Ter comprado to have bought.

Futuro.
Haver for ter) dc comprar to have to buy.

Participio composto.
Tendo comprado having bought.

§ 120. As already said, the Preterito simples is
often employed instead of the Preterito perfeito com-
posto (the Enghsh "I have [done]"):

A. The Preterito simples B. The Preterito composto

indicates : indicates :

1. Something belonging to the 1. Something belonging to the
past: elle foi professor (he past and still continuing in
is no more). the present: Elle tern sido

professor (he is so still).

2. A past state: esteve muito 2. A still lasting state: tern
occupado he was very busy. estado muito occupado he

has been very busy.

M. An isolated singular action 3. A habit still enduring:

(even when repeated): Es- Tern escripto com regulari-

creveu algumas vezes lie dade he has written regu-

wrote sometimes. larly (and still continues

writing).

Es.: "Eu fago nssim, eu tenho feito sempre assim, in-
conscientemente ; e o que escrevi nao c mais do
que a revelaQuo do que tenho sentido." (Trindade
Coelho.)

As a rule you may recognise which tense to
employ by some adverb contained in the clause:

Havia cinco annos que era professor he (then) had

been a teacher for 3 years.
Ha cinco annos que foi professor he (then) had been a

teacher 3 years ago.
Ha cinco annos que tem sido professor he has been a

teacher these 3 years.

KejiiiJar Verbs. 123

§ 121. Observations.

(a) The interrogative, negative, and interrogative-
negative forms of the verb may be formed, as alreadj-
said, by the transposition of the noun or pronoun after
the verb, or simply by the accentuation or punctuation
— e.g.: Eu compro. Gompro (eu)? Eu mo compro.
Nao compro (eu)?

(b) In the regular verbs the Infinitivo pessoal is
equal to the Futuro do Gonjunctivo.

§ 122. The Passive Yoice (Vos passiva) is formed
by joining the auxiliary ser to the past participle of
the active verb (cf. L. 4). The past participle, when
coupled with ser, is considered an adjective and conse-
quently agrees in gender and number with the noun
or pronoun to which it refers, even when the verb srr
is omitted:

ierreno foi vendido the ground was sold.

A casa foi vendida the hoase was sold.

Os terrenes foram vendidos the grounds were sold.

As casus foram vendidas the houses were sold.

Note. Instead of ser we may employ also ficar:
livro ficoti vendido, etc.

§ 123. If there be several subjects belonging to
the same participle, this latter takes the form of the
plural. If the subjects are of different gender, the
masculine is preferred to the feminine in modifying the
participle. If the participle follows such different sub-
jects, the mascuhne ending is applied to the participle;
if preceding, this is not necessary.

Foram comprados muilas iivas e figos for muitos figos

e uvas).
As uvas e os figos (que foram) comprados no mer-

cado . . .

Note. — The subject being v6s, employed for a single per-
son, the participle is employed in the singular; also if the
subject is F" Ex'^, F«, etc. the participle agrees with the sex
of the person addressed :

V<^ JEx'^, senhor Nogueira, foi convidado.

y« Ex°, minJia senhora, foi convidada.

Vos sois adorado, Senhor, pelo cm e pela terra.

124 Lesson 19.

§ 124. Ser ehatnado to be called or summoned.

Indicativo.
Presente.
Eu sou chamado, -a T am called or summoned, etc.
tu es chamado, -a
elle e chamado
ella e chamada
Piur. nds somas chamados, -as
vos sois chamados, -as
elles sao chamados
ellas sao chamadas.

Imperfeito.
Eu era chamado, -a I was called or summoned, etc.

Preterito absolute.
Eu fui chamado, -a I was or have been called or sum-
moned, etc.

Preterito composto.
Eu tenho sido chamado, -a I have been called.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Eu fora chamado, -a I had been called.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Eu tinha sido chamado, -a I had been called.

yuturo.
Eu serei chamado, -a I shall be called, etc.

Futuro composto.
Eu hei de ser chamado, -a I shall or must be called
etc.

Futuro anterior.
Eu terei sido chamado, -a I shall have been called.

Condicional presente.
Eu seria chamado, -a I should be called, etc.

Condicional composto.
Eu teria sido chamado, -a I should have been called.

Imperativo.
Se chamado, -a (May you) be called, etc.

Participio.
Sendo chmnado, -a being called, etc.

Regular Verbs. 125

Participio jiassado.
Tendo sido chamado, -a having been (or as I was)
called.

Infinitivo passado.

Ter sido chamado, -a to have been called, etc.

Subjunctivo.
Presente.
Que eu seja chamado^ -a that I be called.

Imperfeito.
Que eu fosse chamado, -a that I was called.

Preterito eomposto.
Que eu tenha sido chamado, -a that I have been called.

Preterito inais-que-perfeito eomposto.
Que eu tivesse sido chamado, -a that I had been called.

Futuro.
He eu for chamado, -a if I shall be called.

Futuro anterior.
Se eu tiver sido chamado, -a if I shall have been called.

§ 125. The passive voice may be and is frequently
expressed by the active form with the pronoun se — i.e.,
reflectively; thus:

Com a farinha de milho fas-se a hroa (= e feita a

broa).
Out of the flour of Indian corn is made bread of

maize.

Yet this form must only be employed, if no
ambiguity result, as — for instance : delinquente enfor-
cou-se or: enforcou-se o delinquente would be rather:
the criminel hanged himself, while "was hanged" must
be rendered in this case by "foi (or ficou) enforcado."

§ 126. The preposition "by" in the passive voice
is rendered by par.

Palavras.

a tecedeira the woman

weaver

fuso the spindle

em seguida afterwards

[is3 'ffiffvj

depois de after

emfim fifi] at last, finally

liriho fliyu] the flax
o iio [fiu] the thread

a substancia the substance

[sudgf'tvsis]
tear fty'ar] the weaver's

loom
a urdidura the warp(ing)

126

Lesson 19.

assedar

o sarilho \

a dobadoura |
secco f'seJciiJ
rnagar frnv'sarj
hater [be 'terj
mafo f'masuj
a magadeira

[mvss '{pBire]
espadelar

[ifpv&a 'Ur]
sedeiro

[sa'&vtruj
a roca [rrakv] \
a maQaroca j
estomentar

[}ftum.en'tarj
tomento

ftumentuj

to hatohel

the reel

dry

to break, brake

to beat

the flax-brake

the flax-dresser

to swingle

the flax-comb

the distaff
to hackle

the awn, chaff
(of flax)

A torre [torra] the tower
severo [sa'veru] severe
erguer [ir'ger] to raise
cdbadelo

[Tcabe 'ffelu]
terrago

fte'rrasu]
u descobei-ta

[dijku'bcrte]
avanQar
construir

['koftru'irj
datar
anqulo

f'eguluj
hexdgono

[ig 'zagunuj
cupula

sandy beach

the terrace

discovery

to advance
to construct

to date
the angle

hexagon

the cupola
the curtain

the battlement

grand

to ornate
the shield

a estriga

[if'trigB]
a meada

[mfadn]
a estopa

[f/'topej
grosseiro

[gru'ssiruj
otecidofta'sid^uj
o cabo f'kabu]
ordinario

[ordi'nariu]
a corda f'kardvj
o barbante

[bvr'bvntd]
lengo ['lesuj

emquwnto
[X'kwvntu]

the strike (of

flax)
the skein

the (flax-)tow

the web, tissue
cable, rope
ordinary

the cord, rope

the pack-
thread, twine

the handker-
chief

whilst.

access

a curtina

fkur'tinej
a armia

grandioso

[grvndfosu]
ornar [ur'narj
escudo
lado da terra the landside

46. Leitura.
linho.
linho e uma planta baixa de flor azul. Das hastes d'essa
planta tttil 6 tirado urn fio. Esse fio 6 a sabstancia de que e

a cruz [krufj
a varanda

[m 'rvnd'ej
arco ['arkuj
parapeito

[pvrv 'peftuj
rendilhar

[rrendi'AarJ
o andar
a abdbada

[v 'bobvS'v]
pavimento

terreo
a nervura

[nar 'mire]
entrelagar

[intrslv sar]
ingresso

[t'gresuj
accesso

[v 'sesu]
a escada de

caracal

[here 'kol]
a guarita

[give 'rite]

the cross
the veranda

the arch, bow
the parapet

to indent

the story
arched roof,

vault
the ground

floor
the nervure

interlace

ingress

winding stairs

the watch-
tower.

Regular Verbs. 127

feito o panno de linho. Depois de estarem bem seccas, as
bastes da plauta sao maQadas ou batidas a 111390 pelas maQa-
deiras. Em seguida sao espadeladas, depois levadas ao sedeiro
e emfim fiadas na roca. linho ha de ser espadelado para ser
estomentado ou para se Ihe (of it) tirarem os tomentos que e
a estopa. Os dentes de ferro do sedeiro separam linho da
estopa : esse fica assedado. Esta e mais grosseira que linho ;
tambem e fiada na roca, e d'ella serao feitas cordas e bar-
bantes, teeidos grosseiros, cabos ordinaries etc. Com linho
assedado fazem-se as estrigas, e estas sao fiadas na roca. Ao
fiar, fazem-se no fuso as ma^arocas. Das ma9arocas fazem-se
meadas no sarilho. As meadas vao a lavar (go or are to ie
washed) ; depois sao cosidas com cinza ; outra Tez sao lavadas ;
e em seguida postas ao sol a (= to) corar. Depois de en-
xutas, as meadas vao a dobadoura, para se fazerem os novellos.
Os novellos vao para a tecedeira, e esta faz com elles a urdi-
dnra no tear. Em seguida, lanQando fio por entre a urdidura,
a tecedeira faz panno. Para tudo isto ha tambem macbinas
mnito perfeitas nas fabricas de fia^ao e teeidos.

Trindade Coelho: primeiro Livro de Leitura.

47. Exercise.

The Tower of JBelem.

One of the most beautiful monuments in Portugal is the
Tower of Belem, called also "Torre de Sao Vicente," magnificent
and severe, raised upon a rock on a sandy beach of the Tagus
with its terrace advancing still over the river. The tower
was built in memory of the discoveries of the Portuguese,
and its construction dates from the beginning of the sixteenth
century. The square tower shuts up the terrace from the
landside. The two angles of the terrace which are looking
upon (para) the sea are cut so that by their base is formed
an hexagon, in the little angles of which (do qual) are rising
watch-towers with cupolas, as well os from the two inferior
and the four superior angles of the tower. The terrace and
the platform of the tower are protected by curtains of grand
battlements; each of these ornated by (com) its shield and
cross of Christ. At half the height of the tower projects
an open veranda with columns, arches, and indented parapets.
Inside in every story a large central room is (to be) found
whose arched roof in the ground-floor has no nervures, while
very rich interlaced nervures are in the upper stories. By very
little doors ingress is given to the very narrow interiors of
the square watch-towers. Winding stairs give access to the
superior stories.

128 Lesson 20.

Conrersa^ao.

Que especle de planta e o linho?

Qual e a parte litil da planta?

De que servem os fios tirades da haste do linho?

Como se prepara a substancia que sac os fios, para se

fazer o fio de fiar?
Que vem a ser a estopa? Como e? E que se faz

d'ella?
Quaes sao os processes passados pelos fios depois de

fiados na roca?
Como se chamatn os apparelhos que servem nesses pro-
cesses ?
Onde sao esses apparellos substituidos por maehinas

muito perfeitas?
Como se chama um dos mais bellos monumentos em

Portugal?
Onde se encontra a «Torre de Belem» ?
Com que intento (intention) foi ella construida?
De qnando data a sua construc9ao?
De que duas partes consists o monumento?
Comu e construido o terra90?
Como e protegido o terra9o assim como a plataforma

da torre?
As araeias como sao ornadas?
Que e que projecta a meia altura da torre?
Que 6 que se encontra no interior?
Como sao feitas as abobadas no pavimento terreo? nos

andares superiores?
Como se entra nas guaritas? nos andares superiores?

Twentietli Lesson. Li^ao vigesima.

Pronominal or Reflective Verbs.

Verhos pronominaes ou reflexivos.

§ 127. As we learned in the last chapter (§ 125),
the Passive Voice may be and is often rendered by
the reflective form of the verb. Thus employed, any
verb, even the intransitive one, may adopt the passive
form. This form may in English be rendered either
by the same passive form or by the active form with
the impersonal pronouns one, we, you, or they, or people
as a subject — e.g.:

Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 129

Juntam-se os papeis the papers are gathered, you or

we gather the papers.
Este livro Use com agrado this book is read (one reads

or people read this book) with pleasure.
Fala-se d'elle com muito elogio he is spoken of (they

speak of him) with high praise.

Observations.

(a) In the last phrase we may also employ the
active form, with the verb in the plural, just as in
English :

Falam delle com muito elogio.

(b) In other cases we may substitute the passive
or impersonal form by the gerund— e.g. : instead of
'''quando se dorme, nao se precisa comer" :

Bormindo nao se precisa comer.

When you (we, people) sleep, you (we, people) need not
eat.

(c) Here also the second reflective form might
be rendered by the active, as in English: Bormindo,
a gente nao precisa comer.

§ 128. The following is the whole conjugation
of the reflective verb, the 3"^ person of which we have
already learned.

As for the reflective pronouns (English: myself, etc.),
there is only the one characteristic form (se), already
dealt with, which marks the 3"^'^ pers. sing, and plur.
For the other persons the accusative of the pronoun
is employed, thus : me [mg], te [ta], se [sd], nbs [nof],
ms [vof].

Infinitivo.
Infinitivo impessoal.

Lavar-se to wash oneself.

Infinitivo pessoal.
Para eu me lavar that I (may) wash myself, etc.
para iu te lavares
para elle se lavar
para nds nos lavarmos
para vos vos lavardes
para elles se lavarem.

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 9

fc . i\'

130 Lesson 20.

Participio.
Presente.
Lavando-me washing myself.
Passado.
Tendo-me lavado (= depois de me ter lavado) after
having washed myself.

Indicativo.
Presents.
Eu lavo-me, I wash myself, etc. nds lavdmo^-nos
tu lavas-te v6s lavaes-vos

elle lava-se elles lavam-se.

Preterito imperfeito.
Eu lavava-me I washed my- nds lavavamo^-nos

self, etc. vds lavaveis-vos

tu lavavas-te elles lavavam-se.

elle lavava-se

Preterito perfeito.
Eu lavei-me I washed myself nds lavdmo^-nos
or I have washed myself, etc. v6s lavdstes-vos
til lavaste-te elles lavaram-se.

elle lavou-se

Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Eu lavdra-me I had washed nds lavdramo^-nos

myself, etc. vds Idvdreis-vos

tu lavdras-te elles lavaram-se.

elle lavdra-se

Preterito perfeito composto.
Eu tenho-me lavado I have washed myself.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito-comp osio.
Eu tinha-me lavado I had washed myself.

Futuro.
Eu hei-de me lavar or la/var-me-(h)ei or eu me lavarei I
shall wash myself, etc.

Futuro passado.
Ter-me-(h)ei lavado or eu me terei lavado I shall have
washed myself, etc.

Oondicional.
Eu havia de me lavar or lavar-me-(h)ia I should wash
myself, etc.

Condieional passado.
Ter-me-(h)ia lavado or eu me teria lavado I should have
washed myself.

1 The s of the 1st pers. pi. drops before the pronouns ofs^,
a(s), nos, vos.

Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 131

Imperativo.
Lava-ie! Lave-se! Lavae-vos! Wash yourself!
NSk) te laves! Nao se lave! Nao vos laveis! Do not
wash yourself.

Conjunctivo.
Presente.
Que eu me lave that I wash myself, etc.
que tu te laves
que elle se lave
que nds nos lavemos
que vos vos laveis
que dies se lavem.

Imperfeito.
Que or se eu me lavasse that or if I washed myself, etc.
que or se tu te lavasses
que or se elle se lavasse
que or se nds nos lavassemos
que or se vos vos lavasseis
que or se elles se lavassem.

Preterito composto.
Que eu me teriha lavado that I have washed myself, etc.
que tu te tenhas lavado.

Mais-gue-perfeito-composto.
Que or se eu me tivesse lavado that or if I had washed

myself, etc.
que or se tu te tivesses lavado
que or se elle se tivesse lavado.

Futwo.
Se or quando eu me lavar if or when I shall wash

myself, etc.
se or quando tu te lavares
se or quando elle se lavar
se or quando nds nos lavarmos
se or quando v6s vos lavardes
se or quando elles se lavarem.

§ 129. The position of the reflective pronoun is:
1. in a simple principal phrase, if not negative, after
the verb (or the auxiliary), to which it is joined by a
hyphen — e.g.: Lavo-me; lavaste-te?

2. If however the phrase is negative, the pronoun
precedes the verb: Nao me lavo; nao te lavaste? Nunca
se lavava.

9*

132 Lesson 20.

3. If an adverb, conjunction, or complement begms
the phrase or, without beginning it, precedes the verb,
the pronoun may be put before or after the verb.

"0 homem preeisa alimentar-se para viver: se nao
se alimentasse, morria. Os homens alimentam-se de
carnes, e tambem se alimentam de vegetaes."

4. In subordinate sentences the pronoun precedes
the verb: Quero que te laves (as maos). I want you
to wash yourself (your hands).

5. After the "verbo de realce" E que which is
employed to put an emphasis upon some word,^ you
may put the pronoun behind or before the verb : E que
eda lei presta-se (or se presta) a tudo quanta seja fraude.
The case is that this law complies with anything like
fraud.

Here also E que may be omitted or considered
as not existing, and thus the phrase becomes a prin-
cipal one.

Note.— The same rules apply to the pronoun complement,
even if not employed reflectively, and whether accusative or
dative— e.g. :

Eu lavo-a I wash her or it.

Lavaste-os? Did you wash them?

Nao as lavei I did not wash them.

Nunca te lavou a roupa she never washed your linen
{te is here dative).

Se a lavadeira nao me tivesse lavado a roupa . . .

If the washerwoman had not washed my linen . . .

§ 130. The reflective verbs in English and Por-
tuguese languages do not always correspond to each
other. As indeed the reflective verbs in EngUsh are
rare, some neuter or passive verbs in English require
the reflective form in Portuguese. Such verbs are:
Admirar-se to wonder chamar-se to be called

afogar-se to be drowned compor-se (see § 213) to be

approximar-se \, „„„roximate composed

chegar-se ^to approximate contentar-se to be contented
apresentar-se a to wait upon or satisfied

(apresentar-se to offer oneself) decidir-se to decide
arrepender-se to repent deitar-se ^ *° ^^^ down,

(as)sentar-se to sit down ' ( to go to bed

atrever-se to dare descuidar-se de to neglect

calar-se to be silent di^iwiiz-seto deign, to be pleased

Pronominal or Reflective Verbs.

183

empenhar-se to endeavour
encontrar-se to be (found)
encontrar-se com to meet
enganar-se to be mistaken
escapar-se \ ,

esqmcer(-se de) to forget
faeer-se to become
informar-se to inquire
irritar-se to grovr angry
ir-se (embora) to go away
jactar-se to boast

lembrar-se to remember
levantar-se to get up, to rise
queixar-se to complain
referir-se to refer
regosijar-se to rejoice
resewijr-se to resent
restabelecer-se to recover
/eiij-fflz-se to retire
toj-war-se to become, turn out
recusar(-se) to refuse
desammar(-se) \ to discourage,
desalentar(-se) f to lose courage

JVofe.— The three last verbs may be employed as active.
neuter, or reflective verbs ; as for esquecer, it must be follow-
ed by de if employed reflectively, and personally. Without
de, it may be used as an active verb (which is considered a
gallicism); but more frequently as a neuter and in the 3"^^ per-
son; neuter, it is employed without pronoun or de.

Esqueceu-se de alguma cousa j
Esqueceu alguma cousa , he forgot something.

Esqueceu-lhe alguma cousa }

Eu desanimei or desanimei-me \ I god discouraged, I
Eu desalentei or desalentei-me ( lost courage.
seu mallogro desalentou-o his ill-success discouraged
him.

§ 131. Whenever the Portuguese se, nos, vos have
not a reflective sense, but express a reciprocal action,
they are translated by each other or one another:

Os dois irmaos parecem-se (N6s parecemo-nos).

The two brothers resemble (we resemble) one another.

§ 132. Very often we can hardly distinguish
whether a verb, employed with -se (i.e. in the S"^"^ per-
son), is reflective or passive. In this latter case it can
always be substituted by the past participle preceded
by a form of the verb ser. sino ouve-se (= is heard).
Sometimes the difference is immaterial : corpo alimenta-
se, the body is nourished or nourishes itself. If there is
a second pronoun, we may be sure that the verb is
employed in the passive voice — e.g.:

A cavallo dado nao se The olha o dente (=^ o dente nao

e olhado).
Look not a gift-horse in the mouth.

134

Lesson 20.

Quando ha vento, molha-se a vela (=

Ihada) (prov.).
Strike the iron while it is hot.
Contenta-te, gato, que farta o farto.
Great wealth, great weariness.

a vela fica mo-

Palavras.

Vestir-se

to dress

a extremidade

the extremity

[lyt'fiirsB]

[fftrjmid'iid'sj

despir-se

to undress

saliente

prominent

[dif'pirss]

[ssh 'entaj

divertir-sg

a ufilia

the nail

[divgrtirsd]

to amuse

['wffe]

recrear-se

oneself

guarnecer de

to provide with

[rgkry 'ars9]

gwerng'ser]

dedicar-se a

to give oneself

eslar em pi

to stand

up to

[tf'ta.rlm'ps]

guardar-se de

to beware of

pisar [pi'zarj

to tread

[gwvr 'darsdid]

trabalho

the work

refrescar-se

to refresh

[tre 'baAuJ

[rgfrifkarsaj

oneself

tacto ['tatuj

the touch

alimentar-se

to nourish

particularmeiite

particularly

[vlimen'tarsa]

oneself

[pvrtikular-

assemelhar-se

to equal, to

'mente]

[vsami 'liarsi],

resemble, to

dedo pollegar

the thumb

parecer-se

be (alike)

[puh'gar]

[pwa'sersd]

dedo pollegar

the big toe

vegetal

the vegetable

do pi

[vagg'taij

opponivel

opposite

a bebida

the drink

[opu'nivdj

fbs 'biivj

a gemma d'dvo

the yolk

engordar

to fatten

['gemy'd'ovu]

[igur'dar]

a clara (d'dvo)

the white (of

sdlido ['soli&u]

solid ; thorough

an egg)

matar a side

to quench one's

incolor

colourless

(a fame)

thirst

cozido

boiled

figurar

to figure

miolo

the kernel

suar

to sweat

fmt'oluj

a baga [bugv]

the drop

oval fu'vai]

oval

su6r fsu'orj

the sweat

envolver

to involve

estdmago

the stomach

[ivui'ver]

[t'ftomegu]

prSprio para

eatable

suceo f'suku],

the gastric

comer

gdstrico

juice

saboroso

savoury

f'gaftrikuj

[svtu'rozu]

digerir

to digest

nutritivo

nourishing

[di^a'rir]

fnutra 'tivuj

condimento

the seasoning

produeto

the product(ion)

[Wndi' mentuj

1

[pru'dutu]

salivar

to spit

reino animal

the animal

[svli'vurj

kingdom

Pronominal or Reflective Verbs.

135

reino vegetal

the vegetable

cnixeiro

the clerk

kingdom

["kaffvyruj

delgado

thin

guarda-Kvros

the book-

[dnigaiii]

keeper

acastanhado

brownish

seja que for

whatsoever it

[vksfts 'ya&uj

be

liquidof'UkmduJ liquid

a respeito de

as for

rijo f'rriguj

hard, strong

a escri(p)tura-

the bookkeep-

alimentar

alimentary

Qoo (mercantile

ing

a natureza

Nature, quality

em (or por) par-

by single and

reqiierente

the solicitor

tidos simples

double entry

[rrdTc9 'rentd]

e dobrados

caixa

the cashier

(em) caso (que)

in case.

48. leitura.

Alimenta^.

homemprecisaalimentar-separaviver: se nao sealimen-
tasse, morria. Os homens alimentam-se de carnes, e tambem se
alimentam de vegetaes. As carnes e os vegetaes, chamados
alimentos solidos, ou comidas, matam-nos a feme. Ha alimentos
que nos engordam; e outros que nao nos engordam, mas pelos
quaes 6 conservado ao corpo o seu calor natural. Os animaes
e OS vegetaes fornecem-nos os alimentos solidos; mas alem
d'estes, precisaraos tambem de bebidas. As bebidas matam-
nos a s6de. nosso corpo e formado de muitas substa,ncias.
Entre as snbstancias que formam o nosso corpo figura a agua.
Quando o nosso corpo se resente da falta d'agua, somos avisados
pela sede de que precisa d'ella. Quando suamos perdemos
agua, pois esta sae-nos do corpo em bagas de suor. Eis ahi
porque suando sente-se (or a gente sente or porque quando sua-
mos sentimos) s6de. estomago produz um succo, chamado succo
gastrico, muito precise para digerir a comida. Os condimentos,
que nos fazem salivar, fazem com que se produza esse succo
em maior abundancia. corpo humano carece de substancias
varias para bem se nutrir. Essas substancias encontram-se
nos varios alimentos; e d'estes, uns possuem grande numero
de taes substancias, e outros so possuem algumas. pao, a
carne, os legumes verdes e seccos, as batatas, os ovos, e tambem
a agua e o leite pertencem ao numero dos primeiros.

Trindade Coelho: Primeiro Livro de Leitura (adapted).

49. Thema,

Solicitagao d'um emprego.

LisbSa, 8 de Abril de 1908.
lll«'o e Ex™oi Senhor:
Tenho a honra de apresentar-me como req'uerente do
emprego de caixeiro (guarda-livros, caixa, ou seja o que for)

1 See § 18.

136 Lesson 20.

na estimada casa de V"- Ex*-, annunciado no «Diario de No-
ticias» d'hoje.

Frequentei durante seis annos a Escolade..., e estive dois
annos em casa do sr. A. B. a quem tenho licenga de me
referir. Tive uma solida instrucgao na arithmetica emquanto
a exactidao e promptidao; e esta carta informara a V'' Ex*-
a respeito da minha letra. Tambem estoii bam versado na
escriptura^ao mercantil em partidos simples e dobrados.

Case (que) V"- Ex^- deseje v6r-me antes de se deeidir,
digne-se de m'o fazer saber, para que eu me apresente a
V»' Ex"- a qualquer hora que marcar.

Sou com toda a considera^ao e respeito

De Va- Ex»- criado att^ e obrg'^"
Joao da Silva Nogueira.

50. Exercise.

K. The Foot and the Hand.

The foot and the hand are both members of the human
body. They are composed of bones, flesh, and skin, and are
more long than large. On their extremities they have five
prominent parts provided with nails. These prominent parts
are called fingers. Of the two, the foot is the more solid and
big and the one which has the hardest bones. With the feet
people can stand, walk, and tread. With the hands we can
execute numerous works. Of the two members, the hand is
the one in which the sense of touch is the more refined. What
particularly characterises the hand is the thumb being (infini-
tive) separated from the other four fingers and opposite to
each of them, whilst the big toe is joined to the other toes.

B. The Egg and the Nut.

The egg and the nut resemble one another by their
exterior form. Both are oval. The interior of both is en-
eased by a shell. The interior is not only eatable, but also
nourishing and savoury. The egg is a production of the
animal kingdom, and the nut is a production of the vegetable
kingdom. The shell of the egg is more or less white and
thin, and may easily be broken between the fingers. The
shell of the nut is brownish, thick and hard, and can only
with difficulty be opened by the hand. The nourishing sub-
stance in the egg is liquid, but when it is boiled, it becomes
firm. It is composed of the yolk and the white. The yolk
is yellow, and the white is colourless when raw, but white

1 See § 18.

Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations. 137

after being boiled. The nourishing substance of the nut,
called the kernel, is of a firm quality.

Conversa^ao.

A. (bate na porta.) B. Pode entrar! {or Bntre quern 6!).

Abre-se a porta, dando ingresso a um homem que se approxima,

inclinando-se:

A. ¥*>■• Ex"- da-me licen9a?

B. Dou (see § 184 and p. 29, note). Chegue-se para
ca. Que e que deseja?

A. Falaram-me n'um emprego de caixeiro que se pre-
tende preencher.

B. E verdade. E V«- encontra-se nas condi9oes . . ?

A. Atr6vo-me de solicitdl-o. Chamo-me . . .

B. Sente-sel Pdde dar-me informa9oes sobre alguma
colloeagao anterior?

A. Pode V^- Ex^- tomal-as com a casa dos senhores . . . ,
donde me retirei ha um mgs.

B. Porque se retirou? Descuidou-se das suas obriga^oes?
Nao se empenhou bastante em satisfazer os patroes ?

A. Nao foi isso. Piquei doente e tive de me ir embnra
para me restabelecer. Levantei-me da cama ha dias
apenas.

B. Bem, hei-de informar-me, antes de me deeidir. Mas
V^- lembre-ae que tern de se contentar com pouco or-
denado e que espero dos meus empregados que nunca
se escapem a trabalho algum, nem se esque9am dos
sens deveres.

A. V*- Ex"' nao tera de queixar-se.

B. Muito bem. Caso (que) se dedique seriamente ao seu
emprego, nao terei eu de me irritar, nem V^- de
arrepender-se. Entao retire-se por emquanto (for
the present) e nao (se) desanime at6 receber a
minha decisao! Va-se (see § 217) com Deus!

A. Deus guarde a ^^- Ex*-!

Twenty-first Lesson. Li(jao vigesima
primeira.

Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.

Paradigma das conjugaqoes regulares.

Having in the three last lessons dealt with the
formations of the tenses and moods of a regular

138

Lesson 21.

verb and given all the forms (including the passive and
the reflective) of a verb of the first conjugation, we
now present a paradigm of all three, thus repeating
the first, in order to facilitate a summary view, yet
omitting the English translation, easily supplied, however,
after the IS''' lesson.

§ 133. The Portuguese calls Yerbo adjective a verb
that unites in one word the verb ser or estar and an
attribute, thus expressing an action, a state, or a quality
of the subject— e.g.: saltar, comer, partir; salto, I jump,
equivalent to estou saltando, I am jumping; come, he
eats, equivalent to estd comendo, he is eating, etc.

§ 134. The rcrho adjectivo may be transitive
or intransitive, according to its expressing an action,
or a state, respectively a quality of the subject. Being
transitive, it has an active and passive voice (voz activa
or passiva). In the compound tenses of the former, it
is conjugated with te)', in all tenses of the latter with
ser.

Conjuga^oes regulares do verbo adjectivo.

Vos activa [voza, 'tive].

1"- conjugai&o. 2". conjugagdo. 3". ccmjugagao.

Infinit(iv)os e Participios.

Presente impessoal.

Dev-er, to owe,

to be obliged,

must, ought

Presente 'pessoal.

Bev-er Applaud-ir

dev-eres applaud-ires

dev-er applaud-ir

dev-ermos applaud-irnios

dev-erdes applaud-irdes

dev-erem. applaud-iretn.

§135.

Louv-ar, to praise

Louv-ar

louv-ares

louv-ar

louv-armos

louv-ardes

louo-arem.

Applaud-ir, to ap-
plaud.

Ter. louvado.

Ter I louvado,
teres ) devido,
ter ] applaudido

Preterito impessoal.

Ter devido.
Preterito pessoal.
termos \
terdes ,
terem I

Ter applaudido.

louvado,

devido,

applaudido.

Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.

139

Futuro impessoal.
Haver or ter de louvar, de dever, de applaudir.

Futuro pessoal.

Ter or haver \ de louvar, termos or havermos\de louvar.
iprps haveres ) de dever terdes . haverdes ide dever,

teres .

ter , haver

1 de applaudir terem „haverem \deapplam

Louvando.

Participio imperfeito.
Bev-endo.

Participio perfeito.

Applaud-indo.

Louv-ado.

Devido.

Applaud-ido.

Participio perfeito composto.

Tendo louvado.

Tendo devido.

Indicative.
Presente.

Tendo applaudt

Louv-o

louv-as

louv-a

louv-dmos

louv-aes

louv-am.

Bev-o

dev-es

dev-e

dev-etnos

dev-eis

dev-em.

Preterito imperfeito.

Applaud-o

applaud-es

applaud-e

applaud-tmos

applaud-is

applaud-em,.

Lov/v-ava

louv-avas
louv-ava
lou/o-dvamtos
louv-dveis

louv-avam.

Bev-ia

dev-ias

dev-ia

dev-lam,os

dev-ieis

dev-iam,.

Preterito perfeito.

Applaud-ia

applaud-ias

applaud-ia

applaud-lamos

applaud-ieis

applaud-iam,.

Louv-ei

louv-aste

louv-ou

lowv-dmos

louv-astes

louv-aram.

Bev-i^

dev-este

dev-eu

dev-em,os

dev-estes

dev-eram,.

Applaud-i

applaudriste

applaud-iu

applaud-im,os

applaud-istes

applaud-iram.

Preterito perfeito composto.

Tenho louvado, devido, applaudido.

' In the meaning of must or ought this tense is not use
but is replaced by the Imperfect.

140

Lesson 21.

Louva-ra

louvd-ras

louvd-ra

louvd-ramos

louvd-reis

lowvd-ram.

Louv-arei.

louv-ards

louv-ard

louv-aremos

louv-areis

loiw-ardo.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito.^

Devt'-ra Applaudl-ra

deve-ras applavdi-ras

deve-ra applaudl-ra

deve-rantos applaudi-ramos

deve-reis applaudi-reis

deve-rani. applaudi-rani.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Tinha louvado, devido, applaudido.

Futuro imperfeito.^
Dev-erel Applaud-irei

applaud-irds

dev-erds

dev-erd

dev-eremos

dev-ereis

div-erdo.

applaud-ird
applaud-iretnos
applaud-ireis
applaud-irdo.

Futuro imperfeito composto.
Hei or tenlio de louvar, de dever, de applaudir.

Futuro preterito composto.
Terei louvado, devido, applaudido.

Condicional.

Presente (imperfeito).
Louv-aria Dev-eria

louv-arias dev-erias

louv-aria dev-eria

louv-ariamos dev-eriamos

louv-arieis dev-erieis

louv-ariam. dev-eriain.

Applaud-iria

applaud-irias

applaud-iria

applaud-iriamos

applaud-irieis

applaud-iriam.

Louvd-ra
louvd-ras
louvd-ra, etc.

(cf. Mais-que-perfeito).
Deve-ra
Deve-ras
deve-ra etc.

Applaud-ira
applaud-iras
applaud-ira etc.

Perfeito.
Teria louvado, devido, applaudido

ou
Tivera louvado, devido, applaudido.

For the formation of this tense cf. § 114, c.
For the formation of this tense cf. § 44, 1.

Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.

141

Louv-a (til)
louv-ae (vos).

Imperativo.

Deve(tu)(ol'N.B.)
dev-ei (v6s)

Applaud-e (tu)
applaud-i (vds).

N.B. — The verb dever in its meaning "must" has
no Imperative. In its meaning "to owe" this form is
given periphrastically: fica devendo, nao fiques devendo.
The above imperative forms of dever, one of the few
quite regular verbs in -er, is meant only for a gram-
matical model.

Conjunctivo.

Presente.

Louv-e

Dev-a

Applaud- a

louv-es

dev-as

applaud-as

louv-e

dev-a

applaud-a

louv-gmos

dev-Anios

applaud-Amos

louv-eis

dev-aes

applaud-aes

louv-ent.

dev-ani.

Prefer ito imperfeito.

applaud-awi.

Loum-sse

JDeve-sse '

Applaudi-sse

louvd-sses

deve-sses

applaudi-sses

louvd-sse

deve-sse

applaudi-sse

louvd-ssemos deve-ssemos

applaudi-ssemo.f

louvd-sseis

deve-sseis

applaudi-sseis

louvd-ssem.

deve-ssem.

applaudi-sseni.

Preterito perfeito composto.

Tenha louvado, devido, applaudido.

Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.

Tivesse louvado, devido, applaudido.

Futuro imperfeito.^

Louva-r

Deve^'

Applaudi-r

louva-res

deve-res

applaudi-res

louva-r

deve-r

applaudi-r

louva-rmos

deve-rmos

applaudi-rmos

louva-rdes

deve-rdes

applaudi-rdes

louva-rem.

deve-rem.

applaudi-rem.

Futuro imperfeito composto.

Houver de louvar, de dever, de

applaudir.

' Cf. §

113, C.

142

Lesson 21.

§ 136. Siimmary Table

of the Endings of Regular Verbs in their Simple Tenses.
First Primitive Tense, InfiniUvo and Deriyed.

1. conj

2. conj.

3. conj.

1. conj.

2. conj. 3. conj.

Infinite

,

Pret. perf.

ar

Pres. impessoal.
er ir

ei

aste

ou

i i
este iste
eu iu

Pres. pessoal.

dmos

emos imos

ar
ares

er
eres

ir
ires

astes
dram.

estes istes
eram. iram.

ar

armos
arcles
arem.

er

ermos
erdes
erem.

ir

irmos
irdes
irem.

arei
ards
ard

Fufuro imperfeito,
erei irei
eras irds
erd ird

Indicative.

aremos

ererrtos iremos

Presente.

areis
ardo.

ereis ireis
erao. irao.

as

es

es

Condicional.

a

e

e

aria

eria iria

dmos

emos

imos

arias

erias irias

aes

eis

is

aria

eria iria

am.

em.

em.

ariamos

eriamos iriamos

Pret. imperf.

arieis
ariam

erieis irieis
eriam. iriam.

ava

ia

za

avas

ias

ias

Participio imperf.

ava

ia

ia

ando.

endo. indo.

avamos
dveis

iamos
ieis

iamos
ieis

Participio perfeito.

dvam.

iam.

iam.

ado.

ido. ido.

Second PrimitiTe Tense, IndicaUvo presente (see above)
and Derived.

1. conj.

2. conj.

3. conj.

1.

conj.

2. conj.

3. conj

Conjunctivo.

I

mperat

IVO.

Presente.

e

a

a

a

e

e

es

as

as

e

a

a

e

a

a

emos

dmos

dmos

emos

dmos

dmos

ai

ei

i

eis

aes

aes

em

am.

am.

em.

am.

am.

Paradigm of the Eegular Conjugations.

143

Tliird Primitive Tense, 2"^^ Pers. Sing, of tlie JPref. perf.

(see above) and Derived.

Same endings in all 3 conjugations, whetlier regular or irregular.

Indicativo. Conjunctivo.

Mais-que-perf. Pret. imp. Futuro imperf.

ra sse

ras sses

ra sse

ramos ssemos

reis sseis

ram. sseni.

r

res

r

rmos

rdes

rem.

§ 137. Terbs of the 2°<i and 3"^'^ conjugations.

N.B. — Those verbs marked by * are irregular. Of
the regular ones, those ending in -cer, -ger, -guer, -guir
are subject to the well-known rules of the phonetic
law concerning c and g. Others submit to the phone-
tics mentioned in the following lesson (22).

Adoecer to fall ill
agradecer to thank (for)
amanhecer to dawn
apodrecer to make or grow

rotten
apparecer to appear
bater to beat
colher to pick, to gather
commover to move
center to contain
converter to convert
eoser to sow
cozer to cook
defender to defend
desapparecer to disappear
esqmcer(-se) to forget, to be

forgotten
*faeer to do, make
fornecer furnish
merecer to merit
nascer to be born; to spring,
parecer to seem [rise, grow
percorrer to run through
*poder can^ to be able
proteger to protect
*saber to know

abrir to open

affligir to afflict

aggredir to attack, assault

condusir to lead ; -se to behave

consistir (de) to consist (of)

fransir to gather into plaits ;

— as sohrancelhas to frown
fugir to flee, to fly
Hmpedir to hinder, prevent
msistir (em) to insist (upon)
*ir ter com to call upon, to

go to
lugir to light, to shine
mentir to lie
*ou'vir to hear
partir to part, to divide; to

depart
*pedir to ask, beg
perseguir to persecute
possuir to possess
produzir to produce
prohibir to forbid, prohibit
proseguir to prosecute
*pro'vir to come from
reduzir to reduce
sentir to feel, smell

144

Lesson 21.

tecer to weave
varrer to sweep
*ver to see.

servir to serve, to be of use;

— se de to make use of
sorrir to smile

Palavras.

poente

[pu 'ent^J
chao [feu]

the west, Oc-
cident

the floor,
ground

the direction

a direcgao

[dire'ssuj

alimento the nourish-

[vh 'mentuj ment

legume the vegetables

[li'guma]

a ponta [pontvj the horn

gado vaccum the cattle

['gaffu'vakum]

eervo f'servu] the stag

a ormagao the horns

[vrmv 'si'tij

descaneado quiet

[dyfkvn 'safu]

opapel [pv'psi] the part

fazer o papel to play the part

de ■ . . of . . .

as palmas the applause

['palmi'f]

a gallinha the hen

[gis'liyn]

a ave [sva] the bird

a ave de rapina the bird of prey

estudioso studious, dili-

[iftvM'oeu] gent

preguigoso lazy

fpragi'sozu]

pato fpatu] the duck

obs^quio

[ot'zckTu]
trabalho de

ferias
Duarte

[du'artd],

Eduardo
precisar

[pr9Si'zar]
o castigo

[kej'tigu]
a preguiga

[prg 'gisvj
a lebre [lehrd]
a raposa

[rra, 'pozej
pardo ['pardu]
rachado

[rrv 'fa&u]
focinho

[fu'siyu]
as barbas

['barbefj
timido ['timi&u]
a casca f'kafkv]
cagar [lee'sar]
saboroso

[sisbu'rozuj
pelo ['pielu]
chapelleiro

[fvpd'lvfru]

the favour

the holiday-
work
Edward

to need

the punishment

the laziness

the hare
the fox

grey
cleft

snout, mouth

the whiskers,

the beard
timid
the bark
to hunt, catch

savoury
the hair

the hatter.

51. Leitnra.

sol nasce no oriente e desapparece no poente. A herva
cresce no prado, enverdecendo o chao. Tejo, depois de
nascido na Hespanha, percorre este pais em direccao occidental
e, atravessado tambem Portugal, vae lan^ar-se no Atlantieo
ao pe de Lisboa. alimento ordinario do homem consiste de
pao, carne, leite, ovos e legumes. Os animaes de pontas, taes
como o gado vaccum, os cervos e outros mais, reeeberam a
sua armagao para se defender(em), ao serem aggredidos.
Guilherme devia ser mais modesto ; assim mereceria a estima de
toda a gente. senhor apparepa em minha casa na tarde de
amanha! Nao se esqusQa! Nao me hei de esquecer, fique

Paradigm of the Regular Conjugation. 145

Va- Ex"- descan9ado! A nossa melhor actriz adoeceu infeliz-
mente; se nao tivesse adoecido (or: se nao adoecesse), teria
side muito applaudida. Ainda ante-hontem, fazendo o papal
da Ophelia, recebeu muitas palmas, que agradecia, sorrindo
commovida. alumno ja lia, escrevia e fazia contas, mas
ainda nao sabia desenhar. Nao sabiaa que a raposa persegue
as lebres ? Eu nao tenho duvida que ella persiga (§ 224) as
lebres, mas queria que nao perseguisse as gallinhas e os
patos. Se conhecesse um meio que o impedisse e que prote-
gesse essas aves, havia-de empregal-o {or: empregal-o-ia).

52. Thema.

The Studious Pupil and the Lazy.

On the last day of the holidays Edward went to his
schoolfellow Joseph and asked him (the) the favour that he
[might] let him copy his two holiday-tasks which (os quaes)
should be presented at school the following day. Joseph
asked, astonished, whether he had not yet begun them."^
Edward answered that he had had no time for it, that he
had played a great deal with his brothers and sisters, that he
had walked in the fields and woods, and that he had caught
butterflies. Then Joseph answered that Edward, having
walked so much, must be very tired and needed to rest; but
that the following day he would receive the just punishment
for his laziness.

63. Exercise.

Change the indirect language of the above into the
direct.

ConTersa(;ao.

A Lebre.

(By aid of the words in parenthesis a whole sentence
is to be formed).
Que e uma lebre ? (animal quadriipede)
Que cor tern? (parda)
Como e a cabe9a? (arredondada)
Como sac as orelhas? (compridas e movedi^as)
Como 6 bei^o superior? (rachado)
Que tem no focinho? (barbas)
Como sao os p6s anteriores? (curtos)
Como sao os p^s poateriores? (compridos)
Como e a cauda? (muito curta)
Como e a lebre? (timida)
Que come ella? (sementes, couves e cascas)

' In indirect discourse the Indicative is to be employed.
Portuguese ConTersation-Grammar. 10

146 Lesson 22.

Quaes sao os aniraaes que a perseguem? (raposas, gatos

bravos, aves de rapina)
Quern a ca9a? (o homem)
Como e a came? (saborosa)
Quem utilisa os p6los? (chapelleiros).

Twenty-second Lesson. Li^ao vigesima
segunda.

Phonetieal and Orthographical Peculiarities
of otherwise Regular Verbs.

A. In the First Conjugation.

§ 137a. (a) Those verbs of the 1^' conj. which in
their radical syllable have a close a [y], not followed
by m, n or nh, change this « into open a wherever
it has the tonical accent (cf. § 5). Ex.: lavar [l-e'var] :
lavo ['lavu]. combdio para ['parej.

(b) If, however, the « is followed by m, n or nh,
it remains close: cJiamar ffe'mvrj : chamo ['famuj ; sa-
nar : sano ['s^nuj, apanhar : apanho [■e'pvp.uj.

Except. : ganhar [ga 'jinr] : ganho ['gajiu] I gain.

§ 138. (a) Those verbs of the 1^' conj. which in
their radical syllable have an atonic e [d], not fol-
lowed by m, n, nh or by one of the palatals j, ch, Ih
modify it, when tonical, into open e [s]. Ex.: con-
certar [hosdr'tar] to mend : concerto [ho' sertu] ; confes-
sar : confesso [Wfesu] ; levar; medrar; seccar; segar.

(b) If, however, one of those consonants follows,
as well as in the verb cTiegar, the atonic e [d or }]
becomes close e [e] or [v] (see § 5 A, Remark); remar :
remo ['rremuj; acenar : acena fv'seniij; chegar : chego
['/vg^u], chegaf'fngvj; desejar [ddzf gar] : desejofdg' 0VjuJ ;
fecher [fi'far] : fecho f'frfuj; ajoelhar [vgwt'fiar] : ajoelho
[vgwvfiuj. Except.: invejar to envy : invejo ft'veguj
with open e fsj.

(c) On the other hand another verb belongs to this
group (b) : pesar in its meaning to be sorry : pesa-me
['peisvmd] I am sorry, I worry, with close e, while the
same verb in its meaning to weight has open e />/ in
the tonical syllables: peso [pezu].

Phon. and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 147

§ 139. Verbs ending in -ear change e into ei [vi],
whenever the e would have the tonical accent: nomear
[num'i 'a,r] to name : nonieio [nu 'm'stu]. Except. : the verb
crear (or better criar) to create, breed, bring up; which
conjugates: crio, crias, cria, criam, etc., while its com-
posites follow the general rule : procrear to procreate :
procreio (but also procrio) ; recrear to delight, to recover :
recreia.

N.B. — liecriar, to recreate, conjugates like criar.

§ 140. Verbs ending in -iar conserve the i
even when tonical: copiar : copio [Tcu'piu].

Yet there is a small group of verbs which follow
the rule of those in -ear: negociar to negotiate : nego-
ceio; diligencia/r to endeavour, to effect, bring about :
diligenceio ; odiar to hate : odeio ; premiar to distinguish,
to reward -.premeio; remediar to remedy, repair : remedeia.

§ 141. An atonic o [u], not followed by m, n
or nh, changes in accented syllables into open o [o] :
tocar to touch, to play (an instrument) : 'toco [tolmj ;
cortar to cut : corto f'kortuj.

If, however, followed by m, n, nh or a vowel (verbs
in -oar), the atonic o changes into close o [oj: assomar
fvsu'marj to climb up, to peep out, to appear : assdmo
[v'somuj; ahonar to bail : abono ['e'bonuj; sonhar to
dream : sow/io f'sopuj -.perdoar to pavdon : per ddo [2}9r'-
douj.

Exceptions to this rule are the verbs tomar to
take and domar to tame, which change close o into
open [o] : tdmo ['tomu], domo ['tomuj. (N.B. — Tomo
is volume; domo dome).

§ 142. The unaccented close o, which is found
before f, is modified into open o [o] : soltar [soi'tur] to
release, loosen, free : solto ['soUu].

N.B. — The nasal o [d] is and remains always
close: contar [hdn'tar] to count : conto f'JconfuJ.

§ 143. The verbs in -gar intercalate u between
g and a following e: pagar to pay : pagues, pague, pa-
guemos, pagueis, paguem; paguei.

The verbs in -car change before e the c into qu:
tocar : toques, toque, etc.

io»

148 Lesson 22.

The verbs in -gar lose the cedilla before e: coiiic-
mr : comeces, etc.

Those in -jar may change the j into g before an
c or conserve it: viagei or viajci, viagcnios or viajemos.

B. In the Second Conjugation.

§ 144. Unaccented close a ['b] of the radical
syllable changes, when accented, into open a [v]:
ahater [viv'ter] to abate : afea^o [v'batv].

§ 145. Atonic e [d] of the radical changes:

1. Into accented close e [r] in the iirst person
sing. pres. ind. and the accented forms derived from
it (i.e. : the singular and the 3'''^ pers. plur. of the sub-
junctive): gemer to groan : gemo ['gemuj, gema, gemas
f'3emv(f)J, gemam (N.B. — a or o in the ending!);

2. Into open e fej in the 2°'^ and 3'^^ pers. sing.
and in the 3'''^ pers. plur. pres. ind. and the derived forms
(2°"^ pers. imperative): gemes ['gem}/], geme ['gmiid],
grmeni ['giinei] (N.B. — e in the ending!).

§ 146. Atonic o [u] becomes in the same cases:

1. close [o]: comer to eat : como ['Icomu], coma(s)
['lMmv(f)].

2. open [o]: comes ["kom'if], come ['homd], etc.

§ 147. Unaccented close o [o] becomes open o
[o] in all those forms where a becomes e (cf § 145,2):
rolver to turn : valves, valve, volvem.

§ 148. Verbs ending in -cer take a cedilla before
a and o; conhecer to know : conhego, conhega, etc.

§ 149. Verbs ending in -ger change g into j be-
fore a and a : prateger to protect : pratejo, proteja.

§ 150. Verbs ending in -guer drop the u before
a and a .- erguer to raise : ergo, erga, ergas, etc.

C. In the Third Conjugation.

§ 151. Unaccented close a ["b] of the radical syl-
lable changes, if not followed by m, n or nh, into open
a [a] when accented: dbrir [v'trir] to open : abro
[' aZru].

Phon. and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Kegular Verbs. 149

If, however, it is followed by in, n or nli, it remains
close: ganir to howl, yelp : gane ['gvno] ; bramir to roar:
iramo ['hr^muj.

§ 152. The atonic e [d] of the radical syllable
changes :

1. Into * in the first person sing. pres. ind. and
the derived forms (pres. subj. — N.B. — before a and o):
despir to undress : dispo, dispa, etc. (cf. § 156).

2. Into open e [ej in the 2^"^ and 3'^'^ pers. sing, and
3'^'' pers. plur. pres. ind. and sing, of the imperative
(N.B.— before e): despes, despe, despem.

Remark. — The verbs aggredir to assault, denegrir to
blacken, to slander, prevenir to anticipate, to prevent, pro-
gredir to proceed, to thrive, remir to redeem, transgredir to
transgress, change the e of the penultimate into i when ac-
cented: aggrido, aggrides, aggride, aggridem, aggrida(s), etc.

§ 153. Close e [eJ, whether oral or nasal, be-
comes i in the same forms where 9 becomes i (s. § 152,1),
remaining e [e] in all others: sentir to feel, smell : sinto,
sinia(s), sintam (s. § 156); sente(s), etc.

§ 154. Atonic o [u] becomes:

1. 17 in the same forms where atonic e [d] be-
comes i (s. § 152,1): dormir to sleep : c^wriKO, durma,
durmas, durmam (s. § 156).

2. Open faj in those persons where atonic e be-
comes fej (s. § 152, 2) : dormes, dorme, dormem.

BemarJc.—ln the verbs sortir to supply, cortir to tan,
ordir to warp, to plot, o changes into u wherever accented:
curto, Gurtes, curte, curiem, curta(s), curiam, surte, urdo, etc.
The same change occurs in cortir even in unaccented forms,
which might be confounded with those of cortar: curtdmos,
curtaes, etc. N.B.— Instead of ordir you may write urdir,
which is more modern.

§ 155. Atonic u (and o) of the infinitive becomes
open [oj in the 2°'^ and 3^^ pers. sing, and the 3^^ pers.
plur. pres. ind. and in the following verbs:
Acudir to succour descobrir to discover

bulir to stir cuspir to spit

consumir to consume destruir to destroy

cvbrir (better: cobrir) to cover engulir to swallow i

150 Lesson 22.

fugir to flee, fly, escape siihir to mount, ascend

refugir to retrocede SMwiir to sink; — se to vanish

sacudir to shake (off), to toss tussir (or tossir) to cough.
Thus: acodes, acode, acodem.

Pres. ind. of consumir: consumo, consomes, consome, consumi-
mos, consumis, consomem.
» j> » destruir: destruo, destroes, destroe, destruimos,
destruis, destroem.

Bemark.— la construir and reconstruir the u is generally
conserved: construo, construes {or constroes), construe (or con-
stroe), construimos, construis, construem (constroem).

§ 156. The vowel of the radical syllable beiDg
close e [e] or atonic e [d] or o /tt/ (see §§ 152 — 154),
it undergoes the same modification in the 1^' and 2°^
pars. plur. pres. subj. as in the sing, and in the 3"^^ pers.
plur. of this form: ferir to wound ifiramos, firaes.

Pres. conj. of vestir to dress: vista(s), vistdmos, vistaes, vistam.
•■> » » mentir to lie: minta(s), mintdmos, mintaes,

mintam.
» » » dormir to sleep: durma(s), durmdmos, durmaes,

durmam.

§ 157. Those verbs, where the infinitive-ending
-ir is preceded by g, gu (or qu), are subject to the
rules of §§ 149 and 150. Ex. : corrigir : corrijo, corrija;
seguir to follow : sigo, siga, franquir (antiquated) to
cultivate : franco, franca.

Remark.— In argu'ir, to argue, the u is audible:
argm, argues, argiie, argiilmos, argiils, argiiem.

The same in delinqu'ir, to offend against a law:
delinqiio, delinques, delinqile, delinquimos, etc.

§ 158. In the verbs ending in -ahir, the h is not
a part of the radical, but serves merely to separate a
and i. So as not to leave any doubt, for instance, in the
1^' and 2°"^ pers. plur. pres. ind. the « has the tonical accent,
and not the a: sahimos, sahis. Modern orthography
drops the 1i, putting an accent instead, thus : sdio, saes,
sae, saimos, sais, sdem; saia(s), saiamos, etc.; sdia(s),
saidmos, etc.

§ 159. Verbs in -um~ drop the e of the 3^'^ pers.
sing, pres, ind., thus condus instead of condu.se. (N,B.
— The imperative is: condrise.)

Phon. and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Kegular Verbs. 151

Palavras.

algoduo the cotton

[aUgu'&vu]
algodoeiro the cotton-tree

[aiguffu 'vim]

o OUI-IQO

[o 'risu]

the prickly
shell, hedge-
hog

a felpa

ffsipv]
a pennugem

[pa 'migSiJ
cotao

[ku'teu]
macio [me 'sin] smooth
droda [mffej de round
casulo

[ke'ziiiu]
cardar

[Tfer'ffa.r]
apropriar

[vprupri ' nr]
tecido

[t3 'siffu]
a pelle [peh]
calgado

[Teat 'saffu]
raspar

[rrvfpar]
tanque [tvTcd]
a camada

[he 'madv]
taniiio

[tv 'ninu]
repassar |

[rrapv 'sslt] I
amollecer I

[vmuh'ser] J
a eosiureira

[huftu r^irv]
restido

[vif'tiffu]
a o-oupa branea the linen

I'rropv 'hrvlce]
fato f'fatu] the clothes
cortar [kur 'tar] to cut
a tesoura the scissors

[td'zorii]
a fita mitrica the metric

['■fit's 'mstrikv] measure
o molde the pattern

['mold's]

the down

the capsule

to card

to appropriate,

make fit to
the tissue

the skin
shoes and boots

to Ecrape

the tank
the layer

the tan

to soak

the seamstress
the dress, cloth

alinhavar

[vUps'var]
a costura

[kuf'turv]
alfaiate

[aifn'atd]
vestudrio

[viftu'artu]
fi.0, linho
a agulha

[n'guMa]
traje ['tragi]
curioso

[kwi'ozu]
padecer j

[pvf9 'sdr] I

[su'frer] J
exercer

[izsr'ser]
a raiz [n-n'if]
abranger

[vbri 'ser]
infelizmente

[ifalig 'menta]
minhoto

[mi 'yotu]
ribatejdno

[rribvti 'gvnuj

alemtejdno
[vlvw 'gvnuj

mirandes

[mirvn' def]
passar para
abster [vhf'ter]
aflexdi)

[fleJc 'seu]
acertar [vsartarj
oral [o'rat]
dtono [' atunu] \
surdo ['surffu] f
a transforma-

Qdo [tref-

furtna'svu]
a modificagdo

[moffafica-

'svu]
no entanto

[nuin'tvntuj

to baste, to

stitch
the sewing

the tailor

the clothing

the thread
the needle

the costume
curious

to suffer

to practise

the radical
to embrace

unhappily

the inhabitant

of the Minlio
the inhabitant

of the Riba-

tejo
the inhabitant

of the Alem-

tejo
the inhabitant

of Miranda
to pass to
to abstain
the inflexion

to hit
oral

atonic

the transforma-
tion

the modifica-
tion

the change

meanwhile, yet

152 Lesson 22.

phonilico plionetical I hasear [hvzfar] to rest uiDon

[fti'tutiku] I a pronuneia the pronunoia-

patentear manifest t [pru'na^U;] tion.
[puUnti' ctr]

54. Leitura.

(a) algodao.

algodao e produzido per uma arvore chamada algodoeiro.
algodoeiro produz uma especie de ouri9os. Estes ouri(jos
abrem quando estao maduros e mostram no meio umas se-
mentes escuras. k roda d'essas sementes escuras vS-se uma
felpe ou pennugem macia, como cotao. Essa felpa e o algodSo.
Depois de tirada do ouri^o ou casulo, a felpa & cardada o em
seguida reduzida a fio em machinas apropriadas; e com esse
fio fazem-se os tecidos ou pannos de algodao.

(b) As pelles.

As pelles servem principalmente para fazer calfado. Os
bois, as vacoas e as vil alias sac os animaes que nos fornecem
mais pelles para cal9ado. A pelle depois de tirada do animal
e mettida em agua para que amolleQa e em seguida e raspada
para que Ihe saia todo o pello e restos de carne. Depois de
bem raspadas, as pelles se curtem, sendo mergulhadas em tan-
ques e separadas umas das outras por camadas de casca de
carvalho pulverisada. A casca de carvalbo cont^m muito tanino,
6 este repassa as pelles e faz com que nao apodre9am. azedo
ou acre da casca de carvalho prov^m do tanino.

(Trindade Coelho: primeiro Livro de Leitura.)

55. Exercise.

Transpose No. 52 into the corresponding forms of in-
direct language, wherein it must be remembered to employ the
indicative.

Ex.: Affirmaram-me que o algodao era produzido . .,
gtie algodoeiro produzia . . .

56. Thema.

(a) The Seamstress.
The seamstress makes clothes and linen for women. She
makes also children's clothes and men's linen. The seamstress
first cuts what she intends to sew, making use of the chalk
the scissors, the metric measure, and the ruler, and she might,
if she wanted to, employ also patterns. Thereupon she bastes
and then she sews, making use of a needle and thread. With
a hot iron she opens and irons (tr. : correr) the seams.

Phon. and Oith. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 153

(b) The Tailor.
The tailor occupies himself in making clothing for men.
The costumes of the Portuguese people are very carious
and in various regions of Portugal even very fine (sup. abs.).
People should always wear these clothes, which do not resemble
those of other nations. Unhappily, fashion allows (fas) national
clothing to fall into oblivion (calr em esguecimento). But
the inhabitants of the Minho, the Ribatejo, the Alemtejo and
of Miranda still dress after (u) their own fashion.

Couversaqao.

Previno os senhores que ainda
devemos exercitar os verbos
que appreuderam na ultima
liQao. Qual a mudan^a que
soffrem os verbos da terceira
conjuga^ao, cuja raiz temum
e surdo?

Dizendo a flexao do presents,
abrangeu outra mudanpa dos
mesmos verbos. Qual 6?

senhor nao conhece verbos
da mesma categoria que nao
transformem o e surdo em
e aberto?

Como e que se distinguem dos
outros verbos?

Ja nao duvido que os senhores
conhe9am tambem os verbos
que, parecendo-se com os ja
tratados, teem no entanto um
e feehado na penultima syl-
laba do infinito.

Bem, jabasta! Naomintamais!

Exige a justiga que, pedindo
^ desculpa, se rectifique o que

en dizia: nao mentiu, dizendo

6 surdo passa para i na pri-
meira pessoa do singular do
presente indicative e nas tres
do singular e terceira do plu-
ral do presente conjunctivo;
por exemplo: visto, vestes,
veste, vesitmos, vestiSfVestem.

e surdo passa para e aberto
n a segunda pessoa do singular
e nas terceiras pessoas do
singular e plural do presente
indicative, assim como no
singular do imperative.

Conhe90, sim, senhor. Sao entre
outros OS verbos aggredir,
denegrir, prevenir,progredir,
remir, transgredir.

EUesmudamo e surdo da penul-
tima syllaba do presente do
infinitive para i todas as vezes
que e accentuada, p. ex. pre-
vino,prevines,previne,preve-
ntmos, prevenis, previnem.

Nesses verbos, o e feehado, seja
elle oral ou nasal, passa para i
nas mesmas pessoas em que e
surdo passa para i, conservan-
do-se nas outras pessoas : min-
to, mentes, mente,mentlmos,
mentis, mentem ; minta,
mintas etc.

verbo fugir, perteneendo
aquelles que no infinitive
teem w oral, muda essa vogal
em aberto na 2^ pessoa e

154 Lesson 23.

a flexao de mentir. Ate que na 3" do singular e na 3"

acertou; muito bem! Agora do plural do presente indi-

desejo que conjugue fugir. cativo e no singular do

imperativo : fujo, fdges, fdge,
fugimos, fugis, fdgem; foge.
A l" pessoa sing, do pr. ind. Na pessoa mencionada, assim
d'esteverbo,sendopbonetica- como em todo o presente do

mente regular, patenteia to- conjunctivo(7M/a,/Mias,/M/a,

daviaumamodifica^aoortbo- fujdmos, fujaes, fujam), o g

graphica. Indique o senhor passa para j, porque precisa

em que consiste e a regra conservaramesmaproniincia

em que se baseia. antes de a.

Twenty-third Lesson. Li^ao vigesima
terceira.

Exercises on the Full Verbs, especially of
the Preceding Lesson.

N.B. — Here Lessons 3 — 7, especially the subjunc-
tive moods and their emijloyment, are to be repeated.

The verbs printed in italics are to be conjugated
by word of mouth in those tenses which have some
peculiarity.

67.
As batatas.*

As batatas nascem de uma planta chamada batateira.^
A rama^ da batateira 6 verde. A batateira da flores cor de
violeta, oa brancas. Estas flores transformam-se em fructo
com a forma de pequeninas bolas" cor de violdta. Estas pe-
queninas bolas sao venenosas. Arrancada'' uma batateira, o
pe traz agarradas^ [a elle] vd.rias batatas, umas grandes, ou-
tras mais pequenas. Cada batata apresenta por fdra varies
botoes^, gomos* ou borbulhas', os quaes teem o nome de
«olhos». JEnterrando uma batata, nasce com o tempo uma
batateira. Partindo uma batata de modo a' separar inteiros
OS varies olhos que ella apresenta, e enterrando em separado^
cada um d'esses olbos, de cada um nasce uma batateira, que
com o tempo dard batatas.

* These excerpts 55 — 60 are taken from Primeiro Livro
de Leitura by Trindade Coelho. The student is advised to care-
fully read and translate these excerpts, as well as No. 61, and
to retranslate them into Portuguese.

Exercises on the Full Verbs. 155

As batatas sao um maguifico alimento nao so para as
pessoas mas para os animaes. Depois de apanhadas^, as
batatas devem ser conservadas em sitios seccos e frescos. A
humidade^" fag apodrecer as batatas. calor fag com que
germmem.^^ A batata, depois de germinar^^, adquire um g6sto
pessimo, e nao se p6de comer,

^ Potato-plant. '' foliage. ' ball. * arranear = to pull
out, to root up. ^ agarrar = to cling (of. § 54). ^ bud. ' so
as to. ^ separately. ' apanhar = to pick up, to gather. " damp-
ness, moisture. *^ to germinate.

58.
As frutas.

As fructas nascem das arvores fructiferas, ou arvores de
fructo. Todas as arvores produzem fructo ; mas as chamadas
arvores fructiferas sao propriamente as que produzem fructos
que podemos comer. As arvores de fructo cobrem-se de flores
na primavera. Das flores nascem os fructos, e estes sao co-
Ihidos depois de maduros.^

pecegueiro^ dd p6cegos^, a pereira* dd peras, a ma-
cieira^ da ma9as, a larangeira" da laranjas, a ameixoeira' da
ameixas, a amendoeira^ dd amfindoas, a cerejeira^ ou cerdeira"
da cerejas, a gingeira^" da ginjas^^, o castanheiro da castan-
has, marmeleiro^^ da marmelos, o limoeira da limoes, o
damasqueiro^^ da damascos, a nogueira da nozes, a roman-
zeira'* da romas, a figueira S.A. figos, a tangerineira da tange-
rinas-"^", etc.

As arvores de fructo sao podadas^^ no inverno. po-
dador"^' serve-se prineipalmente da navalha^', do podao^' e
da tesoara^", com os quaes corta os ramos iniiteis. As fru-
ctas comem-se mais por goso^^ do que para sustento; mas
todas as fructas conteem elementos preciosos para a saiide.
As fractas comem-se geralmente emquanto frescas, e so devem
comer-se bem maduras. As fructas tambem se podem con-
servar, quer^^ seceando-as, como se faz por exemplo a ameixa,
ao figo e a pera; quer f agendo com ellas os chamados doces
de calda^", ou de compdta^^; e ainda outros variedades de
doces. Com as fruetas frescas, fazem-se tambem as chamadas
fructas de conserva.^^

' Ripe. ^ peach-tree. ^ peaches. ^ pear-tree. ^ apple-
tree. ^ orange-tree. ' peach-tree. ^ almond-tree. ' cherrytree.
^^ mahaleb. '' mahaleb-cherriee. '^ quince-tree. ^' apricottree.
'■' pomegranate-tree. ^^ oranges of Tanger. ^° podar = to prune,
lop, clip. " clipper. " knife. " pruning-saw. ^^ pruning-shears.
"^ pleasure. ^^ guer . . . guer = either . .or.
"''' stewed fruit. ^° preserved.

156

Lesson 23.

CoiiTersa^ao.'

Porque plantamos um grao
de ma9a (um ear69o de
p6cego, de ameixa) etc.?

Que esperamos (desejamos),
plantando uma arvore fru-
ctifera?

Que e preciso para uma ar-
vore fructifera dar fructa no
verao ou outono ?

Come e que se consomem as
fructas ?

Porque sac podadas as ar-

vores ?
Quaes os instrumentos de que

podador se deve servir?

Para que fim cultivamos a ba-
tata?

Como i precise conserval-a?

Que seria se as batatas esti-
vessem num sitio quente?

Porque se deve evitar que
germinein ?

Para que nas^a uma macieira
(um pecegueiro, uma amei.xo-
eira) etc.

Esperamos (desejamos) que
cres^a e que produza fru-
ctas.

E preciso que na primavera se
cubra de flores.

Consomem-se (or: sac conso-
midas) frescas, seccas, co-
zidas, feitas em doces de
calda, de comp6ta etc.

Podam-se as arvores para as
livrar dos ramos inuteis.

E preciso que se sirva (e pre-
ciso servir-se) da navalha,
do podao e da tesoura.

Para que nos forne^a alimento,
a nos e aos nossos animaes
dom^sticos.

E preciso que seja conservada
em sitio secco e fresco para
que a humidade nao a apo-
dre(}a.

calor as faria germinar (or :
faria com que germinassem).

Para que com a germina^ao
nao adquiram (on ganhem)
um gOsto p^ssimo que nao se
Ihes deixe comer.

59.

A lavra.^

A lavra faz-se com o arado^ ou com a charrua.''
arado e a charrua sao puxados' por bois, e tambem o podem
ser por cavallos ou muares.* arado e a charrue rasgam^
a terra com a relha^, abrindo no chao sulcos' ou rfigos.' A
terra antes de lavrada* esta mais ou menos dura; depois de
lavrada fica fofa.* So depoia de f6fa, a terra est4 propria
para receher a semente.^" lavrador^' que deitasse a se-
mente na terra antes de a lavrar, perdia o tempo e a semente,

May be extended and varied by the teacher.

Exercises on the Full "Verbs.

157

pois esta comiam-na os passaros, e a que nao comessem os
passaros nao nascia. A semente preeisa de terra humida e
f6fa para nascer e de se esconder'-^ debaixo da terra.

^ Tillage. ^ plough. ^ to pull, to draw. * mule. " tear.
^ coulter. ' furrow. * till. ' loose. ^" seed. '^ husbandman.
12 to hide.

60.

A sementeira.^

Depois de lavrada a terra, o lavrador deita-lhe a se-
mente. A semente vae^ n'um sacco, e este debaixo do bra^o
esquerdo do lavrador, e dependurado^ do hombro. lavra-
dor espalha^ a semente, jogando^-a, com a mao direita, para
a frente e para os lados, Ao mesmo tempo que semeia^, o
lavrador vae andando. A sementeira faz-se tambem com in-
strumentos apropriados, chamados semeadores mechanicos.'

.^w^wvu ^^M vj^M «^^vvj wuH.LUCbUUEl OCLUCaUUXCO lLLCUIJCl)lilUUi3.

' Sowing. 2 present of ir (s. § 214). " hanging. * to spread. "'
throw. ^ to sow. ' sowing-machine.

to

Porque se poem

ebarrua ?
Para qu6 se emprega a cbar

rua ou o arado?

Conversa^ao.

(See note p. 156.)

OS bois & Para que a puxem {or: para

que seja puxada por elles).

Para que rasgue a terra com

a relha e abra sulcos ou

Porque e preciso rasgar-se a

terra?
Que havia-de dizer V. se dese-

jasse ensinar a alguem a

semear?

rSgos.
Para que fique fofa.

Pegue com o sacco da semente
debaixo do bra90 esquerdo,
de maneira que fique de-
pendurado do hombro e jo-
gue a semente, espalhando
■a com a direita para a
frente e para os lados.

61.

A graded
Semeada a terra, o lavrador passa a grade por cima
d'ella. A grade dlisa a terra; e alisando-a, faz com que de-
baixo d'ella se esconda a semente. Encontrando-se coherta^,
a semente nao tarda a germmar. Pouco tempo depois, toda
a terra cqmega a verdejar^, cobrindo-se de uma especie de
relva.^ E a seara" que come9a a nascer. Cada grao que
germinou produsiu uma pequenina haste; as hastes vao' cres-

158 Lesson 23.

cendo pouco a pouco; vao com o tempo creando espiga'; e
na espiga vao medrando^ os graos.

' Harrow. ^ to smooth. ^ P. part, of cobrir. * to become
green. ^ turf. <^ (standing) corn. ' Pres. of ir (s. § 214); ■yao crescwdo
periphrastically for crescent. ^ ear (of corn). ' to grow, to thrive.

62.

A monda.^
Na primavera, a seara esta ja muito desenvolvida, e at6
ondula^ em dias de vento, produzindo a vista um agradavel
aspecto.* Mas misturados com as hastes da seara, apparecem
entao, frequentemente, hervas damninhas.* Essas herves 6
preciso arrancal-as, pois roubam^ a terra o sustento que 6 s6
para a seara, e portanto* nao deixam medrar esta. tra-
balho ou opersQao de arranoar essas hervas damninhas chama-
se monda.

' Weeding. ° undulate. " sight. * weeds. " to rob. " therefore.

63.

Conselhos d'unia mae (A) e d'um amigo idoso (B) para
um mogo (G) em vesper as^ de ir para f6ra.^

A. Meu filho, quando te fores embora (see § 34 foot-note
and p. 37), nao te esquegas de te^ despedir dos tens
professores, para que te nao tenham em conta* de
maleriado!^ Seria uma desapproba9a.o que me to-
casse a mim, porque fui eu quern te criei.

C. Nao receie minha Mae, que eu nao me comporte bem.
Biligenceio (§ 139) sempre fazer honra a educa9ao
recebida.

B. E um cuidado que sempre se premeia, pois a um
joven bem comportado acolhe'^-se com prazer em
toda a parte.

A. B faze para nao chegares tarde d esta^aol Sabes a
que horas abre a bilheteira ? '

C. AcJio que abre as tres menos dez, e consta-me^ que
fecha cinco minutos antes da partida do comboio.

B. Se assim o deseja (or: desejar), tomo-lhe (or: tomar-
Ihe-ei) o bilhete e chamo tambem um portador* que
Ihe lew a bagagem.^"

C. Muito obrigado a V^-Ex*-, mas nao sera melhor que
tome um trem de pra^a?^^

A. Ainda que tomes trem, nao escusas d'um portador
que te acompanhe ao caes (or: a plata-forma), e ate
a porfcinhola^^ do comportamento. ^* E eacuta^^: nao
te assomes muito a janella, para nao te constipares^*

Exercises on the Full Verbs.

159

(para que te nao constipes). E nao consintas" que
se abra a janella do lado do vento!

B. meu joven amigo pode dormir em caminho de
ferro ?

C. Eu raras vezes durmo; receio que alguma paysagem
passe, sem que eu a perceba.

B. Tem razao. Seria pena que Ihe escapasse coisa al-
guma. Mas entao sera precise que se erga de Tez em
quando, para nSo ficar {or: para que nao fique) com
somno.

A. Sim, e nao comas muito, porque isso faz adormecer.

C. Tambem sinto pouca vontade de comer emquanto
viajo.

A. Tu ainda tens (por ahi) algumas pequenas dividas

que yagar?
C. S'ao tenho, minha Mae. Paguei tado quanto d&oi.

A. Melhor. Prefiro que nao haja nada que te pese
(§ 138 c) na alma. Lamental-o-ia, se nao me dissesses
a verdade.

C Perdoe-me, minha Mae! Nunca Ihe menti, nem Ihe
minto agora. Nao Ihe pese (§ 138c) isso!

B. Como veste em viagem?

C. Visto fato'^ de flanella e levo casacao.''

A. E olha, ainda que parega superfluo lembrdl-o: nao
cuspas no chao, nem tussas quando puderes^" evital-o,
para nao incommodares^^ os outros viajantes.

B. Agrade90 todos os seus eonselhos, minha Mae, ate
OS superfluos.

^ On the point (= at the eve) of. ^ to go abroad. ^ to
take leave. ■* to take for. ^ ill-bred. ^ to receive. ' book-
ing-office. ' I aia told. ' porter. '" luggage. '^ cab, hansom.
'^ platform. '^ door. '^ compartment. '* to hark, listen atten-
tively. '* to catch cold. " to consent. '^ clothes. '' great-
coat. ^^ fut. subj. of poder (s. § 198). ^' to molest.

Palavras.

vaqueiro the cowherd

pisar [pi'zar]

to tread

[ve'hvyru]

enxotar

to drive away

apascentar ^ to pasture

[if u' tar]

[epvfsen'tarj

corar [ko'rarj

to blush

a vacca ['vaksj the cow

irracional

irrational

contiguo contiguous

[irrys}u'naij

[kon 'tigwuj

appetite

the appetite,

attrahir to attract

covetcusness

[vtre 'irj

a vergonha

the shame

desejo the desire

[vdrgoyv]

trepar [tra'parj to climb

indifferente

indifferent

160 Lesson 23.

suprar to blow

[su prar]
aspero ['af2>dru] rough ; harsli,
sharp

a constipagdo the cold

[koftipv'sviij

corrente d'ar the draught

estorvar to disturb.

64. Leitnra.
vagiieiro.

Urn rapaz anda apascentando uma vacca n'um prado con-
tiguo a nm jardim. N'essa oeeasiao v6 n'uma arvore umas
cerejas maduras, que o attraem, e o movem a desejos de as
apanhar. Abandona no mesmo instants o animal, e trepa a
arvore. A vacca porem, quando nao v§ o pastor, entra no
jardim, come a melhor herva, e pisa mnita outra com os p6s.

rapaz desce furioso da arvore, enxota o animal, e bate-lhe
barbaramente. Aproxima-se logo o pae e diz-lhe: «Qu.em
merece urn tal castigo, tn on o animal irracional? Obedeces
ao appetite menos do que elle?» E o rapaz cora de vergonha
diante do pae.

65. Thema.

I am glad that yon are determined to accompany us.
If to-morrow the weather be good, we shall ascend the
mountain which offers so beautifal a view. The weather
does not appear to become good, the wind blowing from east.

1 am afraid that we shall have rough weather for some days
more. If it was not for our journey, it would be indifferent
(not matter), but as it is, it disturbs rather (it is rather
annoying). Are you not afraid of catching a cold? I gave
you this great-coat that it might protect you from the
draught. Now it is time for us to go home (= it is time
that we go home), that we may sleep a couple of hours
before departing (infinitive).

ConversaQao.

Transforme o exercicio n°- 62 :

1. empregando o preterito;

2. sendo o proprio rapaz que conta este caso;

3. sendo o pae que conta o caso ao rapaz ;

4. sendo dois rapazes em vez de um, e muitas vaccas
em vez de uma;

5. sendo os dois rapazes que contam o caso:

6. sendo o pae que conta o caso aos filhos.

On the Pronouns. 161

Twenty-fourth Lesson. Licjao vigesima
quarta.

On the Pronouns. Pronomes.

§ 160. There are six kinds of pronouns — viz.:
1. the Personal; 2. the Demonstrative; 3. the Possessive;
4. the Interrogative; 5. the Relative; 6. the Indefinite
Pronoun.

I. The Personal Pronouns. Pronomes pessoaes.

§ 161. The personal pronouns are the only words
of Portuguese language which, like the Latin and Ger-
man, modify their original form (subject or nominative),
to express the different complements (genitive, dative or
accusative), as here represented:

Norn.

Bat.
Ace.

Singular. Plural.

Eu n6s

de mim de nds

me; a mim nos; a nds

me nos

Nom.

Tu

v6s

Gen.

de ti

de vos

Bat.

te; a ti

vos; a vos

Ace.

te

vos

Nom. Elle, ella elles, ellas

Gen. d'elle, d^ella; de si d' elles, d' ellas; de si

Bat. Ihe ; a elle, a ella ; a si Vies ; a elles, a ellas ; a si

Ace. 0, a; se os, as; se.

§ 162. (a) The forms nos, vos, elle(s), ella(s) are sub-
ject only when employed without a preposition, and may,
as well as the atonic forms of the complements, be
called conjunctive (conjunctos), as they are always joined
to the verb; while the others (mim,, ti, si), being sepa-
rated from their verbs by a preposition, may be considered
absolute (absolutes).

(b) The absolute pronoun is often employed with
the conjunctive when a stress is laid on it — e.g.: dd-
IKo a elle, give it to Mm, instead of dd-lh'o, give it
him. Yet the conjunctive forms of the subject may be
also employed quite alone, in which case the}^ are also
absolute. Ex.: Eu? Tu nao, elle ou ella.

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 11

162 Lesson 24.

§ 163. (a) Eu and tu are always subject; nos, vos,
elle(s), ella(s) are, as already said, subject when em-
ployed without a preposition.

When governed by a preposition, they are com-
plements of the genitive, dative, or accusative— e.g.:
lembra-se de nos; dei a elles; recebemos para ella.

(b) Mim, ti, si are always complements and go-
verned by a preposition ; eUe(s), ella(s), nos, vos are also
complements as soon as they are joined to a prepo-
sition (see a). Deu-me (a mim), he gave me; viu-me (a
mim), he saw me. Tenho-o d'elle, I have it from him.

(c) The first and second persons (sing, and plur.),
as well as the pronoun se of the third person, joined
to the preposition com, are assimilated with it and take
a new form — viz.: com(m)igo, comtigo, comsigo, comnosco,
comvosco, with me (myself), thee (thyself), him(self), her-
(self), them(selves), us (ourselves) you(rself), yourselves.

Elle foi com(m)igo, he went with me.

Venha comnosco, come with us.

Levou-o comsigo, he took it with him.

Isso nao e comsigo, that is no concern of yours.

(d) Me, te, nos, vos, se do not admit of any preposi-
tion. They are forms of the accusative or dative and
correspond to the Portuguese: a mim, a ti, a nos, a vos,
a si to me, to you, to us.

Elle levou-me he took me.

Eu mostrei-te ... I showed you . . .

Nds persuadimo-vos we persuaded you . . .

Vds devolveste-nos . . . you gave us . . . back.

JSu dei-vos o conselho I gave you the counsel.

(e) Lhe, Ihes are forms of the 3"^ person, without
distinction of the gender. They express the dative-
complement and are employed without a preposition:
mostrei-lhe(s), I showed it (to) him, her, them, you.

N.B. — As lhe, Ihes are also employed in addressing
somebody, you may avoid a misunderstanding by em-
ploying a double form:

Mostrei-lhe(s) a elle (a elles) I showed him (them)
» » a ella (a ellas) » » her »

» » a voce (a voces) » » you.

On the Pronouns. 163

The prepositional form may also precede the other
— e.g.: <iNesse meu artigo sobre o Coragao Boente, que
a voce Ihe agradou tantoi> . . . (Tr. Coelho : Cartas).

In that article of mine on the "Sick Heart," which
pleased you so well . . .

Or it may even substitute the simple form — e.g.:
<s.Homenagens que de todo a banda me vem chegando . .
a elle as endosso->-> (ibid.).

Homages which from all sides come to me ... I endorse
them to him.

(f) 0, a, OS, as, him, her, it, them, are complements
of the accusative of the 3"^^ person of the transitive verb
(with distinction of gender) and are employed without
a preposition.

Vejo-o (-a, -OS, -as) I see him (her, it, them).

(g) The reflective pronoun se has the forms se, si,
■sigo, and is employed without distinction of the number
and gender: se without a preposition; si with the pre-
positions a, de, em, por (per), para, sobre; sigo with com
(comsigo). Ex. :

Lava-se, he (she) washes himself (herself). (You) wash

yourself (see Eemark II.).
homem nao vive s6 para si.
Man does not live for himself alone.
Pensou comsigo he (she) thought by him-(or her-)self.

Eemark I. — The absolute pronouns may still be streng-
thened by mesmo or prdprio : N6s mesmos we . . . ourselves,
eu prdprio I . . . myself, para si mesmo, comigo mismo, etc.

BemarJc II.— As se is the reflective pronoun of the
3'''i person, and the person spoken to is always in the 3^^ person,
se may be also "you"— e.g.:

Lembrou-se, he or she or you remembered.

BemarJc III.— Also the forms si and sigo are employed,
when addressing a person, but only in familiar style— e.g.,
Lembrei-me de si I thought of you; irei comsigo I shall go
with you.

§ 164. (a) The forms me, te, se, nos, vos, Ihe, Xhes,
0, a, OS, as, are joined by a hyphen (-) to their preced-
ing verb:

Offendeu-me (but: elle n&o meoffendeu): desculpo-te;
affirmou-lhe(s) ; affirmei-o; perdoai-nos; feriu-se.

11*

164 Lesson 24.

(b) The pronouns o, a, os, as are changed into lo,
la, los, las:

1. when preceded by a verbal form ending in r,
s, or 2, which ending is dropped. The vowel (a or e)
preceding these final letters may take an accent (a, e):
chaina-lo, diamdmo-las, trase-la, traeemo-los ; poe-lo tu? do
you put it? ird-lo! bring it or himl

iSemarfc.— This modification may also be expressed thus :
A verbal form ending in r, s or changes into I when
followed by o(s), a(s) : chamdl-o, chamdmol-os, etc. This form
is even more modern.

2. When following the pronouns nos and vos or
the adverb eis, which then also lose their final s: es-
crete-no-lo he writes it to us; ei-lo here it is.

(c) These same pronouns o, a, os, as, take the forms
no, na, nos, nas, when preceded by a nasal sound:
deixam-no, deixavam-na, deixaram-nos, ddo-no; estao-no
faseiido, they are doing it, pde-no he puts it or "put
it!" Ex.:

Jehovah disse a Moyses: Faee-te uma serpente ardente

e pde-na sdbre uma haste.
Jehovah said unto Moses: Make thee a fiery serpent

and set it upon a pole.

(d) The dative-complements me, te, Ihe, being fol-
lowed by the accusative-complements o, a, os, as, drop
their e, substituting it by an apostrophe: disse-m'o;
mostrei-fas, affirmava-lh'o.

(e) Lhes joined to these accusative pronouns forms
Ih'os, Was, which may be "them to him," "them to her,"
or "them to them." Dou-lh'os, I give them to her, to him,
or to them.

§ 165. The position of the conjunctive pronoun-
complement is:

(a) In positive and simple sentences generally behind
the verb ; in negative sentences and those beginning with
an adverb, a preposition, conjunction, etc., before the
verb.

EUe disse-me; eu expUco-ie or eu te explico; elle me
ndo disse or (elle) ndo me disse; se me ndo dissesse.
Eu dou-lhe; eu ndo Ihe dou; para que Ihe nao de.
Nos temol-o; n6s ndo o temos; hontem ndo o tinhamos.

On the Pronouns. 165

Memark I. — In negative clauses, the adverb nao may
precede or follow the pronoun -complement ; it always precedes,
when the subject is not expressed : elle me nao disse; nao me disse.

(b) The conjunctive pronoun-complement must be
put after the verb of a positive sentence whenever the
pronoun subject is omitted, as the former cannot begin
a sentence^: tenho-o, conhego-os, and not: o tenho, as co-
nhego. Yet you may say: elle honrou-me or elle me
hour oil.

(c) In the future and conditional tenses it is put
between verb and ending: responder-te-(h)ei, dar-lV o-(h)ia ,
I shall answer you, I should give it him.

(d) With the infinitive, the pronoun complement
may precede or follow it:

«0 rei ha-de te chamar e dieer-te se me nao queres
vender, mas tu nob me vendas-^. (Anna de C. Osorio.)

(e) It is the same with the compound tenses:
Nos temos-lhe dito; eu o tenho sabido ha nmito; but
only: tenho-o sabido, etc.

§ 166. If there are several complements of different
cases, accusative and dative, in the same sentence, the
dative precedes the accusative : dei-lh'o. If the comple-
ments are only of the accusative, that of the person
or personified thing is put in the dative: Essa sonata
ouvi-lh'a tocar (a ella), I heard her playing this sonata.

§ 167. In order to be emphasised, the conjunctive
pronoun-complement may be repeated by an absolute
(of. § 162 [b]): Elle disse m'o a mim, he said it to me. This
absolute pronoun may also precede: a mim me disse or
a mim disse-me; a elle eu nao (Ihe) disse nada. (N.B. —
In this latter sentence the conj. pronoun-complement
may be omitted, but not the subject eu.)

Remark. — This construction is also employed where in
English a possessive pronoun or a preposition is used— e.g.,
Conhecia-lhe a vos I knew his voice, or I knew him by his
voice. Tomei-lhe a moo I took her (by her) hand.

§ 168. When a personal pronoun is followed by
an appositive noun or number, in Portuguese the ar-
ticle is generally put between :

' In Brazil the construction «o tenho, as conhego, Ihe digo,'
etc., is also employed.

166

Lesson 24.

Nos, OS ingleees gostamas viajar. But also: N6s re-

publicanos somas assim.
Vamos OS dots or even: vamos ambos os dots, ambas

as duas; vamos os tres or todos (os) tres, let iis go

both (or all three).

Palavras.

carvdo

the coal

voltar

to turn round,

[ker'veuj

to return

mineiro

the miner

tirar

to draw out,

[mi 'nvfruj

to take from

advertir

to advertise

a pancada

the blow

fvfyvar'tir]

[pvkafvj

pouco a pouco
a fenda [fendv]

by degrees

mendigo

the beggar

the crack

[mSn digu]

reparar

to repair

arrastar

to drag

[rspvrar]

fvrrvf'tarj

espinheiro

the thornbush,

pantano

the pool

[{fpi'pvfruj

brier

f'pvntnnu]

maldoso

wicked

voltar a si

; to recover

[mal'dozu]

recobrar os

vime [vima]

the osier

sentidos

cubigar

to covet

gemido

the groan

[kuti 's&r]

[s^micfu]

par pd de

near to

afflictivo

afflicting

dormir a sesta

to take a nap

[vfli 'tivuj

['ssftvj

approximar-se

to approach

molho [mofiu]

the bottle

[vprosi-

feno [fenu]

the hay

'marsaj

atar

to tie

ladrao

the robber

esfomeado

famished

[le 'ffnu]

[iffom'i'adu]

enxotar

to drive away

Hermano

Hermano

[iju'tibr]

[ir'mvnuj

bastante

rather

cortador

the butcher

[bef'tvnla]

[kurtv 'for]

maltratar

to treat ill

pedir esmola

to beg, ask

por nome

named

[i^'vuh]

alms

comportar-se

to behave

novamente

anew.

66. Exercicio.

Se a luz do sol nao nos impedisse, veriamos as estrellas
durante o dia; mas assim esta luz impede que n6s as per-
eebamos. carvao se encontra na terra; elle e extraido pelos
mineiros; sao elles (or: estes) que o extrdem. amigo que
te adverte para que [tu] nao commettas uma falta, 6 aquelle
que mais te estima. Estas parades edem pouco a pouco, por
isso que as fendas n'ellas nao se reparam ; 6ra precise repard-
las. Nao quer vir comigo? Hoje nao, mas kmanha vou ter
comsigo para Ihe falar numa eoisa que muito nos interessa a

On the Pronouns. 167

ambos. Entao nao me pode diz6-lo ja agora? Nao posso; so
amanha poderei dizer-lh'o.

67. Leitura.

(a) espinheiro maldoso.

vime disse urn dia ao espinheiro: «Dize-ine ca! Porque
e que cubi9as tu tanto o fate das pessoas que passam por pe
de ti? que queres tu com isso?» espinheiro respondeu:
«Nao quero nada. Nao Ihes quero tirar o fate, mas apenas
rasga-lo.

(b) cao e a vacca.

Um cao dormia a sesta sobre um molho de f6no que
Bstava mal atado. Aproximou-se uma vacca esfomeada.
cao, mal a viu, comeQou a ladrar, e impediu que ella comesse
do feno. A vacca, cbeia de fome e de tristeza, disse: «Se tu
nao pedes comer o f6no, porque nao queres que eu o c6ma?»

68. Thema.
The Faithful Bogs.

A butcher, named Herman, went one day into the
country (ao campo) to buy some cattle. On the way a man
begged an alms from him. Herman turned round, that the
beggar should not perceive the money he had with him,
opened his purse, and took a silver coin from it. In the same
moment the man assaulted him by giving him so heavy a
blow on bis bead that he fell down (no chao). The two
dogs of the butcher threw themselves immediately on the
beggar, flung him to the ground (a terra), and dragged him to
the near pool. Then they returned to their master, licking his
face until he recovered. Hereupon Herman beard a distressing
groan. He approached and found the robber whom the dogs
were about to assault anew. But the butcher drove them away
and drew that man, who found himself rather ill-treated, on
to dry ground.

Conversa^ao.

Onde dormia o cao? (The answers to be formed

Quern se aproximou? after No. 63 b).

Como se conduziu entao o

cao?
Que disse a vacca?
Aonde foi o cortador? Foi um dia ao campo (para)

comprar algumas rezes.
Que Ihe succedeu no caminho? No caminho pediu-lhe esmola

um homem.

168

Lesson 25.

Hermano como se com-
porton?

E depois?

Que 6 que aconteeeu entao?

Que fazem entao os caes do
cortador ?

E em seguida?

Ella voltou-se para que o
mendigo nao percebesse o
dinheiro que trazia comsigo.

Abriu a b6lsa e tirou(-lhe)
uma mceda de prata.

No mesmo instante o bomem
aggrediu-lhe, dando-lheuma
pancada tao forte na cabfifa
que elle caiu no ohao.

Os dois caes saltam logo sobre
o mendigo, deitam-no a terra
e arrastam-no para um pan-
tano proximo.

E seguida voltam para o seu
dono e lambem-lhe a cara
tantas vezes que elle recobra
OS sentidos.

Twenty-fifth Lesson. Li(jao vigesima
quinta.

Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns.
A. The Deraonstratiye Pronouns.

§ 169. We distinguish conjunctive and absolute
demonstrative pronouns, indicating the former, which
accompany a noun, as adjectives (pronomes adjectivos)
and the latter, used instead of a noun, as substantives
(pronomes suhstantivos).

N.B. — The noun indicated by a demonstrative ad-
jective may not be expressed, but only understood,
which does not influence its form.

Mascidino
este,
esse,
aguelle,
outre,
mesmo,
tanto,
tal.

Pronomes adjectivos:

Feminino
esta this
essa \ j-Vi 4.
aquella j ^
outra the other
a mesma the same
tanta so much
tal such a

Pronomes suhstantivos:

isto this

isso \ ,, ,

aquillo i *''^*

outrem somebody else

mesmo the same

tanto so much

0, a, OS, as that or those

(which) ; he, she or they

(who).

Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns. 169

§ 170. The pronomes adjectivos form their plural
alike the nouns; este, estes; tal, taes.

The pronomes substantivos have only a masculine
and singular form, except o, which has a feminine
and a plural form.

§ 171. (a) Este, esta, isto indicates an object near
to the person speaking or one mentioned in the last
place (= latter).

(b) Esse, essa, isso indicates an object near to the
person spoken to, or one mentioned in the first place
[= former); it may also be employed independently,
without any reference to another.

(c) Aquelle, aquella, aquillo indicates an object equally
distant from both persons, the speaker and the one ad-
dressed. Ex.:

Estes (meus) olhos; esses (sens) olhos ; aquelle ceu:
aquella igreja. Que e isso?

N.B. — Instead of aquelle, etc., you may also some-
times employ este, etc. — e.g.: este ceu, esta igreja.

Remark. — Esta, essa in commercial style and employed
absolutely, means : esta praga (or cidade), essa praga.

§ 172. By an alliance of outro with este, esse or
aquelle the compound pronouns est'outro, ess'outro,
aquell'outro, pi.: est'outros, etc., are formed.

§ 173. These pronouns, being preceded by the
prepositions em, de, a, form a crasis with them (Port. :
erase) — i.e., they melt together:

(a) With em: n'este (or neste), u'esta, n'isto, n' aquil-
lo, etc.

(b) With de: d'este (or deste), d'esse, d'isso, d'aquel-
le, etc.

(c) With a: dquelle(s), dquella(s), aquillo. (Only
those demonstratives beginning with a.)

Bemark.—The English <ftjs, that, employed absolutely, is not
always rendered by isso, aquillo, but only when no substan-
tive is to be substituted— e.g. :

What is that? Que e isso? Aquillo que i?

That is a book, isso e um livro.

But: Who is that? Quern k, esse homem, aquella senhora?

That is my father, esse (homem) e men pae.

170 Lesson 25.

Is this your book (= is this book yours) ?

J5 este seu livro?

No, that is not my book, that is my brother's.

Nao, esse ndo e o meu (livro), e o de men irmao.

§ 174. Este, esta, esse, essa, aquelle, aquella are
frequently employed for a noun or personal pronoun
strongly emphasised. Ex.:

Carlos, esse e que tern forgas.
It is Charles who has strength!
A natureza, essa e sempre victoriosa.
It is Nature that is always victorious.
A indulgencia d'elle? Com essa nao contes! Olha o
cavalleiro, aquelle e que sabe montar!

EsMi is frequently employed without any substan-
tive in the idioms: Or a essa! (Why!) Essa e boa! Mais
essa! etc., where ^graga-D or «asneira,» etc., is to be
supplied.

§ 175. The English "he who," "she who," "they
who" are given in Portuguese by o (a, as, as) qne or
aquelle(s), aquella(s) que.

B. The Possessive Pronouns.

§ 176. It is a peculiarity of these pronouns that
they are preceded by the definite article;

Are excepted: 1. Those expressing parentage;

2. Those you address a person with (meu Amiga,
minha Senhora);

3. Those which constitute an essential part of a
title: Vossa Majestade, Sua Altera, Vossa Excellencia,
Sua Reverendissima, etc.;

4. Those predicatively employed (see § 178).

Note. — The general rule and that under 1. are not
always observed.

§ 177. We distinguish conjunctive and absolute
possessive pronouns (adjectives e pronomes possessivos),
yet there is no other difference between them but that
the adjectivos are and the pronomes are not accompanied
by a noun.

Este e meu chapeu; este chapeu e o meu.

This is my hat; this hat is mine.

Demonstrative and Posaessive Pronouns. 171

o meu, fern, a minha Plur. os mens, fern, as minhas mj;

mine
teu, » a tua os tens, » as tuas (thy),

your; (thine), yours
sen, » a sua os sens, fern, as suas his,

her, your; his, hers, yours
nosso, » a nossa os nossos, fern, as nossas our;

ours
vosso, » a vossa os vossos, » as vossasjovx;

yours.

Declension.

N. <& A. meu vesfido my dress. G. do meu vestido.

B. ao meu vestido.
» » » a tua penna your pen. G. da tua penna.
B. d tua penna.

§ 178. If predicatively employed (with ser) or,
when governed by ser or a preposition, it expresses
rather origin than possession, the possessive pronoun is
also not preceded by the article. So employed, it may
precede or follow the noun. Ex.:

E meu it is mine.
(Elle) e meu amigo, e amigo meu.
He is my friend or a friend of mine.
(JS o meu amigo would mean: it is my friend.)
Ome rios sao seus tributdrios (do Tejo).
Eleven rivers are its tributaries (= are tributary to it).
A culpa & minha the fault is mine, it is my fault.
Foi culpa minha, por culpa minha.
It was my fault, for my fault.
i] ideia tua that is your idea.
^ tua esta ideia this idea is yours.
Por tiMi causa for your sake.
Com sua licenga with his (her, your) permission.
PoA'a maior conveniencia nossa for our greater con-
venience.

Bema^hs.

1. Your, yours is rendered by seu, sua, etc., when no
misunderstanding can result— e.g. :

Have you got your paper? Becebeu Y'- o seu jornal?
Where do you buy your pens ?
Onde compra as suas pennas?

172

Lesson 25.

If, however, an ambiguity might take place, sen, sua is
supplied by o (a, os, as) de 7" Ex"'-, etc.; or on the other
side by o (a, os, as) d'elle(s) or d'ella(s) — e.g. :

Have you lost your glove or his?

Perdeu F"- Ex'^- a sua luva on a d'elle ?

His money is safe, but yours is not.

dinheiro d'elle estd seguro, mas nao o estd o de Y'-

2. The possessive pronouns are also sometimes employed
with the indefinite article or pronoun — e.g. :

TJm amigo meu or um meu amigo.

A friend of mine, one of my friends.

Uma carta minha a letter of mine, one of my letters.

Alguns sens amigos some of his friends.

3. Also they are met together with the demonstratives:
Este meu piano this plan of mine.

Essa sua quinta that country-house of yours.
Aquelles seus parentes those parents of his.
These associations are more frequent in Portuguese than
in English.

Palavras.

-1 vibora

the viper

roir [rro'er]

to gnaw

['vibure]

velar [vd'lar]

to watch, to

a cobra fkobrej

the snake,

wake

serpent

naturalista

the natural

reptil

the reptile

[nHurv 'liftv]

philosopher

[rrep 'tiij

besoiro

the beetle,

corpolento

corpulent.

[bd'goyru]

chafer

[hurpu 'lentuj

thick

gafanhoto

the locust,

innffensivo

inoffensive

[gvfv'rtotii]

grasshopper

[inufen 'sivuj

damninlio

pernicious

ao passo que

while

fdv 'nipuj

insididso

insidious

parade

motionless

fmd't'ozu]

fpv 'raffuj

denie canino

the eye-tooth

meditar

to meditate

fkv 'ninuj

[maffi'tar]

uco [okuj

hollow

segredo

the secret

a mordedura

the sting

[s3 'greffu]

[murffe Owe]

nada ['nsbH-e]

nothing

orificio

the orifice.

primeiro

first

for»'fisyuJ

opening

justo

just

rato [rraiti]

the rat, mouse

['guftuj

ratinho

the mouse

caprichoso

capricious

[rrs 'tipu]

[kepri'fozu]

a rd [rrej

the frog

cncdbrir

to cover, hide

mocho fmofuj

the horned-owl,

[ilcu'brir]

wood-owl

descobrir

to discover

roedor

the gnawer,

excellente

excellent

[rriii'dor]

rodent

[vifsd'lentaj

Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns.

173

chapeu de \

chuva [ the umbrella

guarda-dhtiva ]
a gdlocha india-rubber-

[gv'hfv] shoe

averiguar to inquire, to

[evsricju'ar] determine

veneer to overcome

ora . . . ora now . . . now
['orvj either ... or.

69. Leitura.

A vibora e a cobra.
Deante de uma vibora e de uma cobra, qualquer pessoa
que nao conhecesse a differen^a entre estes dois reptis, talvez
temesse mala a cobra do que a vibora. Pois esta raro (instead
of raramente) tern de comprimento mais de dois pes, e aquella
6 muito maior e em geral muito mais corpolenta. A cobra 6
inofiensiva, ao passo que a vibora, essa, com a sua apparencia
fraca, e um dos mais perigosos animaes. veneno d'este in-
sidiOso reptil e muitas vezes mortal. EUe segue por um canal
finissimo at6 a raiz dos dentes caninos; e penetrando n'estes
por serem 6cos, sae, na occasiao da mordedura, por um pe-
quenino orificio. A vibora aiimenta-se de ratos, ras etc.

mdcho.
Tambem o mocho se alimenta de ratos e outros roSdores.
Calculou um naturalista que uma so d'estas aves destroe por
anno quasi 1500 rogdores, afora insectos, como besoiros, ga-
fanhotos e aves damninhas. Como os sabios e os que estudam,
o mOeho vela tambem emquanto os outros dormem. Parade,
a posigao do mocho nao e outra, senao a (mesma) dos que
leem: parece dobrado sobre si mesmo^ como a meditar.

(Trindade Coelho: Segundo Livro de Leitura.)

70. Thema,

My secret cannot be of any use to you, if I have not
first yours. Tour wish is just, and so is mine also. I have
lost my handkerchief, please to lend me yours. Does this
lesson deal with the demonstrative or the possessive pronouns ?
It deals with one and the others. These are more easily to
be learned than those. But there is no great difficulty, neither
in the one kind nor in the other (tr. : in both). At any rate,
the difficulties are such and so many that we need all our atten-
tion to overcome them. Capricious children want now this,
now that; if you offer them a pear or an. apple, they take
this and ask (pedir) for that. One lie covers the other, but
one truth discovers the other. The same causes do not always
produce the same effects. Health and wealth are two magni-
ficent things : but what is the use of the latter without the
former ?

174

Lesson 26.

ConTersa^ao.

No guarda-roupa.
De quein e este chapeu de E meu. Tambem essas galo-

chuva ?
E est'outro guarda-chuva, 6 o

ten?
De quern sera? A quern per-

tence?
Este chapeu^ o de Va-Ex"?

Um atnigo meu usa chapeus
taes, deixe ver, se 6 d'elle.

chas sao minhas.
Nao 4. E um guarda-chuva

de senhora.
A Lucinda procura o d'ella.

Ser4 esse?
Nao, deve ser de outrem. Eu

nao uso tal chapeu (or: eu

nao uso chapeus d'esses or

d'esses chapeus).
Isso i muito difficil averiguar,

pois todos parecem os mes-

mos.

Twenty-sixth Lesson. Li(jao vigesima
sexta.

Interrogative and Relative Pronouns.
C. The Interrogative Pronouns.

Norn, quern?
who?

que (o que)
what?
which ?

qual, quaes?
which (of)?

quanto(s) ? how
much? how many?

Gen. de quern?
of whom?
whose?

de que of
what or
which?

de qual, de
quaes of
which?

dequanto(s) of how
much or many?

Bat. a quern?
to whom?

agttetowhat
or which?

a qual, a
quaes? to
which?

a quanto(s) to how
much or many?

Ace. quern?
whom?

que what?
which?

qual, quaes
which?

quanto(s) how much
or many?

§ 179. Use of the interrogative pronouns:
1. Quern is always employed absolutely as a sub-
stantive; it asks only for persons and may be employed
with the verb in the sing, or in the plur., in direct or
indirect speech— e.g. :

Quern estd ahi? Who is there?

Quern serdo os paes d'estes meninos?

Who may be the parents of these children?

Interrogative and Relatiye Pronouns. 175

Nao sei a quern eu disse . . .

I don't know to whom I said . . .

De quern i esta casa? Whose house is this?

Nao sei dizer de quern e.

I cannot tell to whom it belongs.

A qtiem falou nisso ? To whom did you speak of this ?

2. Que (que) is used interrogatively:

(a) employed substantively and generally, for things
-e.g.:

Que dis? What do you say?

De que procede isso ? W hat does this come from ?

Para que fee isso? What did you do that for?

(b) adjectively and generally employed, for per-
sons and things:

Que tempo esta? What sort of weather is it to-day?
I>e que autor e este livro ? By which author is this book ?
A que fim? To what purpose?

3. que (que) is used as an exclamation, yet also
as a real interrogation:

que?! What? !

que sao as descripg5es dos maiores poetas em com-
paragck) da linguagem viva da natureza ?! que e
a liberdade do homem mais livre? Faeer o seu
dever.

4. Qual, employed as a substantive and as an adjec-
tive, asks for persons as well as for things, but out of
a selection. It is either followed by a genitive in the
plural or this case is to be supplied:

Qual dos dois, das duas ? A qual d'estes senhores per-
tence o cavallo ? Quaes d'esses homens o aggrediram ?
De qual provincia i natural?

N.B. — Here you may say: de que provincia . . .,
which has a more general meaning, while de qual pro-
vincia ... is employed with reference to a small num-
ber of provinces.

Eemark I. — Qual may be preceded by tal; in this case
it has not an interrogative, but a comparative meaning: such
as, the same as — e.g.:

Elle voltou tal qual foi, he came back the same as he
went.

176 Lesson 26.

Both pronouns may accompany a noun and be separated
from another:

Qual pae, tdl filho like father like son.
«roZ mulher me fosse ella, qual marido eu llie sou.i>
Would that she were such a wife to me as I am a
husband to her!

BemarklL — Tal may be only supposed as accompaning
qical :

caracter deste sujeito e qual eu desejo. ^Quaes para
a cova as prdvidas formigas levam as provisdes.^

Qual . . . qual means the one . . . the other: qual mats,
qual menos.

5. Quanta is used interrogatively:

(a) Employed without a noun and in a general
meaning, for things:

Quanta gastou? How much did you spend?

Quanta vae da Natal d Pdschoa?

How much (time) is it between Christmas and Easter ?

Here quanto remains unaltered.

(b) Employed with a noun, after persons and
things, being subject to the rules of the adjective
(feminine and plural): Quanto espago? — quanta gente?
— quantos dias? — quantas noites?

Eemark III.- Quanta is often employed instead of tudo
que, meaning then "all that" or "whatever"— e.g. :

Fiz quanto pude I did all (whatever) I could (cf. the
Relative and Indefinite Pronouns.

Eemarh IV. — The interrogative quanto is not to be con-
founded with the adverbial quanto, which signifies "how,
how much," being employed exclamatorily and taking the
form quaa before adjectives — e.g. :

Quanto e honita esta vista! Quao (or que) lonita e!

Not to be confounded neither with the exclamatory que
which may stand instead of quao or quanto, nor this with
the adverbial que : Que de gente ! How many people ! (What
a crowd !) Que honita vista ! Que vista tao honita ! What a
nice view!

D. The Relative Pronouns.

§ 180. These pronouns are in part the same as
the interrogative, from which, however, they are easily

Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 177

to be distinguished, as they refer only to an antecedent,
while the interrogative pronouns (and adjective) only
refer to something following:

1. Que who, which, that, is equally employed for
persons and things without distinction of gender and
number, as in English — e.g.:

homem (a mulher, aquelle, aquella) que commetteu o

furto.
The man (woman) that (he, she v7ho) committed the theft.

Os ratos (as ras) que escaparam.

The rats (the frogs) which escaped.

mats hello que ha the most beautiful existing.

2. Quern is synonymous with aqiielle(s), aquella(s) que
he, she, they who. It refers only to persons and is
invariable :

Quern tern telhado de vidro, nao atire pedras ao do

Those who live in glass-houses should not throw stones
(lit. : He who has a glass roof must not throw stones
to that of the neighbour).

Thus employed, quern has the value of a relative
pronoun joined to a personal one; it is considered to
be of masculine gender and singular number.

Quern has generally the verb in the singular, but
may have it also in the plural — e.g.:

i-Nao foram elles sds quem vos mataram.-»

As a merely relative pronoun, quem is employed
only joined to a preposition:

0(s) poeta(s) por quem tenho mais admiragao . . .

Preceded by the prepositions de or a, quem corre-
sponds to the genitive and dative (or accusative) of
"who" or "he who."

De quem eu me queixo . . . He whom I complain of . . .

A quem eu disse isso . . He to whom I said that . . .

A quem eu quero mais ... He whom I like best . . .

3. Qual "which," has only one form for the two
sexes, but it forms the plural quaes. It is mostly pre-
ceded by the definite article, which is dropped, however,
when qual is preceded by tal (see § 179, Remark I and II).

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 12

178 Lesson 26.

JEncontrei um homem o qual me reconheceu.

Um povo nao tern ideias, para as quaes nao tenha pa-

lavras.
i-Beclaro que desejo occupar-me immediatamente da

questao Hinton, para resolver a qual deve marcar-se

successivamente sessao todos os dias lUeis^ (Affonso

da Costa).

Generally the pronoun que is preferred to qual. Yet
you must employ qual and not que:

(a) Whenever the relative depends on certain pre-
positions (durante, para, sohre, soh, em cima de, etc.):

inverno durante o qual estive em Lisloa . . .

(b) When by que a misunderstanding might be
caused. For instance, in the clause : A mae do pequeno
que encontrei, it is not clearly understood whom I met
with. So I must say: A mae do pequeno a qual en-
contrei, if I met the mother, and A mae do pequeno o
qual encontrei, if I met the boy.

(c) Whenever the relative clause is not a necessary
or ornamental complement of the antecedent, but con-
tains a new idea, a motive, etc. :

«0 sapo devora as lesmas, as quaes faeem muitos estragos

nas hortas.'^
The toad devours the slugs which cause a good deal of

damage in the kitchen-gardens.

4. Cujo "whose, of which" has different forms for
genders and numbers, in which it agrees with the
following noun.

aborredmento e uma doenga cujo remedio e o trabalho.
Tediousness is an illness the remedy of which is labour.
A parede, cujas fendas nao se reparam, cae pouco a

pouco.
The wall, whose clefts are not repaired, is falling to
ruin by degrees.

5. Quanta has the meaning of tudo o que "all or
everything that, whatever," having also different forms
for gender and number.

Fie quanto pude.

1 did everything (all, whatever) I could.

Soffreu quantos males ha no mundo.

He suffered all the misfortunes in the world.

Interrogative and Kelative Pronouns.

179

6. que is "(that) which," "what," if not inter-
rogative or exclamatory.

que nao tern remedio, remediado estd.
What can't be cured must be endured.
Elle tinha sahido o que eu nao sabia.

He had gone away, which I did not know.

7. In English you may separate the preposition
from the relative pronoun, putting it at the end of the
clause; also the relative pronoun may be omitted. In
Portuguese the preposition always precedes the pronoun,
which cannot be omitted.

Tudo em que faldmos all (that) we spoke of.
A carta com que V'^- Ex<^- me honrou.
The letter (that) you honoured me with.

Remark. — Relative clauses must not be confounded with
indirect interrogations. For instance:

Ghegaram emfim das coldnias os generos os quaes pedira

ha muito.
There arrived at last from the colonies the goods I had

long since asked for. (Eelative clause.)
Nao sei dieer quaes (sao) os gineros que chegaram.

1 can't say which goods arrived. (Indirect interro-
gation. The direct interrogation would be: Quaes
sao OS gSneros que ... or elliptically : quaes os generos
que ... or quaes (or que) generos chegaram?

PalaTras.

mvndo

the world

a regua nume-

the measure,

['mundu]

rada

rule

a praga ['prsigvj

the plague

tragar

to draw

sir de

to belong to

pretender

to pretend

sandeu

fool, foolish

[pretender]

[sen'deuj,

oleado

the oilcloth

fem. sandia

[olf'a&uj

[sSn'divJ

a pasta [' paftv]

the portfolio

epieo I'spiku]

epic

sei [ss}J

I know

porfiar

to persist, per-

vi

I saw or have

[purfi'arj

severe

seen

feito f'f'B}tuJ

the heroic

modo ['moOuJ

the manner.

deed, exploit

mode

a porgao

the portion

terno f'tsrnu]

tender, affectio-

[pur'siu]

nate

de ordindrio

ordinarily

tenro ['terruj

tender

OS Lusiadas

the Lusiad

s&r eapaz

to be able

fuglu'ziyffvj]

[Ice-pa,;]

numerar

to mark with

apprehender

to apprehend,

cyphers

[vprien'derj

seize

12*

LesBon 26.

sorrow

quotidiano

daily

I can

['k(w)otiffi-

to fix, to stare

■anw]

at

requintado

refined

the sigh

[mMn't&ffu]

the fluid

a bussola

the compass

the splendour

['busulvj

norte [norta]

the line, rule

the ingratitude

guide

accusal-

to accuse

the fixed star

a procedencia
fprus}-
'ffensiiej

the origin

miserable

a petala
['pttvlv]

the petal

verificar

to verify, to

he is willing to

[verofikar].

prove

show-window

justificar
fsuft9fi'karj

to justify

confusedly,

desembocar

to discharge

pell-mell

[desmbti'ka.r]

itself.

71. Ex

jrcicio.

180

pezar [pa'zar]
posso fposu]
fito, part. perf.

of fitar
ai [cti]
ofluidof'flui&uj
o esplendor

[ifplen'dor]
a ingratidao

[igrvty'dvu]
a estrella fixa

[f/'trels'fiksej
miserdvel

fmiza'raviij
misero

fmizgruj
elle guer
a vitrina

[va' trine]
nmturado(s)

[miftu-

'raffufs)]

Quem criou o mundo? Poi Deus quern o criou. Quaes
foram as dez pragas do Egypto? Nao me sabe dizer, quaes
ellas sejam ? Em que logar da terra ha perfeita felicidade? Nao
conhe^o logar algum em que a baja. Quem p6de ser todo seu,
em ser d'outrem 6 sandeu (prov.). Mais faz quem quer do que
quem pode (prov.). Quem porfia mat a ca9a (prov.). Camoes,
cujo poBma ^pico «0s Lusfadas* e um dos maiores monu-
mentos literarios de todos os tempos, cantou n'elle os feitos
dos Portugueses no oriente. TJma bahia 6 uma por9ao de mar
que entra pela terra e cuja entrada e de ordinario estreita.
As rdguas numeradas de que nos servimos, permittem dar ds ,
linhas que se tra9am com ellas, o tamauho exacto que se
pretende dar-lhes. A pasta sobre a qual escrevemos e onde
mettemos papeis, ^ geralmente feita de papelao, coberto de
oleado. Quanto custou a tua ? Nao me lembra (or : nao me
lembro) ja quanto paguei, nem a quem (or: de quem) a com-
prei ; ainda esta tal qual a recebi.

72. Leitura.

N'wm album.

Ve tu por ahi
Se OS achas ; senao,
Descubro-os em ti.

Eu, olhos, sei d'uns
Que, desdequeosvi,
Nao vi mais ne-
nhuns . . .

Que lindosquesao!
Que mododeolhar!
Que terna expres-

sao!

Interrogative and Relative Pronouns.

181

Ja tenho pezar
De OS vSr, porque

emfim . . .
Que posse esperar?

Ver fitos em mini
Taes olhos, jamais ;
Decerto, e assim,

Suspires e ais
Poi que tirei
De v6r olhos taes.

So vendo-os, se crfi
Na gra9a, na c6r
Nofluido, ounao sei

Que doce esplendor !
Tao doce, que eu
Nao posso suppCr

Qne existaoutro e6u!
(Joao de Deus.)

E esta vida um mar; e n'este mar

Qual e o astro que nos alumia?

Que norte, estrella ou biissola nos guia?

Um olhar de mulher! um terno olhar (idem).

73. Thcma.

Which of the boys is the one whom you like best?
What black ingratitude! What sort of wine grows in the
region of the Douro? Stars which have their own light are
called fixed stars. There is nothing so miserable as a man
who is willing to do everything and not able to anything (nada
p6de). That is indeed (bem) the most beautiful existing.
Sometimes there are goods behind the show-windows of the
shops which show the most refined taste, pell-mell with that
which we need for our daily life. What did you think of
when doing this task? What were you occupied with and
what did you speak of? Look at those flowers, how beautiful
they are! What perfume and what tender petals! What is
he accused of? The crime he is accused of is a theft. The
things whose origin he was not able to prove were apprehended
(or seized), which is quite (muito) justified.

Conversaijao.

Quern e Camoes e qual (6) o po6ma que escreveu?

Que 6 essa poSma? or: Que sao os Lusi'adas?

De quem eantou elle os feitos?

Que (6 que) se entende por uma bahia?

Quaes sao os principaes rios de Portugal?

Em qual dos oceanos desembocam?

A quantos estamos do mez or que dia do mez temos?

(Or: Em que dia do mez on da semana estamos?)

Como se chama aqnelle rapaz cuja mae estd doente ?

Nao tern essa senhora quatro filhos, dos quaes o amigo

de V*- Ex"!" e o mais novo?
Que 6 que tornou tao triste aquella rapariga que de

ordindrio esti tao alegre?

182 Lesson 27.

Twenty-seventli Lesson, hiqm vigesima
setima.

Indefinite Pronouns. Pronomes indefinidos.
§ 181. The indefinite pronouns are either joined
to a noun (pronomes adjectivos), or they are of substantive
nature, being employed absolutely and only in the
singular number (pronomes substantivos). N.B.— The
noun may be not expressed.

I. Adjective Pronouns.

um, uma; uns, umas a(ii), one; some

dlguTHf alguma; alguns, algumas some, any; such

nenhum, nenhuma; nenhuns, nenhumas no, none

outro, -a, -OS, -as another, some more

tal, taes such a (one), such

certo, -a, -os, -as (a) certain

cada (m. and f.) each

todo, -a, -OS, -as (followed by the definite article) the

whole; all
qualquer, pi. : quaesqtter any, whosoever, whatsoever
um e outro the one and the other, either
amhos, ambas both
wn ou outro one or the other

nem um, nem outro neither one nor the other, neither
muito, -a many a; pi. muitos, muitas many

dwersos \ different, various.
vdrtos j

II. Substantive Pronouns.

Alguem somebody, anybody algo something

ninguem nobody, none alguma coisa something

mitrem somebody else tudo everything, all

nada nothing cada um, cada uma, cada qml

qiiemquer whosoever everybody, anybody, each.

Note. — The boundary-line between the indefinite and the
demonstrative pronouns is sometimes quite vague, so that the
grammarians count some of them now to the former, now
the latter. We also have already classed some (as outro, tal)
among the demonstrative, giving here a repetition of them.
Some, as muito, tanto, are often classed among the indefinite
numbers.

§ 182. Explanatory Rules.

1. Nenhum, ninguem and nada, pronouns which
include a negation, are employed, as in English,

Indefinite Pronouns. 183

without the negative adverb "not," when preceding the
verb: nenhum d'elles veio none of them has come; nin-
gueni a viu nobody has seen her; ninguem foi visto
nobody was seen; nada aconteceu nothing has happened.

Nada as an exclamation is "Not at all!" "God
forbid!"

If however these pronouns follow the verb, this is
preceded by i-naoi : nS,o veio nenhum d'elles; nao a viu
ninguem; nao aconteceu nada.

Nenhum may precede the noun or follow it: ne-
nJmma regra ... or regra nenhuma . . .

2. Algum is also employed in a negative sense and
then follows the noun: em tempo algum at no time(s).

3. Cada is never employed absolutely : when an ad-
jective, it precedes the noun; when a substantive, it is
followed by the indefinite article or by qual. « J. hydra
republicana tem cada uma das suas sete cabegas assente
em cada uma das sete collinas da cidade de Lisboa.»

4. Amhos is always followed by the definite article
or a pronoun in the plural : ambos as for estes, aquelles,
sens) rapases; ambos elles.

5. Outro in the meaning of "another" is employed
without an article:

Este copo nao estd limpo, dS-me outro.

6. Qualquer may precede or follow the noun. In
the latter case the noun is employed with the indefinite
article — e.g. :

Qualquer dia Id irei. Dei-lhe uma coisa qualquer.

7. Certo is generally employed without an article; it
may, however, also be accompanied by one: Falou com
certa energia. Tem um certo modo de falar.

8. Muito in its meaning "many a" has no plural:

Ha muita hora que se perde na ociosidade.
There is many an hour lost in idleness.

9. Algo is taken from the Spanish. It is better
to employ alguma coisa instead. If followed by some
complement, this is joined to either of them by de:
alguma coisa or algo de bello.

1X4

Lesson 27.

'N.B.—Algo can be also an adverb, preceding thus
adjectives or adverbs:

Uma tarefa algo espinhosa a somewhat delicate task.
Trabaihm algo diffictiUosamente.
He worked with some difficulty.

10. Queniquer and qualquer, if accompanied b}^ que
and expressing an uncertainty, are followed by the verb
in the conjunctive mood:

Quemquer que seja; quaesquer perigos que possa haver.
Otherwise they are followed by the indicative:
Qualquer (pessda) pode faze-lo. Quemquer se arremessava
d agua.

PalaTras.

argueiro

the splint,

a comadre

the godmother

[vr 'gvtruj

straw

[kumaffra]

ucio foniu]

compadre

the godfather

a ociosidade
fosuizi-

the idleness

[ko'padre]
mirar [mirar]

to look at

'(TacTsJ

rasto [rraftu]

the track,

a conimuiiicafao

the communi-

trace

[Icumunilcv-

cation

Ignaciofig 'nesi»

7Ignace

'svii]

entender

to be of opinion

benevolo

benevolent

apanhar

to pick up

[ba'ttEVulu]

[ispn 'par]

recompensar

to recompense

travar-se

to come to

[rrshompe-

[trv 'varsd]

blows

'sar]

a contenda

the quarrel

punir [pu'nir]

to punish

[Tcontendv]

determinar

to determine

n briga fbrige]

the fight

[d3tdrmina,r]

assanhado

hot

dispensar

to dispense

fvse'pad'u]

[difpesarj

collocar-se

to put oneself

bemfazejo

beneficent

f'kulu'kars3]

[bvifv'zegu]

d'este modo

thus, in the

merito

the merit

following

['merituj

manner

queixar

to complain

miolo [mi'olu]

the kernel; the

[kvffarj

brain

entendimento

the intelligence

a easca

the shell

[entendi-

['kafkej

'mentuj

guardar

to keep

fingir-se

to feign

[gwer'dar]

[fi'^irsd]

a sentenga

the sentence

hicho [ubifu]

the animal,

[sen'tesv]

"worm

resultado

the result

a malicia

the malicious-

[rr9sul'ta&u]

[iim 'lisle]

ness

a demanda

the plea

a fera ['feris]

the wild beast

[dd 'mUndvJ

Indefinite Pronouns.

185

paldcio do
munieipio

a cdmara
municipal

the town-hall

o arrdbalde the suburb

[■errviaidd]
a unificasao the unification.

[unsfihs 'siuj

74. Exercicio.

Ninguem vg o argueiro no seu olho. Toda a energia se
perde na ociosidade. Alguns insectos vivem apenas um dia.
Cada um deve fazer conhecer aos outros tudo o que (or tudo
quanto) julga litil ; esta cominunica9ao ben^vola produzira cede
ou tarda algans fructos. Todo o homem sera recompensado
ou punido segundo os sens aetos. Ninguem pode ser dispensado
de ser justo e bemfazejo. Certos ventos reinam em certos
mares em esta^oes determinadas. Todos os homens hao-de
morrer. Nenhuma criatura humana pode voar. Ninguem 6
bom juiz em causa propria. A vontade de brilhar nao ajunta
realmente nada ao merito da pessoa. Cada um queixa-se da
sua memoria, ninguem se queixa do seu entendimento. Mais
vale pouco que nada. Nada duvida quem nada sabe. Nin-
guem se raetta onde o nao chamam. Cada qual com seu
egual.

76. Leitura.

lido e a raposa.

Era uma vez um liao muito velho, e que de velho que
era ja nao ia a ca^a. Lembrou-lhe entao fingir-se doente, e
qualquer bicho que o ia visitar comia-o logo, e foi assim
comendo muito animal. Mas um dia uma raposa conheceu-lhe
a malicia, e em vez de entrar, disse-lhe da porta: 0' senhor
liao, esta melhorzinho?

— Nao, respondeu a fera. — Cada vez peor! Entre e
descanse um bocadinho, 6 comadre . . . Mas diz-lhe a raposa
a mirar o cbao:

— Nada, compadre! n'esSa nao caio eu. Aqui ha o rasto
de muitos que entraram, mas nao vejo o rasto dos que sairam
(or: de nenhuns que tenham saido)!

(Trindade Coelho: Segundo Livro de Leitura).

76. Tliema.

The Nut.

One day two boys found a nut. "This nut is mine,"
called out Ignace, "for I was the first who saw it. "Not at
all!" replied Bernard, "I am of opinion that it is mine, be-
cause [it] was I who picked it up." And both came to blows
in a hot fight. "I shall (tr. : Eu vou) finish your quarrel,"
said another and bigger boy who passed that way. He put

186 Lesson 28.

himself in the middle of the two boys, opened the nut, and
spoke thus: "One half of the shell belongs to him who first saw
the nut; the other to him who picked it up; and the kernel
I keep for myself for my sentence." "That," he added
laughingly (a rir), "is the ordinary result of most pleas."

Conrersaqao.

Que cidade e esta em que estamos?

Onde 6 situada?

Qual (6) o mimero da sua popula9ao?

Quaes sao as ruas mais importantes?

Quaes sao os bairros mais bonitos?

Nomeiem alguns hoteis dos mais frequentados!

Quern sabe alguma coisa da hist6ria d'esta cidade?

Em que annos foi edificado o palacio do municfpio?

Oomo se chamam os arrabaldes, as povoa9oes visinhas

etc.?
A que Estado pertence esta cidade?
Quaes sao as provincias d'elle?

Qaantos Estados pertencem ao Reino da Gran-Bretanha?
Quern e o Eei actual?
Em que anno subiu ao throno?
Nomeiem quaesquer outros monarchas ingleses!

Twenty-eightli Lesson. Lifjao vigesima
oitava.

The Irregular Verbs.

Os verbos irregulares.
§ 183. Note the following rules:

1. All compound and derived verbs follow the
original verb, if not indicated as an exception— e.g.:
demo(n)strar like mostrar; surprender like prender; re-
partir like partir, etc.

2. All tenses not indicated are regular. All irregu-
lar forms are given in italics.

The first conjugation (verls in -ar) has onlj^ two
irregular verbs, of which one, estar, has already been
dealt with among the auxiliary verbs. The second is :

The Irregvilar Verbs. 187

§ 184. Dar to give.

Indicative.

Conjunctivo.

Presente.

dou I give

de that I give

d&s

dSs

dd

dS

damos

dSm.os

dues

dels

dao.

d&em.

Imperfeito.

dava I gave

desse that I gave.

Preterito perfeito.

dei I gave, I have given

d6ste

dm

dSmos

destes

deram.

Mais-que-perfeito simples.

dira I had given.

Futuro.

darei I shall give

(se eu) der if I shall give, if

dards

dires [I am to give

dard

der

daremos

dermos

dareis

derdes

darao.

dSrem.

All the rest is regular.

The irregular

forms desse, dera, der are regularly

formed from deste

(2°'^ pars. sg. pret.) by changing the

ending -ste into -sse, -ra, -r.

§ 185. Idioms with dar.

Dar um abrago a to embrace

dar entrada a to let in; to admit

dar fe a to believe or to have faith in

dar horas to strike (the clock)

dar occasiao to offer an opportunity

dd-se a occasiao de there is an opportunity for

dar parte to communicate; to impart

dar um passeio to go for a walk, to walk

dar um salto to jump

dar OS bons dias to bid good day

188 Lesson 28.

dar as boas festas to send or express the compliments of

the season
dar OS pSsames to condole
dar OS parabens a to congratulate
dar a luz to publish (book); to bear, to bring forth
dar a to lead to, to end in
dar de esporas to spur
dar em alguem to strike one
dar em (doido) to become (mad)
dar no alvo to hit the mark

dar nos olhos or na vista to be evident or striking
dar pelo nome de to answer to the name of
esta janella dd para a rua, o jar dim this window looks

or opens into the street, etc.
dar-se (a) to dedicate oneself; to thrive; to occur, to

happen
dar-se (hem) com to agree with
pouco se me da I care but little
quem me dera (saber) ! how fain would I (know) !

§ 186. Concerning the verbs in -car, -gar, -gar,
-jar see § 143.

§ 187. The verbs in -ear change e into ei in all those
forms where the radical is accentuated — e.g.: nomear to
name, reccar to fear, lisongear to flatter, gorgear to
chirp, warble:

nomeio, nomeias, nomeia, nomeamos, nomeaes, no-
meiani; nonieie, iiomeies, nomeie, nomeemos, nomeeis, no-
meiem (cf. § 139).

§ 188. Crear ("or criar) to create, to bring up,
changes in the same forms the e in i: crio, crias, cria,
creamos, creaes, criam; crie, cries, crie, creemos, creels,
criem (see § 140).

N.B. — The compound verbs of crear (with the ex-
ception of recrear (better recriar) to create once more,
to bring up again) change the e into ei:

procrear to procreate, to beget : procreio (yet also
procrio), procreia.

But: a natureea recria; and ella recreia she diverts,
delights.

§ 189. The verbs in -iar keep their i, in the
pronunciation as well as in the orthography: copiar to
copy : coplo.

The Irregular Verbs. 189

§ 190. In some verbs in -iar the modification of
the i into ei is admissible and usual. Such verbs are:
diligenciar, agenciar, remediar, negociar, odiar, premiar;
thus: diligenceio, agenceia, etc.

§ 191. Not so in the verbs adiar, afiar, cdumiar,
annunciar, aviar, conf/rariar, confiar, copiar, fiar, miar,
piar, saciar, tosquiar, variar, which form: adio, alumia.
annunciam, etc.

Second Conjagation. Terbs in -er.

§ 192. Haver to have; to be, to exist (see L. 6).

Behaver follows the same model, but is used only
in the forms that have -v-: rehavendo, rehavido, rehavia,
rehouve, rehaja, rehouvesse.

§ 193. Fazer to do, to make, to cause, to let.

Pres. Indicat. Fago, fazes, faz, fazSmos, fazeis, fazem.

Pres. Conjunct. Faga, facas, faga, fagdmos, fagaes, fagam.

Pret. imperf. ind. Fazia, fazias, fazia, faziamos, fazieis, faziam.

Fret. perf. ind. liz, fizeste, fez, fizemos, fizestes, fizeram.

Imperfeito Conj. Fizesse, etc.
Mais-qice-perf. hid. Fizira, etc.

Futuro Ind. Farei, fards, fard, etc.

Fuiuro Conj. Fizer, fizeres, fizer, etc.

Gondicional. Faria.

Imperativo. Faze (tu),fazei (vds),faga(V^),fagdmos(n6s).

Participio. Feito.

Gerimdio. Fazendo.

§ 194. Compound verbs:

(a) contrafaser to counterfeit; to imitate; to disguise.

P. p. contrafeito, also adj., false, forced.

(b) desfazer to undo, to destroy, to abolish, to
annul;

(c) perfaser to complete, to perfect, to constitute;

(d) refaser to do or make again;

(e) satisfaser to satisfy, to pay.

Remark. — To let is rendered by fazer whenever you wisli
to express an active interference: fazer saber to let know, to
send word to, to acquaint with. Faga entrar ! Let him come
in. It is translated by deixar whenever you mean to express
admission : deixo-o falar I let him speak. {Fago-o falar would
be: I (shall) cause him to speak.)

190 Lesson 28.

§ 195. Idioms with fazer,

Fazer caso de to esteem; to care for; to attend to

nao fazer caso to despise

fazer annos to have one's birthday, to complete . . .

years of age (see § 97, 8)
faz color, faz frio, fae vento, caima it is hot, cold,

windy, calm
faz horn (man) tempo it is fine (bad) weather
faga o favor de, faz favor de (if you) please to
fazer (com) que to cause, to oblige
Fiz (com) que elle fizesse isso I made him. do that
ter (muito) que fazer to be (very) busy, to have

(much) to do
fazer em pedagos to break or cut to pieces
fazer (or mandar) fazer alg. c. to have something done
fazer construir (uma casa) to have (a house) built
fazer tengao to intend
fazer a barba to shave, to get shaved
fazer as unhas to clean or cut one's nails
fazer leilao to hold an auction
fazer as contas to count, to calculate
fazer conta or de conta to suppose
fazer contas com alg. to make up (to settle) accounts

with a person; to argue it out
fazer justiga a alg. to do justice to a person
fazer gala de alg. c. to boast of something
fazer compras to purchase, to go shopping
fazer as pazes to reconcile (oneself)
fazer um discurso to make (or deliver) a speech
fazer forga(s) to use violence
fazer falta to be absent, to miss, to die
faz-me muita falta I miss it very badly
fazer de bobo to make a fool of oneself
fazer de capitao to supply the captain
navio faz agioa the ship is leaky
fazer cara a to defy, to face
fazer fogo to shoot, to fire

fazer honra(s) to bestow honours, to do honour
fazer horas to wait for a certain hour, spend time

waiting
fazer o papel de to perform the figure of
estd a fazer it is being done
estd por fazer it is not yet done
dd que fazer it is hard work
isso nao faz ao caso that is of no concern
fazer-se to become, to turn, to grow; to occur

The Irregular Verbs. 191

fazer-se velho to become old

fazer-se vermelho to blush

fazer-se pdlUdo, amarello to grow pale, yellow

fazer-se d vela to put to sea

fazer-se ao mar, ao alto to gain the open sea, to get

the offing
fazer-se d terra to steer towards (to head for) the land
fazer-se de novas to plead ignorance
muitas vezes se faz isso that occurs often.

§ 196. Dizer to say, tell, speak, talk, relate.

Pres. Ind. J^igo, dizes, diz, dizSmos, dizeis, dizem.

Pres. Conj. Diga, digas, diga, digdmos, digaes, digam.

Pret. imperf. Ind. Bizia, dizias, dizia, diziamos, dizieis, diziam.

Pret. perf. Ind. Disse, disseste, disse, dissemos, dissestes,

Imperf. Conj. Dissesse, etc.

Mais-que-perf. Ind. DissSra, etc.

Futuro Ind. Direi, dirds, etc.

Futuro Conj. Disser, disseres, disser, etc.

Condicional. Diria, etc.

Imperative. Dize (tu), dizei (vds), diga (V^), digdmos (nos).

Participio. Dito.

Gerundio. Dizendo.

§ 197. Compound verbs:

condizer (com) to agree, suit, match, contradizer to
contradict; desdizer to deny; desdizer-se to unsay; interdizer
to interdict; maldizer to slander, curse; predizer to predict,
foretell.

§ 198. Foder can, may, to be able.

Pres. Ind. Posso, p6des, pdde, podhnos, podeis, podem.

Pres. Conj. Possa,possas,possa,possdmos,possaes,possam.

Pret. Imperf. Ind. Podia,podias,podia,podiamos,podieis,podiam.
Pret. perf . Ind. Pvde, pudeste, pdde, pudemos, pudestes,

puderam.
Imperf. Conj. Pudesse, etc.

Mais-que-Perf.Ind.Pudera, etc.
Futuro Ind. Poderei, poderds, etc.

Futuro Conj. Puder, puderes, puder, etc.

Condicional. Poderia, etc.

Participio. Podido.

Gerundio. Podendo.

Poder-se to be possible.

192

Lesson 28.

§ 199. Sa^er to know, to learn, to be able, can.
Pres. Ind. Set, sabes, sahe, sabemos, sabeis, sabem.

Pres. Conj. Saiba, saibas, saiba, saibdmos, saibaes, saibam.

Pret. imperf. Ind. Sabia, sabias, sabia, sabiamos, sableis, sabiam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Soube, soubeste, soiibe, soubemos, soubestes,

souberam.
Imperf. Conj. Soubesse, etc.

Mais-que-perf.lnd. Soubira, etc.
Futuro Ind. Saberei, saberds, etc.

Futuro Conj. Souber, souberes, etc.

Condicional. Saberia, etc.

Imperativo. Sabe, saiba, sabei.

Participio. Sabido.

Gerundio. Sabendo.

Remark. — Can, to be able must be rendered by poder
whenever it means a physical power or disposition; it must
be rendered by saber if signifying an intellectual capacity —
e.g., Meu irmao sabe ler, mas Mje nao p6de porque estd rouco
my brother can read, but to-day he is not able to do so,
because he is hoarse.

§ 200. Caber to be contained in, to fall to, to
belong to, to come or happen opportunely, forms like
saber, but for the I'*' pers. pr. ind.
Pres. Ind. Caibo, cubes, cabe, cabemos, cabeis, cabeni.

Palarras.

mel [mcij
a abelha

[v 'bv/iv]
a cillula

f'ssluhj
o tumulo

[tumulu]
o cortigo

[kur'tisu]
a eolmeia

[kot'vivw]
sobreiro

fsu'irviruj
chupar

[fu'parj
sugar [su gar]
adociear

[vffusikarj,

adoiar

[v&usarj
depositar

tie honey
the bee

the cell

the tomb

the bee-hive
the cork-oak

to suck
to sweeten

to deposit

a easinha do

favo
alvSolo

[ai'veiduj
cabrito

fky'britu]
tornar
pegar [pa' gar]

em
entrar a fazer

alg. V.
a flauta ['flaut^]
largar a fugir

magarefe
[mvgs 'refd]

flautista
fflau'tiftv]

a palavra
(d'honra)

outro dia

the honey-cell

the cell, alveole

the kid

to give back
to seize

to begin doing
something

the flute

to put oneself
to flight

the blockhead

the flautist

the word of

honour
the other day

The Irregular Verbs.

193

sapateiro

the shoemaker

a vacancia

recibo
[rrd'sihu]

the receipt

[vv 'knstv]
a vagatura

the vacancy

inteiramente

entirely

fvsgv 'tm-ej

um pagamento

an instalment

seguir [ss'gir]

to continue

a conta

(the way)

emprego

the employ-

por signal

by way of

[im'pregu]

ment

[si'naij

example

vago [vagu]

free, vacant

monolitho

the monolith

conferir

to confer

[monu 'lituj

[Icofa'rir]

lavrar

to work, to

fazer todas as

to take all

chisel

diligencias

pains

a columna

the column

[daWgesw/J

[Ico'lunv]

exercer

to exercise

a licenga

the license, per-

['izdr ser]

[U'sesvJ

mission

fazer-se illusoes

to illude oneself

especial

especial, par-

[ilu'soif]

[ffpssyalj

ticular

desanimar(-se).

to despair, to

a informagao

the information

desalentar(-se) despond

nao ha de que!

don't mention!

torcer [iur'ser]

to twist

passe muito hem

' good-bye!

77. Exercicio.

mel e fabricado {or feito) pelas abelhas. Bstas fazem
mel dentro dos cortigos ou colmeiaa. Os corti90S sac feitos
da casca do sobreiro. Para fazerem o mel, as abelhas ohupam
de cartas flOres o succo adocicado d'estas, o qual succo se
chama nectar. Com o nectar sugado, as abelhas fazem o mel
que levam para os corti90s, depositando-o nas cellulas ou
casinhas dos favos, chamadas tambem alveolos. — Dize neste
mundo o que tens para dizer: o tumulo 6 mudo. Dou-me
muito bem com os ares d'esta regiao, melhor do que me dei
na Suissa. Ali se dava as vezes que nao podia aturar os
ventos asperos que me faziam mal. Mas nao sabia que fazer,
ate que me disseram da Eiviera portugu6sa e qae soube que
at6 no inverno os ares aqui sac benefices.

78. Leitura.
cabrito e o lobo.

Era uma vez um cabrito que se tinha perdido num
monte. Nao sei aonde, salta-lhe um lobo para o devorar, e
elle volta-se para o lobo e diz-lhe assim:

— Senhor lobo! ja sei que me vae (see ir, § 214) comer!
Mas se faz favor, eu gostava muito de uma morte alegre!

Diz-lhe lobo: — Qual?

Torna o cabrito : — Gostava muito de morrer a dan9ar !

lobo por Ihe fazer a vontade, p6ga numa flauta e poe-
se (see p6r, § 212) a tocar, e o cabrito entra logo a bai-

Portuguese ConTersation-Grammar. 13

194 Lesson 28.

lar; — mas uns caes que andavam perto, ouviram a flauta e
vieram (see vir, § 218) a correr, e o lobo largou ]ogo a fugir
com medo dos caes.

— Bern feito! dizia elle entao. — Nao passo de magarefe,
para que me metti eu a ser flautista.

(Trindade Coelho: 1<* Livro de Leitura).

79. Thema.

I give you my word of honour that I gave those 25
pounds which my father had given me the other day, to my
tailor, in order to pay his bill.— Did you (tr. thou) also pay
the shoemaker, and did he give you a receipt? — I could not
yet entirely pay the shoemaker; I made him an instalment
and told him that I should give him the rest a^ soon as I
should be nominated to the vacant appointment that is to be
conferred. — How can you know whether you will be nominated
for it? — I don't know, but I flatter myself, that it will be
given to me, as 1 take all pains, and because there is perhaps
nobody else who is able to do the service as well. — And I
tell you what I have always told you: I fear that somebody
else will be appointed, as you, however well knowing the (tr. do)
service, cannot exercise it on account of your health. Don't
give yourself up to illusions, but also don't despair if (by chance)
you know that another has been selected for the vacancy.

ConversaQao.

A. Sabe-me o senhor dizer, por onde eu posso (or puder)
chegar ao Palacio do Municipio?

B. Sei, sim, senhor. Paqa favor de se dirigir por esta
rua, que e a Rua do Ouro, abaixo at^ ao Terreiro
do Pago que da para o Tejo. Depois pode seguir a
direita pela Rua do Arsenal at6 ao Largo do Pelon-
rinho, onde 6 a Camara Municipal.

A. Ora diga-me, porque se nomeia aquelle largo «do
Pelourinho».

B. Deu-lhe este nome um monumento, por signal muito
antigo, que esta no meio do largo e defronte do
Municipio, e que 6 formado por um monolitho lavrado
(or aberto) em tr6s columnas torcidas uma em volta
da (round the) outra.

A. P6de-se entrar no Palacio?

B. Pode. Ati as 4 horas esta aberto. Depois e so com
licen9a especial.

A. Muito obrigado pelas informa9oes que me deu. Boa
tarde !

B. Nao ha de qu6. Passe muito bem!

The Irregular Verbs, 195

Twenty-ninth Lesson. Li(jao vigesima
nona.

The Irregular Verbs. (Continued.)

Second Conjugation. Verbs in -er.
§ 201. Querer to be willing, to wish, to intend,
to feel disposed, to like.

Pres. Ind. Quero^queres,quer,querSmos^quereis,querem.

Pres. Conj. Queira, queiras, queira, queirdmos, queiraes,

Prei. imperf. Ind. Queria, querias, queria, queriamos, querleis,
queriam.

Pret. perf. Ind. Quiz, quizeste, quiz, quizSmos, quizestes,
quizSram.

Imperf. Conj. Quizesse, etc.

Mais-que-perf.Ind. QuizSra, etc.

Futuro Ind. Quererei, quererds, etc.

Futuro Conj. Quizer, quizeres, etc.

Condicional. Quereria, etc.

Imperativo. Queira, queiram (only used in the S'^^ pers.

followed by an infinitive — e.g. : queira,
dizer-me in the meaning "kindly tell me".

Participio. Querido. (As an adjective it means : be-

loved, dear).

Gerundio. Querendo.

§ 202. Mequerer to solicit is regular but for the
1^' pers. pr. ind. and derived; it forms:
Pres. Ind. Requeiro, requeres, requere.

Pret. perf. Bequeri, requereste, requereu, requerimos , etc.

§ 203. Traser to bring, to carry, to wear, to
bear.

Pres. Ind. Trago, trazes, traz, trazSmos, trazeis, trazem.

Pres. Conj. Traga, tragas, traga, trag&mos, tragaes.

Pret. imperf. Ind. Trazia, trazias, irazia, traziamos, trazieis,

traziam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Trouxe ['trosa], trouxeste, trouxe, trouxemos,

trouxestes, trouxeram.
Imperf. Conj. Trouxesse, etc.

Mais-que-perf.Ind. Trouxera, etc.
Futuro Ind. Trarei, trards, etc.

Futuro Conj. Trouxer, trouxeres, trouxer, etc.

13*

196 Lesson 29.

Condicional. Traria, etc.

Imperativo. Traze (tu), traga (V^), trazei (v6s).

Partidpio. Trazido.

Gerundio. Trazendo.

§ 204. Valer to be worth, to be of value, to
help, to assist.
Pres. Ind. Valho, vales, vale or val, valemos, valeis,

valem.
Pres. Conj. Valha, valhas, valha, valhdmos, valhaes,

valham..
Imperativo. Used only in the S'^ pers. — e.g., Valha-me

Deus! God help me! Valha a verdade

to tell the truth!
All the rest is regular.

§ 205. JPerder to lose.

Pres. Ind. Perco, perdes, perde, perd^mos, perdeis,

perdem.
Pres. Conj. Perca, percas, perca, pere&mos, percaes,

percam.

The rest is regular.

To this group of irregular verbs belong also ser,
Ur and haver, already dealt with among the auxihary
verbs.

§ 206. ier to read.

Pres. Ind. Leio, les, le, limos, Udes, Uem.

Pres. Conj. Leia, leias, leia, le(i)dmos, le(i)aes, leiam.

Imperf. Ind. Lia, lias, lia, Uamos, lieis. Ham.

Pret. perf. Ind. Li, leste, leu, Umos, listes, l^am.

Imperf- Conj. Lesse, Usses, lisse, lessemos, ISsseis, Ussem.

Mais-que-perf. Ind. Lira, leras, lera, etc.

Imperativo. Le (tu), leia, le(i)&.mos, Ude (v6s).

Participio. Lido.

Gerundio. Lendo.

§ 207. CrSr to believe, to think, to trust, and
descrer to disbelieve, are conjugated like ler. Modern
writers use the forms creiamos, creiaes instead of the
more correct creamos, creaes (of. Ur).

§ 208. Ver to see, behold, consider, view.
Pres. Ind. Vejo, ves, ve, vemos, vSdes, vSem.

Pres. Conj. Veja, vejas, veja, vejdmos, vejaes, vejam.

Imperf. Ind. Via, vias, via, viamos, vieis, viam.

Pret. perf. Ind. Vi, viste, viu, vimos, vistes, viram.

The Irregular Verbs. 197

Invperf. Conj. Visse, visses, visse, etc.
Mais-que-perf.Ind. Vira, virus, vira, etc.

Futuro Ind. Verei, verds, verd, etc.

Futuro Conj. Vir, vires, vir, etc.

Condicional. Veria, verias, veria, etc.

Imperativo. Ve (tu), veja, vejdmos, vede (vos).

Participio. Visto.

Gerundio. Vendo.

§ 209. Compound Verbs:

anteeer, prever to foresee

entreoer to have a glimpse of, to discover

rev&r to review, to see again

provh' to provide

desprover to deprive, to strip (of).

N.B. — Prover and desprover are regular in the Pret.
perf. Ind. (provi, proveste, proveu, elc.) and in the forms
derived from it (provesse, provera, prover), as also in
the Past Participle (provido).

§ 210. Jaser to lie, to be buried, a defective
verb of rare use, has become regular — i.e.: it has no
longer the forms jago, nor jouve (pret. perf.), nor an
open e [e] in the 2°"^ pers. pret. pref. and derived forms:

Pres. Ind. Jazo, jazes, jas, jazSmos, jazeis, jazem.

Imperf. Ind. Jazia.

Pret. Perf. Jazi, jazeste, jazeu, etc.

Mais-que-perf. Jazera, etc.

Aqui jaz (jasem) here lies (lie).

From the 1^' Participle the verbal adjective jazente
or better jacente is formed.

'iEssas pobres geragoes que de ha muito jazem sem vida.i>
Terras jacentes ao poente grounds lying towards the west.
Heranga jacente heritage not yet distributed.

§ 211. Those verbs ending in -cer, -ger and -guer
undergo analogous modifications as those ending in
-ear, -gar and gar, in order to conserve the original sound
of the c and g (cf. § 136 N.B. and § 143).

§ 212. JPor to put, place, lay, set, suppose.

This verb apparently not belonging to any of the
three conjugations, is to be considered as one of the
2°^, having lost the e of the termination (po-er).

198

Lesson 29.

JVes. Ind.
Pres. Conj.

Imperf. Ind.

Pret. Ind.
Imperf. Conj.
Mais-que-perf.
Futuro Ind.
Futuro Conj.

Condicional.
Imperativo.

Participio.
Gerundio.

Por-se em

§213.

Ponho, pdes, p5e, pomos, pondes, pdem.
Ponha, ponlias, ponha, ponhdmos, ponhaes,

ponham.
Punha, punhas, pimha, punhamos, punheis,

punham.
Pis, puzhte,pdz, ptisimos, puzistes, puzSravi.
Puzesse, etc.

Puzera, puzeras, puzSra, etc.
Porei, pords, pord, poremos, poreis, pordo,
Puzer, piizeres, puzer, puzennos, puzerdes,

puzerem.
Poria, porias, porta, etc.
Poe (tu), ponha (Ve), ponhdmos (nds),

ponde (v6s).
Posto.
Pondo.
pe to get up.

Compound rerbs:

antepor to set before, prefer

compdr to compose

contrapor to oppose, to com-
pare

depdr to state; to depose; to
deposit; to lay down

dispor to dispose

expdr to expose, exhibit

impor to impose

indispdr to indispose, to unfit
interpdr to put between, in-
terpose
oppdr to oppose
propor to propose
propdr-se to intend, to design
suppdr to suppose
transpdr to transport, etc.

PalaTras.

varao

[vv 'riuj
a ingenho

brazao

[bre 'zvu]
herdar [ir'darj
padre

['paffrd]
falar em bom

som
vote [votu]
a amisade

[■emi 'sadd]
a infancia

[I'fisve]
o tumulo

I'tumidu]

the man, male

the skill, talent,

art, wit
the escutcheon

to inherit

the father

to speak aloud

the vote

the friendship

the childhood

the tomb

ojpedra tumular
punhado

[pu'r/affuj
a campa

['kempej
sauddso

[aau'ffozu]
annuncio

[v 'nusiu]
a prompto

(supply paga-

mento)

[eprifiv 'sotfj
escriptorio

[tfkri'tonu]
a padaria

[pads 'riv]

the tombstone
the handful

the burying-

place
melancholy

the advertise-
ment

on cash (pay-
ment)

on payment by

instalments
the office

the bakery

The Irregular Verbs.

199

trespassar

[trtfpn 'sarj
lucro f'lukruj
tratar

as alvigaras

[al' mservf]
moinho

fmu'ipuj
color [hu'lar]
a medalha

[mgffads]
capitalista
sdcio f'sosfuj

commanditdrio
a industria

[m 'duftrjej
proprio

(supply: an-

nunciador)
abaixo assi-

gnado

[vsi'na.O'u]
a agenda

[v 'gfsfyj
penhor

[pt'yor]
sufficiente

[sufisi'entaj
a casa de

penhores
montar
afreguezado

[•efrggf' zaffu]
local [lu 'kaij
a enclarecimento

[}fUnr3si-

'mentuj
a eonstrucfao

[koftru'svu]
pedreiro 1

[pa 'ffisiritj I
trolha [

['troRv] I
a trolha

['troftvj

to alienate

the gain, profit
to negotiate,

treat, deal
the finder's

reward
the mill

the collar
the medal

the capitalist
the sleeping

partner
the industry

the same (ad-
vertiser)

the signatory

the agency

the pawn,

pledge
sufficient

I
the pawnshop

to establish
well accustom-
ed
the locality
the information

the construc-
tion

the mason

the handle- or
mortar-board

quehfar

[ks'brarj
tnlhar [tv'Rar]
a alvenaria

[aivane 'rivj
a argamassa

[vrge'mas'sj
hetao [bg 'tiuj

cimento

[si 'mentuj
a ligagao

[lige 'seicj
o instrumento
officio

[u'fistuj
a colher

[hu'Her]
a picadeira

[pikv '&v}rvj
addgagar

[v&eigv 'sarJ
picar
o esluque

[■tf'tvkd]
camartello

[kernvr'tslu]
desbastar

[di^bvf'tar]
calcar [kaikarj

prumo

aprumar

nivel ['niveij

nivelar

horizontal

[orizon'tal]
a cantaria

[kvntv 'rivJ

a enxada
[t'/affv]
amassar
cache [kofij

to break

to cut

the masonry

the mortar

the beton, con-
crete
the cement

the binding

cement
instrument
the profession

the trowel

the pickaxe

to thin

to hoe
the stucco

the cutting-
hammer
to rough-hew

to fix by beat-
ing
the plummet
to plumbline
the level
to level
horizontal

the masonry;

the cut- stone,

blocking
the spade

to wet, to stir
the hod.

80. Exercicio.

Rebello da Silva disse que valia mais o varao que se fazia
grande e famdso pelo ingenho e pelos actos, do que o homem
que ja nascera entre brazoes herdados. Dizia o padre Antonio

200 Lesson 29.

Vieira que se descompnnha a si mesmo, quern aos mais descom-
punha. Nao leias em meia voz, l6 alto e em bom soml Dou-lhe
OS parabens ; nao caibo em mim de contente pelas boas novas de
que me deu parte. Vejo que Ihe trouxe fortuna o conselbo que
algum dia Ihe d^ra. Deus queira que Ihe valham sempre os meus
votos de boa amizade e o muito que Ihe quero. Quern me dera
que pudesse ir v6-lo! Propor-lhe-ia que fossemos (see § 214)
rev6r os logares da nossa infaucia e os tiimulos onde jazem
aquelles a quern mais quiz6mos quando vivos. Que satisfaci;ao
d'alma se, lendo nas pedras tumulares aquelles nomes queridos,
depuz6ssemos um punhado de fiSres na campa dos que nos
deram a vida. Mas ja perdi toda a confian^a, descreio em que
jamais os reveja ou que tome a v6r esses saudosos sitios os
quaes — valha a verdade ! — valem para mim o mais bonito
jardim.

81. Leitura.

Annuncios.

1. IHano alemao, novo, magnifioas vozes, vende-se barato,
a prompto ovi a presta9oes, Na Rua da Palma 61, escripto-
rio, 88 diz.

2. Pddaria, trespasse-se uma em boas condi56es e muito
barata. Da 100 000 reis de lucre por mfis. Trata-se com
abaixo assignado na Pkdaria Bijou a rua Eseola Poly-
technica 247.

3. AlvlQUras dao-se a quem entregar na Cal9ada do Moinho
de Vento 32 um colar d'onro com medalha que se perdeu
desde a dita rua ate ao Chiado.

4. Capitalista. Precisa-se de socio capitalista ou commandi-
tario para desenvolver uma industria. Capital garantido,
lucres certos lO^/o (por cento). Trata-se com o proprio.
Carta a agdncia NN. Eua dos Retrozeiros.

5. Capitalista precisa-se que entre com o capital sufficiente
para mais desenvolvimento de uma casa de penhores, ja
montada e afreguezada n'um dos melhores locaes da capital.
Esclarecimentos, rua Capellistas No. 71.

82. Thema.

Building in Portugal.

Do you see that house in construction? The mason
makes the walls and all masonry with broken , uncut
stones or with bricks, joining the materials with clay, mortar
beton, cement or another binding. Do you know of which
tools the mason makes use in his profession? I (shall)
tell you; they are these: the trowel, with which he places
the clay and mortar; the pickaxe, with which he thins the

The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation.

201

sides of the bricks, cuts the walls and demolishes the stucco ;
the cutting-hammer, with which he cuts the stone and fixes
the materials out of which he builds the walls; the plumb,
which helps (voter em) him to plumbline the walls; the level,
with which he levels the blockings; the handle-board where
he puts the chalk; the spade he stirs the chalk with; the
hod, which serves in transporting the chalk, etc.

Conversa^ao.

Que tempo faz, (or estd)?

Porque cr6 isso?

Valha-nos Deus ! Antes queria
que continuasse enxuto, por-
que com a chuva perco a
occasiao de dar passeios.

Ora veja o jornal que trouxeram
e que ja prediz mudan^a de
tempo. Quer que Ih'o leia?

Pois ja ficamos sabendo que,
se tempo se puzer a mal,
sera por mnitos dias.

Por emquanto tern feito (or
estado) bom tempo, mas
creio que vae mudar.

Porque se levantou muito
vento, e receio que nos traga
chuva.

Pois nao v6 aquellas nuvens
que se juntam no horisonte?
Vera que kmanha teremos
chuva, a nao sSr que o vento
acalme.

Se quizer fazer esse favor . . .
como eu nao sei l6r . . . Gom-
tado ja prevejo o que diz.

Pois seja o que Deus quizer!
Visto a gente nao pudermos
fazer nada . . .

Thirtieth Lesson. Li^ao trigesima.

The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation.

§ 214. Ir to go (as for the compound tenses of
this verb see § 118).

Pres. Incl. Vou, vaes (vais), vae (vai), vamos (inios),

ides, vao.

Pres. Gonj. Vd, vds, vd, vamos, vades, veto.

Pret. imperf. Ind. la, ias, ia, iamos, ieis, lam.

Pret. perf. Fui, fdste, foi, fomos, fdstes, fdrao.

Imperf. Conj. Fosse, etc.

Mais-que-perf. F6ra, fdras, fdra, formos, foreis, foram.

Fut. Ind. Irei, irds, ird, iremos, ireis, irdo.

Fut. Conj. For, fdres, for, formos, fordes, forem.

Conditional. Iria, etc.

Imperativo. Vae (tu), vd, vamos (h6s), ide (vds).

202 Lesson 30.

Participio. Ido. (In the adjective meaning "past" there

Gerundio. Indo. is also the fem. form "ida

and the plural forms 'Hdos,

idas")
§ 215. Ir followed by an infiDitive expresses an
intention, that which the English expresses by "to be
going to"— e.g.: vou fazer o men thema I am going to do
my task; iamos dar uni passeio we were just about to
take a walk.

§ 216. Idioms with ir.

Ir a pi to go on foot

/;• de (or em) carniagem to go in a carriage, to drive

ir a cavallo to go on horseback, to ride

ir a melhor to grow or become better

ir ter com alguem to call upon somebody

vae melhor he (she, it) is better, it is going better

Como vae ? how do you do ? how is it going on ?

Que vae nisso? what does it matter?

por mal que vd if the worst come to the worst

Quanto vae d'aqui a . . .? How far is it from here to ... ?

Esta rua vae ter d ponte this street leads to the bridge

Vae em tres annos about three years ago

Vae-lhe hem it suits you well

Isso jd la vae that's a thing past and done.

§ 217. Ir-se to go away, be ofP, to set out,
disappear, die.

Vou-me I go away, I am going away.

Foi-se he is gone.

Vd-se embora! get you gone! be off!

Vamo-nos! let us go away

{Vae-se fazendo tarde (escuro) it is growing late (dark).)

Remark 1. — While ir expresses a movement towards a
place, ir-se expresses one away from it. The former answers
to the question "where to?", the latter to "whence?"

Remark II. — In the last example se is not part of the
verb ir, but of fazer, being joined to the former only for
the sake of harmony.

§ 218. Tir

Pres. Ind. Venho, vens, vem, vimos, vindes, veem.

Pres. Conj. Venlia, venhas, venha, venhAmos, veiihaes,

venham.

The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 203

Imperf. Ind. Vinha, vinhas, vinha, vinhamos, vinheis,

vinham.
Fret. perf. Vim, vieste, veio, viSmos, viistes, vieram.

Imperf. Conj. Viesse, viesses, viesse, etc.

Mais-que^erf. Viera, viiras, etc.

Fut. Ind. Virei, virds, vird, viremos, vireis, virdo.

Fut. Conj. Vier, vieres, vier, viermos, vierdes, vierem.

Gondicional. Viria, etc.

Imperativo. Vem (tu), venha, venhdmos, vinde (vos).

Participio. Vindo,

Gerundio. Vindo.

Remark. — The singular of the imperative terminates by
m : vem. The same ending has the 2°"^ pers. sing. pres. ind.,
when followed by an objective pronoun (-0, -a, -os, -as) —
e.g., vem-lo tu dizer? do you come to tell it? (About lo
cf. § 164 (b).)

Idioms:— Vir ds boas to reconcile oneself. Vir-se e desejar-
se com ... to be in difficulties with . . .

§ 219. Compound Terbs:

advir to intervene, to arrive desavir to disunite

contravir to contravene, in- intervir to intervene

fringe provir to come from

convir to agree,' to be fit or sohrevir to supervene.

convenient

§ 220. Bir to laugh.

Pres. Ind. Rio, ris, ri, rimos, rides, riem.

Pres. Conj. Ria, rias, ria, ridmos, riaes, riam.

Compound verbs: sorrir to smile and rir-se (de)
to laugh (at).

§ 221. The verbs medir, pedir and oiivir to hear,
are regular but for the 1^' pers. pres. ind. and derived
forms.

Medir (cf. 152) to measure, appreciate.
Pres. Ind. Meco, medes, mede, medimos, medis, medem.

Pres. Conj. Mega, megas, mega, megdmos, megaes, megam.

Imperativo. Mede, mega, megdmos, medi.

Fedir to ask, to beg.
Pres. Ind. Pego, pedes, pede, pedimos, pedis, pedem.

Pres. Conj. Pega, pegas, pega, pegdmos, pegaes, pegam.

Imperativo. Pede, pega, pegdmos, pedi.

Compound verbs: despedir to dismiss and expedir
to dispatch.

204 LeBson 30.

Ouvir to hear.
Pres. Ind. Ouco (oko), ouves, ouve, oiwimus, ouvis,

oucein.
Pres. Conj. Ouca (oica), ougas, ouga, ougamos, ougaes,

ottgain.

N.B. — The u before g may be supplied by /.
§ 222. Dormif to sleep (see § 154).

Pres. Ind. Durmo, dormes, dorme, dormimos, dormis,

dormem.
Pres. Conj. Durina, durmas, durma, dunnamos, durniaes,

dtirmam.

§ 223. Concerning the verbs in a(h)ir see § 158.
Cair (sometimes, but incorrectly: cahir) to fall.

Pres. hid. GMo, caes, cae, caimos, cais, cdem.

Pres. Qonj. Cdia, cdias, cdia, caidmos, caiaes,. cdicim.

Sahir or .■iair to go out, to go forth.
Pres. Ind. Suio, saes, sae, sahimos (salmos), sahis (sals),

Pres. Conj. Saia, sdias, sdia, saidmos, saiaes, saiaw..

All the rest is regular.

§ 224. Concerning the verbs adherir, advertir, ferir,
mentir, repetir, seguir, seiitir, servir and compound ones
cf. §§ 152, 153, 156.

The following is a model conjugation of these
verbs:

Pres. Ind. Vista, vestes, veste, vestimos, vestis, vestem.

Pres. Conj. Vista, vistas, vista, vistdmos, vistaes, vistam.

Imp. Ind. Vestia, vestias, vestia, vestlamos, vestleis,

vestiam.
Pret. perf. ind. Vesti, vestiste, vestiii, vestimos, vestistes,

vestiram.
Imp. Conj. Vestisse, vestisses, vestisse, vestissemos,

vestisseis, vestissem.
Mais-que-perf. Vestira, vesttras, vestira, vestiramos, vestireis,

vestiram.
Flit. Ind. Vestirei, vestiras, vestird, etc.

Flit. Conj. Vestir, veslires, vestir, vestirmos, vestirdes,

vestirem.
Condicional. Vestiria, vestirias, etc.

The Irregular Verbs of the Third OoDJugation. 205

Imperativo. Veste (tu), vista (V^), vistdmos, vesti (v6s).

Participio. Vestido.

Gerundio. Vestindo.

Thus are conjugated:

Pres. Ind. ^re^Suhj.
and Imper.

(a) Adherir to adhere, to stick to . adhiro adhira

(b) advertir to advise advirto advirta

(c) ferir to bless .... . firo fira

(d) mentir^ to lie, to deceive . . . minto minta

(e) repetir to repeat .... repito repita

(f) seguir^ to follow . .... sigo siga

(g) sentir to feel sinto sinta

(h) servir to serve; to be of use; to

lay (the table) sirvo sirva

(i) vestir to dress . . . visto vista

(j) despir^ to undress . . . dispo dispa

§ 225. The verbs aggredir, denegrir, pro-
gredi/r, remir, transgredir, prevenir change
equally the radical e into i, yet not only in the 1 ^* pers.
pr. ind., but in all accented forms of this tense, as
also through the whole pres. subj. (cf. 152, 2, Remark).

AggreMr to assault.

Pres. Ind. Aggrido, aggrides, aggride, aggredimos,

aggredis, aggridem,.
Pres. Conj. Aggrida, aggridas, aggrida, aggriddmos,

aggridaeSf aggridam.

Prevewi/f to advise, to warn, to prepare, to prevent.
Pres. Ind. Previno, prevines, previne, prevenimos, preve-

nis, previnem.
Pres. Conj. Previna, previnas, previna, previndmos, pre-

vinaes, previnam.

§ 226. Those verbs of the 3"^ conj. whose radical
vowel is u modify this u into open o [o] in the 2""^ and
3"'^ pers. sing, and in the 3"^^ pers. pi. of the pres. ind.,
as also in the sing, imper. (cf. § 155) — e.g.:

^ Instead of mentir you will better employ fdltar d verdade.
^ For the orthography seguir and sigo, of. § 157.
3 This verb conserves in the first and second persons pi. pree.
conj. its radical e: dispa, dispas, dispa, despdmos, despaes, dispam.

206

Lesson 30.

Fugir to flee, fly.
Pres. Ind. Fujo, foges, foge, fiigimos, fugis, fogem.

Pi-es. Gonj. Fuja, fujas, fuja, fuj&mos, fujaes, fujam.

Iniperativo. ^oge, fuja, fujdmos, fugi, fujam.

All the rest is regular.

N.B. — Concerning the g changing into j see § 157.

§ 227. After this model are conjugated:
Acudir to run, to help, to aid engulir to swallow

hulir to touch, to stir
consumir to consume
cohrir (cuhrir) to cover
descobrir to un- or discover
cuspir to spit
destruir to destroy

sacudir to shake

suhir to ascend, to mount

tussir to cough

suinir to hide

sumir-se to disappear

surgir to appear, to rise.

Remark. — Construir and reconstruir to build and re-
build are also often conjugated like this, yet they better keep
their u: construes, construe, construem instead of constroes,
constroe, eonstroem.

§ 228. Affligir to aflict; affligir-se to care, to
be in sorrow, to grieve; corrigir to correct; fingir to feign;
dirigir to direct, change the g before a and o into j —
e.g., que elle corrija that he may correct (cf. § 157).

§ 229. Frigir to fry, modifies moreover the i
into e in the 2°"^ and S'^^ pers. sing, and the S^"* pers. pi.

Pres. Ind. Frijo, freges, frege, frigimos, frigis, fregem.

Participio. frito besides frigido.

Remark. — The verbs in uzir, as: conduzir, produzir,
induzir, reduzir, (re)luzir, etc., are regular, but they lose
the e of the S^d pers. sing, of the pres. ind.— e.g., produz;
the imperative, however, conserves the e: produze!

Palavras.

Parar to stop, to stay

cavalheiro the gentleman

[hvvv 'Rvnu]
cavalleiro the rider

[kevv 'Ivyru]
u, estrada real the high-road
[tf'tra&erri 'at]
prito ['grituj the scream
a desfilada in full speed

[a.d'iffi'U&v]

a presenfa de

espirito
andar doente,

triste etc.
desastre

fda'zaftraj
a (primeira)

ligadura

fligs 'diirej
sentir d falta de

the presence of

mind
to be ill, sad

the disaster

the temporary
dressing (of a
wound)

to miss

The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation.

207

apparelho

[vpv 'rvHu]
OS sentidos

a eomplicagao

[Tiomplikv-

'svuj
de passagem
de dia a dia
mMico

assistente
fracturar

[fratu'rar]
requerimento

[rrakri-

the apparatus

the senses,
conscience

indeed

the complica-
tion

by the bye
from day to day
the assistant

surgeon
to break

the petition

ministerio da

jv^tiga
depois d'dmanha

u tirgencia

[ur'gestej
a sentenga

[sen'tese]
oficial [ofisfal]
absolvitorio

[ebsolvi-

'toriuj
a nota ['notv]

the ministry of

justice
the day after

to-morrow
the urgency

the sentence

official
absolving

the note, list

tribunal

criminal
a instrucgao

primdria
a direcgao geral

de instrucgao
documento

fdoku'mentuj
constar

fkonf'tarj
ckcerca [a 'serke]

de
a frequezia

[fraffd'zivj
collocar

[kulu'kar]
referido
levantamento
a suspensao

[sufpe'svu]
despaeho

[dif'pafu]
depuiado

[daputa&u]
d'aqui em diante
assim que
contar com

alguem
auxiliar

[ausiiy arj

criminal court

primary in-
struction

central school-
board

the document

to be said or

reported
with regard to

the parish

to place

mentioned
the raising
the suspension

the despatch

the deputy

henceforth

as well as, also

reckon upon

someone
to help.

83. Exercicio.

Meu bom Amigo!

Ha muito que nada 0U90 de ti. Nem eu sei ja onde
paras e como vaes. Disseste-me que virias vSr-me um dia
qualqner de que havias de prevenir-me. Mas nao vieste, nem
me preveniste. Sinto muito que nao tenhas vindo na semana
paasada, quando d^mos um passeio a Cintra, sitio de que de
certo j4 ouviste falar. Fui eu com meus paes e irmaos e
fomos de carruagem e nao em caminho de ferro. Alguns
cavalheiros, indo a cavallo e em bycicleta, seguiam a nossa
carruagem pela estrada real. De repente ouve-se um grito —
olho para tras e vejo que um dos cavalleiros caido abaixo, jaz
no chao, emquanto o cavallo foge a desfilada. Oh, se visses
aquillo ! Mas nao perco a minha natural presen9a de espirito,
e, querendo valer ao homem jacente, que cria ferido, ponho-
me em pe e fafo parar a carruAgem. Saio d'ella precipitada-
mente e os outros acodem. Tu sabes que geralmente ando
prevenido, como que presentindo sempre algum deaastre. Trago

208 Lesson 30.

comigo, para fazer umas primeiras ligaduras, urn apparelno,
que n'aquella occasiao tambem trazia comigo. E se o nao
trouxesse (or: trago), ter-nos-ia (or: tinha-nos) feito muita
falta. Pois o homem perdera os sentidos. Proponho que se
puzesse na carruagem, onde effectivamente foi posto, dispondo-
se de maneira que nos outros viemos a p6, ate que nos adveio
outra carruagem de que fizemos uso. Consome-me ainda o
receio que sobrevenha alguma complicagao no estado do ferido
que — diga-se de passagem — sente melhoras e vae a melhor
de dia a dia. Sirvo-lhe de medico assistente, visto-o e dispo-o,
pois fracturou um bra90. Bile agora dorme e € bom que durma,
para que se ponha bem de todo. Se nao sobrevier febre,
espero que elle se possa levantar depois d'amanha. Na
esperan9a de te ver brevemente, pe90 me creias

aempre teu muito amigo
Jose.
84. Leitura.

Reguerimentos.
Eequeiro que pelo ministerio da justi9a me seja enviada com
urgencia copia da senten9a absolvit6ria de 26 de julho de 1907,
do tribunal criminal do Porto, dada no processo em que res-
pondeu o professor official da escola de C. senhor Paulo Per-
reira de Azevedo.

Eequeiro que pela diree9ao geral de instruc9ao primdria
me sejam enviados com urgencia os seguintes documentos:
1. Nota de tudo quanto se sonber e constar kc6rca do ex-
professor primario da freguezia de Paranhos, do Porto, sr. P. P.
de A., actualmente coUocado na escola official de C. ; 2. Copia
do requerimento do referido professor d direc9ao geral de ins-
truc9ao primaria, pedindo o levantamento da suspensao que
Ihe foi imposta, com o despacho dado pela mesma direc9ao geral.
Lisboa, 3 de junho de 1908.

deputado
Affonso Costa.
86. Thema.

My dear friend !
I congratulate you that you so quickly have (conj.) run
to help that gentleman fallen from his horse, and that you
could provide his injuries with temporary dressing. I appreciate
all the interest and satisfaction with which you follow the pro-
gress in the recovery of the wounded man. I beg that you will
continue to let me know how he is going on and whether he is
growing better. Also that you will tell me whether I can help
you (cf. § 204) or be of any use to you (see § 224 h). You
well know that you may reckon upon me and that I am

Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 209

good for something. Commuuicate to me, whatever I may be
able to do for yon or your patient. I repeat that I will
come (= ir) at once as soon as you write me "Come!"
I suppose that you are (conj.) without a soul to help
you (= a soul that [may] help you) and grieve about
it. Should it be convenient, advise me, and I will run to
(your) help.

Yours most heartily (= teu do coracjao)
James (Jayme).

86. Exercise (oral).

Instead of a conversation the student is recommended
to transfer the address "tu" in 78 and 80 into the more
ceremonious form, remembering that it may be given either
by the mere verb (3'''^ pers.) or by o Senhor, o Amiga, V" Ex'^,
etc. (see § 32).

Thirty-first Lesson. Li(jao trigesima
primeira.

Impersonal and Defective Verbs.

Os verbos unipessoaes e os defectivos.

§ 230. Impersonal are those verbs the activity of
which is not exercised by persons or even by any
distinct subject, and which are only used with the
3'^ pers. sing, and the indefinite subject it. We di-
stinguish three groups:

1. Such verbs as are always and merely used in
the 3"^ person, the essentially impersonal ones. To these
belong those expressing natural phenomena. Some
of them are employed with the subject o tempo; ama-
nhecer, to dawn, is sometimes accompanied by the
pleonastical subject o dia; acontecer may have a noun
for its subject.

Consta it (he, she, etc.) is chovisca it drizzles

said to . . . graniza it hails

acontece it happens neva it snows

(o dia) amanhece it dawns gela it freezes

anoitece it grows night, dar- degela it thaws

kens relampeja it lightens

chove it rains venta it blows

troveja it thunders escurece it darkens

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar, 11

210

Lesson SI.

tempo estia it (the weather) resulta it results

settles pesa-me I am sorry '

tempo aclara it (the weather) apraz-me I am pleased.^
clears up

2. Such verbs as may also be employed with a
personal subject and in all persons: the accide-ntally
impersonal ones — e.g. :

parece it appears
entende-se it is understood
tarda muito, leva miiito tempo

it tarries
)iao admette di'icida it is

doubtless

nuo admira it is not astonish-
ing, I don't wonder

recommenda-se it is to be re-
commended

convem it is convenient

verificou-se it was verified.

3. Compositions of the 3'''^ pers. of the verbs ser,
estar, fazer, haver, ir, etc. with an adjective or substan-
tive— e.g. :

A' or estd claro it is clear
e evidente it is evident
i (iiiOpossivel it is (im)possible
e preciso it is necessary
i indispensavel it is indis-
pensable
i Juste it is just
£ verdade it is true, indeed
e provavel, certo it is probable,

sure
i? lastima it is to be deplored
e pena it is a pity
e (lima) vergonha it is a shame
faz arranjo it is convenient,

fit or opportune (also em-
ployed personally)
estd (or faz) calor it is hot
estd (or faz) frio it is cold

8 231. Rule.

estd (or faz) luar it is moon-
light
estd (or faz) sol it is sunshine
estd (or faz) nSvoa it is foggy
ha d4vida there is some doubt
ndo ha duvida it is doubtless ;

it does not matter
nao ha novidade it is all right
ha gente there are some people
ha que fazer it is much to do
ha um anno a year ago
ha muito (tempo) long ago
vae melhor it (he, she) is

growing better
vae em tres annos about three

years ago.
vae fazer um mSs nearly a
month ago.

Impersonal verbs and locutions

which express uncertainty, necessity, feeling or wish,
are followed by the subjunctive in the dependent clause,
if introduced by que; otherwise by the infinitive.
Examples.
E indispensavel que va levar esta carta ao correio.
E lastima que nao tenha vindo mais cedo (or: e lastima
nao ter vindo . . .).

» See pesar § 137 (c).
^ See praser § 234.

Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 211

E justo que o operario vencja um ordenado correspondents

ao seu trabalho (or: e justo o operario veneer . .).
E (uma) vergonha que um rapaz tao intelligente nao

se applique mais [or: e vergonha um rapaz . . . nao

se applicar mais).
Pesa-me que Ihe tenha feito essa injusti^a (or : p6sa-me

ter Ihe feito . . .).
Nao admira que nao se sinta bem depois d'uma noite

d'insomnia.
Tardava mnito que chegassem noticias d'elle.
Nao admittia diivida que o r6u fosse culpado (or: de o

r^u s6r culpado).
Foi preciso que se Ihe fizesse uma ligadura (or : foi pre-

ciso fazer-lhe . . .).
However: E verdade que nao veio a tempo.
E claro or eerto que fez o seu dever.
Parece que nao deseja ser visto, etc.

§ 232. Defective are such verbs as are lacking in
some forms. Their number is very Hmited. The following
are used only in those forms where the final consonant
of the radical is followed by i (i.e., in the Inf pers.
and impers., in the 1^* and 2"'* pers. pi. pr. ind., in the
pret. imp. and perf., the future and cond., the parti-
ciples):

Adir (uma heranga) to accept emollir to soften, mollify

(an inheritance) empedernir to petrify, harden

hanir to banish extorguir to extort

brandir to brandish /'aifo>tofail,to become bankrupt

carpir to moan, lament florir to flourish

colorir to colour munir to furnish

demolir to demolish renhir to combat

discernir to discern retorquir to retort

descomedir-setoheimm.oierate, suhmergir to submerge, and
to fall into a passion other rare verbs.

The missing forms of these verbs are periphrasti-
cally formed (see P. II., L. 20)— -for instance: estou de-
molindo I demohsh. Espero que faga par ianir esse
pensamento I hope you will banish this idea from your
mind.

§ 233. Precaver to warn, caution, precaver-se (de)
to beware of, fremir to tremble, are employed only in
the forms where the final consonant of the radical is
followed by i or e: precavia, precavendo; freniia,
freme, fremem, etc.

u*

212 Lesson 31.

§ 234, The impersoual verb praser (and apraser)
to please, to be pleased, wants the dative complement
and is employed only in the following forms:

Pres. Ind.

Praz.

Pres. ConJ.

Praza.

Imperf. Ind.

Prazia.

Pret. perf.

Prouve.

Imperf. Siibj.

Prouvesse.

Mais-que-perf. Ind.

. Prowvera.

Fut. Ind.

Prazerd.

But. Siibj.

Prouver.

Participio.

Prazido.

Gerundio.

Pntzendo.

Examples.

rei disse: Praz{ov apraz)-me conservar o meu governo.
Aprazia-lhe (or aprouve-lhe) tomar essa resolugao. Prazerd
a Deus . . . Prazendo a Deus . . . Se a Deus prouver . . .
Prouve a el-rei . . .

This verb, wanting a complement (Infinitive or
objective clause with que and the subjunctive) is not
to be exchanged for agradar or gostar. For instance:
espedacido agradou the spectacle pleased; gostei do
quadro I was pleased with the picture. Prouve ao des-
tino condurd-lo cd ('or que o condusisse cd) Destiny was
pleased to lead him here.

§ 235. Grassar to rage, prevail, only employed
in the 3''* persons: grassa a febre amareUa; grassaram
as bexigas (small-pox).

§ 236. laser— see § 210.

§ 237. Pesar to afflict, to grieve, is also used only
in the 3"^ persons and completed by the dative com-
plement : Pesa-me I grieve, I am sorry. Pesou a familia
erdutada nao ter assistido aos ultimas momentos do fcMe-
cido. The survivors were sorry for not having assisted
at the last moments of the deceased.

§ 238. Behaver to get back is used only in the
forms which have a v: rehavemos, rehavia, rehouve,
reJiavendo, etc.

PalaTras.
Sombrio gloomy, dark | a tempestade the tempest

earregado loaded | [temptftaffg]

Impersonal and Defective Verbs.

213

subtil [sub'tii]

subtil

gtiarda-Uwos

book-keeper

remoinho

the wMr](wind)

[gwa/rdv-

[rrsmu'ipu]

'livru/J

a ramagem

the branches

a cohranga

the receiving

[rrv'timgH]

[ku'brvsvj

a hdUga

sudden shower

pagamento

the payment

f'bctfygej

[pygs'mentuj

(de dgua) ■

registo

the register,

assustador

frightful

[rra'giftu]

list

[vsufte 'ffor]

as entradas de

entrance-money

emmudecer

to grow dumb

fiindos

[imuffd'ser]

as saidas de

the sale

esconder

to hide

fundos

[•ifkon'der]

de uma (hora)

from one

rouco ['rroku]

hoarse, hollow-

em diante

o'clock

deleitar

to delight

immediatamente

immediately

[ddvi'tctr]

correio geral

the central

ineendiar

to set on fire

fku'rrentss-

post-office

[tsendt'ar]

'rai]

rebombo

the re-echoing,

regist(r)ar

to register

[riVbombu]

cracking

«regist(r)ado»

registered

enfraqueeer

to slacken

mediante

by means of;

[tfrvhd'ser]

on payment

crepitar

to crepitate

of

[krapi'tar]

a taxa ftafv]

the tax

raio [rraiu]

the flash of

registo

the registration;

lightning, the

[rrg'gifiuj

register-office

thunder-clap

a franquia

the postage

continuo

official of a

[frv'kiv]

['kSn'tinwu]

government

a carta-postal

the letter-card

office

sella [selo]

the seal.

ordenado

the salary

postage-stamp

[ordg'naOu]

tanto . . . como

as well ... as

mensal

monthly

u, cinta ['smtv]

the wrapper

[me'sai]

impresso

the printing

desembaragado

agile

[im'prssu]

[ddzimbvrv-

a remessa de

the remittance

'saffu]

amostras

of samples

a ab'onasao

security

arranjo

the arrange-

[vbunv'svu]

ment

procurar

to procure

enderego

the address,

[pruku'rar]

[mda'resuj

direction

a referenda

reference

destinatdrio

the receiver

[rrafd'resi'e]

[d'lftinv-

a nogao

the notion

tartu]

[nu'seuj

consumo

the consump-

a collocagao

collocation,

[ko'sumu]

tion

[huluka.' svu]

place

bilhete

the picture

ocaixa ['ha,}fv]

cashier; cash-

illustrado

post-card

book

a receita

the receipt,

cargo fkargu] charge, em-

[m'svitv]

income

ployment

a respeito de

with respect to

Lesson 31.

to pretend

vencimento

the earnings,

competitor

salary

a uistrucgao

the instruction

identical

[iftru'svuj

polytechnico

polytechnical

to accomplish

[poli'tehniku

/ ,.

mediocre

mediocre

full

[md'S'iukn]

the superior

a mecanica
[via'TcvniJcv]

mechanica

to remain

acorclo

the agreement.

to earn

[is IcorffuJ

to profit

87. Exercicio.

Mau

tempo.

214

pretender
eompetidor

[TcompdU'&or]
identico

[i'lfentiku]
preencher

[prilnferj
plena [pleiuij
superior

fsuprf'orj
deixar-se ficar
i^encer [ve'serj
aprcfoeitar

dia amanhece sombrio. Parece que o tempo se poe de
ohuva. Ja chovisca, e nao admirava que nevasse, pois esta
muito frio. Seria lastima que caisse neve ou que granizasse,
per que faria muito estrago nas arvores fructiferas que estao
em flor e que perdem muito quando gela ou venta. Sopra um
vento gelido. Nuvens carregadas escurecem os ares. E evi-
dente que teremos tempestade. E precise que fechemos as
janellas, para que a chuva nao possa entrar. Veja, como o
p6 subtil sobe em remoinhos e como o vento sacode a rarndgem.
Ja caem graudes bdtegas de dgua. Graniza at6. Os passaros,
precavidos pela escuridao assustadora, emmudeceram e escon-
deram-se fremindo debaixo das folhas que fremem como elles.
Elles que a esta hora costumam voar e cantar alegremente,
nao Ihes apraz deleitar-nos com o seu canto. Relampeja. Acs
raios segue-se-lhes o rouco travao. Praza a Deus que nao nos
incendeiem a casa. Agora os terri'veis rebombos enfraquecem.
Extinguem-se os raios crepitantes e ja nao troveja. astro
de dia reapparece e sorri de novo. Faz sol e o tempo aclara.
Vejamos se ha novidade. Ha muito que nao houve tempo tao
mau, e haverd que fazer. E possivel que a graniza tenha cau-
sado algum estrago. Deus queira que nao seja assim!

88. Leitnra.
Anniincios.

1. JEmpregado preeisa-se para continuo ; ordenado reis
10000 mensaes e casa. Prefere-se homem novo e desembara-
9ado que de abona9oes. Carta escripta pelo pr6prio 4 atrencia
dando todas as informafoes e onde se p6de procurar.

2. Empregado offerece-se com boa calligraphia e perfeito
conhecimento de correspondencia em portugu6s e allemao. Da

Imperaoual and Defective Verbs. 215

referencias de 1" ordem. Qiiem pretender dirija-se ao caixeiro
da casa X.

3. Commerciante estrangeiro, novo, oiFerece-se para casa
commercial de exporta9ao. Escreve e fala as linguas allema,
francesa e inglesa e tem boas no9oes das linguas portugufisa
e italiana, Prefere colloca9ao como caixa ou guarda-livros,
tendo na sua posi9ao actual a seu cargo cobran^as e pagamen-
tos, assim como o registo das entradas e saidas de fundos. Para
tratar, das 6 em diante, Rua NN.

89. Thema.

Gorreio.

Francis, you must at once take this letter to the post.
Bead here: "Registered!" You will have it registered on pay-
ment of twopence. Here are 5 shillings: pay the registration
and the postage and bring me ten stamps at (a) a penny
and as many at a halfpenny and twopence. For the rest bring
letter-cards. It is most convenient to employ these latter for
short communications, and it is well to be provided with
them.

Actually I am altogether out of postage-stamps. And
yet I need them every day for letters for the inland post as
well as for foreign countries (o estrangeiro), for wrappers for
book-post, for remittances of samples, etc. Also the post-card
is most convenient, especially since this new arrangement
has been made that the consigner may use half of the
front side for written communications. But it is indispensable
that you leave free the room destined to the address of the
receiver. With this innovation the consumption of the picture
post- card will be further increased, as well as the receipts of
the Post Office.

Conversa^ao.

SoUcitagdo de emprego.

A. Venho a respeito d'um emprfigo vago que me consta
haver n'esta casa commercial e de que se deu parte
por annuneios.

B. E Senhor quem pretende ser competidor de F.?

A. Sou, sim, senhor. Vim apresentar-me e pedir o
interesse de ¥"■ Ex''.

B. Como se chama o senhor?

A. Chamo-me Eicardo de Sousa Almeida, criado de
ya Ex" fyour humble servant).'-

> This or something identical (seu criado, um seu criado) is
generally added to a self-introduction.

216 Lesson 32.

B. Pa^a favor de se assentar, sr. Almeida! E natural
que ja tenha tido colloca9ao identica ou parecida, nao
e verdade?

A. Ja, sim, senhor; vae em oito annos que estou em-
pregado na casa d'exportagao de Pulanoi onde tenho
tido a men cargo as cobran^as e os pagamentos, e
posso dizer que tenho preenchido o meu logar com
plena satisfac9ao dos meus superiores.

B. E porque nao se deixa la ficar? Que ^ que o
determina a mudar?

A. Tenho pouco ordenado. E indispensavel que venga
mais.

B. E quaes sao os titulos que Ihe dao direito a um
vencimento mais elevado?

A. Palo e eserevo correctamente tres linguas, conheci-
mentos esses que nao me aproveitam na minha
posi^ao actual, tao pouco como uma instruc(;ao poly-
technica e um talento, mais que mediocre, para a
mecanica.

B. Muito bem ! Nao havera diivida que chegu6mos a
um accordo.

Thirty-second Lesson. Li(?ao trigesima
segunda.

Verbs with a Double Participle.

§ 239. There are a certain number of verbs which,
besides their regular participle, form an irregular one.
The former is used for the active voice, so it has the
function of a verb; while the latter is employed in the
passive voice and as an adjective. In some of these
verbs one and the other participle are employed in-
diiferently for the active and passive voices.

N.B. — We place before the forms an a (= adivo)
or a j) (= passivo), adding to the 2^^ form — wherever
this includes an adjective meaning different from that
of the participle — the English adjective. Those forms
marked * occur only as adjectives; those marked f are
unusual or incorrect, consequently to be avoided.

' Falano (and in 2^^ place Sicrano) is employed for some
name not expressed (our "What's his name?").

Verbs with a Double Participle.
The most important of these verbs are:

217

(1) Of the First Conjugation.

Ac(c)eitar to accept (a-^p) ac(c)eitado (p.) ac(c)eito
J.sse«iar to place; to (a., p.) assentado (p.) assente sitt-

register ing; firm,

solid
Descalgar to pull off (p.) descalgado (a., p.) descalgo

(shoes, etc.)
Despertar to awake

(p.) despertado

Dispersar to dis- (a., p.) dispersado

perse, scatter
Entregar to deliver, (a., p.) entregado

Iiand
Enxugar to dry (a., p.) enxugado

Escusar to excuse, (a., p.) escusado

to justify ; to

exempt (see escon-

der)
Expressar to express (a., p.) expressado

(see also exprimir)

Expulsar to expel (see

also expellir)
Fartar to satiate

Findar to finish

(a.) expulsado
(a.) fartado

(a., p.) findado

Fixar to fix (a-,P-) iixado

Ganhar to earn, gain (a., p.) ganhado
Gastar to expense, (a.) gastado

use, consume

Ignorar to ignore ((i-,P-) ignorado

Inquietar to disquiet, (a., p.) inquietado

trouble
Isentar to exempt, to (a.) isentado

free

Juntar to join

(a.jp.) juntado

barefooted
(p.) desperto

sprightly;

intelligent
(p.) disperso

(p.) entregue

(p.) enxuto dry
(p.) escuso secret;
unnecessa-
ry

(p.) expresso
express ;
explicit

(p.) expidso

(p.) farto

abundant ;
satisfied ;
weary
(p.) findo last,

past
(p.) fixo
(a., p.) ganho
(a., p.) gasto

(p.) ignoto

unknown,
obscure
('^') inquieto
uneasy

(p.) «seM<o exempt
or free (by
privilege)
(a., p.) junto

together

218

Lesson 32.

Limpar to clean
Manifestar to mani-
fest

Matar to kill

(see also niorrer)
Mistitrar to mis

OccuUar to hide

Pagar to pay

Quietar^ to quiet,
calm

Salvar to save

SepuUar to bury

Soltar to untie, re-
lease

Sujeitar to subject,
subdue

Sitspeitar to suspect

Vagal- to be vacant or
void ; to stroll about

(a.) limpado
(a., p.) manifestado

(a.) matado

(a., p.) mistiirado

(a.) occtdtado
(a.) pagado
(a.) quietado

(a., p.) salvado
(a., p.) sepultado
(a.) soltado

(a., p.) sujeitado

(a. .p.) suspeitado

(a.) vagado

(a., p.) limpo clean
C) manifesto
manifest,
apparent

(a., p.) morto dead

f) jidsto or
inixto
(p.) occuUo
(a.,p.) pago

('") quieto quiet,
calm
(a., p.) salvo safe,
(p.) unhurt
(p.) solto loose;

free
(p.) sujeito

(p.) suspeito

suspicious

(■■) vago vacant,

void; vague.

(2) Of the

Ahsoloer to absolve (a.
Absorver to absorb (a.
Accender to light (a.
Corromper to corrupt
Eleger to elect

Esconder to hide

(see also escusar)
Escreoer to write
Estender to extend (a.

Incorrer to incur
Incolver to involve
Morrer to die

(see also matar)
Prender to seize, to

catch, to arrest
Pretender to pretend (a.
Resolver to resolve (a.

Second Conjugation.

,p.) absolvido

,p.) absorvido

,p.) aecendido

(a.) corrompido

(a.) elegido

(a.) escondido

(a.) escrevidof
,p.) estendido

(a.) incorrido
(a.) involvido
(a.) morrido

(a.) prendido

;P.) pretendido
,p.) resolvido

(p.) absolto
(p.) absdrto
(p.) acceso
(p.) corrupto
(a., p.) eleito elect,
chosen
(p.) escuso

(a., p.) escripto
(") extenso ex-
tensive
(p.) incurso
(p.) involto
(a., p.) morto dead

(p.) preso fast,
imprisoned

(p.) pretenso

(p.) resoluto

resolute

1 More usually: aquietar, whicli has the only participle
aqiiietado. In quietar as well as in vagar only the irregular par-
ticiple is used and in its adjective meaning.

Verbs with a Double Participle.

219

Rmnper to break, tear (a.) rompido (p.) roto ragged

Surpre(h)ender to sur- (a., p.) surpre(h)en- surpreso

prise dido

Suspender to suspend (a.) suspendido (p.) suspenso

suspense
Torcer to twist (a-,P-) torcido (p.) idrfe crooked,

tortuous.
(3) Of the Third Conjugation.

Ahrir to open
Affligir to afflict,

grieve
Cobrir to cover
Concluir to conclude
Contrahir to contract
Distinguir to dis-
tinguish
Erigir to erect
Espargir to spread
Expellir to expel

(see also expulsar)
Exprimir to express
(see also expressar)

(a.) abridof
(a.) affligido

(a.) cohridof
(a., p.) concluido
(a., p.) contrahido

(a.) distinguido

(a., p.) erigido
(a.) espargido
(a.) expellido

(a.) exprimido

Extinguir to

tinguish
Extrahir to extract
Frigir to fry
Imprimir to print
Incluir to include
Inserir to insert
Opprimir to oppress,

afflict
Instruir to instruct
Possuir to possess
Eeprimir to repress
Surgir to anchor
Tingir to dye

ex- (d.jp.) extinguido

(a., p.) extrahido
(a.) frigido

(a., p.) imprimido,

(a., p.) incluido
(a.) inserido

(a., p.) opprimido

(a., p.) dberto open
(p.) afjKcto sorry

(a., p.) coherto
(p.) concluso
(p.) contracto
(p.) distinclo

distinct
(p.) erecto erect
(p.) esparso
(p.) expidso

(p.) expresso
express,
explicit
(p.) extincto

extinct
(p.) extracto
(a., p.) frito
(a., p.) impresso

(p.) incluso
(a., p.) inserto
(p.) oppresso

Aviuvafw'uvvJ the widow

OS pesames the condolence

(a., pi.) instruido
(a., p.) possuido
(a,, p.) reprknido

(a.) surgido

(a.) tingido

PalaTras.

ehefe [fsfa]

(p.) instructof

C) possesso

(p.) represso

(p.) surto

(p.) tinto.

['pezvmffj
a assento
prazo

concurso

the seat
the term, ap-
pointed day
the competition

a roupa ['rropiij the linen,
clothes

the chief; head;
principal
jurado the juryman

por conseguinte consequently
reeem-chegado the newcomer

[rrdsfeif} 'ga.&u]
a apparencia the appearance
ingrediente the ingredient
[igrgd} 'entgj

220

Lesson 32.

a droga f'dropyj

the drug

a circular

the circular

a cocQcio

the cootion

por-se

to set

fkok'seuj

a dnimo

the mind

depwtado

the deputy

['nnimuj

liberal

the liberal

a oppressdo

the oppression

fms'ral]

emquanto

■while

a offerta

the oifer

contimiar

to continue

apresentar

to present

por do sol

the setting {oi

ci'ir de laranja

orange-
coloured

the) sun.

90. Exercicio.

A viuva do sr. N. tern ac(c)eitado todas as peasoas que
foram dar-lhe os p6zames pelo fallecimento do marido; foram
todas ac(c)eitas. Eu tinha-me assentado num assento baixo e la
fiquei assentada. Este muro estA bem assents. Na semana finda
tem-se findado (better: findou-se) o prazo fixo para o concurso
do emprego vago. Assim que tiver entregado a carta, ella estara
entregue. sol tern enxugado bem a roupa; agora ella ja estd
enxuta. chefe tinha expressado aos empregados a sua vonfcade
expressa. Tambem tinha fixado o ordenado de todos e deter-
minado os dias fixos em que seria pago. r6u que foi suspeito e
preso, como inv6lto no crime, ficou absolvido; absolveram-no os
jurados ; jd esta solto e salvo. A mae d'elle, a quem a desgraga do
filho tinha affligido muito, jd nao estd afflicta, mas quieta.
governo tinha suspendido as garantias que por conseguinte
estavam suspensas. E de admirar que nao tivessem distin-
guido OS recem-chegados, pois teem appareneia muito distincta.
rapaz, com medo manifesto, tinha-se escondido n'um logar
muito escuso. Para fazer esta droga tinhamos misturado vdrios
ingredientes bem limpos que, depois de bem mistos, foram
sujeitos a uma coc^ao cuidadosa. Viemos nnm comb6io misto.
Os olhos ja muito abertos, tinham-se-lhe abrida mais ainda.

91. Thema.

Who has been elected deputy? A Liberal has been
chosen. Had you already resolved to insert an advertisement
on account of the vacant place? Yes, it has been already
inserted, and I am resolved to accept the place if it is offered
to me, for it is exempt from taxes. Enclosed I present you an
open letter of Mr. N. N., which I opened at his express desire.
In a printed circular he communicates that, his partner
having died last month, the old firm is extinct, bat that he
has resolved to continue the old business under a new name.
See how beautifully the sun has dyed the clouds ! Some
are rose, others are yellow, those others orange-coloured
or fire-coloured. The whole sky on (por) which they are dis-

The Adverbs. 221

parsed is covered by them. Also the masts of the ships
anchored in the harbour are gilded by the setting sun. Calm
your minds! Those who were oppressed are safe and free
from oppression, while the oppressors have been expelled.

Thirty-third Lesson. Li^o trigesima
terceira.

The Adverbs. Adverbios [a.d'verhiuf].

§ 240. The adverbs express the circumstances in
which an action, a quality, or a state has occurred, and
so determine either a verb, an adjective, or another
adverb. We distinguish: 1. original adverbs; 2. derived
adverbs; 3. those which in their form are equal to the
adjective; 4. adverbial expressions.

§ 241. The original adverbs are divided into:

1. Interrogative and Relative

(inter rogativos e relativos).

These generally are the same when relating to place

or time: onde (d'onde, aonde), qtiando. Onde estd? Aonde

vaeP D'onde rem? No jardim, onde esfire, aonde fiii,

d^onde vim . . Quando reio? Xo dia quando veto . . .

2. Adverbs of Place (de logar).

These answer to the questions "where, whither,
whence?" onde? d'onde? aonde'? por onde?:

aqui, cd here abaixo, debaixo down, below

ahi, all, Id, acold there aqtdm on this side

atrds, detrds behind cdhn on the other side

adiante, deante before, in front ; dlgtires anywhere

to the front nenhures nowhere

dentro within ; inside perto \

fdra oatside cerca ]

acima \ above longe far

ari-iba ] "' embora away.

3. Adverbs of Time (de tempo).

These answer to the question "when?" quando?

Hoje to-day antehontem the day before

hontem yesterday yesterday

222

Lesson 33.

tarde late

entao then

agdra, 6ra now

logo presently, directly

jd already, now, immediately

ainda still

amiudo, amiude often.

amanha to-morrow
sempre always, ever
nunca, jamais never
depots afterwards
outr'ora formerly
primeiro before, first
antes sooner, before
cedo soon

4. Adverbs of Manner (de maneira).
These answer to the question "how?" como?

Bern well antes rather

mal badly sequer at least

melhor better assim so, thus

peor worse assim assim so so.
aparte separately

5. Adverbs of Quantity (de quantidade).
These'answer to the question "how much?" quanta?
qitdo?

Tao, tanto so, so (or as) much
muito much, very
(o) mais more, most
pouco little
(o) menos less, least
demais, demasiado too (much)

bastante \ ,

; enough
assaz / °

quasi almost, nearly
urn bocado de a little, some-
what
apenas hardly, scarcely
quanto mais . . . tanto mais

the more . . . the more
so, sdmente only
nada nothing.

6. Adverbs of Affirmation (affirmativos), of Negation
(negativos), and of Doubt (de duvida).
nada not at all
jd ndo

nao \
'...jd(
ica never,
so perhapi
dca \ ,

iL } p^'^^^p^-

nao .

nunca never, ever

acaso perhaps

quiga

talvez ,

.S(»j yes

certamente certainly, to be sure

ate even

ainda moreover

alias else, moreover

realmente really, indeed

nao no, not, neither

nem not even; nor; neither

§ 242. Derived Adverbs.

These adverbs are formed by adding the syllable
-mente to the feminine form of the attributive adjective
(in the positive degree as well as in that of the absolute
superlative) or to that of the past participle of the pas-

The Adverbs. 223

sive voice, employed as an adjective : justamente justly,
exactly, at that very moment; devidamente duly; assi-
gndladamente remarkably; riguissimamente most richly,
etc. In some adjectives ending in -es (formerly having
been uniform), the adverb is composed with the mascu-
line form: portuguesmente in a Portuguese manner.

N.B. — It is understood that uniform adjectives add the
ending -mente to their form common to both genders: feliz-
mente happily.

§ 243. Of two or more adverbs following one
another, only the last adds the ending -mente, while
the preceding take only the feminine form : darei franca,
sincera e lealmente o meu voto. I shall give my vote
frankly, sincerely, and truly.

§ 244. The derived adverb is as subject to com-
parison as the adjective, being governed by the same
rules : Fiquei ainda mais agradavelmente surpre(h)endido.
I was still more agreably surprised.

§ 245. As already stated, the Portuguese prefer,
wherever possible, the simple form to the complicated.
They like to employ the adjective instead of the derived
adverb or the adverbial locution. The adjective so
employed is put with or without a preposition imme-
diately behind the verb and is called:

Adjective apposto ou circnmstancial.

Examples.

tempo passa rdpido (instead of com rapidez or ra-

pidamente).
povo escuta dvido (instead of com avidez or avidamente).
pulso hatia desordenado (instead of em desordem or

desordenadamente) .
Saltou de contente (instead of de contentamento).
Quando se respira fundo, o ar enche completamente os

pulmSes.
When you breathe deeply, the air completely fills the

lungs.

In some locutions the use of the adjective instead
of the adverb is obligatory;— e.g.:

Falar alto, haixo to speak loud, low
voar alto (haixo) to fly high, deep

224 Lesson 33.

andar direito to go upright or straight on ; to act

honestly
ir direito a to go straight on
ir seguro to go or be safe
ir or andar ligeiro to go quickly
vender caro to sell dear
comprar barato to buy cheap
levar caro to charge (too) much
custar caro to be expensive.

§ 246. Remarks to § 241.

1. The comparative of bem is melhor or mais hem;
the one of mal is peor or mais mal. The latter form
is used before a participle: mais bem feito; menos mal
pensado.

2. After antes (= rather) "than" can be ren-
dered by qiie or do que: Antes quero isto (do) que
aquillo.

3. Certain adverbs correspond, with respect to their
origin or meaning, to certain pronouns — e.g.:

aqiii, cd corresponding to the demonstrative este
ahi » » » » esse

alii, Id, acold '■> ■/> s> » aquelle.

Such adverbs are therefore denominated adverbios
pronominaes and divided into:

(a) demonstrativos : aqui, ahi, all, acold, entdo, tdo,
tanto ;

(b) relativos: onde, d'onde;

(c) iiiterrogativos : onde? quando? como? quao?
quanto?

(d) indefinidos: algures, nenhures.

4. Tao and qudo correspond to tanto and quanto
(see Pronouns), with the difference that the former
determine adjectives and other adverbs, while the latter
only modify verbs.

N.B. — Instead of quao you may in most cases
put que.

Falou tdo alto que . . . Falou tanto que . . . M-a tdo rico

que . . .
Era tdo amante da verdade que nem zombando (not even

in joke) mentia.

The Adverbs.

225

Nuo fas ideia qicao (or qice) hella 6 a vista e qttao (or que)
sagazmente aproveitdda! (and how cleverly taken ad-
vantage of).
EUe hem sdbia quanta eu o esiimava.
Beside the "true adverbs, there are a great many
adverbial locutions (locugoes adverbiaes), formed out of
several words one of which generally is a preposition — e.g. :
A CMSto hardly, with diffi- de fdme with hunger

otherwise

culty
de conttnuo continually
p07- Ventura happily, by chance
d mao (de) at hand
por dentro inwardly
par fdra inwardly
do mesmo mddo in the same

way
de outro mddo
de outra fdrma
de certo, por certo certainly
de mddo algum by no means
ao certo exactly
d uma altogether
n'um pronto in an instant
por alto superficially
de alto a haixo from top to

toe
longe d'isso by far
de contente \ -ii, •
de alegria ) ^ "^

pessego the peach

['pesagfuj

o lavrador the country-

[IvwB'&orJ man

extasiar-se to be enchanted

/?/te 'ztarssj with

partir-se to part with

guardar to guard

[gwvr'dar]

caroQO the stone

[kv 'rosuj

tocar (alg. c.) a to fall to one's

alguem share

acudir to interrupt

guloso [gu'lozu] greedy

apanhar to snatch up

[vpv'parj
Portuguese Couversation-Grammai-

de cdr by heart

de halde \ ■ ,

em vao f ^

de vagar slowly

por acaso by chance

de propdsito intentionally, on

purpose
a propdsito de with regard to
ffl saber namely
lis avessas oppositely
de bom grade willingly
de mdo grado unwillingly
mdo grado men against my

wish
d tda at random
por acaso by chance
aleiii d'isso moreover
ao de leve slightly
« pressa, de fugida hastily,

hurridly
em midia on an average.
Palavras.

menear a cabega to shake one's

head
engenhdso ingenious

[igVyozu]
cdlculo the calculation

['kaiTciiluJ
enleiado bashful

[ilvy 'ad'u]
enternecido touched

[Uarnd 'siffuj
ethereo [i'tenu] ethereal
subsistir to subsist

[subsaj'tir]
assento the seat

[v 'sentiij
werecer to merit, be

[m.ir.i'ser] worth

226

Lesson 33.

mono ['menuj

brother

atlas ['dtlnj]

the atlas

remedio

the remedy

provar

to taste ; to try

frra'me&iu]

fpru'var]

on

a memdria

the memory

taXhar [te 'Har]

to cut

[md'morjv]

escuro

dark

a mdgua

the grief, pang

desbotar

to discolour,

['maffWBj

[digbu'tar]

fade

encui-tar

to shorten

embasbacar

to be quite

[ikur'tar]

[Ibngbv 'karj

taken aback

a chaga ['fa,(ys]

the wound

solsticio

the solstice

a desfeita

the offence

[solftigiu]

[dtf'fnfe]

revezar-se
[rrava' zarsd]

to relieve one

osculo

the kiss

another, to

fjfkulu]

alternar-se

do ... by

traidor

treacherous

[altar' narsa]

turns.

ftrnt'dor]

87.

Ex

ercicio.i

Os Pessegos.
Um lavrador que tinha quatro filhos trouxe-lhes um dia
cinco p§3segos magnlficos. Os pequenos, que nunca tinbam visto
semelhantes fructos, extasiaram-se hastante deaute das suas c6res
e da fina peunugem que os cobria. A' noite o pae perguntou-
Ihes: — Entdo comestes os p6ssegos?

— Eu comi, sim, senhor — disse o mais velho. — Que
bom que era! Gaardei cd o carS^o. e hei-de plantd-lo logo,
para depois nascer uma arvore.

— Fizeste bem ! — respondeu o pae satisfeito.

— Eu — disse o mais novo, saltando de contente — o
meu pSssego comi-o logo ; e a mae ainda me deu metade do
que Ihe tocou a ella. Era does como mel!

— Ah! — acudiu o pae, censurando-o hrandamente —
foste um bocadinho guloso, mas na tua edada nao admira.
Espero sinceramente que, quando tores homem, te has-de corrigir.

— Pois eu cd — disse o terceiro — a,^a,nhei prontamente
o car690 que o meu irmao deitou fora, quebrei-o a custo e
comi que estava dentro, que era como uma noz. Vendi o
meu pfissego, e com o dinheiro hei de comprar coisas mais tarde
quando for a cidade. pae meneou a cabe9a, descontente :

— Pensaste engenhosamente, mas eu preferia menos cal-
culo e que tivesses obrado de outro modo. Dize-me cd in,
Eduardo, acaso provaste o teu pfissego?

— Ea, meu pae, — respondeu enleiado o pequeno, —
levei-o a casa do visinho onde o Jorge, coitado, esta com a
febre. Deixei-lh'o em cima da cama e vim-me embdra imme-
diatamente.

' State to which class of adverbs belong those printed in
italics in the Exeroicio 87.

The Adverbs. 227

— Ora hem — perguntou o pae — qual de v6s e que
empregou mellior o pessOgo?

— Poi mano Eduardo! disseram os tres pequenos d
uma e num pronto. Esse, entretanto, ndo dizia palavra, e a
mae abra90u-o enternecida. (After Guerra Junqueiro.)

88. Leitura.
SonSto.
Alma minha gentil, que te partiste
Tao cedo d'esta vida descontente,
Repousa la no ceo eternamente,
E viva eu ca na terra sempre triste.

Se la no assento ethereo, onde subsiste,
Memoria d'esta vida se consente,
Nao te esqueijas d'aquelle amor ardente,
Que ja nos olhos meus tao puro viste.

E se vires que pode merecer-te
Algnma coisa a dor que me ficou
Da magua, sem remedio, de perder-te,

Roga a Deus que teus annos encurtou,

Que tao cedo de ca me leve a v6r-te,

Quao cedo de meus olhos te levou. (Camoes.)

Antes a pobreza honrada
Do que a riqueza roubada.

Antes a cbaga feita Que a desfeita

For amor, De uni osculo traidor.

(Joao de Deus.)
89. Tliema.

Where can my atlas be? Have you perhaps seen it?
No, I have not ; if you had duly laid it on its place, you
would find it there. But look, there it is ! Not there where you
look for it, but there, near the window. — When did the
tailor bring my coat? Yesterday afternoon about four o'clock.
He went hurriedly away, saying that he would come here to-day
or to-morrow, to try it on you. The coat seems to be some-
what wide. Not only somewhat but very wide, nearly too
wide; but it is most carefully sewn and well cut. How do
you like the colour? So so; perhaps it might have been a
little darker. I do not like dark colours much ; and, moreover,
this colour does not fade so much as another darker. Was
the cloth very expensive? Good cloth is never bought cheap.
The better it is, the dearer it is sold. And also the tailor
asks rather a high price. By (tr. : com) his bills I have been
sometimes quite taken aback.

2iiS J.esson 34.

Conversa^iTo.

Unde nasce o sol e onde se poe?

A que horas se levanta o sol nos dias de solsticio ?

Quando temos o dia mais cumprido e a noite mais

curta?
Donde vem que ha varias esta9oes ?
Porque e que se revezam o dia e a noite?
Como se move uma loeomotiva? urn navio de vela? um

automovel etc. ?
Onde desemboca o rio Tejo ? o rio Douro ? o rio Mon-

dego? Gnadiana?
Acaso me sabe dizer onde e a estaQao do caminho de

feiTO ?
Quanto tempo leva ate Id ?

Thirty-fourth Lesson. Li^ao trigesima
quarta.

The Conjunctions. As ConjuncQoes [Idsusd-ifJ.

§ 247. The conjunction joins sentences or por-
tions of sentences, and is invariable — e.g.: Desejo, mas
tcnw I desire, but fear. Here mas is a conjunction
which joins the two predicates dcscjo and tenio, opposing
one til the other. If we say: desejo v. o temor inquie-
tam-ntc, the conjunction e joins di;srjo and temor, subjects
of the same predicate.

§ 24S. A conjunction not only jo'ins sentences
or parts of them, but it brings them into a certain
relation, making the one dependent on the other ac-
cording to their tenor. Therefore we distinguish:

1. According to their signification, two great classes
of conjunctions: the co-ordinates (coordinativas) and the
subordinates (sidiordinaf/vas).

2. According to their form we distinguish simple
(siiiqilcs) and compound conjunctions (locuQoes conjunc-
tivas).

§ 241t. The co-ordinate conjunctions oxAy join sen-
tences, etc. There are:

(a) copulative (copiuhdicits e coidiunativas);

(b) explicative (c-pUcativas) ;

The Conjunctions. 229

(c) disjunctive (disjunctivas) ;

(d) adversative (adversativas) ;

(e) conclusive (conclusivas) ;

(f) comparative (comiMrativas) ;

(g) correlative (correlativas).

§ 250. The subordinate conjunctions join sen-
tences, etc., making them dependent on one another.
There are:

(a) conditional (condicionaes) ;

(b) causative (causaes);

(c) final (finaes);

(d) concessive (concessivas) ;

(e) temporal (circumstanciaes do tempo);

(f) integral and dubitative (integr antes e dubita-
tivas).

§ 251. Summary of tlie Conjunctions.

Remark. — Those marked with " require the verb of the clause
in the subjunctive mood ; those marked with (*) m^y be followed
by the subjunctive or indicative, according to the certainty or un-
certainty expressed by the sentence. Those compounded with de
are followed by the infinitive.

A. Coordenativas.

(a) Copiilativas.

ConjuncQoes sitnplefi. Locvrjoes eguivalentes.

E and hem assim yet

tambem also ndo su(mente) . . . mas tambem

nem nor not only . . but also

nem sequer not even
tampouco no more, as little
nuo . . . mas sim not . . . but

on the contrary
ta'iito . . . como as well as; both

. and
assim como as also
alem de besides

7« (que^ . . . jd (que) since ;
as soon as; now . . . now.

Pois well, why em or na verdade indeed

ora now, yet; why com effeito indeed; really

outrosim also, likewise, moreover. alem d'isso besides, moreover

alem de que or do que except or
save that

de mais, de mats a mais moreover.

230

Leason 34.

(b) Explicaliras.

Como as.

msim como j ^ ji ^,

oem como |

*camo se as if

('*/fe (tal) sorte que i in a way

{*](k maneira que I that ;

(*}(fe morfo (or geito) I so as

que I to

"como gaer que however

i*>segundo (que) ] accordineto
Cconforme {que) I according to.

Oh or.

Mas but
parem yet
todavia however.

(c) Disjimctivas

(*;o» .

nem
ora .
*quer .

oil or . . . or
. nem neither . . nor
ora now . . . now
quer whether ... or.

(d) AdTcrsativa^.

apesar de in spite of

comtudo yet, however

ni'io obstante notwithstanding

AC)» embargo de ] ,, ,

•„ 7„ ? I nevertheless

atnaa asstm )

(* antes rather

no entanto however

senna otherwise ; hut

qtuznto a with regard to.

(ti Conclu-iiva
Logo ( so, therefore, con- por conseguirUe

j>ois \ soquently.

- . consequently
por consequencia I ^ •'

p(H' isso, por fcoito accordingly

por <mde, peh que wherefore

:*Jassim que j ^^ ^^^^^

,, Joe maneira que |

*)covi que wherewith.

before

(f) Coiuparativas.

^Inis (doj que more than ''antes que 1

menos (do) que less than "primeiro Cque) |

como as

{■■;) Correlativas.

((-.S('iH co»w such as assim como . assim (tambem)

tao . que so that such as . . so also

quanto . . . tanto the (more) . . .
the (more;

qual ■ tal like . . . like

como sc as if

(*)tcd . . que so that, etc.

as, considering

Tlie Conjunctions. 281

B. Subordinativas.
(a) Condicionaes.

i*}Se if, whether. "com tanto que \

*caso or caso que I if, in case

*dado caso que | of

(_*)quando I

*sem que without, except

*a nao ser que j

a nienos de I if not, unless,

*a menos que | saving

salvo se I

{*}uma vez qu^ if ever.

(It) and (c) Causaes e flnaes.
Porque, que because Jd que

i*)como as pais que

pais because, as. por quanta que

visto como

{*yvisto que

sendo que

para que nao Jest

por isso que by reason of, on

account of
pelo muito que for (the ssike of).

(d) Concessiyas.

*Emhora though (^)ainda que even if, though,

although
''comquaiito que 1
*se hem que \ though

*pois (que) j

(*)posto que I supposed

*suppo8to que \ or provided

*dado or caso que ) that
por mais (or muito) que however

much'
como quel- que (seja) however

(it be).

(e) Circnmstanciaes de tempo.

Como 1 V i^)tanto que inasmuch as, so far

(^)as8im que

{*)antes que 1 , ,

{*}primeiro que j

desde que since

(^)depois que after

ao passo que \ , .,

(^)emquanto (que) J

3'««'»<^« ^ O^SO que j ^^ ^^^^ ^^

232 Lesson 34.

{*)ate que until

ens (witli the Genmd.) in, while
(*)se»!pre que whenever
{*)todas as vezes que any time
when

(!') Iiitegraiites e dubitativas.

i*)Que that if *se porventuar 1 .^ .j^

.se if, whether *se acaso ) "^ '^

*se if
*quanclo when

§ 252. Eoiiurhs:

(a) A great many of the conjunctions are simply
adverbs, nouns, or adjectives with prepositions:

(b) By the preposition a and the infinitive you
may supply conditional conjunctions.

A nao haver que faze) — i.e., s^ nuo Jiouver or caso nua
haja que fazer.

(c) Se, introducing a condition or supposition, is
generally followed by the subjunctive (future); employed
in an indirect question, by the indicative; if in any
other indirect speech, it may be followed by the sub-
junctive or the indicative, according to the certainty or
uncertainty it expresses — e.g. :

.Se /;>er horn tempo if it be good weather.

Perguntei se fazia honi tempo.

I asked if the weather was good.

Va ver (or diz-ine), se faz horn tempo.

See (or tell me) if the weather' is good.

Si'io sei se faz (or faga) bom tempo.

I don't know whether the weather is (or be) good.

(d) The conjunction que most commonly introduces
a dependent substantive clause (which may be also
elliptical), as:

Cre/o que tern razao I believe you are right.
Creio que nao I think not.
Creio que sbti I think so.

In English the conjunction "that" is frequently
understood, whereas que is not only always expressed

The Conjunctions.

283

in Portuguese, but repeated before each clause of the
sentence, as:

Creio que tern razao e que serd bem succedido.

I think you are right and (that you) will succeed.

(e) When a conjunction governs several verbs, it
is placed before the first verb only, and que may be
used instead before the other verbs. This is especially
the case with the conjunctions compounded with que. Ex. :

Se fdr (or caso seja) applicado e (que) tenha intelligencia.
If he is (or be) diligent and has intelligence.

Palavras,

exhausted

Esfalfado

[iffaVfacfu]
viudavel

[mu'd'avei]
prescindir

[prtfsin'dirj
canao de

pedra
o comhustivel

[komhuf 'tiveij
gaz [ga,f] the gas

potavel

[pti'taviij
despresar

[dyfprs 'za,r]
superior
u, novels [now]
o (navio)

paquete
o acaso

changeable

to prescind,
to extract
the coal

full

potable,

drinkable
to despise

superior

the news

the packet boat

confonnar-se
com alg. t.
custa-me

nadador

[wedv '(For]
mentiroso

[menU'rozu]
ir a pique [pik]
a andorinha

[vndu'ripe]
domestico

[du'meftiku]
concluir

the accident,

chance
to comply with

I find difficult

or hard
the swimmer

the liar

to sink
the swallow

tame, domestic

to conclude

afoito [■e'foytu] hardy

comedo

[ku 'mesu]
a dogura

[du'swv]
meigo ['rmiigu]
presentir

[prdsen'tir]
ninJio ['niyu]
chocar [fu'kar]
ediicar [i&u'kar]
macho

[mafu]
a femea ['fennv]
extremuso \

[iftrd' mozu]
amordso

[nmw'rozu]
animar

[eni'mai]
sentido

[sen 'tiffuj
rasteiro

[rrvf'tviru]
a piso [pizu]
estar irado

contre alg.
sonhar [su'yar]
magoar

[mvgu'ar]
candrio

[kv 'naryu]
melro ['metnij
passar par
esperto

[y"pertu]
yrito

the beginning

the softness

soft, tender
to feel, anti-
cipate
the nest
to breed
to bring up
the male

the female

loving, fond,
tender

to animate

the sentiment

low

the ground
to be angry

with someone
to dream
to hurt

the canary-
bird
the blackbird
to be considered
clever, sly

the warbling

234

Lesson 34.

chamariz

[fsme'rifj
a delida

fda'listej
selvagem.

[set 'vagEiJ
cantador

[hints' &or]
pobre ['pobn]

the bird-call
the delight
savage, wild
the singer
poor

fregues

[frc'ftef]
nioQO ['mosuj
fluminense

[flumi'nensa]
a revista

[m'viftv]
o troco ['troJcu]

the customer

the waiter
of Rio de
Janeiro
the review

the change, ex-
change.

90. Exercicio.

cavallo correu tanto que ficou esfalfado. A belleza e
a riqueza sao mudaveis. homem nao pode prescindir nem
do alimento nem da roupa. Nao so esta, mas tambem aquelle
sao-lhe precises. carvao de pedra emprega-se come com-
bustivel, com elle tambem se prepara o gaz. A agua do mar
nao i potavel ; nem ella pode empregar-se na cozinha. ho-
mem nao deve ter demasiado cuidado no seu exterior; tam-
pouco elle deve despreza-lo. Londres e maior do que Lisboa ;
comtudo esta cidade esta numa posi^ao superior. Assim (que)
eu me veja em porto seguro, podes estar certo que hei de dar-
te novas minhas ; emqnanto porem estiver em viagem, nao
havera occasiao, a nao ser que se encontre um navio (paqu6te).
Como nao se pode contar com este acaso, melhor e que nao
contes com noticias, por mais que eu desejasse mandar-t'as para
que te nao afflijas. PeQO que te conformes com isso, posto que te
custe. nadador e o mentiroso, se abrirem muitas vezes a b6ca,
ir-se-hao a pique.

91. Leitura.

A andorinha.
A andorinha e essencialmente dom(5stica: nao vive senao
{or a nao ser) ao pe do bomem. Onde virmos uma andorinha,
podemos concluir, sem que haja receio de errarmos, que nas
visinhangas ha habita9oes. E ella a toda a hora entra afoita-
mente nas habita9oes, como se ella propria fosse da familia.
Todavia, a andorinha passa metade do anno longe de nos, —
na Africa d'onde vem no comedo da primavera, procurando a
meiga do(jura do nosso clima, e para onde se retira no comeco
do outono, logo que presente os primeiros frios. A mesma
andorinha volta ordinariamente aos mesmos logares, e ate ao
mesmo ninho ; mas se o local Ih'o consente, faz um ninho novo
ao p^ e por cima do anterior, e ahi vive com o seu compa-
nheiro pacifioa e amorosamente : ella, a chocar os ovos, em-
quanto elle occupa e protege a entrada do ninho. Macho e
ftmea sao extremosissimos pelos filhos e educam-nos maravilho-
samente: emquanto pequeninos nao cessam de Ihes trazer de
comer. Depois dao-lhes as suas li^oes de voo; e nao somente

The Conjunctions. 235

OS ensinam a voar, mas aiuda os animam n'esses exercicios
— quer com tao expressivos gorgeios que o sentido d'estes quasi
se adivinha; quer voando elles proprios (ou) adeante dos filhos
ou ao lado, para que Ihes possam acudir quando for precise. —
As andorinhas vivem dos insectos ; e como estes ora voam mais
alto, ora mais baixo, segundo faz mais ou menos calor, acon-
tece que a andorinha os persegue em v6os rasteiros, sobre as
folhas, sobre as bervas, e at6 no piso das ruas.

(After Trinde Coelho : 2" Livro de Leitura).

92. Thema.

I forbid it him, nevertheless he went. Though he said
nothing, I well felt that he was angry with me, since I
had blamed him. I shall go, whether it rain or be good
weather. You do not know, you don't even dream how you
are hurting me. A canary-bird if treated as it ought to be, can
live for twenty years. The blackbird is generally considered
very clever, but it is not so much (or: less) so as it seems.
Moreover, it makes its nest very often near to man and
is lured (atrair) by the bird-call, though this be only a poor
instrument. As all of us know already the warbling of the
blackbird, we can declare that it is a delight. Yet it is not
on account of its wild song that the blackbird merits the
reputation which it has as a singer ; but rather on account of
that which it learns after being taken, be it by learning by
heart what it is taught or what it hears of the elder birds,
or by imitating all ,it hears, consequently also the sounds
of instruments and the voice of persons.

Conversa^ao.

N'um cafe.

Fregues: 6 sr. Manuel, faz o favor d'uma chavena

de caf6 e os jornaes d'hoje?
M690: Pronto, senhor! Eis «Commercio doPorto»,

o «Fluminense» ', «Diario lUustrado*;

tambem deseja alguma revista?
Fregues: Queria. Ha a nIUustraQao portuguesa» e a

«Kevista de Bem»?
Mo 90: Ha, sim, senhor. Tambem «0s Seroes»^, o

«Branco e Preto» e outras.

' Fluminense is the adjective formed of Rio de Janeiro,
o Fluminense is a newspaper published there.

^ «Seroes^, pi. of serdo = evening-party. Os Seroes, Branca
e Preto and Illustragao imrtucjuesa are illustrated reviews.

236 Lesson 35.

Fregues: Bern, traga-m'as. E olhe que hei de querer

mais assucar!
iIo9o: Quanto V^ Ex* quizer, sr. doutor. Manda

mais alguma ccisa?
Fregues: Sim. Depois deter percorrido estes jornaes,

qneria escrever alguns bilhetes postaes.

Tem-nos illustrados?
M6?o: Tenho. Eil-os. Queira V" Ex» escolher.
Fregues: Esta bem. E estampilhas ? Como teem des-

tino para o estrangeiro, cada um precisa

d'uma a vint6m ou de duas a dez reis.

Aqui tem dois tostoes.
M (I (,• : Nao tenho troco ; vou trocal-os la dentro.
FreguSs: Deixe estar, que estao em boas maos.
Moi-o: Muito obrigado a V^^ Ex".

Thirty-fiftli Lesson. Li^ao trigesima
quinta.

Interjections. Interjeigoes [mtgrge 'soffj.

§ 253. Interjections are cries or exclamations
which express sudden emotions. They are invariable
and mostly short. The most common are:

Ah! Ah! bravo! bravo! very well!

oh! oh! oh! bless me! bis! once more!

hui! ai^! oh, dear! alas! ahpite! the deuce

ih! lo! catrapuz! bounce! dash!

fora! begone! hence! off! plump!

come out! (for actors) 6! oh! (used as a vocative)

irra! zounds! for shame! It's roitado! coitadinho! 'poor man

too much! (dear darling)!

o.ni/d! would to God! silencio! silence!

oh't, hold! holla! halloo! psch! schiu! hush!

(lie, oU! zounds! diabo! \ the deuce!

:us:! slap! crack! diacho! f zounds!

hasta! enough! stop! that apre ! hang it! confound it!

will do! arre! gee-ho! ho!

tin! SHs! animo! cheer up! cnj! shne!
riea! Long live! hurrah! hail!

' Ai de mini poor me! at de ros (d'elles)! woe unto you
(them) !

Interjections.

237

§ 254. Besides these there are several interjections
which (as already the two last do) express a call for
animals — e.g.: his-his;!^ pussy, pussy! to call cats; if!
to incite cats; hs! to incite dogs. — There are also a
series of imitation-sounds, as: trus! trus! tapl knock!
rap! rat-tat-tat!; toe! too! tramp! tramp!; tlim-Um; tUm-
tlom! ting! ting-tang! ding-dong! clatter!; tique-taqur
tick-tack.

§ 255. Finally, other particles, especially verbs in
the imperative mood, are used as interjections.

Examples.

pois! what next?

cautela! agua vae"^! take care

or heed!
aqiiA d'el-rei ^ ! Acudam .M i^ i ,
6 da guarda! J ^'

por quern e! I pray!
por amor de Deus! for God's

sake!
Deus me livre! God forbid!

Oh, no!
valha-mte Deus ! Oh Lord ! bless

me!

Amen, Jesus * ! Amen !

n 7 J , /thank God!
Deus louvaao! )y^ ,. ,

GracasaDeus!),, i^xr ' ,
^ (thank Heaven !

por Deus ! egad ! by Jove !

se Deus quizer! (if it) please

God! Deo volente!
seja que Deus quizer! as

God will
Deus guarde a V" Ex"' ^!

God be with you!
sabe Deus! God knows!

Anda! go on!

wida cd! come here!

da cd! give hither!

tdma Id! take this!

escuta! hark!

oiwe cd! listen to me!

smie-te! vae-te! begone! away!

avia-te! be quick!

Yainos! let us go on (or

(away) !
(jira! go on! move!
para ahi! stop!
pudera! to be sure! I say!

wouldn't it suit (him)!
poisnao! certainly! why not?

isn't it?
po/K entdo! yon see!
quern (me) dera! that would

suit me to ,a marvel!
ai Jesus! Senhor! Jesus

Senhor! mercy on us! Good

Heavens !
adeus ! farewell ! good-bye !

good morning (or day)!

RemarJc. — Every interjection expresses a whole sentence
or even several sentences. Thus ai! means "how painful it is!"

1 Bis hiz, a quickly repeated "bicho, bicho!"

^ Agua vae!, literally "water is going," a traditional warn-
ing for passers-by, survived from former times, when things were
flung out of the windows.

^ Aqui d'el-rei, elliptic al for "a^uda aqui a gente d'el-rei!"

^ Amen, Jesus, popular for Amen.

"* Pinal form in official letters or documents.

238

Lesson 85.

or "how unfortunate I am!" So the interjection differs by-
its nature, which is synthetic, from all other particles, these
being essentially analytic.

Palavras.

theatro lyrico

a enchente

[I'fenta]
desinaiar

[di^mvt'ar]
scenario

[s9'nariuj
a primeira dama

bisar

sisitdo [si'zuffuj

itnpor

baiUono

[be 'ritunu]
baixo
as palmas
levar palmas

um sem numero

de (vezes)
a cofua

a festa arilstica
a yomha

the opera
(-house)
the fulness

to faint, swoon

the scenery

the prima

donna
to repeat
judicious
to impose
the baritone-
singer
the bass-singer
the applause
to be applaud-
ed
innumerable

(times)

the garland

the benefit

the pigeon,

dove

atar

palco ['paikuj
rugir [rru'gir]
a procella

fpru'selvj
o sino f'sinuj
OS sinos a defun-

tos [da' funtnf]
bemdito

[bi'i 'dituj
(juiar [gi'ar]
juniento

[gu 'mentu]
a reboque

[rro'bok]
cocheiro

[ku'/eiru]
obedecer
doer
tocar as

trindades

[trln'da&if]
toque [tok] das

trindades

to tie
the stage
to roar
the storm,

hurricane
the bell
the tolling-

bells
deceased

to lead, guide
the ass

in tow

the coachman

to obey
to ache, hurt
to chime the
Angelus

the chimes of
the Angelus.

!)3. Exercicio.

No theatro.

Hontem no theatro lyrico foi tal a enchente que algumas
senhoras, coitadas, desmaiavam. Mas oh, se visse aquillo!
Ai, que lindo scenario! E os artistas? A esses levantavam-se
muitos «vivas», e os espectadores gritavam «bravo!» e «bis!» a
nao poderem mais (till tJiey could not any more). A primeira
dama teve de bisar uma aria — ole, ole ! — e depois tornaram a
romper os «vivas» e os «bis», para obriga-la a repetir segunda
vez. Mas entao o publico mais sisudo fez «psch!» e «schiu!»,
para impor silencio. Tambem o baritono e o baixo levaram
muitas palmas e foram pedidos «f6ra» um sem numero de
vezes, at6 alguns gritaram «basta!» Mas, caspitfe, que bellas
vozes! Atiraram-lhes muitas flores e corOas, visto que tiveram
a sua festa artistica, e ate soltaram pombas, as quaes, atadas
a duas e duas — zas ! — foram cair no palco.

Interjections. 239

94. Leitura.

E em Novembro, rugem procellas . . .
Deus nos acuda, nos livre d'ellas!

Ai, que ditosos os lavradores!

Sinos a defuntos ! ai, quein morreria !

Viverao sempre na eterna luz,
Pobres bemditos, amen, Jesus! . . .

Pela estrada plana, toe, toe, toe,
Guia o jumentinho uma velhinha errante,
Como vao ligeiros, ambos a reboque.
Antes que anoitece, toe, toe, toe,
A velhinha atras, o jumentito adiante ! . . .
Toe,, toe, toe. Undo burriquito,
Para as minhas filhas quern m'o dera a mim!
(Guerra Junqueiro.)
95. Thema.
-A'a rud.

Take care! Come here! Be quick! Don't you see that
a carriage is coming along? Lord, bless me! Take heed not
to fall (Olha, se cms !) Oh, coachman, stop ! The coachman
calls to the horses: "Gee-ho! ho!" and then "Shue!" But they
do not obey him. Help! help! There they (tr.: eil-os que)
stand, thank God! But you have fallen (pret.), poor darling!
Are you hurt? No, thank Heaven ! . Give hither your little
hand ! Let us go on ! Cheer up ! Zounds, what a fright !
Nothing hurts you, does it? Hark! Do you hear the bells?
Ding-dong! They chime the Angelus (or: it is the chimes of
the Angelus). Listen ! Come, say an Ave-Maria ! Well ! Amen !

240

Second Part.

First Division: Flection.

First Lesson.

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.

(Of. 2u<l Lesson of Part. I.)

§ 1. The gender of the noun maj' be recognised
by its meaning or by its ending or bj' both. By
their meaning are

(a) Masculine. — 1. The denominations of male
persons and their professions: Jose, o rapaz, ojar-
dineiro, o doutor, o monarcha, o patriarcha, etc.

2. The cardinal points, the winds, the seasons,
the months and those days as are not indicated by
"feira" : o leste or este (also: nascente, oriente, levante^),
oeste (also: poente or occidente), o norfe (also: se(p)-
tentriao, o sul; o verao or estio, o onto(m)no, o inverno;
Janeiro, o fevereiro, etc.; o sdbhado, o domingo (but a
segunda feira, etc.).

Exc. : a primavera Spring.

3. Mountains, capes, rivers and seas: o Etna,
Geres, o Cabo da Roca; o Mondego, o Lima, o Gua-
diana. o (oceano) Atldntico, o (mar) Bdltico.

1 The names of the cardinal points (with the exceptions of
those in parenthesis) indicate also the winds blowing from there
— e.g.: norte or septentricio (poetical name) is employed for north
and north-wind. Another denomination for north-wind (rarely
for north) is «• tramontand. Feminine are also a brisa the breeze,
a aragem, a veragao gentle breeze.

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 241

N.B. — If the name of mountains is preceded by serra,
the article, etc., concords with this noun : a serra da Estrella,
a serra do Geree.

4. Metals: o ouro, o ferro, o cobre, o zinco, etc.
Exc. : a prata, a platina, a lata or folha de Flandres

sheet-iron.

5. Characters and notes: o A, o JB, o L, dois cc;
do, re.

6. Many names of trees and shrubs: o carvcdho,
freixo, o salgueiro, o soireiro, o tremoceiro. N.B. Fruit-
trees are generally feminine : a pereira (pear-tree).

7. Those words (adjectives, infinitives, participles)
converted into a substantive: o hello, o falar, o sim.

N.B. — If by an adjective so employed a female person
is indicated, it is naturally preceded by the feminine article:
a hella, a velha.

(b) Feminine. — 1. The denominations of female
persons and their professions: Maria, a mde; a leiteira,
a autora.

Exc: mulherao the strong and stout woman.

2. Continents, and generally towns, countries,
provinces and isles, especially those ending in a:
a Africa, Lisboa, Londres, a Dinamarca; a Beira,
a Guine; a Isldndia; however: o Brasil, Portugal (mas-
cuUne, but without article), o Trds-os-Montes , o Sao
Thome, o Porto, o Funchal, o Rio de Janeiro, Paris m.

3. Arts, sciences, professions, moral qualities and
abstract nouns: a musica, a histdria, a olaria (pottery),
a esperanga, a fe, a moralidade, a discregao.

Exc: amor Love, o vicio Vice.

§ 2. To indicate the natural sex in persons and
animals, the Portuguese language has either a different
expression or a different ending (cf. § 3 of this Lesson
and L. 2 of the 1=' Part.).

Masculine. Feminine.

O rapaz the boy A rapariga the girl, maid

homem the man a mulher the woman

o pae the father a mde the mother

o padrasto the stepfather a madraste the stepmother

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 16

242 Leseon 1.

padrinlio \ ^ ^f^^her " >"^^>-f'^ ] the godmother
compadre f s""^"'- ^ ^j comadre f °

rei the king a rainha the queen

dom = a title of nobility, a dona = title bestowed upon

employed before the Christ- any lady and followed by

ian name the Christian name.

genro the son-in-law a nora the daughter-in-law

frade the monk a freira the nun

dJacowo the deacon a diaconisa the deaconess

avo the grandfather a av6 the grandmother

tsar or cot/" the czar a tsarina the czarina

gallo the cock a gallinJia the hen

cavallo the horse a ej'Ma the mare

carneiro the ram, mutton a ovelha the sheep

bode the buck-goat « caftra the goat

aMoo the dwarf a ana the female dwarf.

§ 3. By their ending are:

(a) Masculine. — 1. Those nouns ending in un-
accented -0 or in any accented vowel — e.g. tio, dedo,
alvard (charta), cafe, aleli (gillyflower), javali (wild
boar), do (pain), no (knot), avo.

Exc. : a pa (shovel), a chamine, a fe, a gale (galley),
a libre, a mare (tide), a pole (pulley), a rale, a re (the
female prisoner or defendant, but o re the D [musical
note]), a se; a avo, a enxo (adz[e]).

2. Those nouns ending in -en, -em (exc. those in
-gem), -im, -om, -um, -So (cf. b, 3): o germen, o bem, o
armazem, o setim, o som, o atum, o orgdo.

Exc: a ordem the order.

3. Those nouns ending in -ae (-ai), -ao (au), -eo
(-eu), eo (eu), -oe, -oi — e.g.: pae (pai), pdo (pau), ceo
(cm), ireo (breu), heroe (heroi), hoi.

Exc: a ndo (ndu) the ship.

4. Those in -aZ, -el, -il, -ol, -id: o areal, o annel,
funil, paiol, o patd (swamp), o consul.

Exc: a cdl the chalk, a vagal the vowel, as well
as cathedral and credencial, which properly are ad-
jectives, to be supplied by se and carta.

5. Those in -ar, -er (-er), -ir, -or, -ur: o altar, o
talher, o praser, o elixir, o senhor, o andor (beer for
saints), catur (little Indian man-of-war).

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 243

Exc: a heira-mar (properly: a heira do mar the
seashore), a collier (spoon), a cor, a dor, a flor.

6. Those in -a^, -6z, -oz, -us, -uz: o cdbaz (basket
of twigs), algoz (hangman), o arroz, o jus (jus, law),
capuz (hood), o abestruz (ostrich).

Exc. : a paz (peace), a tenas (tongs), a foz (mouth
of a river), a noz (nut), a voz (voice), a cruz (cross), a
luz (light).

Bemarlc I. — Are masculine also those nouns in -as, em-
ployed only in the plural : os bredos (notch-weed, spinage) ;
OS brdcolos (broccoli).

(b) Feminine. — 1. Those nouns in -a or -a^; tia,
alma, Ja, magot.

Exc: dia, o helga, o persa, o planeta, o coineta,
enigma (riddle), o capitalista, o cambista (money-changer)
and all those, mostly taken from the Greek and indi-
cating a male person, as poeta, monarcha, democrata,
atheista, etc.

2. Those in -e, and -ei: a merce (mercy), a lei (law).

3. Those in -ade, -gao, (-c)g5x), -sSo, -dao (cf. a, 2):
adoragao, direcgao, extensao, confusao, aptidao (aptness),
multidao (multitude).

Exc: coragdo (heart).

4. Those in -gem: a imagem, a impigem (tetter), a
ferrugem (rust).

Exc: pagem (page, cabin-boy), o almargem
(meadow).^

Bemark II. — Are also feminine those nouns ending in
-as and employed only in the plural, and also the proper
names ending in -as; e.g. — as exequias (exequies), as nu-
peias (wedding), as hddas (de prata, de oiro the silver or
golden wedding) ; as calgas (trousers), as vitualhas (victuals) ;
Bruxellas (Brussels), Athenas (Athens).

' The ending -a may be also written -an: Ian, magan. But
this latter is feminine only when identical with -a, otherwise it
is masculine: o afan (toil), o ademan (generally employed in the
plural ademanes gesture).

' Personagem is employed now and then as a masculine,
but the correct form is feminine.

16*

244 Lesson 1.

§ 4. As for the denomination of animals and plants,
their species is parity indicated by the masculine,
partly by the feminine gender — e.g., o corvo (raven), o
rouxinol (nightingale), o cordciro (lamb), a dguia (eagle),
a ovelha (sheep), a lehre (hare), a raposa (fox), o myrto
(myrtle), • o castanheiro (chestnut). To indicate the
natural sex, you have to supply the name of the
species by macJio (male) or femea (female)— e.g., a femea
do rouxinol, o corvo femea, a dguia macho, etc.

N.B.— The words of the reading and translating tasks
should now be looked up in the vocabulary at the end of
this book, or — as this, being chiefly intended to furnish
typical examples of a correct pronunciation, does not pretend
to be complete — from a dictionary. In the Pocket Dictio-
nary of the Portuguese and English Languages by H. Michaelis,
an abridgement of the larger Dictionary of the same author,
published by BrocTihaus, Leipzig, and the best of its kind
we know of, the reader will find everything that is required.

1. Reading: Lesson.

I.

A lebre corre. peixe nada. A andorinha v6a. cabrito
pula. ca9ador ca^a. juiz julga. homem pensa. boi
rumina. 6rgao sda. A luz alumia. general commanda. A
torre e alta. sdvel 6 um peixe. A aguia 6 uma ave de
rapina. cysne 6 uma ave aquatica. A plaina 6 um instru-
mento. cravo 6 uma flOr. Diz-se vulgarmente que o sol e
a lua estao no c6u. altar esta na igreja. A nuvem estd no
ar. vento (o norte, a tramontana) sopra. trovao brame
ou estrondeia. leSo ruge. mar brame. A ovelha bala.
cavaUo rincha ou relincha. cao ladra, uiva ou geme (g3.iie).
rouxinol e o melro cantam. A ra grasna. burro zurra.
A serpente silva. porco grunhe. lobo uiva. pardal
chia. A raposa regouga. touro berra. gato mia. mos-
quito zumbe. A r61a geme. pato e o ganso grasnam.
gallo cucurita e canta. A gallinha cacareja.

II.

Cattle, tronco ou haste (pe, pediineulo).
caule 6 o que n6s vulgarmente chamamos tronco ou
haste. Um carvalho tern tronco; a papoula e o trigo teem
haste. caule d'uma fl6r tambem se chama p6 (ou pediinculu).
caule (ou tronco) de algumas arvores chega a ter 400 metres
de altura: o dos musgos tern apenas alguns millimetros. caule

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 245

e pois a parte da planta que se eleva no ,ar. Eleva-se ver-
ticalmente, ou mais ou menos inclinado. E do caule que nas-
cem as folhas, ^s flores e os fructos. caule das arvores
compoe-se de cinco partes: per fora a casca; per baixo da
casca liber, que 6 uma camada branca e tenra; por baixo
do liber outra camada que se chama albnrno; ainda outra,
a mais interior, chamada cerne; e ao centro a medulla. Para
aguentar o caule, algumas plantas teem gavinhas, tambem
chamadas 61os ou abra90s. Veem-se na videira, no melao, na
ervUhaca etc. Algumas gavinhas teem na ponta uns pequeni-
nos discos. Estes discos introduzem-se as vezes nas fend as
das paredes, e inoham dentro das fendas. Inchando, os discos
nao saem, e as gavinhas aguentam melhor o caule. Essas
gavinhas que teem disco, chamam-se adhesivas (air roots).
(Trindade Coelho: Terceiro Livro de Leitura.)

2. Thema.

Indicate the gender of the following nouns, by placing
in front the definite or the indefinite article:

The horse, — cavallo. The pear, — pera. The metal,

— metal. A winter, — inverno. The spring, — primavera.
The chestnut, — castanheiro. The apple-tree, — macieira.
The gold, — euro. The platinum, — platina. The vapour,

— vapor. The working, — trabalhar. The author, — autora.
The ship, — navio, — nau. The prophet, — propheta. The
sun, — sol. The moon, — lua. The image, — imagem.
The sparrow, — pardal. The fox, — raposa. The he-fox,

— raposa macho. A lion, — liao. A region, — regiao. The
heart, — cora^ao. The modesty, — modestia. The faith, —
i6. The foot, — p6. The chimney, — chamin^. The vowel,

— vogal. The pair, — par. The peace, — paz. The piece,

— peda90. The Belgian, — belga. The mercy, — merce.
The hare, — lebre. The wool, — la. The sound, — som.
A frog, — ra. A swamp, — paiil. The chalk, — cal. The
salt, — sal. The sky, — c6u. The eagle, — aguia. The
bird, — ave, — passaro. The trousers, — cal9as. The
wedding, — niipcias. Asia, — Asia. Italy, — Italia. Nor-
mandy, — Normandia. Portugal, — Portugal. Brazil, —
Brasil. The Thames, — Tamisa. The Tejo, — Tejo.

3. Thema.

Write do<vn the translation and the feminine of the
following nouns. The neighbour; the prisoner; the dwarf;
the grandfather; the monk; the doctor; the author; the
gardener; the lion; the hare; the nightingale; the bode;

246 Lesson 2.

the cousin ; the stepfather ; the son-in-law ; the cock ; the
bull; the Jew; the prince; the master; the Portuguese; the
German; the boy; the dog; the orphan; th? wolf; the hus-
band; the son; the godfather; the horse.

ConTersa«jao.

Quaes sao os principaes quadrupedes dom^sticos ?

Quaes sao os principaes quadrupedes bravos ou as prin-
cipaes feras?

Qual 6 movimento da lebre?, do peixe?, da aguia?,
do homem?

Qual e a voz da ovelha?, do cavallo?, do cao?, do
porco?, etc.

Quaes sao as principaes aves domesticas?, as aquaticas?,
as de rapina?

Quaes sao as vozes das aves?

Que se entende por "caule"?

Como se chama tambem o caule d'uma fl6r?, d'uma
drvore?, d'uma espiga?

De quantas partes se compoe o caule d'uma arvore e
quaes sao?

Que 6 que nasce do caule?

Que teem algumas plantas para agnentar o caule?

Diga(m) alguns exemplos!

Second Lesson.

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns

(continued).

§ 2. Nouns with a Double Gender.

(a) With special ending for the feminine (cf. P. I,
§ 21):

(a) The ending o changes into a: pombo, pomba.
Exc. : didcono, diaconisa.

(P) The ending So changes into 6a: patrao principal,
patrua.

Ex.: harao, baronesa; cidadao, cidada; irmao,
irnia, etc. (see § 21).

(f) The ending or (or) adds a: leitor, leitora.
Ex.: actor, actrig, etc. (see § 21).

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.

247

(b) The ending es (ez) adds a: portugttes, portugu&sa.
Exc: (only for adjectives) cortes, which is
the same for both genders,
(e) Nouns with any other ending do not follow de-
terminate rules.

Ahbade abbot

abbad&ssa

alcaide alcalde, mayor

alcaidessa

archiduque archduke

archiduqueea

avo grandfather

av6

czar czar

cgarina

conde count

condessa

deus god

deusa

dvque duke

duqueea

herde hero

herolna

Mspede host; landlord, guest

hdspeda

infante infant; foot-soldier

infanta

mestre master, teacher

mestra

parente parent

parenta

marques marquis

marquesa

monge monk

monja

peru turkey-cock

periia

poeta poet

poetisa

principe prince

princesa

propheta prophet

prophetisa

reo criminal, delinquent

re

sacerdote priest

sacerdotisa

visconde viscount

viseondessa.

(b) Without changing their ending or meaning the
following words are distinguished only by the article
(o for the masculine, a for the feminine). As they are
common to both genders, they are called "commims de
dois."

Artista artist
regente \ ,

governante j ^
gerente manager
suicida suicide
regicida regicide
conjugidda conjugicide
consorte consort
mdrtir martyr
espia spy

compatriota country-man,
country-woman

persa Persian
belga Belgian
commensal I table fellow,
conviva f commensal
complice accomplice
convalescente convalescent
pateta blockhead
parasita . parasite
indigena indigenous
herege heretic
guia guide
jdven youth, young girl.

248

Lesson 2.

(c) Besides these "communs de dots" which still are
distinguished by the dififerent gender of the article,
there are others which are indiscriminately employed for
both genders, ones with the masculine, others with the
feminine article. They are called in Portuguese "sdbre-
communs." Please to note the following:
conjuge the married man a testemunha the witness

or wife

gemeo^ the twin boy or girl
intSrprete the interpreter
a crianga the child

(d) Without changing

different meaning:

guarda the watchman,
keeper, guard

cabega the chief, leader

planeta the planet

trombeta the trumpeter

corneta the horn-blower

vagal the voter

crescente the crescent, half-
moon

atalaia the sentinel

vigia the guard

capital the capital, principal

lingua the interpreter

cura the parson

a sentinella the sentinel
acriatura the creature— e.g.,

10 grande estilista e infelie

criatura . . .».

of the ending, but with a

a guarda the guard, defence

a cabega the head

a planeta sort of chasuble

a trombMa the trumpet

a corneta the horn

a vagal the vowel

a crescente the flood

a atalaia the watch-tower

a vigia the watching

a capital the capital

a lingua' the tongue

a cura the cure, healing.

(e) With changing of the ending or meaning, gene-
rally indicating in the masculine a greater idea of size.
(N.B. — Sometimes the contrary; we mark these by *.)
Oftawco the bench; shop-board; a banca the writing-table;

B — Exchange, bank
barca* the bark, boat

cesto* the basket
fossa the ditch, trench
carvalho the oak
caleiro the gutter
Jiorto* kitchen-garden
caldeiro* the kettle
a madeira the block
mosco* the mosquito

bar; basset
a barca the bark, ferry-boat,

lighter
a cesta the basket, maund
a fossa the pit, hole
a carvalha the little oak
a caleira the gutter
a Jiorta the kitchen-garden
a caldeira the kettle
a madeira the wood
a mosca the fly

Employed also as an adjective: irmaos gemeos.

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.

249

pio the basin, winepress
pdgo the well
riso* the laughter, smile
sacco* the bag

a pia the basin

a poga (poga) the pool

a risa the shout of laughter

a sacca the bag.

§ 6. Please to pay attention to the gender and
meaning of the following nouns, different in their ter-
mination and consequently in their gender:

Masculine.

aro the hoop

arco the bow; arch

iarbo the barbel

barro the clay

bico the beak; bill; thorn

bolo the cake

ftoZso the pocket

boneco the doll; fig. puppet

bordo the board

cabego the top of a moun-
tain; chief

cabide the rack

cdbido the chapter of a ca-
thedral

campo the field

cargo the office, employment

carofo the stone of a fruit

carpo the wrist

carrasGO the hangman

carreiro the narrow path;

carter
carreto the waggonage;

freight
carreteiro the cart-man, carter
carteiro the postman
casco the skull; cask; hull
caso the case
castello the castle, tower
caudal the rapid
cavallo the horse
cepo the stump, block
cerco the circle, circuit ; siege
cSvo the bait; decoy, lure
choco the brooding

Feminine.
A ara the altar(-stone)
a area the chest, cofier
a barba the chin; beard
a barra the bar; spar
a bica the water-pipe
a bola the ball
a bolsa the purse ; 5 — Exchange
a boneca the doll, baby
a borda the border, edge
a cabega the head

a campa the grave

a carga the load, burden,

freight
a carroga the coach
a carpa the carp
a carrasca red-oak
a carreira the run, race, road ;

career
a carreta the cart
a carete the grimace, mask
a carreteira the lighter
a carteira the pocket-book
a casca the bark, rind
a casa the house
a Gastella Castilian
a Cauda the tail, train
a cavalla the>mackerel
a cepa the vine-stock, vine
a cerca the enclosure, hedge
a ceva the masting; food; lure
a cAocffl th^ bowl ; cattle-bell;

brood-hen

250

Lesson 2.

cigarro the cigar

cimo the top; summit

cohertor the blanket; quilt

colchdo the mattress

colchete the clasp

coifo the neck, lap

conto the tale, story

cJr^e the edge; cut ; incision

cunho the stamp, coin

CMSto the cost, expense

espinho the thorn

esgwat^ro the square

estado the state

fado the fate ; popular song

fardo the burden, pack

fecho the bolt, bar

ferro the iron

folho the flounce, frill

o /dZio the folio; page

goivo the gillyflower

golo the draught
gorgUe the half-shirt
firrado the will, accord
^orro the jet, shoot of water
lance the throw, cast; trait,

lucky chance
lango the throw ; suit ; space ;

turn
o linho the flax, linen
Uxo the filth, dirt
Zow6o the loins, reins
o luto the mourning
wago the mallet
malho the mall, mallet;

sledge
mango the handle of a flail
meado the middle, half
meio the fear

meio the half, middle ; means
o modo the mode, manner

a cigarra the balm-cricket,

grasshopper
a cima the top
a coberta the cover(ing) ; shelter
a colcha the counterpane, quilt
a colcMta the eye(let)
a coHa the glue
a conta the bill, account
a corte the court; as Cdrtes

the Parliament
a cunha the wedge, quoin
a custa the cost, charge
a espinha the fish-bone; spine
a esquadra the squadron
a estada the abode
a fada the fairy, fay
a farda the uniform
a fecha the conclusion
a ferra the fire-shovel
a folha the leaf, sheet

a fdrma the form, shape
a forma the matrice, model
a goiva the gouge, hollow

chisel
a gola the throat, gullet
a gorgita gratuity, tip
a grade the harrow, grate
ffl jorra the tar
a langa the lance, spear

a linha the line ; row

a lixa the sea-calf; seal(-skin)

a lomba the hill, eminence

a luta the wrestling, combat

a maga the mace, club

a malha the mash; stitch;

speck
a manga the sleeve
a meada the hank, skein
a meda the stack of straw or

corn
a meia the stocking
a moda the fashion

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.

251

mdfo the mould
o monte the mountain

morto the dead man, corpse
mote the motto, device

wofo the motion, impulse
o novel(l)o the clew; ball
iJOgfO the reward
palmo the span

papo the maw, crop

papa the pope

partido the party, faction ;

resolution
o passo the step
o pasto the pasture, feed
pato the duck

pegro the whirlpool, pit

pd(l)o the hair, down

o pmheiro \ the fir-tree, pine
o pvnho i tree
pmfo the chicken
jjifo ^ pinto ; pipe

powfo the point, stitch

porte the freight, postage;

deportment
porto the port, harbour
poste the stake, pillar
posto the place ; post
o prdtico the pilot

o preso the prisoner

quarto the room, quarter;

watch
o gueixo the jaw(-bone)

rajo the beam, ray; flash;

spoke
rato the rat
mco the danger; stroke of

a pen

a mofa the mockery

a monta the amount, quan-
tity

a morte the death

a mota the terrace; dam,
rampart

a novella the novel
a paga the pay
a palma the palm-leaf, palm-
tree
a(s) papa(s) the pap
papd the pa(pa), daddie
a partida the part, lot ; match

a passa the raisin

a pasta the portfolio; paste

a pata the female duck; paw,

claw
a pSga the handle, ear, tedder
a pSga the magpie
a pella the ball, tennis-ball
a pelle the skin
a pinka the pine-cone

a pinta the spot, mark
a pita the fibre of the aloe
a piteira the aloe
a ponta the point; top, tip
a porte the bridge

a porta the door

a posta the slice, cut; post-
Cage); courier

a prdtica the practice, ex-
perience

a presa the prey, booty

a quarta the fourth part or
class

a qtieixa the complaint; pro-
cess, action

a raia the stroke, dash; bor-
der; ray

a rata the she -rat; share

a risca the dash; parting (of
the hair)

252

Lesson 2.

rodo long stick to heap up

com
rolo the roll(er), ball; taper
nltte the small roll
seguro the insurance
sello the stamp, seal
sino the bell
siso the good sense
solo the soU, ground
tdho the earthen cover
tentci the counter ; maulstick;

care
testo the cover, lid
tiro the shot
toldo the covering; awning

torno the turn(bench)

trinco the latch

troco the change, small coins
y«so the vase, vessel; urn;

pot
vello the fleece
vento the wind
verba the verb, word

a roda the wheel; circle;

round slice

a rdla the turtle-dove

a roleta the roulette

a segura the hoop-knife

a sdla the saddle

a siwa the flag; fate

a sisa the excise

a sola the leather; sole

a telha the tile, brick

o fewte the probe

a testa the forehead

a tira a strip

a tolda the quarterdeck ; awn-
ing

a torna the return; compen-
sation

a trinca a series of three ana-
logous things

a troea the truck, exchange

a vasa the slime, mud

a vel(l)a the candle; sail

a venta the nostril

a verba the clause, article

§ 7. There are a few nouns which by the mas-
culine gender indicate the individual and by the femi-
nine the collective sense — e.g. :

fructo the fruit
grito the scream
manijo the mariner
ramo the bough, twig

a fructa the fruitage, fruit
a grita the crying, clamour
a maruja the crew
a rama the foliage, branches.

§ >^. There is some affinity between these nouns
(§ 7 and § 5 (e)) and

(a) the so-called augmentativos, formed by the trans-
formation of the final syllable of certain nouns into
-So, which adds to the noun an idea of bigness and
sometimes that of deformity and ugliness; and

(b) the so-called dimuaitivos, which attribute to the
noun an idea of smallness, of somebody or something
needing protection, and therefore that of a certain
tenderness (cf. P. I, L. 16).

The Gender of the Portuguese Nbuns. 253

i. Tliema.

This boy tears his stockings so that there is no possibility
of darning them. In the Botanical Garden of Lisbon are palm-
trees of more than sixty spans height. As this needle has
no point, not a stitch can be done with it. The duck filled
its maw with pap. Please to give me some small coins, I
want to buy a few stamps. Of the whole crew only one
mariner was saved. Waiter, there are some guests who have
not yet had a slice of fish; you ought to be more attentive.
In the action brought (movida) against that spy, several
witnesses were summoned; amongst them as [an] interpreter
a native of Africa. Our globe, the moon, and other stars
are planets; the sun is a fixed star. When the moon is vi-
sible in the sky, we have moonshine. She renews her light
in the phases of each revolution and is a satellite of the earth.
Her four phases are; new moon, half moon, full moon, and
waning moon. The ebbtide and flood are phenomena in
connection with the crescent and the wane. Where there is
the most capital and paper currency (papel moSda) is in
the banks of the capital of England. As you so warmly take
the part of the Portuguese republicans, are you a republican
yourself? I do not belong to any political faction, but I sym-
pathise with the republican party and its leaders. An English
squadron performs its maritime manoeuvres in the bay of
Lagos on the Portuguese seashore. A square is used at
drawing. The crickets chirp during the hot season (a calma)
in the months of June, July, and August. Plies and mosqui-
tos may be driven away by the smoke of a cigar or a ciga-
rette. Consorts are often martyrs of society, and the children
of the married couple sometimes are unconsciously the cause
of domestic strife.

5. Leitura e Versao.

Nao 6 sauddvel para gente sadia, quanto m6nos para gente
doente, a estada n'uma casa d'um estado m6nos salubre. A
prisao nas cidades portugufisas encontra-se muitas vezes na
melhor e maior praga: Chama-se terrago ou eirado o telhado
piano d'uma casa ou seja o espa^o descoberto sobre uma casa
ou ao nivel d'um andar d'ella. Ghama-se chifres, chavelhos ou
pontas as excrescencias corniformes ou arma^ao do gado corni-
fero {or cornuto). Na partida do deputado do partido pro-
gressista estiveram na gare os correligiondrios e amigos pessoaes
d'elle. Neste anno ha pouoa fruota : nao vingaram os fructos
das macieiras e pereiras. Em compensa^ao d^ram boa colheita
OS castanheiros. Por isso se veem agora muitas castanheiras
na rua a venderem castanhas assadas.

254 Lesson 2.

6. Para decorar (to be learnt by heart).
Vozes d'animaes.
Palram pega e papagaio Opardal.damninhoaoscampos,

E cacareja a gallinha, Nao aprendeu a cantar;

Os ternos pombos arrulam, Como os rates e as donmbas,

Geme a rola innocentinha. Apenas sabe chiar.

Muge a vacca, herra o touro; O negro eorvo crocUa-

Grasna a ra, ruge o leao; Zum o mosquito enfadonho;

gato mia, uiva o lobo; A serpente, no deserto,

Tambem uiva e ladra o cao. Solta assobio medonho.

Belincha o nobre cavallo; Ghia a lebre, grdsna o pato;

Os elephantes dao iirros; Onvem-se os porcos grunhir;

A timida ovelha Mia; Libando o succo das flores,

Zurrar 6 proprio dos burros. Costuma a abelha zumbir.

Eegouga a sagaz raposa Bramam os tigres, as on5as;

(Brutinho muito matreiro): Pia, pia o pintainho;

Nos ramos cantam as aves; Cucurita e canta o gallo;

Mas pia o mocho agoureiro. Ldte e gdne o cachorrinho.

Sabem as aves ligeiras A vitellinha da berros;

canto seu variar ; cordeirinho balidos ;

Fazem gorgeios as vezes, macaquinbo da guinchos;

As vezes poem-se a chilrar. A creancinha vagidos.

A falla foi dada ao homem
Bei dos outros animaes,
Nos versos lidos acima,
Se encontram, em pobre rima,
As voees dos principaes.

(Pedro Diniz.)

ConrersaQao.

Que se entende per sabstantivos «commun3 do dois»?
Quaes (sao) os substantivos que teem a mesma forma

para ambos os sexos?
Que desinencia da forma feminina teem os substantivos

communs : irmao, barao, leao, ladrao, propheta, monge

rapaz, imperador, mestre . . .?
Qual a differenga entre nm cesto e uma cesta? um

hOrto e uma horta? o trombeta e a trombfita? um

vogal e uma vogal?
Quaes sac os substantivos que, designando indivi'duos

sao masculines, e femininos quando exprimen um'

sentido de collectividade ?

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 255

Come SB formam os augmentativos? os diminutivos?
Qual sentido accrescentado ao substantive pela syllaba
augmentativa ? e pela syllaba diminutiva?

Third Lesson.

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns

(continued).

Compound Nouns.

§ 9. The Portuguese language does not contain so
many compound words as the Enghsh. It substitutes
them in different ways:

1. By adding a determinative noun, preceded by
de to the appelative — e.g., oculo de mao eyeglass; amo-
lador de tesouras (e navalhas) knife-grinder; escuma de
mar meerschaum; caixa de correio letter-box; cJiapeu de
palha straw-hat; criada de quarto house-maid; iomba de
fogo fire-engine.

2. By joining an adjective to the noun — e.g. Mlhete
postal post-card; ministerio publico Attorney-General;
calgado caseiro house-shoe; mina hulhifera coal-mine;
pinheiro manso nut-pine; empregado suialterno subaltern
functionary.

Note. — Sometimes the noun drops altogether (as also in
English), taking the adjective in its form and meaning;— e.g.,
postal; subalterno.

3. By a genitive: casa da fructa fruit-cellar; costa
do mar sea-coast; empregado do correio post-oflScial ;
assento do cocheiro coach-box; porta da cidade town- gate.

4. By two nouns joined by another preposition than
de: compartimento para fumistas smoMng-compartment;
ianho aos pes foot-bath; papel para cartas letter-paper;
correspondencia por cartas epistolary intercourse; colher
para paixe fisht- rowel; medo d morte fear of Death.

5. By the junction of any other particles— e.g.
OS afaeeres (-^ a fazer) the business; os parabens
C== para hem) the congratulation; a sempre-verde the
evergreen.

256 Lesson 3.

§ 10. Yet there is a certain number of compound
nouns, formed by various particles. Their gender cor-
responds, for living beings, to the natural sex or to
the conventional one. For inanimate things the
gender corresponds to that of the noun in such
compound words as are formed by a noun and another
particle (cf. however bate-folha, saca-rolha, quebra-noz,
etc.). In substantives compounded of two nouns, the
gender mostly corresponds to that of the last or the
one which logically is of the greater importance.

Jtemarh. — As there are a great many exceptions the
only means of attaining proficiency is by learning the article.
If you are in doubt, please to consult a dictionary.

§ 11. Examples of Compound Nouns formed:

(a) by two Substantives :

mestre-escola the schoolmaster

mestre-sala the master of ceremonies

mestre sapatelro the master shoemaker

goma-gut(t)a the gamboge

a goma-lacre the gumlack

guarda-poriao the door-keeper

guarda-louga the cupboard

(or a) guarda-roupa the (keeper of the) wardrobe

guarda-livros the bookkeeper

a porta-cocheira the 'gateway

tenente -general the lieutenant-general

consul geral the consul-general

tenente-coronel the lieutenant-colonel

logar-tenente the lieutenant

a mao-tenente the small distance

paquete the packet-boat, — ship

pontape the kick, spurn

a pedra-iman the magnet

usufructo the usufruct

varapau the (shepherd's) staif

a beira-mar the sea-shore

a couve-flor the cauly-flower;
also a great number of nouns compound with ^jaw
(pdu-balsamo, pdu-barro, pdu-canelaetc), designating trees
and shrubs and being all of masculine gender.

(b) by Substantive and Adjectives:

a dguardente (dgua ardente) the brandy
a aguaforte the aquafortis

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 257

amor-perfeito the pansy

cantochao the church choir

cavallo-marinho the hippopotamus

poreo-marinlio the dolphin

a quinta-feira santa the Maundy Thursday

terrapleno the terrace

a idade-media the middle age

ammmorta I the mortmain

iens de moo morta )

uma mao-cheia a handful

mord6mo-m6r the Lord Steward of the Household

porto-franco the free port

a pedra-infernal the nitrate of silver

terra-nova Newfoundland (dog).

(c) by Adjective and Substantive:

a centopeia the centipede

gentilhomem the gentleman

a macha-femea the (door-)hinge (and hasp)

meia-dia the midday

a meio-noite the midnight

meio-corpo the hust, half body

a meia-lua the half moon, crescent

a menoridade (minoridade) the minority

salvo-conducto the safe conduct

porto franco the free port.

(d) by Verb and Substantive:

guarda-p6 the dust-cloak
guarda-chuva the umbrella
guarda-fato the wardrobe, clothes-press
a lesa-majestade the 16se-majest6
a lesorpoesia the offence against poetry
a lesa-bom-gosto the offence against taste, tactlessness
o porta-bandeira the standard-bearer
poria-cocheira the coach-gate
porta-chapeus the hat-box
porta-lapis the port-crayon
o porta-reldgio the watch-stand
porta-voz the speaking-trumpet
o lavapes the maundy, nipter
o lavapratos the dish-washer
catavento the weathercock
o chupa-flor, o beija-flor the humming-bird
batefolha the gold-beater
c/mjpawe? the honeysuckle; humming-bird
Portuguese Ctonversation-Graiamar. 17

258 Lesson 3.

girasol the sunflower

para-raios the lightning-conductor

passatempo the pastime

passaporte the passport

quebramar the breakwater, pier

quebra-lue the light-screen

saca-r6lha(s) the corkscrew

salva-vidas the safety-buoy; life-preserver, life-boat

«»i. papa-Ieguas a stout walker

^esa-ca>fas the letter-balance

pisa-dgua the watergauge

or a ^opawoscas the gaper

or a papa-jantares the sponger, parasite

or « papa-ndstias 1

or « papa-missas > the devotee; hypocrite.

or a papa-santos J

(e) by two Verbs:

hule-hule (or iole-bole) the quaking-grass

ganhaperde sort of play at cards in which the winner

loses.
«;ae-t)ejK the to and fro; up and down
passe-passe the juggling(-trick).

(f) by Preposition and Substantive:

a antecdmara \ ^^^ ^^techamber, anteroom

a antesala ) '

a antemuralha \ ^^^ ^^^^^. ^^^

antemuro \

a ante-data the antedate

antepasto the first dish

a anteporta the double door, screen

a antepopa the forepart of the stern

a antivespera the day before the eve

antipapa the antipope

antidoto the antidote

a antithese the antithesis

a contrabanda the contraband

a contra-escritura the counterbond

a contra-ordem the countermand

a contrasenha the watchword, counter-ticket

contratempo the annoyance ; vexation ; inconvenience

a entrefolha the inter-leaf

a entrelinha the interlineation

entremeio the insertion

OS parabens the congratulation

The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 259

a semrazao the groundlessness

semsabor the insipidity, disgust

sobresalto the (sudden) emotion, fright

a sub-ordem the subdivision

post-escrito the postscript

concidadao the fellow -citizen

consoeio the companion, associate.

(g) by Adverb and Substantive:

bemfeitor the benefactor

a maiquerenga the malevolence

malgrado the displeasure

malnascido the one who is born under an evil star^

unlucky fellow
acima-meneionado the aforesaid
abaixo-assignado the undersigned.

(h) by three words:

mal-me-guer (malmequer) \ ■, ■
bem-me-quer (bemmequer) J ^ ^
nao-me-deixes the forget-me-not
pe-de-gallo the hop(s)
pe-de-lido the lion's-foot
pdu-de-lacre the gumlac-tree
pdu-de-cabelleiro the milliner's block
rabo-de-gallo the thunder- cloud
valde de pdu the knave of clubs
wma tuta-e-mda an insignificance.

7. Thema.

Hamburg is a free port since 1888. The countermand
of the lieutenant colonel concerned only the subdivision
of the pioneers who were about to open a ditch near the bul-
wark. The congratulation of his book-keeper gave pleasure to
my partner; but the postscriptum of his letter containing,
the news of the bankruptcy of a bank, caused him a sudden
emotion and was a great annoyance to him. It is indeed an act
of tactlessness giving such news in a letter of congratulation.
In the great kitchen-garden is still much cauliflower and other
vegetables; but in the sinall kitchen-garden there is only to
be found quaking-grass, daisies, forget-me-nots, and pansies.
The Newfoundland dogs are dogs belonging to a race which
is said to originate (que dizem procedente) of Newfoundland.
The gum-bearing croton (arvore gummifera) and the gam-
boge-tree (guteira) are trees of the tropics from which the
gumlac and the gamboge are extracted.

17'

260 Lesson 8.

8. Tersao.

Quando estavamos na beira-mar, vimos muitas yezes 03
porcos-marinhos, eomo vulgarmente se chamam os delnns ou
golfinhos, a saltar fora das ondas da resaca. Urn catavento 6
um aparelho que indica a direc9ao dos ventos; tern a torma
d'uma bandeirinha, geralmente de ferro ou lata, enfiada n uma
haste, e collocada no alto dos edificios. para-raios 6 um
aparelho, formado principalmente de uma haste met^allica e
destinado a attrahir as descargas el6ctricas da atmosphera, h-
vrando d'ellas os logares ou edificios pr6ximos. Na qumta-feira
santa ha lavap6s em muitas igrejas catholieas, executado pelos
prelados ou outros altos sacerdotes. No Porto vi o cardeal,
em Lisb6a o patriarcha a celebra-Io. Os muitos afaz6res prd-
prios do acima-mencionado, assim como do abaixo-assignado
nao Ihes permittem occuparem-se dos afazferes alheios.

9. Leitura.

A Lusitdnia.

Antes de haver aqui hespanhoes e mouros, n'um peda9o
do que e hoje Portugal, havia os lusitanos. Esses lusitanos
eram os naturaes de uma regiao chamada Lusitania, regiao
que occupava especialmente, a prinoipio, os territorios entre o
Douro e o Tejo, e depois chegou a alastrar-se pelos que formam
hoje as provincias todas de Portugal, menos o Minho, Trds-
os-Montes e parte do Douro. Estes lusitanos viviam muito
descan^ados ca em sua casa; mas com o rodar dos tempos,
OS carthagineses, que eram uns povos oriundos da cidade
de Carthago, ao norte da Africa, chegaram a domina-los, at6
que esses mesmos carthaginSses foram tambem vencidos
pelos romanos que passaram depois a dominar elles sos.
Esses romanos viram-se e desejaram-se com os lusitanos, princi-
palmente com um tal Viriato que d. frente da rapaziada
lusitana Ihes deu que fazer, e os venceu em muitos combates
at6 que o mataram a traifao quando dormia. Dizem que
Viriato era um pastor da Serra da Estrella e ainda hoje ha
em Vizeu um sitio a^ que chamam «Cava de Viriato», por
ser fama que morou ali ease valente capitao, que e o mais
antigo dos heroes portuguSses.

(Trindade Coelho: 3°. Livro de Leitura.)

ConTersa«jao.

The answers to be given with the wording of No. 9.
Quaes foram os habitantes de Portugal antes dos Por-
tugueses ?

1 See P. n, L. 11, § 48 (a) (P).

Forination of the Plural of Nouns. 261

Qaando ainda nao havia hespanhoes e mouros, quern

babitava o pais?
Donde eram naturaes os lusitanos?
Qual era a regiao comprehendida, a principio, pela Lu-

sit9.nia ?
E quaes eram os territories que occupava depois?
Como viviam os lusitanos?
Quern chegou a domina-los?
Quern eram os carthaginfises ?
Que tempo durou o dominio dos carthagin6ses ?
Com quern se viram e desejaram os romanos, principal-

mente ?
Como morreu Viriato?
Onde ha a chamada «Cava de Viriato* ?
Porque se chama assim esse sitio?
Que dizem que Viriato era?
E como e considerado?

Fourth Lesson.

Formation of the Plural of the Nouns.

The general rules for forming the plural of the nouns
have been given already in the 2°"^ Lesson of the First
Part. They will here be repeated in coherence and duly
completed.

N.B. — The same rules apply to the adjective.

§ 12. (a) By adding an -s is formed the plural
of all those substantives (and adjectives) which end in
a vowel, an n, or a diphthong — e.g., rede(s), pae(s), ir-
ma(s), germen(s), pau(s), grdo(s). Exc. : o canon the
church law, canon, catalogus, forms the plural cdnones;
ademan the gesture, ademanes.

Remark.^Oi those words ending in accented -ao only
a few take an -s without changing the form of the singular ;
— e.g., irmao(s), christao(s), cidadao(s), mao(s), henQao(s) (this
only if accented on the first syllable, else bengoes. Those
ending in unaccented -ao (allowed to be written also -am)
follow the general rule : o 6rfao, orfdos (orphans).

(b) Some words in accented -ao change their ter-
mination into -aes — e.g. : pao, paes; alem&o, alemaes; es-
crivao, escrivaes; cao, caes.

262 Lesson 4.

(c) Most words in accented -ao change this termi-
nation into -des: condao gift, magic wand cojzc^oes ; coragao,
coragoes; lido (leao), Uses; alde&o, dldeoes; cangdo, eangoes;
meldo, meloes etc.

(d) The nasal endings -em, -im, -om, -um change -in
into -n before adding -s, thus; -ens, -ins, -ons, -uns; ar-
masem, armazens; hem, hens; fim, fins; som, sons; atum,
atutis.

(e) Nouns ending in -r, -s or -z add -es— e.g. : doutor
doutores; mulher, mulheres; iwrtugues, Portugueses, pas,
pases.

'N.B.—Cardcter modifies its accent in the plural: ca-
racteres.

(f) Remain unaltered those nouns ending in -s pre-
ceded by an unaccented vowel or falling diphthong —
e.g.: o(sJ alfcres the ensign(s); o(s) simples the simple-
ton(s), (the plural simplices being antiquated); o(s) lapis
the pencil(s) ; o(s) caes the quay(s); o(s) arrais the master(s)
of a boat.

Exc. : calis (or calix) forms calis or calices; deus
forms deuses.

Those few nouns in -x with preceding unaccented
vowel change -x into -ces: o appendix (or appendice); o
index (or indice), indices. See also calix.

(g) Nouns ending in -at, -ol, -ul drop the -I and
add -es: animal, animaes: sol, soes; paM, panes.

Exc: Consul (vice-consul, proconsul) and mal keep
the -I in the plural: consules, males; o real forms reis.

(h) Those words ending in -el loose the -I, adding

-is: atmel, anneis; fiel, fieis.

(i) Those in accented -il drop the -I, adding -s:
funil, funis, civil, civis.

(j) Those in unaccented -il change -il into -eis:
projectil, projecteis; fdcil, facets.

§ 13. Proper names and foreign words form their
plural regularly by adding -s or changing the ending
after the rule: Os Bragangas, os Gamas, as tndias, os

Formation of the Plural of Nouns.

263

Algarves, as Americas; os deficits, as erratas^, as quotas,
OS quocientes, etc.

N.B. — Names of towns ending by -s are singular: arica
Londres; a sdhia Athenas ; Bruxellas foi fundada no sSculoVIl
(cf. § 3, Remark II).

§ 14. Some nouns are used only in the Plural
at least in their meaning here given:

as entradas the beginning and
as sahidas the end in the
connection of: desejar boas
sahidas do anno velho e boas
entradas do anno novo wish-
ing a happy new year

OS espinafres spinage

as dncias sickness

as andas stilts

as andadeiras leading-strings

OS ambages subterfuge, excuse

OS amoricos flirtation

OS annaes annals

as bddas \ ,,.

as nupcias ] °

OS bredos notch-weed, spinage

OS brdccolos broccoli

OS cdnones church-law

OS cereaes cereals

OS cirrus cirrus

OS ciumes \ . ,

^7 > lealousy
OS zelos ] •' •'

OS c&mulus (or c&mulos) cu-
mulus

as exiqmas exequies, funeral
OS imponderdveis imponderable

matters
OS midlos brains
OS nimbus (or nimbns) nimbus
OS dados spectacles
OS parabens felicitation
as sevicias ill treatment, cruelty
OS stratus stratus

OS trdpicos tropics.

N.B. — There may also be read funeraes instead of funeral;
but the plural, being a gallicism, is to be avoided as in-
correct.

§ 15. Only in the Singular are employed the
names of sciences, arts, qualities and other abstract
nouns, of metals, elements and materials, as also the
infinitives applied as nouns and in their proper meaning.
Being used in the plural form, they have another,
though cognate, meaning. Ex.:

direito the right, law, juris-
prudence

desenho the (art of) drawing

a pintura the (art of) painting,
picture

a bondade the kind(li)ness

Plural: duties

» drawings

» pictures

» kindnesses

' So according to modern grammarians. Others indicate
errata as subst- f. pi. and' employ the singular o errata after the
model prollema, o dilemma, o programma, etc. Errata is also
employed as subst. f. s. in the meaning of English errata.

264

Lesson 4.

amdr the love
a saude the health
eobre the copper

fogo the fire

a seda the silk

Dj'cfro the glass

trigo the corn, wheat

panno the cloth ; shawl ;

sails
ferro the iron
o iinta the ink

Plural : beloved ones ; flirtation
» toasts
» coins or objects of

copper
» fireplaces
» silks; bristles
» window-panes
» cereals; bread
» shawls

» chains

» colouring, colours
» prevailing winds ; cli-
mate
» medicinal waters ; wa-
tering
» figures in plaster
» duty, obligation

» stories, floors.

ar the air

a dgna the water

gesso the gypsum

devet- the being obliged;

duty
o andar the striding

lO.JJOral Exercise. Exerdoto oral.

Please to put the sentences of the Eeading Lesson I. in
the first Lesson into the Plural.

11. Thema.

Those gentlemen are German teachers and well instructed
authors. Some courteous Englishmen have been our amiable
guests these last months. On those fertile fields where a few
weeks ago still grew green seeds, are now only faded grasses
and fiowers to be found. Among the quadrupeds there are
wild beasts and domestic animals. (Os) Dogs, cats, cows,
sheep, horses belong to the domestic animals; (the) lionS;
wild cats, panthers, lynxes are beasts of prey; (the) hares,
foxes, stags, roes and other horned animals are game. The
magic wands are said to have the gift of finding the springs
out in the ground. There are many villages in the Alemtejo
with less than a hundred fires. Of glass are made drinking-
glasses, panes, spectacles, eyeglasses and telescopes, as well
as many other things. The funeral of the infant followed
very fast (= de perto) her wedding. The climate of the Isle
of Madeira is most beneficent for consumptive people. Also
the climate and the medicinal waters of the Gerez in northern
Portugal are most famous. The State has the right to collect
new duties. The community sang a church-choir, while a
group of young men, boys and girls entuned in a loud voice
(pi.) Christian songs and hymns.

Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 265

12. Versao.

tigre e o lobo sac animaes ferozes. chumbo e o
ferro sao metaes pesados. A dguia e o abutre sao valentes
aves de rapina. ferro e a pedra sao duros. A torre e a
casa sao altas. A 16goa e o kilometro sao dista.ncias com-
pridas. cao e o gato sao animaes dom^sticos liteis.
diamante e a esmeralda sao pedras preciosas. sal e a pi-
menta sao temperos necessarios. As flores naturaes e as
(flores) artificiaes sao bonitas. A marinha ingl6sa e a (ma-
rinha) fraucesa sao fortes. As baleias e os tubaroes sao
grandes. vinho e a cerveja sao boas bebidas. Os proj^cteis
tinham-lhe penetrado os pulmoes.

13. Leitura.

Nuvens.

Da terra e do mar elevam-se vapores que se espalham pela
atmosphera. Nas regioes elevadas da atmosphera esses vapores
encontram um ar frio; e ao contacto d'esse ar, os vapores
resfriam: resfriando, formam as nuvens. Da mesma maneira,
quando no espa90 se encontram duas massas de ar, uma mais
qnente e hiimida do que a outra, a mistura d'essas duas
massas de ar tambem da origem' a nuvens. Estas sao pois
pequenas gottas d'agua suspensas na atmosphera e provenientes
do resfriamento do vapor. Apertando o frio com ellas, essas
gottas, reunindo se, caem em chuva ; ou esfriando mais, tornam-
se solidos, caindo em forma de neve ou geada.

As nuvens teem varias formas: — quando semelham mon-
tanhas d'algodoes, arredcndadas, nmas encastelladas por cima
das outras, chamam-se cumulus. Quando lembram pequenos
filamentos desligados de la cardada, denominam-se cirrus.
Quando formam camadas delgadas e continuas, mais ou menos
extensas, limitadas por linhas horizontaes, teem o nome de
stratus. E quando lembram um panno cinzento-escuro, fran-
jado ou esfarrapado nos bordos, chamam-se nimbus.

Os cumulus denominam-se tambem algodSes, e sao mais
frequentes no verao do que no inverno. Pormados de manha,
desapparecem geralmente de tarda, quando se nao misturam
uns com os outros e dao chuva. Os cirrus, chamados tambem
rabos-de-gallo, sao as nuvens mais elevadas. Annunciam mu-
dan(;a de tempo : chuva no verao, e frio ou g6lo no inverno.

Os stratus veem-se em geral ao p6r-do-sol, perto do hori-
zonte. Os nimbus chamam-se vulgarmente nu.vens de chuva,
e sao conhecidos ainda p6r hguaceiros.

(Trindade Coelho : Terceiro Livro de Leitura.)

266 Lesson 5.

ConTersa^ao.

Como se chama a mulher de um abegao ? de um archi-
duque? de um barao? de um oampones? de um
cidadao? de um conde? de umczar? de umduque?
de um embaixador? de um imperador? de um
marques ? de um principe ? de um rei ? de um sultao ?
de um visconde?

Qual e a forma feminina de doutor, auctor, artista, in-
terprete, hospede, mestre, deus, martyr, conTiva, in-
digena ?

Como se ehama a ffimea do bode? do boi? do cao? do
carneiro? do cavallo? do gallo? do pato? do leao?
do pavao? do perii? do veado? do lobe?

Fifth Lesson.

Formation of the Plural of the Nouns

(continued).

§ 16. Difference of meaning between the singular
and plural forms.

(a) Besides those nouns mentioned in § 15 and
other analogous words, there are such the Plural of
which has a second meaning besides that of the Sin-
gular. Please to notice:

a arma the weapon, arm as armas arms, weapons

a hexiga the bladder as hexigas small-pox

a corte the court as Cortes House of Commons

a entranha the bowels as entranhas heart, character
a feria the pay^ salary, list as ferias holidays

of appointments

folle the pair of bellows os folles bagpipe

a fonte the spring as fontes temples

genero the gender os gmeros victuals

a letra the letter, character as letras literature

o miolo the crumb, brain os miolos brains

oculo the telescope os dados spectacles

o zelo the zeal os zelos jealousy

a venta the nostril ns ventas nose

« vespera the eve as vtsperas vespers.

Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 267

(b) Some substantives indicate in the singular form
the male individual and in the plural the totality of
the respective male and female persons:

pai tlie father os pais the parents

o filho the son os filhos the children

irmao the brother os irmaos the brothers and

sisters
criado the man-servant os criados the men- and maid-

servants
av6 the grandfather os avds the grandfather and

grandmother
tio the uncle os tics the uncle and aunt

conde the count os condes count and countess

Mmem the man os hdmens mankind.

§ 17. For the Plural of the Compound Words
sure and satisfying rules cannot be given. However, it
may be noticed that:

(a) those words compound by an unalterable par-
ticle and a noun, add an -s to the latter: antedatas,
sobrenomes, abaixo-assignados ;

(b) those compound by a verb and a noun, add
the -s of the plural only to the noun: passa-tempos,
porta-bandeiras, guarda-chuvas, girasoes, quebramares ;

(c) words compound of two nouns add the -s oiily
to the last: guarda-portoes, beira-mares, couve-flores,
mestre-salas. On the contrary : a porta-cocheira (= porta
de cocheira), portas-cocheiras; tenentes-generaes ; tenentes-
coroneis; capitaes-tenentes.

(d) Those formed of a substantive and an adjective
take the -s of the plural partly only at the end, partly
for both elements — e.g.: as aguardentes, os cantocMos,
as mao-cheias, os meio-dias, as meia-noites, os salvo-con-
ductos. But: os amores-perfeitos; os cavdllos-marinhos.

(e) Those formed of two verbs take the -s at the
end: os bule-bules, os vae-vens.

(f) Of nouns compound of three words, those joined
by de generally take the plural form for the first word,
this being a substantive; the others add the -s on their
end: os paus de cabelleiro; os paus de lacre; but mal-
me-queres.

268 Lesson 5.

§ 18. Observations on the Pronunciation of the
Plural of Certain Nouns.

A certain number of substantives ending in -o,
whose accented vowel of the penultima is a close 6 [o],
change this 6 in the plural into open 6 [o] — e.g. : o dvo
[ovu] the egg, ovos [ovuf] (cf. Part. I, § 74).

These substantives to which belongs also avo are:
ahrolho cliff, rock, avo grandfather, cachopo boy; carogo
kernel, stone; c^oco cuttle-fish, brooding, adj.: hatched;
choro weeping, composto mixture, corcovo jump, ca-
priole, como horn, coro choir, chorus, corpo body, corvo
raven, despojo cover, destrogo ruins, escolho reef, esforgo
effort, esposo husband (pi. also esposos besides espdsos),
esidrvo hindrance, fogo to fire, f6l(e)go breath, rest, forno
oven, foro jurisdiction, forro lining, fosso ditch, imposto
duties, jogo play, midlo brains, oVio eye, osso bone, tvo
egg, pescogo neck, 2}ogo well, porco pore, porto harbour,
posto post, povo people, preposto or proposto substitute,
reforgo supply, renovo shoot, spring, rogo demand, soro
whey, serum, soccorro succour, supposto supposition,
tijolo brick, tqjo gorse, tordo throstle, torno lathe,
tremoco grain of lapine, troco small coin, trogo stump,
fragment, body of soldiers, etc.

Thus: abroThos, avos, cachopos, carogos etc.

This modification does not take place in the words
adbrno ornament, a tire, anwr love, holsa purse, Mlso
pocket, estojo case, box, folha leaf, folho flounce, frill,
globo globe, gosdo grease, fat, gorra cap, gorro hood,
cape, goso joy, enjoyment ; gorto taste ; gota drop ; molho
sauce, trmco trunk, stump; thus: adornos, iolsos, esto-
jos, etc.

14. Thema.

Among the persons who assisted at the funeral (exequies)
of the brother and sister, there were besides their parents,
their grandparents and the servants, more than a hundred
men, but only a few women. All men are mortal. Of what
died the children of the count and countess? They are said
to have succumbed to the measles or small-pox. The arms
over the chief entry has been covered with crape in sign
of mourning. — To make these tasks correct, every care is to

Formation of, the Plural of Nouns. 269

be employed and particular attention to be bestowed upon gender
and number of the nouns. The shopkeeper of the next corner
sells victuals and other goods of all kinds. I bought there
5 pounds of sugar, 2 kilos of coffee, 3 litres of wine, and
6^/a meters of ribbon, as also half a dozen pairs of gloves
and three dozens and a half of handkerchiefs. — In Lisbon
there are in the halls ('= portal or vestihulo) of the better
houses doorkeepers sitting behind ornamental tables, to give
information to the visitors and to receive and hand over to
the residents visiting-cards or any kind of commissions. The
Portuguese peasants like to eat boiled grains of lupine. (The)
tastes differ: while some like pork, others prefer eggs,
and others still like sauces best. The Portuguese woods are
full of gorse, a prickly plant of which there are various kinds.
These gorses generally grow on dry ground and bear (= dar)
yellow blossoms.

15. Tersao.

Todas as segundas e quintas-feiras os guarda-livros d'aquel-
las casas d'exporta9ao teem mais que fazer do que nos outros
dias da semana, por serem vfeperas da partida dos paqufites.
As vezes nao bastam os esf6r9os d'esses empregados para
senhorear todos os trabalhos, mas 6 precise pedir ref6r(;o aos
prepostos e mais empregados. Destes tro^os d'arvore reben-
taram alguns renovos, e por entre estes destr6(jos de tijolos e
esses abrolhos ha muitas gavinhas de hera agarradas as fendas
pelas adhesivas. Os z6los muitas vezes sao signal, ou de poucos
miolos ou de poncas entranhas. Chama-se Cdrtes ao parla-
mento portugugs, assim como ao edificio, onde esta o parla-
mento; de ordinario sao abertas no dia dois de Janeiro. Em
Lisboa ha gnarda-portoes em todas as melhores casas particu-
lares. Nos mercados compram-se muito baratas todas as hor-
tali5as, taes como as couve-fl6re3, os broceolos, os espinafres,
as azedas, os bredos e outras hervas; e os mal-me-queres e
amores-perfeitos as mao-cheias.

16. Leitnra.

Tomada de Santarem^ (1147).

Na noite do sabbado, destinada para o assalto, tornava-se
probabUissimo que os atalaias e roldas^ estivessem descuidados.
Se, como parece, o calculo foi este, cdlculo na verdade nao

' Santarem, a town upon the Tagus in the province of
Estremadura, the ancient Scalabis of the Bomans and once one
of the strongest bulwarks of the Saracens.

^ Bolda, antiquated, modernly randa = patrol.

270 Lesson 5.

exempto de perfidia^ as esperanQas dos christaos falharam em
parte. No logar onde habitualmente nao havia sentinellas,
descobriam-se agora duas, que mutuamente se espertavam
a vozes.

A pequena hoste, cuja rectaguarda o prmcipe ^ fechava,
parou entao no meio de uma seara, esperando que os vigias
adormecessem com a modorra do quarto d'alva. Largas horas
Ihes deviam parecer estas em que esperavam; mas os dois
musillmanos cederam por fim ao somno. Pelo tecto da casa
de um olleiro conti'gua ao muro, Mem Ramires coseu-se com
este e procurou com a ponta da langa segurar uma escada as
ameias; mas, falhando-lhe o tiro, a escada caiu com grande
ruido. Nao titubeou elle entre a yida e a morte e, curvando-se,
ergueu sobre os hombroa um soldado, que lan90U as maos a
aresta da muralha, e, pulando acima, pode amarrar a escada
a uma das ameias. N'um relance o alferes subiu com o pendSo
real e hasteou-o. Quasi a um temgo Mem Eamires se achou
ao pe d'elle. Tudo isto foi obra de um instante ; mas o ruido
despertdra, de feito, as sentinellas. Olharam : o pavoroso estan-
darte do tyranno Ibu Errik estava la come o espectro da morte.
Estupefactos, perguntaram ambos com voz tomada: — Quem
sois? — Fora impossivel enganal-os. Tr6s vpzes olamaram em
brados confusos: Nazarenos! Trfis eram tambem os christaos
que se achavam no adarve. Mem Rodrigues respondeu com
grito de guerra: — Santiago e rei AflFonso! (Continua.)

Conrersaijao.

Que 6 Santarem? Como se chamava antigamente?
Que importancia tinha sob o dominio dos saraeenos

(mouros) ?
Por quem foi tomada? E em que anno?
Quem 6ra Affonso Henriques? E quando reinava?
Qual era o calculo dos assaltadores ?
Quem deu o primeiro assalto? e como?
Qual foi resultado - d'essa tentativa ?
Como reparou Mem Ramires o mallogro?
Como se descreve o encontro dos portugu6sens com oa

saraeenos ?

1 Aflfonso Henriquea, first king of Portugal, 1128—1185.

Use of the Article. 271

Sixth Lesson.

Use of the Article.

§ 19. The definite Article {artigo definido) is not
only employed before nouns (nomes communs) but also
in the following cases:

(a) It substantivates any other particle, any letter
or even a whole sentence employed as a subject, attri-
bute, or object, namely:

(a) attributive adjectives: o bello, o Ucito, o
sublime;

(P) infinitives: A naturesa feg o comer para o
viver. gahares-te de sdbio mostra seres igno-
rante;

(t) prepositions: adverbs, conjunctions, letters —
e.g.: Defender o contra d'uma questdo.
coma, quando, o porque, o A(hc) ;

(b) phrases: nao posso dos negligentes e o nao
qiiero dos contumases, valem quasi o mesmo.

(b) It changes appellatives into proper names; for
instance o Forte (= harbour); a Extremadura (== the
extreme border); a JBeira (= brink, bank); o Funchal
{= a field set with fennel) ; a Bahia {= bay) ; o Bio de
Janeiro ; a Granja (== farm, grange), o Espinho {= spine)
Portuguese bathing-places; a Terceira (= the third),
island of the Azores.

(c) On the other hand, it changes proper names into
appellatives : os Albuquerques, os Castros, os Camoes — i.e.
prominent naval leaders such as Affonso dAlhuquer-
que and D. Jodo de Castro, or famous poets like Camoes;
for instance : Gil Vicente foi chamado o Flauto portugues
Gil Vicente was called the Portuguese Plautus.

N.B. — Also family names indicating totality may be em-
ployed in the plural.

(d) The definite Article is also employed with proper
names preceded by an adjective (young, old, little, poor
included) or followed by an apposition — e.g. : o eloquente
Cicero ; Guilherme o Conquistador, young Henry o joven
Henrique.

272 Lesson 6.

Are excepted from this rule santo (Santo) and sao
(Sdo) Saint, as also the ordinary numbers employed
with names of regents, and several other appositions:
Santo Antonio e o padroeiro de Lisboa. A Mblia, tradu-
zida por Sao Jeronymo, e conhecida pelo nonie de « Vul-
gatav>. Luis Quatorse, Carlos-Quinto, Alexandre Magno;
Deus Foderoso.

(e) The definite article is employed with the names
of the seasons : a primavera Spring, no verao in Summer,
durante o inverno during winter.

(f) Sometimes the definite article is found without
a substantive, which is to be substituted. It then often
corresponds to our that, those. Ex. : As merces que recebi
sao manifestas a todos; aos de for a com esponto da sua
grandesa, aos de casa com inveja de minha fortuna.

(g) Contrary to the English, the definite article is
generally employed before a possessive adjective, not
indicating parentship.: o meu jardim, a vossa casa etc. ;
but minha prima, seu marido etc.

N.U.— This rule is not alway strictly observed.

The word indicating possession being a pronoun,
it has no article: Este livro e meu [this book is mine);
esse e teu, aquelle nao e nosso.

(h) The definite article is employed with parts of
the body or its clothing, bodily qualities or states,
and also wherever the relation between possessor and
possession is evident (in English there is employed the
indefinite article or the possessive adjective instead).

Ella tern as cabellos louros e os olhos pretos.

She has fair hair and black eyes.

Falava com a cahega erguida e o brago estendido.

He spoke with his head raised and his arm extended.

Maria e muito parecida com a mae.

Mary is much resembling her mother.

Tiraram os chapeus.

They took their hats off.

Calgdmos as lui>as we put our gloves on.

Ella tent a garganta inflammada.

She has her throat inflamed.

Use of the Article. 273

EUe teni a hdcca rasgada, as pernas compridas, a cinta

delgada.
He has a large mouth, long legs, a fine waist.
Ter uma d6r de denies, uma dtr de cabSga.
To have a tooth-ache, a head-ache, as in English, but in

the plural form: ter dores de denies, de cabSga.

§ 20. The definite Article is omitted :

(a) before proper names (of. however § 19, (b), (c)
and (d).

N,B. — In familiar speech the article is often employed
before names of persons : Carlos foi levar a carta. Ber-
nardino Machado i repiiblicano. Also the article may be put
before the names of well-known artists — e.g., As B6das de
Cana, pintadas pelo Veronese, e a Kermesse do Rubens . . .

Exc. : Are excepted from this rule the names of the
seas, rivers, mountains and continents, as well as certain
countries and provinces which are always employed
with the article (o Atldntico, o Mondego, o Caramulo,
a Eurox>a, a AlemanJia, a Japdo, a Extremadura etc.;
but without the article: Portugal, Trds-os-Montes). Also
the article is found always before a plural name of
countries: as Indias; os (dois) Algarves; os Estados
Unidos (do Brasil) etc.

(b) before nouns, especially abstract ones, which (a)
are quite generally employed, or (p) as an attribute —
e.g. : Pohresa nao e viUza poverty is no crime. Padecer
por fbrga e fraqueza; nao desanimar nos trahaThos, neces-
sidade. Yet you may also read and say: Inveja e um
vicio envy is a vice.

(c) in vocatives — i.e., addressing persons or personi-
fied beings: PWios (my sons) jd sei que nao posso durar
muito. Hervas do prado, vossa vida e morte e innocente
Ye herbs of the meadow, your life and death are in-
nocent.

(d) with the names of the months: Estamos em
november. Foi em margo do anno passado que . . .
However : Todo o (meg de) Janeiro esteve frigidissimo.

(e) with the names of diseases, generally enjployed
in English with the article : Elle tern bexigas (the small-
pox), tinha sarampo (the measles) : tern typho he has the
typhus.

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 18

274 Lesson 6.

§ 21. The article, though generally omitted before
names of islands and towns, is employed:

(a) when they are accompanied by an adjective or
some other attributive determination — e.g. : terremoto
de 1755 destruiu quasi complefamente a velha Lisbda; da
qual a Lisbda d'hoje e muito differente ;

(b) with those proper names formed by an appel-
lative (cf. § 19, (b): a Madeira, a Guar da (town of
Portugal); o Cairo (formed after the Arabian).

§ 22. Contrary to the English, the definite article
is generally employed:

(a) before material and abstract nouns in the nomi-
native (as a subject, sometimes also as a predicate).
ar e mats leve do que a agua air is lighter than water;
Cf. : vinho e feito de uvas . . . esse liquido e (o) vinho
... vinagre e vinho aeedo . . . o vinagre e feito de
vinlio . . . Tambem se fas vinagre de cervija . . . da beter-
raba se faz assucar. chumbo e mais pesado que o ouro.
medo i mna conselheiro;

(b) before nouns which, in contrast to § 20, (b),
are employed in a restrictive meaning — e.g.:

A pobrcza de hens materiaes nao e villiza, mas sim a

pobreza de dignidade.
Poverty of material goods is no disgrace, but poverty

of dignity is.

Antes a pobreza hwirada,

Do que a riqueza roubada.

Eather honoarable poverty than robbed riches.

A rega ou a chuva excessivas prejudicam as plantas.

Excessive watering or rains damage the plants.

(c) before the cardinal points North and South and
before the names of the feasts — e.g.: para o sul, para
norte, ao sul, ao norte ; e.g. : da norte para o sul from
North to South; but: de leste or d^este, a [or ao) deste
from East to West; pela Fdsc(h)oa about Easter, ao
Natal at Christmas;

(d) with collective names of corporations, govern-
ments, the names of sciences, reUgious creeds, seasons,
metals, etc., as:

nobility a nobrSza monarchy a monarchia

government o govh-no history a hist&ria

Use of the Article. 275

geography a geographia Judaism o judalsmo

philosophy a philosophia winter o inverno

posterity a posteridade spring a primavera

mankind a humanidade gold, silver o ouro, a prata

Christianity o christianismo iron, steel o ferro, o ago.

(e) With nouns denoting a whole class, genus, or
species, as:

Man is mortal o homem S mortal.
The voices of animals are very different.
As vozes dbs animaes sao muito differentes.
The rich (men) are not always happy.
Os ricos nao sao sempre felizes.

(f) before the following and other nouns taken in
a general sense:

Man homem hell o inferno

men os homens tea o did

Nature a natureza dinner o jantar

heaven o ceu breakfast o almdgo

earth a terra supper a ceia.

(g) also in compositions of adjectives and abstract
nouns, which in English are used without the article,
it cannot be omitted (cf, (b) examples) — e.g.:

human understanding o intendimento humano

human power a fdrga humana

human nature a naturSza humana

human life a vida do homem

high life a alta roda or sociedade

ancient history a histdria antiga

modern history a histdria moderna

universal history a histdria universal

high treason a alta traigao

royal favour a real graga

divine religion a divina (or santa) religiao

English history a histdria inglSsa

English poetry a poesia inglesa

kingly power o poder real.

(h) "Town" in the terms "to go to town, to live
in town," etc., is ir a (viver na) cidade. Also the names
of streets, squares and public buildings are employed
with the article. A rua de Garrett, do Ouro, Garrett
Street, Gold Street; a Fraga de Bom Tedro Quarto, o
Eocio Rocio Square; Largo de Camoes Camoes Place,

18*

276 Lesson 6.

(i) Geographical names are, contrary to the English,
generally employed with the article (cf. § 1, (a), 3; (b), 2
§ 20 (a) Exc. and § 21) : a Inglaterra England, o Vesuvio
Vesuvius, a Alsdcia Alsace, a Britanha Brittany, etc.
The terms Western, Southern, etc., which form one idea
with the following names, are rendered in Portuguese
by do oeste, do sul, etc. or occidental, oriental, septentrional,
meridional — e.g.: Eastern Africa a Africa de leste or
oriental. Southern Portugal o Portugal meridional or
de sul.

(k) as in English the names of the months are
employed without article, if not meant in a restrictive
sense: Janeiro geralmente e frio: o Janeiro d'este anno
esteve excessivumcnte frio.

(1) with the article are employed todo all, the whole,
every, amhos, amdas both, and qual which, when rela-
tive. Todo pais the whole country; todo o homem
every man, o mesino autor o qual jd citei the same
author whom I cited already. Todos os mares os quaes
percorri All the seas I ran through. Ambos os irnidos,
anibos as minhas moos both the brothers, both my hands,
(m) The article is employed in certain idiomatic
expressions, as:

dar OS bans dias to say good morning

dur as boas festas (os parabens) to send the compliments
of the season, to felicitate

dar OS pesames a alguem to condole with a person

fazer as suas despedidas to bid good-bye

pela manha, pela tarde in the morning, in the after-
noon

lis sete horas at 7 o'clock

ao meio-clia at midday

saber o portuguis to know Portuguese (cf. : falar por-
tugues).

a maioria, os mais dos homens most men

as mais das vezes mostly

viver da mao a boca to live from hand to mouth.

as armas! to arms!

17. Teina.

The ostrich has long legs, a long neck, and very short
wings. The fox has a more slender form than the wolf My
children have fair hair and blue eyes. Do you know that
girl with the brown eyes? Tes, I know her; she is the

Use of the Article. 277

daughter of a German in Alsace. In Germany people have
mostly light eyes; the more towards south, the more dark
eyes are met with. In Northern Europe most persons have
flaxen hair. America is bathed in the east by the Atlantic
Sea^ and in the west by the Pacific. Do yon learn French?
Not yet; I shall learn it as soon as I know Portngaese. I
thought I had already heard you speaking Portuguese. In-
deed, but I do not yet know it well. Folar, from the French
poularde (= fattened poultry), is a present given in Portugal
at Easter, in some places also at Christmas. At Christmas time
you may send the compliments of the season from Christmas
Eve until Epiphany (dia dos [tres] reis [magos]). I wish you
a happy New Year with all my heart (see § 14). My sister
has her throat inflamed and my friend has a head-ache.
January was very cold. Japan is now a great Power. The
Emperor of China died young.

18. Versao.

Portugal continental e insular.

Portugal, a Lusitania dos antigos, e um dos estados da
Europa occidental. EUe occupa quasi toda a parte d'oeste da
peninsula iberica, tendo por limites ao norte (N.) e a leste
(B.) o reino de (a) Espanha, ao sul (S.) e a oeste (0. or W.) o
oceano. sen maior comprimento, desde Chaves junto a
Melga90 ate ao cabo de Santa Maria no Algarve, e de 103
16guas, a sua maior largura de nascente a poente desde Campo
Maior ate ao cabo da Roca, e de 44 leguas. A superficie e
de 3150 16guas quadradas. A popula9ao no continente 6
poueo mais de 5 milhoes. A capital 6 a cidade de Lisbfia
sobre o Tejo. Outras cidades importantes sao: o Porto,
Coimbra, Vizeu, Braga, Setiibal. Comprehende este reino,
aldm do continente, as ilhas chamadas adjacentes, que sao as
dos A9ores, da Madeira (vulgarmente denominada «a Ilha») e
Porto Santo. Outras ilhas sao o archipelago de Cabo Verde,
as ilhas de Sao Thom6 e Principe. archipelago de Cabo
Verde forma dois grupos, a saber: o de Barlavento ao norte
que se compoe das ilhas de Santo Antao, Santa Luzia, Sao
Vicente, Sao Nicoldu, Sal, Boa Vista; e o de Sotavento ao
sul, qual consta das ilhas de Sao Thiago, Maio, Fogo e
Brava. Na Oceania ha a ilha de Timor, que serve de degredo.

Conversa^ao.

Onde esta (ou flea) situado Portugal?
De que peninsula faz parte?
Quaes sao os sens limites?
Qual e seu maior comprimento?

278 Lesson 7.

E qual e a sua maior largura?

Qual 6 a sua snperfieie?

De que niimero 6 a popula9ao?

Quaes sao as cidades mais importantes ?

Quaes sao as chamadas ilhas adjacentes?

De quantos grupos se compoe o archipelago de Cabo

Verde ?
E quaes sao?

Seventh Lesson.

Use of the Article (continued).
§ 23. The Definite Article before the Attribute.

(a) The nouns nome, titulo, mes, falta are joined to
the following noun or proper name (if this be not a geni-
tive) by de without article, o nome de Defensor, titulo
de rei, mes de abril, a falta d'dgua. (Of. : titulo do rei
de Portugal era "Fidelissimo" ; Mingua e a falta do ne-
cessdrio).

(b) The appellatives ilha, cidade, villa, reino, estado,
provincia, porto, rua, imperio, regiao, serra, cabo, etc., are
joined to the following proper name by de with or
without the article (see Task 18).

N.B. — In a mere enumeration of names the appellative
with de and article is omitted (id.).

The employment of the article and its form after
these appellatives depends on the following proper name
being used, when alone, with or without the article,
and whether this be in the masculine or feminine, sin-
gular or plural form — e.g.:

A ilha de Timor, do Fogo, do Haiti, da Madeira,
da Trindade, as ilhas de Hyeres, dos Agores, das Ca-
ndrias. Yet without article: a ilha Terceira (i.e., the
third);

A cidade de Setubal, do Porto, do Funchal, da
Guarda, da Figueira da Foz, de Sao Cosnie, das Pedras
Salgadas, das Torres Vedras, etc.

The same with villa, porto, if these appellatives
are not a part of the proper name — as, for instance, in
the following:

Use of the Article. 279

Villa Franca, Villa Franca de Xira, Villa Franca
do Campo, Villa Fria, Villa Vigosa, Porio-Alegre, Porto
Cabreiro, Porto de MO0, Porto da Guar da, etc.

Cabo^ de Sao Vicente, da Boca, Cabo Delgado,
Cabo Negro, do Norte, da Praia, da Boa Esperanga, das
Formentas.

A rua (travessa, escada, calgada, praga, beco, ca-
minho, largo, caes, passadi(o) de El-Rei, de Jo&o de Deus,
de D. Fernando, do Fdrno do Tijolo, da Fdbrica das
Sedas, das Cavallarigas do Infante, dos Cardeaes de Jesus,
do Sodre, do Terreiro Publico.

imperio de AUemanha, do Japao; reino de
Portugal, os Estados Unidos do Brasil, imperio da

As provincias da Beira, da Estramadura, do Alem-
tejo, de Trds-os-Montes.

(c) Rio is always employed without de if indi-
cating a river — e.g.: rio Douro, rio Tejo, rio Lima;
but Bio de Janeiro.

§ 24. The Definite Article and the Apposition.

1. A noun in apposition is generally employed wit-
hout the article, when following the name: A rainJia
B. Leonor, regente do reino, confidra governo do Alem-
tejo a B. Joao, Mestre dAviz. Estivemos no Porto,
cidade episcopal, a segunda da monarchia em populagao.

2. The apposition is employed with the article in
the following cases:

(a) When the proper name is preceded by a title
(not being Bom, Bona, Fret, Sor, etc.): doutor Nogu-
eira; a menina Maria; padre Jose. (But Bom Carlos
Berquo, Bona Carolina Michaelis ; Frei Luis de Sousa ;
Sor Marianna) N.B. — If these titles are preceded by
senhor, senhora, rei, rainha, they too are employed with
the article:

a ex-rainha Dona Amelia, ex-rei (El-rei) Dam Ma-
nuel, etc.
A senhora Bona Beatriz Angela foi a primeira mulher em
Portugal que em 1911 votou nas eleigdes parlamentares.

^ Cabo, making part of the name, is written with a capital
letter, as also Villa, Forto, Rio in the same case.

280 Lesson 7.

(b) When it is an historical addition after a personal
name, without being an ordinal number — e.g.:

Doni Joao II (Segundo), o Principe perfeito, iniciou a
epoca dos grandes descobertas dos Portugueses.

(c) As a superlative (which, not being one ending
in -or, may also folloiv the noun):

Trindade Coelho, o melhor contista moderno e urn dos
caracteres mats ndbres que Portugal teve, morreu em
9 de agosto 1908.

«0s Lusiadas» e a titulo do poema de CamSes, poeta
portugues o mats cilebre do seu tempo.

(d) When indicating something notorious or famous.

toi Vasco de Gama, o grande navegador, que descohriu
caminho maritimo das Indias.

§ 25. The Indefinite Article and the Predicative

Noun.

1. The predicative noun is employed without
article and preposition, when indicating in a general
way a state, profession, title, parentship, office or em-
ployment, dignity, character, nationality, etc., with the
verbs :

(a) sir, ficar, fazer-se, tornar-se, dizer-se, nascer,
morrer, parecer, padecer etc. Ex. :

Dizia-se correligiondrio dos monarchisias, para ficar

deputado.
He passed himself off as a partisan of the monarchists,

in order to remain a deputy.
Meu aniigo e portugues e auctor; tornou-se sdbio.
My friend is a Portugaese and an author; he became

a learned man.
Bern que tivesse nascido filho do povo, morreu presidenie.
Though he was born a child of the vulgar, he died a

president.

(b) nomear to nominate, appoint, acclamar, pro-
claniar to proclaim, eleger to elect, crer, considerar jul-
gar to think, arniar cavalleiro to create a knight.

Dom Joao I. foi eleito Mestre da ordem de Aviz e armado
cavalleiro por seu pae, (o ret) Dom Pedro I. Em
1385 foi acclamado ret de Portugal.

Use of the Article. 281

2. The predicative noun is employed without ar-
ticle, but with preposition after the verbs escolher (se)
para to chose (to be chosen) ; passar por, ser tido por
to pass for, to be taken for ; tomar or ter por to think,
consider.

Escolheram-se os homens mais resolutos para combatentes;

escolheu-se para general um capitao experimentado.
Passava por homem capaz e recto, sempre o tinha tornado

(or tido) por tal.

3. The indefinite article is omitted with a noun in
apposition, as:

A Ceia dos Cardeaes, comedia por Julio Danias.
The Cardinals' Supper, a comedy by Julio Dantas.

4. Omitted also on the title-page of a book:
Grammdtica portuguSsa a Portuguese Grammar.
Histdria da Inglaterra a History of England.

5. A, an when used in the sense of "per" is ren-
dered by por or the definite article:

Five pounds a month cinco libras por (or o) mf.g.

So much a lesfson tanto por (or a) ligao.

To give so much a head dar tanto por (or a) cabeqa.

§ 26. Repetition of the Article.

(a) The article, as also its substitutes — e.g., the
possessive or demonstrative adjectives, is repeated before
several nouns or adjectives — expressing diversity of
meaning: Vird a julgar os vivos e os mortos. Os soldados
mogos e os velhos.

(b) The article is not repeated when those words
do not express diversity, but similarity, even though
their gender be different— e.g.: "Entre as ruinas e mo-
numentos antiquissimos que se encontram ainda pelo
pais ..." •

(Concerning the adjective in the plural see Lesson 9.)

19. Thema.

Harbours, hays, capes, provinces and towns of Portugal.

(See the map in the innerside of the front cover of this book.)

Portugal being a shore-land (pais d beira-mar), it has on
its coast some important harbours, where ships may sail into

282 Lesson 7.

and cast anchor in order to embark and disembark passengers
and goods. The principal harbours of Portugal are: that of
Lisbon, the best of all and one of the largest and most beau-
tiful in the world. There may enter it at any hour of the
day or night ships of any size, and there would be room
for (= caber) all the ships in the world. Following the
coast from north to south, we meet with the following
harbours: that of^ Gaminha, Vianna, Espogende, Pdvoa de
Vargim, Leixdes, an artificial harbour near the fishing--
villages of Lega and Mattosinhos ; Sao Jodo da Foe near
Oporto; Aveiro, Figueira da Foe, Vieira, 8. Martinho; those
of (da) Ericeira, of Cascaes, a beautiful bay called "the Por-
tuguese Riviera" ; of Sekibal, a very ancient commercial town
situated on the Ria^ do Sado; of Sines, Villa Nova de MU-
fontes, Sagres, a harbour made famous by the Infant Dom Hen-
rique with the surname "the Navigator" ; Lagos, a bay where
the English fleet used to have its manoeuvres ; Villa Nova de
Portimao, Faro, Tavira, Villa Beal de Santo Antonio.

As Portugal is a littoral, the land stretches now and then
into the ocean (tr.: pelo mar dentro), forming greater and
smaller capes or points. The principal capes of Portugal are
the following: The cape of Mondego, of Garvoeiro, da Boca,
the most occidental cape of Europe ; the cape of Espichel,
of Sines, of Saint Vincent, of Santa Maria.

Portugal has eight provinces, each of which has its capital:
that of the Minlio, the most northern province, is called
Braga; that of Trds-os-Montes : Braganga; that of the province
of Bouro: Oporto; that of the Beira-Alta: Vizeu; of the Beira-
Baixa: Chiarda; of Estremadura: Lisbon, at the same time
capital of the country; of Alemtejo: iloora; and that of Al-
garve: Faro.

20. Versao.
Portugal ultramarino.

(Vide mappa na parte antero-interior da capa d'este Ivuro.)
As provincias ultramarinas, vastos territorios situados na
Africa, Asia e Oce§,nia °j e sujeitos a um regimen adminastra-
tivo especial, comprehendem: na Africa: al6m das provincias
insulares de Cabo- Verde (see Less. 18), S. Thome e Principe, as
continentaes de Guine, Angola e Mozambique; na M-sia: o

' Substitute always "that of."

2 Ria is the mouth of a river enlarged to a sea. (Of. on
the map: Sado, Tejo; Sia de Vigo (in Spain).

^ Oceania or Oceania. The former accentuation is scientific
the latter popular.

Use of the Article. 283

estado da India e a provincia de Macau; na Oceania: o dis-
tricto autonomo de Timor.

A provincia da Guin6 compoe-se de territories na costa
occidental da Africa, e de muitas ilhas. D'essas ilhas, as mais
importantes sao: Bissau, Bolama, Jatte, todas perto da costa;
e mais ao largo as 12 ilhas do archipelago de Bijagos. — A
provincia de Angola esta quasi toda no continente da A-
frica, pois defronte da costa apenas tem uma ilha de areia.
sen territorio 6 enorme, e alguns o avaliam em urn milhao
e 300 mil kilometros quadrados. A capital de Angola 6 a
cidade de Loanda; e as suas principaes povoa5oes, alem de
Loanda, sao as seguintes : Cabinda, Ambaca, Malange, Bengaella
e Mossamedes. — • Mozambique, provincia ultramarina na costa
oriental da Xfrica, e formada por extensos territories litoraes
e ainda por muitas ilhas fronteiras, proximo e ao longe da
costa. A provincia eomprehende os districtos de Mozambique,
Zambezia, Inhambane e Lourenzo Marques etc. A capital
^ a cidade de Mozambique, situada na ilha do mesmo nome.
As suas principaes povoazoes, al6m da capital, sao: Quelimane,
Inhambane, Lourenzo Marques, Sofala. — Estado da India
eomprehende os territories de G6a (capital: Nova G6a ou
Fangim), de Damao e de Dia. A provincia de Macau e for-
mada de parte de uma peninsula d entrada do rio de Cantao, e
de duas ilhas muito proximaa d'aquella: Taipa e Colovane. A
cidade de Macau, capital d'esta provincia, occupa quasi toda
a parte portuguSsa da peninsula a entrada de rio de Cantao.
districto de Timor consta de parte da ilha de Timor e de
uma pequena ilha, chamada de Pulo-Cambing. A ilha de TimOr
4 uma das ilhas do archipelago de Sonda, archipelago que
alguns geograpbos modernos entendem pertencer a Asia e nao
a Oceania. Dilly, capital do districto portugufis de TimOr fica
na costa septentrional da ilha.

Foi durante o reinado de D. Joao I e sub a direcQao de
D. Henrique o Navegador, sen filho, que se descebriratn mais
de 360 l^guas da costa africana, desde o cabe Bojador ate a Serra
Leda, e as formosas ilhas do Atlantico, de que foram ventu-
rosas primicias as ilhas de S. Miguel, S"- Maria, Terceira,
Azores, Porto Santo e Madeira.

Conversazao.

Quaes sao es portos principaes de Portugal?

Quaes sao os seus principaes cabos, seguindo do norte

para o sul?
Quantas provincias tem esse reino?
Quaes sao os nomes d'ellas e das suas capitaes?
Que se entende por Portugal ultramarine?

284 Lesson 8.

Quaes sao as suas colonias africanas?

Como se ohamam as principaes povoa^oes de Angola i

de Mozambique?
De que territories se compoe o Estado da India?
De que e formada a provinoia de Macau?
De que consta o districto de Timor?

Eighth Lesson.

Omission of the Article.

(Cf. §§ 20, 21, 24 (1) a, 25, 1 and 2).
§ 27. The article (or its substitute) is omitted:

(a) in mere numerations (cf. § 23 (b) N.B.) — e.g.:
Rouhou-llie reldgio, corrente, anneis, tudo.

(b) often with nem...nem neither ... nor (also often
omitted in English):

N'isto nao ha nem honra nem proveito. Eu vi nem casa
nem jardim.

(c) after jamais and nunca before the subject, if
not determinate:

Nunca honra maior foi offerecida a ninguem.
Never a greater honour was offered to anybody.
Jdmais haverd amigo mats leal.

(d) in sentences denoting doubt, negation as well
as in questions expressing uncertainty, supposition, or
negation :

Duvido que haja qualklade melhor.

I dciubt whether there be a better quality.

Nao havia coragao mats nohre do que o d'elle.

There was no heart more generous than his.

Tens amigo dedicado, em que possas fiar-te?

Have you a devoted friend that you may depend upon ?

<iCabeQa de rapaz sohre a qual esses olhos admiraveis

pousassem um instante, era cdbega perdida.»
Any young man's head those admirable eyes rested upon

for a moment, was lost.
Jd se viu pessda mats ingrata?
Was there ever seen a more ungrateful person?

Omission of the Article. 285

(e) before a noun or substantivated participle
employed iu a general meaning — e.g.:

estado e de guerra.
The situation is that of war.
pals nao se resigna jd d situagao de vencido.
The country resigns itself no longer to the situation
of a vanquished (nation).

(f) before the adjectives tao, outro, tal, qual, tal
qual, qual outro, semelhante, igual, meio, certo, tamanho
(also subst.), and the substantives numero, parte, porgao,
quantidade, quantia, somma, genfe, pessoa, coisa.

(N.B. — Before the nouns and certo the article may be
employed.)

Mn certa occasiao a indignagao foi tamanha que . . .
On a certain occasion indignation was so strong that . . .
Nao querendo dar-lhe avuUada quantia, deu-lhe meia

promessa.
Not feeling inclined to give him a big sum, he gave

him a half promise.
Houve grande quantidade de gente e muita somma de

inielligencia.
There was a great number of people and a large

amount of intelligence.
Grande parte dos pedintes recebeu porgao igual a dos

asylados.
A great part of the poor got a portion equal to that

of the inmates of a charitable institution.
Di^me outro copo d'agua.
Give me another cup of water.
caracter deste sujeito e qual eu desejo.
The character of this man is such as I desire.
Tal mulher me fosse ella, qual marido eu Ihe sou.
Were she such a wife to me as I am a husband to her.
Elle abriu caminho qual outro Arnaldo de Winlcelried.
He made a way like a second A. W.

(g) before coisa in connection with alguma or nen-
huma.

Viu alguma coisa ? Nao vi coisa alguma (or nenhuma).

(h) often in titles and headings: Tomo segundo;
Capitido primeiro ; JDescoherta da tndia;

286 Lesson 8.

(i) before nouns employed predicatively : sr. Jose
e primo do Carlos. Carlos e amigo do primo. Francisco
d' Almeida foi vice-rei da India;

(k) with parts of the body spoken of in a general
meaning: (cf.§ 19(h)): corpo humano tern dois bragos,
duas pernas, cabega e tronco. Temos mao direita e mao
esquerda, pe dlreito e pe esquerdo;

(1) in dates: lAsboa, (em) 18 dejunho, Lisbon, June
the IS*'^. An exception to this is the official dating:
Lisboa, aos dezoito dias de junho de 1861.

(m) in phrases like these:

prestar juramento to take an oath

prestar servigo to do a service

par termo or metter caho a to put an end to

foliar (a) verdade to tell the truth

fazer de Mho to make a fool of oneself

fazer boa (md) figura to make a good (bad) figure

fazer numero to elevate or complete a number

dar horn resuUado to give a good result

tirar horn lucro to get a good profit

exhalar mdu cheiro to exhale a bad smell

ahrir hanca to establish an office

ter (por) costume to be in the habit

convocar cdrtes to convoke the House of Commons

ahrir caminho to make a way

estar a ponto de ... to he on the point of

i costume it is the custom

fazer aposta to lay a wager

a "pretexto de under a pretence

morrer de fehre to die of the fever

morreu victima da revolugao he fell a victim to the re-
volution

ir a acto to go in for an examination.

fazer examen to pass an examination

viver em casa de . . . to live in the house of

nao dizer palavra to say not a word

ter costume to be in the habit

correr risco to run a risk.

^ (uma) pena it is a pity
ter appetite to have an appetite
estar com pressa to be in a hurry
estar com, raiva to be in a fury
ficar com raiva to fly into a passion

Omission of the Article. 287

ter fim to have an end

fazer barulho to make a noise

ter vontade to have a mind

ter como regra to make it a rule

(em) termo medio on an average

com vista with a view

fazer signal to make a sign

fazer presente (de) to make a present (of)

dar batalha to fight a battle

tomar exemplo to take an example

falar em voz haixa (alta) to speak in a low (loud) voice

nao ha meio de there is no means of.

e moda it is the fashion

S fdra de questao it is out of the question.

Note that the indefinite article is not used with que:
What a noise you make! Que barulho estd a fazer!
What a misfortune! Que desgraga!

§ 28. The article may be omitted:
(1) In enumerating several substantives which are
joined by e, ou, etc., or separated by a comma, and
not denote a contrast (cf. §26) however being of diffe-
rent gender— e.g.:

Os habitantes dos vdrios bairros, aldeias e arrabaldes.
It is the same for several adjectives which acom-
pany the noun:

A prim^ra, segunda e terceira classe or : as classes pri-
meira, segunda e terceira.

N.B. — If such a noun precedes, it is used in the plural.
So with such adjectives as, by their nature, follow the noun :

As Ivnguas portuguisa e inglisa.

The Portuguese and English languages.
The noun not being employed in the plural, the article must
be repeated:

A lingua portttgttSsa e a inglisa.
Equally repeated is the article, if living beings of different
sex are spoken of:

Os bois e as vaccas. Os burros ou as jumentas.

§ 29. The partitive article is omitted after the
prepositions com, sem, por, in certain idiomatic ex-
pressions; also after de denoting the instrument or
cause. Ex. :

288

Lesson 8.

coin prazer with pleasure
com paciencia with patience
com cuidado with care
com elegancia elegantly
sei)t dinheiro without money
Kcm rer/imdnia without cere-
mony
$em ma is nacla with no more

ado
yoi- dia daily, a day
par anno yearly, a year
jior tiiSn monthly, a month
por mar by water, by sea
2')0r terra by land

por tal forma in such a manner
■por ora for the moment
por causa de for the sake ot
230r Centura by chance
soh pena de morte on pain ot

death
enclier de heneficios to load

with benefits
viver de pdo to live upon

bread
morrer de fome to be starved

to death
saltar de alegria to jump with

joy-

§ 30. No article is used (a) before a substantive
which is repeated with a preposition, as:

gota a gdta by drops

folha a folha leaf upon leaf

dia a dia day after day

de dia para dia from one day to another

promessas sohre promessas promises upon promises

de tempo(s) a tempo(s) from time to time

de seculo em siculo from age to age.

(b) In the following expressions, where the noun
forms an indivisible unity with the verb, the article is
omitted in both languages:

ter razao to be right
nao ter razao to be wrong
ter vontade to have a mind
ter precisao to want
langar dncora to cast anchor
levantar dncora to weigh
anchor.

Icr alidade to take care
ter fome to be hungry
ter sede to be thirsty
ter sdmno to be sleepy
ter boa cara to look well
ter piedade to have pity
ter vergonha to be ashamed
ter ined,o to be afraid

(c) In certain expressions formed with de, em, a,
sobre, as:

estar em riseo to be at stake

estar sobre dncora to be at anchor

pegar em armas to take up arms

ser de opiniao to be of opinion

por em fugida to put to flight

perder de vista to lose sight of

comprar em segimda mao to buy second hand

Omission of the Article. 289

ir a cavallo to go on horseback

ir de carrudgem to go in a carriage

estar em casa to be at home

ir a casa to go home

estar de (or em) p6 to be standing

estar a pS to be up

tomar 'parte em to join in

tomar cuidado to be upon one's guard

tomar assento to take a seat

tomar sentido to be aware

tomar fogo to catch fire

tomar folego to breathe

dar gragas to say grace

dar (or fazer) attengao to pay attention

fazer caso de to value

fazer mengao de to mention

fazer fortuna to make one's fortune

pedir licenga to ask leave

pedir perdao to beg pardon

dar credito a to give credence

pdr-se em pe to rise

vir a pe to come on foot

estar em paz to be at peace.

§ 31. In some expressions the indefinite article is
employed, as in English, in the sense of one — e.g.:

d'um fdlego in a breath

n'uma palavra in a word

d'uma assentada \ n j.

J, A i all at once

dtima vez )

d'um trago at a draught.

§ 32. Employed in the plural, the indefinite article
has the meaning of some or about:

Vns dias depois; durante umas horas ;
Serao precise uns seis metros de fazenda.

21. Thema.

Virtue is the highest good. Men are mortal. Modesty
adorns youth. Human life is short. Man is liable to a variety
of changes. Gold and silver cannot render man happy. Beer
is sold at fivepence a pot. This coffee costs two shillings a pound.
The love of glory and the fear of shame are often the cause
of great valour. Summer is warm, but winter is cold. Geo-
graphy is a very useful science. Good and bad seem to be
blended together through the whole of nature. Do you know

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 19

290 Lesson 8.

General Knox? Yes, I know him. The knife and fork are
broken. Let us go to church. The boys were at school this
morning, but now they are at home. When did they come
home? After two o'clock.

What books have you got there ? Langenscheidt, a Por-
tuguese pocket-dictionary and Ey, a Portuguese conversation-
grammar. What cold weather to-day! Did you find some
means of saltisfying him? I do not know, he said not a
word. His mother made us a sign to leave the room. The
poor woman was dying from hunger and cold. You are
always right; I have been wrong. Have pity on my weakness.
I must ask your leave. Many poor people live on bread and
potatoes only. The rent of this house is twenty pounds a
year. We expected our friend every day (say: from day to
day), but day after day elapsed without bringing him. Cha-
rity begins at home (by itself). Necessity knows no law. Games,
conversation, theatre, nothing entertains him.

Mr. Teixeira Lopes is a Portuguese and a sculptor. He
lives at Villa Nova de G-aya, in front of Oporto, on the left
side of the Bio Bouro, Bua Direita. He is a most famous
artist. Some of his most important works are in Lisbon — for
instance, the monument to E(a de Queiroz, one of the most
eminent novelists, the so-called Portuguese Zola; it is erected
on the Largo do Quintella. In Catholic countries it is the
custom to hear the Mass every day.

22. Tersao.

Jao I (primeiro).
Dom Joao I, rei de Portugal, cognominado o de Boa
Memdria, mas mais conhecido pelo seu titulo de Mestre d'Avie,
foi filho de el-rei D. Pedro I e de D. Thereza Louren90. Nasceu
em Lisboa a 15 de abril de 1358, e na idade de 11 annos foi
eleito mestre da ordem de Aviz e armado cavalleiro por seu
pae. A prudencia e valor deste monarcha deveu Portugal a
conserva^ao da sua independenoia, que esteve a ponto de perder
com a morte de D. Fernando I. Mestre de Aviz, a quern
a rainha D. Leonor, regente do reino, confiara o governo do
Alemtejo, para o afastar de Lisboa, aonde era benquisto do
povo, foi ao pa90 a pretexto de conferenciar com ella. Em-
quanto fazia espalhar a noticia de que ali o retinham prisio-
neiro, apunhalou o conde de Ourem, valido da rainha, vinganda
assim a affronta de que este fora criminoso autor. N'um ins-
tante apparecea armada a popula^ao de LisbOa. D. Joao
publicou a morte do conde, e foi logo acclamado regente e
defensor do reino, que jurou defender contra Castella.
D. Leonor retirou-se para Alemquer, villa da provincia de
Extremadnra, e o monarcha castelhano entrou em Portugal,

Congruence. 291

empenhando todo o seu poderio, para tomar Lisboa. Por6m
as bem acertadas medidas e o valor de D. Joao e do grande
condestavel D. Nuno Alvares Pereira, inseparavel companheiro
das suas glorias militares, fizeram com que os portugutees
sustentassem o sitio, ate que o grande ex6rcito sitiador se viu
obrigado a retirar-se. (Continua.)

Conversa^ao.

Como foi cognominado D. Joao I?

Qual titulo pelo que era ainda mais conhecido?

Quando nasceu?

Que e que Ihe deve Portugal?

Quem foi D. Leonor?

Qual foi acto com que o Mestre d'Aviz vingou a af-

fronta feita ao povo e a memoria do rei pela rainha

viuva e o sen favorite oastellao?
Que succedeu depois d'este acto?
Quem foi o companheiro d'armas de D. Joao I?
Qua] foi resultado das medidas e do valor de ambos ?

Second Division: Syntax.
Ninth Lesson.

Congruence.

§ 33. The adjective, the article and the past
participle conjugated with ser or estar agree in gender
and number with their noun or pronoun — e.g.;
amigo certo conhece-se na occasiao incerta.

Exceptions. — 1. The subject being the pronoun v6s (or
que referring to vos), and indicating only one person, those
words are in the singular: V6s sereis feliz. Vds sois amado
or amada.

2. The subject being quem followed by the verb ser and
a substantive in the plural as a predicative noun, the verb
agrees with the latter (as in English): Qtiem foram os pro-
genitor es de D. Affonso I.?

3. See L. 16, § 72, N.B.

Contrary to the English, the verb ser, when used im-
personally, agrees with the following predicative noun: Sao
quatro horas it is 4- o'clock. Sao deaoito do mSs it is the

19*

292 Lesson 9.

eighteenth of the month. Qtieni e? Sou eti. Who is it?
It is I.

§ 34. (a) Several nouns in the singular being
accompanied by the same adjective or past participle,
the latter takes the form of the plural: a lingua,^ (a)
grammdtica e (a) literatura portuguesas. Sao necessartas
a circumspecgdo e a prudencia. A senhora e a crianga
estavam cangados. Com as suas tdo apregoadas probidade
e distingao teem tecido toda esta trama.

(b) The nouns being of different gender, without
diversity in their meaning, the adjective or participle,
when employed in the singular, agrees with the next
to it: am,6r e amizade verdadeira or: a amigade e
amor verdadeiro. Com verdadeiro amor e amizade. J^
necessario o esforgo e a vigilancia. E necessaria a vigi-
lancia e o esforgo.

(c) Those nouns being of different gender and
meaning, or the adjective (or participle) being in the
plural, it agrees with the masculine noun: Um dia e
uma noite eram passados. Nem o sangue, nem as lagrimas
estavam enxutos. A cortiga e os couros foram deelarados
de commercio livre.

(d) The same adjective or participle referring to
several nouns in the plural and of different gender, it
agrees with the next to it: 8eus temores e esperangas
eram vas, or: eram vaos seus temores e esperangas.

(e) The same adjective referring to a noun in the
plural and another in the singular, it generally agrees
with that of the plural: As fazendas e o dinheiro eram
muitas. ^

§ 35. (a) The verb agrees with its subject in
person and number:

tempo foge ; eu escrevo; nds vamos.

• Cf. "No dia e horas indicates, as irmas dirigi/ram-se ao
Vaticano^. (Manual Politico by Trindade Coelho). For these rules
given in § 34, there are many contrary examples met with even
in the classics, as, e.g.: Bosto e cabega descdberta. "Porque essas
honras vas, esse ouro pure, melhor d merecel-os sem os ter one
possuil-os sem os merecer." ^

Congruence. 293

(b) Several subjects belonging to one verb, this is
used in the plural. If these subjects belong to different
grammatical persons, the first is preferred to the second,
the second to the third— e.g. : Eu e tu (tu e eu) temos
saude. Tu e Maria estaes ions.

(c) If there be several subjects of the third person,
the verb is also

(a) in the third person and plural when the sub-
jects are in the plural:

Andam sempre de companMa os erros e as desculpas.

(P) in the third person plural when the subjects are
in the singular and precede the verb:

A comida, a bebida, a vigllia e o somno sem certa nie-
dida nao aproveitam.

(y) in the third person singular when the subjects
follow the verb:

Sent certa medida nao aproveita a comida, a bebida, etc.
(see Note I).

(b) in the first person plural if the person who
speaks belongs to the subjects:

(0 mestre e) todos os officiaes somos tens amigos (cf. :
mestre e todos o officiaes sois meus amigos.

Note I.— With following subjects the verb is also met
with in the plural:

Fallecem-nos (or fallece-nos) o pao e a agiia.

Note II. — If two or more subjects indicate only one and
the same person or thing, the verb agrees with that next
to it:

Este soldado valente, este poeta sublime, esta gl6ria national
(Carnoes) foi desamparada no leito da dor.

(d) The impersonal verbs, except haver, which is
always employed in the singular, agree with the logical
subject — v.g.:

Chegaram muitos viajantes there arrived a great many
travellers. (French : il arriva beaucoup de voyageurs.)
Ha muitos homens que . . . there are many people who . . .
Houve muitas pessoas there were many persons.

294 Lesson 9.

§ 36. (a) If the subject be a partitive collective
in the singular with following genitive in the plural,
the verb and attribute are generally in the plural.
[N.B. — The genitive may not be expressed) — e.g.:

Parte (dos soldados or dos quaes), para fugir ao ferro

dos nossos, se langarem a uma lagda a nado.
(b) If the subject be a general collective— i.e., one
only to be considered as a totality— the verb is employed
in the singular, even if a genitive plural accompanies
the subject:

exSrcUo dos iniinigos foi derrotado.
§ 37. (a) In relative clauses the verb agrees in
its person not with the relative pronoun, but with its
antecedent :

Tti que nunca estiveste no estrangeiro . . .

Eu sou aquelle mesmo (aqiiella mesma) que seinpre te amei.

(b) It is the same for the relative que which, joined
to the verb ser, is employed as Particula de realce after
a personal pronoun (cf. L. 16, § 64 (c)):

Foste tu (o) que disseste . . . fomos nds quern dissimos.

(c) However, if a relative clause is introduced by
quem, in order to render a personal pronoun prominent,
the verb agrees with quern.

Fiu eu quern disse; es tu quern ouve; fdmos nds quern
disse.

23. Thema.

I play the piano, you. write letters. You are satisfied, my
son, but your sister is not satisfied. During the fine season
concerts are often given here. Most of the Portuguese content
themselves with two daily refections. I and my children will
pass the summer in the country and the autumn at the sea-
side. Tou (V6s) wanted to deceive me, but perhaps it is
you who will have been deceived. His cold blood and intre-
pidity amaze the bravest men. The earth, the stones the
animals, the plants, all are the work of God. Incredible things
succeed every day. The refined fashion and taste of the last
season created quite a new branch of industry. His brother
and 1 made this discovery. Was it you who helped that poor
family? It was I who made the suggestion, but it was you
who have given the necessary money. It was the women who
made the great revolutions.

Congruence. 295

24. Versao.

Joao I (continuagdo).
Ja antes d'isto tinha D. Nuno desbaratado os hespanhoes
na batalha dos Atoleiros, junto a Pronteira. '■ Convocadas
c6rtes em Coimbra, n'ellas discutiu com agudeza e resolveu
com liberdade o cflebre jurisconsulto Joao das Eegras, que a
coroa portugufisa estava vaga, que podia o povo eleger prin-
cipe que o governasse, e que nenhum Ihe convinha mais do
que D. Joao, Mestre de Aviz. A 6 de abril de 1385, nao
tendo ainda completes 27 annos, foi D. Joao acclamado rei
de Portugal. Blevado ao throno moatrou-se logo digno d'elle,
nao so pela escdlha que fazia das peasoas para os_ diversos
cargos, como pelo valor com que defendeu o reino. A victoria
de Trancoso e outras, seguiu-se a de Aljubarrota, dada a 15 de
agosto de 1385, e na qual com 6500 homens derrotou o exer-
cito castelhano que se compunha de 30 000 homens. N'eate
numero se contava a flor da nobreza castelhana e o proprio
monarcha, que so deveu a vida a velocidade do seu cavallo.
Em commemora^ao d'esta batalha, e no proprio si'tio d'ella
edificou novo rei, para eumprir o v6to que fizera, o sump-
tuoso templo de Santa Maria da Victdria, vulgo da Batalha.
Nao eontente com as vict6rias terrestres, D. Joao I meditou
fazer o seu nome immortal com as navaes, e preparando uma
armada de 200 v61as, n'ella embarcou com seus filhos D. Duarte,
D. Pedro e D. Henrique, e tomou em 1415 a praQa de Ceuta.
Quatro annos depois (1419) os descobrimentos das ilhas de
Porto Santo e da Madeira vieram abrir a Portugal as portas
das suas vastas conquistas. (Lacerda.)

Conversa^ao.

Qual 6 a regra fundamental de concordancia com relacjao

ao adjectivo, o artigo e o participio?
Para que mimero vae o adjectivo oa participio, ha-

vendo 2 ou mais substantives no singular?
Qaando concorda o adjectivo com o substantive mais

proximo?
Qaando concorda com o substantive do genere masculino?
Quaado concorda elle apenas com o ultimo?
Qual a regra da concordancia do verbo?
Havendo varios aujeitos de differentes pessoas, qual a

pessoa com que concorda?
Qual numero do verbo, havendo varies sujeitos da

3. pessoa do singular?

' Villa e freguezia no Alemtejo, districto de Portalegre.

296 Lesson 10,

Em que niimero esta o verbo, sendo o sujeito uin col-

lectivo ?
Com que palavra concorda o verbo em phrases relativas ?

Tenth LessoD.

Intransitive and Transitive Verbs.

I. Intransitive Verbs.

§ 38. The intransitive verbs generally form their
compound tenses, as in the English language, with the
auxiliary ter or haver:

Tenho andado uma ligoa todos os dias.

I have walked a mile every day.

Elle sempre tern ido (vindo) chegado, voltado) a tempo.

He has always gone (come, arrived) to time.

' § 39. Yet some take also the auxiliaries ser or
estar or ficar, but only when a condition or the result
of an action is to he indicated. The participle with
ser, estar or ficar has the value of an adjective. If,
however, you want to indicate, not a condition, but an
action continually going on, you must employ ter or
haver.

As in English, a great many verbs are employed
transitively and intransitively.

Examine the following examples, distinguishing the
transitive from the intransitive meaning of the same verb.
Sabe que elle estd de volta? <

Do you know he is returned?
As actrizes esiavam voUadas para os espectadores.
The actresses stood (with their faces) turned to the

spectators.
A caneca estd or ficou partida.
The jug is gone or went asunder.

He has departed, is gone can only be rendered by:
elle partiu or foiC-se); elle tern partido would be: he has
broken or he belongs to a faction; elle e partido he is
party.

Estao idos aquelles tempos those times are gone.

Ella tinha adormecido.

She had lulled (somebody) to sleep; she had fallen asleep.

The CompleiBeflts and their Cases. 29T

Ella estava adormecida she was asleep.

N6s temos corrida miiito we have run fast.

N6s tmnos corrida mundo we have travelled about.

N6s estamas (or ficdmas) corridas.

We are (or became) vexed.

Tern caido hastante chuva there has fallen much rain.
Estd caido he is dejected.

A sua fortuna tern augmentado consideravelmente.
His fortune has been increasing' considerably.
A sua fortuna estd consideravelmente augmentada.
His fortune has been considerably increased.

11. Transitive Verbs and their Complements.

§ 40. Every transitive verb requires a complement
—i.e., an object on which the activity of the subject
passes over directly or indirectly; — e.g.:

If directly, the complement is the accusative
(complemento directo or ohjedivo propriamente dito), and
generally employed without preposition; if indirectly, it
is the dative (complemento indirecto), generally employed
with the preposition a (to). N.B, — Personal pronouns
have special forms for the complements (cf. P. I, L. 23).

Dam Affonso Henriques conquistou Santarem aos
Portugueses.

The Complements and their Cases.
A. The Complement of the Accusative.

(Complemento directo.)

§ 41. As a rule, this complement, as in English,
has no preposition:

Ml comprei um livra I bought a book.

§ 42. With a certain group of verbs, however, it
may be joined by a preposition, especially if referring
to persons; — -e.g.:

Vejo a elle I see him.

Amae aos vassos prdximas love your fellow-creatures.
As coisas que possam interessar aos meus designios.
The things which may influence my intentions.
Ninguem p6de servir ao mSsmo tempo a dais senhores.
Nobody can serve two masters at the same time.

298 Lesson 10.

This a is always employed in Amar a Deus [ci.
L. 11, §48 (a)p) and in the locution um a outro one
another : defendem-se urn ao outro they defend one another.
"With the verb chamar, when this has two comple-
ments. The complement of the person or the per-
sonified object is generally employed with the prepo-
sition a (or the pronoun in the dative).
Elle chamava amigo a qiiem ndo o era.
He called friend a one who was not.
Chamarayn "Principe Perfeito" ao rei Dam Joao II.
que ganhei com o nieu trabalho, chamo-lhe meu.
What i earned by my work, I call my own.
The preposition a with the accusative is found also
with the verbs ouvir (diser), ver, saber, cheirar, and others:
Oiwimos dizer ao sr. Fulano.
"Paris a Helena roubou" (Camdes).
"Querendo ver a Diana, Acteon perdeu a vida" (id.).
Este pao sabe (cheira) a mofo this bread tastes (smells)
of mould.
Note I. — The complemento directo is the one which, the
active voice being changed into the passive, becomes the sub-
ject: livro foi comprado por mim the book was bought by me.
Note II. — There are verbs that have two constructions;
so you may say : ensinar alguma coisa a alguem (alguma coisa
is the complemento directo), and ensinar alguem a fazer uma
coisa (alguem is the complemento directo).

B. Other Complements without Preposition.

§ 43. There are transitive verbs which, besides the
complemento directo, require the addition of an adjective
(or some word thus applied) or substantive referring,
as a qualification, to the complemento directo and serving
to complete the signification of the verb ; — e.g. :

Nomear alguem ministro, fazer alguem feliz. A corte

suppunha a dugue de Braganga, D. Joao, incapaz

de qualquer pensamento ousado.

This quahfying word is called nome predicativo do

complemento directo, predicative noun of the accusative.

The active voice being changed into the passive,

the predicative noun of the complement becomes the

predicative noun of the subject; — e.g.:

duque de Braganga, B. Joao, era pela corte supposto
incapaz de qualquer pensamento ousado.

The Complements and their Cases. 299

§ 44. The chief verbs thus constructed, are:

fazer to make appelidar \ , . ,

iornar to turn, become cognominar \ ^° nictname

eleger to elect achar to find, judge

namear to name considerar to consider

jurar to swear crer to believe, think

declarar to declare julgar to judge

constituir to constitute reputar to repute

instituir to institute suppor to suppose

sagrar to consecrate descrever to describe

wwg'iV to anoint pintar to paint

coroar to crown representor to represent.
chamar to call

Remark I. — With some of these verbs the predicative
noun may be joined to the verb by the particle como—e.g.:
considerar justa uma coisa or considerar uma coisa como justa.

With some verbs the qualification of the complemento
directo, instead of being a simple predicative noun, may be
ruled by the preposition por, and also para (expressing an
aim) — e.g.: instituir alguem por herdeiro. The' employment
of por (or como) is obligatory with the verbs ter and haver
in their meaning to judge, think, suppose, and with the verbs
dar a.ndi tomar and their synonyms — e.g.: ter alguem por feliz.

Remark II. — Instead of the predicative noun, an equi-
valent expression may form the complement of the above verbs :
Os historiadores reputam D. Joao III de intelligencia
apoucada.

§ 45. As an adverbial complement the accusative
without preposition is employed to indicate:

(a) the price or value with the verbs custar to cost,
■valer to be worth, avaliar (em) to value, to tax, apreciar
to appreciate, conceituar to value, think, etc. — e.g.:

Entao a vida em lAsbda custava os olhos da cara.

(b) the manner:

Elle passeava o chapeu na nuca e as maos nas algibeiras.
He walked about with his hat on his neck (at the back
of his head) and his hands in his pockets.

§ 46. EHiptically the accusative is employed, in
colloquial language:
Eil-o! there he is!
Besgragado que es! Unlucky man!
Boa tarde, minha senhora! Boas festas!

300 Lesson 10.

25. Exercise.

Serve your fatherland whenever it is threatened or its
dominions are invaded by enemies. Do not contradict those vsrho
wish you well and advise you. They will help you (passive
voice), and you will thank them for your rescue. Do not be-
lieve, however, those who flatter you. Imitate always those
who precede yon with a good example. Follow them, and
all true friends will felicitate you (pass. v.). Here it
smells of fresh hay. This cake tastes of lemon. The poli-
cemen summoned the crowd to disperse, but they were not
obeyed. They menaced the public with their arms, but the
people even defied the gun-barrels. Pool that you are, to be-
lieve that you will be considered a victim of the intrigues of
your adversaries. Thou shalt love God above all things and
thy fellow- creature as thyself.

26. Leitura.

Tomada de Saniarem (see Less. 16).

A voz do rei, sobrelevando as do tropel que o cercava,
retumbou entao por cima de estriipida.^ Bradava per Santiago
e pela Virgem, e ao mesmo tempo dizia aos que estavam no
adarve: — Eis-me aqui! eis-me aqui! Mettei-os a espada!
Nem um escape do ferro! —

Entretanto tinham arvorado outra escada, e 25 homens
d'armas estavam em cima. A yozearia dentro e f6ra do cas-
tello era ja confasa e medonha. Alfonso dividiu as suas pe-
quenas for9as em dois corpos, um que tentasse escalar o muro
pela direita, outro que tomasse o caminho do arrabalde assen-
tado na margem do rio, para que os sarracenos nao viessem
por aquella parte impidir-lhe o approximar-se da entrada. Ao
mesmo tempo os 25 esforgados tentavam quebrar as portas,
arremessando pedras contra ellas, mas debalde, ate que, ati-
rando ao de fora um malho de ferro por cima do muro, pu-
deram os que se achavam dentro, partir com elle os ferrdlhos.

Despeda9ado o dique, a torrente precipitou-se dentro do
castello. Affonso, movido pelo impeto do enthusiasmo religiose,
ajoelhou no limiar d'aquellas portas que mal cnidava se haviam
tao facilmente de abrir para o receberem vencedor.

Seguiu-se uma resistencia iniitil e uma larga carnifieina.
Os raios do sol, que nasc6ra entretanto, nao encontraram ii
sobre o roqueiro castello o estandarte do Islam ,derribado n'essa
noite (15 de mar^o), para nunca mais se erguer sobre as torres
da opulenta Santarem. (Alexandre Herculano).

^ Estrupida s. estrepito.

The Complements and their CaBes. 301

ConTersa^ao.

Que se diz da voz do rei Affonso?

Por quern bradava e que dizia?

Que tinham feito entretanto?

Como dividiu Affonso as suas forQas?

Que deviam fazer os dois corpos?

Que tentavam fazer os esfor9ado3 ao meamo tempo e com

que effeito?
Que fez Affonso, quando a torrente dos sitiadores se

precipitou dentro do castello?
Que se seguiu a entrada for5ada d'elles?
Que 6 que ja nao encontraram os raios do sol?
Em que dia e anno houve logar a tomada de Santar6m?

Eleventh Lesson.

The Complements and their Cases (continued).
C. Complements with a Preposition.

(Complemento indirecto.)

§ 47. The Complement preceded by the
Preposition de.

The preposition de is employed:
(a) With nouns:

(a) as a genitive complement of the subject: o
amor de Deus, the love of God (God loves);

(P) as a genitive complement of the object: o
temor de Deus, the fear of God (God is feared) ;

(t) to indicate property: o pago d'el-rei, the king's
palace;

(6) to denote time, place, material, form, price,
character, extension: na era de Christo; o com-
mercio do Porto ; uma perna de pdu; luvas de
seda; chapeu de tres bicos (three-cornered hat);
cadeira de bragos; charuto de vinUm; coisa de
valor; esguadra de quins: e velas; cinco metros de
altura (or de alto) por tres de largura (or de largo) ;

(e) in a partitive condition (of. L. 9 of P. I): tim copo
de ctgua; urn pouco de assucar; nada de bom;
tudo quanto ha de mais bello;

302 Lesson 11.

(I) before an attribute (cf.P.II,§23): o rei da Ingla-
terra; o imperio daAlemanha; liomem de intngas;

(r|) to express a destination: a sola de jantar; uma
pemia de escrever; papel de cartas; quarto de
dormir; estar de guarda;

(d) to indicate a characteristic: o homem das harbas
negras the man with the black beard; uma sa-
lada d'hervas finas (de alface) a salad of fine
herbs (lettuce);

(b) After certain adjectives and participles which
mostly indicate physical or moral qualities:

cego de ambos os olhos blind of both eyes

surdo do ouvido direito deaf of the right ear

alegre de semblante with a merry face

sou mais velho de cinco annos I am older by 5 years.

Such words are:

leve de (dinheiro) short of (money)
tranquillo de (alma) quiet of (mind)
provido de provided with
capaz de capable of, etc.

(c) With verbs such as: ter de, haver de with a
following noun or infinitive: accusar de, arrepender-se
de, ser de to belong to, to come from; vingar-se de,
desforrar-se de to revenge oneself on and others, in
English mostly employed with of.

accusar de to accuse of precisar de to (be in) want

arrepender-se de to repent of (of)

ser de to belong to, to come ahster-se de to abstain of

from desconfiar de to distrust of

ter de \ to have to queixar-se de to complain of

Jiaver de ] to be obliged to soffrer de to suffer from

aproveitar-se de to profit by morrer de to die of

acdbar de fazer to finish doing trenier de to tremble with

vingar-se de to revenge oneself nao passar de not to pass

of beyond

desforrar-se de to pay back passar-se de to do without

for gostar de to like

felicitar de to wish joy for vestir de to clothe with or in

gozar de to rejoice for revestir de to invest with

prevenir de to inform of ornar de to furnish or trim

with.

The Complements and their Cases. 303

(e) After the past participle of the passive voice of
verbs expressing a feeling, de may be employed instead
of por: ser amado de to he loved by.

(f) In elliptical phrases like: aqui d'el rei! (a cry
for help); ai de mim woe unto mel pohre de mim poor
me! felizes de nos! infeliz d'eUe! etc.

(g) As an expletive in familiar language : a boa da
mMer the good soul, o garoto do rapaz the naughty
boy; pohre do homem the poor man; o malandro do
jardineiro the sluggard of a gardener.

(h) In comparatives de may be employed before
que: Mle sdbia mais do que outros.

(i) In absolute superlatives as: o rei dos reis the
king of kings; o cdntico dos cdnticos the Song of Songs.

Remark. — De may join several complements to one noun
without being repeated: Berlim tern uma academia de sciencias
mechanicas e architectura ; muitas sociedades de sciencia e lite-
ratura; gabinete de Mstdria natural e de medalhas, galeria de
qviadros e estdtiias.

(k) In adverbial locutions, such as:

de or por certo to be sure estar de castas or de barriga

de cima from above para o ar to lie on one's

de dentro from within back

de novo anew de manha in the morning

de fdra from without de tarde in the afternoon or

de todo altogether evening

de joelhos kneeling de noite at night

de pressa quickly de madrugada at dawn

de vagar slowly de vez em quando sometimes

de veras (deveras) indeed de accordo com in agreement

de propdsito on purpose with

de fad:o really de mans(inh)o softly

de resto besides de chapeu na mao with one's

de modo so that hat in one's hand

de repente, de salto suddenly de brago dado arm in arm

de justiga right(ly) de bragos abertos with open

de verao in summer arms

de vez at once de mao a (or em) mao from

estar de volta to be back hand to hand, etc.

§ 48. The preposition a is employed:
(a) Before nouns, thus indicating:

304 Lesson 11.

(a) the dative complement: o jardineiro deu uma

maga ao filho;
(P) the accusative complement of the person alter
certain verbs which need two complements, one
of the person and another of the thing, and
always in the phrase aniar a Deus.
Examples: Devemos aniar a Deus sobre todas as
coisas e ao prdximo conio a nos mesmos. "A partilha do
mundo" chamou B. Joao II ao convenio que se estava
negociando. A nagao acclamou rei de Fortiigal a D.Jom.
Also if a misunderstanding is to be avoided : Be que
soffre? perguntou o medico a men amigo. Pede ao que
for mais leal (cf. § 42).

N.B. — After como we employ a when without this pre-
position it is not evident whether coma refers to the subject
or to the object:

Tratei-o como a homem de bem.

I treated him as a man of honour.

Tratei-o como homem de hem.

I treated him as a man of honour.

(y) space and direction: a cinco Jcilometres d'dqui',
vou a casa (home) a direita (a esquerda) to the
right (left);

(5) time: a que horas? as seis horas; aos vinte an-
nos; ao por de sol;

(e) instrument or means: morto a bala; impresso a
muitas cores; aberto ao cinzel; pintado a oleo, a
esfuminho (stump), a crayon;

(£) aim: sais a ver; partir a negocios importantes;

(ri) manner: a pe, a cavallo, a nado, a medo, a cos-
tume, ao parecer, etc.;

(6) measure, price, tax: comprar or medir a metros;
2Ksar as arrobas; comprar or vender a vintetH;
juro or edmbio a cinco por cento;

(i) measure of time or space: a tiro de bala- a tres
leguas de distancia; d'aqui a dez annos ■ a tantos
dias;
(k) a near future: o combdio estd a cliegar-
(X) a repetition or duration: andar a saltar; ensinar
a ler; continuar a falar (cf. d of this §).

The Complements and their Cases.

305

(b) After adjectives, such as:

acostumado a

favoravel a

obediente a

affeigoado a

fiel a

parallelo a

affeito a

hostil a

posterior a

agradavel a

idintico a

preciso a

anterior a

igual a

prejudicial a

attento a

incUnado a

prestes a

horn a

indifferente a

propenso a.

euro a

(in)docil a

rebelde a

conforme a

inferior a

semelhante a

contrdrio a

inexoravel a

sdbranceiro a

desagradavel a

insensivel a

superior a

disposto a

sensivel a

surdo a

ensinado a

necessdrio a

Mil a

equivalente a

nocivo a

(c) After verbs, such as: agradar a, autorizar «,
comprar a, conquistar a, fdlar a, faser hem a, faltar a
[faltar as obrigagoes, ao dever, a sua palavra to neglect
one's duties, break one's word), orar a, succeder a, pedir
a, perteiicer a, ensinar a, obrigar a, pintar a (oleo), tra-
ialhar a (agulha) etc.

N.B. I.— If the verbs fazer, deixar, mandar, oiwir, vir,
sentir are followed, not only by an accusative of the person,
but also by a transitive infinitive with an accusative of things
or a complementary clause, the complement of the person
is generally put into the dative: Fiz-lhe perceher a nao-razao
dos sens escrupulos; mandei-lhe copiar a carta; but: mandei-o
conduzir a casa; fizeram-no proclamar regente.

N.B. II. — Cheirar a to smell of; saber a to taste of
(saber a melao, cheirar a vinho).

(d) Before the infinitives of the verbs: estar, ser,
andar, ir, passar, ouvir etc.: estar a sair, a chegar, a
morrer; andar a procurar, a estudar; passar (o tempo)
a ler, a ndo faser nada; ouvir passaros a cantar, fontes
a correr; ''Como se fdsse apenas a deitar-me . . . j e o teu
olhar ainda a ensinar-me \ a morrer com amor e con-
fianga".

Cf.: estar a espera to be waiting; estar a morte
to be dying; andar a procura de to be looking for.

(e) Instead of a relative clause: o melhor a faser
the best to be done; o primeiro a entrar the first enter-

Portuguese ConTersation-Grammar. 20

306 Lesson 11.

ing; "a tua vida a rir na minim vkla" your life smiling
into my own.

(f) In adverbial locutions, such as:

a tempo in due time a sds alone by oneselves

d pressa in a hurry « vontade at ease

a contenio with satisfaction a iiiao at hand

a francesa in a French manner a pedagos, aos hocados in

a conselho (de) on the advice pieces

(of) ao certo surely, exactly

pouco a pouco little by little, ds vezes sometimes

by degrees ds escuras at dark

a mats e mais more and more ds claras openly,^ evidently

dia a dia day by day d espera de waiting for

folha a folha leaf by leaf a ser assim in this case

gotta a gotta drop by drop a nao ser assim (or isso) in

a um, a uma one by one the other case

dois a dots I (. v, + <* dizer a verdade to tell the

duas a duas J ^ " truth

a par de beside, in comparison isso nao faz ao caso, (ao ne-

with gdcio, d questdo) that does

salto a salto by leaps and not matter

bounds d vista d'isso thereupon

a tremer trembling a menos de if not, unless

a snar sweating a propdsiio by the bye.

(g) Elliptically in exclamations: a saude deV^Ex^!
ds arnias! to arms! a memoria dos grandes heroes!

27. Thema.

Oxford has a university which counted among its professors
Max Miiller, Mattew Arnold, and Sir Hubert von Herkomer (cf.
§42). Will you have the kindness to give me the i-Hidrio de No-
ticias-» and the ^Primeiro de Janeiroft In Portugal newspapers
are bought at the price of ten reis from the sellers or the boys (ga-
rotos) in the streets. The '^Gommercio dd Portoi> is sold at a
vintem a copy. In summer or on hot days you may sometimes see
gentlemen with their hats in their hands walking in the Am-
nida da Liberdade. It does no good to the nerves to be
too sensible to impressions of any kind. If you want to
enjoy good health, you must be deaf and indifferent to im-
pressions injurious to health. If we walk so slowly, we shall
not arrive home before evening. Let us walk quicker, so as to
be back sooner than our sluggard of a cousin, who, to tell
the truth, needs a reprimand. The least' we can do is to profit
by the experiences of others and to be attentive to all things

The Complements and their Cases. 307

that may be favourable, pernicious, or adverse to our projects.
By the bye: On the 5*'^ of March of next year— that is,
in three months from to-day — you have to pay the bill of ex-
change of ;£ 50. Abstain from any superfluous expenses and
content yourself with what you have. If, however, you need
money, communicate with me in due time. Who is that lady
in the violet dress? That one with the fair hair? No, that
one with the red hair and the lace-trimmed dress with a train.

28. Tersao.

De, preposi^ao que denota o logar d'onde vem ou sae
alguma pessoa ou cousa (venho de Botna; cartas, noticias de
Londres); a origem (lei de Dens); a rela^ao (parente, amigo
de); a propriedade (livro de Antonio); a materia de que 6
feita alguma cousa (annel de ouro, copo de crystal) o estado,
as qualidades de alguma pessoa ou cousa (anno de fome, dia
de calma, homem de honra, coberto de chagas); o modo (andar
de pressa, fazer alg. c. de caso pensado); a causa, o motive
(morrer de fome, tremer de medo) ; o uso ou destino (tribunal
de justi9a, tempo de estudo); o tempo em que se faz, ou
succede alg. c. {de dia, de noute, de verao, de inverno).

De serve tambem de particula extractiva (peda90 de pao) ;
e designativa (prodigio de virtude, exemplo de valor, oidade
de Coimbra). Faz as vezes de ontras preposi9oes, como desde
{de Madrid a Lisboa, de tempo immemorial), tocante, sobre
(falar de . . .), por (amado de todos). Serve para ligar dois
verbos (acabar de l6r, de esorever ; gosta de estudar) ; um verbo
e um substantivo (ambi9ao de reinar) ; um verbo e um adjec-
tivo (difficil de cr6r, facil de entender). Precede os infinites dos
verbos para formar o futuro composto (quern ha de ganhar honra,
nao se ha de entregar ao descanso) ; e antepoe-se aos adverbios
{de perto, de longe, de baixo, de cima) ; ou a outras preposi9oes
{de sobre a porta). Algumas vezes, por elegancia e propriedade
da lingua, usa-se esta preposi9ao entre dois substantives (o
ladrao do mo90, a embusteira da velha) ; ou entre um adjective
ou substantivo e um substantivo ou pronome (o mau de Thyo-
neu, o pobre do homem; triste de mim, coitados de nos). Pela
mesma razao tambem se poe depois de alguns verbos e antes
da dic9ao em que elles passam a exercer e seu significado;
mal se faz de cr6r o que se nao cuida nam espera.

(After Lacerda: Diccionario encyolopedico.)

20*

308 LesBon 12.

Twelfth Lesson.

Remarks on the Prepositions.

(Of. L. 11: de and a.)

§ 49. The frequently employed prepositions a, de,
em, por are generally repeated: Folio a elle e ao irmao
d'elle; pensei n'isso e n'aquillo; fago-o por ti e por elle.

§ 50. Several prepositions may be joined to the
same noun or pronoun. If joined to a pronoun, all
prepositions precede; if to a noun, one precedes, the
other follows, the noun being repeated by a pronoun:
with or without him com ou sem elle; coffee with or
without sugar cafe com assucar ou sem elle; before and
behind the house deanfe da casa e atrds d'ella.

§ 51. Sometimes several prepositions are joined
with one another or with adverbs: atrds de, atraves de,
deante de, para com, por debaixo de, de ao pe de (from
the neighbourhood of).

§ 52. Some Portuguese Prepositions in English
Translation.

(1.) Em (no, na, iielle, neste etc.) in, at, on:
Em Londres; na Inglaterra, em Portugal. Em casa at home.
Na casa in the house; em casa delle, em nossa casa;
num dia, em um instante ; nesse tempo; niima palavra;
em breve; em breves linlias ; ensinar em musica; estar
em ferias, em agosto ; no ar ; em geral; em particular,
em extreme (to the atmost); em cumprimento ou exe-
cugdo das or dens; d sombra d'um carvalho.

na mesa ; na praga, no ehao, no mar alto (in the
offing, on the high seas, at the main) ; encostar-se no
cotovello, na esperanga; metter-se em cavallarias alias
(to mount the high horse); avaliado em cinco mil rSis.
Estd-lhe vestido em (her dress comes to) duas libras;
insistir em.

illustre em fama; rico em conhecimentos • pdbre em
bens; agarrar-se em, pensar em; em si (in the abstract
in itself) ; no sdb(b)ado, nesse dia.

em castigo de; em signal de ; em honra de • em pro-
veito de, em damno de; passar de mao em mao (to go
from hand to hand) ; de bdca em boca; numa assentada
at one pull.

Remarks on the Prepositions. 309

vir em soc(c)6rro, no vapor; em toda a hora.

em (or por) ddio da pessoa ; em razcU) de amizade.

Que horas sao no seu reldgio?

Em is also sometimes employed before the infinitive or the
gerund of a verb : o dominio do mundo nao consiste em
2MSSuir, consiste em o pisar. Em estudando a gram-
mdtica da prdpria lingua, fica o homem apto para aprender
com facilidade outro qualquer idioma.

(2.) Para indicates direction, aim, use (after estar)
something imminent; it answers to the question: where
(to)? whither? what for? to what purpose? when?

Examples. — Partiu para Inglaterra. Esta madeira e
boa para navios. Os portuguSses sao bans para ma-
rujos. Para a semana next week; para o mSs que
vem next month. Para o sul, o norte; para a direita.
Estavamos para dar a vila. Estou prompto para fazer
ajuste. Das plantas iimas dirigem os ramos para
ar, outras para a terra. Estuda para mSdico, para
letrado, a fim de ter um modo de vida decente. Estas
luvas sao para a menina. Vem para o Natal. Serd
para sempre. Ha seis para sete annos.

(3.) Idioms with para:

Ser para ... to be fit for ; este sujeito e para pouco . . ^
Estar para to be disposed or appointed for : nao-
estou para isso, para aturdl-o: Essa quinta estd para
vender. De mim para mim, de si para si unto me,
unto him. Pensei de mim para mim. Para vergonha
nossa for our shame.

(4.) Before an infinitive para corresponds to "in
order to":

Fil-o para Ihe ser agradavel. Nao e para admirar it
is not to be wondered at. Para dizer a verdade.

(5.) Fara is sometimes joined to com and has the
meaning of towards.

Ser bom, affavel, justo para (com) os companheiros, dis-
cipulos ou para com todos.

(6.) Fara may be employed for por (see (7.) of this
paragraph) in order to express the cause of an action
or an intended effect:

Procurou cortar a conversagao para (or por) nao expor-se
a dizer mais do que quizira.

310 Lesson 12.

There is, however, a difference between para and
por: para hints to the effect as being certain, par as
being uncertain:

Movo OS pes para andar ; ando muito por ver se posso
dormir nielhor. Sato de casa para ir ao cainpo, onde
darei um passeio por dissipar a melancoUa.

(7.) JPoi' has a manifold employment expressing,
however, in spite of apparent diversity, its original
meaning — i.e.: the space between the subject and its
aim, a space which may be considered as such, or as
a way or means for its design.

Examples. — Ir por mar,, por terra (by sea, by land),
por um ladOf por caminho direito, por todo o reino.
Entrar por uma rua, por um rio ou porto. A bala
entrou pelo (^ por o) muro (beat through the wall).
A espada entrou por elle (pierced him). Ir por al-
guem to call for or go to meet somebody; ir por
dinheiro. Pelos annos de mil nove centos about 1900.
Por oiitra parte somewhere else, on the other side;
por outro lado on the other side. mez por vir
next month ; o (tempo) por vir or porvir the future.
Vm por um one by one. Cada um por seu turno
each by his turn. Deixar por morto to leave for
dead. Comegar por to begin with. Passar por alle-
mao to be taken for a German.

Por isso therefore ; por isso mesmo for that very reason ;
nem por isso nevertheless. Por mim as for me, for
my part; por quern e I say! Por quem me toma?
Whom or what do you take me for? Por falta de
for want of. Por medo que for fear of, lest. Feito
por mim, por elle done by me, by him. Isto estd
por fazer this is still to be done. Por pouco que
nao alcangasse o combdio he had nearly lost the train.
Por rico que seja however rich he may be.

Por essa razao, por falta (de), por isso, por ordem, por
mandado, por culpa. Foi condemnado por uma pe-
quena falta; por commodidade; por costume; por in-
veja; por forca ou por vontade obliged or of one's
own accord. Por hem ou por mal. Por (o\- pelo)
amor de Dens, por amor do prdximo. Por ser amiqo
d'elle because he is his friend. Por carecer, por merecer
Mandar por embaixador to send as an ambassador'
A obra ficou por acdbar . . . remained unfinished • as

Remarks on the Prepositions. 311

cartas estdo por responder ... are still to be answered.
Fedir, inter ceder por alguem. Por parte de on the
part of. Por Deus for God's sake. Tomar pela moo.
Por ordem alphdbetica. Ter alguem por amigo, por
honrado, por douto to take one for a friend, for
honest, for learned. Ter por certo, por duvidoso.
Comprei por cincoenta mil reis este armdrio. Eecebeu
esse livro por primio. Semeei milho pelo campo;
distrihui esmolas pelos pobres.

(8.) Por in adverbial locutions expressing space,
duration, etc.

por cinia (de) above, besides, por nenhum modo or caso by

beyond no means

por baixo (de) underneath j)or jwe ra^ao for what reason ?

por dentro (de) within porque why, because

por fdra (de) without por causa de on account of

por aqui this way por quanto as, because

por alii that way jiortewio therefore, consequent-
por onde where? which way? ly

por diante (from) before morrer por morrer let the
por detrds (de) (from) behind worst come to the worst

por entre (from) between por ser pohre nao deixa de
por era for the present mostrar soberba though he

por Ventura by chance be poor . . .

por inteiro totally por conta (de) on account of

por tal forma que so (much) por certo (to be) sure

that trabalhar, comer por tres to
por acinte on purpose work, eat for three.

29. Thema.

Our Country-seat.
On certain Sundays of the month we receive in our house
a small number of friends who, however bad the weather may
be, appear about noon on those days, to lunch with us.
The windows of our dining-room look towards the riverside, and
before the wide panorama of the town and in the shadow of
the trees, we so agreeably pass the afternoon on the terrace
under our windows, that I blame myself for so long depriving
myself of my friend's company. However, since the tramway
passes before our door, the time of rural peacefulness is over for
me. And it is not to be wondered at, as this modern institution
is accompanied by much noise. I take it for certain that
these innovations, however useful they be for social and com-
mercial intercourse, exercise a destructive effect upon the
nerves. On the other hand, they signify indeed a great con-
venience. And, willingly or unwillingly, we have to accept them.

312 Lesson 12.

30. Leitura.
A emigraQox) portuguesa para o Brasil.
Queixam se numerosos proprietaries territoriaes da escassfiz
de operarios campestres, apesar do augmento de salaries. Era
natural que ao mesmo tempo se pedisse come remfidio o er-
guer obices a emigra^ao; comtudo nao me recordo que se
levantassem jamais importantes clamores tao desarrazoados que
cfegamente a combatessem. Pedia-se reforma da lei do recru-
tamento per modo que a lavoura nao soffresse com a manu-
ten9ao da for^a militar. Chegou-se a pedir isen9oes para o
jornaleiro campestre, por se entender que o imposto de sangue
era uma das principaes causas, senao a mdxima, de emigra-
rem para o Brasil tantos rapazes. lam clandestinamente ou
arranjavam passaportes por maneiras fraudulentas. Esta repug-
na,iicia ao servi90 militar, innata em todo o Minho, 6 bem expli-
cavel, por isso que o filho, ajudando desde crian9a seus paes nos
diversos grangeios agiieolas, 6 d'elles violentamente arrancado,
com grave prejuizo do casal agricola. Prefere, pois, tentar em
regioes desconhecidas a sua independencia a servir a patria no
exercito. A repugu9,ncia pela vida militar v6mol-a confirmada
na emigra^ao claudestina, que em tao grande escala se effectua
n'esta regiao, constituida em grande parte por mancebos fu-
gindo ao recrutamento. Esta repugnancia, habilmente explo-
rada pelos engajadores, que enxameiam na regiao, facilitando
passaportes para os criminosos fugirem a justi^a e os mancebos
se esquivarem ao servi90 do ex6rcito pelo modica quantia de
nove mil reis, 6 em extremo auxiliado ipela faoilidade de trans-
portes e extensa raia da provincia. Supponha-se modificada
a lei do recenseamento militar a contento dos lavradores, e
extincto portanto a principal origem da clandestina sahida de
muitos Portugueses. Kestava saber se nao augmentaria ipso
facto (=por isso mesmo) a sahida legal. Por outras palavras:
todos os que se expatriam clandestinamente, haveriam deixado
de tomar o caminho do estrangeiro, desde que nao ficassem
sujeitos ao servi9o no exercito, ou elle se tornasse compativel
com os labores campestres? Cuido que muitos dos emigrantes
clandestinos iriam ds claras para o Brasil, e, sendo assim, as
modifica9aes na lei do recrutamento poderiam ser seguidas por
accrescimo da emigra9ao legal. Na corrente exportadora de
Portugueses esta um caracteristico signal da nossa decadencia
economica, (Eodrigues de Freitas).

Conversaijao.

Em que circumstancia se v§ a principal causa da emi-
gra9ao portugufisa?

Prepositions Continued. 313

Qual i a consequ6iicia immediata d'essa emigra9ao?

Que rem^dio se Ihe pediu?

Em que se baseava o pedido de isen^ao?

Qual a maneira de emigrarem os rapazea?

Como se explica a repugnancia ao service militar?

Que 6 qtle os mancebos preferem?

Por quern e como 6 explorada essa repugnancia?

Que ve economista Rodrigues de Preitas na emigra9ao

para o Brasil?
Que cuida elle, suppondo-se modificada a lei do recru-

tamento ?

Thirteenth Lesson.

Prepositions Continued.

§ 53. How to express Certain English Prepositions.

(a) About.

About: 1. in the sense of "round" is to be rendered
by em volta de, em roda de, em redor de; 2. in the sense
of "concerning" by com respeito a, sobre, acerca de;

3. in speaking of things which people carry about them,
it is translated by com or may be not translated at all;

4. when it means near a certain number or quantitj',
by pouco mats on menos, cerca de, por aJii; 5. when ex-
pressing nearness to a particular time, it is translated
by perto de, por.

(1) All thronged about the orator.

Todos acoiovellavam-se em volta do orador.

(2) I will speak to him about this aifair.
Hei-de Ihe falar com, respeito a este negdcio.

He could not give me any information about what had

happened.
Elle nao poude dar-me infonnacao alguma acerca do que

se tinha passado.

(3) I had no money about me.

E^^ nao trazia dinheiro (commigo).

(4) We are about 300 people.

Somos pouco mats ou menos (or por ahi) trezentas pessoas.

The dinner lasted about two hours.

jantar levou perto de (cerca de) duas horas.

314 Lesson 13.

(5) The train arrived about three o'clock.

combdio chegou pelas tres horas.

(b) At.

At: 1. is most commonly rendered by ti or em
with or without an article; sometimes it is not trans-
lated at all; 2. after nouns or verbs denoting derision,
anger, surprise, sorrow, etc., it is rendered by de (or
com); 3. "at," meaning "at the house" is em casa de;
"at the shop" is na loja de or a (or de) with the article.

(1) At six o'clock we were at home and at dinner.
As sets horas estavamos em casa e a jantar.
Do yon play at cards ? joga as cartas ?

(2) She laughed at him ella riu-se d'elle.
To tremble at tremer de or com.

1 am surprised (angry) at what you say.
Estou surpreendida (zangada) do que diz.

(3) We were at our aunt's estavamos em casa da tia.
We buy our coffee at the grocer's.
Compramos o nosso cafi ao (or do) merceeiro.

(c) By.

By: 1. Denoting the agent or cause, is translated
by de or par:

An honest man is respected by everybody.
Um homem lionrado i respeiiado por todas.
We are beloved by our parents.
Somos amados de nossos paes.
I took the child by its hand.
Tomei a crianga pela mao.

2. After verbs denoting to sell, to buy, to work, etc.,
and preceding a noun of weight or measure, day,
week, month or year, "by" is rendered into Portuguese
by a with the definite article or by por:

How much do you sell the tea by the pound?
A qiianto vende o cM por arratel ?
We work by the hour or by the day.
Trabalhamos a hora ou as dia.

3. When preceding a numeral immediately followed
by an adjective of dimension, "by" is rendered by "-'por":

Prepositions Continued. 315

This room is fifteen feet long by ten wide.

JEsta sola tern qiiinze pis de comprido por dez de largo.

4. "By" following verbs denoting to kill, to wound
etc., is translated by duni golpe de, com or de um ataque
de, etc., to express the use of the instrument by which
a man was wounded or the disease he was killed of:

The officer was wounded by the sword of his adversary.
official foi ferido por um golpe de espada do seu ad-

versdrio.
His father was killed by an inflammation of the lungs.
Seu pae morreu com um ataque de pneumonia.

If the blows have been repeated, a golpes de (a
setadas, apedradas) is used, in which case it is most com-
monly rendered in English by "with." Ex.:

They knocked him down with a stick.

5. "By" is employed in the following idiomatic ex-
pressions :

By day de dia; day by day by the way \ ^^ ^^

de dia em dia by the bye / ^ ^

by night de noite hard by pegado, pr6ximo (a)

by means of a meio de, medi- by that time nisso, entao

by this time twelvemonth

one by one um por um d'aqui a um anno

two by two dois a dois by name de nome, pelo nome

by turns por turnos by myself por mim mesmo, s6

by the bulk em grosso, por by Jove por Deus!

grosso by to-morrow evening pela
by heart de c6r noite de amanha

by letter por escrito by four o'clock pelas quutro
by no means de modo algum horas.

by and by logo, ao depots

31. Theina.

1. My father was not above (mais de) twenty-two years
old when be was married. My uncle's country-house is very
handsome, but it cost him above eighty thousand francs. It
is about a year since my friend set off for America. Rome
was built by Romulus. The poor man has been driven out
of his house by his creditors. I will get up to-morrow at
six o'clock. Were you at Mrs. D.'s ball last night? Yes,
I was there. I will pay you at the end of this month.

316 Lesson 13.

2. I rejoice greatly at your good luck. She always
smiles at everything that is said. Where was your sister this
morning? She was at her aunt's. My box is one foot and
a half deep by two wide and four long. Harold was wound-
ed by a sword. William the Second was killed by an arrow
in the New Forest. He is so strong that with his fist he
could knock down an ox. They killed the dog with stones.
The soldiers kill one another with bayonets.

(d) From.

1. "From" after or in connection with the verbs
to come, to send, etc., is generally rendered by da
parte de, de ao pe de, when followed by a noun or pro-
noun denoting a person:

Many compliments from Dr. 0.
Muitos aimprimentos da parte do senhor doutor 0.
I come from him or her.

Venho da parte d'elle or d'ella. Venho de ao pi d'elle
or d'ella.

Tell him from me diga-lhe da minha parte.

2. "From" with a possessive = ("from someone's
house,") is da casa de:

I come from my uncle's, aunt's, etc.

Eu venho da casa do meu tio, da minha tkc.

3. "From . . to . .", when denoting progress from
place to place or time to time, is rendered by de . . .a
(para, em, ate):

He went from street to street, from town to town.

TUp fn' t '^^ ^^''' * ^^'^' ^^ ierra a terra.

\ duma rua a outra, dwma terra a outra.

From day to day, from time to time.

De dia a (or em) dia, de tempos a tempos.

4. "From" is rendered by desde (or de), and "to"
by ate, when speaking of extent or time.

From Easter to Christmas.

Desde a Pdscoa ate ao (or ate o) Natal.

From the Ehine to the Ocean.

Desde Rheno ate o oceano.

From Lisbon to Porto.

Desde Lisbda ate ao (or ate o) Porto,

Prepositions Continued. 317

(e) On or upon.

1. "On" or "upon" generally = em, em cima de,
para cima de, sobre:

Your gloves are on the table.

As suas luvas estdo em cima da mesa.

I am sitting on a chair.

Eu estou (assentado) numa cadeira.

A cover is spread on the bed.

Uma coberta estd estendida sobre a cama.

"On to" with verbs of motion == para cima de.
The cat sprang on to the table.
gato saltou para cima da mesa.

2. After the verb "to play," on or upon is not
translated; after "to live," "to depend," and the like,
"on" or "upon" is rendered by de:

You play on the violin, and I play on the flute.
F" Ex" toca rebecca e eu toco flauta.

The prisoner lives on bread and water.
preso vive de pdo e dgua.

A good end often depends on a good beginning.

Vm horn fim muitas vezes depende d'um bom principio.

3. "On" before the days of the week is rendered
by ewjwith the article; in letter-dates, it is dropped in
Portuguese:

Come on Sunday or Monday.

Venha no domingo ou na segunda feira.

On the 19*1^ of April.

No dia dezanove de Abril, em 19 de . . .

Lisbon, on the 7'''' of May Ldsboa, 7 de Maio.

People go to church on Sundays.
Vae-.se d igreja aos domingos.

4. "On," followed by a substantive expressing
action, or meaning "when" with a verb, is translated
by a and em:

On his marriage (when he married) ao seu casamento.
On that occasion nessa occasiao.

318 Lesson 13.

(f) Over.

1. "Over" generally is translated by em (or a) dma
de, sdbre when it signifies a stay; by por cima de, when
it means movement:

The looking-glass hangs over the chest of drawers.
espelho estd em cima da cdmmoda.
The cat passed over the live coal.
gato passou por cima das brasas.

2. When it is equivalent to "more than" or "longer
than," it is rendered by mats de, alem de:

The fight lasted over four hours.
A luta durou mais de quatro horas.

iV^ofe.— Distinguish carefully from this the use of "over"
as an adverb :

As soon as the rain is over.

Logo que a chuva tiver passado.

Is dinner over? Jd acabou o jantar?

That's over and gone isso passou, isso jd Id vae.

(g) With.

1. "With" is rendered by de (or com) after verbs
denoting to die, to meddle, to do, to dispense, to load,
to cover, to fill, and after adjectives meaning pleased,
contented, etc. Ex.:

He is dying with cold elle morre de frio.
The waggon is loaded with goods.
carro estd carregado de mercadoria.

2. "With" is expressed by a without the article
before nouns denoting the means by which a thing is
done or made. Ex.:

To draw with a pencil desenhar a lapis.

To "fight with" (a weapon) is : bater-se a {espada etc.).

3. "With" must not be expressed after certain
verbs, such as: to meet with encontrar (with direct ob-
ject; but: encontrar-se com); to trust with confiar alg. c.
a alg. ; to supply with fornecer alg. c. a cdg. ; to reproach
with langar em rosto, reprehender alg. c. a. alg. Ex.:

We shall supply him with everything.
Havemos de Ihe fornecer tudo.

Prepositions Continued. 319

I reproached him with his ingratitude.
JSu reprehendi-lhe a sua ingratidao.

4. "With" governing a noun together with which
it forms an adjective phrase in translated by de.

A bonnet with feathers um chapeu de plumas.
The boy with black hair o rapaz de cahellos pretos.

5. "With" meaning amongst, in, is rendered by
com and em:

With us, said the Frenchman . . .

Gomnosco, dizia o frances.

With woman, maternal love is the strongest feeling.

Na midher o amor maternal e o sentimento mais forte.

Remark.

As already stated, prepositions must always come before
the word^ they govern, and never (as often in English) at
the end of a sentence :

Whom are you speaking to? A quern fala?
What's that for? Para qui e isso?
The man whom you are interested in.
homem em que estd inter essado.

32, Thema.

1. Go to Mr. Smith and tell him from me that I am
expecting him. Prom whom do you come? I come from
Miss B. I never received such an (= tamanJio) insult from a
Frenchman. Charles was wounded in his arm, and not in his
leg. I wiU call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening^
(I will) go to the play. Upon what instrument does your
sister play? She plays the piano. That happened on the
12*1' Qf March. I am in the habit of taking a cup of coffee
as soon as dinner is over.

2. Do not meddle with my affairs ; attend to your own.
Is that house covered with slates or tiles ? It is covered with
tiles. This picture seems to be done with pencil. When you
meet with a poor man, never reproach him with his poverty.
France extends from the Rhine to the Atlantic Ocean. What
does he complain of? We have travelled from Switzerland ta
Italy. Tou spend all the day in going from house to house,
from street to street, from place to place. Those labourers
work from morning to night. I walk every day from twelve-
to three.

•320 Lesson 13.

33. Leitura.

aidomdvel.

automovel, como a propria palavra o esta a indicar, e
urn carro que se move por si mesmo, ou independente de qual-
quer f6r9a exterior. Para comprehendermos facilmente o me-
cbanismo do automovel, notemos, antes de mais nada, certos
factos conhecidos de todos, que noa levarao, sem o menor es-
£0190, a comprehensao d'aquelle mechanismo. Quando pomes
em movimento a roda de uma bomba, acontece que movi-
mento que imprimimos a essa roda faz com que embolo da
bomba suba e des9a ; que 6 o mesmo que dizer que movi-
mento da roda se transmittiu ao 6mbolo; — e suppondo
caso inverso, isto e, que, em vez de fazermos girar a roda da
bomba, faziamos snbir e descer, com auxilio das macs, seu
Smbolo, tambem movimento d'este faria com que a roda en-
trasse a girar. Por outra: movimento do fimbolo transmittir-
se-hia igualmente ao volante da bomba.

Quer isto dizer que se uma roda pode p6r em movimento
um embolo, tambem este pode p6r em movimento uma roda.
Ora no autom6vel 6 precisamente movimento de um Smbolo
(movimento rectilineo alternativo, ou de vae-vem) que faz
mover as rodas d'este vehiculo. Se n'um apparelho fizermos
com que embolo se desloque n'um movimento de vae-vem,
subindo e descendo coustantemente, & claro que a roda, que
esta ligada a esse embolo por uma haste, entrard a girar, e
girara emquanto fimbolo estiver em movimento.

Conversa^ao.

Que 6 'um autom6vel ?

D'onde ja deduzimos que se move por si mesmo?

Que bavemos de notar, para comprehendermos seu
mechanismo?

Que acontece quando pomos em movimento a roda d'uma
bomba ?

E que se daria, suppondo-se o caso inverso?

Que quer dizer isso?

Qual 6 movimento que faz mover as rodas d'um auto-
movel?

Como entrarao as rodas a girar?

E durante que tempo continuarao a girar?

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 321

Fourteenth. Lesson.

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of
Speech.

Pronouns.

A. Possessive Pronouns. JPronomes possessivos.

§ 54. Like the article, the possessive pronoun is
repeated before all nouns when designating persons or
things of different kind; equally before all adjectives
when referring to beings of different kind and preceding
the noun. Ex.:

Os mens desgdstos e as minhas alegrias. Partilhei comtigo
OS ieus bans e os teus maus mementos.

§ 55. If there be no contrast of kind, or if the
adjectives do not refer to the same noun, the poss.
pronoun is not repeated:

Todos admiram as nossas vastus e bellas florestas,

§ 56. The gender of the nouns being different,
the possessive pronoun agrees with the one next to it:
meu poder e gloria; a minha gldria e poder.

§ 57. A poss. pronoun which belongs to several
adjectives is not repeated if one or all of them follow
the noun:

Partilhei comtigo os teus ions momentos e os maus (os
teus momentos bans e maus).

§ 58. The poss. pronoun may be strengthened:

(a) By adding proprio : vi-o com os meus prdprios olhos.

(b) By adding a demonstrative pronoun:

Ouvi por estes meus ouvidos dizer aquelle sen amigo.

§ 59. Contrary to the English, the Portuguese
employs instead of the poss. pronoun:

(a) The definite article in those cases where the
relation between owner and object is evident:
Escreveu d avd (to his grandmother).
Vendeu a casa (his house).
Ustendo brago (my arm).
Tapa a bdca (your mouth).
Gala a bdca hold your tongue.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 21

322 Lesson 14.

N.B.— If the object is an abstract noun in the plural,
the article may be omitted:

Recdbrei (os) sentidos: reddbrdmos (as) diligencias.

(b) Be or another preposition after certain verbs:

Mudar de fato to change dress.

Mudou d'ainso he changed his mind.

Cumpri com a (minha) palavra I kept my word.

Ella caiu de joelhos she fell on her knees.

(c) De with the personal pronoun of the 3"^^ per-
son, whenever the poss. pronoun seti, sua might cause
a misunderstanding:

Vi a irma d'elle, d'ella (his, her sister).
Fomos a casa d'elles (to their house).

§ 60. Before the same noun two poss. pronouns
are not admissible:

Os sens amigos e os mens.

Your and my friends, your friends and mine.

§ 61. If to a noun belong a poss. pronoun and
a possessive genitive, the latter must be preceded by
0, a, OS, as, esse, aquelle or the like:

Li as tuas cartas e as (essas, aquellas) de tiia irma.

I read your and your sister's letters.

§ 62. If the noun depending on the poss. pronoun
expresses a quality, the definite article may be employed
instead, while to the verb will be added the respective
personal pronoun in the dative:

Estranhei-lhe a franquesa I wondered at his frankness.
Admiro-lhes o sangue-frio I admire their self-possession
(or coolness).

Como te conhego a indole ... as I know your character.

Recofihecl-lhe uma boa voz.

I noticed him to have a good voice.

N.B.— This construction may be employed with persons
and must be employed with things:

Avisidmos a cidade: jd se Ihe distinguiam (jd Ihe

distinguimos) as torres.
We got a sight of the town: its spires could already

be distinguished.

§ 63. While the adjective and participle always
agree with the possessive in gender and number, titles

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 323

of which the possessive forms an essential part, are
excepted from this rule, the adjective agreeing with the
natural sex of the person:

Vossa AltSza que e bom e justo (respectively : boa e

just a).
Sua Santidade estd hem lembrado.

34. Thema.

He sacriiiced his and his sister's fortune, though an ae-
qaaintanCe of mine warned him. If he had doubled his efforts,
and if somebody had come to his help, he might have succee-
ded in saving his family from ruin. As I know his honesty, I
did whatever I could to guide his steps. But alas ! my friend,
all my measures were in vain. His own father gave him up.
I am wet through, I must change my dress. My friend changed
his mind, he will remain at home with his parents. My head
aches. I wrote a long letter to my aunt, who had asked me
to give her some news from me. May I also give her your
kind regards? The woman fell on her knees. I have a
thorn in my foot. I have only lived a fortnight in this town;
so I don't yet know all its places and streets.

35. Leitura e versao.
Carta ao Br. Gr. P. sobre Feminismo.

Nao imagina V* Ex* o prazer que me deu a sua carta,
Safaido como 6 que da discussao intelligente e sincera t6m sahido
as mais claras verdades; conhecido como e quanto se ganha
em fazer interessar pelas nossas opinioes, ainda os adversaries
que mais as combatem. E nao sendo V* Ex"' urn adversario,
mas um confesso adepto, embora moderado, maior prazer o
meu em Ihe vir expor serenamente as ideias feministas, taes
como as comprehendo e preconiso. Diz V* Ex'' que 6 femi-
nista, embora moderado, que o e, como todos os illustrados
nao poderao deixar de o ser, segundo a sua propria phrase.
Bis o nosso primeiro triumpho, a nossa principal batalha ven-
cida . . . Que victoria immensa nao representa essa sua simples
phrase! E se pensarmos que esta primeira, mas definidva
conqnista do espirito masculino, representa o trabalho de quasi
meio s^culo, temos vontade de dizer . . . que as mulheres,
apresentando as suas ideias e luctando pela educa9ao que as
superiorize, lembram a paciencia das alluvioes que fazem re-
cuar o mar e mudam o aspecto de um pais. Entendo que o
ser humano que pertence ao sexo feminine, nao deve ser coa-
gido (influenced) pela educagao, nam pelos costumes, nem pelas

21*

324 Lesson 15.

conversas, nem pelos paes — que tSm a mania de talhar nniito
discrecionariamente o future dos filhos — a T6r no casamento
um fim, um ideal complete e unico, quasi uma obrigaQao.
Assim come o homem pode ser professor, jornalista, sabio,
artista, empregado, operario, tudo emfim, sem que ninguem Ihe
pergunte pela certidao do matrimonio, sem embargo de serem
quasi todos chefes de familia, nao vejo inconveniente a que
a mulher procure a sua collocagao, tenha o seu curso scien-
tifico, estude, trabalhe para si, para o seu futuro, para a sua
vida autdnoma, sem se Ihe inquirir do seu estado . . .
(Anna de Castro Os6rio: As mulheres portugnesas.)

Fifteenth Lesson.

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of
Speech (continued).

B. Personal Pronouns.

§ 64. To put an emphasis upon a personal (or
demonstrative) pronoun (or a substantive), the Portu-
guese employ:

(a) The indefinite pronoun mesmo, (-self):

Escreveu elle mSsino he wrote himself (cf.: escreveu c(m
o seu prdprio punho he wrote with his own hand or
autographically).

Vimo-la a ella mismo we saw her herself.

Vimo-la nds mismos we saw her ourselves.

(b) The verb ser with the pronoun o (a os as) and
a relative clause: ser o que (a que, etc.) or ser quern:

Tufdste o que me salvaste (instead of "tu me salvaste")
it was you who saved me.

N.B.— "0" may be dropped rTw ^ que me salvaste.

(c) The periphrase e {era, foi, etc.) que:

Tu e que me salvaste. J^ a ti que devo a minha salvacao.

Here que is not a relative, but a particle of emphasis
("Parficula de realce"). In both periphrases (b) and (c)
the dependent verb generally agrees with the personal
pronoun: tu salvaste.

It was not we who said that

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 325

If, however, a pronoun so emphasized is followed
by quern, the verb agrees with this latter — i.e., it is put
into the 3'^'^ person singular. Ex.:

Em fui (o) que affirmei isso

It was I who affirmed that [ f«. ^ 3«; ffirmdjsso

rui en (o) que affirmet tsso
Fui eu quern affirmou isso.

N6s S que o nao dissemos
N6s nao fdmos (os) que o dis-

seram
Nao fdmos nds (os) que o

disseram
Nao fdmos nds quern o disse.

(d) The particle to be emphasized may be also put
at the beginning of the sentence, being generally
repeated by a personal pronoun. Ex.:

A mim reputo-me um pohre filho de povo que por acaso
veto ter cd cima.

JEssas hervas i preeiso arrancd-las.

Aquelles indivlduos que desejarem orientar-se no estudo
dum tal problima nao deixarei de Ihes recommendar
a leitura de dais hellos livres, que venho de corn-pulsar.

§ 65. When two or more subjects (noun or pro-
noun) of different persons belong to the same verb,
this agrees with the plural of the most prominent per-
son (the 1^' pers. is more prominent then, the 2°'^ and
this more than the S"^"^):

EUf tu e elle partireinos juntos. Tu e elle partireis juntos.

Ell e meu irmao partimos juntos.

Note.— In. southern Portugal and in familiar speech the
verb is employed in the 3'^'^ person pi. instead of the 2°"i:
Tu e teu irmao partirdo juntos.

§ 66. The absolute reflective pronoun is si, which
does not distinguish number or gender. It is employed
with the prepositions a, de, em, por (per), para, sobre.
With com it assimilates to comsigo. Sometimes it is
strengthened by mesmo :

Nao estar em si to be out of one's mind
estar muito em si
estar senhor de si

'. J to be conscious of oneself

326 Lesson 15.

call- em si \ . , ,,. .

tornar sobre si ] *° <=°'°« *° °°«^«lf ''^^^'^

fazer alg. c. de per si to do something separately

fazer para si to do for oneself

mundo em si the world by itself

pensar de si para si to think by oneself

tomar sobre si to take upon oneself

trazer eomsigo to carry about oneself

nao caber em si c?e . . . to be beside oneself with . . .

§ 67. "Si' depending on another preposition may
be translated by elle(s), ella(s):

Elle(s) tinha(m) todos contra elle(s) or si.
He (they) had everybody against him (them).
Viram o cSu azul par cima d'elles (or de si).
They saw the blue sky above them.

N.B. — The same translation takes place when "si," being
in familiar speech employed also for "you," might cause a
misunderstanding. Pensa senipre em si may be: he thinks
always of you or ... of himself. So, to express the latter, it
is better to say: pensa sem-pre em si mesmo.

§ 68. The conjunctive reflective pronoun is se, which
takes the forms me, te, nos, vos, according to the person
and number. Its place is:

(a) In an affirmative direct capital phrase after
the verb:

Elle apreseniou-se ; eu lembro-me; n6s affastdmo-nos.

(b) In such a phrase beginning with an adverb
or some complement, se may be placed iefore or after
the verb:

Hontem lembrei-me; Id se ficoii ; pouco a pouco nos
aproximdmos.

(c) In a negative and interrogative capital phrase
and always in a dependent clause before the verb:

Elle ndo se approximou ; tu nao te appUcas; a equa e
que se ndo esguecia; nem me fale nisso.

§ 69. How to translate "it is" with a predicative
complement :

(a) This being a noun with an article, possessive
or demonstrative pronoun, an adjective or a noun

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 327

employed as an adjective and followed by que or an in-
finitive, "it is" is translated by e:

E uma lastima it is a pity.

E mm, it is mine ; e isto that's it.

E teu dever. E certo, 6 verdade que se foi embora.

E facil a gente enganar-se a si mesmo.

Seria justo (seria justiga) que fdsse absolvido.

(b) The predicate being an adverb or a noun which
designs a transitory state, "it is" is rendered by "esM" :

Estd hem it's all right; estd um horror it's a horrible
thing; istd uma helleza it's a beautiful sight.

§ 70. "So" or "that" supplying the place of an
adjective, or of a noun used adjectively, or of a phrase,
is translated by o or isso or remains untranslated:

Portugal e um jpovo triste, e i-o aiS quando sorri (and it
is so even when smiling).

Durante algum tempo, o systema liberal foi uma palavra.
Hoje nem isso S.

For some time the Liberal system was (but) a word.
To day it is not even that.

36. Thema.

Louis Philip, King of the French, wrote most of his
letters with his own hand. It's to you that I owe my liberty
and my life. Mrs. S. speaks always of herself and blames
everything she did not do herself. Have you your spectacles
about you ? Yes, I never go out without them. I never saw these
gentlemen in your house. Are they your nephews? Yes,
they are. She will think of us when, she is unfortunate,
for she will certainly become so. Is that your house? Yes,
it is. Are those your shoes ? Yes, they are. "Is it you, my
friend?" exclaimed I, when I heard somebody come up the
stairs. "Yes, it is I," answered he; "I bring you good news."
Was it you, my boys, who planted this tree? Virtue by it-
self is worthy of esteem; but vice by itself is hateful. I and my
children will pass the summer in the country. Then you and
your friends will no longer stay there.

37. Leitura.

Nao perdia o seu tempo aquelle veneziano que viera re-
commendado a Salomao Zaouto e se disfar9ava em mercador
flamengo. Era um espirito perspicaz e observador. Desagra-

328 Leeson 16.

dara-lho o caracter de Salomao. Nao era evidentemente o judeu
qne elle snppozera encontrar.

Um outro Ihe parecera excellente para informador e auxi-
liar, em terra que tao completamente Ihe era desconhecida.
De um relance d'olhos o avaUara e Ihe percebera os m^ritos.
Esse outro era Ananias, o comico judeu, que a canalha de
Lisbda apupava cruelmente.

Que importava ao veneziano que elle fdsse ridicule ? Sabia
muita. cousa da vida de Lisb6a, conhecia e apreciava perspi-
cazmente os homens de Villa Nova da Gibraltar, sens corre-
ligiondrios, e nao seria difficil cousegnir que falasse desassom-
bradamente.

Aquelle seria o seu precioso guia. Leu-lhe a alma no
olhar, sentiu-lhe vibrar a ambi^ao em breves referencias re-
passadas de malicia, em palavras soltas que vinham esbraze-
adas de rancor. Comprehendeu a esp6cie d'homem que a for-
tuna Ihe deparava, e logo procurou acercal-o bem de si,
lisoDgeando-lhe as cobi^as e malqueren9as, tao rapidamente
surprehendidas. (Campos Junior: Guerreiro e Monge.)

Conversatjao.

Que nos diz Campos Junior d'aquelle veneziano no sen
c61ebre romance «Guerreiro e Monge ?»

Quaes foram as relagoes d'elle com Salomao Zacuto?

Como vinha di8far9ado?

Qual foi joizo que o seu espirito observador formou do
judeu que o aoolh6ra?

Quern Ihe parecia melhor para informador?

Como Ihe tinha percebido os m^ritos?

Que circumstancia tornava Ananias precioso aos olhos
do veneziano?

Que procurou elle fazer em seguida?

Por que meios o acercou de si?

Sixteenth Lesson.

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of

Speech, (continued).

Personal Pronouns (continued).

§ 71. If the modal verbs (querer, saher, dever,
poder, ir, deixar, fazer, mandar, vir, ouvir, sentir, etc.)
are followed by an infinitive and a personal pronoun,

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. S29

this latter is placed in a direct sentence, whether affir-
mative or interrogative;

(a) After or iefore the infinitive, if it is its object:
Devo-o fazer or devo fazSl-o? vou huscdl-o; posso dizer-

Ih'o or posso-lh'o dizer; mandei-a abrir; vi castigdl-o.

(b) Before the infinitive, when it is its subject:
Mandei-o huscar pao; vi-o castigar o cao; oiiQO-a chamar

a filha; fago-o vir ; ouviram-no falar; mandaram-me
entrar.

§ 71. In negative sentences the place of the pro-
noun is before the verb:

Nao m'o tinhas dado; nao Ih'o deste?

In the case of § 70 (a) also in a negative sentence
the pronoun may be placed before the verb or after
the infinitive:

Nao devo fazer (?) ; nao devo fazil-o (?).

In a dependent negative clause, the pronoun riiay
precede or follow the "nao":

^^Jd forque me nao (or ruLo me) esquego que e poire,
muito pdbre, o nosso povo."

§ 72. If the phrase begins by a complement (ad-
verb, conjunction, relative pronoun, etc.) the conjunctive
pronoun is generally put before the verb or its auxiliary:
Emquanto o nao vejo ■ ■ • ; quantas vezes Ih'o nao

tenho dito!
Deus vol-o pague! (Here the conjunction "qite" is
omitted.)

N.B. — The verbs ver, ouvir, deixar, mandar, fazer being
followed by an infinitive and an accusative complement of
the 3"^^ person (o, a, os, as), the dative pronoun (the, Ihes)
may be employed instead (see § 62) :

Eu vejo-lhes langar. Idgrimas tristes.
The same is to be said of the verb cliainar: chama-lhe sever o;
chamo-lhe meu. (See also § 62.)

§ 73. Conjunctions of the Pronouns.

(a) A pronoun of the dative or accusative may be
joined to a gerund, but never to a past participle:

Dizendo-lhe isto; tenho-lh'o dito (but not: tenho dito-lh'of)

330 Lesson IB.

(b) "iSe" maj- be joined to another conjunctive
pronoun :

Nao se me tirci da cdbega que fdratn iitjmtos comnosco.

(c) In the future and conditional tenses the pro-
noun complement is intercalated between the root of
the infinitive and the termination:

fechdl-o-d; sfl-o-ei; far-lhe-ia falta; vel-o-emos; dir-lh'o-ei.

Popularly, these forms are not employed, but are
replaced by others — for instance?

Ell digo-lh'o ao depois; vamos vSl-o.

(d) Sometimes a dative complement (especially of
the pronouns) is joined to a verb instead of a possessive
pronoun before a noun:

Ficam->ios tamhem na amada terra o coragao.
Also our heart remained in our beloved country.

(e) The English "there were four of us," instead
of "we were four," is rendered in Portuguese by:

Eramos qvatro ao todo.

(f) In familiar speech the pleonastical "me" is used
in sentences like this:

Porque nao we estuda ? Why don't you study ?
Ndo me saias d'aqui! Don't go out of this place.

(g) To the pronouns nos and vos is added some-
times an also pleonastical outros:

N6s-outros Portugueses we Portuguese,
(h) In familiar speech sew, sua are employed with
a following noun or an adjective used as such:

Sell, garoto! Naughty boy!

Seu felizardo ! Fortunate man that you are !

Seu tolo! Fool that yon are!

38. Thema.

From where do you get your coffee? I get it sent from
Guatemala. Is it good? I have always heard it hghly praised.
I have also noticed it always to have the best flavour (cf.
§ 62). Some time ago there was a revolution in Catalonia,
but the Government succeeded in suppressing it. That province
strives to render itself independent, but until now it has
not yet succeeded. Get up ! You intended to rise at cock-crow.
Don't yoQ hear it crow? I have heard it crowing already

Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 331

half an hour ago. To this poor woman a letter was given
in which she was informed of her son's misfortune. She
melted into tears (= desfazer-se em pranto) so that she was
not to be calmed. Saint Anthony, the patron saint of Lisbon,
is said to have been preaching when a raving madman entered
the church and with wild words and gestures demanded the string
that fastened his hood. The saint immediately took it off, and
as soon as he clasped it round the madman, this latter changed
into one of his most attentive hearers.

39. Leitnra.

Bia no campo.

A tarde principiava a coar-se atraves das grandes arvores
da nossa devfiza. Os campos estavam solitaries; neste, na-
quelle, dois ou tres bois como esqnecidos. Tinhamos passado o
dia pouco communicativos e repassados de uma doce saudade
maguada: e, sem me sentir com coragem de Ihe dizer que
abrisse o piano, poisei sobre a cadeira a rabeca que quiz fazer
cantar e que gemeu em tom menor uma amargura. Eramos
tres ha dez mezes e somos so dois agora. E, como o peque-
nito morr^ra aqui, desde entao a nossa casita de campo, aldea
e branca, no declive d'um monte verde, entre pinheLros, fechoa-se
e nunca mais falei n'ella.

Quando me pediu que voltassemos, quiz dissuadil-a ter-
namente; mas ella tinha o rise nos labios; e um ramo de flores
ontonaes para a campa do nosso fllho, uma visita matinal ao
cemiterio que e como uma singella quadra campestre, a missa
conventual dita pelo tio Jos6 na egreja fresca, o almogo na
nossa salita de jantar rescendendo ainda a lua de mel ... 6
eora9ao egoista! attraiste-me e nao fui superior ao encanto
dum dia recolhido com ella na pacificadora naturfiza. Ainda
para mais a quadra ia deliciosa e eu amo o tempo em que
as arvores se despem dos sens atavios e entram na medita9ao
e na penitencia.

dia estava bellisimo, os caminhos cheios de sol e ainda
humidos das chuvas anteriores. De manhasinha atravessamos
a aldeia com o nosso ramo de flores na mao. Uma pontita
de pallidez dava-lhe mais realce ao rdsto meigo.

cemiterio estava alegre, tinha muitas rosas de toucar
e seu muro caiado, ao fnndo, d'onde se descortina o rio e
um panorama de verduras. Ajoelhamos piedosamente na campa
do nosso filho : cantara n'esse momento uma avesita n'um car-
valho proximo, e o sino dava as primeiras badaladas. Ella
limpou OS olhos e fOmos entao beijar a mao ao tio Jose e
ouvir-lhe a missa. (Guilhermo Gama.)

332 Lesson 17.

40. Para decorar.

A Gigarra e a formiga.

Tendo a cigarra em cantigas «Amiga (diz a cigarra),

Fo]gado todo o verSo, Piometto, k f6 d'animal,

Achou-se em penuria extrema, Pagar-vos antes de agosto

Na tormentosa esta9ao. Os juros, e o principal. »

Nao Ihe restaudo migalha, A formiga nunca empresta,

Que trincasse a tagarella, Nunca dd, por isso ajunta.

Foi valer-se da formiga, «No verao, em que lidavas ?»

Que morava perto d'ella. A pedinte ella pergnnta.

Bogou-lhe que Ihe emprestasse, Responde a outra : «Eu cantava

Pois tinha riqneza e brio, Noite e dia, a toda a hora».

Algum grao, com que manter-se «0h ! Bravo 1 (torna a formiga)

T^ voltar o acceso estio. Cantavas? Pois danija agora*.

(Bocage.)

Seventeenth Lesson.

Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative,
Relative and Indefinite Pronouns.

§ 74. The demonstrative "this," "that," "these,"
"those," "the one(s)," followed or not by a relative, is
rendered:

(a) By este(s), esta(s) for objects near the speaker;

(b) By esse(s), essa(s) for such near the person
spoken to;

(c) By aquelle(s), aquella(s) for such distant to the
one and the other;

(d) By o(s), a(s) in any case, but only with a
following relative:

i' este (esse, aquelle, o) que ve it is the one you see.

N.B. — These pronouns^ being employed adjectively and
referring to nouns of different gender, agree with the nearest;
Estes homens e mulheres; estas mulheres e homens.

§ 75. "This," "that," employed without a noun
which, however, is to be supplied, is rendered by este,
esse or is altogether omitted:

Esse nao e o meu livro. J^ esta a minha porta,
aquella e (a) do meu amigo. Quern e? who is that?
£' meu pae. That is my father.

Syntactic PeouliaritieB of Demonstrative, etc., Pronouns. 333

§ 76. If "this, " 'that" does not refer to a deter-
minate person or object, it is rendered by isto, isso,
aqtiiUo.

Que e isto (isso)? Nao parcebo isso (aguiUo).

§ 77. "That which or "what" is rendered by o que.

que vi nSo me agradou.

That which (what) I saw did not please me.

Semark. — Isto, isso, aquiHo, tudo, o que (= aguiUo que)
are mascnline and singolar. If, however, followed by the
verbs ser or parecer with a nonn or pronoun in the plural,
the verb generally agrees with the predicative noun: Isto nao
sSU) palatTos de animacao: que vimos pareciam drvores.
Eram tudo ynemdrias de aiegria.

§ 78. The difference between outro and outrem is
this: the former is an adjective and variable; the second
is a noun and inTariable. The former refers to per-
sons and things; the latter only to persons and in a
general and indeterminate manner:

<JHas como entao nao hama no mutido oidro amor, nem
outrem a quern amar, que faria Adao para provar o
amor que desyaca encarecer?»

§ 79. "He who" is rendered by aqueUe qtte, o que
or qtieni. The latter is always employed in proverbs
and in a general meaning:

Quern tern capa, escapa. Quern porfia, mata caca. Quern
com caes se lanca, com ptdgas se tevanta (c£ § 180, 2
of the 1st Part)*

§ 80. T(d, toes without distinction of gender, is
the !^glish "such," "like" ; it is employed conjunctively
or absolute:

Toes desgostos soffreu e toes foram as suas dores . . .

Snch troubles he suffered and sach were his pains.

T(d amo, tal criado like master, like man.

§ 81. Also quern may be employed for "such":
Nao faUard quern por dlguns punhados de dobras de

oiro OS favoreca e acclame.
There will be no want of sach who for some handfols
of donbloons will favour and acclaim them.

§ 82. The pronoun que in certain conjunctions is
employed predicatively and may not be translated:

334 Lesson 17.

Os ribeiros quasi nao murmuram de debeis e exhaustos

que vao.
The rivulets flow so feebly and exhausted that they

don't even murmur, or the rivulets hardly murmur

with debility and exhaustion.

§ 83. Quanta as a pronoun is correlative; it is
emplo3^ed either with tanfo or with tudo, antecedents
which also may be only understood:

Dei-lhe (tanto or ttido) quanta tinlia. Foi sonho (tuda)
quanta vi.

§ 84. The relative cujo whose, of whom, corre-
sponds to "(?o qual," expressing the preposition de with a
possessive meaning. It is immediately followed by the
noun, with which it agrees in gender and number:
Este e homem cvjo talento admiramos.

If, however, this noun does not express possession,
but is a predicative, "whose," "of whom" must be
rendered by de quern (dos quaes), de que (do qual).

Os viajantes de quern (or dos quaes) foi campanheiro.

pais de que (or do qual) era rei . . .

§ 85. The relative que ("which," "that") may refer
to persons or objects. In the latter case it may be
preceded by one of the prepositions em, a, or de.

papel em que escrevo; a livro de que me falau; a coisa
a que se refere.

If, however, "which" or "that" is employed with
another preposition, it must be rendered by o qual (see
§ 180, 3 of. P. I).

41. Thema.

The Whistle.

I was still a child of seven years of age, so related the
famous Franklin, when my parents on a holiday filled my
pockets with coppers. I went directly to a shop where they
sold toys for children. Yet the sound of a whistle that I saw
by the way in the hands of another boy charmed me so much
that I voluntarily offered him all my money for this one ob-
ject. The boy consented. Satisfied with my bargain, I ran
home, where I went whistling all over the house, for my
whistle gave me as much pleasure as it disturbed the whole
family. When my brothers and sisters knew of my bargain,

Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative, etc., Pronouns. 835

they affirmed that I had given for times as much four it as
it was worth, and they laughed at me so much for my folly
that I began to cry with vexation. At the same time it came
to my mind what good things I might have bought with the
rest of the money ! Repentance then caused me more chagrin
than the whistle had given me pleas^re. As this occurrence,
however, had made on me an ineradicable impression, it was
afterwards of great use to me. Often when I was tempted to
buy some unnecessary thing, I said to myself: "Don't give too
much for the whistle!" and so I saved my money.

42. Leitura e versao.
trabalho physico e o mental.

Todo o homem deve ter uma profissao, uma arte ou um
officio : n'uma palavra, uma occupa5ao ou modo de vida.
trabalho 6 um beneficio para a prdpria saiide, tanto do corpo
como do espirito, e 6 o linico rem^dio efficaz para as necessi-
dades. homem que trabalha 6 litil a si, aos sens e a so-
ciedade; e 6 do trabalho de todos, seja qual for, que depende
progresso e o bem-estar geral.

A unica nobreza actual e a do trabalho : um artista, um
artifice, um operario, um commerciante, um industrial, um
lavrador, 6 tao indispensavel ao bem geral, como o sacerdote,
mestre, o medico, o engenheiro, o advogado, o magistrado,
escriptor ou o sabio. Perante a virtude de trabalho sao
todos iguaes, e mais se distingue o que mais ou melhor prodnz.

Aquelles que pelo seu trabalho concorrem para facilitar,
desenvolver e tornar mais productivo o trabalho dos outros,
isto e, para os ensinar e educar, habilitando-os a serem bons
e felizes, esses sao benemeritos no mais elevado grau : e nesse
grupo esta o sabio. que no seu gabinete, sdsinho, pensa e
medita no que conv6m ao bem geral, e escreve o resultado
das suas cogita5oes, no proposito de ensinar coisas ignoradas
que elle descobre, ou de aperfei9oar ou propagar pelo seu
trabalho as jd conhecidas, esse 6 o obreiro por excell6noia,
por que e o mestre dos mestres, a luz e o guia dos traba-
Ihadores.

Gloria e esses, e em geral aos trabalhadores do pensa-
mento, que a sua vida consomem no mais alto e difficil labor
que nenhuma remunera^ao material saberia pagar nem paga;
— e depois d'esses, gl6ria aos sens apostolos que sao os pro-
fessores, os mestres, os que ensinam e explicam ao povo os
livros e a obra dos pensadores.

Neste momento, as profissoes, artes e officios mais com-
muns em Portugal sao os seguintes, — e a espeeialidade de

336 Lesson 18.

cada uma d'estas occupa9oes aprende-se em livros, que os ha
a respeito de tndo e que tudo ensinam.
(Trindade Coelho: Pequeno Dicciondrio de profissoes, artes e
officios, appfindice do 3" Livro de leitura.)

CouTersa^ao.

The preceding task 40 may be varied: 1. by having the
story told to the school-fellows by one of them (FranUin era
ainda uma crianga).

2. By allowing the father of Franklin to tell it him :
(Til ainda eras . . .).

Eighteenth Lesson.

Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives

and Participles.

§ 86. The adjective and the participle employed
as an adjective (= verbal adjective) serve:

(a) To determinate the noun (pronominal adjective;
see pronouns) or

(b) To describe it (predicative or attributive ad-
jective) — Ex. :

Alguns peixes teem formas singulares.

(c) To qualify the action or the state of a noun:
A ewpresa saiu feliz. A aurora rompeu meiga e serena.

In the latter case the adjective is employed ad-
verbially or in apposition — i.e., it is added to the noun
or the verb to explain and complete it (see P.I, §245).

(Cf. : Como era a aurora? Meiga e serena.
Como rompeu a aurora? Meiga e serenamente).

§ 87. The verbal adjective agrees with its noun

in gender and number like a predicative adjective. Ex.:

As ondas vinham espraiar-se preguigosas no ureal da

bahia.
Sentiu a fronte aquedda por febre ardente. Eu vim

cansado.
soldado, temeroso on irresoluto, deu parte do negdcio.

The adjectives of the last example express cause
(por temor ou irresolugao). In such a case you may

Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and Participles. 337

have the adjective preceded by de in order to put an
emphasis upon a state or quality (cf. § 82):

Elle cahiu de cansado he fell down with weariness.

A crianga salta de contente the child jumps with joy.

De alegres que estavam, nao pensavam em mal algum.

They were so merry that they did not think of any evil.

§ 89. The position of the adjective or participle
in apposition may be before or after the verb, according
o its meaning (see the preceding examples):

Entramos em uma batalha, onde vencidos (= se formos
vencidos) honraremos nosso Deus com o sangue.

(a) If accompanying a noun, the adjective precedes it:
Acabada a refeigao, saimos.

The repast over, we went away.

(b) The past participle, acompanied by a comple-
ment, is placed after the noun and before the com-
plement; yet in elevated stile it may even be put after
the complement:

«... Com exclusao dos trechos indicados pela mesma
commissao ...»

'iDepois de eliminados os trechos pela commissao technica
indicados ...»

Those excerpts which the technical commission had in-
dicated having been eliminated.

(c) The past participle may even take the plural
form before a subject in the singular, if this latter is
one of the pronouns coda um, cada qual, nenhum, ninguem
and refers to persons or things already mentioned:

Sobresaltados com esta vista, procurava cada um a toda
a pressa por-se a salvo.

N.B. — Many participles may be employed as mere adjec-
tives; others may have an active meaning in spite of their
passive form ; for instance ido {tempos idos times past), vindo
(noticia vinda de fdra), lido (homens lidos well-read or learned
men).

This is especially the case with participles of reflective
verbs: arrependido from arrepender-se ; lembrado, etc. Ficd-
mos arrependidos we repented or changed our mind. Ella
estd lembrada she reminds herself.

§ 89. Sometimes the adjective as well as the par-
ticiple is employed substantively:

Portuguese Conversation-Grftnimar. 22

338 Lesson 18.

Muros de dots metros de alto (= de aliura) e meio

metro de largo (== de largura).
Bd esmolas ao pobre, consola o afflicto e (o) dbandonado.
Give alms to the poor (man), comfort the afflicted and

abandoned (one).

(N.B. — Here pobre, afflicto and ahandonado are singular,
and not, as in English, plural, though they have a plural
meaning. The Portuguese adjective, when substantively em-
ployed, has the verb in the plural only if it has itself the
plural form: Os pobres pedem esmola the poor ask for alms.)

§ 90. In certain cases you may employ instead
of an abstract noun, complement to a verb, an adjective
preceded by de, or supply the verb ser or estar:

Accusar alguem de negligente, de desleal (= de negli-
gencia, de deslealdade or de ser negligente etc.) to
accuse somebody of negligence or of being negligent.
Deu mostras de (ser) insofrida, de (estar) nervosa.

She gave proofs of being impatient, of feeling nervous.

§ 91. A small number of adjectives may be used
adverbially in the singular and masculine form — i.e.,
unaltered (see P. I, § 245) :

Luctas nao raro estereis; lig3es demasiado fdceis; falar
serio.

§ 92. A verbal adjective is, besides the past par-
ticiple employed with ser, estar, ficar etc., the form on
-ante, -ente, -inte (the so-called Participio activo), derived
from the gerund (-ando, -endo, -indo). While the gerund
is invariable (see the following Lesson), the Participio
activo and the passive are subject to all the rules go-
verning the adjectives:

Ficaram castigados. Nao estamos lemhrados.

Aguas dormentes; plantas dormentes; judeu err ante.
Cf. the adjectives presidente (= presidindo), amante
(= amando), previdente (= prevenindo) provident, previdente
foreseeing (= prevendo), proponente (— propondo), dbstvnente
('= dbstendo), subordinante (— subordinando) , corrente, nas-
cente, andante, ridente (= rindo), luzente, constituinte, seguinte,
servente.

In the case of many of these words their derivation has
fallen into oblivion, so that they are considered qualifying
adjectives. Some of them are : brilhamte, constante, importante,
distante, regente, doente, contente, eminente, excellente, etc.

Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and Participles. 339

Others have become substantives, as for instance:
Corrente current, vertente slope, regente regent, fabricante,

disponente, correspondente, descendente descendant, ascendente,

proponente, lente, etc.

43. Thema.

At war less brilliant than his brother, and at peace less
foreseeing than his father, Dom Affonso the Third neverthe-
less united the qualities of the one and the other in an eminent
degree. The most prominent feature of his character seems
to have been cunning obstinacy, which did not exclude an
excessive indulgence towards his favourites, especially for those
who had helped him to arrive to the brilliant position of
king. His reign was a period of real social progress, in which
civilisation extended and the popular class made important ac-
quisitions.

Weary with constant disappointments, Peter the First,
Emperor of Brazil, retired unexpectedly at night-time on board
the English man-of-war, where he abdicated in favour of his son on
the 7* of April, 1831. Dumbfounded by this sudden resolution,
the higher officers retired to their houses, repentant of their
behaviour. The people dispersed in silence (see § 87) during
the night, while the most prominent functionaries, from fear
(see § 87) of the consequences of the abdication, decided the
following morning to proclaim the prince constitutional em-
peror, appointing him a regency composed of three members.
In virtue of the Eeform Law of 1834, a single regent then
governed Brazil until a decree of 1841 declared the majority
of the emperor.

44. Leitura e versao.

Terremoto de Lisboa (1775).

Na manha do primeiro de novembro a cidade estremeceu,
abalada profundamente, e come^ou a desabar. Eram nove horas,
dia de Todos os Santos: nas casas ardiam as velas nos orato-
rios, e as egrejas regorgitavam povo a ouvir missa.

Toda a gente, numa onda, correu as praias ; mas, rolando
em massa, estacou perante a onda que vinha do rio, galgando
a inundar as ruas^ invadindo as casas. For sobre este en-
contro ruidoso, uma nuvem de p6 que toldava os ares e es-
curecia o sol, pairava, formada ja pelos detritos (= destro90s)
das construc(;6es e das mobilias, que o abalo interno da terra
vasculhava (= varria), e os desabamentos enviavam, em esti-
Ihas, para o ar.

A onda do povo afflicto, retrocedendo, a fugir do mar,
trop65ava nas rninas; e as qu^das, e a metralha dos muros

22*

340 Lesson 18.

que tombavam, abriam na floresta viva^ agitada pelo vento
da desgra9a, clareiras de morte, montoes de cadaveres e po9as
de sangae, dos membros decepados^ com manchas brancas dos
cerebros derramados contra as esquinas. E as casas erguiam-
se com as paredes desabadas, os tectos abertos sobre o esque-
leto dos tabiques, mostrando a nii todos os interiores funestos,
neste dia em que, para muitos, Deus julgara e condemnara
Liaboa.

Por isso rouco trovao dos desabamentos se ouvia cor-
tado pelos ais dos moribundos, e pelos gritos dos homens e
das mulheres, abrafados as cruzes, aos santos, as reli'quias,
solu9ando ladainhas, ungindo moribundos, parando esgazeados
a cada novo abalo da terra, que nao cessava de tremer, ar-
rostando-se pelo chao de joeUios, e com as maos postas, a face
em lagrimas, a clamar:

— Misericordia! Misericordia!

Casas, palacios, conventos, mosteiros, hospitaes, egrejas,
campanarios, theatros, fortalezas, pdrticos, tudo, tudo caia,
«Se visses somente o paldcio real, diz uma testemunha, que
singular espectaculo, men irmao!» Os varoes de ferro, tor-
cidos como Times, as cantarias estaladas como vidros!

A onda do rio sorvia n'um momento o caes do Terreiro
do Pa90, com os barcos atracados, coalhados de gente. Dos
andares altos precipitavam-se sobre as lages das ruas. medo
creseia, vinha a loucura: viam-se mortos arrastados pelos vivos,
viam-se mutilados coxeando, gente correndo desgrenhada, semi-
niia, homens e mulheres, velhos e crean9as dilacerados, san-
grentos, arrestando uma pema fracturada, esvaindo-se em
sangue por algum membro decepado.

Gritos, chores, clamores, impreca9oes, ais, preces, um bor-
borinho de vozes desvairadas acompauhava os gemidos com-
primidos dos soterrados nos escombros. No turbilhao das ruas
havia quedas e mortes, abra90S e agonias.

A mesma loucura dos homens era o desvairamento dos
brutos: os machos, desbocados, arrastavam os cavalleiros e a
cale9as, precipitando-se nos despenhadeiros da cidade montu-
osa; e as massas de gente, viva, moribunda e morta, de en-
volta com os entuLhos, rolavam nas ruas ladeadas pelos esque-
letos das casas como uma imagem desolada do que seria o cahos.

Quando a terra se subvertia, quando o mar vinha subindo
afogar a terra, quando no ar faiscavam as linguas flammiferas
rutilantes, que lembran9a podia haver das inven9oes humanas?
Abra9ados, confnndidos, na communidade do pranto, fidalgos
e freiras, mendigos e senhores, viloes e cavalleiros, abra9avam-
se na communidade da fome, do frio, da nudez, do terror.

The Gerund and the Periphrastical Conjugation. 341

De rastos a cidade inteira, sacudida pelo abalo formidando
(= formiddvel), reunia toda a sua eloqu6ncia n'uma palavra
unica :

— Misericordia ! Misericordia ! (Oliveira Martins.)

Nineteenth Lesson.

The Gerund and the Periphrastical
Conjugation.

§ 93. The participle in -ndo or gerund is in-
variable. It is employed:

(a) Referring to the subject of a verb:
Caminhando vagarosamente e parando a espagos, tinham

seguido os dots ao longo do rio.

(b) Referring to the object or some adverb (of
cause, manner, etc.):

Encontrou-os dormindo (= que dormiam; see N.B. — ).
Olha OS cms, olha a terra, a lue do dia expirando
( — que expira) tias vagas.

N.B. — When it may be doubtful whether the gerund
refers to the subject or to the object, another form must be
chosen; for instance:

Encontrei-os vindo da minha casa may be:
I met them when I came from my house, or:
I met them when they came from my house.

Such a phrase had better be expressed thus :
Encontrei-os ao virem (elles) da minha casa.
Encontrei-os ao vir (eu) da minJia casa.

(c) In absolute form — i.e., independent of any part
of a phrase and with its own subject. In this case it
expresses a circumstance (cause, time, etc.) of the verb
of the principal sentence. Ex.:

D. Jorge, parecendo-lhc (= a quern parecia or coma Ihe
parecia) opportuna a occasiao, determinou tentar a
fortuna. Isto aconteceu, estando tu (= while you
were) na India.

N.B. I. — An absolute participle may be employed without
a subject:

342 Lesson 19.

(a) when employed impersonally: chovendo nao sairei^
(if it rains . . .) ;

(b) when, the verb being a personal one, the subject is
not expressed:

Isso esclarecer-se-M indagando a causa.

That will be cleared up by inquiring the cause.

N.B. II. — The composed gerund is subject to the same
rules :

Havendo elk falado, todos resolveram partir.
After he had spoken, everybody resolved to go away.
Tendo Augusto Cesar (or A. G. tendo; see Eemark) capti-
vado em guerra Adiatorix, trouxe-o a Boma.

Remark. — When the subject of the gerund is at the same
time that of the verb in the principal sentence, it may pre-
cede or follow the gerund; otherwise it only follows: Tendo
OS Portugueses descoberto o caminho maritimo da India, o
oriente abriu-se d cultura do occidente.

§ 94. If the gerund expresses a circumstance of
time, a supposition or condition, while the verb of the
principal sentence designs something as happening in
future or as a habit, the gerund may be preceded by
the preposition em:

Em elle entrando (= as soon as he will enter), falar-

Ihe-ei.
Ndo ha amigos nem inimigos poUticos em se largando o
mando.

§ 95. The simple gerund expresses a simultaneous-
ness with the action of the principal verb ; the composed
gerund something preceding it. Yet the former is often
employed instead of the latter, if there be no misunder-
standing:

Musa, emir d' Africa, desembarcando (for tendo de-
sembarcado) nas costas de Hespanha com urn novo
exircito, rendia Hispalis.

The Periphrastical Conjugation.

§ 96. Most frequent is the employment of the
gerund in the periphrastical conjugation (conjugagao
periphrdstica) — i.e., joined to a form of the verbs estar,
andar, ficar, ir, vir, ter, haver. Thus employed, it adds
to the verb the meaning of certain circumstances:

The Gerund and the Periphrastical Conjugation. 343'-

(a) With the verb estar the gerund expresses an
action commenced but not yet finished:

Estava estudando; estd chovendo ; estd-me parecendo que
tudo serd em vdo.

N.B. — The same meaning is expressed by estar followed
by the preposition a and an infinitive : estava a estudar ; estd
a chover. Estar followed by para and an infinitive expresses,
however, an action immediately impending : Estou para partir.

(b) With the verbs andar, ficar the gerund ex-
presses lasting action or state:

Ando estudando; die andava meditando; ficou gosando.

N.B. — The same meaning is expressed by an infinitive
joined by a to these verbs: ando a estudar; andava a medi-
tar; ficou a gosar.

(c) With the verbs ir and vir the gerund expresses
the gradual realisation of an action:

A vermelMddo foi avultando; vinlia amanhecendo.

<ijd estds a ver que as terras que o genro do rei fosse
tomando aos Memos, iam, e verdade, augmentando o
condado, mas iam ficando tambem terras de Leao,
porque de Leao era o condado, e vasalo do rei
espanhol o B. Henrique.^

aPercorrendo o cdrpo do homem, o sangue vae espa-
Ihando por este a sua substdncia.f

Se fdr estudando diligentemente, poderd urn dia saber
hem a lingua portuguesa.

N.B. —Employed with an infinitive without any prepo-
sition, these verbs mark an immediate future: vou levar esta
carta ao correio; vae abrir a porta!

(d) The auxiliary verbs ter and haver, with following
de and infinitive, express necessity:

Tenho (or hei-)de escrever uma carta.

N.B. — Of. haver in the future and conditional tenses.
The singular and the 3^^ person pi. of haver may be joined
to de by a hyphen:

Hei-de, has-de, ha-de ir, havemos de, haveis de, hdo-de ir.

(e) A conjunction of vir and an infinitive preceded by
a has nearly the same meaning as these verbs employed
absolutely :

344 Lesson 19.

Isto vem a significar is hardly to be distinguished from

isto significa (= isto por fim significa).
Isso vem a ser o mesmo that is rather the same.

N.B. — Vir a ser often means tornar-se to become.
45. Thema.
Brazil.
(See the map on the inner front-side of this book.)
Brazil has for limits in the north the French, Dutch and
English Guianas, Venezuela and the republic of Columbia; in
the east Bguador, Peril, Bolivia and Paraguay, in the south
Argentinia and Uruguay, in the south-east, east and north-east
the Atlantic ocean. It is well known that the discovery of
this country was due to chance, and that Pedro Alvaras
Cabral, after having circumnavigated the Cape of Good Hope,
when sailing (fazer viagem) to the Indies, was thrown there
by a tempest in 1500. Prom that moment this vast region
belonged to the Portuguese crown, though it was little
known before the year, 1534 when D. Joao III. divided it
into several provinces (capiianias), of which he made grants
to various private persons who undertook to populate and
cultivate them. Yet the shipwreck of some, the frequent
incursions of the Indians, and various other accidents which
the recipients of these grants experienced, and at last their
death, were so many obstacles to the prosperity of these
various States. Martim Affonso de Sousa was the only one
who remained to witness the prosperity of his province, to
which he gave the name of Sao Vicente, because he had
anchored there on the 22°^ of January, the day on which the
Church celebrates the memory of S. "Vicent the martyr. The
remainder of the coast of Brazil was after that time infested
by innumerable adventurers of different nations who came to
purchase and traffic with the Indians.

46. Leitura e versao.

Brasil.

Desejando el-rei D. Joao III dar uma certa consistencia
4quellas capitanias, creou o ti'tulo de governador, e o conferia
a Thom6 de Sousa, a quern os donatarios foram sujeitos, e
quem em 1549 fundou a cidade de S. Salvador da Bahia. Morto
el-rei D. Sebastiao em Africa, Pilippe II, tendo-se apoderado
de Portugal por fallecimento do Cardeal-rei, se tornou tambem
de facto senhor do Brasil. Em 1624 os hollandSses invadiram
a maior parte d'este pals, porem Filippe IV, tendo recobrado
a cidade da Bahia, despachou a D. Jorge de Mascarenhas

The Gerund and the Periphraetical Conjugation. 345

marquSs de Montalvao, com o titulo de vice-rei; o qual foi
deposto pouco tempo depois, quando os Portugueses, sacudindo
o jugo dos espanhoes, pozeram no thrdno de seus avos o
duque de Bragan9a com o nome de Joao IV (1640). Nesta
^poca Tdrrias concessoes haviam entrado naturalmente nos do-
minios da coroa, oatras foram mais tarde compradas aos her-
deiros dos primeiros donatarios, e a colonia, inteiramente res-
taurada em 1654, foi administrada per governadores generaes
de provmcia, e um vice-rei na £ahia, ao qual eram sujeitos
OS primeiros, conservando todavia a faculdade de communi-
carem directamente com o soberano. Era entao bem pouco
conhecido o sul do Brasil, e o interior ainda mgnos. Assim
todo maritime tornou a ser dividido em cinco governos:
Para e Maranbao na costa septentrional, e Pernambuco, Babia
e Eio de Janeiro na oriental; e o cbefe da dynastia de Bra-
gan^a houve por bem conferir a col6nia o tftulo honroso de
principado, ordenando que d'ali em diante o berdeiro presump-
tivo da coroa tomaria o titulo de pri'ncipe de Brasil.

Com a cbegada em 1808 do principe regente, D. Joao,
foram tSdos os portos do Brasil franqueados as na^oes estran-
geiras, e uma carta regia de 2 de dezembro de 1815 elevou
o principado do Brasil a dignidade e catbegoria de reino. Falle-
cendo em 1816 a rainba D. Maria I, o creador da primeira
monarcbia hereditaria da America, vendo-se a ponto de perder
na Europa o tbrfino de seus avos, se transferiu a Lisboa em
1821, deixaudo no Brasil D. Pedro, seu filbo primog^nito, em
qualidade de principe regente. Porem os acontecimentos obri-
garam este principe a separar-se de Portugal e a erigir o
Brasil em imp^rio independente, sendo aeclamado imperador
na cidade do Eio de Janeiro em 12 de outubro de 1822; e
depois de haver dado uma constitui9ao ao imp6rio, foi reco-
nbecido nesta nova qualidade por el-rei seu pae, por um tra-
tado celebrado em 1825. Desde entao o Brasil viu seus portos
coalbados de navios mercantes de todos as na^oes ; sua eultura
e industria come^aram a desenvolver-se. caf6, a9ucar e
algodao, tendo uma extrac9ao rdpida, e o pre90 d'estes g^neros
indo gradualmente subindo, os proprietarios e agricultores tra-
taram de augmentar a produc9ao, ao passo que o luxo se foi
introduzindo nas cidades, nas villas, e at6 nas propriedades
ruraes no meio dos campos.

Conversa^ao.

Quaes sao os limites do Brasil, ao norte? a oeste? ao

sul? a leste?
Como se deu o doscobrimento do Brasil? E em que

anno?

346 Lesson 20.

A quern ficou pertencendo?

Quaes foram as medidas tomadas por D. Joao III rela-

tivo ao pais?
Que obstacidos se Ihes oppozeram?
Qaal foi a primeira capitania prospera?
Que aconteceu ao restante da costa?
Qaal foi a primeira cidade fundada por urn portugues ?

e como se chamou?
Nas maos de quern foi ter o Brasil, depois da morte de

D. Sebastiao e do rei-cardeal?
Em que data e contemporaneo a que aoontecimento em

Portugal, foi depOsto o primeiro vice-rei, instituido

por Filippe IV V
Que dynastia conferiu o titulo de prinoipado ao Brasil ?
E quern o elevou d dignidade de reino?
Quem emfim foi o primeiro imperador do Brasil?
Quern foi o ultimo e quando ficou depdsto?
Qae esp6cie de governo tem o Brasil actualmente ?

Twentieth Lesson.

Tenses of the Indicative.

(See P. I, L. 18 and 19.)

Present Tense.

§ 97. The Present of the Indicative is used:

(a) To denote, as in English, that a thing is now
taking place, or habitually takes place. In the first
case the periphrastical form may be employed, as in
English. Ex.:

Saio; estou Undo. Saio sempre depois do jantar.

(b) In narrative instead of the Preterite, in order
to give more vivacity to the description, and to make
the event, as it were, present. This is called the
historical or narrative Present. Ex.:

A Bastilha e abandonada d demoligao; d'ahi a pouco
urn montao de rumas indica o logar onde estava . . .
iodos correm para por a cidade na defensiva — ar-
ranca-se o calgado das ruas, fazem-se barricadas . . .:

(c) For an action or state marked as having con-
tinued for some time up to the present:

Tenses of the Indicative. 347

Besde quando estd aqui ? How long have you been here ?

Estou aqui ha ires dias.

I have been here these three days.

Jd ha muito que estuda o portugues?

Have you already been long studying Portuguese?

Ha muito que o nao vejo (que me nao escreve).

I have not seen him (he did not write me) for a long time.

(d) For the Future, when speaking of actions which
are to be completed in a short time, as:
Volto jd I shall come back directly.
Amanha vou a praia to-morrow I shall go to the sea-
side.

§ 98. The Future Tense:

(a) Denotes that something will happen, as:

Estudaremos esta ligao. Bigo-o, sustento-o e sustentd-
lo-hei.

(b) It is used as a softened form of the Imperative,
implying the expectation of fulfilment. Ex.:

8e cd vier alguem, dir-lhe-hds que nao estou.
If anybody comes (you will) teU him, that I am not
at home.
Uonrards pae e mae honour thy father and thy mother
Nao matards thou shall not kill.

(c) It is used to express uncertainty, an approximate
statement, a possibility, or a modest form of declaration.
Ex.:

Haver d pae no tumulo?

Will there be peace in the tomb?

Tive aviso, haverd qunise dias, que adoeceu.

I was advised about a fortnight ago that he has be-
come ill.

Serd tempo de ir a casa it is time to go home.

Assim serd. It may be so.

Uma coisa vos confessarei. I beg to confess to you
something.

§ 99. The immediate future is expressed by the
Present of ir (eu vou) or vir (venJio) and the simple
Infinitive (see §96, (c) N.B.):

Vou contar-lhes um conto. I shall tell you a tale.
Vem convidd los para um passeio he invites them for
a walk.

348 Lesson 20.

Bemark.—Mter the conditional se = if, whether, quando
when, and emquanto while, as well as after como, assim que,
logo que the Future of the Subjunctive is to be employed
(see L. 23).

§ 100. The Preterito Imperfeito (see P. I, §115) is
used:

(a) To express what was customarj' or habitual, or
to describe an action as simply going on in the past,
or a state as existing in the past — whether in principal
or subordinate sentences. Ex.:

Era tdo poderosa no primeiro quartet do seculo XVI a
esquadra portuguesa, que D. Manuel trazia de ordi-
ndrio trezentos ndus nas conquistas da Asia, da Af-
rica e da America.

(b) In familiar speech it is employed instead of the
First Conditional:

Se a apanhasse, esbofeteava-a if I could seize her, I should
box her ears.

§ 101. The Preterito perfeito is used:

For an action occurred in the Past; it serves as
the ordinary narrative tense for past time:

Esiive no theatro (h)ontem; fui ver o Othello.

Em virtude da lei das reformas de 1834, urn regente

unico governou o Brasil, ate que um decreto de 1841

declarou a maioredade do imperador.

N.B. — Qf dever the Imperfect is always used instead of
the Perfect:

EUe divia (not: deveu) sir (or ter sido) (h)ontem mats

attencioso para comtigo.
He ought to (or should) have been more attentive to
you yesterday.

§ 102. Two simultaneous actions of the Past are
put into the Imperfect, while two actions following one
another are put into the Perfect:

Eu escrevia o que o professor dizia.
I wrote what the teacher said.

Uma telha cahiu-lhe na cahega e elle morreu em seguida.
A tile fell on his head and he died at once.

Tenses of the Indicative. 349

§ 103. When a lasting action is interrupted by a
new one, the former is expressed by the Imperfect,
while the latter by the Perfect:

Eu lia quando recebi a tua carta.

I was reading when I got your letter.

§ 104. With regard to the translation from Eng-
lish into Portuguese, it may be summarised that the Per-
fect is to be employed whenever you may add one of
the adverbs then, noiv, thereupon, thereafter; and the
Imperfect when still, already, just may be added, or
when the verb may be rendered by would, used to and
the infinitive. Ex.:

Aggredimos o inimigo que recuou we attacked the ene-
my, who (then) retreated.
Perseguimos o inimigo que recuava we pursued the
enemy, who (already) was retreating.

§ 105. The difference between the Preteritos im-
perfeito and perfeito is with certain verbs quite keen in
its meaning. Ex.:

-Em tinha 1 had (possessed) Eu tive I had (I got)
havia there was houve there arose, began, hap-

pened
eu sabia I knew (already) eu soube I learned, heard

eu conhecia I knew eu conheci I made the acquain-

tance of

„ ... , , eUe vestiu he put on

die vestia he was dressed ^^^^ ^^^^.^.^^ ^^ ^^^^^^^

elle trasia he carried, he was elle trouxe he brought

dressed

ella disia she would say eUa disse she said

levantavamo-nos we used to levantdmo-nos we got up, rose,

get up etc.

§ 106. Most frequently the Preterito perfeito is
employed where in English the Perfect is used. Ex.:

Ghegou he has arrived. TirO I have seen him. Tive
uma carta I have got a letter. Deram-me noticias delle they
have given me news from him. Esteve no concerto de (h)ontem?
Were you at the concert last night?

§ 107. The Preterito indefinido, however, expresses
repetition or continuation of a fact from a certain point
of time until the moment of speaking. (In English
the Present may sometimes be employed instead). Ex. :

350 Lesson 20.

Todas as constituigSes teem facultado a eertas autoridades
direito de perdoar.

All constitutions have given (or gave or give) to cer-
tain authorities the privilege of absolution.

Sometimes this tense serves only to emphatically
declare an action as altogether finished for the speaker:

Tenho dado fim as minims investigagSes.
I put an end to my investigations.

§ 108. The Pluperfects [Preteritos mais-que-perfeitos
composto and simples) express an action preceding
another. Ex. :

Eu jd tinha jantado quando meu irmao chegou.
I had already dined when my brother arrived.
Faldramos em negdcio . . . We had spoken of business.

§ 109. The Mais-que-perfeito simples may be
employed instead of the Condicional as well as instead
of the Imperfeito Subj. (the latter especially in the first
part of the conditional sentence) and instead of the
Presente condicional in the second part. Ex.:

Quieera (= gueria) ser-lhe agradavel.

1 should like to be of some use to you.

Se contentamento fieSra (== fieesse) milagres, iivera-me

(— ter-me-hia) nesta hora a seus pes.
If joy did wonders, you would have me . . . at your feet.

But it is also absolutely employed, especially in
popular interjections:

Quern (me) dera!

Would it were so! That would be a good thing!
Pudera! I say! Wouldn't it! To be sure!
Prouvera Deus! God grant!

§ 110. The Imperative expresses request, order,
permission, or prohibition. It is formed out of the Pre-
sente Subj., but for the 2'^'^ persons which are formed
out of the Presente Indicativo, if they are not in nega-
tive sentences. Ex.:

Nao betas coisa que nao vejas, nem assignes coisa que

nao leias.
Don't drink what you do not see, nor sign what you

did not read.

Tenses of the Indicative. 351

§ 111. The Condicional expresses:
(a) That something soon happened or would have
happened on certain conditions. Ex.:

8e nao fdssemos orgulhosos, nao nos queixariamos do

orgidho dos mais.
If we were not proud, we should not complain of

the pride of others.

Elle teria sido felie, se tivesse sahido moderar os sens

desejos.
He would have been happy if he had known how to

moderate his desires.

N.B. I. — The Presente Condicional (or even the Imper-
feito Ind.) is sometimes employed instead of the Preterito
condicional, the verb of the dependent clause being put into
the Preterito comp. indie, instead of the Mais-que-perfeito.

«-Caso e que se elle nao tern (= tivesse) sido demittido
too depressa, o roubo dava-se (instead of dar-se-ia or
properly ter-se-ia dado) com certeea» there is no doubt
that, if he had not been dismissed so suddenly, the
robbery would certainly have taken place.

«iSi3 a teem (instead of tivessem) visto ali haveriam apor-
fado certamente e encontrariam (instead of teriam
encontrado) confirmados as informagdes de Pedro da
Covilha, que d'aquella povoagao dera preciosas infor-
magdes na sua carta a D. Joao II, pois ali fdra
poucos annas antes . . . Em Sofala certamente en-
contrariam (for teriam encontrado) navios da costa
do Malabar. ■!>

(Campos Junior: Guerreiro e Monge.)

N.B.— The Preterito condicional, composed with tivera
or houvera, may be employed in conditional clauses instead
of the Mais-que-perfeito Subj.:

Teria ido, se tivera (for tvvesse) sabido que . . . (cf. § 109).

(c) In certain cases the Conditional (or the M.-q.-
perfeito simples instead) is used to express astonishment,
avaliation, or a softened form of declaration:

Seria verdade? Can that be true? Haveria no theatro,
quando muito, trezentas pessdas, there may have
been at the most in the theatre about 300 persons.
Yim-me embora seriam des horas I went home at
about ten o'clock. Nao diria isso I should not say
so. Antes diria. I should rather say, as in English.

352 Lesson 20.

(c) Frequently the Fresenie condicional (without a
dependent clause) is used to express au expectation, an
arrangement, the fulfilment of which depends of the
future. Ex. :

Esse manual ser-lhe-liia guia seguro pelos caminhos tor-

tuosos da politica.
This handbook was meant to be a reliable guide to him

on the tortuous ways of politics.
Iki far-llie-hia ver as belleeas do meu pais.
I intended to show him all the beauty of my home.

47. Thema.

Extract from Portuguese History.

The history of Portugal properly begins with the reign of
the Count Henry of Burgundy. All that is anterior to this
belongs more to the history of Lusitania and in a more gene-
ral meaning to that of the peninsula. When in Leon Al-
phonse the Sixth was reigning, the Count Henry, a descendant
of Hugo Capet (== Capeto) offered (= came to offer) his ser-
vices to that monarch, and received from him in reward the
hand of his daughter D. Thereza and the country of Portugal.
Is is certain that they were already married in 1095 and
that the Count Henry already in 1097 governed Portugal
from the Minho to the Tagus. The successor of this first Portu-
guese regent was his son Dom Affonso Henriques, who, after
having conquered many tracts of land from (see § 48 c) the
Moors, was victorious at last on the 25^^ of July, 1139, at the
famous battle of Campo de Ourique against five Moorish
kings, while the day before he had been (gerund) proclaimed
king by his soldiers, [a] title that was confirmed to him
by the nation in the Parliament (as Cortes) of Lamego in
1143. Already the monarch had caused the independence of the
kingdom to be recognised by the King of Leon. The suc-
cessors of Affonso Henriques continued their conquests:
D. Sancho the First conquered Algarve, B. Affonso II. Alcacer
do Sal, and D. Sancho II many tracts and places of the
Alentejo.

The kingly power then began [to be] in fight with the
ecclesiastical state, [which was] most powerful at those times
and from that fight resulted the deposition of B. Sancho II
by [a] bull of the Pope Innocence IV, and the government
of H. Affonso III, his brother. B. Binie strove especially to
make Agriculture and Science flourish, to which purpose he
created the first university in Lisbon. His successors conti-

Tenses of the Indicative. 353

nued tbe work of civilisation until the unfortunate reign of
D. Fernando I, last monarch of the first dynasty.

The nation united in Parliament proclaimed in 1583 King
of Portugal, John, Grandmaster of the Order of Aviz (Mester
de Avis), who settled the independence of Portugal which was
attacked by Castile, and by his valour and good administration
he obtained the love of his people. The descendants of this
monarch reigned until 1580, when the Cardinal King Dom
Henrique died. This is doubtlessly one of the most beautiful
periods of Portuguese history.

48. Leitura e Tersao.

Os descobrimentos dos Portugueses, as suas victorias na
Asia e Africa, tornaram o sea nome temido e respeitado em
toda a parte. DSsde a gloriosa tomada de Cfiuta em 1415 at6
a desgragada batalha de AlQdcer Quivir em 1578, este povo,
dotado de uma actividade sem exemplo, descobre os archi-
pelagos da Madeira, (das) A9ores, (das ilhas) Candrias e (do)
Cabo Verde, (a) costa e ilhas de Guin6 ; explora e faz muitos
estabelecimentos no litoral da Africa occidental: dobra o
Cabo das Tormentas; submete ou faz tributarios os principes
mouros da costa oriental africana; arrebata aos drabes a
navega9ao da India e (do) Mar Vermelho; e assombrando
OS povos do Oriente com prodigies de valor, estabelece-se em
Ormuz, Diu, Damao, G6a, Bombaim, Coehim, Ceylao, Malaca,
abrindo-se caminho pela Oceania para Java, Borneo, Timor,
Molucas, China e Japao, ao passo que descobre a Nova
HoUauda, Nova Guin6 e outras terras. Pedro Alvares
Cabral descobre o Brasil (1500) e em mSnos de um s^culo,
OS vastos e f^rteis terrenos entre o Amazonas e Prata, se
acham submettidos ao dominio portugu€s. Mais de cincoenta
reis ou regulos foram tributarios do rei D. Manuel, e os mais
poderosos monarchas da Europa e do Oriente solicitaram a
sua ailian9a.

Nao foi menor o cuidado pelas letras neste gloriOso
periodo. D. Affonso V forma a bibliotbeca de Evora; D.
Manuel I manda reformar e aperfei(joar a legisla9ao. Foi
neste periodo e no reinado de Joao III que se introduziu em
Portugal a inquisi9ao (1540) e a Companhia de Jesus (1541).
— A morte do cardeal-rei D. Henrique (1580) seguiu-se a
occupa9ao castelhana, que durou at6 1640 ; e Portugal, que
no reinado de T). Manuel chegara ao maior grau de esplendOr,
caiu nesse periodo na maior prostra9ao.

No anno de 1640 recuperou esta na9ao a sua independencia
pela gloriosa revolu9ao que elevou ao thrSno D. Joao IV, tronco
dadynastia deBragan9ahapouco ainda reinante. Portugal alliou-

Portuguese Conversatiou-Grammar. 23

354 Lesson 21.

se depois com a Inglaterra e Hollanda contra Espanha na
c61ebre Guerra de Successao. Esta guerra terminou pelo Tra-
tado de Utrecht em 1713. Naquelle tempo e reinando
D. Joao V, construiram-se obras grandiosas, como fSram o-
mosteiro, templo e paldcio de Mafra e o aqueducto das Aguas
Livres. Mas o tesouro ficou exhausto e a na9ao em deca-
dencia, de que s6 a poderia tirar um g^nio e perseveranQa
como do marqu3s de Pombal, ministro de B. Jos^ I (1755 — 1777)
em cujo reinado se reorganisaram as finan9as, o ex6rcito e a
marinha, f6ram expulsos os jesultas, e a inqnisifSo levou o seu
primeiro golpe, at6 ser de todo extincta em 1820.

Em 1807 OS francfises invadiram Portugal, mas f6ram
repellidos pelo ex6roito anglo-portugu6s, que Ihes deu severas
li96es em Vimieiro, Bussaco, Badajoz etc. Em 1820 uma
reyolu9ao estabeleceu o systema constitucional. A rainha
D. Maria I, tendo ido em 1807 ao Brasil com o principe regente
D. Joao e a cdrte, 14 fallecfira em 1816. D. Joao VI entao
voltou a Portugal em 1821, sendo-lhe negado o desembarque,
at6 elle ter confirmado o systfima constitutional, que foi des-
truido em 1828. Em 1833 porem foi restabelecido por
D. Pedro IV (como D. Pedro I imperador do Brasil), filho de
D. JoSo VI, qual pelo seu val6r e constancia soube reivindi-
car thrOno para sua filha, a senhora D. Maria II, fallecida
a 15 de Novembro de 1853. Foi ella a bis-av6 de Com
Manuel II, ultimo rei de Portugal, desthrouado em 1910.

Twenty-first Lesson.

The Subjunctive Mood.

§ 112. The Subjunctive denotes an action or a
state as existing in the mind of the person speaking,
and not as a fact:

I do not tbink he is so old. Nao creio que seja tao velho.
We feared he would go. Becedmos que se fdsse embora.

It is the mood of uncertainty, and is employed after
verbs expressing desire, tendency, order, hope, merit,
fear, doubt:

Desejo (espero, quero, duvido) que Carlos estude.

§ 113. The Subjunctive is used:
A. In principal clauses (oragoes principaes or sub-
ordinantes):

The Subjunctive Mood. 355

(a) In the Imperative mood for the first and third
persons when affirmatively, and for all three persons
when negatively employed:

Estude (elle, Y^), estudemos, estudem!

Nao pegas a quern pediu, nem sirvas a quern serviu.

Que esteja ou nao horn tempo.

N.B.— In the third person que may precede the verb;
que estude(m)!

(b) In clauses where talves precedes the verb:
Talvez elle diga perhaps he may say. Yet here the
Indicative may be employed.

(c) In clauses expressing wishes or interjections:
Pram a JDeus que assim seja! Viva! Morra! Beus

salve! Possa eu um dia pagar-lhe as suas fineeas!
Assim as suas prendas fdssem devidamente desen-
volvidas!

(d) In clauses of admission being equivalent to a
conditional clause:

Falle elle (= se elle falar), tudo se calard.

B. In subordinate clauses (oraQoes subordinadas)
beginning with que^ and not representing indirect speech.
The conjunction que requires the Subjunctive:
(a) After all verbs, substantives, adjectives and
other particles which express cause or impediment of
an action or occurrence, an admission, approval or dis-
approval, hope, convenience, etc., such, as: Desejar,
querer, pedir, aconselhar, consentir, admittir, impedir,
ordenar, approvar, prop6r, suppor, merecer, prohibir,
decretar, resolver, esperar, convir, desapprovar, achar mal
(bom, melhor, pear).

Examples.

Fig com que elle visse o seu erro I caused him to re-
cognise his error.

' "Que" may be omitted in the complementary accusative
clause whenever the verb is also accompanied by a dative com-
plement which is the subject of the accusative clause; — e.g.,
«Candido de Figueiredo propunha d Academia das Sciencias, en-
carregasse uma comissao da reforma (ou revisaoj da ortografia,
antes que se comeQasse o famigerado Dicciondrio (in spe), de que
era director Latino Coelkoi) (Carol" Michaelis de Vasconcellos).

23*

356 Lesson 21.

Impediram (or obstaram) que entrassemos.
They opposed our entrance.

^rovo (desaprovo) que faga isso.
I approve Ms doing so.
Suponhdmos que esse facto se de.
Snppose that will happen.

Ndo Ihe aconsdho que porta. I don't advise you to part.
Ndo se pode admitir (or e inadmissivel) que se digam
taes coisas. Such things cannot be allowed to be said.
EUe merecia que se Ike concedessem todos as honras.
He would be worthy of aU honours bestowed upon him.

(b) After the expressions (verbs, substantives, ad-
jectives) of fear:

Beceei que o meu amigo estivesse doente.

Tinha medo (estava com medo) que perdesse o combdio.

De medo que lest, for fear.

Nao temas que fiques castigado!

Estou a tremer (i de receiar) que Jtaja mallogro.

I tremble for fear there may be a failure.

(c) After expressions of astonishment, surprise,
joy, grief— e.g.:

Admiro (-me) que elle venha (or tenha or tivesse vindo).
I wonder that he will or has come.
Fiquei surpreendida que tivesse chegado.
I was surprised he had come.

Folgo (or estimo) que tenha recuperado a saude.
I am glad he is well again.

Sinto que ndo Ihe possa valer.

I am sorry I can be of no use to you.

(d) After verbs or impersonal idioms expressing
that it is agreeable or deplorable, rare or frequent,
possible, probable, astonishing, important, just, necessary,
useful, etc.— e.g.:

£ de seniir it is deplorable, a pity

e de crer_ \ j^ ^^ assumed

e admissivel f

e de desejar it is desirable

e raro (vulgar) it is rare (common)

e possivel (provdvel) it is possible (probable)

e admirdvd (or de admirar) it is astonishing

parece incrivel it seems incredible

importa it is a matter of consequence

The Subjunctive Mood. 357

e justo it is just

e necessdrio (util, perigoso) it is necessary (useful,

dangerous)
a nao ser que unless, except.

Ex.: Importa que se comprehenda e exercite hem o em-
prigo do conjunctivo, para que haja nella a mdxima
facilidade.

To this group belong also the nouns predicatively
employed :

e honra it is an honour
e vergonha it is a shame

^'^T" } it is time
sao floras /

e justiga it is justice

e asneira it is foolishness

caso e que the question is.

(e) After duvidar and other terms expressing doubt,
when employed affirmatively, the English "whether" is
translated by que:

Duvido que elle saiba I doubt that (or whether) he knows.
J^ muito duvidoso que seja despachado o requerimento

It is rather doubtful whether the request will be

agreed to.
However : Nao ha duvida (ninguem duvida) que Cintra

e um logar dos mats bonitos da Europa. There is

no doubt that Cintra is one of the finest places in

Europe.

N.B. I. — Sometimes, however, the subjunctive is employed
even with duvidar in a negative clause: Nao duviddmos que
ST. Jose diga a verdade.

N.B. II. — After ignorar the subjunctive may be employed:
Ignorava que vivesses (or que vivias) na aldeia I did not
know that you lived in the country.

N.B. III.— After the verbs expressing knowledge or
meaning of something happening or existing (verbos sensitives),
as v^r, saber, jvlgar, and those declaring something as happen-
ing or existing (verbos declarativos), as diser, declarar, an-
nundar, the verb after "que" may be in the subjunctive mood,
in case the verb of the principal clause is employed negatively
or in a negative interrogation.

Nao digo que elle nao saiba.

I don't mean to say that he does not know.

358 Lesson 21.

Entao ndo achas que fdsse melhor ter mais cuidado?
Don't you think it would be better to be more
careful ?

N.B. IV.— In an interrogative accessory clause the verb
may be in the subjunctive.

Nao sabia quaes fossem as suas ideias e medidas.
I did not know which were his ideas and measures.

N.B. v. — In the same case after se whether, with dever,
haver de added in thought, the verb may be employed in the
subjunctive :

Nao sei se diga (= nao sei se devo or deva dieer or:
ndo sei se hei-de or haja de dizer) I don't know
whether I am to say.

49. Thema.

It is not advisable that during a thunderstorm many people
should crowd together in a church unless there is a lightning-
conductor. It is indispensable that a nation should fulfil its
destiny and always strive after high ideals. I should have
rendered him this service, if I had had the means to do so.
These flowers would not have faded if they had been watered.
I shall do what he wants me to, provided he behaves well.
Do not go upon the lake while the ice is not solid, lest you
break through. He will give it you on condition that you shall
give it back to him to-morrow. It is impossible that he should
have written that. It is convenient for you to go to find him.
It is a pity that you have not seen him. It is a shame that
you should deny thus what you have done. It would be a
crime if you should let him do that. What would they say
if I should send them this parcel? We should comfort her
if she needed it. However sad the news is, I shall impart
it to her. You ought patiently to endure these trials, until
a time will come when you will no longer be oppressed. It
is just that you should be rewarded. Do not believe him,
whatever he may say. God grant (= querer) he may suc-
ceed. TeU him, so that he may know it. Even if he should
come to-morrow, he would no longer be in time.

50. Leitura e versao.

Passeio d Riviera portuguesa.

Visto que jd conhecemos o mappa de Portugal nos sens
tra90S geraes, vamos agora fazer uma visita aos arrabaldes
da capital. Como esta calor, reeommenda-se que tomfimos o
comboio de Gascaes, para que nos leve a Eiviera. Pois sigam-

The Subjunctive Mood. 359

me, SB forem do meu parecer. Vejam, al6m esta o comboio
prestes a partir. Nao se demorem ! Corram e subd,m, para
que nao o percamos. Eis-nos installados! Ainda bem que o
alcan^amos, pois duvido que haja outre antes do meio-dia. Sen-
"tem-se e descansem da corrida ! Ora querem ver que o Carlos
■esta sem fSlego! Nao se precipitasse tanto! Agora reparem:
Do lado esqu6rdo do combdio v6-se o Tejo e as margens da
Outra Sanda. D'ali se gosa um panorama encantador de LisbOa
6 do rio, por tal forma magnifico que sera muito para lasti-
mar que nao seja visto pelo estrangeiro que visite LisbSa.

Ora por pouco que tivessemos passado, sem a v6r, a Torre
de Selem, uma das maiores maravilbas de architectura, que
ha no mundo. E que uma fabrica de gaz impede que se
veja, a nao ser do lado do rio. Que p6na que se tenha dado
iicen9a de collocarem essa fabrica de maneira que seja tao
difficil obter um relance d'olhos d'um monumento erigido para
que sempre relembre os feitos dos Portugueses no seu periodo
•de maior heroismo e gloria.

comboio agora vae passaudo pelas povoa9oes de Bdfundo,
JPedrougos, Pago d'Arcos, Alges, praias consideradas de mar,
visto que o rio aqui leva agua salgada, e frequentadas pela
melbor gente de Lisboa, comquanto nao estejam longe da
capital. E que ha tantas e tao boas praias por todo a costa
portugu6sa que facilmente se Ihe encontra onde nos sintamos
bem e fiquemos curados dos nossos males.

Agora permittam que Ihes chame a atten^ao para o sitio
que estamos atravessando e que se chama Caxias. Nao 6 senao
justo que aqui se mencione um institute pedag6gico que faz
honra ao pais: 6 a Casa de CorreC(jao, estabelecida n'aquelle
vasto edificio que, se bem que tenha sido um mosteiro e por
conseguinte nao destinado desde logo ao seu fim actual, e um
modelo no genero. E rare o alumno que ali nao se sinta (or
sentisse) bem e em que os esfor^os dos professores, tendando
a que todos cheguem a ser bons e liteis, nao consigam (or
<;onseguissem) o seu fim.

E nao esque93.mos que aqui ha ainda outra coisa a ad-
mirar: uma casa de campo, deshabitada, que foi do rei, ou seja o
quintal que Ihe pertence, uma especie de parque com avenidas e
alegretes contornados de buxo artificialmente copado, e em
parte do tamanho de um homem. Poi, como ja disse, d'el-rei,
que porem nunca habitou aqui que eu saiba. Outra qiiinta
real, e essa lindissima, no que diz respeito ao palacio em estilo
de renascen9a, esta situada nao longe d'aqui na estrada de
G'mtra, em Queluz. Tambem tem parque rococ6 com altas
sebes de buxo. Mas o maior attractive que eu Ihe conhe9o,
^ profundo silSncio em que esta mergulhado.

360 Lesson 22.

Ja estamos a beira-mar. Notem aquelle grande edifioio
sobre os rochedos lambidos pela quebran9a! Nao e como quern
quizesse atirar-se ao mar? E o Sanatorio de Carcavellos cons-
trnido em 1902 para que d6 acolhimento a meninos de 4 para
12 annos. Nao longe d'ahi esta outro sanatorio, o de Sanf Anna
de Parede que, tendo cem camas, recebe tanto adultos como
criaii9as que sejam taberculosas. E ha quern aCfirme que cada
cama custou 16.000 marcos, a ser verdade que o sanatdrio,
edificado em 1904, tenha custado 1.600000 marcos approxima-
dameote.

Do nosso lado direito devia-se v6r outro edifioio, mais
antigo e nao m^nos interessante, se as verduras e alguns
gmpos de casas nao no-lo oceultasse. E o palacio do marqufis
de Pombal que foi o grande ministro de D. Jos6 I. Estamos
em Oeiras.

E jd vamos passando Sao Joao d'Estoril, Estoril e Mont'
Estoril, ocde nos encontramos na parte da Bahia de Oascaes,
mais restrictamente chamada Siviera portuguesa. Proponho
que des^amos para lanchar no Meal Hotel Mont' Estoril d'onde
se gosa uma vista formosa a nao poder ser mais linda. De-
pois daremos um passeio ate Cascaes, para ver a cidadella, resi-
dfincia d'el-rei quando ca estd, e uma forma^ao das mais
curiosas de rochedos, em forma de cratera, aberta no fundo,
e chamada *JBdca do Inferno'o.

Twenty-second Lesson.

The Subjunctive Mood (continued).

C. In Adverbial Clauses (oragoes circumstanciaes).

§ 114. The subjunctive is employed after the
following conjunctions (cf. P. I, L. 34) :

(a) The concessive (concessivas): ainda que, posto
que etc., as soon as the clause expresses only supposition
and not a reahty:

Nao me queixaria d'elle, ainda que me maltratasse.
But:
Ainda que o amava, por ser valoroso, nao era cega pelos

sens defeitos.
N.B. — Sometimes the concessive clauses may have the
subjunctive, even when expressing a reality:

Se hem que (or comquanio que) os Alpes sejam mais
altos que OS Pyrenees, elles sao mais fdceis de at-
travessar.

The Subjunctive Mood. 361

(b) The final (finaes):

Obedecei as leis, para que vos obedegam.

(c) The consecutive (consecutivas) : que:

Os generos de mais neeessidade devem ser too baratos
que estejam ao alcance de tddos os bolsos.

N.B. — Sem que and que nao always require the subjunc-
tive. Ex.:

Gaso venha e que nao (or sem que) chegue a Jiora . . .

(d) Nao par que, nao que:

Procedeu assim, nao porque gostasse, mas por entender
ser este o seu dever.

(e) Contanto que, a ndo ser que, supposto que, dado
que, dado caso que, caso que, case always require the sub-
junctive. Ex. :

P6de ir contanto que nao se demore.

(f) Se if, whether, expressing condition; como se
as if; quer . . quer; como quer que (cf. se followed by
the future in the following Lesson, §115 (a)):

Se nao fosse a grande distancia, iri a vel-o.
Falou como se tivesse perdido o juizo.

N.B. I.— Instead of como se in tlie preceding example
might be employed como quern (see E).

N.B. II. — 8e, introducing an indirect interrogation, is
followed by the indicative: preguntou-me se era grande a
distancia.

Sa(h)irei quer chova quer ndo cliova . . . whether it be

raining or not.
Como quer que seja however it may be.
Como quer que o nao visse as he did not see him anyhow.

(g) Ate que, depois que and antes que, when ex-
pressing a future, an intention:

Esteja em casa atS que seu irmao volte.

Depois que tenha chegado, saiam umbos antes que se

feche a porta.
(h) Cotno, when, employed with the imperfect or
pluperfect, it expresses a series of events; sometimes
also when expressing the reason:

Napoledo, como tivesse sido vencido e aprisionado pelos

alliados, foi levado para a ilha de Elba.
Como nao quizesse acompanhar-me, sai s6.

362 Lesson 22.

D. In Relative Clauses.

(a) When expressing a supposition and not a reality :

Pompeo aspirava a honras que o distinguissem de todos

OS capitaes do seu tempo.
Se encontrar um livro qiie Ihe agrade, compre-o.
Se nao chove, a raiz duma planta nao encontra na terra

dgua que sugue.

(b) When expressing a quahty which restricts the
generahty of an idea, this idea belonging to a negative
or interrogative-negative attribute:

Ainda nao encontrei homem dlgum que nao tivesse (or

tenha) sido logrado nos seus sonhos de felicidade.
Quern ha que tenha sido sempre felin?

N.B. — Poueo is considered as attributing a negative
meaning :

Ha poucos homens que saibam aproveitar hem o tempo.

(c) Expressing purpose:

Enviei-lhe uma pessoa que o avisasse do que havia aeon-
teddo.

Remark. — Relative clauses which do not belong to any
of the groups above require the indicative : EUe sabe OS meios
de que pdde dispor e sdbe os deveres qv^ tern de cumprir.
Conhecia perfeitamente a sodedade em que vivia.

E. Quern in the meaning of "somebody who" or
"people who" and depending on ha, apparece or the
like, or follov/ing como (of. C (f ) N.B.) equally requires the
verb in the subjunctive mood:

Ha quern assim pense; havia quem assim pensasse.
Falou com quem tivesse perdido o juizo.

However : Ha algumas pessoas que assim pensam.

Also expressions as seja quem for que, quem quer
que seja and the hke require the subjunctive:

Elle estd innocente, seja quem for que diga o eontrdrio.

F. Finally, the subjunctive is employed in the for-
mulas que eu saiba as I know, and queira ou nao queira
whether he wants to or not:

Nao ha, que eu saiba, expressao mais suave.

The Subjunctive Mood. 363

51. Thema.

I should want to find a book that might serve me as
a guide on my travels. Man is the only sentient being that
in a state of freedom may destroy itself. Please to send me
a servant who knows how to wait upon people. I should be
very sorry if you should depart without bidding me good-bye.
It will be well that you may know why I kept silence. Per-
haps it will be sufficient if you tell him that he will be dis-
missed immediately if he should not do his duty. It is
time that we return home, for it begins to rain. It may
be assumed that to-morrow the weather will be good. I
promised that I should keep her company, in case you should
be obliged to remain here. Bom Joao de Castro, a' brilliant
modern author and a descendant of the famous Portuguese
viceroy of the game name, says in the preface to his <i-Jor-
nados no Minhoi> : "The reader who will like substantial
treatises, may halt here with his curiosity, for my 'Jornadas'
are nothing but a slight beating of wings . . . When I should
be a man — so I intended when still a child — I should
rove through old castles ; on my command (= voz) the draw-
bridges were to sink and the confined ladies of the castle
should hail me as their invincible deliverer . . ." You do not
know whereby the ancestor of this author has become an his-
torical person, and you ask me whether I do. May I ask
leave to tell you briefly in the following paragraph the his-
tory of this hero, so intimately connected with that of his
country.

52, Leitnra e versao.

Dom Joao de Castro.

D. Joao de Castro seria immortal na historia de Portugal,
ainda que nao tivesse sido vice-rei da India e como tal feito
fa9anhas como havera poucos as tenham feito. Talv§z elle
seja mais eonhecido pela sua probidade e desinteresse, que
nao ha quern Ih'a possa negar ou Ihe levasse a palma. Nasceu
em Lisboa no anno de 1560; e como descendesse de uma fa-
milia illustre, passou a India no vice-reinado de D. Antonio
de Noronha, e era governador de Ormuz quando foi chamado
para vice-rei da India. Tlnha ja militado em Tanger e acom-
panbado o imperador Carlos Quinto na tomada de Tunis. Por
essa occasiao, como este monarcha quizesse dar-lhe a sua parte
dos despojos, D. Joao de Castro recusou, nao porque despre-
zasse todo o pr^mio material da sua valentia, mas por entender,
dizia, que so pertencia ao sen soberano recompensal-o como
merecesse. Quando D. Joao de Castro tomou conta do gov6rno
da India, era Diu governada por D. Joao de Mascarenhas que.

364 Lesson 23.

posto nao dispuzesse de mais de 300 portugufises, a defendeu
valorosamente da forga cem vftzes maior com que a amea9ara o
rei de Cambaia. novo vice-rei nao hesiton em Ihe man-
dar alguns soccdrros de soldados, assim como seus dois filhos,
dos quaes um morreu na pra9a pela explosao duma mina.
Defendia-se Diu heroicamente haveria seis mezes, quando D. Joao
de Castro chegou (1546). Posto que nao fdsse facil illudir o
inimigo, consegoiu faz6l-o, entrando na pra9a com 4000 homens.
Alguns dias depois fez uma sortida e, agredindo as trincheiras
dos sitiantes, ganhou completa victoria, uma das mais sangui-
nolentas e memordveis, que nos tem transmittido a hist6ria.
Ficou a cidade arruinada, visto que o combats abrangesse
ruas, largos e arredores. Era indispensavel que se reconstru-
issem as fortifica9oes, mas nao havia dinheiro que chegasse.
Neste apuro D. Joao de Castro cortou alguns cabellos da barba,
e sobre este penhor pediu (que) Ihe emprestassem 20 000 par-
daus ^ 03 habitantes de Goa, os quaes Ihe forneceram o di-
nheiro preciso e sem que tivessem de se arrepender da sua
confian9a, pois a singular hypotheca foi resgatada no praso
fixo. E nunca houve, nem nunca haverd homem que possa
gabar-se de barbas tomadas em mais alto val6r. Foi esse
rasgo de magnifico aprumo que, mais do que os feitos com
que honrou a sua espada e as armas do seu pais, Ihe gran-
gearam a popularidade de que, passados quasi 4 stSculos, ainda
gosa o nome de D. Joao de Castro.

Mai tinha conseguido restabelecer a boa ordem no vice-
reino, quando a morte o veio surprehender a 6 de'junho de
1547. Teve de ser enterrado a custa do publico, visto nao
se achar nos seus cofres mais do que um cilicio, e ties reaes",
per isso que D. Joao de Castro, nao aspirando a bens que nao
fossem OS do seu pais, em v6z de amontoar tesouros, despendia
generosamente os seus ordenados no servi90 do Estado.

Twenty-third Lesson.

The Subjunctive Mood (continued).

A. The Future Tense,

§ 115. The Future of the Subjunctive is employed,
instead of the Future indie., whenever you want to ex-
press the uncertainty of some future event:

' Indian coin of about 360 reis or Is. 4A- in value.
^ Old Indian coin of different value. There neeve silver
and copper reaes

The Subjunctive Mood. 365

(a) After the conditional conjunction se:

8e vier if he should come; se nuo desejar mais nada in
case you, don't want anything more ; se Beus quizer
please God.

However: se vejo (se vi) whenever or if I see (saw),
because here se is not conditionally employed and does
not express a future, but a repetition.

(b) After quando when:

Quando vier when he will come ; quando f6rmos a casa
when we are to go home.

(c) After emquanto while, as long as:

Emguanto finex este trabalho . . . Emquanto nao ptcder
contar com augmento de ordenado . . . Ordeno que
nao saia emquanto nao tiver estudado a ligao (cf. B,
§ 118 c).

(d) After segundo, conforme, assim como, assim que
according to, corresponding to, thus, so as to:

Serds ou nao hem succedido, segundo te houveres.

You will or will not succeed according to your mode

of procedure.
Conforme fiserdes, far-vos-hao.
As you do, you will be done to.
Por onde v6s, assim como vires, assim fards.
Filho is, pae serds, assim que fizeres, assim terds.

(e) In relative clauses which refer to something
uncertain in the future:

Aquelle que vier he who may come.

Traga o trabalho que estiver feito bring the work that

will be ready.
Seja que Beus quizer be it as God pleases (God's will

be done).

(f) Often after the relative como as and quern (he)
who (cf. (d)):

Como quizer as you please; como The pareeer as you

think.
Quern boa cama fizer, nella se deitard as you make

your bed, so you lie on it.

§ 116. The Perfect B'uture subj. is employed instead
of the same tense of the indicative, on the same con-
ditions as the Imperfect Future:

Avisem-me quando os eavallos tiverem cJiegado.

Let me know when the horses will have arrived.

366 Lesson 23.

B. Agreement of Tenses.

§ 117. In the Subjunctive Mood the agreement
of tenses is, as a rule, the same as in the Indicative.
Therefore only some exceptions may be noted:

(a) There is no Preterito perfeito definido in the
Subjunctive (corresponding for instance to the verbal
form fni), but only a Preterito perfeito indefinido (cor-
respondingj for instance, to tenho sido-.tenha sido) and a
Preterito imperfeito, which, according to the character
of the clause, may alternate with the former. Ex.:

Example: Elle esteve hontem doente; ndo creio que esti-
■vesse hontem doente.

Example: Elle tern estado (or esteve) doente; nao creio
que tenha estado doente.

§ 118. The Future tenses of the subjunctive are
only employed in the above mentioned cases (see A).
However, it should be noticed that:

(a) An action to be done in the future is expressed
by the present tense, in an accessory clause, if it de-
pends on a verb employed in the present tense of the
principal phrase:

Ordeno que elle vd amanhd.

(b) Such an action depending on a preterito in the
principal clause, must be expressed by the imperfect
subj.:

Ordenei que elle fdsse amanhd.

(c) If the action is relatively future — i.e., if it will
be already past when another, equally future, action is
to be or will have been done^ this future tense is thus
expressed:

Ordeno que nao saia, emquanto ndo tiver estudado a

ligao.
Ordenei que ndo saisse, emquanto ndo tivesse estudado

a ligdo.

§ 119. In certain cases the imperfect may supply
the pluperfect:

Nek) puzesses (= ndo tivesses pdsto) a mdo num velho!
You ought not to have laid your hand upon an old man!:
Quern me dissesse (or diria) isso !
Who might have told me so before!

The Subjunctive Mood. 367

§ 120. On the other hand, the Preterito perfeito
indefinido is sometimes employed instead of the Pluper-
fect subj. (see § HI, N.B. I).

53. Thema.

I cannot believe any longer in your promises unless you
give me the necessary securities. If you had been more thought-
ful, you would have spared us these painful discussions.
A thoughtless man never profits by those lessons which Life is
giving him at any moment, although he has to pay for them
dearly. Also there are many people who remain ignorant even
after having travelled (personal form) through the most cul-
tured countries. They pass, as if they were blindfolded, be-
fore the greatest wonders of Nature or the most beautiful
monuments which Art may have created, if they are not
accompanied by somebody who will open for them their eyes.

Now the thunderstorm is over; as soon as the sun will
come forth, while the rain is still continuing, we shall see a
rainbow. Also if you place yourself before a fountain, with
your back against the sun, you will see forming itself in the
falling drops a bow like the rainbow, which proves that this-
phenomenon is due to the sun. If we want the proof that
the sunlight is formed out of various colours, it will be suffi-
cient that we cut a disc of pasteboard on which the seven
colours are put in strips of paper, disposed from the centre
to the circumference, so as to complete a certain number of
successive spectrums. If then we cause the disc to turn round,
this will appear white. That is the so-called "experiment of
Newton."

64. Leitura.

grande erudito Consiglieri Pedroso, quando presidente
da Sociedade de Geographia de Lisboa, submeteu d delibera^o-
da assembleia com o intiiito de estabelecer um accdrdo luso-
brasiliense uma s^rie de propostas, de que estraimos as seguintes i

Estudar a forma mais adequada de se realisarem con-
gresses periddicos Inso-brasileiros, que devam em prazos a fixar
reunir-se alternadamente em Lisboa ou Porto e no Rio de
Janeiro ou outras cidades brasileiras, com o intiiito de discutir
todos OS assumptos de ordem intellectual e econdmica, que in-
teressam em commum e exclusivamente as duas na9oes, e onde
haja de fazer-se a propaganda das deliberagoes que pelos mes-
mos congressos e pelos govfimos dos dois paises tenham de
ser tomadas a beneficio de ambos os povos respeitando-se
escrupulosamente a independeucia de cada um d'elles, e evi-
tando-se toda e qualquer interferencia, por minima que seja,.

S68 Lesson 24.

na vida interna e no modo de ser dos dois paises respectiva-
jnente.

Bstudar a forma de se ulfcimar um tratado de commereio,
ou antes um largo entendimento commercial entre as duas
na9oes, procurando-se a maneira — ate onde f6r possivel veneer
as difficuldades naturaes inherentes ao assnmpto — de que
uma a outra concedam respectivamente yantagens especiaeij,
que deixem de ser transmittidas aos outros estados, nao sendo
portanto attingidas pela clausula de «na9ao mais favorecida*,
inscripta actualmente nos tratados ja existentes tanto de Portu-
gal, como do Brasil com os paises estrangeiros.

Twenty-fourth Lesson.

The Infinitive.
I. General Use of the Infinitive.

§ 121. Portuguese language distinguishes two
forms of tiie Infinitive:

(a) the impersonal and (b) the personal.

While the former expresses an action quite generally,
without saying by whom, the latter includes in its
ending at the same time the subject.

§ 122. The impersonal or simple infinitive occurs
purely (without preposition) or prepositive (^depending
on a preposition) — e.g.: escrever; de, para, por escrever.
Sometimes it substitutes (with or without the article) a
noun, and may be subject, object, or predicate:

Viver e um beneficio da natureea, commum a todos.
Uducar os filhos e o dever mais sagrado dos paes.
Neb Ihe resta senao pedir esmola.
Gosto de cantar.

6 vida da minha vida

6 vida do meu viver

Viver sem ti nao e vida

Viver sem ti e morrer. (Portuguese folk-lore).

§ 123. The subject-infinitive may also be placed
after the predicate:

Prata e o bem falar, ouro e o bem calar.
Mais vale calar que mal falar.
J6 mdhor ir par aqui.

The Infinitive. 369

grande defeito do rato 6 ser muito guloso
£ fdcil faeer

Bom saber e calar, atS ser tempo de falar.
£ uma vergdnha (uma Idstima) ndio saber ler
A sua velha poUrdna onde Ihe i grata dormir um curto
s6(m)no benefico . . .

§ 124. The Infinitive is employed as a complement:

(a) As a direct complement:

Nao sei (qm) faeer I don't know how (or what) to do.
JEsse homem de Estado quer ser chefe do governo ('= quer

a ehefia) this statesman wants to be the head of

Government.
mie pediu de beber he asked for a draught.

(b) As an indirect complement of verbs or adjectives,
answering to the question: of what, to what, etc.:

homem e capaz de se enganar (= de engano). Elle

prepara-se para fugir (= para a fuga)
Pensa em partir (— na partida).

§ 125. The simple Infinitive is also employed as
an attribute; as such it is preceded by de after nouns
of which it is the complement. In English it is generally
rendered by the gerund. Ex.:

A arte de escrever S jd antiga. A Austria tinha inten-

gao de ficar neutral (the art of writing . . .).
publico nao tern interesse em os ouvir. JEUe fez
mengdo de se retirar (. . . no interest of hearing . . .).
pais estd numa situagdo de se lastimar.

§ 126. The Infinitive employed as a substantive
may express any part of a proposition:

andar cansa walking tires. Era um nao acabar de rir
there was no end of laughing. Soava um correr
de cavallos a trot of horses was heard. Besde o ama-
nhecer ate ao anoitecer from dawn to nightfall.

§ 127. The Personal Infinitive has its own
subject which may or may not be expressed by its
termination. It may also be accompanied by a noun
or pronoun:

Seria justo confessarmos o nosso erro

Nao ha maior irro que nao reconhecer um homem seu

erro (or nao reconhecer em os hmnens . . .).
Ao ouvir OS pdssaros cantarem no bosque . . .

Portuguese ConverBation-Grammar. 24

370 Lesson 24.

§ 128. The subject of the Personal Infinitive may
even be an indefinite, an impersonal one. The action
then is expressed by the third person plural. In Eng-
lish this form may be rendered by the passive voice:

Calei-me por nao me accreditarem I remained silent be-
cause they did not believe me (or because I was not
believed.

Betiro-me para nao me importunarem.

I retired that I might not be bored.

See also the Infinitive as representing a dependent
clause, Lesson 28 § 151.

N.B. I.— As may be seen by the examples^ the Infinitive
may also be accompanied by complements of any kind ; e.g. :

suave decorrer do tempo . . . um longo agonizar . . . o
agraddvel passear pelos campos.

N.B. II. — Generally the substantivated Infinitive is em-
ployed only in the masculine and singular form. With a
small number, however, the employment of the infinitive as a
substantive is so natural that even the plural is formed of
it; e.g.: o jantar dinner, jantares; os dieeres, as poderes, os
deveres, os haveres, os andares, os saberes etc.

56. Thema.

Water is an indispensable element : for men and animals
to drink; to cook foods; to fertilise the ground; to water the
plants ; to produce steam that causes the locomotive to go on
land and the powerful steamers on sea. "What future
awaits us," exclaims Trindade Coelho, "if we do not assist
agriculture? Continuous impoverishment of our race, which will
be undermined by disease; our impossibility of creating
new industries or of developing those already existing, which
all depend on the mother-industry; the impossibility of our hav-
ing commerce, for want of (= for not having) something in which
to exercise it; misery and hunger not very far off, when, in
exchange for products indispensable to Life, we shall have given
the last crumbs." Is there anything more lamentable than
not knowing how to read and to write? Can you tell us
how to reach the railway-station? I have a great pleasure
in being of use to you. Please come along with me;
for I have to go the same way. When do you think of
coming back? I don't know yet, but I hope I shall not
be long.

The Infinitive. 371

56, Leitnra e yersSo.

Bodrigues de Freitas.

Quern estudar com atten^ao as pequenas obras-primas
reunidas n'este volume (Pdginas Avulsas de J. J, Bodriguse
de Freitas), curyar-se-ha per certo com respeito e sympathia
perante o autor. Notara nao so o vasto saber positivo e a
jnst^za das doutrinas expostas, mas tambem as variadas apti-
does literarias, e a arte rara de narrar acontecimentos e exte-
riorizar ideias, com precisao e sobrtedade ... Se em seguida
rememorar os factos principaes da sua vida piiblica, como lente
na Academia polyt^cbnica, eximio publicista, chefe de partido
e deputado, penso que deve ficar impressionado pela nobre
rectidao da sua indole e pela perfeita unidade que sempre
houve entre o seu pensar, o seu dizer e o seu obrar . . .
Ficariam, comtudo, incompletos os breves tra903 lan^ados n'este
singelo monumento, erguido a memdria de Rodrigues de Freitas
pelas maos piedosas que o ampararam e aeariciaram em vida,
se alguem dos poucos que tiveram a Ventura de serem ad-
mittidos na intimidade do seu lar, nao manifestasse a profunda
e consoladora impressao, produzida pela sua personalidade no
trato familiar. Algnem que p6de segnir a evolu9ao das ideias
e dos ideaes de ambos . . . e leu em admiraveis cartas a es-
posa, medita9oes . . . fragmentos e esbo90s infelizmente, mas
tao bellos que provocam um doloroso pesar por o destino nao
Ihe haver concedido tempo e f6r9as para terminar as suas in-
vestiga9oes sociaes, nem para coordenar as suas ideias filoso-
fico-religiosas . . . Quando em vida, em horas de desalento,
procurava alguma ideia sublime que o avigorasse, era na Ora-
9ao de Benjamim Franklin que a encontrava, repetindo:

«01i bondade todo-poderosa, pae misericordioso, guia in-
dulgente. Augmenta o meu saber de sorte que eu reconhe9a
os mens verdadeiros interesses. Firma-me na resolu9ao de
seguir os conselhos que esse me der. Acceita os servi90s que
eu possa prestar a tens outros filhos, como signal linico de
reconheoimento que me e dado offerecer-te pelos favores que
me concedes sem cessar.»

(Carolina MichaSlis de Vasconcellos : preambulo (abbr.) das
«Pdginas avulsas* por J. J. Rodrigues de Freitas.)

24*

372 Lesson 25.

Twenty-fifth Lesson.

The Infinitive (continued).

II. Use of the Personal and the Impersonal Forms
of the Infinitive.

§ 129. Whenever the pure infinitive is employed
in quite a general meaning, without referring to some
subject, the impersonal form is used:

Os preceitos do direito sao : viver honestamente, nao em-
pecer a outrem, e dar o seu a coda um.

§ 130. When the infinitive has its own subject
expressed, the personal form is employed (cf. § 127).

Ao chegarem os fugitivos d planicie, um dos desconhecidos
estava ali.

§ 131. The personal form is employed also when-
ever an action is spoken of which has a special though
unexpressed subject (cf. §128): Passei sent me verem.

§ 132. The impersonal form is employed when-
ever the infinitive has the meaning of an imperative
(cf.§136,b).

§ 133. After the verbs mandar, famer, deixar-se,
the simple and pure infinitive is employed:

Mandei-o entrar. Fal-o-hei subir. Deixou-se prender.

N.B. — If, however, the infinitive is separated from the
subordinating verb, the personal form may be used : Mandeis-o
em dia e Jtora marcados seguirem o seu caminho.

§ 134. The impersonal form of the infinitive is
used after the following verbs:

Acabar de, andar a, cessar de, comeQar a (or de), con-
tinuar a, costumar, chegar a, desejar and the verbs
of similar meaning deixar de, entrar a, dar em,
estar a, ser feito para, haver de, ir a, langar-se a,
metter-se a, ser mandado, ousar, poder, por-se a,
querer, recusar, saber, soer, ter de, tratar de, tornar
a, vir a. (Also for these verbs see § 133, N.B.)

§ 135. In any other cases the personal as well as
the impersonal forms may be employed, considering
always that the use of the one or the other is subject

The Infinitive. 373

to the clearness, the emphasis, and the harmony of the
clause. Ex. :

Accrescentava que as noticias recebidas do Alentejo
continuanam a ser favordveis. Ensinou a ser reis
osreis do mundo. Par esta pergunta nos ensina a
sermos curiosos. Obriga os cercados a lidar. Obri-
gdra os Mossulmanos a concederem-lhe ... As aves
aqudticas pareciam, nos sens voos incertos, ora vaga-
rosos, ora rdpidos, folgarem com os primeiros dias
da estagdo dos amores. Viam-se lampejar as armas
e ajuntarem-se ondas de vultos humanos.

III. The Independent Infinitive.

§ 13G. The Infinitive is employed independently:

(a) "When substituting a noun — e.g.:

bem faeer floresce, e todo o mal perece.
Mais cusia mal fazer, que bem fazer.
Bem parece o bem fazer (see § 123 — 125).

(b) When substituting an imperative:

Companheiros, despedir esta noite da montanha e das
tristezas, e apparelhar para dmanha ms seguirdes !

N.B. — In this case the subject (tu, vds) is never expressed.

(c) In exclamations expressing surprise, disillusion,
astonishment:

Ndo haver quern me salve! Pensar que tudo seria
em vao!

57. Thema.

To err is human. To obey is the duty of youth. Rea-
ding, writing and arithmetic are the most elementary attain-
ments which ought to be taught to everybody and which all
ought to learn. The strong beating of his heart prevented
him from going fast. To recognise the limits of one's knowledge
is to be wise. It is not virtue never to err, but avoiding
error as much as possible may well be called so. It is easy
to blame, but difficult to make it better. I want to see this
work finished, for it is easily to be done (ef. § 146, 2 ; N.B. III).
Already you have often promised to improve yourself, yet I do
not yet see that you have succeeded in doing so. It must be
acknowledged that in the last decennium the women's rights
movement has learnt how to convince the righteously and justly
thinking people of the justice of its existence and advocacy.

374 LesBon 26.

Eowing is a good exercise, as, by putting the arms to strong
movement, it obliges us to breathe deeply. For it is not
enough for us to breathe good air and well nourish ourselves;
it is also necessary to take some exercise and to be clean.

58. leitura e versao.

(a) rate e um animal muito interessante e engragado ; e
nao obstante (elle) ser o mais inc6mmodo e atrevido dos nossos
visinhos, costumamos gostar d'elle, porque a sua viveza e in-
telligencia nao deixam de fazel-o sympathico. rate seria at6
de estimar, se nao fSsse tao guloso e prejudicial; pois a.\6m
de devorar tudo o que topa, e de furtar para levar aos filhos,
pareee que tern o prazer de destruir o que pode alcanQar, e
nao ha nada que resista ao seu dente afiado. A brincar, o
rate domestico da cabriolas muito engra9adas e sabe tomar
posigoes e fazer momices que lembram os dos palha90S. E
para ir ter com uma gulodioe, tanto 6 capaz de ir pelo chao
como por uma corda. Apanhado e mettido n'nma gaiola, a
principio assusta-se muito, ignorando o que Ihe vae sueceder.

Task: The preceding to be put in the plural: Os ratos
saojdmmaes muito inter essantes, etc.

(b) Um leao dignon-se travar conhecimento com uma lebre
muito l^pida. A lebre perguntou-lhe, se era verdade que um
misero gallo pudesse com o seu canto afagentar facilmente
um leao. leao respondeu que era verdade sem duvida, e
que nao era raro terem 03 grandes animaes quasi sempre al-
gum fraco. E assim, por exemplo, ja teria ella ouvido dizer
que o grunhir de um porco causava assombro e terror a um
elephante. A lebre interrompeu-o, dizendo que era agora que
ella comprehendia a razao porque as lebres se assustavam
tanto a ouvirem ladrar um cao.

Twenty-sixth Lesson.

The Infinitive (continued).

IV. The Dependent InflnitiTe.

A. Without a preceding preposition.

§ 137. Those verbs which according to their meaning
require to be completed by another verb with the same
subject, are followed by the simple (impersonal) infinitive:
Ninguem p6de fugir d morte.

The Infinitive. 375'

With the simple infinitive and without a prepositibn
are employed:

Poder, parecer, cnstumar, soer (to be in the habit)
saber (in the meaning of "to be able''), ousar, nuo
duvidar, recear, propdr^se, tencionar, emprehender,
intentar, meditar, projectar and similar verbs, tentar,
recusar, merecer; — e.g.:

A lingua bi-partida da vibora agita-se too furiosamente
fdra da bocca, que parece phospkorejar e despedir
faiscas.

macaco pdde receber uma mrdadeira educagao.

Propoz-se tentar faeel-o, sent bem saber projectar um
piano.

N.B. — In relative clauses the infinitive may sometimes
precede the personal verbal form;'— e.g.: . . . cortando o esteiro
mais abaixo qiie ser possa.

§ 138. Without a preposition the infinitive is em-
ployed also after the following verbs:

vSr, ouvir, sentir, deixar, mandar, faser though the

infinitive has not the same subject with these verbs,

but refers to their object; — e.g.:
cum cantar = I heard (somebody) sing.
Ouviram-no falar; manddram-me entrar; (in passive

form: elle foi ouvido falar, fui mandado entrar).

N.B. I. — After deixar, mandar, fazer, mr, ouvir the ac-
tive infinitive may be understood in a passive meaning; then
its subject is governed by par or de. In English the infinitive
is rendered by one of the participles: Deixei-me tyrannizar
por ella I allowed myself to be tyrannised by her. principe
fazia-se respeitar (made himself respected) dos vassallos.

Ex.: Ouvimos hater o tambor, toear a rebeca, cortar a
madeira; vimos arder a casa We heard the drum beaten, the
violin played, the wood sawn; we saw the house burning.

It may be noticed that when these verbs are followed, be-
side the infinitive, by an accusative of the third person, this
is substituted by the dative:

Eu vejo-lhes verier Idgrimas tristes (instead of: eu as
vejo . . .).

§ 139. Most of the verbs of saying and thinking
(verhos sensitivos e declaratives), as pensar, julgar, contar,
decla/rar, affirmar, negar, duvidar, perdoar, dizer, entender,

376 Lesson 26.

etc., may be followed by tbe pure infinitive, instead of
a clause depending on que; — e.g.;

Julgas saber (= que sabes); affirmou nao haver perigo
(= que nao havia p.)-
Hule. — The infinitive is generally simple when
its action relates to the same subject as that of the
capital verb.

N.B. — After some verbs the infinitive may be preceded
by de;— e.g.:

Jurou exterminar (or de exterminar) os inimigos.

§ 140. The transitive verbs querer, preferir, desejar,
gostar, aborrecer and those analogous are followed by an
infinitive pure and simple whenever both actions have
the same subject: JDes^o entrar.

(The subjects being different, a dependent sentence
with que is employed instead: Desejo que elle entre.)

N.B. — Desejar may be followed by d!e : desejo deir; but
desejo ir is more popular.

§ 141. The transitive verbs diligenciar, procurar,
evitar, conseguir, obter, decidir, resolver and those ana-
logous are followed by the pure infinitive, whether the
two actions have or have not the same subject:

Oonsegui ser premiado; consegui ser elle premiado.
I succeeded in getting a prize ; I obtained a prize
for him.

N.B. — In the latter case you may say: consegui que elle
fosse premiado.

§ 142. The infinitive pure and simple is employed
in final clauses after the verbs ir and vir; the subjects
of these verbs and of the infinitive are the same:

Fui procurd-lo I went to call on him. Veio ver-me he
came to see me. Indo encontrd-lo a dormir ... to find him
asleep. Ir ter or vir ter (com) — to turn to, to call on, to
fall in (with). Esta rua vae ter a ponte. Fui ter com elle;
veio ter comigo.

§ 143. The expression nao fazer sendo is equally
followed by the infinitive pure and simple:

Ndo faz sendo brincar he does not do anything but
play.

The Infinitive. 377

§ 144. The pure infinitive follows as an accusative
complement the verbs ser, ter por origem, dar em re-
sultado, ter por consequencia, haver por galardoo {= to
get as a prize) and those analogous [N.B. here in its
personal form], as also the verb fazer in its meaning
"to cause." Ex.:

Isto deu em resultado serem todos castigados.

The result of it was that all of them were punished.

Se brincares com o lume, terd isso por consequencia

queimares-te.
If you play with the fire, the consequence will be your

burning yourself.
Tao grande e a sua desgraga que fas chorar as pedras.
So great is her misfortune that it causes the stones to

weep.

§ 145. Without any preposition or with de the in-
finitive follows the verbs dever (= must, ought) and
dignar-se (to deign, to be pleased). Ex.:

mies deviam (de) contenfar-se.

They ought to be satisfied.

Dignae-vos, senJior, (de) ouvir o vosso servo.

Be pleased, Lord, to hear thy servant.

§ 146. The pure infinitive (subject) follows certain
adjectives and substantives employed as a predicate
(see § 123), such as: preciso, fdcil, claro, difficil, jusfo,
possivel, bom, melhor, vergonha, Idstima etc. — e.g.: e fdcU,
foi preciso, sera melhor sdir (but cf. § 148, 3, N.B. Ill),
as also the impersonal verbs, such as:

importa it is important custa-me it is painful to me

convem it is convenient nuo custa nada it is not diffi-

cult.

§ 147. The pure infinitive is employed after some
prepositions, such as:

por (e.g.: ndo saiu por ndo ter que vestir he did not
go out, because he had nothing to put on).

sem (e.g. : sem pestanejar without twinkling).

para (e.g. : para ndo o melindrar that I may or might
not offend him . . .)

. . . para elle me dizer that he may or might tell me.

378 Lesson 26.

59. Thema.

On the Education of Children.

There will be no lack of those who will laugh on hearing
speak of education of a child only three or four years old.
Nothing, however, (is) more serious and necessary than to
understand how to profit by the sincerity of this age, which
does not yet know how to lie, in order to recognise the future
man in the child.

It offers the best opportunity for improving all good
qualities of character— yea, even to make the best of its
defects, to change them into virtues, without twisting the will
or wronging the individuality. From the infant-school, where
the mother had placed the child, because (see § 147), it
was impossible to have it at home from its third (tr. : since
the third) year, it passes over to attend the public schools.
It has its compendiums which speak {a with inf.) to it of things
that it had not the slightest idea of. Each step is a diffi-
culty (see § 147) to be vanquished ; each matter a novelty the
meaning of which the teacher, amongst so many pupils requir-
ing his attention, has had no time to explain to it. With
tears in its eyes and the book in its hands, the child will
seek her whom it loves best, that she may (see § 147) ex-
plain to it what it cannot understand. And the poor mother
will not be able to help it, but will have to confess her igno-
rance. How often when finding the child nodding over a book
which it does not understand, would not the mother have
the wish to take it out of its hands and by clear reading
and intelligent explanation teach it how to understand the
meaning! But the "poor mother" cannot do so (fut.), because
she also does not know. And from day to day the conviction
of its mother's inferiority will take root in the child's mind
in the same measure as it acquires (see § 148, 2) knowledge
and develops its intelligence.

(Anna de Castro Osorio: As mtdheres portuguesas).

60. Leitnra e versao.

A <iignordncia> do povo portugues.
Ninguem de boa-f6 contesta ser o povo portuguSs igno-
rante. Todavia nao devemos exaggerar as consequSncias so-
ciaes d'este facto, m6smo porque nao acredite o senhSr F. que
o pOvo franc6s saiba chimiea, o p6vo inglfis resolva equacjoes
e o povo allemao discorra sobre metaphysica. Se o cuida,
illude-se oompletamente ; e de saber l6r e escrever, 6 certo
que esse 6 meio caminho andado para o povo adquirir a ver-

The Infinitive. 379

dade, mas 6 tambem meio caminho andado para a turba se
imbuir de quanta mentirola e de quanta prot^rvia goza do
h6je commum privil^gio da letra redonda. A ignor9,ncia e
mal, mas a meia-sciSncia ^ peor; e, nas condi^oes gen^ricas so-
ciaes actuaes, nunca o povo pode attingir a plenitude do saber.
Nao tern tempo para estudar, nem vagar nem disposi9ao nas
horas livres que Ihe restam, desde que sa(h)e moido do sen
trabalho exhaustive. — Assim, fdr^a Ihe 6 recorrer aos e con-
fiar nos profissionaes ; confiar nos lettrados, nos publicistas e
nos politioos ... A independencia do espirito segnira tambem.
OS tramites de seus progresses. Conv6m nao desatender ao
facto significativo de que em Portugal o registo civil tern side
adoptado de preferSncia pelo proletariado fabril, e 6 de notar
o avance civilisatorio da nossa gente nas artes e nas indus-
trias . . . Por o facto de o p6vo estar desconfiado, nao se
segue que elle seja insusceptivel de enthusiasmo . . . Por-
tanto, resumindo, nao me pareceram procedentes aquellas accu-
sa9oes verberadas contra o povo portuglies pelo sr. P., o qual
se mostrou desgostoso a ponto de dizer, alto e bom som, que,
emquanto uns nascem para ser ricos e outros para ser sSbios,
elle nascfira para levar panoada e dar pouca.

(Bruno: Os modernos publicistas portugufises.)

Twenty-seventli Lesson.

The Infinitive (continued).

The Dependent Infinitive (continued).

B. With the preceding preposition de the infinitive
is employed:

§ 148. 1. After substantives to which it is a com-
plement (see § 125).

2. After many verbs of which it forms the com-
plement, such as:
acdbar to finish, having just comegar, principiar to begin

done deixar to forbear

accusar to accuse desculpar-se to excuse

acertar to hit encarregar(-se) to take upon

admirar-se to wonder oneself

advertir to inform esquecer-se to forget

affligir-se to grieve excusar-se to withdraw

alegrar-se to rejoice fugir (de or a) to fly from

cessar to cease gabar-se to boast

380 Lesson 27.

gostar to like provir to come from

haver to be obliged parar to stop

impedir to hinder queixar-se to complain of

lembrar-se to remember ter de to be obliged

pedir to ask trata-se the question is

prometer to promise vangloriarse to boast.

3. After adjectives, also followed by the genitive,
such as:

dvido eager digno worthy

cansado tired dlfficil difficult

capae capable fdcil easy

certo sure impaciente impatient

cidso, dumento jealous insacidvel insatiable

coniente satisfied raro rare

descontente dissatisfied susceptivel susceptible.
desejoso desirous

N.B. 1. — Some adjectives, expressing cause or design, may
be followed by the infinitive preceded by ^or;— e.g.: impa-
ciente, (des)contente, causado por . . .

N.B. 2. — Some infinitives preceded by demay be employed
in the meaning of an adjective ending by -vel; — e.g.: Pare-
ciam rmnos de temer (= temivel). E'de presumir (= presu-
mivel). Foi acgao muito de louvar (= louvdvel).

N.B. 3.— Certain adjectives (as fdcil, difficil, raro), when
adverbially employed, are followed by the infinitive preceded
by de, the substantive determined by the adjective being the
object of the infinitive; — e.g.:

Enigmas difficeis de decifrar (= de serem dedfrados)

riddles difficult to be guessed.
Compare, however: com esta naturesa i fdul crearem-se
OS poUas — here fdcil is a predicate.

N.B. 4.— In some cases the infinitive thus employed is
still followed by a complement: sdo fructos de enl&oar olhos
fruits to gladden the eyes.

Eram lindas de faeer inveja they were so beautiful as
to cause envy.

4. In clauses of circumstance after certain pre-
positions conjunctionally employed:

alem de besides antes de before

afim de that a panto de so that

d forga de with mu'di apesar de in spite of

The Infinitive. 381

depots de after perto de near to

em vee de instead of por falta de by want of

longe de far from so^ condigao de on condition

that.
Como sr. Theophilo Braga alem de haver dassificado
em gSneros poUicos as composites mcluidas no Gampo
de Flares — as classificou tambem por epocas chro-
noldgicas . . .

5. After e— e.g.:
j$ de crer (advertir, mencionar etc.^ que . . .

61. Thema.
Dear Friend,—

Weary of travelling, I have just come back to my Penates
(recolher a Penates), dissatisfied with myself for having stayed
away for so many months that I ought to have been more
profitably employed. Yet such is our nature. We pine for
the opportunity to scamper through the world, with an in-
satiable appetite for seeking excitements we feel to be lacking
in the cramped surroundings of our home. And we go to
find — what? A climate that does not agree (diger) with
our nervous system, nor with our northern customs; a bed
fit only to break our bones, after having tired them by con-
tinual walking; people as indifferent to our presence as we are
insensible to their company; a hotel room destitute of every-
thing that hitherto seemed impossible to be done without. Only
in our home have we the opportunity of enjoying the calm
and the happiness that we vainly seek away from its doors.

But you will be surprised, dear friend, to hear thus
speak a man who, although having already finished his thirty-
seventh year, yet remains a bachelor. I know, of course,
that you consider me a theorist whose theories are all the
more difficult to understand, the longer he is in bringing
about their realisation. But I am determined to go on
theorising. It has occurred to me to invite you, my good
friend, to come here and stay some time with me, instead of
going to Italy. Also I hope you will bring your family. We
shall pass a couple of weeks so agreeably that they will com-
pensate me for all the vicissitudes of my travels, and I am
confident that you will have no cause to regret having ac-
cepted my invitation. Don't delay in letting me know that
you will come, and at the same time tell me the day and
hour I may expect you. I am longing to see you here.

Please remember me to your family.

Your sincere friend,
Henry.

382 Lesson 28.

62. Leitura e versao.
A respiragao.

homem precisa respirar para viver.

Vamos estudar no seguinte as vias da respira9ao.

Todo o sangue do corpo, depois de circular por este,
volta pelas veias ao coraQao, donde torna a partir, saindo do
coragao pelas art^rias. No seu giro pelo corpo, o sangue vae
deixando por este a sua substancia. A substancia e dada ao
sangue pelos alimentos e tambem pelo ar^ ar antra pela
bOca 6 pelo nariz e vae aos pulmoes. sangue, depois de
percorrer o c6rpo do homem, e de deixar n'este a sua sub-
stancia, passa pelos pulmoes onde recebe mais ar. ar que
ahi recebe torna a dar ao sangue substancia, para este a es-
palhar outra vez por todas as partes do nosso organismo.

sangue quando chega aoa pulmoes vae quasi escuro.
Quando sae dos pulmoes, depois de ser ahi bafejado pelo ar,
torna a ser vermelho-claro, isto 6, torna a carregar-se de sub-
stancia para ir espalhar pelo corpo. sangue nao para de
circular. Se parasse, o homem morria. Como 6 o cora^ao que
faz andar o sangrie dentro dos canaes, se o cora9ao deixasae de
bater, o sangue deixava de andar, e sobrevinha a morte.

ar, depois de entrar pela boca e pelo nariz, vae em seguida
passar para o tubo da garganta chamado larynge; e como este
tube 6 continuado por outro chamado trachea, o ar segue pela
trachea e chega aos pulmoes. Como os pulmoes sao dois, a
trachea diyide-se na raiz da garganta em dois ramos, cada um
dos quaes vae dar a seu pulmao. Esses dois ramos em que
a trachea se reparte, chamam-se bronchios, e estes penetram
pelos pulmoes: — penetrando, o ar que vae dentro d'elles, en-
contra-se com o sangue nos pulmoes e ahi o bafeja. Bafejado,
o sangue torna a ficar vermelho, porque o ar transmittiu-lhe
parte dos seus elementos, os quaes elle vae em seguida espa-
lhar pelo corpo, para o medrar e dar-lhe vida.

(Trindade Coelho: Terceiro lAvro de Leitura.)

Twenty-eiglitli Lesson.

The Infinitive (continued).
The Dependent Infinitive (continued).
C. With the preceding preposition a.
§ 149. The infinitive preceded by a expresses:
1. When following a verb, the manner or some
circumstance of its action:

The Infinitive. 38S

Yiemos a correr we came running.
Disse isso a rir he said so laughing.
Pediu-m'o a chorar he asked me crying for it.
Deteve-se a examinar um quadro he stopped to examine

a picture.
JEncontrei-a a dormir I found her asleep.

2. When following a substantive, a design, the
object of which is the same substantive — e.g.:

Havia grandes difficuldades a veneer there were great

difficulties to be overcome.
Ha muitas peguenas industrias caseiras a cuUivar e a
fazer resurgir no nosso pais there are a great many
small home-made industries in our country to be
cultivated and revived.
N.B. — Sometimes the infinitive joined by a or de to a
verb is equivalent to a verbal adjective and must be render-
ed by the past participle:

Uma occasido a nao perder an occasion not to be lost.
caminho a trilhar the way to be taken.
E'uma fonte de receita muito de aproveitar it is a source
of income very much to be profited by.

3. In abbreviated clauses the infinitive preceded by
a serves to express an admission or condition:

A ser isto verdade (= se isto fdsse porventura verdade)
nao tomariamos a falar-lhe. — A acreditd-lo teria
Jmvido uma enchente.

4. ihe innnitive is pri

eceded by a alter the loUowmg

verbs :

animar-se a

chegar a ser . . .

apparelhar-se a (or para)

tornar a fazer

anticipar-se a

atrever-se a

estimular-se a

preparar-se a

excitar-se a

abalangdr-se a

principiar a^

langar-se a

comegar a see (§ 148, 2)

obrigar a

appressar-se -a

aventurar-se a

tardar a or em

metter-se a

continuar a

por-se a

hdbilitar a

resolver-se a

aprender a

decidir-se a

entrar a

determinar-se a

haUtuar a

amnuir a

' But, principiar or comesar por (dizer) to begin by (saying).

384 LeBson 28.

coneorrer a ajudar a

cooperar a entreter-se a

ensinar a attender-se a

autorisar a convidar a

accostumar-se a vir a

coslumar a levar a

conde(m)nar a arrojar a
comegar a

as well as after all those which may be followed instead
by an abstract noun preceded by a— e.g.:

Se continuasses (nao tardasses, principiasses, entrasses,
te appressasses, tornasses, te dbalangasses) a estudar ;
chegarias a ser instruido. AbalanQou-se a luctar (= d
lucta) ; resolveram-se a partir (d partida). Quern dd
seu antes de morrer, apparelha-se a hem soffrer.

5. The infinitive preceded by a follows the verbs
of movement:

Corri a salvd-lo I hurried to save him.

Arrojou-se a deter o cavallo he rushed to stop the horse.

N.B. — Cf. the verbs ir and vir which, being employed
as auxiliary verbs of the periphrastical form, may be followed
by the gerund instead (see § 96 and § 142 : use of these
verbs with the pure infinitive).

6. The infinitive preceded by a after the verbs
estar and andar, equally auxiliary verbs of the peri-
phrastical conjugation, as well as Hear, passar, etc. in-
dicates essentially manner or duration and may be
supphed by the gerund (see § 151):

Ando a estudar or ando estudando.
Estas coisas ficam a pertencer or ficam pertencendo ao
seu foro Intimo.

7. The infinitive preceded by a follows the verbs
ensinar, autorisar, convidar, etc., being itself followed by
the direct object:

Ensinou o com a faeer habilidades he taught the dog to

perform tricks.
Convidou-a a dangar he invited her to dance.
Autorisou-me a publicar as cartas he authorised me to

publish the letters.

8. In an analogous way the infinitive with a joins
the verb dar, expressing, however, an action practised

The Infinitive. 385

by the dative complement of dar; and the verb por,
expressing the action practised by the accusative com-
plement of por.

Dar a alguem vma coisa a provar {alguem is dative
complement of dar and subject of provar).

Por OS filhos a estudar (ps filhos is accusative comple-
meut of por and subject of estudar).

§ 149. The infinitive may not only be preceded
by a or de, but by any other preposition {em, por, para,
com, sem, antes de, depois de, apesar de, n&o obstante
etc.), having the same meaning as abstract nouns,
governed by these prepositions — e.g.:

Seconsiderou depois de ter falado aos paes e antes de se

comprometer . . .
He changed his mind after having spoken to his parents

and before engaging himself.

Entrei sem me verem I entered without being seen.
Pedi-lhe para me acompanhar I asked him to accom-
pany me.

Ella estava aborrecida por nao saber como (or em que)

empregar o tempo.
She felt bored, as she did not know how to spend her time.
Deixdmo-nos ficar por jd nao haver tempo de alcangar

combdio.
We stayed because there was not time to catch the

train.

Com ser velho nao deixa de sentir com a gente moga.
Though he be old, he is able to feel with young people.
Andamos (or estdmos) mortos por ir para fdra.
We are dying to go abroad.

§ 150. After the verbs consistir, insistir, perseverar,
persistir, teimar, porfiar, hesitar, tardar, attentar, confiar
and those analogous the following infinitive is preceded
by em.

Persistem (or teimam) em resistir they persist in resisting.
Hesitei em confiar n'elle I hesitated to trust him.

§ 151. The infinitive is employed for the English
gerund and to shorten circumstantial clauses:

(a) The verbs perdoar and agradecer are followed
by the personal infinitive without preposition, and not
by a dependent clause with que:

386 Lesson 28.

Perdoou-lhes o haverem-no offendido he pardoned them

their having offended him.
Agradecerem-nos o te-los protegido they thanked us for

(our) having protected them.

N.B.— The same is to be said of the impersonal verb
haver; — e.g.:

Ndo ha (= nao e possivel) valer-lhe there is no ex-
celling him.

(b) The subject being the same in the principal
and the dependent clause:

instead of a personal form
with the conjunctions:
afim de que
para que
sem que
antes que
depois que

de modo (fdrma, maneira) que
por que

the infinitive is employed
after :
afim de
para
sem

antes de
depois de

de modo (fdrma, maneira) a
por.

N.B. — So it would be wrong to say: GuUivar a terra
de maneira a produzir, as terra in the first clause is the
complement: cuUivar a terra de maneira queprodusa would be
right.

§ 152. Instead of a dependent clause with que
the personal infinitive without preposition may be
employed after those transitive verbs expressing ad-
mission, permission, suffering and those of opposite
meaning, such as : conceder, permit(t)ir, admit(t)ir, prohibir,
sof(f)rer, tolerar etc.:

Prohibiu entrarem as navios de noite (instead of: pro-
hibiu que os navios entrassem he prohibited the ships
coming in at night.

63. Thema.

Women as SilJcworm-breeders in Portugal.
If at some not very distant date the industry of silk
manufacture in Portugal should happen to be revived it will
be due to the initiative of Mrs. Anna de Castro Osdrio, the
excellent writer, who is always eager to see her country
prosperous. Her idea is at the same time to provide working
women with better facilities for gaining a livelihood, an object
which the promoter of this industry never fails to keep in mind.

Construction. 387

This lady has recently explained to the president and
other aldermen of the municipal council of Setiibal how she
was led to conceive the idea referred to, and has requested
the assistance and protection of the council. She does not
deny that there are some difficulties, but she affirms that the
obstacles are not great, and hopes to overcome them with the
aid of the authorities.

She is of opinion that the industry of the sericulture
(i.e. of the breeding and selection of silk-worms) is one that
the women of Portugal must not allow to die out. With
five weeks' work of so slight a nature that it is rather a
pleasant distraction than an irksome task, each housewife or
daughter could realise a profit which to thie one would provide
assistance towards the house-rent, and to the other additional
funds for increasing the stock of clothing. To the young
ladies this latter is generally a matter of great importance;
and with some reason, indeed, for their greatest concern is
how to make themselves appear most beautiful and attractive.
The beauty of women is a tribute to Art and Nature which
a cultured people should not allow to depreciate.

64. Leitnra e versao.

A mulher portuguesa como seri(ci)cuUdra.

Se esta indiistria se desenvolver em Setiibal, como 6 de
esperar, como indiistria caseira que deve ser, ali mesmo sera
montado um filatorio dos que o gov6rno vae montar official-
mente. N'esse filatorio terao trabalho algumas mulheres, o
que vem a ser ainda uma grande vantigem, visto as fabricas
de sardinha em que andam a trabalhar, soffrerem ja muitas
crises de falta de peixe e as operarias sentirem a falta de
trabalho, que 6 a mais dolorosa das faltas. TSdos aquelles
que desejarem experimentar esta indiistria, deverao dirigir-se
a presidente da Liga Kepnblicana das Mulheres Portuguesas,
a acima mencionada escriptora e propagandista D. Anna de
Castro Os6ri6; porque a iniciativa pertenee a esta benem^rita
associa9ao que por todo o pais estd levantando (or a levantar)
espirito da mulher portugu6sa e fazendo-a entrar no caminho
do dever, apontando-lhe o trabalho como a linica fonte da
independencia e do brio individual.

Do norte ao sul do pais muitas s6cias da Liga se estao
preparando (or a preparar) para iniciarem nas suas casas esta
indiistria. que e necessario e saber cada uma a por^ao de
sirgo que p6do criar para se fazer a dictribui9ao das fdlhas
das amoreiras cedidas pela Camara e tomarem os criadores as
responsabilidades exigidas pelas esta^oes officiaes, sendo a

388 Lesson 29.

principal a de se coiDpromet(t)erem a destrnir toda a semente
que nao seja seleccionada, isto 6 : a escolhida e fornecida pela
esta^ao official. intelligente professor da Escola Liberal de
Setnbal de boa vontade se presta a fazer na escola uma cri-
a9ao de experiencia, cnjo prodncto reverter^ a favdr da mfisma,
que tanto necessita de nnmerario para se poder sastentar e
poder continuar a exercer a saa missao.

Twenty-ninth Lesson.

Construction. Collocagao.

§ 153. The simplest construction is: beginning by
the subject and what relates thereto; then the predi-
cate and its extensions; the determinative follows the
word it determines (e.g.: desejoso de gloria); the ac-
cusative complement generally precedes the dative.

Interrogative clauses begin with the interrogative
word — i.e., the thing asked for— and what pertains to
it; the dependent clauses by the conjunction or a rela-
tive pronoun — e.g.:

Sao altas as drvores que ha no jardim? (The height
of the trees is asked for.)

§ 154. These general rules have numerous ex-
ceptions, based on the harmony of the speech or the
emphasis bestowed on one or the other part of it. In
the preceding lessons these exceptions, as well as those
rules of construction inseparable from the subject spoken
of, have been mentioned.

It may still be noticed that an absolutely employed
participle precedes its noun. Ex.:

Arrancada uma batateira, o pi trae agarrados vdrias

batatas.
If a potato-plant is pulled out, its root bears various

potatoes clinging to it.

Yet when the participle is preceded by em, the
subject may be placed before:

Em a mina rebentando or em rebentando a mina.
Bemark. — Though the gemnd generally precedes the
noon, it may in elevated speech also be placed behind; — e.g.:
A revohtgdo abriu as porias da historia, ap(p)elando para
pom, fechou-as, para a povo ap(p)elando.

Construction. 389

65. Thema.

Preparation of Olive-oil.

Olive-oil is extracted from the olive, which is the fruit
of the olive-tree. In some regions the olive is beaten down
with a pole (= varejar); in others, it is picked by hand.
After having been picked, the olive goes to the olive-pit,
where it remains for some time. While it is still in the pit,
the olive secretes (= escorrer) a watery fluid (uma agua-
dilha), dark and bitter, called olive-water (alpixe). Prom the
pit the olive is taken to the olive-crushing mill, which is a
sort of round stone tank in which one, two or three vertical
wheels, equally of stone, are moving, generally dragged by
an ox.

In the crushing-mill the olive is crushed. The pulp as well
as the stone of the olive is completely ground (= desfager),
forming a dark paste. On the surface of this paste, when still
in the mill, a great quantity of oil appears. This oil, con-
stituting the first virgin oil, may be taken off (= recolher-se).
From the mill, the paste is taken in wooden porringers
to the olive-press (Jtar or lastro de lagar). In the press the
paste is put into baskets (= ceira), disposed one above the
other. Upon the topmost basket are placed some blocks
(= maddro) and then is lowered (= fazer baixar) upon the
latter the so-called cross-bar of the press (viga do lagar),
which descends by means of an axle-tree in a spiral line or
in form of a screw (= fuss). This screw of the olive-press
ends in its lower extremity by a big stone weight. In pro-
portion to its coming down, the cross-bar presses (peripbra-
stical form) upon the blocks which cover the baskets and
squeezes the paste contained in them.

66. Leitnra e versao.

Assim espremida, a massa larga um li'qnido. Este liqoido
6 ainda azeite virgem que, seguindo por uma calha ou sulco
aberto no lar, vae cair dentro de uma talha de pedra. Ao
lado d'esta talha ha outra tambem de pedra, e as duas sao
ligadas superiormente por um sulco ou rfigo; mas o azeite
virgem flea todo na talha que estd em commnnica5ao directa
com o lar. Em seguida, faz-se elevar a viga do lagar, e as
ceiras ficam d'este modo desapertadas. Desapertadas as
ceiras, a massa de cada uma 6 caldeada, isto 6, intimamente
misturada com dgua a ferver. Caldeadas todas as ceiras, de
novo tornam a ser espremidas como o fOram da primeira vez.
Espremidas, o liquido que ellas largam segue pela calha do

390 Lesson 29.

lar para a primeira talha, onde encontra o azeite virgem que
a massa escorreu quando foi apertada a primeira vez.

Com azeite proveniente do segundo aperto das ceiras
vae misturada uma por9ao de agua, que 6 a dgua que caldeou
a massa; e como o azeite vem sempre d tona da agua, o li-
qnido logo que cae na talha reparte-se em duas camadas : em
baixo a agua, a qual se chama alpixe ; e em cima ou a tona
do alpixe, o azeite. Entre o azeite e o alpixe ficam as borras
do azeite. —

As borras sao as Kzes do azeite, e vao-se formaudo na
primeira talha, entre o fundo do azeite e o cimo do alpixe.
A medida que o azeite se vae escoando para a segunda talha,
as borras vao subindo na primeira; e tomariam para a se-
gunda, se lagareiro nao tivesse o cnidado de as fazer depo-
sitary isto 6, de as fazer baixar ao fundo da primeira talha. —
Depois de bem assentes, as borras ainda apresentam a super-
fioie uma certa quantidade de azeite, embora impure. Este
azeite das borras 6 aproveitado: serve para a candeia; para
untar os eixos dos carros; e para varios fins industriaes: fa-
brico de sabao etc.

Depois de completamente espremidas as ceiras, o que fica
dentro i o baga90. bagaijo 6 o residuo da pelle e do ca-
ro(jo das azeitonas. baga(;o da azeitoua serve para alimen-
ta^ao dos porcos e das gallinhas, e ainda de combustivel. No
proprio lagar, a dgua para caldear a massa 6 tambem aque-
cida com lume de baga^o. Este arde muito bem por ser oleoso.
Para tddas estas opera9oes do fabrico do azeite ha hoje mecha-
nismos muito perfeitos.

391

Supplement.

Idioms.

Sou inglis. F" J5" i por-

tuguis?
Sou, sim, senhor. Para irni

estrangeiro F" E'^ falla ra-

zoavelmente o portuguis.
Coma se chama isso? Como

se diz . . .?
Isso nao se p6de; isso nao

p6de serf
Entao que tern ? Nao estd bom ?

Isso jpassa; nao S nada.
Nao passou hem a noite ? Olhe,

que nao tern boa cava.
Passei a noite em claro.
Nao se dd hem aqui^ Estra-

nha clima^

Nao estranho, nao, senhor. Bou-
rne hem aqui.

E gosta de cd estar ?

Gosto muito. Estou mdrto por
vir tdda a cidade, tddo opais.

Onde e a pardgem mais prdxi-
ma do carro eUctrico?

Qual i caminho mats curto
para Id?

Nao ha pardgem mais perto ?

Julgava que houvesse uma im-
mediata ao hotel.

I am English. Are you a

Portuguese ?
Yes. For a foreigner you speak

Portuguese rather well.

What is this called ? How do

you say . . . ?
That can't be (done)!

What's the matter with you?

Aren't you well?
It will pass over ; it's nothing.
Didn't you sleep well? You

do not look well, indeed.
I passed the night awake.
Don't you feel well here?

Does not the climate agree

with you?
It is not that. Indeed, the

climate agrees with me.
And do you like to stay here ?
I do indeed. I am dying to

see the whole town, the

whole country.
Where is the next stopping-
place of the electric car?
Which is the nearest way

to it?
Is there no stopping-place

nearer ?
I thought there was one

next to the hotel.

392

Sapplement.

AU logo! ate hreve! atS d se-

mana (que vem) ! atid prdxi-

ma sexta-feira!
Nao faltava nada que eu per-

desse o combdio.
Deixe vSr isso!
Jd estd de caminho.
Estou com pressa.
Jd deram onee horas.
Sao horas do correio.
combdio jd nao tarda; estd

a chegar.
Sa(h)iw-lhe hem a empreza ?

Com licenga! A vontade!

Nao faga cerimdnia!

Eu tinha vergdnha de Ihe fallar.

Nao tern troco?

Nao ha remSdio.

Vamos embora!

Isso i conforme! Depende!

Estd bem? Que Ihe parece?

Em que fkdmos9

Segundo o mew parecer . . .
Ha alguem que procura o

senhor.
Quern me procura ?
Diga que nao estou.

Espere ahi! Mande entrar

para a sola.
Nao fallemos mats n'isso!

Jd falla menos mal.
Estou constipado. \

Apanhei uma constipado. )
Logo que eu me apanhar no

campo . . .
Em que Ihe posso eu ser agra-

ddoel ?
Faga favor de se servir do meu

limitado pristimo.
Tudo quando puder fazer, serd

com tddo gosto.

Good-bye for the present!
Until very soon! Until next
week! Until next Friday!

I was very near losing the
train.

Let me see that.

He is already on the way.

I am in a hurry.

It has already struck eleven.

It is post-time.

The train must be here di-
rectly.

Did you succeed in your en-
terprise ?

With your leave! Be pleased!

Don't make any ceremony!

I was shy to speak to him.

Have you any change ?

There is nothing to be done.

Let us go awayl

That's all according! That
depends 1

Is it well so? What do you
think of it?

Where did we stop? What
did we agree upon?

According to my opinion . . .

There is somebody calling on
yon.

Who is calling?

Tell him that I am not at
home.

Just wait! Show him into
the drawing-room!

Don't let us speak any more
of that!

You speak already rather well.

I have caught a cold.

As soon as I am in the coun-
try.

In what may I be agreeable to
you?

Please dispose of my modest
services.

AU I can do will be done with
the greatest pleasure.

Some Portuguese Proverbs.

39S

Some Portuguese Proverbs equivalent to
English.

Antes s6 que tnal acompanhado.
Com iaes me acho; tal me faQO.

Ghega-te aos ions, serds um
delles: chega-te aos maus,
serds peor do que elles.

Duro com dura, nao faz bom
muro.

Dd Dem frio conforme a
roupa.

Quern primeiro anda, primeiro
apanha.

Hora a hora, Deus melhora.\

Atrds de tempo, tempo rem. /

Quern porfia mata caga.

A cavallo dado nao se Ihe olha
dente.

dlho do amo engorda o ca-
vallo.

Faze-me as barbas, far-te-hei

cabelo.
Como canta o ab(b)ade, assim

responde o sachristao.
De noite d candeia a burra

parece donzella.
Casa roubada — trancas d

porta.
Tantas vezes vae o cao ao moi-

nho, que Id Ihe f,ca o fou-

cinho.
Malhar no ferro emquanto

estd quente.
Quando ha vento, molha-se a

vela.
Emquanto o pdu vae e vem,

folgam as castas.
Gontenta-te, gato, que farta o

farto,
Filho de peixe sabe nadar.

Better alone than in bad

company.
Birds of a feather flow tOr

gether.
Tell me whom you associate

with and I will tell you

who you are.
Hard with hard never made

any good wall.
Aptness comes with the office.

First come, first served.

After rain comes sunshine.

Patience overcomes all things.
Look not a gift horse in the

mouth.
The master's eye makes the

horse fat {or: the cattle

thrive^.
One good turn deserves an-
other.
The young pigs grunt like the

old sow.
When candles are out, all cats

are grey.
To lock the stable-door when

the horse is stolen.
The pitcher goes so often to

the well that it comes home

broken at last.
To strike the iron while it is

hot.
To make hay while the sun

shines.
When the cat is away, the

mice will play.
Great wealth, great weariness.

What is bred in the bone will
come out in the flesh.

394

Supplement.

Pintura e pelSja de longe se

vSja.
Fillio iSf pae serds, assim como

fizeres, assim achards.
Ndo ha dgua mats perigosa

que a que ndo soa.
Santos de casa ndo fazem mi-

lagres.

Praia i o horn foliar; oiro i

bom calar.
seguro morreu de velho.
Mais vale um ttoma* que dois

1-te dareii>.
Quem ndo vae d guerra, ndo

morre n'ella.
Nem tddo o matto S ourSgdos.]
Nem tudo o que liiz S oiro. >
Nem tddo o hranco S farinha.)
Nem zombando, nem devSras,

com tea amo jogues as piras.

Picture and battle to be seen

from afar.
Do unto others as you would

be done by.
Still waters run deep.

A prophet is not without ho-
nour, save in his own coun-
try and in his own house.

Speech is silvern, silence is
golden.

Prevention is better then cure.

A bird in the hand is worth
two in the bush.

Who plays at bowls must be
prepared for rubbers.

All is not gold that glitters.

Those who eat cherries with
great persons will have
their eyes squirted out with
the stones.

Short Notes.
1.

Aos Ex™os Srs. Conselheiro A. de Lima e Ex™* Bsposa,

D. Maria Jos6 Moreira da Silva

e Coronel Nogueira da Silva e Mattos

apresentam os seus cumprimentos, pedindo a honra da sua
companhia para um copo de dgua que, na occasiao do casa-
mento de sua filha D. Beatriz com o ex™° Sr. capitao Antonio
de Lemos e depois da ceremonia, se offerece na 4" feira, 15 do
corrente, as 2 hs. da tarde na rua dos fiem-casados No. 3.

Lisb6a, casa de V^-s Ex^^, 8 de maio.

2. Besposta

(on a visiting-card).

A Ex™a Sr» D' Maria Jos6 Moreira da Silva e 111™° e

Ex™° Sr. Coronel N. da Silva e Mattos, agradecendo em seu

noma e no de seu marido a insigne honra do convite de

yas Bxas^

Short Notes. 396

D. Eugenia de Lima

apressa-se em partipar-lhes que Ihes dara a maior satisfa9ao
poder assistir ao auspicidso enlace da sua Ex™* Pilha.

3. Outra resposta.

Cumprimentando o Ex™o Sr. Coronel Nogueira da Silva e
Sua Ex™* Esposa, os Condes de Valfldr teem o maximo pesar
de nao poderem assistir a tao fausta festividade, visto estarem
de luto recente por uma parenta sua muito chegada. Fa-
zendo os mais sinceros votos pela felicidade dos Noivos e pe-
dindo a V*^ Ex*^ acceitem dfisde ja os seus cordiaes parabens,
pedem desculpa da sua nao-comparencia.

4.

Meu illustre Amigo :

For este pe^o lien9a para Ihe apresentar o meu particular
amigo, Dr. Fnlano, eximio escriptor e deputado da na^ao, cujo
nome nao sera de todo desconhecido de V" Ex'. Nao precise
dizer que as atten9oes que a sua generosidade dispensar ao Dr. F.
tornar-me-hao ainda mais sen devedor. Nunca poderei pagar
nem mSsmo agradecSr bastante, tantos e tao immerecidos &-
yores, dos quaes ainda assim me sinto digno pela muito dedir
ca9ao que Ihe consagro e na convic9ao que o melhor premio da
amizade e: acceitar-lhe as provas com a m3sma naturalidade
como sao dadas.

5.

Meu bom Amigo,

Case o meu Amigo disponba de algum memento vago
^manha entre uma e as qnatro boras, peQO o insigne favor de vir
falar-me a esta sua casa. Trata-se d'um assumpto urgente e que
merecera todo o sen interesse.

6.
Ex™° Senhor e Amigo:

Desconsolado de so b6je receber o seu bilbSte d'ante-
hontem, per ter estado ausente, por este pe90 desculpa de nao
ter apparecido abi, e licen9a de poder falar-lhe boje a qualquer
bora que V* Ex* se digne determinar e que mais Ihe convier.

396

Supplement.

Poetry to be learnt by heart.
Popular Stanzas of Four Yerses.

«Amar e ser amado, que ventura!
Nao amar, sendo amado, 6 um triste horror:
Mas na vida ha uma noite mais escura,
E amar algnem qae nao nos tenha amdr!>'

(Gon9alves Crespo.)

Ja nao tenho coraQao,
Que m'o tiraram do peito;
No logar onde elle estava
Nasceu um amor-perfeito.

Tu dizes que nao tens cruz
Para resar o rosario;
Casa-te, minha menina,
E teras cruz e calvdrio.

dia tern duas horas,
Dnas horas, nao tem mais:
Uma 6 quando vos vejo,
Outra, quando me lembraes.

Os teus olhos sao escuros
Como a noite mais cerrada;
Mas apesar de tao nfigros,
Sem elles nao vejo nada.

A folhinda do salgueiro
E a primeira novidade;
Quem madraga nao alcaD9a,
Que fard quem se ergue tarde ?

Ninguem deseubra o seu peito
A nenhuma amiga sua;
Quem seu peito descobre
Seu segredo deita a rua.

Quem e pobre, sempre 6 pobre
Quem 6 pobre nada tem;
Quem e rico, sempre 6 nobre,
E as vgzes nao e ninguem.

Aqui tens meu cora9ao,
Pechadinho com tres ehaves ;
Abre-o, mette-te M dentro
Que tn sosinha bem cabes.

Eu nao quero nem brincando
Dizer adeus a ninguem:
Quem vae, leva saudades,
Quem fica, saudades tem.

Amorsinho da minh'alma,
Ensina-me a tua arte:
Ensina-me a aborrecer-te.
Que eu nao sei senao amar-te.

Se OS mens olhos te incommo-

dam,
Quando os vSs na tua frente,
Manda entao que m'os arran-

quem,
Para eu te amar cegamente.

Ando triste como a noite,
Nada me alegra o sentido;
Ninguem sabe o bem que perde ;
Senao depois de perdido.

Ai quem me d^ra ter mae,
Inda que fosse uma silva!
Inda que ella me arranhasse,
Sempre eu era a sua filha.

Ja morreu a minha mae,
Ja M vae minha alegria;
Caizinha dos mens segredos,
Espelho donde me eu via.

Vae-te, carta venturosa,
Ver um bem que Deus me deu;
Antes tu, carta, ficaras.
No ten logar fdra eu.

Carta, vae onde te ea mando.
Que una lindos olhos vaes ver;
Carta, poe-te de joelhos,
Quando te forem a ler.

Poems of Modern Literature.

397

Aqui estou d tua porta,
Gomo feixinho da lenha,
A espera da resposta
Que dos teus olhos me venha.

amor e o respeito
Nao fazem boa uniao;
Quando amor diz que sim,
Diz respeito que nao.

Poems of Modern Literature.

corvo e

E fama que estava o corvo
Sobre uma arvore pousado
E que no s6frego bico
Tinha um queijo atravessado.

Pelo faro dquelle sitio
Veiu a raposa matreira,
A qual, pouco mais ou menos,
Lhe felou d'esta maneira:

Bons dias, men lindo corvo,
Es gloria d'esta espessura:
Es outra pli€nix se acaso
Tens a voz como a figura.

a raposa.

A taes palavras o c6rvo
Com louca, estranha afont^za
Por mostrar que 6 bom solfista,
Abre o bico e solta a prSsa.

Lan9a-lhe a mestra o gadanho
E diz: «Meu amigo, aprende
Como vive lisongeiro
A custa de quern o attende.

Esta li^ao vale nm queijo,
Tem d'estas para tea nso.»
Rosna entao comsigo o cOrvo
Envergonhado e confuse:

Velhaca! Deixou-me em branco,
Fui t6lo em fiar-me n'ella.
Mas este l6gro me livra
De cahir n'outra esparrela.

(Booage.)

Sol e Vento.

Vento desafiou
Sol, um certo dia.
Para vfirem dos dois
Qual mais poder teria.

E logo, n'um momento,
Sem mesmo ao repto esp'rar

pela resposta,

maluco do Vento
Com a sua maneira descom-

posta
Deiton-se a v6r se despojava
Da capa que trazia
Um homem que passava.

Soprando rijo e agreste,
Na fiiria d'um sudoeste,
Tudo revolve e agita n'um es-

carc6u . . .
— Logo d primeira rabanada
Vai-se ao homem, e leva-lhe

o chap6u.
E riu, e riu de gosto, d gar-
galhada,

Zombando do homenzi-
nbo
Que segiiiu sereno e descuidado
seu caminho.

398

Supplement.

Este, por6m, assim ja avisado,

Acaatelon-se:
Pnxou a ronpa asi, abotoou-se . .
Mesmo que — pondo tudo em

corrupio,
Vento iroso, por ali abaixo —

Estava frio,

Um frio no diacho!

Como 6 de calcular,
— Nao de espantar —
Contrariado o Vento exasperou-

86,

E n'uma fiiria tal
Que ja nao 6ra Vento, antes
dir-se hia
Um vendaval!

As rabanadas,

Aos empuxoes,

As sapatadas,
Sudoesteteimavaretumbante
Tirar 4 viva forfa a grossa capa

Ac triste viandante.

Mas quanto mais soprava

E esbravejava

Sudoeste insoffrido,
Mais homem na capa se em-

brnlhava,
E, e claro, at6 mais esta se

collava
Ac cdrpo do transeunte assim
batido.

Sol, do alto, que esta

scena via,
Eia de piaro goso, ria,

ria . . .

A cigarra i

Como a cigarra o seu gosto
E levar a temporada
De junho, jnlho e agosto
N'uma cantiga pegada,
De inverno tambem se come
E entao rapa frio e fome . . .

Nao porque a aposta, emfim,
interessasse

(Era bem mais que certo),

Mas uma li^aosinha dar quizesse

Ao Vento fiirio e esperto.

Por sua vez se foi ao homen-
zinho

Da capa, e gravemente,
E sem mdns tratos
Nem espalhafatos.

Quasi amigavel, delicadamente,
Devagarmho . . .

Dobrando a sua for^a apenas
de calOr,

Mas pouco a poueo, lento e
lentamente . . .

homem d'ali apoucosedespia,
Quasi insensivelmente
Da capa que trazia,
Da sua capa rica,
— Por tal modo suava,
Em bica!

E concluiu, falando sentencioso
Para o Vento raivoso:
«Se mais for9a e poder que tu
eu tenho,

Nao sei . . .
Tu diras!
Por mim, direi
Que faz
Muito mais do que a colera, a

paciencia,
Que mais vale a brandura que
a violencia*.

(Paulino de Oliveira.)

a formiga.

Um inverno a infeliz
Chega-se a formiga e diz:
— Venho pedir-lhe o favor
De me emprestar mantimento,
Matar-me a necessidade!

Poems of Modern Literature. 399

E, em chegando a novidade^, — Eu . . . cantar ao desafio.
Fafo ate um juramento, — Ah! cantar? Pois, minha.

Pago-lhe, seja o que for! amiga,

Quern leva o estio a cantar,
— Mas, pergunta-lhe a formiga, Leva o inverno a dan9ar.
que fez durante o estio? (Joao de Deus.)

Bosas.

Trazeis-me rosas; d'onde as heis trazido,
Boa velhinda e minha boa amiga?
Eosas no inverno! permitti que o diga,
Sois feiticeira: d'onde as heis colhido?

Na primavera de mens annoS; olho,
Mas vejo abrolhos e nao vejo flores:
E vos colheil-as, como as eu nao colho . . .
Sois feiticeira — enfeiti9aes d'amores.

Enfeitiqaes que a formosura, crgde,
Nao vem da face avelludada e bella;
A formosura vem so d'alma; 6 d'ella
Que brota a fonte que nos mata a sede.

V6s sois velhinha, ja nao tendes cores

Que rosto animem e que os olhos prendam,

Mas tendes prendas que o amor accendam,

Tendes ainda no inverno . . . fldres. (Joao de Deus.)

Gangao das tres gotas de dgua.

Tr6s irmas, trfis gotas de agua e um passarinho bebeu-a;

que infinito condensa, mas a terceira, tombando

sua mae, nuvem do c6u, no mar, dizia chorando:
la d'aquella altura immensa ^^^^^^^ ^^^^^ arrogantes

aesprenaeu. desaparecomesquinha ...»

vem uma e cae sobre a flor jr y

que d mingua de agua morria, Eesponde a onda marinha :

e mal a g6ta sentia, «Ja sou maior que era de

voltava-lhe o vi90 e a c6r; antes.*

caiu outra ao p6 d'um ninho, (Affonso Lopes- Vieira.)

Mae.

Ella velava perto No ber90 fluctuante

Do filho que dormia, Moveu-se agora o infante

E Candida sorria E acorda pranteando . . .
Ao lyrio entreaberto. Nao ha quadro mais bello

Da lua um raio incerto Que a mae, solto o cabello.

No quarto se perdia; filho acalentando!

E a mae olhava o Dia (Gon9alves Crespo.)

E a Luz do seu deserto. ^ ^ '^

^ The first fraits of the year.

400 Supplement.

Oonsulta.

Chamei em volta do meu frio leito
As memorias melhores de outra idade,
Formas vagas, que &a noites, com piedade,
Se inclinam, a espreitar, sobre o meu peito.

E disse-lhes: «No mundo immenso e estreito
Valia a pena, acaso, em anciedade
Ter nascido? dizei-m'o com verdade,
Pobres mem6rias que eu ao seio estreito . . .>

Mas ellas perturbaram-se — coitadas!

E empalidecerem, contristadas,

Ainda a mais feliz, a mais serena . . .

E cada uma d'ellas, lentamente,

Com um sorriso intimo, pungente,

Me respondeu: — «Nao, nap valia a pena».

(Anthero de Quental.)

Ao cahir da folha.

Qnando cahir a folha e tu te fores
A ter com minha mae que ja morreu,
Se nao Ihe posso dar mais que flores,
Leva Ihe beijos, abra^os, — Que sei eu!

Diz-lhe que eu ainda sou como era d'antes
Assim sem esperaD9as, sempre sem amores.
— Mens pobres olhos, sempre agonisantes,
Vao se mirrando mais — so pisam dores. —

Dize que os mens versos sao atormentados
Como so sabem rimar os desgra9ados,
Diz-lhe que em breve ... Nao, mas deixa la,

Podia a santa affligir-se. E agora,

Sempre sao maes — quando te fores embora,

Nunca Ihe contes o que vae por ca.

(Albino Porjaz de Sampayo.)

calenddrio.

E n'um instante a vida! . . . Dia a dia,
Desfolho calendario com saudade.
A gdtta e gotta cae na eternidade
Bsta porQao de vida fagidia.

Poems of Modern Literature. 401

Assim caminha em breve romaria

prazo em que gastei a mocidade

E so me traz mais p@na cada dia,

Mais pranto, mais augiistia e mais edade! . . .

A manso e manso o tronco se desfolha
Do tempo que resume esta negrura
Onde se fazem brancos os cabellos . . .

E OS dias vao cabindo, folha a folha,
B embora todos feitos de amargara
Oh, quem pudesse ainda reviv6l-os!

(Conde do Casal Ribeiro.)

Socage.

No seu corpo tao fragil quanta vida,
Cheia de luz, chela de for^a ingente!
Luz que cegava e que inda c6ga a gente . . .
Por9a que a todos leva de vencida . . .

Poi-lhe a curta existencia uma comprida
Vida de lacta, e embora o Amor florente
B a Gloria Ihe sorrisse ternamente,
Foi-lhe penosa estrada dolorida . . .

Seu g^nio impetuoso de inspirado,

Que o fez tao grande e tao inf'Iiz o fez,

Minou-lhe o d^bil corpo arrebatado.

Bamo florindo em flammas muita vez,
Uamo que pela Morte desfolhado
Todo em perfume, em alma, se desfez.

(Paulino de Oliveira.)

Preguiga.

A preguiQa, inda de peito, Pregui9a foi confessar-se;

Muito custou a criar! — «Pez exame de conacien-

Quasi que morreu de feme, cia?» —

Com preguiQa de mamar. — «Nao fiz, meu padre! mas

Presuica, ia crescidinha, . '^9"'°

Qnando per sen p6 andava Amanha^ . . Tenha pacien-

Nao era andar! mais par'cia ^^^'^

Que toda se espregui^ava . . . p^^g^j^^ aprendeu costura,

Pregui^a foi a 11920: Mas, sempre que costurava,

Ler, escrever e contar? S6 para nao por dedal,

Delxava a memoria em casa, Sempre os sens dedos pi-

Com pregul9a de a levar! cava.

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 26

402

Supplement.

A mae ralhou a Preguiga,
Porque se nao penteara;
Torna-lheella: — «Haquantos

dias
E que a mae nao lava a cara?»

Preguiga, morta de somno,
Quasi de somno morria;
So por nao fechar os olhos,
Quantas noites nao dormia!

A Pregui(,"a abria a boeca,
Coisa em que ellaeramaiscerta :
Mas depois — p'ra a nao fe-
char —
Picon sempre «bocca-aberta».

Pregui^a e o DesmazSlo
Juntarem-se em casamento :
Levando os dois, em bom dote,
Uma mao-clieia de vento.

A Pregui9a teve dois filhos:
Oh que santa gera9ao!
A mais velha, Dona Pome;
mais novo, Dom Ladrao.

Quando a Pregui^a morrer,
AW monte maninho,
At6 fraguedos da serra
Darao rosas, pao, e vinbo.

(Antonio CorrSa d'Oliveira.)

Ingratiddo.

Era uma vez um moleiro
Que estava no seu moinho . . .
Comegando seu caminho,
Vinha na serra Janeiro
Com longo acompanhamento
De sombras, de neve e vento,
Parahonrar (sebem melembro)
Desepedidas, bota-fora
Do velho e pobre Dezembro.

Inda estavam, — a tal bora!
Ao borralho da lareira,
Moleiro e mais a moleira,
Depois de bem consoados,
Bern fartos e regalados . . .
Que minguas, la no casal,
Pome ou sede, nao havia:
Pois, segundo se dizia,
moleiro, como tal,
Mettia a mao na maquia . . .
Mas, n'isto, ouviram —
truz! — truz! —
Bater a porta . . .

— « Jesus!
Quern sera? .. . Quern e?!» —
Kesponde,
Pora, uma voz arrastada:
— « Alguem que pede pousada,
B uns restos de lume aonde
Se possa ainda aquecer ...» —

Torna, soberbo, o moleiro:
— «Andar! andar, caminheiro!
Esmola? . . . Nao pode ser!»
Diz a voz:

— «Nao me conbeces,
De certo! Se conhecesses . . .
Sou o Anno Velho: Eu sou
Quern para ti foi tao bom
Que tudo que te fartou
Por minha gra9a e meu dom
lograste, dia a dia:
Alvo pao que tu comeste;
Doce vinho que bebeste;
azeite que te alumia;
Sol que seccou tua lenha . . .
Pois ha ingrato no mundo
Que negue pao d'um segundo
A quem um anno o mante-
nha ? ! »

Volta moleiro:

— paspalho '
Do velho ! Pois nao se atreve? . .
Paz' la a cama na neve.
Que ha de ser bom agasalhor
De que me serves, agora
Que ja vaes de p^s a cova?
Anno Novo, sim! E nova
Amizade, nova vinba:

Poems of Modern Literature. 403

«E taleiga venerada Poe-se a chover! a chover!

De respeito e valimento, ComeQa o rio a erescer;

Pois me dara dafarinlia. . .^> — A erescer de tal feitio,

Que logo ao moinha, o rio

Ora, foi neste momento Levou o rodisio e a mo!

Que Anno Novo chegou; E nao ficou aqul so

Vae, ouvin tudo, e pensou: castigo:

— «01ha cora9ao ruim! Desde entao,

Alma damnada! mofino! Tanto Ihe correu avesso

De aqui a um anno p'lo visto, Anno de tao mau comedo :

Pazia-me o mesmo a mim . . . Que no moinho (de nome

Bspera! que eu ja te ensino: «Moinlio da Ingratidao»)

Has de pagal-as!» — moleiro soberbao

B nisto, Aoabou, morrendo a fome . . .

(Antonio Corrga d'OIiveira : Pard,bolas.)

A Ldgrima.

Manha de junho ardente. Uma encosta esealvada,
Seea, deserta e nua, a beira d'uma estrada.

Terra ingrata, onde a urza a custo desabrocha,
Bebsndo o sol, comendo o p6, mordendo a rocba.

Sobre uma folha bostil d'uma figueira brava
Mendiga que se nutre a predegulho e lava,

A aurora desprendeu, compassiva e divina,
Uma Mgrima eth^rea, enorme e cristalina.

Lagrima tao ideal, tao limpida que, ao vel-a,

De perto era um diamante e de longe uma estrella.

Passa um rei com o seu eortejo de espavento,
Elmos, lan5as, clarins, trinta pendoes ao vento.

No men diadema, disse o rei, quedando o olhar.
Ha safiras sem conta e brilhantes sem par.

Ha rubins orientaes, sangrentos e doirados,
Oomo beijos d'amor a arder, cristalisados.

Ha perolas que sao gotas de magna immensa.
Que a lua cbora e verte e o mar gela e condensa.

Pois brilhantes, rubins e perolas de Ophir,
Tudo isso eu dou, e vem, 6 lagrima, fulgir

N'esta c'roa orgulhosa, olimpica, suprema,

Vendo o globo a meus p6s do alto do teu diadema.

26*

404 Supplement.

E a lagrima celeste, ing^nua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.

Coiira9ado de ferro, epico e desluinbrante,
Passa no seu ginete um cavalleiro andante.

E o cavalleiro diz a lagrima irisada:

Vem brilhar, por Jesus, na cruz da minha espada!

Par-te-hei relampejar, de victoria em victoria,
Na terra Santa, a luz da P6, ao sol da Gloria!

E a volta ha-de guardar-te a minha noiva, 6 astro,
Em seu coUo auroreal de rosa e de alabastro.

E assim alumiaras com teu vivo esplendor
Mil combates de heroes e mil sonhos d'amSr.

E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.

Montado n'uma mula escura, de caminho,
Passa um velho judeu, avarento e mesqninho.

Mulas de carga atris levam-lhe o thesoiro,
Grandes areas de cedro abarroladas d'oiro.

E velhinho andrajoso e magro como um janco,
craneo calvo, o olhar febril, o bico adunco.

Vendo a estrella, exclamou: «0h Deus, que maravilhal
Como ella resplandece e tremeluz e brilha!

Com meu oiro em montao podiam-se comprar
Os imp6rios dos reis e os navies do mar.

E por esse diamante esplendido trocara

Todo meu oiro immense a minha mao avara.»

E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.

Debaixo da figueira entao um cardo agreste,
Ja ressequido, disse a lagrima celeste:

«A terra, onde o lilaz e a balsamina medra,
Para mim teve sempre um cora9ao de pedra,

Se a queixar-me, ergo ao ceo os bra90s por aeaso,
O c6o manda-me em paga o fego em que me abrase.

Poems of Modern Literature. 405

Nunca junto de mim, ulcerado de espinhos,
Ouvi trinar, gorgeiar a miisica dos ninhos.

Nunca junto de mim ranches de namoradas
Debandaram, cantando, em noites estrelladas . . .

Voa a ave no azul e passa longs o amor,

Porque ai! nunca dei sombra e nunca tive flor! . . .

6 Idgrima de Deus, 6 astro, 6 gota d'agua,
Cae na desola9ao d'esta infinita magoa!»

E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Tremeu, tremen, tremeu . . . e cahiu silenciosa.

E algum tempo depois o triste cardo exangue,
Reverdecendo, dava uma flor c6r de sangue,

D'um roxo macerado e dorido e desfeito,

Oomo as cbagas que tern Nosso Senhor no peito . . .

E ao calix virginal da pobre flor vermelha

la buscar, zumbindo, o mel doirado, a abelha! . . .

(Guerra Juuqueiro.)

-"a8&-

406

English -Portuguese Vocabulary.

(The gender is indicated by f. (feminine) 5°<i f'^^^f ""^„^^; J^'
word is substituted by - (a dash), when repeated.)

alley avenida f-, aUa f.

principal

A.

f;

above em cirna de, por cima de
about ao redor de, cerca de
able capaz, hdbil
absolve ahsolver
abstain abster-se
abundance abunddncia f.
abuse abitsa?; insuUar
accept aceitar
accompany acompanliar
accustom acostumar
account conta f., lista f.
acquaintance conhecimento m,
acquire adquirir
act obrar, operar; s acfao

acto m.
action a(c)gao f.
add acrescentar, adicionar
address dirigir(-se a); endere-

gar
admirable admirdvel
admiral almirante m.
admit admitir
advance adiantar, promover
advantage vant&gem f.
advice conselho in., aviso m.
affair negocio m., assunto m.
afifect impressionar , afectar
afraid, to be — , ter medo
after dejmis, conforme
afternoon tarde f.
again de novo, mais uina vez
against contre
age idade f.; old — velhice
agree convir
agreeable agraddvel
alike semelhante, igual
all tudo pr., iodo adj.; — that

tudo quanto

allow permitir, dar licenga para,

consentir em
almost quasi
already jd

also tambem

always sempre

ambitious ambicioso

amiable amdvel, bondoso

among (por) entre

amuse diver tir

ancestors anlepassados m. pi.

anger sanga, despeito, colera,
ira

angry zangado ; to be or get —
zangar-se

answer resposta f; — v. res-
ponder

any algum; (neg.) nenhum

anybody alguem; (veg.) ningmm

any more mais algum; (neg.)
nao . . mais

appear aparecar

apple magd f.

apply to aplicar, empregar em

approach aproximar

April abril (in dates A — ) m.

archer besteiro m.

arm bniQo m.

army exercito m.

arrive chegar

arrow frecha f.

art arte f.

artist artista m. & f.

as como; — . . — assini que

ashamed envergonhado

ashes cinzas f. pi.

ask preguntar, pedir

assiduity assiduidade f.

assist assistir, socorrer

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

407

assistance assistencia f.
associate with freguentar, as-

sociar-se com
astonishing surpreendente
at a, em; at home em casa; at

jirst no principio: at once

dunia vez; at last por fim;

at all de todo
attack agredir
attain alcangar, conseguir
attentive atento, atencioso
attract atirar

August agusto (in dates A — ) m.
aunt iia f.
author autor m.
avarice avareza f.
avaricious avaro, avarento
avoid evitar
avow confessar
await aguardar, esperar.

B.

bad mail, md\ — ly mal

ball hala f , baile m.

bare nil, despido; — ly apenas

bark v., ladrar; s. casca f., cor-

tiga f.
barley cevada f.
battle batalha f.
beard barua f.
beat bater

beautiful formoso, Undo
because porque
become ftear, tornar-se
bed cama f., leito m.
bee abelha f.
beer cerveja f.
before antes, ante, deante
beg pedir (esmola), mendigar
begin prineipiar, comegar
behind atrds (dejtrds
believe crer, acreditar
belong to pertencer a, ser de
better melhor
between entre
beyond alem de
big grande, grosso
bird ave f., pidssaro m.
bite morder
bitter amargo, acre
black prelo, negro

blame censurar, repreender

blessing bengao f.

blood sangue m.

blush corar

boarding-house casa f. de h6s-

pedes
body corpo m.; every — cada

um, iodos; no — ninguem
boil fei-ver
bonnet chapdu m.
book livro m.
boot bota f.

born nascido; to be — nascer
bottle garrafa f.
box eaixa f.

boy rapaz m., menino m.
brave valente, corajoso
bread pao m.

break romper, partir, quebrar
breakfast almogo m.
bring trazer, levar
brother irmao m.
build construir
burn arder, queimar
business negdcio m.
but mas, porem
butter manteiga f.
buy comprar
by par; — heart de c6r; — the

way (— the — ) de passdgem ;

— and — logo, ao depois;

bard — muito perto.

cab trem de praga m.

cabbage couve f.

calf vitela f.

call chamar; — to mind lembrar;

— at ir ter com
camel camelo m.
camp campo m.
candle vela f.
cane bengdla f.
cap barrete

carnival carneval m., entrudo m.
care cuidado m.
carpenter carpinteiro m.
carriage carruagem f.
carry carregar, levar
cast (away) deitar (f6ra)
castle castelo m.

408

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

cat gato m.

cattle gado iovino m.

cease cessar, acabar

censure censurar

celebrated ceJebre

certainly eertamente, comcerteza

chair cadeira f.

chamber quarto, sola

chase eaga f.

chastise eastigar

cheese gueijo m.

cherry cereja f.

child crianga f.

china lou^a f.

choose escolher

chorus coro m.

church igreja f.

city cidade f.

clamour clamor m., brado m.

class classe f., aula f.

clean limpo

clear elaro, limpido

cloak capa f., capote m.

cloth pano m. ; clothes vestuArio

m., roupa f.
clothe vestir
cloud nuvem f.
coach carrudgem f., trem m.,

carro in.
coast co,^a f.
coat casaco m.
coffee cafe m.
cold frio (m.), coiistipasao
colour cdr f.

come vir ; — in entrar ; — outsair
comfort conforto m., comodidade

f.; — V. confortar, eonsolar
command ordem f. (cojmando

m.; — V. (co)mandar, ordenar
commence comego m.
commerce comereio m.
complain gueixar-se
compel obrigar
compound coniposto
comrade camarada m., compa-

nheiro m.
conceal esconder
conceive coneeber
condemn condeCTrOnar
conduct conducta f., procederm.;

— V. conduzir
confess eonfessar

confidence confianga f., con-

fidencia f.
conquer conquistar
conqueror conquistador m.
conscience conscienCia f.
consent consentir
consequence consequencia /.
consider considerar
constrain constranger
construct construir
contain canter
contented contente
continue continuar
convince convencer
cook cozinheiro; cozer
cool fresco (m.)
copy-book caderno m.
corn grao m.

correct correcto; — v. eorrigir
cost custar
country pais m.
courage cordgem f., dnimo m.
course curso m., corrida f.
cousin primo m., prima f.
cover coberta f., cobertor m.,

tampa f.
cow vaca f.
creator creador m.
creditor credor m.
crime crime m.
cry grito m., clamor m.
cultivate cultivar
cup chicara f., taqa f.
currant groselha f.
custom costum-e m., hdbito m.
cut V. costar, talhar; s. cdrte

m., talhe m., golpe m.

D.

damp (hjumido

danger perigo m.

dark escuro, sombrio

dart V. dardejar, s. dardo

daughter /ilha f.

dawn madrugada f., alva f.

day dia m.

dead morto; — ly mortal(mente)

deaf swdo

dear querido, caro

death morte f.

debt divida f.

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

40»

deceive enganar, lograr
December decemher (in dates

D— ) m.
decision decisao f.
deer viado m., gado m.
defect defeito m.
defend defender
delight in deleitar-se em
demolish demolir
dense denso

deny (de)negar, recusar
depart partir
departure partido
depend depender; — upon des-

cansar em
describe deserever
description descriiao
deserve merecer
desire desejar
despise desprezar
destroy destruir
die morrer
difference diferenga
difficult dificil
difficulty dificuldade f.
diligent diligente

dinner ^■»'*'°'-^»'-^

direct v. dirigir, enderegar; a.

directo, direito; — ly jd, im-

mediatamente
direction direcfSo f., enderego m.
disappear desaparecer
disciple discipulo m.
dissatisfy desagradar
dissipate dissipar, desbaratar
dissolve dissolver
distinguish distinguir
distress afligao f.
divide dividir, partilhar
do faser
dog coo m.

door porta f. ; — way pm-tal m.
doubt V. duvidar; s. duvida f.
dozen diizia f.
draw puxar, tirar; — (pictures)

desenhar; — upon oneself

atirar-se
dream v. sonhar; s. sonho m.
dress v.vestir(-se); s. vestido m.,

fato m.
drink beher

drop V. gotejar, deixar cair; s.

gota f.
drunk bebedo; to get — embria-

gar-se
dry seco, enxuto
duchess duquesa f.
duck pato m.
dumb mudo
during durante
iaat p6 n., poeira f.
duty dever m., obrigagdo f.
dwell morar, residir
dye tingir.

E.

ear orelha f., ouvido m.

early cedo

earth terra f.

easily facilmente

easy fdcil

eat comer

edition edigao f.

egg ovo m.

elect eleger

ell (measure) vara f.

elm (tree) olm(eir^o m.

elsewhere algures

embarrass ». embaragar; s. em-
bar ago m.

embellish embe(l)lecer

emperor imperador

empire imperio

employ impregar

end fim m., cdbo m., con-
clicsao f.

enemy inimigo m.

engine (steam — ) mdquina

enough bastante, assas

enrich enriquecer

enter entrar (em)

entertain entreter, regalar

entertaining divertido

envy inveja

equal igual

equality igvaldade f.

error erro m.

escape v. escapar, fugir; s. es-
capada f., fugida f.

esteem estima f., consideragao f.

evening tarde f., noite f.

event su(c)ceaso m., acontecimento

410

English-Portuguese ^'ocabulary.

ever sempre

everybody cada um, tuclos;

everything tudo; everywhere

em toda a parte
evil mal m.
example exemplo m.
execute executar, cnmprir
exercise exerctcio, prdtica
exhaust esgotar; — ed exhausto
exist existir
expect aguardar
extinct extinto
extinguish exlinguir
extract v. extralr; .-. extracto
extreme extremo
eye olho m.

fable fdlmla f.

face face f., cara f., rosto m.

fail faltar, falhar, errar

faint desfalecer

faithful fiel, leal

fall call-

false falso

falsehood falsidade f.

family familia f.

fan le(iue m.

far longe

fat gordo

fate fado in., destino m.

father pat or pae »«.; — in-law

sogro m.
fault defeito m., falta f.
fear medo in., receio m.
fearful receoso
feather pena f., pluma f.
February fevereiro (in dates F — )

m.
feed comida f., alimento m,
feel sentir
feign fingir
fellow-traveller companheiro m.

de viagem
ferocious feroz
fertilize fertilisar
few poucos
field campo

fight luta f., combate n>.
fill encher
find eneontrar

fine honito, fino

finish acabar, terminar

fire s. fogo in.\ v. desfecluir

fiag bandeira f.

flatter lisongear, adular

flatterer adidadur m.

flee fugir

flock rebanho m-

florin flwim m.

flour farinha f.

fiourish florescer

flower floy f.

fly V. voar, fugir; s. mosca f.

fog nevoeiro m.

follow seguir

folly tolice f., pdndega f.

fool tdlo m.

foolishness tolice f., asneira f.

foot pe m.

for i'pre-p.) p>ara; (couj.) porque;

as — enquanto a
forbid prohibir; God — ! Beus

nao queira!
forehead testa f.
foreign estrangeiro
foresee prever
forest floresta f.. bosque m.
forget esquecer, olvidar
forgive perdoar
fork garfo m.
formerly mites, outrdra
forsake abandonar
fortify fortificar
fortnight, a — quinze dias
fortune fortuna
forward(8) para diante, na

dianteira
found v. fandir
freeze gelar
French f ranees
frequently freqiientemente, a

miudo
fresh fresco
Friday sexta-feira f.
friend amigo, amiga; — ly ami-

gdvel
friendship amizade f.
fruit fru(c)to m., fru(e)ta 'f.
fugitive fugitivo
fulfil cumprir
full cheio,, pleno
furniture mdbllia f.

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

411

gaiety alegria f.

gain V. ganhar; s. ganho m.

game jogo, caga f.

gape bocejar, abrir a hdca

garden jardim m.

gardener jardineiro m.

gate porta f., portal m., cance(l)la

f-
gather colher, apanhar
general a. geral; s. general m.
generous generoso
genius genio m., talento m.
gentleman cavalheiro m., senhor

m.
gentleness gentileza f., delicadeza

f.
get xn-ocurar, ter ; — up levan-

tar-se
gift dckliva f., prenda f.
girl menina f., rapariga f.
give dar
glad contente,alegre; — Ijgostosa-

mente
glass vidro in., copo m.
glitter reluzir
glory gldria f.
glove luva f.
go ir; — ■ away ir-se (emhora);

— out sair; — far from afastar-

se; — for procurar; — on

continuar
G-od Deits in.
gold ouro m.

good a. bom, boa; s. beni m.
goodness bondade f.
good-will boa vontade f.
govern governar, reger
gown vestido m.
grammar gram(m)aiica
grandfather aw m.
grandmother avo f.
grant conceder
grass herva f., relva f.
graze pastar
great grande
green verde

grief desgosto m., mdgoa f.
grind moer

ground chdo m., solo to.
grow crescer; — lean emma-

grecer; — old envelheeer; —

pale empalidecer; — ■ red corar

— tall crescer, estar crescido;

— thin emmagrecer ; — worse
peorar — better melhorar

— ■ rich enriquecer
guilty culpado

H.

hail V. granizar ; aclamar, sau-

dar; s. graniga f. — ! viva!
hair cabelo m., pelo m.
half s. metade f.; a. meio, nieia
hand mdo f.; —v. passar
handsome bello
happen acontecer
happily felismente
happiness felicidade f.
happy felis
hard duro, dspero
hardly detudo, apenas; — ever

quasi nimca
hare lebre f.
harvest colheita f.
haste pressa f.
hasten apressar-se, aviar-se
hat chapeu m.; to put on (take

off) one's hat pdr (tirar) o

chapeu
hate odiar
hatred ddio m.
hay feno m.
head cabeQn
heal curar
health saude f.
healthy saiidavel, sew
hear ouvir

heart coragdo m. ; by— de cor
heat calor in.
heaven ecu m.
heavy pesado
helm leme in.
help ajudar, so(c)correr
henceforward d'aqui para diante
here aqui

hide esconder, occuliar
high alto, elevado
hill co(l)lina f.
hinder impedir
history histdria f.
hit dar um golpe em; acertar

412

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

hive colmeia f.

hold segmar

hole iuraco m.

holiday ferias f. pi.

holy santo, sagrado

home casa; go — ir a or para

casa; at — em casa
honest (hjonrado, (h)onesto
honour s. Jionra f.; — «. honrar
hope s. esperanga; — v. esperar
horse cava(l)lo m.
hot guente; it is — estd calor
hour (hjora f.
house casa f.
how como, que; — long (since

when)? desde quando?; —

much (many) quanto(s)?
however no entanto
human (hjumano
hunger fome f.
hungry esfomeado; to be — ter

vontade (de comer)
hunter caQodor m.
hunting caga f.
hurt ferir, prejudicar
husband viarido m.

ice gelo m.

idea ideia f.

idle preguicoso

if se, caso que

ill o. doente; adv. mal

illness doenga f.

image imdgem f.

imagine imaginar

imitate imitar

immediately i{m)mediatamente,

immortal i(mJmortal

importune importuno

impossible impossivel

improve progredir

in em; into para deiitro de

inch po(l)legada f.

increase crescer, av(g)mentar

incredible incrivel

incur incorrer em

indeed na verdade; — ! e ver-

dade !
inhabit habitar

inhabitant habitante m.

injure prejudicar

ink tinta f.; — stand tinteirom.

inquire inquirir, indagar

inquisitive curioso

inscribe increver

insensible insensliiel

instantly instantdneamente

instruct instrtiir

insult insulto m.

intend intender

interrupt interromper

introduce introduzir, apresentar

invade invadir

invent inventor

iron ferro m.

irreproachable irrepreensirel

island ilha f.

ivory marfivi in.

January Janeiro (in dates J — )

jealous ciumento

jealousy ciume m.

jewel j6ia f.

join juntar

joy alegria

judgment julgamento m.

jug cdntaro m., canSea f.

July julho (in dates J—) m.

June junho (in dates J — ) vi.

just justo, exacto

just as no momenta em que

justice justiga f.

K.

keep ficar com, segurar, observe
kill matar
kindness bondade f.
king rei m.; kingdom reino m.
kitchen cozinha f.
knee joelho m.
knife faca f., navalha f.
know conhecer, saber
knowledge sciencia f., co-
nhecimenlo(s) pi. m.

labour trabalho m., lavor «/.
laborious trabalhoso
lady senhora f., dona f.

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

413

Iamb aiiJio m.

land s. terra f.; — v. desembarcar,

arribar
language lingua f., lingudgem f.
large grande, largo
last V. durar, continuar; adj.

idtimo
late adj. defunto; adv. tarde
laugh rir
laughter 7-iso m.
law lei f.
lawyer advogado
lazy preguigoso
lead s. chutnbo m.
lead eondusir; — into induzir
leaf folha f., fdlho m.
league legua f., liga f.
learn aprender, estudar
learned sabio, erudito
least s. menos; at — ao menos;
in the — de todo
leave licenga f.; take — of

despedir-se de
left a. esquerdo\ s. esguerda f.
leg perna f.
lend emprestar
less menos
let deixar, arrendar; — us go I

vamost — him know! faga-lhe

letter carta f., — case carteira f.

liar mentiroso m.

liberty liberdade f.

lie estar (deitado); mentir

life vida f.

lift up levantar

like gostar de; a. semelhanfe;

adv. como
likely provdvel
lily lirio m.

limit limitar; s. Umite m.
line linJia f.
linen linlio m.
lion liao m.
listen escutar, ouvir
little adj. pequeno; adv. pouco,

apenas, mal
live viver, morar
loadstone, lodestone iman m.
locksmith serralheiro m.
long adj. longo, eomprido; adv.

muito tempo

look at olhar; — for proeurar

looking-glass espelho m.

lose perder

loss perta f.

love s. amor; — v. aniar

low haixo, ml

luxury luxo m.

M.

mad tola, alienado

Madam minha senhora

magnificent magnifico

maintain manter, suster

make fazer ; — haste apressar-se

man homem m.

manners maneiras f. pi.

many muitos; so — tantos; as

— as tantos como; too —
demais

map ma(p)pa m.

March margo (in dates M — )

mark out marcar, tragar

marriage casamento m.

marry casar

master s. mestre, patrao, anio m. ;

— V. senhorear, conquistar
matter assumpto in., negdcio m.,

cousa f.
May maio (in dates M — ) m.
meadow prado m., devesa f.
meal refeigao f., farinha f.
means meio m.
meat came f.

meddle (with) entremtter-se (em)
medicine remedio m., medicina f.
meet encontrar
melt fundir, derreter
member membro m.
memory memdria f.
mend emendar ; — (a pen) aparar
merchant negociante , comer ci-

ante m.
messenger mensageiro m.
metal metal m.
middle meio m.
mild ameno, suave
milk leite m.
miller moleiro m.
minute minuto m., minuta f,
misfortune desgraga f.
mislead desencaminhar, induzir

em erro

414

English-Portuguese Vocabulaiy.

Miss menina, senhora Dona

mist nevoeiro m.

mistake v. enganar-se: s. erro,

engano m.
mistrust desconfiar de
mock trocar de
modern moderno
modest modesto
modesty modestia f.
Monday segunda-feira f.
money dinheiro m.
montt mes m.
moon lua f.
more mats
morning mariha f.
mother mae f. ; — -in-law sogra
motive motivo m.
mourning luto m.
mouse rato m., ratinlio m.
mouth huca f.

move mover(-se),comover,mexer
much muito; too — demasiado;

how — quanta?: as — tanto;

as — as tanto que
murder assassinar; assassiiiio m.
murderer assassino m.
music musica f.
mutton earneiro m.

nail unha f., xnego m.

naked nu, nua

name nome m.

namely nomeadamente; a. saber

napkin guarda-napo m.

nature natureza f.

naughty ruim, mal-creado

near proximo, perto

nearly quasi, aproximadamente

necessary necessdrio, precise; to

be — precisar-se
necessity necessidade f.
neglect V. descuidar; s. descuido

m.
neighbour visinho m.
neighbourhood visinhanga f.
neither . . nor nem . . nem
never nunea, jamais
new novo, fresco
news noticia f.; — paper jornal

m.

next proximo, seguinte

nice honito, gentil

niece sobrinha f.

night noite f.

no nenhum, nao

nobility nobresa f.

noise barulho, ruido ni.

noon meio-dia m.

nose nariz m.

nothing (luio . .) nada

notwithstanding nem, por isso

nourish alimentar. nutrir

November november (in dates

N—) m.
now agora
number numero m.
numerous numeroso.

0.

oak carvalJto m.

oats aveia f.

obedient obediento

obey obeir

oblige ohrigar, ohsequiar

obliging obsequioso

observe observar, atender

obtain obter, alcan^ar

occupy o(c)cupar

October outubro (in dates — )

m.
odious odioso
offend o(f)fender
offer s. o(f)ferla\ — r. offerecer
often muitas vezes
officer o(f)fi.eial
oil 6leo m., azeite m.
old velho, idoso; — age velhice

f.; how — are youV quantos

annos tern ?
omen augouro m.
omit ome(t)ter
on sobre, em eima de
once uma vez; — on a time

outr'ora; at — de repente
only si, linico

open V. abrir; adj. dberto, franco
openness sinceridade f.
opponent adversArio in.
opportunity oCp)portunidade
oppose o(p)pdr(-se)
opposite o(p)posto, em frente de

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

415

orange laranja f.

order s. drdem f.; — v. mandar

other, an — outra

otherwise alias, d'outra maneira

over sdbre, por cima de; it's

all — acabou-se
overtake a(t)Ungir
owe dever
owl coruja f.
own propria
owner proprietdrio m.
ox hoi m.

pagan pagao m., paga f.

pain pena, dor, traballw; on —

of death sob pena de vida (or

de morte)
painful penoso, dolorosa
paint pintar
painter pintor in.
painting pintura f.
palace paldcio m.\ (king's — )

paqo m.
pale pdlido
paper papel m.

pardon v. perdoar; s. perdao m.
parents paes m. pi.; parentes in.

pi.
part parte f. ; to take — in

partilhar em
party partido m., partida f.
pass V. passar; s. passdgem f.,

passo in., passaporte m.
passage passdgem f., irajecta in.
patient s. doente m.; a.Ay paciente
pay V). pagar; s. paga f., paga-

menia in.
peace paz f.
peach pessego m.
pear pera f.

peasant lavrador, aldeao in.
pebble seixa m.
peculiar particular
pen penna f. ; — -holder eaneta f.
pencil lapis m.
penknife canivete m.
people povo m., gente f.
perceive perceher
perfectly perfeitamente
perform fazer, cumprir
perish perecer

permit per>ni(t)tir

persecute perseguir

person pessoa f.

persuade persuadir

philosophy filosofia f.

picture quadra m.

piece pega f., bocado m.

pierce furar, atravessar

pig porco m.

pill pUula f.

pin alfinete m.

pity piedade f.; it is a — i uma

pena
place logar, assento; — v. colo-

car
plain planicie f.\ adj. piano
plan projecto in., plana in.
plank prancha f.
plant planf.a f.
plate prato m.
play s. Jogo m., comidia f.\ — v.

jogar, brincar
plaything brinquedo m.
please agradar a; if you please

— se faz favor
pleasing agraddvel

pleasure prazer m. ; to take —

in camprazer- se
plum ameixa f.
pocket algibeira f., bolso in.;

— handcherchief lengo m. ;
— book carteira f.

poet poeta m.

poison veneno in., envenenar

polite cortes

politeness eortesia f.

poor pobre

pope papa m.

poplar alamo m., choiipo m.

populous povoado

portion parte f., pargao f.

position posigao f., situagao f.

post-office correio m.

pound arrdtel m.; libra f.

powerful poderosa

praise v. lauvar, enaltecer; s-

louvar m.
pray resar, orar
prayer resa f., oragao f.
precious precioso
precision precisao f.
prefer preferir

416

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

prescribe prescrever

presence presenga f.

present adj. presenie; ». pre-
senie, regalo m.

preserve preservar, confeitar

pretence p)-etexto m.

pretend pretender, fingir

pretty adj. bonito; adv. bem,
bastante

prevent impedir

prey presa f.

pride orgulho m.

principle principio m.

print imprimir

printing, act of — imprensa f.

prison cadeia f., prisao f.

prodigious prodigioso

produce produzir

project projeclo

promise s. inomessa ; — v. pro-
meter

proof prova f.

proper prdprio, conveniente

property propriedade f.

proposal proposigao f.

propose propor

rprove provar

province provincia f.

punctuality poniualidade f.

punish castigar

punishment castigo m.

pupil aZMjjmo, — a; diseipulo, —a

purchase s. compra; — v. com-
prar

purpose fim m., designio m. ;
on — de prop6sito

purse bolsa f.

pursue perseguir

put meter.

Q-

quarrel contenda, altercaiao f.

queen rainha f.

question s. pregunta f., questao

f.; — preguntar
quiet guieto, tranquillo
quite todo, inteiramente.

B.

railroad caminho m. de ferro
rain chuva f.

rainy chuvoso

raise levantar, elevar

rally motejar

rather antes, bastante

ray raio m.

reach atingir, chegar a.

read ler; to — again tornar a

ler
ready pronto
reason razSo f.
rebuild reconstruir
recall (rejlembrar
receive receber, acolher
recognise reconhecer
recollect lembrar-se
recompense recompensa f.
reconnoitre reconhecer
recover restabelecer
red vermelho
reduce reduzir
reed ca(n)na f.
reflect reftectir
refuge, to take — refugiar-se
refuse recusar
regular regular
reign reinar
rejoice regosijar
relate contar, referir
relieve socorrer
rely fiar-se, contar em
remain ficar
remedy rem^dio m.
remember lembrar-se; me to

him diga-lhe muitas lemhrangas

rend rasgar
render devolver
renounce renunciar a
repair concertar, reparar
repeat repetir
repent arrepender-se
reply responder, replicar
report avisar, informar, referir;

s. relatdrio m.
repose descansar, repousar
reproach censurar, repreender
repulse repulsar
require requerir, exigir
resemble assemelhar, parecer-se

(com)
reside residir, morar
resolve resolver, decidir

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

417

rest descansai; ficar

restless desassocegado

restrain restringir

return voltar, tornar, restituir

reveal revelar

revenge vinganqa f.

reward recompensa f.

ribbon fita f.

rice arroz m.

rich rico

riches riqueza f., bens m. pi.

ridiculous ridieulo

right justo, direito; — hand

direita f.; you are — tern

razao
ring annd m., argola f.; —v.

(the bell) tocar
ripen madurecer
rise levantar-se
risk risco, perigo m.
river rio m.
road estrada f.
rob roubar
robber ladrao m.
roof telhado m.
room espago m., aposento, quarto

m.
rose rosa f.
rotten podre, pdtrido
round redondo
ruin riiina f.
rule regra f.
run correr; — away fugir; — to

acorrer; — over percorrer;

— a ground frustrar-se.

sad triste
safe salvo

sail V. ir a vela; s. vela f.

salad salada f., alfaee m.

sale venda f.

salt sel m.

same mesnio

satisfy satisfazer

Saturday sd(b)bado m.

savage selvagem

save salvar

say diger

scarce apenas

Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.

scholar aluCmJno m.

school escola f., aula f.

scold ralhar

seal V. selar; s. selo m.

season estagao f.

seaman marinheiro in.

seat logar m., assento m.

secret segredo m.

seduce seduzir

see ver

seek procurar

seem parecer

seize apanhar

seldom raramente

sell vender

send maiidar, enviar; — away

mandar embora, despedir; —

for mandar, buscar
sense sentido m.
September setembro (in dates

S-) m.
servant criado, — a
serve servir
set off, — out partir
settle arranjar
sew coser

shade, shadow sombra f.
shame vergonha f.
share partilhar em
shed (blood) derramar
sheep ovelha f., carneiro m.
sheet folha f. (of a bed), lengo

m.
shine brilhar, luzir
ship navio m., ndu f., vapor m.
shirt camisa f.
shoe sapato m.
shoemaker sapateiro m.
shop loja f.

shore margem f., praia f.
short breve, curto
show mostrar, manifestar
shrub arbusto m.
shun evitar, fugir de
shut fechar; — in eneerrar
sick doente
side lado m.
sight vista f.
silence silencio m.
silk seda f.
silly parvo
silver prata f.

27

418

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

simple nimples
since desde (que)
sincere sincero
sing cantar

sister imm; — in-law eunkada
J-

sit (down) sentar-se
skate patinar
skin pe(l)le f.
slander dizer mal de
slaughter matafiga f.
sleep V. dormir; s. somno 7n.
slide, slip escorregar
small pequeno
smile sorrir ; s. sorriso m.
smoke fumo m.\ — v. fumar
snow neve f. ; — flakes frocos de

neve; — v. nevar
so assim, too; — that tanto que;

— many tantos

soap sabao m., sdbonete m.

sober sdbrio

soft mo(l)le, meigo

soil solo m., chao m. ; — v. sujar

soldier soldado in.

solve (dts)golver

something algutna coisa, dlgo

(de)
song canto m.
soon brew, logo, cedo
sorrow desgosto m., mdgoa f.
sorry triste ; I am — sinto, tenha

pena
soul alma f.
sound sao, rijo; s. som
source fonte f.
south sul m.
speak falar
spell soletrar
spite, in — of apesar de
spoil estragar
spoon eolher f.
sport esporte m.
spot logar
spread espalhar
spring s. primavera f., tnola f.;

— V. saltar
spy espia f.
stagger cambalar

stain mancha, nddoa f.; — v.

manchar
staircase escada(ria) f.

stake paste m., estaca f. ; to be

at — estar arriscado
star estrclla f.
state estado m., condi<;ao
stay ficar
step passo m.
stick ^(iw m., bengala f.
still ainda
sting morder
stir mover, inexer(-se)
stocking meia f.
stone pedra f.
stop parar
storm tempestade f.
strange estranho, estranjeiro
strawberry morango m.
street rua f., caminho m.
strength forga f.
strike bater, ferir; (clock) dar

horas
strong forte

study estudar; s. gdbinete
stuff estofo m., materia f.
subdue subjugar, amansar
subject sujeito m., assumpto m~
submit submeter
subtract subtrair
succeed su(e)ceder, lograr
success su(c)cesso m.
successful bem siJb(c)cedido, feliz
such tal
suffer sofrer
suffice bastar
sufficient sufieiente
sufficiently hastante
sugar assiicar m.

T.

thunder trovdo m.

Thursday quinta-feira f.

thus assim

tiger tigre m.

till aU'(a)

time tempo m., vez f.

timid timido

tired cansado

to a, para; to-day hoje; to-
morrow amanha

too, — much demais, demasiado^
muito

tooth dente m.

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

419

top cimo m.

towards para (com)

towel toalha f.

tower torre f.

town cidade f.

tradesman negociante

tragedy tragedia f.

transgress infringir

translate iraduzir, verier

translation traduCcJeao f., versaof.

travel viajar

traveller viajante m.

treasure tesouro m.

treat tratar; ill — maltratar

treatment tratamento m.

treaty tratado m.

tree drvore f.

tremble tremer

trouble inquietar, desassocegar,

inco(m)modar
true wrdadeiro ; it is — £ ver-

dade
trust confiar em, descansar em
truth verdade f.
try experimentar, proeurar
Tuesday terga-feira f.
Turkish turco
turn volta f.
tutor preceptor, tutor m.
tyrant tyra(n)no m.

U.

ugly few

umbrella parasol m., guarda-
chuva m.

unawares inesperadamente

uncle tio m.

understand compre(7i)ender, en-
tender

undertake empre(h)ender

undo desfazer

unfortunate desgragado

ungrateful ingrato

unhappy infeliz

unheard of inaudito

unknown deseonheddo

unless a nao ser que

unsettled ineerto

upon em, sobre, em eima de

uprightness rectidao f.

use uso m., hdbito m.; — v.
costumar

useful lUil

usually de ordindrio

utter (cries) dar (gritos).

V.

vainly debalde

valley val(le) m.

valour valor m., valentia f.

variety variedade f.

various vdrio

vast vasto

velvet veludo m.

very muito, bem.

vessel vaso m., ncivio m.

vice vicio m.

victory victdria f.

village aldeia f., vila f.

vinegar vinagre m.

violet violeta f.

virtue virtude f.

virtuous virtuoso

visit s. visita f.\ — v. visitar,

fregp,entar
voice voz f.

volume volume, tome m.
vow voto m.; — v. vota/r
voyage vidgem f.

W.

wait esperar

walk passear; s. passeio m.

wall muro m.

walnut noz f.

want falta; — v. precisar; to

be — ed faltar
war guerra f.
warm quente
watch reldgio m.; — v. velar,

observar
water dgua f.
way caminho m.
weak fraco

wear traser, trajar, vestir
weariness cansago, aborrecimento

\ dborrecido

wearisome

weary

weather tempo m.

Wednesday quarto-feira f.

week semana f.

27*

420

English-Portuguese Vocabulary.

weep clwrar
weigh pesar
well hem; to be — eslar hem

or horn
wheat trigo m.
when quando
where onde
whip chieote m.
white branco
whole inteiro, todo
why porque?
wicked ruim
wide largo

widow vitcva f. ; — er viuvo m.
wife esposa f., mulher f.
wild selvdgem

willing prompto ; to be — querer
willingly gostosamente
win ganhar
wind vento m.

wind up (a watch) dar corda a
window janela f.
wine vinho m.
wing asa f.
winter inverno f.
wipe esfregar
wisdom sabedoria f.
wise sdbio, erudito, prudente
wish desejar
without sem
witness testemunha f.
woman mulher f.
wonderful admirdvel, maravi-

Ihoso
wood bosque, madeira f., pdu m.

wool Id f.

word pcdavra f. ; to keep one's

— cumprir com a sua pala-

vra
work obra f., trabalho m. ; — v-

trahalhar
workman operdrio m.
world viundo m.
worm verme m.
worse peer, pior
worth digno'i to be — valer
wound ferida f.; — ■». ferir
wretched desgragado, miserdvel
write escrever
writing letra f.
wrong injustiia; to be — ndo

ter razao.

Y.

year anno m.

yellow amarel(l)o

yesterday (h)ontem

yet ainda

yield ceder

yoke jugo m.

young novo, mogo

youth juventude, mocidade f.

zeal zelo m.

zealous zeloso

zero zero m.

zounds! porDeus! com a hreea!

— 5(f-

421

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

A.

Abaixo /s'Saj/w/ down; under
ahalar fSis'lar] to shake
abandonar [v^ndu'nar] to

abandon
ab(h)ade /e'Sa^aJ "*■ abbot
abelha [y'tvUv] f. bee
abenfoar [abensu'arj to bless
aberto [v'tsrtu] open
aboUr fabu'lirj to abolish
aborrecer [TiiurrQ 'serj to abhor,

displease
abragar febrv'sar] to embrace
abreviar /BSc9»?'3r7 to abbreviate
abrigar [ebri'garj to shelter
abrigo [v'tricju] m. shelter
abril [v'briij m. April
abrir fe'brirj to open
abuso [is 'fjuzu] in. abuse
acabar [vke'barj to finish
acaso fe'lcazu] m. chance
acautelado [vkaut^ 'laduj cau-
tious
acautelar-se [elcauta'larssj to

provide
acgao [a' sin] f. action
a(c)cento fs'sentu] m. accent
a(c)eeso [v'segu] lighted
a(c)crescentar ['Bkrafsen'tar] SsVl§-

ment, increase
a(c)cusar [vTcu'zar] accuse
aceitnr [vs^si'tar] to accept
acender [v sender] to light,

kindle
acertar [vsar'tar] to hit
achar fv'far] to find
acido I'agtffu] acid, sour

acima fv'simv] over
aclarar [vkl'e'rar] to clear
ago ['asu] steel m.
aeolher [vhu'fier] receive
acompanhar [vicdmpe'par] ac-
company
aconseihar [vTcosf'/iar] to advise
acontecer [■elconta'ser] to happen
acordar [ehur'dar] to awake
acostumar [ylcuftu'mar] to ac-
custom
acre ['alcrd] ^, sour
acreditar [^kreffi'tar] to believe
activo [a'tivu] active
acto f'atu] m. act, action
actor [a' tor] m. =
actriz [a'trifj f. actress
actual [a'tuai] =
addigao [■effi'siu] f. addition
adiante [edi'vntgj before, for-
ward
adiar [vcTfar] to adjourn
adivinhar fEfyvi'jiarJ to guess
adoecer [edui'ser] to fall ill
adormeeer [v&urma'ser] to fall

or lull asleep
advertir [vffdvar'tir] to advise
afadigar ['efedi'^ar] to fatigue,.

tire
afamado ['sfe'maffu] famous
afastar [vfvf'tar] to remove
afazeres [vfv'zerif] m. pi. busi-
ness
a(f)fecto [^'fEtu] m. affect
a(f)feigao ["efvi'svu] f. aiFection
a(f)fi.rmar [vfir'mar] to affirm
a(f)flicto [v'flitu] afflicted
a(f)fiigir [vfli'^ir] to afflict

422

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

af(f)lueiite [eflu'entg] m. affluent
agarrar [vgeWrar] to seize
agasalho [ege'zaduj m. lodging,

shelter
agradecer [egred'a'ser] to thank
agradecido [vgrvdg' siduj thank-
ful
agradecimento [vgi-vdssi'mSntu]

m. thanks
agrado [v'gra,&u] m. liking
dgua f'agvjB] f. water
aguardar [vgitter dar] to await
agudo [e'gu&uj sharp, pointed
aguia [agiej f. eagle
agulha [e'gufiv] f. needle
ahi [v'i] there
ainda [v'lndvj still
ajoelhar [v^ut'fiarj to kneel
ajuda [e'guffej f. help
ajudar fs^u'i]ra,rj to help
alargar [nVar'ga,r] to enlargen
alcan^ar [alke'sarj to reach,

obtain
aldeao [atdi'^u] m. peasant
aldeia [al'dviv] village.
alegre [v'lcgra] gay
alegria [vh'gri:v] f. gaiety, joy
aUm [a'lvi] beyond
dlfaiate [alfvi 'ale] m. tailor
alfandegafai'fendsgsj f. custom-
house
alfinete [alfi'neta] m. pin
algibeira [algi'ietraj f. pocket
algodao [atgu'Ovu] m. cotton
alguem [al'gv}] somebody
algum [al'gU] some
alimento [eli'mentu] m. nourish-
ment
Al(l)emanha [vh'majiv] f. Ger-
many
al(l)emao [vld'mvu] m. German
al(l)i [vli] there
alma ['almv] f. soul
almo^ar [aimu'sarj to hreak-

fast
almogo [al'mosu] m. breakfast
alto ['aitu] high, tall
altura [al'turv] f. height
alugar ['elu'garj to hire, let
alumno [s'lunuj pupil, student
dlvo ['(Ami] m. white, aim
amanha [ame'jie] to-morrow

aynar [e'mar] to love
amarelo [vmv'relu] yellow
amargo fv'margu] bitter
amdvel [v'mavci] amiable
ambigao [vmbi'svu] f. ambi-
tion
amhicioso [imbisi'osu] ambi-
tious
amhos f'smbuf] both
ameaga [ymi'asv] f. threat,

menace
ameagar fvmtv'sar] to threaten
amendoa [e'mlndue] f. almond
americano fumeri'lcvnii] Ameri-
can
amigdvel [vmi' gavetj amicably
amigo [y'migu] m. friend
amiudo [•etm'uO'u] often
amizade [iem% zaffd] f. friend-
ship
amo I'vmu] ni. master
amor [e'mor] love
amostra [v'mostre] f. pattern,

sample
ancido [vsi'iu] m. old man
a/ncora ['vTcura] f. anchor
andar [vn'dar] to go, walk
andorinlia [endu'ripv] f. swallow
dngulo ['igulu] m. angle, corner
angustia [v'guftw] f. anguish,

pain
ariho I'yjiu] m. lamb
animal fvni'maij m. =
animo I'vnimu] m. valour, con-
rage
anjo [igu] m. angel
a(n)nel [v'nei] m. ring
a(n)nexo [v'neksu] annexed
a(n)niversdrio [vnivar' sarfu] m.

anniversary
a(n)nual [y'nuai] annual, yearly
a(n)mmciar [ynviisy ar] announce
a(n)nwncio [v'nusiu] advertise-
ment
anoitecer fvnoitg'ser] to grow

night, darken
antever [vntg'verj to foresee
antigo [vn'tigu] ancient
antiguidade [vntigi' ffaffa] anti-
quity
apagar fvpe'gar] to extinguish,
quench

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

423

■apanhar fepe'^a>-J to grasp,

catch, pick
■apartar [eper'tarj to separate
■apear, apiar [epi'arj to alight
apenas [v'penvf] scarcely
aperfeigoar fvpgrfvisu'ar] to ac-
complish
apertar [ypar'tar] to bind, tie,

press, squeeze
aperto [v 'pertu] m. crowd, throng
•apoderar-se [epu&s'rarsej to

seize, to take possession
■apontar [vpon'tarj to point,

aim at
aposento [epu'zentu] m. room
aposta [v'pofta] f. wager, bet
ap6stolo [^'poftulu] m. apostle
aCpJparecer [vpvra'serj appear
<i(p)parelho [vp's'trefiiu] m. ap-
paratus
<i(p)pelido [ypd'liffu] m. surname
a(jp^/)Za«so/»'pZaM«u7»n. applause
€t(p)plieaQao [splike 'svujf. appli-
cation
a(p)plicado [^pli'ka.d'u] diligent
a,(p)proximar [vprosi'marj to ap-
proach
aprego [e'presu] m. estimation
aprender [vpren'der] to learn
€iprendiz [vpren'di:/] m. ap-
prentice
apresentar [vpr9zen'tarj to pre-
sent, introduce
apressado [vpre'snira] hasty
uproveitar [epruv^f'tarj to profit
nptiddo [apti'Sfvu] f. aptness
aquecer [vhe'ser] to warm,

heat
aquelle [e'lcehj that
aqui [y'lcij here
<iquietar [vlcte'tarj to quiet
■aquillo [e'lciluj that
ar [arj m. air

arbitrdrio [vrbi 'trariu] arbitrary
arbusto [sr'biiftuj m. shrub
arcebispo [vrss'bifpuj m. arch-
bishop
arco ['arJcuJ m. arch
areia [e'rswj f. sand
argola fvr'galej f. ring
arguir [srgu'ir] to argue
aria ['anv] f. aria, air, song

drido ['ar'tOu] dry
arma ['arrive] f. weapon
armazem [vrmv'ze}] m. ware-
house, magazine
arranjar [errs'garj to arrange,

dispose
arrdtel [a'rrateij m. pound
arredores [vrra'fforif] m. pi. en-
virons
arrefecSr [errgfs'cer] to cool,

catch cold
arroe [e'rrofj m. rice
arte ['arts] f. art
artigo [vr'tiguj m. article
artilharia [vrti^'B'rijvJ f. ar-
tillery
artista [vr'tiftv] m. artist
drvore ['arvura] f. tree
asa ['azv] f. wing, handle
asno ['agnuj m. ass
dspero ['afpgruj rough
assado [v'sa&u] m. roast-meat
assaltar [vsat'tar] to assault
asseio fy'svtuj m. neatness
assentar [vsen'tarj to seat, put
assento [v'sentuj m. seat
assignatura [vsinv 'tmsj f. signa-
ture
assim [v'si] so
assistir fusi/'tir] to assist
ass4car [v'sukarj m. sugar
assunto [v'suntuj m. subject
assustar [vsuftar] to frighten
astro ['aftruj m. star
atirar [vti'rar] to throw,

fling
atraigoar [vtratsu'arj to betray
atrds [v'trafj behind, after
atraso [v'trazu] m. delay
atravessar [vtraw'sar] to cross
atento [v'tentu] attentive
au(g)mento [au'mlntu] m. aug-

, mentation, increase
Austria fauftriv] f. =
autor fau'tor] m. author
dvido faviffuj covetous, greedy
aviso /»'wsM7ni. communication,

advice
avo [e'vo] m. grandfather
avo [v'vo] f. grandmother
az&do fe'zeOu] sour
azdtdna [vgvi'towej f. olive

424

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

azul [v'zul] blue
azulejo [vzu'lvguj m. Dutcb
tile glazed.

B.

bacalhau [beky'/iauj m. cod-
fish

bacia [by'si:v] f. basin

haga ['bage] f. berry, drop (of
sweat)

bagdgem fbv'gagvij f. luggage

hago f'baguj m. grain of a
grape

bahia fbe'ie] f. bay; B—
Bahia

bailor [bat'lai-J to dance

baUe ['ba}h] m. ball

bainha [by'ijiv] f. sheath

bairro f'batrruj m. quarter of
a town

baixa ['baifsj decrease; leave,
B — part of Lisbon

baixar [bai'far] to sink, fall

baixella [baffelvj f. furniture
for the table, silver-plate

baixio [bay'fiu] m. low water

baixo [bai'fu] low

hala I'baleJ ball

balania [be'lvsa] f. balance,
scales

balango [bv'lvsii] m. belance

balcao [bul'kiu] m. balcony,
counter

baldado [bai'da&uj void

balde f'baidsj m. bucket

baloigar [baloy'sar] to balance

baneada [bv'kaffv] f. pew,
bench

banco ['bekuj m. bank

bandeira [bvn'dvtrvj f. flag,
ensign

band$ja [bvn'dvge] f. tray, tea-
board

bando f'benduj m. band

banho [' bvpuj m.ha.th; — s. pi.

baptismo [ba'tigmuj m. bap-
tism
barato [be'ratuj cheap
barba f'barbis] f. beard ; chin
barbear [biirWar] to shave

barca, barcaga ['barkv, bvr'kasvj

f. bark, ferry-boat, lighter
barco f'barkiij m. bark, boat
barra ['barrvj f. bar, mouth of

a river; trimming
barriga [bv'rrige] f. belly;

— da perna calf of the leg
barril [bv 'rrii] m. cask
barro ['barruj clay
barulho [bv'rufiu] m. noise
bastante [b^f 'tints] enough;

rather
bastar [bv/'tarj to be sufficient
batallm [bv'taHv] f. battle
batata [bv'tatv] f. potato
bater [bv'ter] to beat
beber [ba'ber] to drink
bebida [bn'biffej f. drink, potion
beigo ['bvisuj m. lip
bdjar /fisj'jar/ to kiss
beijo [bvigu] m. kiss
beira ['bvyrej brink, shore; B —

Province of Portugal
beiramar [buyr'e'mar] f. sea-
coast
belga ['bsigv] m. and f. Belgian
BUgica ['bsljikvj f. Belgium
beleza [ba'lezv] f. beauty
bem [bv}] well

bemfeitor [bvifey'tor] m. bene-
factor
bemquisto [bv}'k}ftu] well-
beloved
bengao fbessuj f. blessing
benefico [bd'ncfyku] beneficial
benivolo [ba'risvulu] benevolent
bento ['bentuj consecrated
benzer(-se) [bf' iier(-s3)] to con-
secrate, to make the sign of
the cross
berrar fba'rrarj to scream
besta ['befte] m. beast, brute
biblia ['Utlw] f. Bible
bicho ['bifu] m. worm
bieo fbikuj m. beak, bill
bife i'bifd] m. beef
hilha ['bvS's] f. earthen pot
bilhete [bi'Reta] m. note,

billet
bispo [bifpu] m. bishop
boato ['buatu] m. rumour
boca ['bokej f. mouth

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

425

bocado [hu'haffu] m. mouthful,

piece
toi [bo}J m. ox
hoia f'haiej f. buoy
hola f'MvJ f. ball
bolo f'boluj m. cake, biscuit
bolor [bu'lorj m. mould
bolsa ['bolsvj f. purse
bolso ['boisuj m. pocket
bom, boa [bo, bo's] good
bondade [bdn'dad'3] f. goodness
bonito [bu'nitu] nice
borboleta [burbu'lete] f. butterfly
bordo ['borduj m. board
borracha [bu'rrafvj f. leather

bottle
bofa ['bate] f. boot
botao [bu'ivu] m. button
botar [bu'tar] to cast, throw
bote I'botaJ m. boat
botica [bu'tike] f. apothecary's

shop
brago ['brasuj m. arm
bradar [bmoar] to shout
bramar [brvmur] to roar
branco ['brejcuj white
branguear [brvlei'ar] to whiten,

bleach
brasao [brv'gvu] arms
brasileiro [brezi'lviruj Brazilian
bravo f'bravuj brave, wild
breve ['brevd] brief
brilhar [hri'fiar] to shine, excel
brincar [bri"kar] to play
broa I'brov] f. bread of millet
bronze ['brozd] m. brass
burgues [bur'gef] m. citizen
burro ['burruj m. ass
buscar [buf"kar] to fetch
buxo ['bufu] m. box-tree

C.

cabesa [kv'besv] f. head
cabe(l)lo [ke'beluj m. hair
eaber [Tie'berJ to find room (in)
eabo [habu] m. end, handle
cabra ['kairej f. goat
cabrito [ke'britu] vi. kid
caga f'kase] f. chase
caeho fkafu] m. grape
caco f'kaku] m. potsherd

cada ['kvd^J every, any
cadeia [k^ ffviv] f. chain
cadeira [ka'detr^J f. chair
caderno [ke'ffernu] m. copy-
book
caes [kaif] m, quay
cafd [kv'fs] m. coffee-house
ca(h)ir [kn'ir] to fall
caixa ['katfvj f. box
caixdo [kai'Jvu] m. coffin
calar [Tee'lar] to keep secret
calfada fJcai'saffvJ f. pavement
calgado [kai'sa&uj f. shoes and

boots
cdlgar fkai'sar] to put on

shoes
calculo fkalkulu] m. calculation
caldeira [kai'dvfrej f. kettle
caldo ['kaiduj m. broth
calice, calis ['kalifj m. chalice
callo ['kaluj corn, hard skia
calmo ['katmuj calm
color [ke'lorj m. heat
cama f'kvmv] f. bed
camara ['kvmvrvj f. chamber
camarote [kvme'rotgj m. cabin,

box
canibio [kvrribiu] m. exchange;
letra de — bill of exchange
cambista [kSm'biftv] m. money-
changer
caminho [kii'mijiu] in. way
camisa [ka'misv] f. shirt
eampainha [kimpv'ijiv] f. bell
campo f'kempuj m. field ; no —

in the country
caneca [kv'iukvj f. mug, can
eanel(l)a [k^'riElv] f. cinnamon
canhao fke'jivu] m. cannon
canna ['k'en'e] f. cane, reed; de

asuccar sugar-cane
eatzo ['k vnuj m. pipe, tube
canon ['kmton] m. cannon
cansago [kv'sasuj m. weariness
cansar fke 'sarj to tire
canlar [kin tar] to sing
canto [kvntu] m. song
cao [kvuj m. dog
capa ['kapv] f. cloak, cover
capaz [kv'pafj capable
capel(l)a [kv'pele] f. chapel
capital [kept'tai] =

426

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

capitao [kepi'teu] m. captain
capltulo [ke'pitulu] m. chapter
ca(p)tivo [ke'tivuj m. captive
cara ['karej f. face
caracol [kere'Tcjl] m. snail;

helix
cardcter [ke'raterj m. character
car da ['karda] carding-comb
carded [kvrdfal] m. cardinal
cardo f'karduj m. thistle
carga ['karge] f. load, harden
cargo [Icargu] m. charge
caridade [keri'ffada] f. charity
came ['karns] f. meat
carneiro [kEr'n^iru] in. mutton,

ram
caro ['karuj dear
carril fkE'rriiJ m. track; pi.

carris rail
carro ['karru] m. car, carriage
carrudgem [kerru'agvij f. car-
riage
carta f'kartvj f. letter
carleira [kir'tvire] f. pocket-
book
carteiro [ker'tviru] m. postman
carvalho fkvr'vaAuJ m. oak
carvao [kvr'vsuj m. coal
casa ['kazej f. house
easacao [kvzv'hiu] m. great-
coat
casamento [kvzv 'mentuj m. wedd-
ing
casar [ke'zarj marry
casca ['kafkv] f. bark, rind
cascata [kefkaivj f. cascade
caso f'kazuj m. case, accident
easte(l)lo [kef'telu] castle
castigar [kvf'tigar] to punish
casulo [ka'zulu] m. hull, hask
Cauda f'kaudej f. tail, train
causa I'kausaJ f. cause, plea
oautela [kau'telej caution,

ticket
cavalariga [kevEle'risBj f. stable
cavallo [he'valu] m. horse
cear [sy'ar] to sup
cehdla [sa'tolv] f. onion, bulb
cedo f'sefuj soon
cego [seguj blind
ceifar [sei'farj to harvest, cut
(corn)

celebrar [sdh'brar] to celebrate
celebre ['iehira] famous
cem [sv}] a hundred
censura [se'sarv] f. censure
cerdro ['sentru] m. centre
cera fsers] f. wax
cereo ['serkuj f. circle, circuit
cerebro fserabruj m. brain,

head
cereja [sg'rejvj f. cherry
cerejeira [sdry' gvire] f. cherry-
tree
cerrar [sa'rrarj to shut, close

up
certeza [sar'tezv] f. certainty
certidao [s3rtt'dvuj m. certifi-
cate
certo f'sertuj sure, certain
cessar [sa'sar] to cease
ceu, [sEu] m. heaven, sky
chdcara ['fakvrej f. Bras, farm,

country-house
chaga ['fagvj f. wound
ehamar ['fvmar] to call
chamma ['fvmvt] f. flame, blaze
cliao [fiu] m. ground, soil,

floor
charuto [fe'rutu] cigar
chaio f'fatuj flat
chave ['favaj f. key
chegar [ff'gar] to arrive
cheio ['feiuj full
cheirar [fvi'rarj to smell
chicara ['fikervj f. cup
ehim, chines [Ji, fi'nef] m.

Chinese
chita ['fitv] f. printed calico
chorar ffu'rarj to cry, weep
ehourigo [fo'risu] m. sausage
chover [fu'ver] to rain
christao [krif'tvu] (m.) Christian
chronista [kru'niftis] m. chro-
nicler
chumbo f'fumbuj m. lead
chuvoso [fu'vozuj rainy
cicatrizfsike 'trifjf. cicatrice, scar
cidade [gi'ffaff^J f. town
cigarro fs}'garru] m. cigar
cima f'simej f. top; em — on,

upon
cineo ['sikuj five
cincoenta [si'kwentie] fifty

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

427

circo [sirJcu] m. circus
circular [sfrkularj to circulate
oirculo f'sirkuluj m. circle
civil [sa'vii] civil, polite
ehrear, clarificar [klert'dr,
klvrtfi'kar] to grow light, to
clear
claro ['klaruj clear
classe ['klasaj f. class, species
clima f'klime] m. climate
cobarde [ku'barda] (m.) coward
coiberta [ku'bertsj f. cover
cobertor [kubar'torj »m. blanket,

quilt
cobertura [kubir'ture] f. cover-
ing
cobre [hfbrd] m. copper
eobrir [kii'brir] to cover
eoche ['kofij m. coach
eoelho f'kus'ltu] m. rabbit
collier [ku Her] to gather, pluck
collegial [kuligi'ai] collegiate
collo ['kaluj m. neck, lap
eollocar fkulu'karj to put
colonia [ku'lonfv] f. colony
colza fkotzej f. barley
combater [koinbv 'terj to combat
combinoQao [kombinv'sau] f.

combination
coinbdio [kom'batuj m. train
combustivel [kOmbuf'tivsiJ (m.)

combustible
comegar [kuma'sar] to begin
comedia [ku'msd'iv] f. comedy
comer [ku'merj to eat
co(m)memorar [kunumu'rarj to

commemorate
cofmjmerdal [kumvrsi'al] =
co(tn)nierciante[kum9i-si 'vntaj m.

merchant
co(m)mircio [ku'mersfuj m. com-
merce
com(m)etter [kuma 'terJ to commit
co(m)migo [ku'migu] with me
co(vi)misao [kumi'seaj f. com-
mission
c6(m)moda ['komu'dv] f. chest of

drawers
colm)fnodo[komudu]aom.-m.od.\o\xi
co(m)mover ['kumuver] to move
co(m)mumcagd,o [kumunikv 'svuj
f. communication

comnosco [kd'nofku] with us

coma f'komuj how

companheiro [kompv'jvetru] m.
companion

comparagdo [kdmpvrE 'ssuj f.
comparison

comparecer [kompera'serj to
appear

compartimento [kdmpsrti'men-
tu] m. division, compartment

compasso [kom'pasu] m. com-
pass(es)

compatriota [kompv trhte] m.
and f. country-man (-woman)

compendia fkdin'pend}u] m. com-
pendium

completar [komph't&r] to com-
plete

complicar [kdmpl}'kar] to com-
plicate

compdsto [kom'poftu] compound

comprar [kom'prar] to buy

comprefhejnder [kompryen'der]
to comprehend

compndo [kom'priffu] long

concelho [ko' satin] m. council;
district

concertar [kSsar'tar] to mend,
repair

concha f'kdfe] f. shell

concorrer [koku'rrer] to concur

concorrencia fkoku'rresie] f.
competition

concurso [ko'kursu] m. con-
course, crowd

conde(m)na.r [konda'nar] to con-
demn

condigao [kondi' ssu] f. condition

condiseipulo [kondffsiptdu] m.
school-fellow

condacta [kOn'dute] f. conduct

confessar [kofs'sur] to confess

coniianQa [kofy'isv] f. con-
fidence

conforme [ko'fornw] like, con-
form

confuso [kO'fusn] mixed, con-
founded

congratidar [kSgrstu'Ur] to con-
gratulate

conhecimento [kojiisi'mentu] m.
knowledge

428

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

conq^uista [kd'kiftsj f. conquest
consciimna [kofs}'egi^] f. con-
science
conseguvr [kosB'^ir] to reach
conselho [ko'svUu] m. advice
consentir [kosen'tir] to consent
consideraQao fkosi&srv 'svuj f.

consideration
cmisiderar [kosi&a'mr] to con-
sider
eoHsistir [kOsis'tirJ to consist
consoante [kosu'ints] f. con-
sonant
consocio [ko'sos'uj m. com-
panion, associate
consolo [ko'solu] m. consolation
constmite [koj'ivnta] steady
constar [koj'tur] to appear, to

be said
constipado [kiyti'pai)^uj, estar —

to have a cold
constituigao [koftitui'sSnJ f.

constitution
construcQao [koftru'svii] f. con-
struction
cansulta [ko'suHv] f. consulta-
tion
conta ['konte] f. account, bill
contagiosa [kontiegi'ozu] con-
tagious
contar [kon'tar] to count, reckon
contents [kon'tentd] content
center [kon'terj to contain
conteilde fkont} 'ii&uj in. contents
continuar [kontinu'ar] to con-
tinue
canto f'kontuj m. tale, story;

— de reis = 1000 milreis
contra ['kdntre] against
convento [ko've ntuj m. convent
conversa, conversagao [ko'vsrsv,

kovarsE'svuJ f. conversation
convicgao [kdvik'svuj f. con-
viction
convidar [kovi'd'a.r] to invite
copia ['kopia.] f. copy
cor [kor] f. colour
cor [kor], de — by heart
coragdo [kurv'seuj m. heart
cor da [ku'roe, 'krav] f. crown
coroar [ku'ruar] to crown
corpo ['korpu] m. body

correio [ku'rrefuj m. post,
courier; — geral chief post
office
corrente [ku'rrentd] f. current,

stream
correr [ku'rrerj to run, flow
correspondencia [kumfpon'de-

giv] f. correspondence
corrigir fkurra'sirj to correct,

to mend
cortar [kur'tar] to cut
eorte f'kortaj m. edge, cut
cdrte ['kortij f. court
cortejo [kur'te^uj m. train, at-
tendance
eortes [kur'tef] polite
cortesia [kurta'ziiv] f. courtesy,

bow
cortiga fkur'tisvj f. rind, bark
coiiigo [kur'tisu] m. bee-hive
cortir [kur'tir] to tan
corvo ['korim] m. raven
coser [ku'zerj to sew, coast

alonjT
casta ['kaftvj f. coast, shore
eostumar [kuflu'mar] to be ac-
customed
costura [kuf'turv] f. sewing
costureira [kujtu'rvyrv] f. seam-
stress
couro ['koru] m. leather
couve J'kovd] f. cabbage
cova I'kom] f. hole, grave
c6xa fkofvj f. thigh
cozer [ku'zerj to cook, boil,

bake
cozido [kit 'ziduj m. boiled meat
cozinha [ku'zijiv] f. kitchen
craneo ['krvniu] m. skull
cravo ['kravuj m. pink, clove
creasao [kr}v'svuj f. creation
creador [kriv'fforj m. creator
crear [kr} 'arj to create
creatura [kryv'turv] f. creature
crSdito ['krs&ituj m. credit, re-
putation
crenga ['kresvj f. faith
crer [krerj to believe
crescer [kraf'serj to grow
criado, -a [krt'adu, kri'affej s.

servant
crianga [krt'ese] f. child

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

429

criar [Icn'arJ to breed, produce,

educate
crime ['krimaj m. =
criminoso [hrami'nosu] criminal
era pcru] raw
cruel [kru'ei] =
crug [Tcru:f] f. cross
cuidado pcui'ffadu] m. care
cujo ['Icugu] whose
culpa fkulpv] f. fault
cuUivar [kuiti'varj cultivate
cumplice ['kumplisaj m. accom-
plice
cumulo fkumuluj m. heap
cunhado, (-a) [ku'jtaffuj s.

brother-(8ister)-in-law
cunho ['kujiuj m. stamp, coin
oura ['kurej s. cure, curate
curativo [kure'tivu] curing
curioso [kui'i'osuj curious
curral fku'rrai] m. sheep-fold,

pen
curso ['kursuj m. course, race
curto ['hurtuj short
cuspir [kuf'pir] to spit
custa ['kufte] f. cost, expense,

pain
custo ['kuftu] m. cost, diffi-
culty
cutelo [ku'tslu] m. knife
cutilada [kutt' laffej f. cut, wound
cgar [ks'zarj m. =

D.

dddiva ['da,d}vvj f. gift
dado ['daifu] die
dama ['deme] f. dame, lady
damasco [dv 'mafku] m. damask ;

apricot
da(m)iw [dvnuj m. damage
dansa ['dvse] f. dance
dar [dar] to give
data ['da.t'e] f. date
debaixo [dd'iaffu] under
debalde [dd'haldd] in vain
dibil I'deHlJ weak
debito ['debituj m. debt
decencia [da 'ses}ej f. decency
decidir [dasd '&ir] to decide
deeifrar [ddsi'frar] to decipher

decima ['dssimvj f. tenth
declaragao [daklvre'seuj f. de-
claration
declinar [dakWnarJ to decline
declive [da'klmj m. steep
decoro [ds'koru] m. decorum
decorrer [ddku'rrer] to elapse
decreto [dd'kretu] m. decree
decuplo ['dekupluj tenfold
dedal [dd'ffal] m. thimble
dedicar [de&i'kar] to dedicate
dedo f'deffuj m. finger
defeito [da'faitu] m. defect
defender [dafen' der] to defend
deferir [ddfa'rir] to defer
defesa [da'feza,] f. defence
defeso [dd'fezu] m. forbidden
definitivo [dafana'tivuj definitive
defronte [da frontaj opposite
defunto [da'fimtu] defunct
degredo [da'tfreffuj m. exile
deitar [dvi'tar] to lay down,

cast
deixar [d'ei'fa/r] to let, leave
deleitar [dalvf'tarj to delight
delgado [dei'ga&uj thin
deliberar [daliba'rarj to de-
liberate
delicado [daWkaffu] delicate
demais, demasiado [da'ma.'if, dd-

miez}'a&u] too (much)
demente [da'ments] foolish, mad
demi(t)Ur [dama'tir] dismiss
democratafdamu'kratej m. demo-
crat
demora [da'more] f. delay
demostrar [damuf'trarj to de-
monstrate
denso ['desuj dense, thick
dentado [den'tadu] toothed
dente ['dentaj m. tooth
dentista [den lift's] m. dentist
dentro ['dentruj within
dependente [dapen'denta] depend-
ing
deplorar [daplu'rarj to deplore
depor [da'por] to deposit
deposito [da'pog}tu] m. deposit
depressa [da presaj quick
derradeiro [dam 'ffviru] last
derreter [darra'ter] to melt
derrota [da'rrot'e] f. defeat

430

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

desafogar [dszefii' gar] to free,
clear

desagraddvel [d^zvgre' da-VEi] dis-
agreeable

desalento fdaza'lfntuj \ j;,_,oTr

desdnimo [de 'zvnimu] f ^

desapparecer fdszvpera'serj dis-
appear

desapprovar [dazapru'varj dis-
approve

desarmamenio [dazurmv 'mentuj
m. disarming

desarravjo [dszs'rre^uj m. con-
fusion, disorder

desastre [da 'zajtrd] m. disaster

desatar [dazv'tarj to untie,
loosen

desa(t)tengdo[dci3ste'ssuJ f. want
of attention

desa(t)tencioso ]

[dazvtes} 'ozuj I impolite,

desa(t)tento | inattentive
[d3zv 'tentuj i

desbaratar [digbvre 'tarj to waste

desbastar [dfgbvf't&r] to rough-
bew

desbotar [dygbu'tar] to dis-
colour

descalgar [diflcai'sarj to pull oif
(shoe or glove)

descalso [dtf'kafsuj bare-foot-
ed

deseansar [d}fkv'sar] to rest

descanso [djjf'MsuJ m. rest, re-
pose, ease

descarga [d}f'hargv] f. discharge

descascar [dtfksf'JcarJ to peel,
husk

descender [difsen'der] to des-
cend, proceed

descer [dyf'ser] to descend

descida [dif'siffv] f. declivity

descoberta [djjku'bertvj f. dis-
covery

deseobrir [dffku'trir] to dis-
cover

desconfianga fdifkof} 'sssj dis-
trust

desconhecido [d}fkoji»'siffu] un-
known

desconsolo fdtfkd'solu] m. af-
fliction

descontente [difkdn'ientd] dis-
contented
descoser [dyfku'zer] to unsew
descredito [d^f'kred}tuj m. dis-
credit
descuido fdff'kwd'uj m. descuido
desculpa [dff'kuips] f. excuse
desde ['degfyj since
desdem [dy^'ds'i] m. disdain
desejo fda'zsguj m. desire
desembaraQO [dszimbv 'ram] m.

ease, quickness
desencaminhar [dasiksmi 'jiwr]

to mislead
desengano [ddze'gvivu] m. un-
deceiving
desenho [da'zvjm] m. drawing
desenvolver [dgzwol'verj to de-
velop, display
desertar [dazar'tarj to desert
desespero [daz'if'peru] m. des-
pair
desfazer [diffe'zer] to undo
desfeita [dff fvitv] f. insult
desgroQa fd}^' grass] f. disgrace
designar [dazi'par] to design
dtslumbfar [d}glum'brarj to

dazzle
desmaio fdfg'matu] m. swoon
despacho fdff'pafuj m. dispatch
despedir [dtfpa'dirj to dismiss
despir [dff'^irj to undress
destino [dlf'tinu] m. destiny
desiruir fdtftru irj to destroy
deter [dg'terj to detain
determinado [datsrmi'nadu] de-
cisive
detrds [da'trafj behind
devagar [ddve'gar] slowly
dever fda'ver] m. duty
deviras [di 'vsref] really, indeed
devolver fdavoi'verj to restore
dez fdefj ten

dezembro [dg'zembruj December
dia f'diaj m. day
didlogo [dfaluguj m. dialogue
dictado [di'ta&u] dictation, pro-
verb
di(f)ferenQa [difs'rensv] diffe-
rence
di(f)fieil fda'fisilj difficult
dignidade [dign}' ffa&d] f. dignity

Portugueee-EngliBh Vocabularj'.

431

diligente fdaU'gentaJ diligent
diminuir fdgmi 'nuirj to diminish
direcgao [dire' sew] f. direction
direito [di'reitu] straight, direct,

m. right, law; pi. duties
dirigir [dati'gir] to direct
disdpulo [dtf'sipulu] m. pupil,

disciple
dispensar [difpen'sar] to dis-
pense
disponivel [dtfpu'nivsij dis-
posable
disp6r [dif'porj to dispose
disputa [d'lf'putvj f. dispute
dissolver [dtsoi'verj to dissolve
distdncia [dif'testej f. distance
distincto [dt/'KntuJ distinct,

distinguished
diverso [di'versuj diverse
divida f'divife] f. debt
dividir [ddV9'&ir] to divide
divino [da'vinu] divine
diser [di'zer] to say
dS [do] f- pain, compassion
dobra [ ddbra] f. plait
ddbrar , [du'trar] to double
dobro fdoiru] double
doce ['dosa] m. sweet(meat)
ddcil f'dosii] docile
doenga [du'ess] f. illness
doente [du'entg] sick
dolorosa fdulu'rozu] painful
dom [do] m. gift
domistico [du'msftiku] domestic
domicilio [duma'sillu] m. dwell-
ing
dominar [dumy'nar] to lord,

command
domingo [du'migu] m. Sunday
dominio [du'miwiu] m. dominion
dona ['donv] f. (land)lady,

owner
dona ['donu] m. owner, land-
lord
dor [dor] f. pain
dormir [dur'mir] to sleep
dmirar [do'rar] to gild
doutor [do' tor] m. doctor
Aroga ['drog-e] f. drug
droguista [dru 'giftvj m. druggist,

grocer
duplo ['duplu] double

duque, duquesa ['duka, du'lcezv]

duke, duchess
duragao [durv'siu] f. duration
durante [dwrvnta] during
durar [du'rar] to last
dureza [du'rezv] hardness
dii/ro ['duru] hard
d^vida ['duviffe] f. doubt
duvidar [duvioar] to doubt
duvidoso [duvi'&osuj doubtful
duzentos [du 'eentus] two hundred
d^sia [ dusw] f. dozen.

E.

ebuUgao [ibuli'svu] f. ebullition
econdmico [i'ku'nom'iku] econo-
mical
edigao [iM'siiu] f. edition
edificar [itafi'lcar] to edify
edificio [iffa'fistu] m. edifice
edital [idi'taij m. edict
editor [i&i'tor] m. =
educar [iffu'Tcar] educate
e(f)fectivo [ifs'tivu] effective
e(f)feito [i'f'sytu] effect
e(f)fieaz [ifi'haj] efficacious
Egi(p)to [i'gitu] m. Egypt
ei-lo(s), eil-a(s) or eila [vjluCf),.

'vilv(f)] there is, there are
ei/ra ['v}rv] threshing-floor
eis [v}f] there is
elictrico [i'htriku] eleotric(al)
elegante [ila'gmta] elegant
eleger [iltger] to elect
eleigao [ilvi'seu] f. election
eleito [i'lvftu] in. elected
eleitor [ilvftor] m. elector
elevar [ih 'var] to raise, elevate<
elogio [ilu'giuj m. elogy
eloquente [ilu'kwenia] eloquent
embaixador [zmbayjv '&or] m..

ambassador
embarago [imbe'rasw] m. em-
barrassment
embarcar [Imbvr 'Tear] to embark
embeber [wiba'ber] to imbibe
embolsar [tmboi'sar] to put into

a purse, pocket
embolso [m'boisu] pocketing up
embora [zm'barv] m. neverthe-
less; ir — , se — to go away

432

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

emhratiquecer pmbreka'scr] to

whiten, to grow white
embriagar [imhrfe'gar] to in-
toxicate; to transport
^mhrulhar [mbru'^ai-J to wrap

up
€>nbntlho [im'brufiu] m, parcel
emendar ftmen'darj to mend
emigroQao [imigrv 'svuj f. emi-
gration
emmagrecer ftmngrs 'sjrj to grow

lean
emvialar [line larj to embale
emmudecer [zmuff/serj to silence
emoQiw [inm'svuj f. emotion
empallidecer [impvliffa 'serj to

grow pale
empenhar ftmpa'jiarj to engage,

pledge
empenho [im'pejiu] m. pawn,

engagement
emplastro [im'plaftru] m. plaster
empregado [mpra'gatuj m. of-
ficial, functionary
empregar [impragarj to employ
emprego [im'preguj m. employ-
ment
empre(h)ender [imprpn' der] to

undertake
■empresa [im'prezv] f. enterprise
emprestar [impraf'tarj to lend
emprhtimo [im 'prej't}muj m.

loan
empurrao [impu'rrvu] m. push
empmrar [impu'rrar] \ , ,

empuxar pmpu'farj J ° P"^
eiicadernar [ikeffdr 'narj to bind

(books)
encaminhar [iksm} 'jiar] to direct,

guide
encanar [ike 'nar] to canalise
encanto [i'kvntuj m. charm
eiieargo [i'karguj m. charge
encarnado [zkvr'na^u] incarnate
tncarregado [ilcsrrg'gaffuj char-
ged
encerrar [%S3 'rrar] to shut or lock

^nchente [ifentd] m. inundation,

swelling
encher [i'ferj to fill, to rise
encobrir [tkubrirj to cover

encolher [iku'Rer] to shrink,

shrug
encommendar [zkumen 'darj to

recommend
encontrao [ikon'trvu] m. shock
encontrar [ihon'trarj to meet
encontro [i'Mntru] m. meeting
encosta [X'hoatv] f. declivity
encostar [ilcuf'tarj to lean
enderego [ida'resu] m. direction
endireitar [idirvftar] to make

straight
enirgico [i'ncr^ilcuj energetic
enfadonho [ifv 'ffojiu] tiresome
enfastiado [ifvffi'atu] weary,

loathful
enfeitar [ifvi'tar] adorning
enfeite [zf^ytg] m. garb, attire
enfermar [ifar'mar] to grow

sick, fall ill
enfermo [t'fermuj sick, ill
enforcar [ifur'har] to hang
enfraquecer [ifrvlid 'serJ to

weaken, slacken
engunar [igv'narj to deceive
engano [i'gvnu] m. error, mis-
take
engarrafar [igvrrv 'far] to bottle
engenho [i'gvjiu] m. engine,

machine
engommar [igu'mar] to starch,

iron
engragado [igm 'saffu] merry,

graceful
engrandecer [igrvndg'serj to en-
large
engulir [zgu'UrJ to swallow,

devour
enigma [i'nigmv] m. =
enjoar [Igu'ar] to be sea-sick
enlagar [Uv'sar] to interlace,

entangle
enleio [i'hiu] m. perplexity;

charm
enlutar [ilu'tarj to cover with

mourning
enndbrecer [inubrg'ser] ennoble
enredo [I'rreOu] m. intrigue
enrolar [irru'lar] to roll, to

wrap
enrouquecer [irrohs'ser] to make

hoarse

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

483

«nsaio [i'sstiu] m. essay, rehear-
sal
entalhar fintv 'fiar] to carve
entao [m'tvu] then; well?
€nte ['entsj ni. being
entender [mten'derj to under-
stand, mean
^ntendido [mten'di&o] intelligent
enterro [in'terroj m. burial
entoar [mtu'arj to tune
entrada [m'tra,&v] f. entrance
entranhas [m'trejivfj f. pi.

bowels, heart
entrar [in'trar] to enter
entre ['entra] among, between
entregar [intr9'gar] to hand,

deliver
^ntregue [m 'tregd] delivered up
entreter [Xntrs'ter] to divert,

amuse
^ntrevista [intn'viftv] f. inter-
view
intristeeer [intriftd'ser] to sad-
den
entrudo [in'trudu] m. carnival
■enumeras&o [inumarv 'seuj f.

enumeration
envelhecer [iveHi'ser] to make

or grow old
envenenar [w3n3'nar] to poison
enverdecer [wards' ser] to make

or become green
envolver [wcU'ver] involve
enxame fffvmgj m. swarm
enxerto p'fertuj m. graft, scion
enxofre [ifofrd] m. brimstone
enamgar [ifw'gar] to dry,

wipe
enxuto [i'futu] dry
Spico ['spihu] epic
epidemia [ipafft'mia] f. epidemy
epiderma fipi'dermej f. epi-
dermis
epigraphs [i'pigrvfaj f. epigraph
epilog [i'pilugu] m. epilogue
epistola [i'pistulvj f. epistle,

letter
Spoca ['spuhsj f. epoch
equilibrio [iki'lviryu] m. equi-
librium
equipdgem [iWpagS}] f. equi-
page, furniture
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.

equivaler [ikivv 'lerj to be equi

valent
equivoco [i'hwuhu] m. ambiguous
ermida [ir'mi:cfv] f. hermitage
ermitao [irmi'tvu] m. hermit
errar [i'rrar] to err
erro ['erru] m. error
erudito [iru'dituj well-read
erupgao [irup'svu] f. eruption
ervilha [ir'viMvJ f. pea
esboQar [igbu'sa,r] to sketch
escada [if'kadsj f. stairs
escala [ij'halvj f. ladder, scale
escaldar [ifkaidarj to scald, burn
escapar fffjcs'parj to escape
escarlate [}f7evr'lat9j scarlet
escarnecer [tfk^rna'serj to scoff,

rail
esedrneo fifkarnntj m. mockery
escasso [}f'kasuj scanty
esclarecimento fijklvrasi 'mSntu]

m. clearing
escola [if'kolej f. school
escolher [ifku'fier] to choose
esconder [ifkon'der] to hide
escosses [{fku'sefj m. Scotch
Escossia [}J"kos}v] f. Scotland
escova [Yfkoim] f. brush
escraviddoffjkrsvi'dvuJf.slaYerj
eseravo [if kravuj m. slave
escrever [ifkra'verj to write
escripto [if'krituj written
escriptor [i/kri'torj m. writer,

author
eserivaninha [ffh-ive 'nijiaj f.

writing-desk
escrivdo [ifhri'veu] m. clerk
escrofulas [ffkrofulefj f. pi.

scrofula
escrupulo [}J'krupulu] m. scruple
escuddro [}fku' d'B'iru] m. squire;

upper servant
escudo [ff'kuduj m. shield
esculptor [ffkui'torj m. sculptor
escumoso [tjku'mosuj frothy
eseurecer [ifkura 'serj to darken
escuro [}f'ku:ruj dark
escusa [yf'kuev] f. excuse
escusado [yjku'sa&u] superfluous
escutar ['ifku'tar] to hearken
esforgar [}ffur'sarj to streng-
then; se to endeavour

434

Portuguese-English Vocabularj.

esforgo [if'forsu] m. effort
esgotado [}ggu'tafaj exhausted
esgrima [xg' gri-.mv] f. fencing
esguio [iggvu] lank
esmagar [igmE'gar] to bruise
esmaltar [tgmai'tar] to enamel
esmero ftg'meruj m. care, dili-
gence
esmola [■ig'nule] f. alms
espa(0 [ifpa^u] m. espace
espasoso ft/pv'so:zuJ espacious
espada [if'pa&ej f. sword
espalhar [ifpe'darj to scatter
Espanha [ifpejiv] f. Spain
espanhol [ifp^'fioij Spanish
espantar [if pen' tar] to startle
espanto fif'pentuj m. fright
especial [ifp}Sf'aiJ =
especiaZidade [ifpysiM'taOa] f.

speciality
espicie [}f'pt:s^3] f. species
espectador [y/petB (for] m. spec-
tator
espeeuloioo [tfpsktde'ssu] f.

speculation
espelho [fJ'psRu] m. mirror,

looking-glass
esperanga [■ifpi'rvgs] f. hope
esperar [ifpa'rar] to wait, hope
espertar [if par 'tar] to awake
esperto[if'pertu]apT\ght]j, brisk
espesso [if]'pesu] thick, close
esphera [if [Eire] f. sphere
espiga [if'pi:gs] f. ear (of com)
espingarda [}fpi'gar&e] f. gun
espiriha [^fpijiv] f. spine
espinho [ff'pijnu] m. thorn
espirito [yfpirirtu] m. spirit
espirrar [}[pi'rrar] to sneeze
esplmdido ['if'plendi&u] splendid
esponja [j^'pSge] f. sponge
espontaneo [yfpon'tewiu] spon-
taneous
espora [Tf'pirsJ f. spur
espdso, -a [if'pozu, yfpozv] s.

husband; wife
espreitar [ff prey' tar] to spy
espremer [tfpra'mer] to press,

squeeze
esquadra [if'kwaffre] f. squadron
esquecer [yfke'ser] to forget
esquecido [ifTcE'siffu] forgetful

esqutrda ftf'lcerdsj f. left hand
esquerdo [{fkerduj left
esquina [if'kinvj f. corner
essencial [isl'gial] essential
estabehcimento [tftvhahsi'mentuj

m. establishment
estaQao [yftv'seu] f. station
estada [tf'ta&e] f. abode
estado [if'tadu] m. state
estaldgem [yfte'lagvy] f. inn
estampa [ff'tvmpe] impression,.

print
estampilha [if'tvmpilis] f. stamp
estdncia [}f'tes}ej f. station;;

abode
estanho [yftejiu] m. tin
egtante [if'tenta] f. book-shelf
estar [if'tar] to be
estdtua [^f'tatue] f. statue
estatvto [yfts'tutu] m. statute
este, -a [efta, 'estv] this
estender [yften'der] to extend
estiril [if'tsrii] sterile, barren
estilo [}f'tt:luj m. style
estima [ff'ti:mv] f. esteem
estimar [yfti'niar] to estimate
estimulo [yf'tv.mulu] m. stimulus
estio [tf'ti:u] m. summer
estival [ifti'vai] =
estofo [yf'tofuj m. stuff, cloth
estojo [y['to:su] m. case, box
estomago [if'tomvgu] vi. stomach
estorvo [ij'torvu] m. obstacle
estrada [yftraHv] f. road
estrado [yftratu] m. estrade
estragar [iftre'gar] to spoil
estrago [yf'tragu] m. damage
estrangeiro [yftre'gvtru] foreign-

(er)
estranharfiftrv '^lar/to wonder at
estranho [yf'tnejiu] strange
estrebaria [iftrihv'ri:v] f. stable
estreitar [yftrvi'tarj to straiten
estreito [if'treitu] m. narrow,.

strait
estrella [tf'trelv] f. star
estremecer [yftrama' ser] to shake^

tremble
estrondo [yf'trondu] m. cracking-
estudante [tftu'dvnta] m. student
estudar [yftu'dar] to study
estudioso [yftu'fffosu] studious

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

435

estudo [tf'tu:ffu]m. learning
estufa [i/'tufvj f. store, hot-
house
estupidee [tjtupi'def] f. stupidity
estupido [■tf'tu:pi&u] stupid
eternidade ['itdrni' ffaffa] f. eter-
nity
etemo [i'ternu] eternal
ether ['etsr] m. =
evacuar [ivv'hwar] to evacuate
evadir [ivie'&ir] to avoid, es-
cape
evangelho [ivi'gisfiu] m. gospel
emasao [iw'ziu] f. evasion
evidente [ivi'd^nti] evident
evitar [ivi'tar] to avoid
exacto [(v)i'sa.tu] exact
exagerar [(e^izvga'rarj to ex-
aggerate
exce(l)lencia [('is)ifsd'lenstv] f. ex-
cellence
exee(l)lente [(v)ifs3'lent3] excel-
lent
exce(pJgao [(v)ifse'seuj f. exc&p-

tion
excefpjto [if'setu] except
excluir [ifhluir] to exclude
executar [izaku'tstr] to execute
exemplo [i'zemplu] m. example
exircito [i'zsrsitu] m. army
exigir [isi'gvr] to claim
exilio [i'zi:l}u] m. exile
existir [isif'ti:r] to exist
exito ['vtzitu] m. success
expectativa fifpstv'tivej f. ex-
pectation
expedir ft/pa '&i:rj to dispatch
experUneia [tfparf'estyj f. ex-
perience
experimento [ffpm'mentu] m.

experiment
expirar [yfpi'rar] to expire, ex-
hale
expliear ['ifpli'har] to explain
exportar [ffpu'r'tarj to ex-
port
expressive [ijpra'sv.vu] expres-
sive
expresso [if'prssu] express
expulsar [ifpul'sar] to expel
extenso [if'tesu] extensive
extracto fif'tratu] m. extract

extraordindrio [tftrvordi'iiariuj

extraordinary
extrSmo [}f'tre:muj \ ,
extremoso [}ftr9'mozu] \ ®^''''^™6-

fdbrica ['fatirikv] f. fabric
fabricar [fvbri'karj to manu-
facture
fdbrico ffe'bri:TcuJ m. fabrication,

manufacture
fdbula ['fatulej f. fable
fabuloso [fvbu'lo:zu] fabulous
faca ['fakie] f. knife
facada [fv"ka&e] f. stab
faganha [fis'sejm] f. exploit
face ['fasa] f. =
fachada [fv'fadvj f. fa9ade,

front
facho ['fafuj m. torch, fagot
fdctl ['fasii] easy
facilitar [fvsali 'tar] to facilitate
facto ['factu] m. fact
faetura [fa'tumj f. facture; bill
fada f'fadej f. fairy, fay
fadiga [fv '&i:gej hardship,

fatigue
fado f'faduj m. fate, popular

song
faia [faye] f. beech
faisca [fv'ifkej f. flake, flash
fdlar [fv'lar] to speak
fdlcdo [fai'kvuj m. falcon
fa(l)lecer [fish'ser] to die
fa(l)lecimento [fvJasi'mentijt] m.

death
fa(l)lencia [fv'les}vj f. failure
fa(l)lido [fv'lvffuj in failure
falso f'fatsuj false
falta f'faitsj f. want
f altar ffai'tar] to want
falto ['faltuj (de) bare (of)
fama ['feme] f. fame
familia [fv'midtv] f. family
faminto [fv'mmtu] hungry
fanioso [fe'mo:zu] famous
fanal [fe'nal] m. lighthouse
farda ['fardv] f. uniform
fardo I'fardu] m. pack
farejar ffert'sar] to scent
farelo [fe'rslu] bran

28*

436

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

farinha [fe'ripv] f. meal, flour

faro [fsruj m. scent

farpa [f^rp^] f. harpoon,

grapnel
farpear [fBrpi'ar] to harpoon
farrapo [fv'rra.pu] m. rag
fartar [fvr'tar] to satiate
farto [ fctrtu] satiated
fastio [fvj'tiiu] m. loathsome-
ness
fatal [fe'taij =
fatia [fs'tim] f. slice
fatigar [f Hi' gar J to fatigue
fato ['fatuj m. clothes
fausto ['fauftuj fortunate
fava f'favv] f. beau
favo [ favuj m. honeycomb
favor [fe'vorj m. favour
favordvel [fvvu'ravci] favourable
faxa ffafej f. band
fazenda [fe'zendvj f.farm; cloth,

goods
fazendeiro [fvzen'dviru] m. co-
lonist
fazer [fe'zerj to make, do
fe [fej f. faith
febra ['febrej f. fibre
febre ['febr3j f. fever
fechar [f}'far] to shut
ficho [ f«Ju] m. bolt, bar
fecundo [fa'kiinduj productive
feiQdo [fvt'svuj f. form, feature
feijao [ftfgeu] m. French beans
feio [f'eVu] ugly
feira ['fvira] f. fair
feitio [fei'fiuj m. fashion, make,

shape
feito ['f'B}tu] m. fact, deed
feitoria [fvitu'riv] factory
feixe ['f^yfi] m. faggot
fel [fit] m. gall
felicidade ffslisi'ffa&a] f. felicity
felicitar [fslisi'tarj m. to felici-
tate
Felix ['felifj Felix
feliz [fa'li/J happy
femea ['femw] f. female
feminino [famd'ninu] feminine
fenda ['fendvj f. chink, crack
fender [fen'der] to cleave
feno ['fenuj m. bay
fera ['fET'e] f. wild beast

ferelro f'ferdtru] m. bier
feria ['ferpv] f. daily wages;

jil. holidays
ferida [fa 'ridiv] f. wound
ferir [ff'rir] to wound
feroz [fa'rof] fierce
ferradura [farra' Sure] f. horse-
shoe
ferrdgem [fa'rra.gv'i] f. iron-
work
f err amenta [farrv'mente] f. iron

tools
ferrar ffa'rrar] to shoe
firreo f'ferriuj iron
ferro ['ferruj m. iron
ferrSlho [fa'rroHu] m. bolt
firtil ['fertiij fertile
ferver [far'ver] to boil
festa [ feftn] f. feast
festejo ffff'tv^uj m. \ f„..^^„i
festivo_ [fyf'tivu] \ festival
feto ['fetu] m. fern, fetus
feudo ['feuffw] m. fee, fief
fevereiro [fsva'rvirujm. February
fezes I'fezif] f. pi. dregs
fiagao [pe'seu] f. spinning
fiadbr [fce'&or] m. bail
fianga [fi'vge] f. security, bail
fiar [fi'ar] to spin
ficar [fl'ha,r] to remain, become
fidalgo ffi'ffaigu] m. nobleman
fiel [fui] faithful
flgado f'figvffuj m. liver
figo ['figuj m. fig

eira [ffgevrv] f- fig-tree

fila, fileira ffilv, fi'lvirej f.

file, rank
filha ['0v] f. daughter
filho f'fi^u] m. son
filial [fil'i'ai] f. =
fUtro ['fiitruj m. filter
fim [fi] m. end
finado [fi'naduj dead
final [fi'naij =
findar [fm'darj to terminate
fineza [fi'nezvj f. fineness, civility
fingir [fi'jir] to feign
fio [fiu] m. thread
firma ['firmv] f. firm, signature
firmar [fir' mar] to settle, to

sign ^
firme ['firm^] firm

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

437

fiscal ffif'kaij =
fita ['fitej f. ribbon
fixwr ffik'sarj to fix
fixo '['fixsuj fixed
flexivel [fleh'sivsi] flexible
floco ['floku] m. flock, flake
fldr [florj f. flower
florescer [flurif'serj to flourish
floresta [flu'rsfiv] f. forest
fluctuar [flwtu'arj to float
flAido ['flutduj m. fluid
focinho [fu'sipu] m. snout
foco ['faikuj m. focus
fofo [ fofu] soft, spongy
fogaa [fu'gSu] m. hearth, stove
fogoso [fu'gozu] fiery
foguete [fu'getB] m. rocket
folar [fii'lar] m. Easter-gift
folgar [faih'gar] to rest, rejoice
fdlha ffofivjf. leaf
folhear [fo^y'ar] to turn over

the leaves
folheto [fu'Hetu] m. pamphlet
fonie ['fy]m9 f. hunger
fonte ['fontd] f. fountain, spring
fora ['fore] abroad; — de with-
out
forcA [fti'raij m. charter
fdrca ['forke] f. gallows, gibbet
forga ['forsv] strength, force
forgado [fur'sadu] m. galley-
slave
fOTQar [fur'sar] to force, compel
forqtso [fur'sozu] necessary
forja ['forge] f. forge
f&rma ['forMn] form
fdrma ['fortKe] f. mould
formar [fur 'mar] to form
formiga [fur'mige] f. ant
formdso [fur'mozu] beautiful
fornalha [fur'nafie] f. furnace
forno ['fornu] m. oven
forrar [fu 'rrarj to line
forro ['forruj m. lining
fortaUza [furtv'lez's] f. fortress
forte [fortd] strong
^ortificar [furtafl'lcar] to fortify
fortuna [fur'tunv] f. fortune
fosso ['fosu] m. ditch
foz [fof] f. mouth
fraco ['fraJcu] weak
fractura [fra'tiirv] f. fracture

frade ['frafy] m. monk, friar

frdgil ['frajti] fragile

franco ['frekuj frank, loyal;

post-paid
frango, -a ['frvgu, -v] chicken
franqueza [frv'kezv]. f. frank-
ness
franquia [frs'ktjv] f. post-pay-
ment
fragueza [fr'e'kezv] f. weakness
frasco ['frafku] m bottle
fraternal, fraterno [frvtsr'nai,

fre'ternu] fraternal
frecha [frsfej f. arrow
fricheira [fre'feir'e] f. loop-
hole
fregues [frs'gef] m. customer
frei [frisi] m,. monk, brother
freio [frviu] m. bit, bridle
freira ['frisirv] f. nun
freixo [frsifu] m. ash-tree
[rente ['[rente] f. front-side
freqjUentar [frakwen'tar] to fre-
quent
freqUente [fra'kwente] frequent
fresco ['frefkuj fresh
fretar [frd'tar] to freight
frete ['frste] m. freight
friena [fry'ez'e] f. coldness
frio [friu] cold

[ronteira [frdi'i' fetrv] f. frontier
frota ['[rote] f. feet
frouxo ['frofu] slack, loose
fructa ['[rute] f. fruit
fmctifero [fru'tifdru] fructi-
ferous
frVjCto ['frutuj m. fruit
fuga ['[ugv] f. flight
fugir [[u'air] to fly
[ulminar [fiilmy'nar] to fulmi-
nate
[umar [fu'mar] to smoke
fumo ['fumu] m. smoke
fundagao [funde'svuj f. foun-
dation
fundar [[Un'dar] to found
fundigao [fundi svu] f. melting,

fusion, casting-house
fundir [fun'dir] to found
funeral [fung'raij w. =
funil [fu'niij m. funnel
funileiro [fimi'lvvru] m. tinker

438

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

furia ['futiv] f. fury
furidso [furfozu] furious
furtar [fur 'tar] to rob, steal
furto [ furtu] m. tbeft
fuso ['fusuj m. spindle, spool
futil ['futiij futile
futuro [fu'turuj m. future
fuzilar [fuzi'lar] to shoot

G.

gahar [ge'iarj to praise
gabinete [gvbi'netgj m. study,

closet
gado ['gaduj m. cattle
gaiola [ga,}' die] f. cage
gaivao [gsti'mu] m. martinet
galgar [gal' gar] to climb up
galgo ['gaigu] m. greyhound
ga(l)lego [gv'legu] m. porter
Gd(l)lia ['galye] f. Gaul, Gallia
ga(l)licismo [gvH'sigmu] m.GaXA-

cism
ga(l)linha [g'e'Jiji'e] f. hen
ga(l)linheiro [gvU'jiviru] m.

poulterer
ga(l)lo ['ga.lu] m. cock
galope [gv'hp»] m. gallop
game(l)la [gv 'melv] f. porringer,

bathing- vat
gancho ['gifu] m. hook, hair-
pin
gangrena [ge'grenejm. gangrene
ganhar [ga'jiar] gain, earn
ganho ['gajiu] m. gain, profit
ganir [gv'nir] to howl
ganso ['gvsu] m. goose
garfo fgarfuj m. fork
gargalhada [gvrg^'fiadv] f.

laughter
garganta [gvr'gvntE] f. throat
garoto [gv'rotu] m. street-arab
garra ['garr'e] f. claw, paw
garrafa [gy'rrafis] f. bottle
garrido [g^'rri&u] nice, smart
gastar [g^ftar] to spend
gasto ['gaftuj m. expense
goto ['gatu] m. cat
gatuno [ge'tuno] m. rogue
gdvea ['gavfv] m. scuttle
gaz Igaf] m. gas

gazeta [gv'zete] f. gazette, news

paper
gazua [gv'zu:v] pick-lock
geito ['geftu] m. turn, skill
geitoso [gei'tosu] fit, apt
gelar [gs'lar] to freeze
gelea [gg'lmv] f. jelly
gUo ['gelu] m. ice
gemer [gg'mer] to lament
gemido [si'mi&u] m. groan
ge(m)ma ['^emv] f. yolk
ginero ['gsnaru] f. gender
generoso [^sta'rozu] generous
ginio ['^tntu] m. genius, cha-
racter
gengioa [ge'^i:ve] f. gums
genro ['gerruj m. son-in-law
gente ['gentaj f. people
gentil [gen'ti:l] genteel
gentio [gen'tiu] m. heathen,

pagan
geral [gd'rai] general
germdnico [^ar'misniku] German
germinar [^armi'nar] to germi-
nate
gesso ['gesu] m. gypsum
gesto fgeftu] m. gesture
ginja ['gig^] f. common cherry
girar [gi'rar] to turn, move

round
girasol [girv'solj m. =
giro [' ^iru] m. circulation
glacial [gle'siai] =
gUria ['glorw] f. glory
glorificar [glurafi "kar] to glorify
glorioso [glurf'ozuj glorious
goivo ['goyvu] m. gillyflower
gala ['golnj f. collar
golfo ['golfu] m. gulf
goldso [gu'lozuj lickerish
golpe ['goipa] m. blow
gd(mjma ['gomv] f. gum
gordo ['gordu] fat, greasy
gordura [gur'dure] f. grease
gorgeta [gur'gete] f. gratuity
gdrro ['gorni] m. cap
gosar [gu'sar] to enjoy
gdso [gozu] m. enjoyment
gostar [guf'tar] to like
gosto [goftu] m. taste, pleasure
gostosamente [guftoze 'menta] with
pleasure

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

439

gostuso [guf'toeu] savoury
g6(t)ta ['gofe] f. drop
go(t)tejar [guti'gar] to drop
governar [guv3r'na,r] to govern
governo [gu'vernu] m. govern-
ment
graga ['grass] f. grace, elegance
gracejar [grvsi'gar] to joke, jest
^racioso [grvgt'ozu] graceful
grade [graffd] f. grating
:grado [' gra.ffu] m. rank, will
granaddro [gr'Snv' ffeiru] m.

grenadier
^randiza [grvn 'dezv] f. grandeur
yrangear [grvgi'a,r] to obtain
graniso [grv'niigu] m. hail
^rao [grSuJ m. grain, corn
grasnar [grvg'nar] to croak
gratidao [greti'deu] f. gratitude
grata ['gratuj grateful
graluito [grv'tuUuJ gratuitous
grave ['gravaj =
gravura [grv'vuirvj f. engraving
graxa f'grafej f. blacking
^relha ['grefiv] f. roaster
gremio ['grsmtuj m. guild, cor-
poration
:griUo ['grilu] m. cricket
grisalho [gri'zaliu] greyish
grito I'grituJ m. scream, cry
grosa [grozv] f. gross
groseiha fgru'zvdvj f. currant
grosseiro [gru'svtruj clumsy
<frdsso ['grosiij big, thick
grunhir [gru'jiir] to grunt,

grumble
grupo ['grupu] m. group
^uarda [ 'guarSvJ f. guard
gicarda-chuva [gwa,rd''s'fu:vej m.

umbrella
guarda-livros [gwarlfy 'li:vruj] m.

book-keeper
guardanapo [gwardv 'napuj m.

napkin
guarda-2}ortao [gwarffvpur'tSuJ

VI. porter
guardar [gwer'dar] to keep,

preserve
guerra f'gerre] f. war
guerreiro [ga'rr'S'iru] m. warrior
guia ['gi:e] m. and f. guide
guiar [gi'arj to guide

guindaste [gm'dafte] m. crane
gy(m)ndsio [si'naz}u] m. gym-
nasium
gy(m)ndstico [si'naftihu] gym-
nastic.

H.

(h)dbil ['abiij able

(h)abilitar [viM'tarJ to enable,

qualify
hdbitagao [abitv'svuj f. habitation
h&hito ['abituj m. habit
habitual [vbitu'ai] =
habituar [vbitu 'arj to accustom
hdlito. falitu] m. breath
harmonia [vrmu'nivj f.h&tmoaj
hasta f'aftej f. spear, lance
haste ['aft»] stem
hasiear [vfti'ar] to hoist
haver [v'verj to have
haveres [e'verifj m. pi. fortune
hebreu, -a [i'treuj Hebrew
hediondo [idf'dnduj hideous
Mlice ['Elisd] m. helix, screw-
propeller
helvetica [ii'vstikuj Helvetic
hera ['ervj f. ivy
heranga [fresv] f. inheritance
herdade [ir'daffaj f. heritage
herdar [ir'dar] to inherit
herdeiro [ir'da}ru] m. heir
herde [i'roi] m. hero
herdico [i'roiJcuJ heroioal
herva ['srve] f. herb, grass
hesitar [izi'tar] to hesitate
(hjiate ['}at»] m. yacht
hilaridade [ilvri'dadnj f. hilarity
hippddromo [i' po&rumo] m. race-
course
hirto f'irtu] stiff, rigid
historiador [ifturi'e' &or] m.

historian
histdrioo [if'torikuj historical
histdria [if'torivj f. history
hoje ['o^ij to-day
hollandes foKn'defJ m. Dutch
(hjornbro ['Cmbru] m. shoulder
honieni ['omvi] man
homendgem [onw 'na^vij m. hom-
age
homicida [um3'si:&e] m. and f.
murderer

440

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

homiddio [umd' si:dyu] m. murder
honesto [u'nsstu] honest
honrado fo'rraduj \ ^^^^^^^y^^^
honroso [o rrozuj (
(h)6ntem ['ontStJ yesterday
flora ['ore] f. hour
horrlvdjo'rriveij W^^.-^^^
norrm-oso [orru rosujj
horta fort's] f. kitchen-garden
hortaliga [ortv'lisv]f. vegetables
hortela [orts'lv] mint
horteldo [orto'leu] m. gardener
hdrto f'ortu] m. garden
hospeddgem [ofpo'd'a^vy] f. hos-
pitality
hospedaria [ofpoff^ 'riifi] m. lodg-
ing-house
hdspede f'ofpodo] m. guest
hospital fofpi'tai] m. =
hostil [of'tii] hostile
humano [u'mvno] human
humido ['umiffu] damp
humilde [ii'miida] humble
hungaro ['Ugvru.] m. Hungarian
Hungria [it 'gri:v] f. Hungary

I.

IbSrieo [i'heriku] Iberian
igar [i'sar] to hoist
ida ['ii&e] f. going
idade [i'ffa,do] f. age
idiuma [ift'omv] m. idiom
iddlatra [i'&olvtr'e] idolatrous
idolo ['iidulu] m. idol
idoso [i'&ozu] aged
ign&bil [ig'nobii] ignoble
ignorante [ignu'rinto] ignorant
ignoto [ig'notu] unknown
igvalar [igwe la,r] to equal
igualha [VgwaHE] f. like
ilha ['i:fiv] f. isle
ilharga [i'/largv] f. flank, side
i(l)lega,l [ilo'gai] =
impeio ['impotu] m. impetuosity
impetuoso ftmpotu'ozK] iw]^et\io\xs
impio [im'pi:o] impious
implorar [tmplu 'rar] to implore
impor [im'por] to impose
importagao [nnpurie'svu] f. im-
portation

importante [impur'tvnto] im-
portant
importar [impur'tar] to import
importe [im'porto] m. cost, sum
importuno pmpur'tuno] m. im-
portune
impossivel [mpu'sivei] impos-
sible
impdsto [wi'poftu] m. duty
impostor fmpuf'tor] m. =
imprensa [m'presv] f. press
impressdo [impro'seu] f. im-

pressidn, print
impresso [im'presu] printed
imprimir [impro'mir] to print
improviso [impru ''oi:zu] un-
foreseen
imprudente [impru 'iFSnti] im-
prudent
impune [im'pune] unpunished
inaudito [inau'&ituj unheard of
incendio [I'sendniJ m. ooufla-

gration
incenso [i'sesu] m. incense
inchar [tfar] to swell
incidents [isi'ffento] m, inci-
dent
inclinado [ikli'naffu] inclined
ineluir [iklu'ir] include
induso [i'klusu] enclosed
inco(m)modo fi'komu&u] inoon've-

nient, s. m. molestation
vncorrer [iku'rrer] to incur
incredulo [z ' krsdulu] iacredm\ou&
incrivel [z'krivsl] incredible
inculto [z'hultu] incult
ineumbir [ilcUm 'bir] to charge
indagar [mdv'gar] to inquire
indemnisar [mdomni 'ear] indem-
nify, compensate
independente [indopendenta] in-
dependent
indice f'mdiso] m. index
indiff)ferenga [mdifo'rese] f. in-
difference
indigena [mdi^dwe] m. indi-
genous
indigente [indi' gento] indigent
indigno [m'dignuj unworthy
indio f'mdiu] Indian
indistincto [mdaf'tmtn] indis-
tinct

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

441

individuo [%d3'vi(fwu] m. indi-
vidual
indizivel [md9'zi:veij unutterable
indole ['iriduh] m. character
indSmito [m'domitu] untamed
indulto [fduituj m. privilege
indiistria [in 'duiftrfe] f. industry
induzir [indu'zir] to induce
inidito [i'nsO'Uu] unprinted
infa(l)Uvel [ifv'U:veiJ infallible
infdnda [I'fvgiv] f. infancy
infante [i'fvntaj infant
inferior pfary'or] =
inferno [i'fErnu] m. hell
infimo [ 'ifimuj verymean ,

meanest
influir [zflu'ir] to influence
influencia [iflu'esw] f. influence
informe fl'farmej formless
inginuo [i'^snuo] ingenuous
ingrato [i'gratu] ungrateful
inhospito [in 'ofpitu] inhospitable
inimigo [ina'imguj m. enemy
injusto [i'guftu] unjust
i(n)nocente [inu' senta] innocent
inquieto [iki'etu] uneasy
inquirir [ika'rir] to inquire
imsalubre [isv 'luiira] insalubrious
insecto [i'setuj m. insect
inserir [tsg'rirj to insert
insigniflcante [isagnifi'MntaJ in-
significant
insipido [i'si:pidu] insipid
instar [if'tarj to insist
imstriMgao [iftru'siu] f. in-

strncion
mstruir [iftru 'irj to instruct
tnsica ['tsuvj f. islet
insulto [t'suttu] m. insult
insurgente [tsur'gentg] insurgent
integro [intdgru] entire, righ-
teous
inteiro [in'tmru] ire, whole
inte(l)ligivel [inteli 'ji;veij intelli-
gible
intengao [tnte'sSu] f. intention
intender [inten'der] to intend
intento [m'tentu] m. intention
interesseiro [mtsra'mruj selfish
inter jeigao [intarsiifsvu] f. in-
terjection
interlocutor [intsrluhu'torj m. =

intermedio [intar'mEdiu] m. me-
diation
interna [in'tsrnoj m. internal
interprete [m'tsrprgtaj m. in-
terpreter
interrogar [wterru 'gar] to inter-
rogate
interromper [mtarrom 'per] inter-
rupt
interrupto [mte 'rruiu] inter-
rupted
intestino [mt9f'ti:nu] m. intestine
intimo [mtimu] intimate
intripido [in'trspidti] intrepid
intruso [m'truso] m. intruder
inundar [inUn'dar] to overflow
inutil [i 'nu:tii] useless
invadir [mv'dir] to invade
invdlido [H'valiffu] invalid
invasao [iw'zSu] f. invasion
inveja [i'vsge] f. envy
i/nvengao [we'seu] f. invention
invernal [imr 'nal] winterly
inverno [i'vernu] m. winter
investir [tvif'tir] to invest
invoear [ivu'lcar] to invocate
ir [i:r] to go
ira ['irej f. wrath
irmd [ir'mv] f. sister
irmanar [irmv'nar] to match
irracional [irrvs}u 'nai] irra-
tional
irregular [irrdgu'lar] =
irritar [irri'tar] to irritate
irrupgao [irrup 'svu] f. irruption
isento [i'eentu] exempt, free

Jd [sa] already
jacintho [ge'smtu] m. jacinth
jacto ['sAtu] m. throw
jamais [ga'ma'if] (n)ever
Janeiro [jv'nvtru] m. January
jane(l)la [je'nElv] f. window
jantar [gen'tar] m. dinner
Japdo [s^'pio], — Japan
japones [gvpu'nef] Japanese
jardim [ger'di] m. garden
jarra ['^arrv] f. jar
jazer [g'e'zer] to lie
jazigo [gie'zvgu] m. grave

442

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

jejuar [^ggu'ar] to fast
jejum [53 gu] m. fasting
Jeronymo [^d'ronimu] Jeroni-

mo
Joao [jw'iu] John
joelho ['gwvfiu] m. Isnee
jogo CsoguJ in. play
Joia ['goiv] f. jewel
Jorge ['gyr^aj m. George
Jornada [gur'naffe] f. journey
jornal [gur'nal:] m. journal
Jose [su'ze] m. Joseph
joven ^ovetj m. and f. young

man or woman
judeo, Judia [gu'ffeu, gu'ffvv]

Jew, Jewess
jugo ['sugu] m. joke
juiz [suy] tn- judge
jylgar [gui'gar] to judge
julho ['zufiu] m. July
juneo fgSku] reed
junta f'^untej f. juncture, as-
sembly
jurar [gu'rar] to swear
juro I'auruJ m. rent, interest
Jtistiga [guf'tisvj f. justice
justificar [suftafi'har] to justify
justo fsiiftuj just
Juventude f^uven'tudsj f. juveni-
lity

Ldhio flabtu] m. lip

lago f'lasuj m. knot

lacrar [h'krarj to seal

ladear [le&i'arj to flank

ladeira [le' ffvire] f. declivity

lado I'ldbdu] m. side

ladrao, ladra [WcTriu, la 'STre] s.

thief
ladrilho [iB'&riliu] m. brick,

tile
lagar [Is'gar] m. wine-press
lagarta [Im'gartv] f. caterpillar
lagarto [Iv'gartu] m. lizard
lage ['lagi] f. flagstone
lago ['lagu] m. lake
Idgrima ['lagrimvj f. tear
lama ['lemvj f. dirt, mud
lambareiro [lembs'i-vtruj glut-
tonous
lamber [ISm'berJ to lick

lamentar [Ivmen'tar] to lament
Idmpada ['ISmpv&eJ lamp
lampejar [lempi'gar] to shine,
, lighten

langa ['IvseJ f. lance
langar [Iv'sarJ to throw, vomit
lance [Ivsa] m. throw, occasion
lancha ['WfvJ f. launch
lango ['Ksu] m. throw, distance
languir fle'gir] to languish
lanifero [Iv 'nifgru] wool-bearing
lanterna [Ivn'tcrnv] f. lantern
lapa f'lapy] f. cave, den
lapidar flvpi'&arj lapidary
laranja [le'rSgs] f. orange
lareira [Is'rvirvJ f. fireplace
largar [ler'garj to let go
largo [largu] large, ample
larguesa [Ivr'gezis] f. largess,

generosity
largura [Isr'gurv] f. wideness
lasca ['lafksj f. fragment
Idstima ['laftiime] f. pity
lastro ['laftru] m. ballast
lata [late] f. tin-plate
latao [Iv'tvuJ m. brass
lateral [ht3 rat] =
latido [le'tvcfu] m. yelping
latim [h 'ttj m. Latin
latino [Iv'timu] m. Latin
latoeiro [Ivtu'viru] brazier
lavadeira [Ixve'dvyrv] f. laund-
ress
lavar [Iv'var] to wash
lavatSrio [Invv 'tortu] m. washing-
stand
lavoura fle'vorv] f. husbandry
lavrador [Ivvre 'ffor] m. peasant,

husbandman
lavrar [In'vrar] to work, to till
leal [li'ai] faithful, loyal
leao [V%u] lion
lebre [Uhra] f. hare
lectivo [ls'ti:vu] scholastic
legal [h 'galj =
legar [I3 'gar] to leave, bequeath
legenda pa'semrn] f. legend
legivel [l3'si:vei] legible
Ugua ['Ugvye] f. mile, league
lei [Ivi] f. law ^

leilao [lv}'Ku] m. auction
leitdo [hytsuj m. sucking-pig

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

443

leite ['IvitgJ m. milk

ieiteira ilst'tefrvj f. milkmaid

leito ['listtu] bed, couch

leitor [lyt'tor] reader

leitura [Ivf'tn/rv] f. lecture,
reading

lembransa [lem'brisej f. re-
membrance

lembrar [lem'hrar] remember

leme ['Isma] m. helm

lengo ['lesuj to. handkerchief

lengol fle'soij sheet

lenha ['IvjivJ f. wood

lente ['lenigj s. f. =; s. m. pro-
fessor, reader

lento f'lentuj slow

leque ['IskgJ m. fan

ler [ler] to read

lesma f'legmvj f. slug

leste ['leftd] m. East

letra ['letrv] f. letter, type,
change

letreiro [U 'trsfruj m. inscription

levantar fhvvn 'tar] to raise, lift

leoar [h'var] to carry

leve ['leva] light

liber dade [Ubar'dafy] f. liberty

libra ['liiirv] f. pound

licenga [li'sesv] f. permission,
leave

Ucito ['li:situ] lawful

lida ['Ivdv] f. toil, labour

lide I'li'&g] f. combat, fight

liga ['li-^ej f. garter; alliance

ligadura [lige'ffu:rv] f. ligature

ligar [li'ffarj to tie

ligeiro [li'gvyru] light, slight

Maz [li'lafjf. lilac

lima ['linm] f. file

limao [li'mvu] m. lemon

limite [li'miU] m. limit
Umoeiro [limu'viru] m. lemon-
tree

limpar [Um'p3.r] to clean

limpo ['Umpu] clean, neat

Undo ['Itndu] beautiful

lingtia ['Viguv] f. tongue, lan-
guage

linha ['UjivJ f- line

linho I'UjiwJ m. linen

Uquido ['liiTciffu] liquid

Urio, lis ['lir}u, li:f] to. =, lily

liso ['li:guj smooth
lisongear [lizost'ar] to flatter
livido ['li:vi&a] livid
livrar [li'vrarj to deliver, save
livraria [livre'ri:vj f. library
livre f'lvvrsj free
liaco' ['li:fu] m. filth,
Idbo f'lobuj m. wolf
lodo ['loduj m. mud
logo ['loguj directly
lograr [lu'grarj to obtain, suc-
ceed
logro [logru] m. cheating, fraud
lombo I'lombu] m. loins
Idna ['lonvj f. sail-cloth
longe ['log}] far
longinquo flo'gikwuj remote
longo I'lSguJ f. long
louga ['lose] f. table-plate, china
lotico ['lokuj mad
louro f'loruj fair; m, laurel
lousa [losv] f. slate
louvar [lo 'var] to praise
lucre ['luhru] m. profit
lugar [lu'gar] m. spot place
lume ['lu:m9] m. fire
lusitano, luso ['luizu] Portuguese
lustre ['luftre] m. lustre, gloss
luta f'lutvj f. fight
luto ['lutuj m. mourning
luva f'luivvj f. glove
luxo ['lufuj m. luxury
luz [lu:f] f. light
luzir [lu'ziir] to shine
lyceu [li'seu] m. lyceum.

M.

MaQa [me'sSJ apple

macaco [me'kahu] m. monkey

magada [me'saSv] f. blow with
a mace

mdchina ['makinv] f. machine

macio [me'si:uj smooth, soft

madrugada [mvd'ru'ga&ej f. day-
break

maduro [mv'&uroj ripe

mae [mv}J m. mother

magnifico [mag'nifiku] magnifi-
cent

mdgua ['maguv] f. bruise;
grief

444

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

magro fmagruj m. meagre, lean
maioria [mvju'rv.'s] mayoralty,

majority
mais [ma,if] more
malentendido [malentln'did'u] m.

misunderstanding
maUvolo[mv'levuluJm.iiiB.\eYolent
malha ['m&Ra] f. mash
malldgro [mv'logru] m. failure
malvado [mat'vaffu] m. wicked
mamifero [mv'mifsruj m. mam-

miferous
mancebo [mv'sebu] m. youth
mancha ['mvfv] spot, stain
manco ['mvhu] lame
mandar [mvn'dar] to command,

send
maneira [mv'nvire] f. manner
manga ['mvgvj f. sleeve
manha ['mejiv] f. handiness,

cheat
manha [mv 'jiv] f. morning
mania [mv'ni:vj f. mania,

madness
manifestar [mvndfyf'tar] mani-
fest
mano, mana ['rnvnu, 'nvenv] s.

brother, sister
manso f'mvsuj f. tame
manta ['mvntvj f. blanket, horse-
cloth
manteiga [mvn 'tvtgv] f. butter
manto f'mintuj m. mantle
mao [mvu] f. hand
mar [mar] m. sea
maravilha [imsr^' viflv] marvel,

wonder
mxirca ['markv] f. mark
mar(0 f'marsuj m. March
mare [mv're:] f. tide
mdrgem ['margvi] f. border
marido [nve' rvMu] m. husband
marinha [me'ripv] f. marine,

navy
marinheiro [mvri' jiniru] m.

mariner
marmelo fvivr'msluj m. quince
maroto [mv'rotuj m. knave
marques [mvr"ke:f] m. marquis
martello [mvr'telu] m. hammer
mas [mvf] bat
mdscara ['maflcvrej f. mask

massa ['masej f. haste
mastigar [mefti'garj to chew
mastro ['maftruj m. mast
mata ['mats] f. wood, forest
mataborrao [matvbu'rriu] m,

blotting- paper
matar [mv'tar] to kill
maternal [mvtgr'nai] 1 jQaternal
materno [mv tsmuj J
matinal [mvti'nal] early
mato ['matuj m. thicket, wood
mdximo ['masimu] greatest,,

principal
mediano [md&i'vnu] middling
medico ['msffiku] m. medical
medida [ma'&ii&e] f. measure
medir [ma' (Fir] to measure
m^do I'medu] m. fear
medrar [ma'ffrar] to thrive
meigo ['mv.igu] gentle, meek
meio [mviu] m. half, middle
mel [met] m. honey
melao [ma'lvu] m. melon
melhor [my'Ror] better
membro ['membru] m. member
memSria [ma'tnorw] f. memory
mengax) [me'sau] f. mention
mendigo [mSn'di:gu] m. beggar
menor [ma' nor] minor
menos ['menu/] less
mensal [me'sai] monthly
mente ['mentd] m. mind
mentir [men'tir] to lie
mentira [men'tire] f. lie
mercado [mar'haffu] m. market
mereadoria [marJceffu 'ri:v] f.

ware, goods
merce [jnar'se] f. mercy
mercieiro [margi 'viru] m. mercer,

retailer
mereeer [mars' ser] to deserve
merenda [ma'rendv] f. afternoon

tea
mergulhar [margu'Rar] to sub-
merge
mes [mef] m. month
mesa ['mez-e] f. table
mesmo ['megmu] same
mestre, mestra ['meftra, 'meftrBj

s. master, teacher
metade [ma'ta&a] f. half
mitrico ['mEtrilcu] metrical

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

445

meter [ma'ter] ='
meicer [m/i'ferj to move
miar [m}'arj to mew
migalha [mi'gvliv] f. crumb
milagre [mi'litgra] m. miracle
milha ['miifiv] f. mile
milho ['rnvMu] m. millet
mimo ['mi:mu] caress, mimic
mimoso [mi'mozu] tender
mina ['rnvme] f. mine
mineiro [mi'nsiru] m. mineral
Miriho ['mipu] m. Minho, pro-
vince and river of Portugal
mlnimo f'mimimu] least
midlo [m}'olu] m. crumb; brains
mirar [mi'rar] to look at
misiria [mi'zeriv] misery
missa ['miss] f. mass
mister [rrviftEr] necessary
misturar [m'lftu'rar] to mix
md [mo] f. mill-stone
mdbil ['mdbii] movable
mohilia [mu'biili'e] f. furniture
mocho ['mofu] m. owe
mdgo ['mosu] young
moda ['mocfe] f. fashion
moderar [muffd'rar] to moderate
modesto [mu'd^sftu] modest
mSdico ['modtkuj moderate
modista [mu'diftv] milliner
modo ['mocFu] m. mode, manner
moeda [mu'sdv] f. coin
moer [mu'er] to grind
mola ['mola] f. spring
moldura [moi'du:rsJ frame
molhar [mu'ficir] to moisten,

wet
molle fmah] soft; lax
momenio [mu'mentuj m. moment
monarc(h)a [mu'nark^J m. mo-
narch
monje ['mogi] m. monk
monstro ['moftru] m. monster
montanha [mOn'tep's] f. moun-
tain
monte ['m5nt3] Mount
morada [mu'raffa,] f. dwelling,

abode
moralidade [murvli'dadd] f. mo-
rality
morango [mu'rvgu] m. straw-
berry

morar [mu'ra/r] to dwell
morder fmur 'derj to bite
morrer [mu'rrer] to die
morte ['morta] f. death
mdrto ['mortu] dead
mdsca ['mofke] f. fly
mostarda [muf'tardv] f. mustard
mdsto ['mojtu] vi. m\ist
mostrador [muftris '(for] m. coun-
ter, dial- pi ate
mostrar [mus'trar] to show
mouraria [mory 'rim] f. quarter

of the Moors in Lisbon
mouro I'moruJ m. Moor
mdvel ['movsl] m. piece of fur-
niture
mover [mo'ver] to move
movimento [movi'mentu] m. mo-
vement
muar [mu 'ar] m. and adj.

mule, mulish
muda I'tnu&e] f. change
mudar fmu'S'ar] to change
mudo I'muffu] dumb, silent
mugir [mu'gir] to low, to roar
muito I'mumtu] much
mula I'muly] f. (she-)mule
mulher [mu'ner] f. woman, wife
multa I'muitv] f. fine
mundano [mun d^nu] worldly
mundo ['mundu] m. world
muralha [mu'rafiv] f. wall
murchar [mur'far] to wither
murmiirio [mur'muir'to] m. mur-
mur
muro f'muruj m. wall
musgo f'mujgu] m. moss
musica ['muzihv] f. music
mutuo I'mutwu] mutual
myope f'mvupg] short-sighted
mysUrio [mif'teryu] m, mystery

Nabo ['naibu] m. turnip
nada ['naffv] nothing
namorado [namu'ra&'u] amorous
nao [nvu] no
nariz [ws'rif] m. nose
narragao [nvrrv'svu] f. narra-
tion

446

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

nasceriQa [nvf'sege] f. birth,
origin

nascente [nvj'sentd] in. spring

nascido [nvf'sidu] m. born

nascimento fnsfsi'mentuj m. birth

nativo [nn'tviiu] native

natureza [niitu'TezB] f. nature

naufrdgio fnau'fragiuj m. ship-
wreck

ndufrago ['naufrvguj m. ship-
wrecked

tiaval [nv'val] =

navalha [nv 'va/ivj f. razor,
pocket-knife

nave ['tiavs] f. =

navegdvel [nvva'gaveij navigable

navio fne'vi:uj m. ship

nebuUso [nat>u'lo:zuJ foggy

necessidade [nasasi'&a&aj f. neces-
sity

negar [n^'gwr] to deny

negociante fnagusf'vntgj m. mer-
chant

negro ['negruj (m. =), black

nenhum [na 'jmrnj none

neto ['netu] m. grandson

nevar [na'varj to snow

neve f'nsvg] f. snow

nevoeiro [navu'istru] m. fog

ninho ['nijiuj m. nest

nitido ['nidiffu] neat

n6 ['no] m. knot

nobre ['nobra] noble

noQM [nu'svu] f. notion

nidoa f'no&teB] f. spot, stain

■/loite f'noHaJ f. night

noiva f'naivv] f. bride

nojo I'noguJ m. tedium, disgust

name ['nonwj m. name

nomear [numf'ar] to name

nora ['nore] f. daughter-in-law

nis [nof] we

nos [nuj] ua

nota ['notv] f. note

notar [nu'tar] to note, mark

notdvel [nu'tavsi] notable

noUcia [nu'ti:s}v] f. notice

nova ['nove] f. news

nov&lo [nu'velu] m. clue

n6vo ['novu] new

nu [nu:J bare, naked

nuca f'nukv] f. neck

nu(l)lo f'nulu] null

n4mero ['numaruj m- number

numeroso [nuvio'roeuj numerous

nunca ['tHikv] never

nUpcias fnupsfivf] f- pl- '^^'^^

ding . ,

nutrir [nu'tri:r] to nourisn
n'livem ['nuixmi] f. cloud

0.

Obedecer [obadg'ser] to obey
obedient e [obsffyenta] obedient
6Uto I'obituJ m. death
obrar [o'brar] to work
obrigasao [obrigiB'svu] f. obli-
gation
obrigado [obri'gadu] obliged
ohscuro [obifkuirw] dark, obs-
cure
obseguiar [obazakfar] to oblige
observaQuo [obgsarvv'smi] f. ob-
servation
dbstdculo [obff'tahuluj m. ob-
stacle
obter [oba'ter] to obtain
o(c)casiao [ohesi 'vu] f. occasion
o(c)cidente [osi'&enta] m. west,

Occident
o(c)correr [oku'rrer] occur
ocio f osiuj m. leisure
Sculo f'oJculuJ m. eyeglass
ddio ['offtu] m. hatred
oeste ['wefta] west
o(f)fender [ofgn'der] to offend
o(f)fensa [o'fesv] f. offense
o(f)ferecer [ofara'ser] to offer
o(fJfieial[ofas}'ai] official, officer'
o(f)ficina [ofa'siinv] f. office,

(work) shop
o(f)ficio [o'fi:s}u] m. charge
dlhar [o 'har] to look at
olho ['ofiu] m. eye
oliveira [oli'vvtrv] f, olive-tree
onde ['OndaJ where
opiniao foptnfvuj f. opinion
o(p)por [o'por] to oppose
o(p)portunO fopur'tUMuJ onnor-

tune ^^

6(p)timo ['atimu] best, very good
ora ['orv] now

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

447

oragao fore'svuj f. prayer,

clause
orar [o'rarj to pray
ordem ['ordvi] f. order
ordenado forda'nai^uj m. salary
orelha [u'rvHis] f. ear
orgao ['orgvu] organ
orgulho [or'gufiu] m. pride
oriente [ort'entaj m. orient, east
orificio [ori'fiisiuj m. orifice
origem [o'ri:gei] f. origin
ornar [or'narj to adorn
orvalho [or'va/iu] m. dew
osso ['osuj m. bone
ourives [o'riivif] m. goldsmith
ouro [o'ru] m. gold
ousado [o'za,9u,] bold, daring
ousar [o'ear] to dare
outono [o'tOMuJ m. autumn
outrem ['otrvij somebody else
outro ['otru] another
ouvido [o'vi;&u] m. hearing, ear
ouvir [o'virj to hear
ovelha [u'vede] f. sheep
ow [ovu] m. egg
oxala [ofe'la] would to God!

Pachorra [pv'forre] f. forbea-
rance, patience
pacifieo [pe'svfiku] peaceable;

paci6o
pacote [py'Tiotd] m. packet
poQO ['pasuj m. palace
padaria [pa&e'ri:ej f. bakery
padecer [pefy'ser] to suffer
padeiro [pa'd^itu] baker
padrao [pv'd'rvu] m. pattern
padrmho [pe'ffrijiu] m. god-
father
pai [pai] m. father
paga [pagv] f. pay(ment)
pagamento [pvgv'mentu] jK.(pay-)

ment
pag&o [pv'gm] m. pagan
pdgem ['pagvi]^ m. page
pwisdgem [pai'zas^}] f. lands-
cape
pais [pei'f] m. country
paixao [paffiu] f. passion
paldcio [pv'lasyu] m. palace

palavra [pvlavrvj f. word
palha ['paRv] f. straw
pAllido ['pali(fu] pale
palma ['paimv] palm(-tree)
palmeira [pai'mvirv] f. palm-
tree
palpar [pal'par] to touch
pdlpebra ['patpdbre] f. eyelid
pancada [pv'lcaSv] f. blow
panella [pv'nslv] f. kitchen-pot,

cooker
panno ['pvnu] m. cloth
pao [peu] m. bread
papel [py'psl] m. paper
para ['p^rsj for
parabens [perv 'beffj m. pi. fe-
licitation
pardgem [pv'ragsi] f. halting-
place; abode
paraiso [pvry'i:su] m. Paradise
parar [pe'rar] to halt, to dwell
pardal [pvr'daij m. sparrow
pardo [pardu] grey
parecer [pvra 'ser] to seem
pareddo fpvrg'si&uj alike
paredao fpvr9'8'SuJ m. big wall,

mole
parede [pe'redgj f. wall
parelha [pv'relhej f. pair, team
parente [pv'rent9j related (re-
lation
2)ar6chia, pardquia [pv'rofoivj /-

parish
pdroc(hJo f'parukuj m. son
parque ['parlca] m. park
parreira [pv'rrvyrvj f. vine
parte ['parts] f. part
participar [pvrtssi'par] to par-
ticipate, partake
particular fpertiku'lar] =
partida fper'tidvj f. depart
partido [pvr'ti&u] m. party
partir [pvr'tir] to depart; to

break
pascer [pfsf'ser] to pasture
Fdscoa ['pajkijoe] f. Easter
pasmar [peg 'mar] to puzzle, to

be stupefied
passa ['page] f. raisin
passdgem [pv'sage}] f. passage-
passar [pv'sar] to pass
pdssaro ['paseru] m. bird

448

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

passear [pvsi'arj to (take a)

walk
passeio [pv'sviuj m. walk
passo ['pasu] m. step
pasta [pttftv] f. portfolio;

paste
pastar [pvf'tarj to pasture
pastel [pef'tsi] m. pie, pastry
pasteleiro [pvftg'lviru] m. pas-
try-cook
pasto ['paftuj m. pasture
past6r [pef'torj m. shepherd
pata ['paivj f. claw
paterno [py'tcmu] paternal
pato ['patu] m. duck
patrao [pe'trvuj patron
pdtria ['patrtvj f. native country
patricio [pv'trvsfu] m. patrician
patroa [p^'tro^] f. mistress
pauta I'pautv] f. tariff; lines
pautado [pau 'ta&oj ruled
paodo [pv'tiu] m. peacock
pavilhao [pvvi'Hiu] m. pavilion
paz [paf] f. peace
pi [ps] m. foot
peao [p^'iu] m. pedestrian
pe^a ['pesv] piece, play
peccado [pg'ha&u] m. sin
pedago [pa'dasuj m. piece, bit
pedido [p9'ffi:ffu] m. request,

commission
pedinte [pd'cHntd] m. beggar
pedir [pa' &irj to ask, beg, desire,

order
pedra [pe'&rej f. stone
pega [pegv] f. magpie
pegar [ps'garj to glue, to lay

hold of
peito [jpvttuj m. breast
peixe i'p'B'ifi] m. fish
pelOJe ['pd/] f. skin
pelCl)ica [p9 'U:Tiv] f. kid-leather
pel(l)o f'peluj m. hair
pena f'penvj f. pain, punish-
ment; ter — to be sorry
piender [pen'der] \ to hang,

pendurar [pendu'rar] ] suspend
penedo [ps'neffu] m. rock
penetrar [pm»'tra,r] to penetrate
penhdr [pi'porj m. gift, talent
penhorar [pipu'rarj to engage,
oblige

penitencia [panftesye] f. peni-
tence
penna [pen's] f. pen, feather
penoso fpa' nozuj painful
pensar [pe'sarj to think
pente ['penta] m. comb
pentear [pienti'ar] to comb
pegu^no [pa'henu] little
pera ['pervj pear
perante [pa'rvnta] before
perceber [parsa'her] to perceive
percorrer fpjrku'rrer] to run

through
perda ['perdv] f. loss
perdao [pdr'dau] m. pardon
perder [par'derj to lose
perdoar [par'dwarj to pardon
perecer [mrs'serj to perish
pereira [pa'rvire] f. pear-tree
perfeiio [por'fvititj perfect
perfume [par 'fuims] m. =
perigo [pa'riigu] m. danger
periodo [ps'riudu] m. period
permissao [parmi'svu] f. per-
mission
perna ['pernvj f. leg
pirola ['perulv] f. pearl
persa [ 'perse] m.&f.k a. Persian
perseguir [psrsa'girj to per-
secute
persiano [parst'vnuj a. Persian
pertencer [parte 'ser] to belong
jjerto ['psrtu] near
pesado [pa'za&u] heavy
pesar [pa'zar] to weigh
pe&ca ['psPce] f. fishing
pescogo [pifjcosuj m. neck
peso ['pczu] m. weight
pessego ['pesagu] m. peach
pessimo ['pesimu] worst, very

bad
pessoa [pa'sovj f. person
p^z [pef] f. pitch
pharmdcia, farmdeia [f'er 'mastv]

f. pharmacy
photdgrapho, fotSgrafo [fu'to-

grBfu] m. photograph
physico, f{sico['fi:ziku]m. physical
pia [pi:v] f. trough, basin
picar [pi'kar] to sting
pimenla [pi'mente] f. pepper
pinheiro [py'jteyru] m. pine-tree

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

449

pinho ['pijiuj m. pine-wood
pintainho fprniv'tjiu] m. dab-

cliick
pintura [pm'tiira] f. picture,

painting
piano fplvnu] m. project
planta ['plvntv] f. plant, sole,

ground-plan
pluma ['plumej f. feather
p6 fpo] f. dust, powder
pohi'e f'pobre] poor
p6(o ['posuj m. well
poder fpu 'fferj m. might, power
po^tct, poetisa [pu'ctv, pui'tizK]

s. poet
pois [poifj now, afterwards,

then, well
pdlvora ['polvurv] f. powder
poniba ['pomh's] f. pigeon
pombal [pom'bai] m. dove-cot
ponta ['pOni'e] f. point, top
ponie ['pontd] f. bridge
pionto ['pdntuj f. stitch, point
pontual fpontw'alj punctual
pur fporj to put
pdrco ['porTcu] dirty, m. hog
porque ['purhd] because; why
porta ['portv] f. door
portador [purtv'&or] m. bearer
portanto [pur'tvntuj conse-
quently
porldtil [pur'tatiij bearable,

pocket ....
parte ['port9] m. post-pay, depart-
ment
portugues fpurtu' cfef] Portuguese
posse ['pos9j f. possession
possivel [pu'si;veij possible
possuir [pusu'irj to possess
pasta f'poftv] post
paste t'poftd] m. stake, pillar
pdsta ['poftu] m. place, post
posta que [poftu'JcaJ though
pauco ['pahu] little
paupar fpo' par] to spare
povaado [pu'vuaduj populous,

inhabited
praga f'prasv] f. place
prado ['praffu] m. meadow
praia f'prawj f. shore
pranto f'prSntuJ m. weeping
prata ['pratvj f. silver

Portuguese Converaation-Grammar.

prata f'pratu] m. dish
prazer [prv'zer] m. pleasure
prazo ['pragu] m. term
preceder [pnsg'derj to precede
preciuso [prgs^'asu] precious
preciso [pro' sign] necessary,

precise
pirego ['presu] m. price
prefdcio [pry'fas}u] m. preface
pregar [pre' gar] to preach
pregar [pro' gar] to nail
prega ['prsgu] nail, hat-pin
preguigoso [progi'sazu] lazy
pergunta [par'giinfe] f. question
jjrejuizo [pro^w'izu] m. pre-
judice
primio ['pi'smtu] m. premium,

prize
prenda ['prendv] f. present,

talent
presa ['prezv] f. prey
presente [piro zento] (m.) present
pressa ['prssv] f. hurry
prestar [pryf'tar] to lend, give
prhtima ['prsftimu]m Atneas, use
presunio [pro'zuntu] m. ham
pretexto [prs'teftuj m. pretext
preto ['pretu] m. negro, black
primavera [primes' verv] Spring
primeiro [pri'mvfru] first
principe ['priSipo] m. prince
principiar [prisopy'ar] to begin
prisao [pri'zvu] f. prison
probUma [pru 'bum's] m. problem
procissao [prusi'sSu] f. pro-
cession
procurar [pruku'rar] to procure,

seek
pradigio [pru'ffvgiu] m. prodigy,

marvel
prSdigo ['pro&igu] prodigal
prafissdo [prvfi'svu] m. profes-
sion
profunda [pru'fund'u] profound
pragresso [pru'grssu] m. pro-
gress
projictil [pru'setii] m. projectile
prdlogo ['pralugu] m. prologue
prome(t)ter [prumo 'ter] promise
pronto [prontu] ready
pron'Ancia [pru'nusiv] f. pro-
nunciation

29

450

Portuguese-Knglish Vocabulary.

propor [pru'joorj propose
prdprio ['propriu] proper
proseguir [prusa'gir] to pro-
secute
jyrova ['prow J f. proof
provdvel fpru'vavei] probable
proveito fpru'vvUuJ m. profit
prdximo ['prosimuj next ; «i.

fellow-creature
Priissia ['prusivj f. Prussia
]yrussiano fprusf'vnu] m. Prus-
sian
(p)salmo f'saimttj m. psalm
publicar [publi'kar] to publish
2>ulmuo [pul'meu] m. the lungs
pulo ['puluj m. leap, jump
pulsagao [puise 'siuj f. pulsation
pulso ['puhu] m. pulse
pwnho ['pujHi] m. fist; ruffle
puro ['puru] pure
piixar ipu'farj to push

Q-

Quadrado [ktov'ifraffuj square
quadragesimo [hicv&re 'gezimuj

fortieth
quadro f'ktoaffruj m. picture
quadriipede [kurs 'OrupdOd] m.

quadruped
qwil fkwaij which
qualidade [kwvli'0'aff9] f. quality
qualificar [kwvhfi'karj qualify
qualquer [kwat'ker] any
quando f'kwenduj when
quantia [kwen'ti:vj f. sum
quantidade [kwvnti 'ffa&d] f.

quantity
quanto ['kwvntu] how much?

as much as
quarenta [kwv 'rente] forty
quarto f'kwartuj room
quasi ['kwazij almost, nearly
quatorze [kv'torzg] fourteen
quatro ['kwatruj four
que [k3, kij which; that; what?
quebrar [ka'trar] to break
queda ['kedv] f. fall
queijo ['kvigu] m. cheese
queimar [kv}'mar] to burn
queioca ['ksifvj f. complaint
queixo ['hvifu] m. chin

quern [kvt] who
quente ['kenta] hot
quer . . quer [ksrj whether . . or
querer [ka'rer] will, want
querido [ka'ri&uj beloved
questao [kif'tvu] f. question
quieio [kt'stu] quiet
quinhentos [ki'jientufj five

hundred
quinquagesimo [kmkwK 'gezimv]

fiftieth
quinta ['kintv] f. fifth; farm
quintal /kin'talj m. =, garden
quinto I'kmtu] fifth
quinze f'MzoJ fifteen
quotidiano [kota&t'vnu] daily

R.

Rabeca [rre'bekvj f. violin
rabo ['rrabu] m. tail
raQa ['rrasej f. race
rachar [rm'far] to rend, cleave
raciocinio [riiis'iu'siniu] m. rea-

son(ing)
radiants [rrvOyints] radiant
rainha [rrv'imj f. queen
raio f'rratuj m. ray, beam ;

flash of lightning
raiva ['rrafvej f. wrath
raiz [rrv'if] f. root
rdlhar [rre'liarj to scold
ramalhete [rrvme'HetsJ m, nose-
gay
ramo f'rramu] m. branch
rapariga [rrvpa'rigv] f. girl,

lass
rapaz [rre 'pafj m. boy, lad
raposa [rre'pozv] f. fox
raro ['rraru] rare
rasgar [rreg'gar] to tear
rasgo ['rra^guj m. stroke, trait
raso I'rrazu] shorn
raio ['rratu] m. rat
razao [rre'zeuj f. reason
real [rry'al] =
rebocar [rrffbu'kar] to tow
recado [rra'kacfu] m. message,

errand
reca(h)ir [rrekie'ir] to relapse
recebedor [rriSdW&or] in. col-
lector

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

451

receber [rrasa'berj to receive
receio [rrs'svfuj m. fear
receoso [rrasi'osu] apprehensive
receita [rrs'ssHvJ f. income
recente [rra'senta] recent
recepgao [rrgss'seuj f. reception
recibo [ra'siiuj m. receipt
reciproco [rra sipruhu] reciprocal
recita frrssitv] f. representation
reclamo [rrd'hlvmu] m. bird-call
recobrar [rr9ku'brar] to recover
recollier [rr3ku'Her] to gather,

with draw
recolhimento [rrdkuHi'mentu] m.

gathering
recompensa [rrakUm'pense] f. re-
compense
reeonciliar [rrnMsyl^'arJ recon-
cile [ful
reeonhecidofrra 'Tcujia 'sidu]tha,Tik-
recordagao [rrdkur&v'seu] f. re-
membrance
recreio [rra'Jcreyu] m. recreation
reetidao [rrsti Svu] f. rectitude
recto ['rretu] righteous
recuar [rra'Tcwar] to draw back
reeusa rra'kuzej f. refusal
rede ['rreda] f. net (-work)
redempgao [rradef'svuj f. re-
demption, ransom
reduzir [rrgffu'zirj reduce
reflectvr [rrdfle'tir] reflect
reflexao [rrsfls'siuj f. reflection
reflexo [m 'flsksuj m. reflex
refugio [rra'fugiu] m. refuge,

shelter
rega f'rregvj f. irrigation, wa-
tering
regago [ttb 'gasu] m. lap, bosom
regador [rrg 'gv 'fforj m. watering-
pot
regalo [rrd'galu] m. pleasure;

muff
regar [m'garj to water
regateira [rrage'tayrv] f. huck-

steress
regedor [rrtga'd'orj m. governor
regeneragao [rrpsangrv'svu] f.

regeneration
reger [rr^'gerj to govern
regicida [rriga'si&v] m. and f.
regicide

regist(r)o [rri' gift(r)u] m. re-
gister
rego ['rregii] m. furrow
regosijo[rr9gu' zigu] m. joy, mirth
regra ['rregre] f. rule(r)
regressar [rragra' sa,r] to return
regua ['rregwv] f. ruler
regular [rrsgu lar] =
rei [rrm] m. king
rdnado [rrvfnci&u] m. reign
reinar [rrvt'narj to reign
reino ['rrstnuj m. kingdom
rdis [rrcf^J] m. pi. Portuguese

(copper) coin
re'Uor [rr'e'i'tor] m. rector
rejeitar [rrigei'tar] reject
relagao [rrdlv'svu] f. relation
relampago frra'lempegu] m.

lightning flash
relatdrio [rralv'toriu] m. report,

account
relevo [rra'levuj m. relief
relSgio rra'hgtu] m. watch
relva ['rreivej f. turf
remar [m'marj to row
remaie [rra'matgj m. conclusion,

cornice
remediado [rrdnxdff}' a,&u] well-off
remediar [rrdmadf ar] to remedy
remedio [rrd'msdyu] m. remedy
remessa [rrs'mesv] f. remittance
remeter [rrsma'ter] to remit
remo f'rremu] m. row
remorso [rra'morsu] m. remorse
remoto [rrd'motu] remote
renda ['rrendv] f. lace
rendeiro [rrgn'deiru] m. tenant,

renter
render [rren'der] to render;

subdue
rendimento [rrendi'mentuj m.

revenue
rendoso [rren'dosu] productive
renegar [rrang'gar] to disown
renovar [rranu'var] to renew
renovo [rra'novu] shoot, offspring
renunciar [rranUst'ar] to re-
nounce
reo [rreu] m. accused
reparar [rrdpe'rar] to repair
reparo [rra 'paru] m. satisfaction,
attention

29*

452

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

repartigdo [mperti'seu] f. re-
partition
repente [rro 'pentsj (de — ) suddenly
repeiMno [rrapen iinuj sudden
repetir [mpd'tir] to repeat
repleto [rrs'pktuj overcrowded;

fat
repoVw [rrd'poHu] m. headed

cabbage
reposteiro [mpuf'teiru] m. cur-
tain
repouso [rra'pozu] m. repose, rest
repre(h)ender[rr3pr}en'der]repre-

hend
represa [rra'pree^] f. lock, sluice
reproduzir [rrdpruffu' zir] repro-
duce
repuxo [rrs'pufu] m. spout
requerer [rrakd'rdr] to solicit
res frref] f. cattle
res [rref] (do dhao) m . groundfloor
resentir (se) [rnsen'tir(-s3)] to

resent
res friar [rryffri'ar] to cool
resina [rre'zimvj f. resin
resistir frrazyf'tv.r] to resist
resma [rre^mv] f. ream
resoluto frrszu'lutuj resolute
resolver [rrdzol'verj to resolve
respeito [rryf'pvitu] m. respect
respirar [rrifpi' rar] to breathe
responder [rrijpdn'der] to answer
restituiQao [rryftftui'sSuJ f. res-
titution
resto ['rrsftuj m. rest
resumir [rrazu'mir] to resume
resurgir [rr9sur'girj to revive
resuseitar [rrasufsi'tarj resusci-
tate
retalho [rrd'taHu] m. remnant
reter [rra'ter] to withhold, re-
strain
retirar fmti'rarj to retire
retrato [rrff'tratu] m. portrait
reiiniao [rrfuni'vuj f. reunion
reverente [rrava'rentgj reverent
reverso [rra'vErsu] m. opposite,

back -side
revez [rrs'vefj m. reverse, mis-
fortune
revezar [rrdvs 'za/r] to do by turns
revisdo [rrsvi'ziu] f. revision

revistar [rravtf'tarj to revisit
reza ['rrezv] f. prayer
rezar [rra'zarj to pray
rfhjeumatismo [rremne'ti^muj m.

rheumatism
ribeira frri'befrv] f. brook, bank
ribeiro [rri'bviruj m. rivulet
ridiculo [rrd'&ikulu] ridiculous
rifa f'rrifv] f. lottery
rijo I'rriguJ strong, hard
rim [rri] m. kidney
rima frrimv] f. rime
rio f'rriuj m. river
riquesa [rri'keze] f. riches,

wealth
rir frrirj to laugh
risca frrif'kaj f. stroke
riso ['rri:zu] m. laughter
roca ['rroka] f. distaff
rocha ['rrofej f. rock
rocio [rru'si:uj m. square
roda ['rro&v] f. wheel
rodear [rru&t'ar] to turn round,

encircle
roer [rru'er] to gnaw
rogar frru'gar] to entreat
rogo I'rrogu] m. request, en-
treaty
rol [rrdl] m. roll, list
rola ['rrolv] f. turtle-dove
rolo ['rroluj m. roll, cylinder
romance [rru'mvsa] m. =
romano [rru'mvmj (m.) Roman
rosa I'rrozv] f. rose
rdsto f'rroftuj m. face
roto ['rrotuj torn
rotulo ['rrottdu] m. label
roubar frro'barj to rob
roubo ['rroiuj m. robbery
rouco ['rroTiu] hoarse
roupa ['rropa] f. clothes
rouxinol [rrofi'ndt] m. nightin-
gale
roxo frrofu] violet
rua ['rru:v] f. street
rude ['rruffd] =
rugvr [rru'gir] to roar
ruido [rru'i&u] m. noise
ruivo f'rruivuj ruddy
rumo ['rrumuj m. rhumb-line
russo ['rrusuj Russian
rustico ['rruftiku] m. rustic

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

453

Sabao [si'bvuj m. soap
sa(b)bado ['sa.b'edfu] Saturday
saber fsu'ber] to know
sdbio f'sabiu] wise, learned
sabonete [seiu'neta] m. soap
sabor [sn 'horj in. taste, savour
sabre f'sabraj m. sable
sacar fsv 'karj to draw, puU
saca-rolhas [sakv'rofief] m. cork-
screw
sa(c)co ['sakuj m. sack, bag
sacrificio [svkn'fi:sMA,]m. sacrifice
sacudir [svku'&irj to shake
sadio [sa'dkuj healthy, sound
safar (-se) [sv 'fa,r(s3)] to run

away
sagrado [se'gradu] sacred
sa(h)ir [sv'ir] to go (out)
saia fsaifv] f. petticoat
saibro ['saibruj m. gravel
Sal [sat] m. salt
sdlada [sv'ladv] f. salad
saldrio [sv'laryuj in. salary
salgar [sai'gar] to salt
salitre [sv'li:tr3] m. saltpetre
saliva [sv 'li:vv] f. =
salmao [sai'mvuj in. salmon
salsa {'saisej f. parsley
saltar [sah 'tar] to jump
saltear [sait}'ar] to assault
salto ['saituj m. jump
salvar [sai'var] to save
salvo ['salvuj safe
sanar [se'nar] to cure, heal
sanear [svni 'ar] to make whole-
some
Sangria [sv'gri:v] f. bleeding
sangue [ svgs] m. blood
santificar [sentgfi'karj to sanctify
santo ['sentu] m. saint
sapateiro [svpv'te}ru] m. shoe-
maker
sapato fsv'patuj m. shoe
sapo ['sapuj m. toad
saque ['siScg] m. pillage, (drawing

of a) bill of exchange
saraiva [se'rviw] f. hail
sardinha [svr'dijivj f. sardine
satis faCcJgdo [svtiffv 'svuj f. satis-
faction

satisfaser [svt'iffv 'aerj to satisfy
saiidade [seu'ffaffgj f. melancho-
ly, longing
saiidar [svu'ffar] to salute
saude [sv'uffs] f. health
saiidoso [svu'ffomj melancholic
scenario [sa'narfu] m. scenery
sce(p)tro ['setru] m. sceptre
sciincia [si'esfvj f. science
scientifico [sien'tiflku] scientific
scismar [sig 'ma.r] to muse, medi-
tate
sd fsfj f. see, cathedral
sebe ['sebaj f. hedge
sebo ['sebuj m. tallow
se(c)ca ['sekej f. dryness
se(c)co I'sekuJ dry
seer eta [sd'Tcrstw] secret
seculo ['sekulu] m. century
seda I'seffe] f. silk
sdde f'sstij f. seat
sede ['sefd] f. thirst
sege ['ssg}] f. chaise
segredo [si'gre&u] m. secret
seguir [ss'girj to follow
segundo [sa'gunduj m. second
seguro [sa'guriij secure
seio [sv}u] m. bosom, lap
seis [svtf] six
seiva ['sv}vej f. sap, juice
seixo ['svifu] m. pebble
se(l)la f'sehj f. saddle
sei,l)lo ['selu] m. stamp
selvdgem [sei'vagif] savage
sem [si}] without
semana [sg'mvnv] f. week
semear [s9m}'ar] to sow
semente [ss'ment?] seed
semi . . . ['ssmi . . .] =
sempre ['seprg] always
senofo [sa'nvu] except, safe
senha [sape] f. sign, mark, watch-
word
senhorio [skjiu'rUu] m. landlord
sensivel [se'sivsl] sensible
sentenga [sgn'tesvj f. sentence
sentir f'sen'tir] to feel
separar [s9pe War] to separate
siquito I'seTcitu] m. suit
ser [serj to be; m. being
serao [sa'rvujm. evening (-party)
sereno [sa'renii] serene

454

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

serio f'ssriuj serious
serpents [ssr 'pentfj m. serpent
serra ['serrv] f. saw; chain of

mountains
serreUheiro [sarrv 'Rviru] m. lock-
smith
sessao [si'svu] f. session
sessenta [sa'sente] sixty
severo [sa'vErvJ severe
sexo ['seTcsu] m. sex
sexta-feira [snftv'fvir'e] Friday
silencio fsi'lestu] vi. silence
si(l)laba ['siletv] f. syllable
sim [si] yes
sincero [sl'seru] sincere
singelo [si'^elu] simple
singular [sigu'lar] m. =
sivo f'sUnitJ m. bell
sitio ['svtiuj TO. spot, place
sit(uad)o ['sit(ua.9)u] situated
s6 [so] alone, only
soar [su'ar] to ring, sound
sob ['sdbd] under
s&bre [sobra] upon, on
sohremesa [sobra 'mesv] f. dessert
sobrendme [sobrd'noms] m. sur-
name
sobrinko [su'bripu] m. nephew
sobrio ['sobriu] sober
s6(c)co ['sdku] m. sock; blow
so(c)cdrro [so'korru] m. succour
s6cio ['sos}u] m. member, partner
so(f)frer [su'frer] suffer
so(f)frivel [su'fri-vei] tolerable
sogra ['sogrv] f. mother-in-law
sogro ['sogruj m. father-in-law
sol [s^] m. sun
sola ['sole] f. sole
solar [su'Ur] m. mansion-house
soldado [sot'da&u] m. soldier
soldo ['soUu] m. (soldier's) pay
sole(m)ne [su'lsng] solemn
soUdao [suli'Svu] f. solitude
solido ['soliffu] m. solid
solit&rio [sulftariu] solitary
solo ['solv] m. soil
soltar [soi'tar] to free, loosen
solto ['soitu] free, loose
som [sS] m. sound
sombra ['sSmibrv] f. shade
sombrio [s3m'bri:u] shady, dull
so(m)ma ['somv] f. sum

so(m)no ['sonu] m. sleep
sonho ['sojiu] m. dream
sopa ['sopn] f. soup
soprar [su'prar] to blow
sopro ['sopruj m. blowing, breath
sorrir [su'rrir] to smile
sorte ['sorts] f. sort, fate
sossego [su'segu] m. calmness
suar [su 'ar] to sweat
sub . ■ ■ [sub] . ■] =
subida [su'bv.O'v] f. ascent
siibito ['subitu] sudden
sublime [su'blvma] =
subme(t)ter [subma'ter] to subject
submisso [sub'misu] submissive
subscriCpJeqo [sttbfjkri'sSu] f,

subscription
substdncia [subf/'tesye] f. sub-
stance
su(c)ceder [suso'&er] succeed
su(c)cesso [su'sEsu] m. success
sueco ['swshu] m. Swedish
sufficiente [sufosi'enta] sufficient
suicida [sui'svde] m. f. suicide
Suissa [sw'isv] f. Switzerland
sujeito [su'gvitu] subject
sujo ['suguj m. dirty
sul [sui] m. South
su(m)mo ['sumu] highest
siior [su'or] m. sweat
superficie [supor'fi:s}o] f. super-
ficies
superfluo [su'perfluu] eaT^ei&XLOxxs
superior [supd'rpor] m. =
superstisao [supor/ti'sm] f. su-
perstition
s'u(p)plemento [supWmSniu] m.

supplement
su(p)pdr [su'por] suppose
suCpjportar [supur'tar] support
supremo [su'premu] supreme
supra . . . ['suprv] . . .J =
surdo ['surdu] deaf
surdo-mudo [surdu -mutu] deaf-
mute
surpresa [sur'prezej f. surprise
surto ['surtuj anchored
suspeito [sufpsitu] m. suspect
suspiro [suf'pi:ruj m. sigh
sustento [suftentuj m. sustenance

food
susto ['su/tu] m. fright

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

455

Tabaearia [tvbvkv'rvv] f. to-

bacco-sliop
tabaco [tv'bakuj m. tobacco
tabe{l)liao [t'etid'l'i^u] m. notary
taboleiro [tvbu'letruj m. fray,

gaming-board
tabuUta [tsbu'letvj sign (-board)
tdbua ['tabus] f. table(t)
taga ['tasv] f. bowl
tacao [tv'kvu] m. heal
tacto I'tatu] m. touch
talhar [tv'dar] to cut
talhe ['taMgJ m. form, shape
talho ['tafiuj m. cut, chopping-

block
talmz ftat'vef] perhaps
tamanho [tie'mvpu] (so) great
tanto f'tvntuj so much
tao [tvu] so, such
tapar [tv'parj to cover
tapete [tv 'petaj m. carpet
tardar [tvr'dar] to tarry
tarde ['tarda] f. afternoon, eve-
ning
tarefa [tv 'refej f. tast
taxa ['tafe] f. tax, rate
tecelao [tdsd'liu] m. weaver
tecer [ta'ser] to weave
tecido [ta'siffu] m. tissue
tecto ['tetu] m. roof
tela ['telv] cloth, linen
teUgrapho [ta'Ugr'sfu] m. tele-
graph
telha ['tvdv] f. tile
temer [ts'mer] to fear
tempo I'tempu] m. time
temporal [tempu'ral] m. =
tenaz [ta'naf] f. tenacious
teng&o [ie'svu] f. intention
teneionar [tesno'nar] to intent
tenente [tg'nenta] m. lieutenaut
tentar [ten' tar] to tempt
tipido ['tepiffu] tepid
terminar tarmi'nar] terminate
terra ['teri^ earth, ground
terreiro [tarrefru] m. terrace,

square
terremuto [tarra'motu] m. earth-
quake
tesoura [td'zore] f. scissors

testa ['teftv] f. forehead
testemunha [ttfta 'mujiv] f. testi-
mony, witness
texto ['tsflu] m. text
tia [tiiv] f. aunt
tijolo [ifgolu] m. brick
timido i'timiffu] timid
tingir [ti'^ir] to dye
tinteiro [tm'tvvru] m. inkstand
tinto ['tmtu] dyed, red
tio ['ti:u] m. uncle
tirar [ti'rar] to draw
toalha [tw'aliv] f. towel
tocar [tu'ear] to touch
todo ['to&u] (adj.) all
tomar [tu'mar] to take
tomo ['tomu] m. tome
toml [tii'nd] m. tun, cask
tQvmento [tur'mentu] m. torment
tomar [tur'nar] to (re)turn
torre ['torra] f. tower, steeple
torrente [tu'rrenta] f. torrent
torto ['tortuj crooked, tortuous
tortura [tur'turej f. torture
tosse ['toss] f. cough
toucinho [to'sipu] m. bacon
touro ['toru] m. bull
trabalho [trv'bafiu] m. work
traio ['trasu] m. touch, sketch
tradusir [trv&u'zir] to translate
trdfego ['trafagu] m. 1 , „„
trdfico ['trafku] m. \
traidor ['trai&or] m. traitor
trajo ['tra,gu] ni. garb
tranqui(l)lo [trv 'kvnlu] tranquil
transerever [trSfkra'ver] trans-
cribe
transports [trS/'poriaJ m. trans-
port
transtorno [trvf'tornu] m. distur-
bance
tratar [tre'tar] to treat, deal
trato [tratu] m. treasment
trave ['travgj f. beam
travessa [tre 'vesv] f. cross-
beam
trazer [tre'zer] to carry, bring
trecho ['trsfu] m. excerpt
trem [trv}] m. carriage
tremer [trd'mer] to tremble
trcvo ['trevu] trefoil
triee ['trez3[ thirteen

456

Portuguese-English Vocabulary.

trezentos [tn'zentuj] three hund-
red
trigo f'trigu] m. wheat, corn
Trindade [trin'daS^o] f. Trinity
friplice ['triplisd] triple
trisite ['triftd] sad
trocar [tru'lca.r] to change
truco f'troku] m. change
tronco f'troku] m. trunk
tropa ['trjpe] f. troop
tropel [tru'pii] troop, multitude
trocao [tru't-vu] m. thunder
irovejar [trui}'^,irj to thunder
tudo I 'tuSTu] the whole, all,

everything
tiimulo f'tumulu] m. tomb
turco [turkuj m. Turk
tiirvo f'turvuj muddy

U.

ultimo f'uilimuj last

ununime [u'tinnimaj unanimous

unha ['ujiej f. nail

uniao fun} '§uj f. union

unico f'uniki(J only, sole

unidade funi' ffa.(f3] f. unity

imir fu 'nirj to unite

urhano furbvnu] civil

urgente fur'^ents] m. urgent

urso f'unu] m. bear

urze [ 'ursi] f. sweet broom

uso f'uzuj m. use

usual fuvu'ai] =

ustira fu' zurv] f. usury

I'dil f'util] useful

rna fuvv] f. grape

Vacca fvaJce] f. cow
vacuo f'vakwuj void, empty
vaga fvagej f. wane
vagar fvv'gar] m. leisure
vago f'vagu] vacant, vague
vaidade vay'&atft] f. vanity
vaidoso fray'uozu] vain
vale f'vahj m. post-office order
ralente fn 'lenti] valiant
vaUr fvv'ler] to be worth
vdlido f'valifuj valid, efficacious
calido fvv'lvyu] m. favourite

valor fvv'lor] m. value
valsa f'tiatsEj f. valse
tantdgem fvvn'ta^vf] f. advan-
tage
vantajoso fiintn 'gozu] advan-
tageous
I'fJo frvu] void, vain; »!. void
i-urio f'variyj various
varrer fvs'rrer] to sweep
rasa f'vasv] f. slime
vasar fvv 'zarj to empty
vaso f'vnzu] m. vase, vessel
vasto f vajtu] vast
vado fvv'zi:u] empty
veado fv}'adu] m. deer
vegetal fvi^ytai] m. vegetable
vela fvElv] f. sail
reVw f'vsliu & 'vnfiu] old
ve(l)ludo fva'luifa] m. velvet
veloz fv3'hf] swift
veneer fve'ser] to vanquish
venda f'vendis] f. sale
vender fven'der] to sell
ceneno fm'nenu] m. poison
vento f'centuj m. wind
ventre f'ventrgj m. belly
Ventura fren'tura] f. fortune
verdade fvar'dvffo] f. truth
verdadeiro fvdrdv' oviru] true
verde f'verdd] green
vergonha fvgr'gojiv] f. shame
verme fvermaj m. worm
vermelho fv3r'mv/iuj red
versdo fvgr'svu] f. version
verter fv3r'ter] to spill; trans-
late
vespera fvefparv] f. eve
vestido fvif'tidu] gown, dress
vestir fmf'tir] to dress
vez fvef] f. time
via fviiis] f. way, passage
vidgem fvy'age}] f. journey
vieio f'vigiu] m. vice
viclima fvitimaj f. victim
victdria fvi't.n-ivj f. victory
vida f'vidis] life
vide f'vii&i] f. vine
vidro f'tn^ru] glass
vi(l)la f'vilvj f. village
vinagre fmnagrd] m. vinegar
vinda f'vlndv] f. arrival
vindima fvm'di-mvj f. vintage

Portugaese-English Vocabulary.

457

iiingar [vVgar] to revenge
vinha ['vijm] f. vineyard
vinho I'vipu] m. wine
vintem [vin teij m. Portuguese

coin of 20 reis
violento fviu'lentuj violent
violeta [viu'letej f. violet
vir [virj to come
virar [vi'rarj to turn
virgula ['virgulv] f. comma
viril [vi'rii] manly
virtude [vir'tu&d] f. virtue
vista ['viftej f. view
visto ['viftuj seen
viuvo fvi'uvuj m. widomer
vivo ['vivuj alive
vizinho fva'zipu m. neighbour
voar [vu'arj to fly
foUa I'voiteJ f. turn

voltar [vot'tar] to (re)turu,
volume [vu'luma] m. volume
volver [voi'ver] to go back, to

stir
vontade poon'tafy] f. will, wish
voo [vou] m. flight
voto ['votuj m. vote
voz [vofj f. voice

Z.

Zanga ['zegej f. anger
zangar [zv'gar] to irritate
zelo ['selu] m. zeal
zero ['zeru] m. zero
zomhar [zom'bar] to mock
zumbido [zUm'hiffu] m. 1 hum-
zunido [zu'ni&u] m. J ming.

29**

Moedas

brazileiras e portuguezas.

Estados

Prata.

'J^<W,

2000 n-is.

Nickel.

400

I. Prata.

1000 rc'l-i
ou I c^cikIo

II. Nickel.

100 rci^
ou 10 centavos.

A. Anverso.

1000 rci^.

Portugal.

A. Anverso.

'"■ ^°'"''- /^^>fL|>^

I. Prata

B. Reverse.

do Brazil

2000 rcis.

II. Nickel.

400 re\s

1. Prata.

I'Vl'i

1000 rcis
ou I cscmlo.

II. Nickel.

1000 rcis.

Portugal.

B. Reverso.

50 centavos
ou 500 reis.

111. Cobre.

500 rcis.

I \-intem ^
20 reis ou 2 centavos.

A. Anverso.

B, Reverse.

-■ ^-- J .

Nola de Banco

do \alor de 5 milrcis ou 5 escudos,

com o retrato do Marquez de roinba].

Educational Works and Class-Books

Method (jaspey-Otto-Saoer

FOR THE STUDY OF MODERN LANGUAGES.
PUBLISHED BY JULIUS GrOOS, He[DELBERG[.

• With each newly-learnt language one wins a new souI.» Charles V.

*Al the end of the 19^'' ccniurj^ the world is ruled by the interest for
trade and traflic ; it breaks through the barriers which separate
the peoples and ties up neiv relations between the nations.*

William II.

„ Julius G-roos, Publishei, has for the last fifty years been devoting his
special attention to education-al worlis on modern languages, and has published
a large number of class-boolis for the study of those tnodern languages most
generally spoken. In this particular department he is in our opinion t^ntur-
passed by any other German publisher. The series consists of 312 volumes
of different sizes which are all arranged on the same system, as is easily
seen by a glance at the grammars which so closely resemble one another,
that an acquaintance with one greatly facilitates the study of the others.
This is no small advantage in these exacting times when the knowledge of
one language alone is hardly deemed sufficient.

The textbooks of the Gasjjey- Otto -Salter metli,od liave, within the
last ten years, acquired an universal reputation, increasing in pro-
portion as a Jcnowledge of living languages has become a necessity of modern
life. The chief advantages, by which they compare favorably with tlwusands
of similar books, are loumess of price and good appearance, the happy union
of theory and practice, the clear scientific basis of the grammar proper com-
bined with j>ractical convertiutiotuil exercises, and the system, here
conceived for the first time and consistently carried out, by which the pupil is
really taught to speak and write the foreign language.

To this •)net1t,od is entirely due the enormous success u/ith which the
Oas2iey- Otto- Saner textbooks have met; most other grammars either
content themselves with giving the theoretical exposition of the grammatical
forms and trouble the pupil with a confused mass of the most far-fetched
irregularities and exceptions without ever applying them, or go
to the oilier extreme, and siuiply teach hirn to repeat in a parrot-
like manner a few colloquial ph,rascs without letting him grasp the
real genius of the foreign language.

Th.e system referred to is easily discoverable : 1. in the arrangement of
the grammar ; 2. in the endeavour to enable the pupil to understand a
regular text as soon as possible, and above all to teach him to speak the
foreign language ; this latter point was considered by the authors so particu-
larly characteristic of their works, that they have styled them — to distinguish
them from other works of a similar kind — Conversatiotial Graftimars.

The first series comprises manuals for the use of Englishmen and
consists of 57 volumes.

Our admiration for this rich collection of worlis, for the method dis-
played and the fertile genius of certain of the authors, is increased when we
examine the other series, which are intended for the use of foreigners.

In these works the chief difficulty under which several of the authors
have laboured, has been the necessity of teaching a language in a foreign
idiom ; not to mention the peculiar difficulties which the German idiom offers
in writing school-books for the, stiidy of that language.

We must confess that for tho.^e persons who, from n practical point
of view, urish to learn a foreign language sufficiently well to enable them to

"ethod Gaspey-uiio-Dauci

(or the s(iid) of aioderii laugiiages.

wfite and speak it mtJi ease, the authors hnve set down th^, grammatical
ruUs iti su<:h a way, that it is equally easy to understand and to learn them.

Moreover, we cannot hut commend the elegance and neatness of the type
and binding of the hooTcs. It is doiibtUss on this account too that these
volumes have been received with so much favour and that several have reached
such a large circulation.

We willingly testify that the. whole collection gives proof of mudt care
and industry, both with regard to the aims it has in view and the way in
which these have been carried out, and, moreover, reflects great credit on the
editor, this collection being in reality quite an exceptkma-l thing of its Jcind."

t.

(Extract from the Literary Review.)

All books bouud.

Eiagrlisli Elditioriis.

Elemeatary Motlern Armenian Grammar by Gulian ....
Arabie Grammar by Thatcher

Key to the Arabic Graramar by Thatcher

Arabic Chrestomathy by Harder

KUani^ll Conversatioii-Grammar by Thomas

^Key to the Danish Conversation - Grammar by Thomas

■^fOutcll Conversation-Grammar by Valette. 3. Ed

V^Key to the Dutch Convers. -Grammar by Valette

\ Dutch Header by Valette. 2. Ed

French Conversation-Grammar by Otto-Onions, 14. Ed. , . net

Key to the French Couvers.-Oranimar by Otto-Oniona. 8. Ed

Elementary French Grammar by Wright. 5. Ed

French Reader by Onions

Materials for French Prose Composition by Otto-Onions. 5. Ed. . .

French Dialogues by Otto-Corkran

©erman Conversation-Grammar by Otto. 29. Ed net

Key to the German Convers. -Grammar by Otto. 21. Ed

Elementary German Grrammar by Otto. 10. Ed

First German Book by Otto. 9. Ed

German Reader by Otto. I. 8. Ed., II. .5. Ed., 111. 2. Ed. . . each

Materials for translating English into German by Otto-Wright. 7. Ed.

Key to the Mater, f. tr. Engl. i. Germ, by Otto. 3. Ed

German Dialogues by Otto. 5. Ed

.iccideuce of the Gorman language by Otto-Wright. 2. Ed. . . .

Handbook of English and Gorman Idioms by La,nge

German Verbs with their appropriate prepositions etc. by Tebbitt .

The Hanssa language (Die Haussaspraohe ; la langue haoussa) by Seidel

Hindastani Conversation -Grammar by St. Clair - Tisdall . . . .

Key to the Hindustani Convers.- Grammar by St. Clair-Tisdall

Italian Conversation-Grammar by Sauer-de Arteaga. 9. Ed. net

Key to the Itallac Convers. -Grammar by Saucr-de Arteaga. 8. Ed

Elementary Italian Grammar by Motti. 4. Ed

Italian Reader by Cattaneo. 2. Ed

Italian Dialogues by Motti

Japanese Conversation-Grammar by Plant

Key to the Japanese OonTcrs -Grammar by Plant .

Modern Persian Conversation-Granrmar by St. Clair-Tisdall

Key to the Mod. Persian Convers. -Grammar by Si. Clair-Tisdall . . .

IJfPortnguese Conversation-Grammar by Ey

jlfKey to the Portuguese r'.Tuircra -araTnmiir by it,t -

Tii1i

Method Graspey-Otto-Sauer

Tor the study of modern languages.

English Edit ions.

l^clCuSHlan Convoreation-ijtrammar by Motti. 5. Ed

irKey to the Russian Convers. -Grammar l>y Mottl. 3, Ed

Elementary Russian Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed. .......

Key to the Elementary Russian Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed

Russian Reader by Werkhaupt and Roller

Servian Conversation-Grammar by Petrovitcli

Key to the Servian Convers.-Grammar by PetroTltch

Spanish Conversation-Grammar by Saner - de Arteaga. 8. Ed. net

Key to the Spanish Convers. -Grammar by Sauer-de Arteaga, 6. Ed. . . .

Elementary Spanish Grammar by Pavia. 2. Ed

Spanisli Reader by Avteaga

Spanish Dialogues by Sauer-Corkran

l^Elemeutary S'W^dish Grammar by Fort. 2. Ed

Turkish Conversation -Grammar by Hagopian

Key to the Turkish Oonvers. -Grammar by Hagopian

A.jrabic Edition-
Heine dentsche iSprachiehre fur Araber von Hartmann ....

Armenian Edition.

Kleine englische Sprachlehie liir Armenicr von Gulian ....

Knlgarian Editions.

Kleine dentsche Sprachlehre tiir bulgaren von Gawriysky. 3. Aufl.
Kleine englische Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky . .
Kleine franzosische Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky .
Kleine rnssische Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky . .

J>anisli Edition.
Kleine deutsche Sprachlehre tiir Danen von Sorenscn

I>u.tcli Editions.

Kleine Engelsche Spmakkunst door (Joster

Kleine Fransche Spraakkunst door Welbergen

Kleine Hoogfduitsche Grammatica door Schwippert. 2.
Leerboek der Italiaansche taal door van Binsbergen

Sleutel bij de leerboelr der Itallaansche taal door van Binsbergen

Kleine Spaansche Spraakkunst door van Haaff

Sleutel bij de kleine Spaansche Spraakkunst door van Haaff

Erencli Editions-

Grammaire allemande par Otto-JMicolas. 18. t,d

Corrigi de» theuies de la Grammaire allemande par Otto-Nicolas. 7. i,d. .
Petite grammaire allemande par Otto-Verrier. 10. Ed. . ...

Lectures allemandes par Otto. I. 8. ]5d., 11. 5. fid., III. 2. lild. each

Erstes deutsches Leaebuch von Verrier. 2. Aufl

Conversations allemandes par, Otto-Verrier. ■>. fid

Grammaire anglnise par Mauroa-Verrier. 11. Illd

Corrig6 des thSmeci de la Grammaire aoKiaise par 'Mtturon-Verrier. 5. j4d. .

Petite grammaire anglaise par Mauron. 7. ^jd

Lectures anglaises par Maurou. 3. lild

Conversations anglaises par Corkran. 2. itd

Grammaire arabe par Aruiez

Corrig6 des themes de la Grammaire arabe par Armez . . *

Chrestomathie arabe par Harder

La langue congolaise par Seidel-Strayf . . ,

Grammaire espagnole par Sauer-Serrano, 6. Ed

Corrig6 des themes de la Gramm. espa^^n. par Plauer-Serrano, 5. ltd.

Petite grammaire espagnole par Tanty. 3. Ed

Leo' - ' '-"■—"

Dr.

Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer

for tbe study of modern languages.

i<^vencli Editions.

Gram ni aire grecque par Capos

Corrige dea themes de la Grammaire grecque par Capoa

Petite grammaire hongroise par Kout

Corrige des themes de la Petite grammaire hongroiae par Eont .

Chrestomathie hongroise par Kont

Grammaire italienne par Saner. 12. Ed. ...__...
Corrige des thimea de la Grammaire italienne par Saucr. 8 hi. .

Petite grammaire italienne par Motti. 5. 'Ed

Chrestomatliie italienne par (lattani'O. 3. Ed

Conversations italiennes par Motti. 2. Kd

Grammaire .japonaiNe par Plant

Corrig6 des themes de la (iran.maire japOQaise par PlaiU ....

Grammaire ueerlandaise par Valette. S. Ed. . . .
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire neerlandaise par Valette

Lectures Deerlandai.'<es par Valette, 2. t.d

Grammaire portugaise par Ey-Nogueira

Corrige des tUimcs de la (irammaire portugaiae par Ey-KoKnelra .

Grammaire ronniaiiie par Lovera

Corri^'e des th^mea de la Cirammaiie roumaine pur Lovera . . . .

Grammaire rnwHe par Kuchs-Nicolas. 5. Ed

Corrig6 dea thfeujes de la (Iramnmire russe par Fuehs-Nlcolas. .'). fid.

Petite grammaire rubae par Motti. 'i. Ed , . . .

Corrig6 des thferoes de la Petite grammaire ruase par Motti. 3, £d. .

Lectures ruaees par Werkhaupt et Roller

Grammaire 8erl»e par Petrovitcli

CorrlRe dee themes de la Grammaire 8erbe par Petrovitch . . . . .
l-'etue grammaire suedolse par Fort

Grerman Editioris.

Arabisclie KonveraaiionN-Urammatik v. Uartter. 2. Aufl.
Schliissel dazu'V. Harder. 2. Autl

Kleine arabisclie Sprachlehre v. Harder . . . . ;

Araliiache Chrestomathie v. Harder

Rnlffarische Konversations-Grammatik v. Gawriysky ....

Scblilasel dazu v. Gawriysky

Cliinesische Konversations-Grammatik v. Seidel

Schliissel dazu v. Seidel

Kleine chinesische Sprachlehre v. Seidel

ficblilasel dazu v Seidel

Daniiiictae Konversations-Grammatik v. Wied. 2. Aufl

flchlUasel dazu v. Wied. 2. AuH

Dnala-Sprachlehre und Worterbuch v. Seidel

Englische Konversations-Grammatik v. Gaspey-Runge. 25. Aufl.

Schliissel dazu v. Runge. 5. Aufl

Englisches Konvereations-Lesebucli v. Gaspey-Runge. 6. Aafl. . .

Kleine englische Sprachlehre v. Otto-Runge. 8. Aufl

Schliissel dazu v. Runge

Englische Gesprache v. Rimge. 3. Aufl

Materialien z. Ubersetzen ins Englische v. Otto-Runge. 4. Aufl. . .

Englische Chrestomathie v. Siipfle-Wright. 9. Aufl

Handbuch englischer und deutscher Idiome v. Lange

Ewe-Sprachlehre und Worterbuch v. Seidel

Kleine flnnisclie Sprachlehre v. Neirhaus

Pranzftsisclie Konversations-Grammatik v. Otto-Siipfle 29. Aufl,

Schliissel dazu v. Siipfle. 6. Aufl

Franz. Konv.-Lesebuch v. Otto-Runge. I. 10. Aufl., H. 5. Aufl. k . .
Franz. Konv.-Leseb. f. Madchsch. v. Otto-Runge I. 5. Aufl., H. 3. Aufl. h

Kleine franzosische Sprachlehre v. Otto-Siipfle. 10. Aufl

Schliissel dazu v. Otto-Siipfle. il. Au^

2
1

41
4 i

2'

2 ■
2 '
2
6

2

5
8
3
5

10,

s

3
10

,5

2

8
1

1

5

2
4

2
•j

2
1
2

2
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
2

Method Graspey-Otto-Sauer

for the study of niodeni languages.

-n

CI^er•man Editions.

Materialien z. Uborsetzen lus Franz6sische v. Knoge . . .

Franzfisisclie Gesprache v. Otto-Runge. 9. Aull

FranzOsisches Lesebuch v. Siipfle. 11. Aufl

Italienisclie Konversatione-Grammatik v. Sauer. 13.
SchltlSfcel dazu v. Cattaneo. 5. Aufl.

Aufl.

Italienisches Konversations-Lesebuch v. Sauer. 5. Aufl. . ...

Italienische Cbrestomathie v. Cattaneo. 3. Aufl

Kleine italienisohe Spracblehre t. Sauer. 11. Aufl

Schlussel dazu v. Cattaneo. 3. .Vufl

Italienisohe Gespraobe v. Sauer-Motti. 6. Aufl

DbuDgsstucke zum tJbera. a. d. Deutachen i. Ital. v. Lardelli. 5. Aufl.

Japanlsche Konversations-Gvammatik v. Plant

Scbliissel duzu v. Plant

narokkanische Spraohlebre v. Seidel

Meugl'iecllische Koij-veraations-Grarumatik v. Petraris. 2. Aufl. .

Schlilsael dazu v. Petrar;8. 2, Aufl

Lehrbuoh dei neugriecbischen Volksspracbe v. Petraris

( '"Neupersische Konversations-Grammatik v. Beck

4^Schlussel dazu v. Beck

Niederlandische Kouversatioua-Grammatit v. Valette, H. Aufl.

Schliiaael d-azu v. Valette. 3 Aufl

Niederlandischea KonT.-Lesebuoh v. Valette. 2. Aufl

Kleine niederliliidiscbe Sprachlebre v. Valette. 4. Aufl

Polniisclie Konversations-Grammatik v. Wicherkiewicz. 3. Aufl. .

Scblttaael dazu v. Wicherkiewicz. 3. Aufl

Kleine polnische Sprachlebre v. Ssymank

Schlussel dazu v. Ssymank

JPortngies^il^Clie Konversations-Grammatik v. Ey. 2. Aufl. . .

Schlussel dazu v. Ey. 2. Aufl

Kleine portugiesische Sprachlebre v. Kordgien-Ey. 5. Aufl. . . .

BlllUJinische Konversations-Grammatik von Lovera

Schlussel dazu von Lovera

Knssisclie Konversations-Grammatik v. Fucha. 6. Aufl

Schliiasel dazu v. Fucha. 6. Aufl

Russisches Konversations-Leseboob v. Werkhaupt

Kleine russiscbe Sprachlebre v. Motti, 4. Aufl

Schluasel dazu v. Motti. 4. Aufl , ,

IScllwediscIie Konversations-Grammatik v. Walter. 2. Aufl. . .

Schlussel dazu v. Walter. 2. Aufl

Kleine scbwedische Sprachlebre v. Fort. 3. Aufl

Schlussel dazu v. Fort

Serbiscke Konversations-Grammatik v. Petrovitch

Schlussel dazu v. Petrovitch

S^panische Konversations-Grammatik v. Sauer-Ruppert. 10. Aufl.

Schlussel dazu v. Euppert. 4. Aufl

Bpanisches Lesebucb v. Arteaga

Kleine spanische Sprachlebre v. Sauer. 8. Aufl

Schlussel daau v. Runge. 3. Aufl

Spanische Gespracbe v. Sauer. 4. Aufl

Spanische Rektionaliste v. Sauer-Kordgien

Snahili-Konversations-Grammatik v. Seidel

Schlussel dazu v. Seidel

Suahili-WSrterbucb v. Seidel

Tscheckiscke Konversations-Grammatik v. Maechner

Schlussel dazu v. Masohner

Tiirkiscke Konversations-Grammatik v. .lehlitscbka

Schllissel dazu v. Jehlitschka

Kleine tiirkische Sprachlebre v. Horten

SchlL ' "--■ - •"•"'—

Method Gaspey-Otto-Saner

for tbe study of modern languagres.

Gl-erman Editions.

WUnsarische Konversatious-Grammatik v. Magy
^ Schlussel dazu v. Nagy

Kleme uogarische Sprachletire v. Nagy. 3. Aiifl.

Schlussel dazu v. Nagy

Ungarische Chrestomatliie t. Kont

O-reeU Editions-

. Auil

Kltine dentsche bpi-iichlehre tur Gritchen tou Miltos

Deutsche Geopriiche fiir Griechen von Maltos

Deutsclies Lesebuch fur Grieclien von Maltos

Kleine englische Spvachlehre t'iir Griechen voa Deffuer . .
Kleine rn88li!)che Sprachlelire fur Griechen von Maltos . .
Hixngai-ian Editions.

Doutsclie Koaversiitions-Gramojatik tu' Ungaren v> n Pliilipp
Schliissel dazu von Philipp " i,

Italian Editionss-

Grammatica Araba di Farma

Chiave della grammatica arabu di Farina

Gramniatica francese di Motti. 4. Ed

Chiave della gramroatica francese di Motti. 3. Kd.

Grammatica olenicutaro francese di Sauer-Motti. 5. Ed

Letture fraDceai di Le Boiiclier

Conversazioni francysi di Motti

Grammatica, del Oreco volgare di Palurabo

Grammatica IngleHe di Pavia. 6. Ed

Cliiave dt-Ua grammatica Inglese di Pavia. 3, Ed

Grammatica elementare inglese di Pavia. 3. Ed

Letture inglesi di Le Boucher

Grammatica elementare portoghese di Palumbo

Grammatica rns^ia di Motti

Chiave della grammatica russa di Motti

Grammatica spas:iinola di Pavia. 4. Ed

Chiave della Grammattca spagnuola di Pavia. 3. Ed

Grammatica elementare spagnuola di Motti. 4. Ed

Gra.mmatica elementare svedese di Pereira

Grammatica tedesca di Sauer-Ferrari. 8. Ed

Chiave della ttrammatica tedesca di Sauer-Ferrari. 4. Kd

Grammatica elementare tedesca di Otto. 6. Ed

Letture tedesche di Otto. 0. Ed

Antologia tedesca di Verdaro

Conversazioni tedesche di Motti. 2. Ed

Avviamento al trad, dal ted. in ital. di Lardelli. 5. Ed

folish Editions.

Kleine deatsche Sprachlehre fur Polen v. Paulus-Legowrki. 2. Anfl.
Scliliissel dazu v. Paulus-Legowski

I^ort-ugTiesf^ Editions-

Gramdtica alema por Prevot. 4. Ed

Chave da Gramitica alema por Otto-Privot. 2. Ed

Gram^tica elementar alema por Pr^vot-Pereira. 4. Ed

Erbtes deutsches Lesebuch v. Verrier. 2. Aufl

Grammatica francesa por Tauty-Vasconcellos. 2. Ed

Chave da Grammatica francesa por Tanty-Vasconcollos. 2. Ed

Livro de leitura francesa por Le Boucher

Livro de leitura inglesa por Le Boucher

Grammatica elementar HTLGCS^^m^^^^^^^t^g^B^^^^^SS^:^^^^

a-

iuciuuu tiraispc^ -vtto -Sauer

for the study of modern langoiiges.

— B

Ed.

3?^o^l.maxl Editions.

Conveiviijiuni eugleze de Waltuck ....

ijramatica fraxicesa de Leist

Cbeea gramaliciT franceae de Leist

Elemeute de gramatica IVancesa de Leist. '2.
Conversa^iiml t'ranceze de Leiat. 4. Ed. . .
Gramatica germana 'le Leist ....

Cheea gramaticil grermane de [.eist .....
Elemente de gramatica germana de Leist. '2.
Converaajiuni germane de Leist. 2. Ed. ...

T^Tissian JEditions.

Ed.

English Gr.immar for Kusaiaus by Hauti'. 2, Ed

Key to the English Grammar tor Eussians by Hautf. 2. Ed. ....

French. Grammar for Russians by Malkiel. 2. Ed

Key to the French Grammar for Russians by Malkiel. 2. Ed

German Grammar for Russians by Hanff. 3. Ed

Key to the German Grammar for Russians by Uauff. 3. Ed

Italian Grammar for Russians by Mozejko

Key to the Italian Grammar for Russians by Mozejko

Japanese Grammar for Russians by Plaut-Issacovitcli . . .
Key to the Japanese Grammar lor Rus.siaus*by Plaut-Issacovitcb ....
Elementary Sivedish Grammar for Russians by Port-Issacovitcb

Servian Edition ss.

Kleine deutsche Sprachlehre tiir Serben von Petrovitcli . .
Kleine englische Sprachlehre i'iir Serben von Petrovitch
Kleine franzosische Sprachlehre fiir Serben von Petrovitch
Kleine italienische Sprachlehre fiir Serben you Petrovitch
Kleine rnssische Sprachlehre fiir Serben von Petrovitch .

Schlussel dazu von Petrovitcli

Spanish. Editions.

Gramatica alemana por Ruppert. 4. Ed

Clave de la Gramatica alemana por Ruppert. .3. Ed

Gramatica elemental alemana por Otto-Ruppert. 7. Ed

Gramatica francesa por Tanty-de Arteaga. 2. Ed

Clave de la OramiUca franceaa por Tajity-de Arteaga 2. Ed

Gramatica sucinta de la lengua francesa por Otto. 6. Ed

Libro de lectura frauceaa por Le Boucher

Gramatica inglesa por Pavia. 3. Ed

Clave de la Gramitica inglesa por Pavla. 3. Ed

Gramatica sucinta de la lengua inglesa por Pavia. 6. Ed. . .

Libro de lectura inglesa por Le Boucher

Gramatica sucinta de la lengua italiana por Pavia. 5. Ed. . .

Gramatica sucinta portuguesa por CarriUo

Gramatici sucinta de la lengua rnsa por d'Aroais . . . ... .

Olave de la Gramatica aucluta rusa por d'Arcais

Swedish Edition.

Kleine deutsche Sprachlehre liir Schweden von Walter ....

Tchech Editions.

Kleine deutsche Sprachlehre tiir Tschecheu von Maschuer . . .
Fl'anzosische Kouv.-Grammatik fur Tschechen von Alaschucr
Schllissel dazu von Maschner

Turlzish Editions.

Kleine dentsche Sprachlehre fur Tiirken v.m Well Bey-Bolland.
Deutsches Lesebuch liir Tiirken von Weli Bey-BoUand ....

\''

2 -

2 _

4i —

2 1 —

7 1 —

2 '■ -

3 i —

Method GUnsin

Tor the study of inodero laupages.
Conversation -Books by Connor

iu t"0 taiigiijiirps:
Enulish-Geruiaii. ;:i. Ed. 2. — Dentsch-Italien. 2, Alifl. 2.-
EQglish-Frencb 3. Eii. i'. — Deutsch-NiederlandiPoh '2.—
English-Italian, a. EJ. 2. — Deutsch-Polnisoh . . i.—
English-Rus-sian . - .s. — Deutsch-l'ortugiesisch -.—
Englisn-Spauish. 2. Ed. 2. — Deutsch-Rum&uiseli . 2. —
English-Swedish . . 2.— Deutsch-Riissisoh . , :'. —
Deutscb-Danisch . . 2. — Doutsch-Sohwedisch . 2.—
Deutsch-Franz. 3. .\nH 2.— DiMitsch-Spauisch, 2..\. 2.—

throe lanpunges; Enelisli-German-Frenrh. 15. Ed

foar iaiignapes: En^'lish-German-Frcncb-Ualiau. o. Ed,

The Traveller's Companion by Motti.

Deutseh-Tiirkisch . .

Frau(;ais-ItalioD. 2, Ed.

Frau(;ftis-Espagnol

Fmn(,^ais-Portugais

Fran(;ais-Rnssc

Iialiano-Spagnnolo

1. tor (.itTiaans

Eijglisoh .

2. „ „ Franzos, .

i>. M „ Italien. .

4, „ ,, Rassisi'h .

6. ,, „ Niederld. .

^. .. ., 8paniscU .

21. lorEagli^aaR'n; German .

22. „ „ Freaoh .
2.'i. „ „ Italian
24. ,, ,, Kns.^ian .
•2b. „ „ Dnti-h .
2H. ,. ,, Sliatiish

41. for

42. „

43. „

44. „

45. „

I- 46. „
1 - Gl. for
1- H2. „
1- B3. „
1 - 04. „

Frenchmen: Uent.^ch
,, Euglisch

„ Ualien.

,, Rtissiscli

,, NioderU.

,, Spauiscli

Italians: Deatsfth

„ Engliscb

Frauzos.

1 - SI, for Rus

1-. M, „

1-, S3. ,,

1-1 84.

101.
102.

ion

IU4.
121).

Riissisch . 1 - 141,

I'fi,

Niederld.
Spaniscli .

142.

143.

Peutscli .

Engliscb .
,', ,, I'ranzds. .

Ualien. ,
for Dulehnien; DentsuU .
., „ Engliscli .

„ „ Frauzos. .

Ualien. .

Frauzos. .

DontseU .

Engliscb .

Franzos. .

for Spaniards:
for Portngnese

60. „

tii-eriuan Laat^Mnj^e by liiiclytir

I!$pani8h Commercial CoiTespoutleiice by Arteaga y Pereira . .

niiniseher Spracht'uhrer von Forchhammer

Kichti^e Ausspraolie d. Mu.sterdeatschen v. Dr. E. DaDuheisser, br.

Ellgli««h, as it is spoken v. Crump. 15. Aufl

Schliissel da/u v.Cninip. 12 AuH

Englischc Haudelskorri'.spundenz v. Cai-pentcr. 2. Au6

Nenes Taschenworterbnch : Deutsch-EugHsch u. En^liscli-Oeutsch . .

Kurze franxOHiHche Grammatik von H. Runge

Ivurze franzosiscbe Stilschule von Depta

Kranz. Spracbl. f. Handelssch. v. Dannbeiseer, KM'ner u. Otfenmiiller
Neue franz. Lektilre, hprausgegebenv. .Siipfle: Band 1 Dozin, La vie frani;.alse
Neues TaschenWOrterbUCh: Dentsch-lranzbsisch u. I'Vanzo-sisch-Deutsch
Italieninche kaut'm. Korresp.-Gramra. v.Danuheiseer u.Sauer. '2. Aufl.

SchlUatJcl dazu v. Dannheiaaer

II correttore italiano von Mayo-Gelati

Neuere italien. Schriftsteller, herausgeg. v. di Mayo-Gelati:

Band I Leopaidi 2 s. Rand III Giaoosa . .2 k, Band V San Giusto , ,

Band II Serao. , 2 s. Rand IV d'Annunzio 2 s. Baud VI Rapisardi , .

Anleitung zu deutscben, franz., engl. und ital. Geschafts-

briefen vou Oberholzer u. Osmond, br.

Sprichworterschatz in 4 Sprachen: DeutSCh - EngliSCh - FranzOSlSCh-

ItalienlSCb von Schwabbauser

Brazileiro, Lebr- u. Lesebucb d. portugies. Sprache f. Kaufleute v. Kilers
Spanische Handelskorreapondenz von Arteaga y Pereira , . ,
Kleine'^ spaniscbes Lesebucb f. •Ilandflsschulen v. Ferrad^.s-Lmffeheldt

Kleme Parallel-Worlerbiicher : i.Gcrmaiiisoh2s. ii. Romanisch 2 s. iii sinwisch

Laugue allemaude par Bfcker

L'allemand idiomatique par Hennig

Correspondance cominerciale anglftitfe par Carpenter

Le danois parle par Forcbbammer

Correspondance oommerciale espagnole par Arteaga y Pereira

Lengua alemana de Becker

Correspondencia comercial inglesa por Carpenter

The Publisher is untiringly eng.Hged iu extending the range of educational works is^'
from his Press. A number of new books are now In course of preparation,
The new editions are eonstnut' '

-J=aT^J■ . .i.i_n_JU Ld H.te .

Cornell University Library

PC 5067.E97

Portuguese conversation-grammar.

3 1924 026 577 472